Cat. No. W235-E1-5
SYSMAC
C200HS
Programmable Controllers
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C200HS Programmable Controllers
Operation Manual
Revised February 2002
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam-
age to property.
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
!
!
!
WARNING
Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers
to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for any-
thing else.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation
of the product.
1, 2, 3... 1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
OMRON, 1994
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permis-
sion of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the informa-
tion contained in this publication.
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About this Manual:
This manual describes the operation of the C200HS C-series Programmable Controllers, and it includes
the sections described below. Installation information is provided in the C200HS Programmable Control-
ler Installation Guide. A table of other manuals that can be used in conjunction with this manual is provided
in Section 1 Introduction. Provided in Section 2 Hardware Considerations is a description of the differ-
ences between the older CPUs and the new CPUs described in this manual.
Please read this manual completely and be sure you understand the information provided before attempt-
ing to operate the C200HS. Be sure to read the precautions in the following section.
Section 1 Introduction explains the background and some of the basic terms used in ladder-diagram
programming. It also provides an overview of the process of programming and operating a PC and ex-
plains basic terminology used with OMRON PCs. Descriptions of Peripheral Devices used with the
C200HS PCs and a table of other manuals available to use with this manual for special PC applications
are also provided.
Section 2 Hardware Considerations explains basic aspects of the overall PC configuration and de-
scribes the indicators that are referred to in other sections of this manual.
Section 3 Memory Areas takes a look at the way memory is divided and allocated and explains the infor-
mation provided there to aid in programming. It explains how I/O is managed in memory and how bits in
memory correspond to specific I/O points. It also provides information on System DM, a special area in
C200HS PCs that provides the user with flexible control of PC operating parameters.
Section 4 Writing and Entering Programs explains the basics of ladder-diagram programming, looking
at the elements that make up the parts of a ladder-diagram program and explaining how execution of this
program is controlled. It also explains how to convert ladder diagrams into mnemonic code so that the
programs can be entered using a Programming Console.
Section 5 Instruction Set describes all of the instructions used in programming.
Section 6 Program Execution Timing explains the cycling process used to execute the program and
tells how to coordinate inputs and outputs so that they occur at the proper times.
Section 7 Program Debugging and Execution explains the Programming Console procedures used to
input and debug the program and to monitor and control operation.
Section 8 Communications provides an overview of the communications features provided by the
C200HS.
Section 9 Memory Cassette Operations describes how to manage both UM Area and IOM data via
Memory Cassettes. mounted in the CPU.
Section 10 Troubleshooting provides information on error indications and other means of reducing down-
time. Information in this section is also useful when debugging programs.
Section 11 Host Link Commands explains the methods and procedures for using host link commands,
which can be used for host link communications via the C200HS ports.
The Appendices provide tables of standard OMRON products available for the C200HS PCs, reference
tables of instructions and Programming Console operations, coding sheet to help in programming and
parameter input, and other information helpful in PC operation.
!
WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each
section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section
and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1 – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 The Origins of PC Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 PC Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4 OMRON Product Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5 Overview of PC Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6 Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7 Available Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8 New C200HS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1 CPU Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 PC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3 CPU Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4 Memory Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5 Installing Memory Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6 CPU DIP Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Data Area Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 IR (Internal Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 SR (Special Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of contents
First Cycle Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock Pulse Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 AR (Auxiliary Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error History Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 DM (Data Memory) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7 HR (Holding Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8 TC (Timer/Counter) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9 LR (Link Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10 UM Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11 TR (Temporary Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1 Basic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 Instruction Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 Program Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 Basic Ladder Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 The Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of contents
4-6 Preparation for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8 Controlling Bit Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9 Work Bits (Internal Relays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10 Programming Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11 Program Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 5 – Instruction Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5-1 Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Instruction Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Data Areas, Definer Values, and Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Differentiated Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5 Expansion Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 Coding Right-hand Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7 Instruction Set Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8 Ladder Diagram Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9 Bit Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12 END – END(01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13 NO OPERATION – NOP(00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14 Timer and Counter Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of contents
5-15 Data Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16 Data Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17 Data Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18 Data Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19 BCD Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of contents
5-20 Binary Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21 Special Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22 Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23 Subroutines and Interrupt Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24 Step Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25 Special Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26 Network Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27 Serial Communications Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of contents
5-28 Advanced I/O Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1 Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Calculating Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Instruction Execution Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 I/O Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1 Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NT Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1 Memory Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2 Memory Cassette Settings and Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3 UM Area Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-4 IOM Area Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of contents
SECTION 10 – Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
10-1 Alarm Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2 Programmed Alarms and Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3 Reading and Clearing Errors and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5 Error Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-6 Host Link Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1 Communications Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2 Command and Response Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3 Host Link Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-11 PV WRITE –– WC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-15 SV READ 1 –– R# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-16 SV READ 2 –– R$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-17 SV READ 3 –– R% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-24 FORCED SET –– KS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-29 TEST–– TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-34 ABORT –– XZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-35 INITIALIZE –– :: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4 Host Link Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of contents
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
A – Standard Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C – Error and Arithmetic Flag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E – PC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G – Program Coding Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H – Data Conversion Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I – Extended ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Controller (PC) and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the PC. You must read
this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a PC system.
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Environment Precautions
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowl-
edge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications
described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual
or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement
machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that
may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult
your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the
systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating OMRON PCs.
Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this
manual close at hand for reference during operation.
WARNING It is extremely important that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified
purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can
directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PC System to the abovementioned
applications.
!
3
4
Safety Precautions
WARNING Never attempt to disassemble any Units while power is being supplied. Doing so
!
may result in serious electrical shock or electrocution.
WARNING Never touch any of the terminals while power is being supplied. Doing so may
!
result in serious electrical shock or electrocution.
Operating Environment Precautions
Do not operate the control system in the following places.
• Where the PC is exposed to direct sunlight.
• Where the ambient temperature is below 0°C or over 55°C.
• Where the PC may be affected by condensation due to radical temperature
changes.
• Where the ambient humidity is below 10% or over 90%.
• Where there is any corrosive or inflammable gas.
• Where there is excessive dust, saline air, or metal powder.
• Where the PC is affected by vibration or shock.
• Where any water, oil, or chemical may splash on the PC.
xiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Application Precautions
Caution The operating environment of the PC System can have a large effect on the lon-
gevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can lead to
malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PC System. Be
sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installa-
tion and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system.
!
5
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PC.
WARNING Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly
!
fatal injury. Always heed these precautions.
• Always ground the system to 100 Ω or less when installing the system to pro-
tect against electrical shock.
• Always turn off the power supply to the PC before attempting any of the follow-
ing. Performing any of the following with the power supply turned on may lead
to electrical shock:
• Mounting or dismounting Power Supply Units, I/O Units, CPU Units,
Memory Units, or any other Units.
• Assembling any devices or racks.
• Connecting or disconnecting any cables or wiring.
Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation or the
PC or the system or could damage the PC or PC Units. Always heed these pre-
cautions.
!
• Use the Units only with the power supplies and voltages specified in the opera-
tion manuals. Other power supplies and voltages may damage the Units.
• Take measures to stabilize the power supply to conform to the rated supply if it
is not stable.
• Provide circuit breakers and other safety measures to provide protection
against shorts in external wiring.
• Do not apply voltages exceeding the rated input voltage to Input Units. The
Input Units may be destroyed.
• Do not apply voltages exceeding the maximum switching capacity to Output
Units. The Output Units may be destroyed.
• Always disconnect the LG terminal when performing withstand voltage tests.
• Install all Units according to instructions in the operation manuals. Improper
installation may cause faulty operation.
• Provide proper shielding when installing in the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other sources of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radiation.
• Locations near to power supply lines.
• Be sure to tighten Backplane screws, terminal screws, and cable connector
screws securely.
• Do not attempt to take any Units apart, to repair any Units, or to modify any
Units in any way.
! Caution The following precautions are necessary to ensure the general safety of the sys-
tem. Always heed these precautions.
• Provide double safety mechanisms to handle incorrect signals that can be
generated by broken signal lines or momentary power interruptions.
• Provide external interlock circuits, limit circuits, and other safety circuits in
addition to any provided within the PC to ensure safety.
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Conformance to EC Directives
Section 6
6
Conformance to EC Directives
Observe the following precautions when installing the C200HS-CPU01-EC and
C200HS-CPU21-EC that conform to the EC Directives.
Provide reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power source con-
nected to the DC I/O Unit and for the Power Supply Unit.
Use a separate power source for the DC I/O Unit from the external power supply
for the Relay Output Unit.
xvi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 1
Introduction
This section gives a brief overview of the history of Programmable Controllers and explains terms commonly used in ladder-
diagram programming. It also provides an overview of the process of programming and operating a PC and explains basic
terminology used with OMRON PCs. Descriptions of peripheral devices used with the C200HS, a table of other manuals
available to use with this manual for special PC applications, and a description of the new features of the C200HS are also
provided.
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Origins of PC Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OMRON Product Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Available Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New C200HS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Origins of PC Logic
1-1 Overview
A PC (Programmable Controller) is basically a CPU (Central Processing Unit)
containing a program and connected to input and output (I/O) devices. The pro-
gram controls the PC so that when an input signal from an input device turns ON,
the appropriate response is made. The response normally involves turning ON
an output signal to some sort of output device. The input devices could be photo-
electric sensors, pushbuttons on control panels, limit switches, or any other de-
vice that can produce a signal that can be input into the PC. The output devices
could be solenoids, switches activating indicator lamps, relays turning on mo-
tors, or any other devices that can be activated by signals output from the PC.
For example, a sensor detecting a passing product turns ON an input to the PC.
The PC responds by turning ON an output that activates a pusher that pushes
the product onto another conveyor for further processing. Another sensor, posi-
tioned higher than the first, turns ON a different input to indicate that the product
is too tall. The PC responds by turning on another pusher positioned before the
pusher mentioned above to push the too-tall product into a rejection box.
Although this example involves only two inputs and two outputs, it is typical of the
type of control operation that PCs can achieve. Actually even this example is
much more complex than it may at first appear because of the timing that would
be required, i.e., “How does the PC know when to activate each pusher?” Much
more complicated operations, however, are also possible. The problem is how
to get the desired control signals from available inputs at appropriate times.
To achieve proper control, the C200HS uses a form of PC logic called ladder-dia-
gram programming. This manual is written to explain ladder-diagram program-
ming and to prepare the reader to program and operate the C200HS.
1-2 The Origins of PC Logic
PCs historically originate in relay-based control systems. And although the inte-
grated circuits and internal logic of the PC have taken the place of the discrete
relays, timers, counters, and other such devices, actual PC operation proceeds
as if those discrete devices were still in place. PC control, however, also pro-
vides computer capabilities and accuracy to achieve a great deal more flexibility
and reliability than is possible with relays.
The symbols and other control concepts used to describe PC operation also
come from relay-based control and form the basis of the ladder-diagram pro-
gramming method. Most of the terms used to describe these symbols and con-
cepts, however, have come in from computer terminology.
Relay vs. PC Terminology
The terminology used throughout this manual is somewhat different from relay
terminology, but the concepts are the same.
The following table shows the relationship between relay terms and the PC
terms used for OMRON PCs.
Relay term
contact
PC equivalent
input or condition
coil
output or work bit
NO relay
NC relay
normally open condition
normally closed condition
Actually there is not a total equivalence between these terms. The term condi-
tion is only used to describe ladder diagram programs in general and is specifi-
cally equivalent to one of certain set of basic instructions. The terms input and
output are not used in programming per se, except in reference to I/O bits that
are assigned to input and output signals coming into and leaving the PC. Nor-
Ladder Diagrams.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OMRON Product Terminology
1-3 PC Terminology
Although also provided in the Glossary at the back of this manual, the following
terms are crucial to understanding PC operation and are thus explained here.
PC
Because the C200HS is a Rack PC, there is no one product that is a C200HS
PC. That is why we talk about the configuration of the PC, because a PC is a
configuration of smaller Units.
To have a functional PC, you would need to have a CPU Rack with at least one
Unit mounted to it that provides I/O points. When we refer to the PC, however, we
are generally talking about the CPU and all of the Units directly controlled by it
through the program. This does not include the I/O devices connected to PC in-
puts and outputs.
If you are not familiar with the terms used above to describe a PC, refer to Sec-
tion 2 Hardware Considerations for explanations.
Inputs and Outputs
A device connected to the PC that sends a signal to the PC is called an input
device; the signal it sends is called an input signal. A signal enters the PC
through terminals or through pins on a connector on a Unit. The place where a
signal enters the PC is called an input point. This input point is allocated a loca-
tion in memory that reflects its status, i.e., either ON or OFF. This memory loca-
tion is called an input bit. The CPU, in its normal processing cycle, monitors the
status of all input points and turns ON or OFF corresponding input bits accord-
ingly.
There are also output bits in memory that are allocated to output points on
Units through which output signals are sent to output devices, i.e., an output
bit is turned ON to send a signal to an output device through an output point. The
CPU periodically turns output points ON or OFF according to the status of the
output bits.
These terms are used when describing different aspects of PC operation. When
programming, one is concerned with what information is held in memory, and so
I/O bits are referred to. When talking about the Units that connect the PC to the
controlled system and the places on these Units where signals enter and leave
the PC, I/O points are referred to. When wiring these I/O points, the physical
counterparts of the I/O points, either terminals or connector pins, are referred to.
When talking about the signals that enter or leave the PC, one refers to input
signals and output signals, or sometimes just inputs and outputs. It all depends
on what aspect of PC operation is being talked about.
Controlled System and
Control System
The Control System includes the PC and all I/O devices it uses to control an ex-
ternal system. A sensor that provides information to achieve control is an input
device that is clearly part of the Control System. The controlled system is the
external system that is being controlled by the PC program through these I/O
devices. I/O devices can sometimes be considered part of the controlled sys-
tem, e.g., a motor used to drive a conveyor belt.
1-4 OMRON Product Terminology
OMRON products are divided into several functional groups that have generic
names. Appendix A Standard Models list products according to these groups.
The term Unit is used to refer to all of the OMRON PC products. Although a Unit
is any one of the building blocks that goes together to form a C200HS PC, its
meaning is generally, but not always, limited in context to refer to the Units that
are mounted to a Rack. Most, but not all, of these products have names that end
with the word Unit.
The largest group of OMRON products is the I/O Units. These include all of the
Rack-mounting Units that provide non-dedicated input or output points for gen-
eral use. I/O Units come with a variety of point connections and specifications.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of PC Operation
High-density I/O Units are designed to provide high-density I/O capability and
include Group 2 High-density I/O Units and Special I/O High-density I/O Units.
Special I/O Units are dedicated Units that are designed to meet specific needs.
These include some of the High-density I/O Units, Position Control Units, High-
speed Counter Units, and Analog I/O Units.
Link Units are used to create Link Systems that link more than one PC or link a
single PC to remote I/O points. Link Units include Remote I/O Units, PC Link
Units, Host Link Units, SYSMAC NET Link Units, and SYSMAC LINK Units.
SYSMAC NET Link and SYSMAC LINK Units can be used with the CPU11 only.
Other product groups include Programming Devices, Peripheral Devices,
and DIN Rail Products.
1-5 Overview of PC Operation
The following are the basic steps involved in programming and operating a
C200HS. Assuming you have already purchased one or more of these PCs, you
must have a reasonable idea of the required information for steps one and two,
which are discussed briefly below. This manual is written to explain steps three
through six, eight, and nine. The relevant sections of this manual that provide
more information are listed with each of these steps.
1, 2, 3...
1. Determine what the controlled system must do, in what order, and at what
times.
2. Determine what Racks and what Units will be required. Refer to the C200HS
Installation Guide. If a Link System is required, refer to the appropriate Sys-
tem Manual.
3. On paper, assign all input and output devices to I/O points on Units and de-
termine which I/O bits will be allocated to each. If the PC includes Special I/O
Units or Link Systems, refer to the individual Operation Manuals or System
4. Using relay ladder symbols, write a program that represents the sequence
of required operations and their inter-relationships. Be sure to also program
appropriate responses for all possible emergency situations. (Section 4
gram Execution Timing)
5. Input the program and all required operating parameters into the PC. (Sec-
6. Debug the program, first to eliminate any syntax errors, and then to find ex-
ecution errors. (Section 4-7 Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Pro-
Troubleshooting)
7. Wire the PC to the controlled system. This step can actually be started as
soon as step 3 has been completed. Refer to the C200HS Installation Guide
and to Operation Manuals and System Manuals for details on individual
Units.
8. Test the program in an actual control situation and carry out fine tuning as
Troubleshooting)
9. Record two copies of the finished program on masters and store them safely
in different locations. (Section 4-7 Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the
Program)
Control System Design
Designing the Control System is the first step in automating any process. A PC
can be programmed and operated only after the overall Control System is fully
understood. Designing the Control System requires, first of all, a thorough un-
derstanding of the system that is to be controlled. The first step in designing a
Control System is thus determining the requirements of the controlled system.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available Manuals
Input/Output Requirements The first thing that must be assessed is the number of input and output points
that the controlled system will require. This is done by identifying each device
that is to send an input signal to the PC or which is to receive an output signal
from the PC. Keep in mind that the number of I/O points available depends on
the allocation of I/O bits to I/O points.
Sequence, Timing, and
Relationships
Next, determine the sequence in which control operations are to occur and the
relative timing of the operations. Identify the physical relationships between the
I/O devices as well as the kinds of responses that should occur between them.
For instance, a photoelectric switch might be functionally tied to a motor by way
of a counter within the PC. When the PC receives an input from a start switch, it
could start the motor. The PC could then stop the motor when the counter has
received a specified number of input signals from the photoelectric switch.
Each of the related tasks must be similarly determined, from the beginning of the
control operation to the end.
Unit Requirements
The actual Units that will be mounted or connected to PC Racks must be deter-
mined according to the requirements of the I/O devices. Actual hardware specifi-
cations, such as voltage and current levels, as well as functional considerations,
such as those that require Special I/O Units or Link Systems will need to be con-
sidered. In many cases, Special I/O Units, Intelligent I/O Units, or Link Systems
can greatly reduce the programming burden. Details on these Units and Link
Systems are available in appropriate Operation Manuals and System Manuals.
Once the entire Control System has been designed, the task of programming,
debugging, and operation as described in the remaining sections of this manual
can begin.
1-6 Peripheral Devices
The following peripheral devices can be used in programming, either to input/
debug/monitor the PC program or to interface the PC to external devices to out-
put the program or memory area data. Model numbers for all devices listed be-
low are provided in Appendix A Standard Models. OMRON product names have
been placed in bold when introduced in the following descriptions.
Programming Console
A Programming Console is the simplest form of programming device for OM-
RON PCs. All Programming Consoles are connected directly to the CPU without
requiring a separate interface.
Ladder Support Software:
LSS
LSS is designed to run on IBM AT/XT compatibles and allows you to perform all
the operations of the Programming Console as well as many additional ones. PC
programs can be written on-screen in ladder-diagram form as well as in mne-
monic form. As the program is written, it is displayed on a display, making confir-
mation and modification quick and easy. Syntax checks may also be performed
on the programs before they are downloaded to the PC.
The LSS is available on either 5” or 3.5” disks.
A computer running the LSS is connected to the C200HS via the Peripheral Port
on the CPU using the CQM1-CIF02 cable.
1-7 Available Manuals
The following table lists other manuals that may be required to program and/or
operate the C200HS. Operation Manuals and/or Operation Guides are also pro-
vided with individual Units and are required for wiring and other specifications.
Name
GPC Operation Manual
Cat. No.
W84
Contents
Programming procedures for the GPC
(Graphics Programming Console)
FIT Operation Manual
W150
Programming procedures for using the FIT
(Factory Intelligent Terminal
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
New C200HS Features
Name
Cat. No.
W247/W248
W173
Contents
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manuals
Data Access Console Operation Guide
Programming procedures for using the SSS
Data area monitoring and data modification
procedures for the Data Access Console
Printer Interface Unit Operation Guide
PROM Writer Operation Guide
W107
W155
W119
W120
Procedures for interfacing a PC to a printer
Procedures for writing programs to EPROM chips
Procedures for interfacing PCs to floppy disk drives
Floppy Disk Interface Unit Operation Guide
Wired Remote I/O System Manual
(SYSMAC BUS)
Information on building a Wired Remote I/O System
to enable remote I/O capability
Optical Remote I/O System Manual
(SYSMAC BUS)
W136
W135
W143
W114
Information on building an Optical Remote I/O
System to enable remote I/O capability
PC Link System Manual
Information on building a PC Link System to
automatically transfer data between PCs
Host Link System Manual
(SYSMAC WAY)
Information on building a Host Link System to
manage PCs from a ‘host’ computer
SYSMAC NET Link Unit Operation Manual
Information on building a SYSMAC NET Link
System and thus create an optical LAN integrating
PCs with computers and other peripheral devices
SYSMAC LINK System Manual
W174
Information on building a SYSMAC LINK System to
enable automatic data transfer, programming, and
programmed data transfer between the PCs in the
System
High-speed Counter Unit Operation Manual
Position Control Unit Operation Manuals
W141
Information on High-speed Counter Unit
NC111: W137 Information on Position Control Unit
NC112: W128
NC211: W166
Analog I/O Units Operation Guide
W127
Information on the C200H-AD001, C200H-DA001
Analog I/O Units
Analog Input Unit Operation Manual
Temperature Sensor Unit Operation Guide
ASCII Unit Operation Manual
W229
W124
W165
W153
W172
W208
W210
Information on the C200H-AD002 Analog Input Unit
Information on Temperature Sensor Unit
Information on ASCII Unit
ID Sensor Unit Operation Guide
Information on ID Sensor Unit
Information on Voice Unit
Voice Unit Operation Manual
Fuzzy Logic Unit Operation Manual
Fuzzy Support Software Operation Manual
Information on Fuzzy Logic Unit
Information on the Fuzzy Support Software which
supports the Fuzzy Logic Units
Temperature Control Unit Operation Manual
W225
W240
Information on Temperature Control Unit
Heat/Cool Temperature Control Unit Operation
Manual
Information on Heating and Cooling Temperature
Control Unit
PID Control Unit Operation Manual
W241
W224
Information on PID Control Unit
Cam Positioner Unit Operation Manual
Information on Cam Positioner Unit
1-8 New C200HS Features
The C200HS CPUs (C200HS-CPU01-E, C200HS-CPU03-E, C200HS-
CPU21-E, C200HS-CPU23-E, C200HS-CPU31-E, and C200HS-CPU33-E)
have a number of new features that the C200H CPUs lacked. The new C200HS
features are described briefly in this section. The C200HS-CPU01-E, C200HS-
CPU21-E, C200HS-CPU31-E use an AC power supply and the C200HS-
CPU03-E, C200HS-CPU23-E, and C200HS-CPU33-E use DC.
In addition, the C200HS-CPU21-E, C200HS-CPU23-E, C200HS-CPU31-E,
and C200HS-CPU33-E CPUs have an RS-232C connector. The C200HS-
CPU31-E and C200HS-CPU33-E CPUs support the SYSMAC NET Link Unit
and SYSMAC LINK Unit.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
New C200HS Features
1-8-1 Improved Memory Capabilities
Internal Memory (UM)
The C200HS CPUs come equipped with 16 KW of RAM in the PC itself, so a very
large memory capacity is available without purchasing a separate Memory Unit.
Furthermore, the Ladder Program Area has been increased to 15.2 KW.
Memory Cassettes
Two types of Memory Cassettes are available for storage of data such as the
program. The PC can be set to transfer data from the Memory Cassette to UM
automatically when the PC is turned on.
Model
Specifications
C200HS-ME16K
C200HS-MP16K
16-K Word EEPROM
16-K Word EPROM
Note C200H Memory Cassettes cannot be used in the C200HS.
Clock Function
The C200HS CPUs have a built-in clock. It is not necessary to purchase a
Memory Unit equipped with a clock, as it was with the C200H-CPU21-E.
Increased SR Area
In addition to the conventional areas of the C200H, the following areas have
been added for the internal auxiliary relays and special auxiliary relays of the
C200H. The SR area has been increased substantially to provide more work
words and words dedicated to new instructions. The SR area now ranges from
SR 236 to SR 299. (The SR area ends at SR 255 in C200H CPUs.) By using
additional areas, the user can use Special I/O Units and Remote I/O Units with-
out worrying the empty areas.
Conventional areas
IR Area 1 (without I/O area):
SR Area 1:
IR 030 to 235
SR 236 to 255
Additional areas
IR Area 2:
SR Area 2:
IR 300 to 511
SR 256 to 299
The number of operands and instruction execution time will be increased when
SR 256 to SR 511 are used in basic instructions.
Increased DM Area
The Read/Write DM area has been increased substantially, too. It now ranges
from DM 0000 to DM 6143, compared to DM 0000 to DM 0999 in C200H CPUs.
The 6000 words from DM 0000 to DM 5999 are available for use in the program.
(DM 6000 to DM 6143 are used for the History Log and other functions.)
Fixed DM and Expansion
DM Areas
The Fixed DM Area, used to store initializing data for Special I/O Units, has been
decreased in size. It now contains the 512 words from DM 6144 to DM 6655,
compared to 1000 words (DM 1000 to DM 1999) in C200H CPUs.
On the other hand, up to 3000 words of UM can be allocated as expansion DM.
Expansion DM is allocated in 1000-word units in DM 7000 to DM 9999.
C200H data stored in words DM 1000 to DM 1999 can be used in C200HS PCs
by converting these 1000 words to ROM in the C200HS’s DM area (DM 7000 to
DM 7999) and then automatically transferring them to DM 1000 to DM 1999
when the C200HS is turned on.
1-8-2 Faster Execution Times
Instruction Execution Time
Basic instructions in the C200HS are executed in !2 of the time required in the
C200H. Other instructions are executed in just !4 of the time.
END Processing Time
The time required for the cycle’s overhead processes depend on the system
configuration, but these processes are executed in about !4 of the time required
in the C200H.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
New C200HS Features
I/O Refreshing Time
The I/O refreshing time has been reduced for all units, as shown in the following
table.
I/O Unit
Standard I/O Units
Time Required for Refreshing
!3 of the C200H I/O refreshing time
!3 of the C200H I/O refreshing time
$5 of the C200H I/O refreshing time
Group-2 High-density I/O Units
Special I/O Units
1-8-3 Larger Instruction Set
Advanced programming is facilitated by the 225 application instructions avail-
able with the C200HS-CPU01-E, C200HS-CPU03-E, C200HS-CPU21-E, and
C200HS-CPU23-E, or the 229 application instructions available with the
C200HS-CPU31-E and C200HS-CPU33-E. In addition, programming has been
simplified by the addition of convenient instructions and macro functions. The
Improved Instructions
Additional functions have been added to the 7 instructions in the following table.
Instruction
DIST(80)
COLL(81)
MLPX(76)
DMPX(77)
ADB(50)
Additional Function(s)
Stack operation. The stack can contain up to 999 words.
FIFO/LIFO stack operation. The stack can contain up to 999 words.
4-to-256 decoder capability.
256-to-8 encoder capability.
Signed binary data can be added.
SBB(51)
Signed binary data can be subtracted.
INT(89)
Can be used to set scheduled interrupts in 1 ms units and control
input interrupts.
Expansion Instructions
New Instructions
A group of 47 instructions have been designated as expansion instructions. An
expansion instruction does not have a fixed function code; one of the 18 expan-
sion instruction function codes must be assigned to it before it can be used in a
program. An instructions tables, which allocates functions codes to expansion
instructions, must be transferred to the C200HS before the expansion instruc-
tions can be used.
A total of 36 new instructions have been added to the C200HS. These instruc-
tions are listed below. (Instructions with (--) for function codes are expansion
instructions, which do not have fixed function codes. Some expansion instruc-
tion do have default function codes. The SET and RESET instructions are basic
instructions, MACRO and TRACE MEMORY SAMPLE instructions are applied
instructions, and the other instructions are expansion applied instructions. A de-
fault function number is assigned to the TOTALIZING TIMER, TRANSFER
BITS, AREA RANGE COMPARE, MACRO, AND TRACE MEMORY SAMPLE
instructions.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
New C200HS Features
TRSM(45) TRACE MEMORY SAMPLE
MCRO(99) MACRO
MBS(--)
DBS(--)
FCS(--)
SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
FRAME CHECKSUM
MAX(--)
MIN(--)
SUM(--)
FIND MAXIMUM
FIND MINIMUM
SUM
7SEG(--) 7-SEGMENT DISPLAY OUTPUT
RXD(--)
TXD(--)
CPS(--)
RECEIVE
TRANSMIT
SIGNED BINARY COMPARE
SRCH(--) DATA SEARCH
FPD(--)
PID(--)
HEX(--)
FAILURE POINT DETECTION
PID CONTROL
ASCII TO HEX
CPSL(--) SIGNED DOUBLE BINARY COMPARE
NEG(--) 2’S COMPLEMENT
XDMR(--) EXPANSION DM READ
NEGL(--) DOUBLE 2’S COMPLEMENT
DSW(--)
TKY(--)
MTR(--)
HKY(--)
DIGITAL SWITCH INPUT
TEN-KEY INPUT
MATRIX INPUT
ZCPL(--) DOUBLE AREA RANGE COMPARE
AVG(--)
SCL(--)
SET
AVERAGE VALUE
SCALE
SET
16-KEY INPUT
ADBL(--) DOUBLE BINARY ADD
RSET
RESET
SBBL(--) DOUBLE BINARY SUBTRACT
MBSL(--) DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
DBSL(--) DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
TTIM(87) TOTALIZING TIMER
XFRB(62) TRANSFER BITS
ZCP(88)
AREA RANGE COMPARE
1-8-4 Wide Selection of Special I/O Units
C200HS Systems can be configured in a variety of ways, using High-density I/O
Units, High-speed Counters, Position Control Units, Analog I/O Units, Tempera-
ture Sensor Units, ASCII Units, Voice Units, ID Sensor Units, Fuzzy Logic Units,
Cam Positioner Units, and so on.
1-8-5 Improved Interrupt Functions
Scheduled Interrupts
The C200HS’s scheduled interrupt function has been improved so that the inter-
rupt interval can be set in 1 ms units rather than the 10 ms units in the C200H.
When the interrupt mode is set to C200HS mode, the interrupt response time is
only 1 ms max. (excluding the input ON/OFF delays). When a Communications
Unit is used with the C200HS-CPU31-E/CPU33-E CPU, the interrupt response
time is 10 ms max.
Input Interrupts
Up to 8 interrupt subroutines can be executed by inputs to a C200HS-INT01 In-
terrupt Input Unit mounted to the C200HS. When the interrupt mode is set to
C200HS mode, the interrupt response time is only 1 ms max. (excluding the in-
put ON/OFF delays). When a Communications Unit is used with the C200HS-
CPU31-E/CPU33-E CPU, the interrupt response time is 10 ms max.
1-8-6 SYSMAC NET Link and SYSMAC LINK Capabilities
The SYSMAC NET Link and SYSMAC LINK Systems are high-speed FA net-
works which can be used with the C200HS-CPU31-E and C200HS-CPU33-E
CPUs and the following Units:
SYSMAC NET Link Unit:
SYSMAC LINK Units:
C200HS-SNT32
C200HS-SLK12 (optical fiber cable)
C200HS-SLK22 (coaxial cable)
Data can be exchanged with the PCs in a SYSMAC NET Link or SYSMAC LINK
System using the SEND and RECV instructions.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
New C200HS Features
1-8-7 Built-in RS-232C Connector
Host link communications are possible using the RS-232C connector built into
the C200HS-CPU21-E/CPU23-E/CPU31-E/CPU33-E CPU. By using the TXD
and RXD instructions, RS-232C communications is possible without using time-
consuming procedures. A 1-to-1 link using the LR Area or an NT link with the
Programmable Terminal (PT) allows high-speed communications.
1-8-8 More Flexible PC Settings
With its default settings, the C200HS can be used like a C200H PC, but the
C200HS’s new settings provide more flexibility and allow it to be adjusted to fit
particular applications. These new settings are described below.
DIP Switch Settings
UM Area Allocation
PC Setup
The 6 pins on the C200HS’s DIP switch are used to write-protect part of UM, set
the CPU to automatically transfer Memory Card data to UM, and other functions.
Portions of the UM area can be allocated for use as the Expansion DM Area and
I/O Comment Area. (Most of the UM area is used to store the ladder program.)
DM 6600 to DM 6655 is set aside for PC Setup data. The PC Setup determines
many operating parameters, including the startup mode and initial Special I/O
Unit area.
1-8-9 Debugging and Maintenance
Data Trace
A data trace function has been added, allowing bit status or word content to be
traced in real time.
Differential Monitor
The C200HS supports differential monitoring from either the Programming Con-
sole or LSS. The operator can detect OFF-to-ON or ON-to-OFF transition in a
specified bit.
Error Log Area
The C200HS supports all of the C200H-CPU31-E error history area functions
and also records the time and date of power interruptions. The C200HS’s error
log area is DM 6000 to DM 6030 (not DM 0969 to DM 0999 as in the C200H-
CPU31-E).
1-8-10 New Programming Console Operations
The following Programming Console operations are supported by the C200HS
in addition to those supported by the C200H.
• Constants can be input in decimal form.
• Monitor displays can be switched between hexadecimal and normal or long
decimal form.
• OFF to ON and ON to OFF transitions in bit status can be monitored (differen-
tial monitoring).
• Function codes can be allocated to expansion instructions and current func-
tion code allocations can be read.
• UM area allocations can be set.
• The clock in the C200HS can be read and set.
• In addition to the TERMINAL mode supported in the C200H, the C200HS has
an EXTENDED TERMINAL mode in which all of the Programming Console’s
keys can be used to the status of Key Bits.
• The memory clear operation has been separated into an operation to clear the
user program excluding I/O comments and UM area allocation information,
and one to clear the user program, I/O comments , and UM area allocation in-
formation.
1-8-11 Peripheral Devices
Peripheral Device
Connection
With the C200H a Peripheral Device had to be connected through a Peripheral
Interface Unit or Host Link Unit, but with the C200HS Peripheral Devices can be
connected to the PC through a CQM1-CIF02 Connecting Cable.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
New C200HS Features
I/O Comments Stored in PC By allocating a part of UM as the I/O Comment area, it is no longer necessary to
read I/O Comments from a Peripheral Device’s floppy disk. If the Peripheral De-
vice is connected to the C200HS online, the ladder diagram can be viewed with
I/O comments.
Online Editing
A “CYCLE TIME OVER” error will no longer be generated when the program in
the PC itself is being edited online.
1-8-12 Using C200H Programs
Programs developed for the C200H can be very easily transferred for use in the
C200HS. This section provides the steps necessary to achieve this. Two proce-
dures are provided: one for transferring using only internal CPU memory and
one for transferring via Memory Cassettes.
Detailed procedures for the individual steps involved in transferring programs
can be found in the Version-3 LSS Operation Manuals. You will also require a
CQM1-CIF02 Connecting Cable to connect the computer running LSS to the
C200HS.
Precautions
Observe the following precautions when transferring C200H programs to the
C200HS.
• If a C200H program including the SET SYSTEM instruction (SYS(49)) is trans-
ferred to the C200HS, the operating parameters set by this instruction will be
transferred to the C200HS’s PC Setup area (DM 6600, DM 6601, and
DM 6655) and overwrite any current settings. Be sure to confirm that the set-
tings in these words are correct before using the C200HS after program trans-
fer.
• If the C200H program accesses the C200H’s error log in DM 0969 to DM 0999,
the addresses of the words being accessed must be changed to DM 6000 to
DM 6030, which is the error log area for the C200HS.
• Any programs that rely on the execution cycle time (i.e., on the time require to
execute any one part of all of the program) must be adjusted when used on the
C200HS, which provides a much faster cycle time.
Using Internal Memory
The following procedure outlines the steps to transfer C200H programs to the
user memory inside the C200HS.
1, 2, 3...
1. Transfer the program and any other required data to the LSS work area. This
data can be transferred from a C200H CPU, from floppy disk, or from a
C200HS Memory Unit.
To transfer from a C200H CPU, set the PC for the LSS to the C200H, con-
nect the LSS to the C200H, go online, and transfer the program and any oth-
er require data to the LSS work area. You will probably want to transfer DM
data and the I/O table, if you have created an I/O table for the C200H.
or To transfer from floppy disk, set the PC for the LSS to the C200H in the offline
mode and load the program and any other require data to the LSS work
area. You will probably want to load DM data and the I/O table, if you have
created an I/O table for the C200H.
or To transfer from a C200H-MP831, set the PC for the LSS to the C200H in the
offline mode and read data from the Memory Unit into the LSS work area.
2. Go offline if the LSS is not already offline.
3. Change the PC setting for the LSS to the C200HS.
4. If you want to transfer I/O comments together with the program to the
C200HS, allocate UM area for I/O comments.
5. Connect the LSS to the C200HS and go online.
6. Make sure that pin 1 on the C200HS’s CPU is OFF to enable writing to the
UM area.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
New C200HS Features
7. Transfer the program and and any other require data to the C200HS. You
will probably want to transfer DM data and the I/O table, if you have created
an I/O table for the C200H.
8. Turn the C200HS off and then back on to reset it.
9. Test program execution before attempting actual operation.
Using Memory Cassettes
The following procedure outlines the steps to transfer C200H programs to the
C200HS via EEPROM or EPROM Memory Cassettes. This will allow you to read
the program data from the Memory Cassette automatically at C200HS startup.
The first four steps of this procedure is the same as those used for transferring
directly to the C200HS’s internal memory (UM area).
1, 2, 3...
1. Transfer the program and any other required data to the LSS work area. This
data can be transferred from a C200H CPU, from floppy disk, or from a
C200HS Memory Unit.
To transfer from a C200H CPU, set the PC for the LSS to the C200H, con-
nect the LSS to the C200H, go online, and transfer the program and any oth-
er require data to the LSS work area. You will probably want to transfer DM
data and the I/O table, if you have created an I/O table for the C200H.
or To transfer from floppy disk, set the PC for the LSS to the C200H in the offline
mode and load the program and any other require data to the LSS work
area. You will probably want to load DM data and the I/O table, if you have
created an I/O table for the C200H.
or To transfer from a C200H-MP831, set the PC for the LSS to the C200H in the
offline mode and read data from the Memory Unit into the LSS work area.
2. Go offline if the LSS is not already offline.
3. Change the PC setting for the LSS to the C200HS.
4. If you want to transfer I/O comments together with the program to the
C200HS, allocate UM area for I/O comments.
5. Allocate expansion DM words DM 7000 to DM 7999 in the UM area using the
UM allocation operation from the LSS.
6. Copy DM 1000 through DM 1999 to DM 7000 through DM 7999.
7. Write “0100” to DM 6602 to automatically transfer the contents of DM 7000
through DM 7999 to DM 1000 through DM 1999 at startup.
8. To transfer to an EEPROM Memory Cassette, use the following procedure.
a) Connect the LSS to the C200HS and go online.
b) Make sure that pin 1 on the C200HS’s CPU is OFF to enable writing to
the UM area.
c) Transfer the program and any other require data to the C200HS. You will
probably want to transfer DM data and the I/O table, if you have created
an I/O table for the C200H. Make sure you specify transfer of the Expan-
sion DM Area and, if desired, the I/O Comment Area.
d) Turn ON SR 27000 from the LSS to transfer UM data to the Memory Cas-
or To transfer to an EPROM Memory Cassette, use the following procedure.
a) Connect an PROM Writer to the LSS and write the data to the EPROM
chip using the LSS EPROM writing operation.
e) Set the ROM type selector on the Memory Cassette to the correct capac-
ity.
f) Mount the ROM chip to the Memory Cassette.
g) Mount a EPROM Memory Cassette to the C200HS.
9. Turn ON pin 2 on the C200HS’s DIP switch to enable automatic transfer of
Memory Cassette data to the CPU at startup.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
New C200HS Features
10. Turn the C200HS off and then back on to reset it and transfer data from the
Memory Cassette to the CPU.
11. Test program execution before attempting actual operation.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 2
Hardware Considerations
This section provides information on hardware aspects of the C200HS that are relevant to programming and software opera-
tion. These include CPU Components, basic PC configuration, CPU capabilities, and Memory Cassettes. This information is
covered in detail in the C200HS Installation Guide.
CPU Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Memory Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CPU Components
2-1 CPU Components
There are two groups of CPUs available, one that uses an AC power supply, and
one that uses a DC power supply. Select one of the models shown below accord-
ing to requirements of your control system.
CPU model
Power supply voltage
C200HS-CPU01-E/CPU21-E/CPU31-E
100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC
(voltage selector)
C200HS-CPU03-E/CPU23-E/CPU33-E
24 VDC
The CPU21-E, CPU23-E, CPU31-E, and CPU33-E CPUs have an RS-232C
connector. The CPU31-E and CPU33-E CPUs support the SYSMAC NET Link
Unit and SYSMAC LINK Unit.
Caution Be sure to check the power supply used by the CPU. Absolutely do not provide an AC power sup-
!
ply to a DC-type CPU.
The following diagram shows the main CPU components.
Power fuse (MF51NR, 5.2 dia. x 20 mm)
C200HS-CPU01-E: 2 A, 250 V
C200HS-CPU03-E: 5 A, 125 V
Indicators
Removable terminal block
Battery/switch compartment
The backup lithium battery (C200H-BAT09)
and the DIP switch for setting C200HS opera-
tions are contained. An optional Memory Cas-
sette can also be mounted.
Cable connector for Peripheral Devices
(Peripheral port)
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CPU Components
C200HS-CPU21-E/CPU23-E/CPU31-E/CPU33-E
Power fuse (MF51NR, 5.2 dia. x 20 mm):
C200HS-CPU21-E/CPU31-E: 2 A, 250 V
C200HS-CPU23-E/CPU33-E: 5 A, 125 V
Indicators
Memory Casette compartment
Bus connector:
Available only with the CPU31-E
and CPU33-E. Use this connector
when SYSMAC NET Link Unit or
SYSMAC LINK Unit is used.
Removable terminal block
RS-232C
connector
Cable connector for
peripheral devices
Battery/Switch compartment
2-1-1 CPU Indicators
CPU indicators provide visual information on the general operation of the PC.
Although not substitutes for proper error programming using the flags and other
error indicators provided in the data areas of memory, these indicators provide
ready confirmation of proper operation.
CPU Indicators
CPU indicators are shown and described below. (CPU01-E/03-E shown below.)
COMM/COMM1 (orange):
Lights when a peripheral device is in operation.
COMM2 (orange):
Available only with the CPU21-E, CPU23-E, CPU31-E,
and CPU33-E. Lights when the CPU is communicating
RUN indicator (green)
Lights when the PC is
operating normally.
via the RS-232C connector.
POWER (green)
Lights when power is
supplied to the CPU.
COMM
OUT INHIBIT (red)
Lights when the Load OFF
flag (SR bit 25215) turns ON,
at which time all the outputs
are turned OFF.
ALM (blinking red)
Blinks if an error occurs that
does not stop the CPU.
ERR (solid red)
Lights if an error occurs that stops the
CPU, at which time the RUN indicator
turns OFF and the outputs are turned
OFF.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PC Configuration
2-1-2 Peripheral Device Connection
A Programming Console or IBM PC/AT running LSS can be used to program
and monitor the C200HS PCs.
Programming Console
A C200H-PR027-E or CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console can be con-
nected as shown in the following diagram. The C200H-PR027-E is connected
via the C200H-CN222 or C200H-CN422 Programming Console Connecting
Cable, which must be purchased separately. A Connecting Cable is provided
with the CQM1-PRO01-E.
nnecting Cable
Programming Console
IBM PC/AT with LSS
An IBM PC/AT or compatible computer can be connected as shown in the follow-
ing diagram. The LSS is available on either 3.5” disks (C500-SF312-EV3) or
5.25” disks (C500-SF711-EV3). Only version 3 or later of the LSS supports
C200HS functionality.
Connecting Cable
(CQM1-CIF02)
IBM PC/AT
2-2 PC Configuration
The basic PC configuration consists of two types of Rack: a CPU Rack and Ex-
pansion I/O Racks. The Expansion I/O Racks are not a required part of the basic
system. They are used to increase the number of I/O points. An illustration of
can be used when the PC is provided with a Remote I/O System.
CPU Racks
A C200HS CPU Rack consists of three components: (1) The CPU Backplane, to
which the CPU and other Units are mounted. (2) The CPU, which executes the
program and controls the PC. (3) Other Units, such as I/O Units, Special I/O
Units, and Link Units, which provide the physical I/O terminals corresponding to
I/O points.
A C200HS CPU Rack can be used alone or it can be connected to other Racks to
provide additional I/O points. The CPU Rack provides three, five, eight, or ten
slots to which these other Units can be mounted depending on the backplane
used.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CPU Capabilities
Expansion I/O Racks
An Expansion I/O Rack can be thought of as an extension of the PC because it
provides additional slots to which other Units can be mounted. It is built onto an
Expansion I/O Backplane to which a Power Supply and up to ten other Units are
mounted.
An Expansion I/O Rack is always connected to the CPU via the connectors on
the Backplanes, allowing communication between the two Racks. Up to two Ex-
pansion I/O Racks can be connected in series to the CPU Rack.
Unit Mounting Position
Only I/O Units and Special I/O Units can be mounted to Slave Racks. All I/O
Units, Special I/O Units, Group-2 High-density I/O Units, Remote I/O Master
Units, PC and Host Link Units, can be mounted to any slot on all other Racks.
Interrupt Input Units must be mounted to C200H-BCjj1-V2 Backplanes.
Refer to the C200HS Installation Guide for details about which slots can be used
for which Units and other details about PC configuration. The way in which I/O
2-3 CPU Capabilities
The following tables compare the capabilities of C200H and C200HS CPUs.
C200H
Function
C200H
CPU21-E
CPU23-E
CPU31-E
Built-in clock/calendar
Error log
No (see note)
No (see note)
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Data Trace
No
Differential Monitor
Expansion DM
General-use DM
Ladder Program capacity
SR Area
No
No
No
No
1000 words
970 words
6974 words (in Memory Unit)
SR 236 to SR 255
New instructions:
36 new instructions.)
No
No
AC
No
No
DC
No
Network Instructions:
NETWORK SEND - SEND(90)
NETWORK RECEIVE - RECV(98)
Yes
Power Supply
AC
Note The C200H-CPU21-E/CPU23-E can use the C200H-MR433/MR833/
ME432/ME832 Memory Units’ clock.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Cassettes
C200HS
Function
C200HS
CPU01-E CPU21-E CPU31-E CPU03-E CPU23-E CPU33-E
Built-in clock/calendar
Error log
Yes
1
Yes
Data Trace
Yes
Yes
Differential Monitor
Expansion DM
General-use DM
Ladder Program capacity
SR Area
2
3K words max.
6K words
2
15.2K words max
SR 236 to SR 255 and SR 256 to SR 299
Yes
New instructions:
36 new instructions.)
Network Instructions:
NETWORK SEND - SEND(90)
NETWORK RECEIVE - RECV(98)
No
AC
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Power Supply
DC
Note 1. The C200HS CPUs record the time and date of power interruptions.
2. Part of the 16K-word UM can be allocated to Expansion DM and I/O com-
ments.
2-4 Memory Cassettes
The C200HS comes equipped with a built-in RAM for the user’s program, so a
normal program be created even without installing a Memory Cassette. An op-
tional Memory Cassette, however, can be used. There are two types of Memory
Cassette available, each with a capacity of 16K words. For instructions on instal-
The following table shows the Memory Cassettes which can be used with the
C200HS PCs. These Memory Cassettes cannot be used in C200H PCs.
Memory
EEPROM
EPROM
Capacity
Model number
Comments
16K words C200HS-ME16K ---
16K words C200HS-MP16K The EPROM chip is not included
with the Memory Cassette; it must
be purchased separately.
Note Memory Cassettes for the C200HS cannot be used with the C200H, and
Memory Units for the C200H cannot be used with the C200HS.
C200HS-MEj16K
(EEPROM)
When a Memory Cassette is installed in the CPU, reading and writing of the
user memory (UM) and I/O data is made possible. There is no need for a
backup power supply. The Memory Cassette can be removed from the CPU
and used for storing data.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing Memory Cassettes
C200HS-MPj16K (EPROM) The program is written using a PROM Writer. The ROM is mounted to the
Memory Casette and then installed in the CPU. I/O data cannot be stored.
Notch
2-5 Installing Memory Cassettes
An optional Memory Cassette can be installed in the C200HS. (The C200H
Memory Unit cannot be used with the C200HS.) The two types of Memory Cas-
follow the procedure outlined below.
Caution Be careful to always turn the power off before inserting or removing a Memory Cassette. If a
Memory Cassette is inserted into or removed from the CPU with the power on, it may cause the
CPU to malfunction or cause damage to the memory.
!
1, 2, 3...
1. Set the DIP switch. For an EEPROM Memory Cassette, set pin no. 1 (write
protect) to either ON or OFF. Setting it to ON will protect the program in the
memory from being overwritten. Setting it to OFF will allow the program to
be overwritten. (The factory setting is OFF.)
For an EPROM Memory Cassette, set pin no. 1 (ROM Type Selector) ac-
cording to the type of ROM that is to be mounted.
Pin no. 1
OFF
ROM type
27256
Model
Capacity
16K words
32K words*
Access speed
150 ns
ROM-JD-B
ROM-KD-B
ON
27512
150 ns
Note *Only 16K words accessible.
2. Write to EPROM (if using an EPROM Memory Cassette). Using a PROM
Writer, write the program to EPROM. Then mount the EPROM chip to the
Memory Cassette, with the notched end facing upwards as shown in the il-
lustration below.
Notch
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing Memory Cassettes
3. Remove the bracket from the Memory Cassette, as shown in the illustration
below.
Metal bracket
4. Check that the connector side goes in first and that the Cassette’s circuit
components face right and then insert the Cassette into the CPU. The Cas-
sette slides in along a track in the CPU.
5. Replace the Memory Cassette bracket over the Cassette and tighten the
screw that holds the bracket.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CPU DIP Switch
2-6 CPU DIP Switch
The DIP switch on C200HS CPUs is located between the Memory Cassette
compartment and battery.
The 6 pins on the DIP switch control 6 of the CPU’s operating parameters.
Pin no.
Item
Memory protect
Setting
Function
1
ON
Program Memory and read-only DM (DM 6144 to DM 6655)
data cannot be overwritten from a Peripheral Device.
OFF
ON
Program Memory and read-only DM (DM 6144 to DM 6655)
data can be overwritten from a Peripheral Device.
2
3
Automatic transfer of Memory
Cassette contents
The contents of the Memory Cassette will be automatically
transferred to the internal RAM at start-up.
OFF
ON
The contents will not be automatically transferred.
Message language
Programming Console messages will be displayed in English.
OFF
Programming Console messages will be displayed in the
language stored in system ROM. (Messages will be displayed
in Japanese with the Japanese version of system ROM.)
4
5
Expansion instruction setting
Communications parameters
ON
Expansion instructions set by user. Normally ON when using a
host computer for programming/monitoring.
OFF
ON
Expansion instructions set to defaults.
Standard communications parameters (see note) will be set for
the following serial communications ports.
• Built-in RS-232C port
• Peripheral port (only when a CQM1-CIF01/-CIF02 Cable is
connected. Does not apply to Programming Console.)
Note
1. Standard communications parameters are as fol-
lows:
Serial communications mode: Host Link or peripher-
al bus; start bits: 1; data length: 7 bits; parity: even;
stop bits: 2; baud rate: 9,600 bps
2. The CX-Programmer running on a personal comput-
er can be connected to the peripheral port via the pe-
ripheral bus using the above standard communica-
tions parameters.
OFF
The communications parameters for the following serial
communications ports will be set in PC Setup as follows:
• Built-in RS-232C port: DM 6645 and DM 6646
• Peripheral port: DM 6650 and DM 6651
Note When the CX-Programmer is connected to the peripheral
port with the peripheral bus, either set bits 00 to 03 of DM
6650 to 0 Hex (for standard parameters), or set bits 12 to
15 of DM 6650 to 0 Hex and bits 00 to 03 of DM 6650 to 1
Hex (for Host Link or peripheral bus) separately.
6
Expansion TERMINAL mode
setting when AR 0709 is ON
ON
Expansion TERMINAL mode; AR 0712 ON.
Normal mode; AR 0712: OFF
OFF
Note The above settings apply to CPUs manufactured from July 1995 (lot number **75 for July 1995). For CPUs
manufactured before July 1995 (lot number **65 for June 1995), only 1 stop bit will be set and the baud rate
will be 2,400 bps.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 3
Memory Areas
Various types of data are required to achieve effective and correct control. To facilitate managing this data, the PC is provided
with various memory areas for data, each of which performs a different function. The areas generally accessible by the user
for use in programming are classified as data areas. The other memory area is the UM Area, where the user’s program is
actually stored. This section describes these areas individually and provides information that will be necessary to use them. As
a matter of convention, the TR area is described in this section, even though it is not strictly a memory area.
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Area Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IR (Internal Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SR (Special Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSMAC NET/SYSMAC LINK System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forced Status Hold Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Status Hold Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAL (Failure Alarm) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Battery Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cycle Time Error Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Verification Error Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First Cycle Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock Pulse Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arithmetic Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupt Subroutine Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peripheral Port Communications Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Cassette Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Transfer Error Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Error Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Save Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Error Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC Setup Error Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AR (Auxiliary Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group-2 Error Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSMAC LINK System Data Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error History Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Node Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calendar/Clock Area and Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TERMINAL Mode Key Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power OFF Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cycle Time Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link Unit Mounted Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU-mounting Device Mounted Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FPD Trigger Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Tracing Flags and Control Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DM (Data Memory) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special I/O Unit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error History Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HR (Holding Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TC (Timer/Counter) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LR (Link Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UM Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TR (Temporary Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
3-1 Introduction
Details, including the name, size, and range of each area are summarized in the
following table. Data and memory areas are normally referred to by their acro-
nyms, e.g., the IR Area, the SR Area, etc.
Area
Size
Range
Comments
I/O Area
480 bits
IR 000 to IR 029
I/O words are allocated to the CPU Rack and
Expansion I/O Racks by slot position.
1
Group-2 High-density
I/O Unit and B7A
320 bits
IR 030 to IR 049
Allocated to Group-2 High-density I/O Units and
to Group-2 B7A Interface Units 0 to 9
1
Interface Unit Area
1
SYSMAC BUS Area
Special I/O Unit Area
800 bits
IR 050 to IR 099
IR 100 to IR 199
IR 200 to IR 231
Allocated to Remote I/O Slave Racks 0 to 4.
1
1,600 bits
Allocated to Special I/O Units 0 to 9.
Optical I/O Unit and I/O 512 bits
Terminal Area
Allocated to Optical I/O Units and I/O
1
Terminals.
Work Area 1
64 bits
IR 232 to IR 235
For use as work bits in the program.
Special Relay Area 1
312 bits
SR 23600 to SR
25507
Contains system clocks, flags, control bits, and
status information.
Special Relay Area 2
704 bits
SR 256 to SR 299
(298 to 299 reserved
by system)
Contains flags, control bits, and status informa-
tion.
Macro Area
Work Area 2
64 bits
SR 290 to SR 293
SR 294 to SR 297
IR 300 to IR 511
TR 00 to TR 07
Inputs
64 bits
Outputs
3,392 bits
For use as work bits in the program.
Temporary Relay Area 8 bits
Used to temporarily store and retrieve execution
conditions when programming certain types of
branching ladder diagrams.
Holding Relay Area
Auxiliary Relay Area
1,600 bits
HR 00 to HR 99
AR 00 to AR 27
Used to store data and to retain the data values
when the power to the PC is turned off.
448 buts
Contains flags and bits for special functions. Re-
tains status during power failure.
1
Link Relay Area
1,024 bits
LR 00 to LR 63
Used for data links in the PC Link System.
Timer/Counter Area
512 counters/
timers
TC 000 to TC 511
Used to define timers and counters, and to
access completion flags, PV, and SV.
Interval timers 0 through 2 and high-speed
counters 0 through 2 provided in separate area.
TIM 000 through TIM 015 can be refreshed via
interrupt processing as high-speed timers.
Data Memory Area
6,144 words
DM 0000 to DM 6143 Read/Write
DM 0000 to DM 0999 Normal DM.
DM 1000 to DM 1999 Special I/O Unit Area
DM 2000 to DM 5999 Normal DM.
DM 6000 to DM 6030 History Log
1,000 words
2
1,000 words
4,000 words
31 words
(44 words)
DM 6100 to DM 6143 Link test area (reserved)
DM 6144 to DM 6599 Fixed DM Area (read only)
DM 6600 to DM 6655 PC Setup
Fixed DM Area
512 words
56 words
Expansion DM Area
3,000 words max.
DM 7000 to DM 9999 Read only
Note 1. These can be used as work words and bits when not used for their allocated
purposes.
2. The PC Setup can be set to use DM 7000 through DM 7999 as the Special
I/O Area.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Area Structure
Work Bits and Words
When some bits and words in certain data areas are not being used for their in-
tended purpose, they can be used in programming as required to control other
bits. Words and bits available for use in this fashion are called work words and
work bits. Most, but not all, unused bits can be used as work bits. Those that can
be used are described area-by-area in the remainder of this section. Actual ap-
plication of work bits and work words is described in Section 4 Writing and Input-
ting the Program.
Flags and Control Bits
Some data areas contain flags and/or control bits. Flags are bits that are auto-
matically turned ON and OFF to indicate particular operation status. Although
some flags can be turned ON and OFF by the user, most flags are read only; they
cannot be controlled directly.
Control bits are bits turned ON and OFF by the user to control specific aspects of
operation. Any bit given a name using the word bit rather than the word flag is a
control bit, e.g., Restart bits are control bits.
3-2 Data Area Structure
When designating a data area, the acronym for the area is always required for
any but the IR and SR areas. Although the acronyms for the IR and SR areas are
often given for clarity in text explanations, they are not required, and not entered,
when programming. Any data area designation without an acronym is assumed
to be in either the IR or SR area. Because IR and SR addresses run consecu-
tively, the word or bit addresses are sufficient to differentiate these two areas.
An actual data location within any data area but the TC area is designated by its
address. The address designates the bit or word within the area where the de-
sired data is located. The TC area consists of TC numbers, each of which is used
formation on their application.
The rest of the data areas (i.e., the IR, SR, HR, DM, AR, and LR areas) consist of
words, each of which consists of 16 bits numbered 00 through 15 from right to
left. IR words 000 and 001 are shown below with bit numbers. Here, the content
of each word is shown as all zeros. Bit 00 is called the rightmost bit; bit 15, the
leftmost bit.
The term least significant bit is often used for rightmost bit; the term most signifi-
cant bit, for leftmost bit. These terms are not used in this manual because a
single data word is often split into two or more parts, with each part used for dif-
ferent parameters or operands. When this is done, the rightmost bits of a word
may actually become the most significant bits, i.e., the leftmost bits in another
word,when combined with other bits to form a new word.
Bit number
IR word 000
IR word 001
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The DM area is accessible by word only; you cannot designate an individual bit
within a DM word. Data in the IR, SR, HR, AR, and LR areas is accessible either
by word or by bit, depending on the instruction in which the data is being used.
To designate one of these areas by word, all that is necessary is the acronym (if
required) and the two-, three-, or four-digit word address. To designate an area
by bit, the word address is combined with the bit number as a single four- or five-
digit address. The following table show examples of this. The two rightmost dig-
its of a bit designation must indicate a bit between 00 and 15, i.e., the rightmost
digit must be 5 or less the next digit to the left, either 0 or 1.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Area Structure
The same TC number can be used to designate either the present value (PV) of
the timer or counter, or a bit that functions as the Completion Flag for the timer or
Area
Word designation
Bit designation
00015 (leftmost bit in word 000)
25200 (rightmost bit in word 252)
Not possible
IR
000
252
SR
DM
TC
LR
DM 1250
TC 215 (designates PV)
LR 12
TC 215 (designates completion flag)
LR 1200
Data Structure
Word data input as decimal values is stored in binary-coded decimal (BCD);
word data entered as hexadecimal is stored in binary form. Each four bits of a
word represents one digit, either a hexadecimal or decimal digit, numerically
equivalent to the value of the binary bits. One word of data thus contains four
digits, which are numbered from right to left. These digit numbers and the corre-
sponding bit numbers for one word are shown below.
Digit number
3
2
1
0
Bit number
Contents
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
When referring to the entire word, the digit numbered 0 is called the rightmost
digit; the one numbered 3, the leftmost digit.
When inputting data into data areas, it must be input in the proper form for the
intended purpose. This is no problem when designating individual bits, which
are merely turned ON (equivalent to a binary value of 1) or OFF (a binary value of
0). When inputting word data, however, it is important to input it either as decimal
or as hexadecimal, depending on what is called for by the instruction it is to be
quired for an instruction.
Converting Different Forms Binary and hexadecimal can be easily converted back and forth because each
of Data
four bits of a binary number is numerically equivalent to one digit of a hexadeci-
mal number. The binary number 0101111101011111 is converted to hexadeci-
mal by considering each set of four bits in order from the right. Binary 1111 is
hexadecimal F; binary 0101 is hexadecimal 5. The hexadecimal equivalent
3
2
would thus be 5F5F, or 24,415 in decimal (16 x 5 + 16 x 15 + 16 x 5 + 15).
Decimal and BCD are easily converted back and forth. In this case, each BCD
digit (i.e., each group of four BCD bits) is numerically equivalent of the corre-
sponding decimal digit. The BCD bits 0101011101010111 are converted to deci-
mal by considering each four bits from the right. Binary 0101 is decimal 5; binary
0111 is decimal 7. The decimal equivalent would thus be 5,757. Note that this is
not the same numeric value as the hexadecimal equivalent of
0101011101010111, which would be 5,757 hexadecimal, or 22,359 in decimal
3
2
(16 x 5 + 16 x 7 + 16 x 5 + 7).
Because the numeric equivalent of each four BCD binary bits must be numeri-
cally equivalent to a decimal value, any four bit combination numerically greater
then 9 cannot be used, e.g., 1011 is not allowed because it is numerically equiva-
lent to 11, which cannot be expressed as a single digit in decimal notation. The
binary bits 1011 are of course allowed in hexadecimal are a equivalent to the
hexadecimal digit C.
There are instructions provided to convert data either direction between BCD
equivalents to hexadecimal and BCD digits are provided in the appendices for
reference.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Area Structure
Decimal Points
Decimal points are used in timers only. The least significant digit represents
tenths of a second. All arithmetic instructions operate on integers only.
Signed and Unsigned Binary Data
This section explains signed and unsigned binary data formats. Many instruc-
tions can use either signed or unsigned data and a few (CPS(––), CPSL(––),
DBS(––), DBSL(––), MBS(––), and MBSL(––)) use signed data exclusively.
Unsigned binary
Unsigned binary is the standard format used in OMRON PCs. Data in this manu-
al are unsigned unless otherwise stated. Unsigned binary values are always
positive and range from 0 ($0000) to 65,535 ($FFFF). Eight-digit values range
from 0 ($0000 0000) to 4,294,967,295 ($FFFF FFFF).
3
2
1
0
Digit value
16
16
16
16
Bit number
Contents
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Signed Binary
Signed binary data can have either a positive and negative value. The sign is
indicated by the status of bit 15. If bit 15 is OFF, the number is positive and if bit 15
is ON, the number is negative. Positive signed binary values range from 0
($0000) to 32,767 ($7FFF), and negative signed binary values range from
–32,768 ($8000) to –1 ($FFFF).
Sign indicator
Digit value
3
2
1
0
16
16
16
16
Bit number
Contents
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Eight-digit positive values range from 0 ($0000 0000) to 2,147,483,647 ($7FFF
FFFF), and eight-digit negative values range from –2,147,483,648 ($8000
0000) to –1 ($FFFF FFFF).
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Area Structure
The following table shows the corresponding decimal, 16-bit hexadecimal, and
32-bit hexadecimal values.
Decimal
2147483647
16-bit Hex
–––
32-bit Hex
7FFFFFFF
7FFFFFFE
2147483646
–––
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
32768
–––
00008000
32767
32766
7FFF
7FFE
00007FFF
00007FFE
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
1
0
–1
–2
0002
0001
0000
FFFF
FFFE
00000002
00000001
00000000
FFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFE
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
–32767
–32768
–32769
8001
8000
–––
FFFF8001
FFFF8000
FFFF7FFF
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
–2147483647
–2147483648
–––
–––
80000001
80000000
Converting Decimal to
Signed Binary
Positive signed binary data is identical to unsigned binary data (up to 32,767)
and can be converted using BIN(100). The following procedure converts nega-
tive decimal values between –32,768 and –1 to signed binary. In this example
–12345 is converted to CFC7.
1. First take the absolute value (12345) and convert to unsigned binary:
Bit number
Contents
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
2. Next take the complement:
Bit number
Contents
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
3. Finally add one:
Bit number
Contents
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
Reverse the procedure to convert negative signed binary data to decimal.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IR Area
3-3 IR (Internal Relay) Area
The IR area is used both as data to control I/O points, and as work bits to manipu-
late and store data internally. It is accessible both by bit and by word. In the
C200HS PC, the IR area is comprised of words 000 to 235 and 298 to 511.
Words in the IR area that are used to control I/O points are called I/O words. Bits
in I/O words are called I/O bits. Bits in the IR area which are not assigned as I/O
bits can be used as work bits. IR area work bits are reset when power is inter-
rupted or PC operation is stopped.
I/O Words
If a Unit brings inputs into the PC, the bit assigned to it is an input bit; if the Unit
sends an output from the PC, the bit is an output bit. To turn on an output, the
output bit assigned to it must be turned ON. When an input turns on, the input bit
assigned to it also turns ON. These facts can be used in the program to access
input status and control output status through I/O bits.
Input Bit Usage
Output Bit Usage
Input bits can be used to directly input external signals to the PC and can be used
in any order in programming. Each input bit can also be used in as many instruc-
tions as required to achieve effective and proper control. They cannot be used in
instructions that control bit status, e.g., the OUTPUT, DIFFERENTIATION UP,
and KEEP instructions.
Output bits are used to output program execution results and can be used in any
order in programming. Because outputs are refreshed only once during each
cycle (i.e., once each time the program is executed), any output bit can be used
in only one instruction that controls its status, including OUT, KEEP(11),
DIFU(13), DIFD(14) and SFT(10). If an output bit is used in more than one such
instruction, only the status determined by the last instruction will actually be out-
put from the PC.
‘bit-control’ instructions.
Word Allocation for Racks
I/O words are allocated to the CPU Rack and Expansion I/O Racks by slot posi-
tion. One I/O word is allocated to each slot, as shown in the following table. Since
each slot is allocated only one I/O word, a 3-slot rack uses only the first 3 words,
a 5-slot rack uses only the first 5 words, and an 8-slot rack uses only the first 8
words. Words that are allocated to unused or nonexistent slots are available as
work words.
← Left side of rack
Right side of a 10-slot rack →
Rack
Slot 1
IR 000
IR 010
IR 020
Slot 2
IR 001
IR 011
IR 021
Slot 3
IR 002
IR 012
IR 022
Slot 4
IR 003
IR 013
IR 023
Slot 5
IR 004
IR 014
IR 024
Slot 6
IR 005
IR 015
IR 025
Slot 7
IR 006
IR 016
IR 026
Slot 8
IR 007
IR 017
IR 027
Slot 9
IR 008
IR 018
IR 028
Slot 10
IR 009
IR 019
IR 029
CPU
st
1
2
Expansion
Expansion
nd
Unused Words
Any words allocated to a Unit that does not use them can be used in program-
ming as work words and bits. Units that do not used the words assigned to the
slot they are mounted to include Link Units (e.g., Host Link Units, PC Link Units,
SYSMAC NET Link Units, etc.), Remote I/O Master Units, Special I/O Units,
Group-2 High-density I/O Units, Group-2 B7A Interface Units, and Auxiliary
Power Supply Units.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IR Area
Allocation for Special I/O
Units and Slave Racks
Up to ten Special I/O Units may be mounted in any slot of the CPU Rack or Ex-
pansion I/O Racks. Up to five Slave Racks may be used, whether one or two
Masters are used. IR area words are allocated to Special I/O Units and Slave
Racks by the unit number on the Unit, as shown in the following tables.
Special I/O Units
Slave Racks
Unit number IR address Unit number IR address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
100 to 109
110 to 119
120 to 129
130 to 139
140 to 149
150 to 159
160 to 169
170 to 179
180 to 189
190 to 199
0
1
2
3
4
050 to 059
060 to 069
070 to 079
080 to 089
090 to 099
The C500-RT001/002-(P)V1 Remote I/O Slave Rack may be used, but it re-
quires 20 I/O words, not 10, and therefore occupies the I/O words allocated to 2
C200H Slave Racks, both the words allocated to the unit number set on the rack
and the words allocated to the following unit number. When using a C200HS
CPU, do not set the unit number on a C500 Slave Rack to 4, because there is no
unit number 5. I/O words are allocated only to installed Units, from left to right,
and not to slots as in the C200HS system.
Allocation for Optical I/O
Units and I/O Terminals
I/O words between IR 200 and IR 231 are allocated to Optical I/O Units and I/O
Terminals by unit number. The I/O word allocated to each Unit is IR 200+n,
where n is the unit number set on the Unit.
Allocation for Remote I/O
Master and Link Units
Remote Master I/O Units and Host Link Units do not use I/O words, and the PC
Link Units use the LR area, so words allocated to the slots in which these Units
are mounted are available as work words.
Bit Allocation for I/O Units
An I/O Unit may require anywhere from 8 to 16 bits, depending on the model.
With most I/O Units, any bits not used for input or output are available as work
bits. Transistor Output Units C200H-OD213 and C200H-OD411, as well as Triac
Output Unit C200H-OA221, however, uses bit 08 for the Blown Fuse Flag. Tran-
sistor Output Unit C200H-OD214 uses bits 08 to 11 for the Alarm Flag. Bits 08 to
15 of any word allocated to these Units, therefore, cannot be used as work bits.
Bit Allocation for Interrupt
Input Units
The Interrupt Input Unit uses the 8 bits of the first I/O word allocated to its slot in
the CPU Rack. (An Interrupt Input Unit will operate as a normal Input Unit when
installed in an Expansion I/O Rack.) The other 24 bits allocated to its slot in the
CPU Rack can be used as work bits.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SR Area
Allocation for Group-2
High-density I/O Units and
B7 Interface Units
Group-2 High-density I/O Units and B7A Interface Units are allocated words be-
tween IR 030 and IR 049 according to I/O number settings made on them and do
not use the words allocated to the slots in which they are mounted. For 32-point
Units, each Unit is allocated two words; for 64-point Units, each Unit is allocated
four words. The words allocated for each I/O number are in the following tables.
Any words or part of words not used for I/O can be used as work words or bits in
programming.
32-point Units
64-point Units
I/O number
I/O number
Words
IR 30 to IR 31
IR 32 to IR 33
IR 34 to IR 35
IR 36 to IR 37
IR 38 to IR 39
IR 40 to IR 41
IR 42 to IR 43
IR 44 to IR 45
IR 46 to IR 47
IR 48 to IR 49
Words
IR 30 to IR 33
IR 32 to IR 35
IR 34 to IR 37
IR 36 to IR 39
IR 38 to IR 41
IR 40 to IR 43
IR 42 to IR 45
IR 44 to IR 47
IR 46 to IR 49
Cannot be used.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
When setting I/O numbers on the High-density I/O Units and B7A Interface
Units, be sure that the settings will not cause the same words to be allocated to
more than one Unit. For example, if I/O number 0 is allocated to a 64-point Unit,
I/O number 1 cannot be used for any Unit in the system.
Group-2 High-density I/O Units and B7A Interface Units are not considered Spe-
cial I/O Units and do not affect the limit to the number of Special I/O Units allowed
in the System, regardless of the number used.
The words allocated to Group-2 High-density I/O Units correspond to the con-
nectors on the Units as shown in the following table.
Unit
32-point Units
Word
Connector/row
Row A
First
Second
First
Row B
64-point Units
CN1, row A
CN1, row B
CN2, row A
CN2, row B
Second
Third
Fourth
Note Group-2 High-density I/O Units and B7A Interface Units cannot be mounted to
Slave Racks.
3-4 SR (Special Relay) Area
The SR area contains flags and control bits used for monitoring PC operation,
accessing clock pulses, and signalling errors. SR area word addresses range
from 236 through 511; bit addresses, from 23600 through 51115.
The following table lists the functions of SR area flags and control bits. Most of
these bits are described in more detail following the table. Descriptions are in
order by bit number except that Link System bits are grouped together.
Unless otherwise stated, flags are OFF until the specified condition arises, when
they are turned ON. Restart bits are usually OFF, but when the user turns one
ON then OFF, the specified Link Unit will be restarted. Other control bits are OFF
until set by the user.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SR Area
Note all SR words and bits are writeable by the user. Be sure to check the func-
tion of a bit or word before attempting to use it in programming.
Word(s)
Bit(s)
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
Function
236
Node loop status output area for operating level 0 of SYSMAC NET Link System
Node loop status output area for operating level 1 of SYSMAC NET Link System
237
Completion code output area for operating level 0 following execution of
SEND(90)/RECV(98) SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link System
08 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
Completion code output area for operating level 1 following execution of
SEND(90)/RECV(98) SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link System
238 and 241
242 and 245
Data link status output area for operating level 0 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET Link
System
Data link status output area for operating level 1 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET Link
System
246
00 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00
Reserved by system
247 and 248
PC Link Unit Run Flags for Units 16 through 31 or data link status for operating level 1
PC Link Unit Error Flags for Units 16 through 31 or data link status for operating level 1
PC Link Unit Run Flags for Units 00 through 15 or data link status for operating level 0
PC Link Unit Error Flags for Units 00 through 15 or data link status for operating level 0
Remote I/O Error Read Bit
249 and 250
251
01 and 02 Not used
Writeable
03
Remote I/O Error Flag
04 to 06
07
Unit number of Remote I/O Unit, Optical I/O Unit, or I/O Terminal with error
Not used
08 to 15
00
Word allocated to Remote I/O Unit, Optical I/O Unit, or I/O Terminal with error (BCD)
252
SEND(90)/RECV(98) Error Flag for operating level 0 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET
Link System
01
SEND(90)/RECV(98) Enable Flag for operating level 0 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET
Link System
02
03
Operating Level 0 Data Link Operating Flag
SEND(90)/RECV(98) Error Flag for operating level 1 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET
Link System
04
SEND(90)/RECV(98) Enable Flag for operating level 1 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET
Link System
05
Operating Level 1 Data Link Operating Flag
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 1 Communications Error Flag
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 1 Restart Bit
Peripheral Port Restart Bit
06
07
08
09
RS-232C Port Restart Bit
10
PC Setup Clear Bit
11
Forced Status Hold Bit
12
Data Retention Control Bit
13
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 0 Restart Bit
Not used.
14
15
Output OFF Bit
253
00 to 07
08
FAL number output area (see error information provided elsewhere)
Low Battery Flag
09
Cycle Time Error Flag
10
I/O Verification Error Flag
11
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 0 Communications Error Flag
Remote I/O Error Flag
12
13
Always ON Flag
14
Always OFF Flag
15
First Cycle Flag
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SR Area
Word(s)
Bit(s)
Function
254
00
01
1-minute clock pulse bit
0.02-second clock pulse bit
02 and 03 Reserved for function expansion. Do not use.
04
Overflow Flag (for signed binary calculations)
Underflow Flag (for signed binary calculations)
Differential Monitor End Flag
Step Flag
05
06
07
08
MTR Execution Flag
09
7SEG Execution Flag
10
DSW Execution Flag
11
Interrupt Input Unit Error Flag
Reserved by system
12
13
Interrupt Programming Error Flag
Group-2 Error Flag
14
15
Special Unit Error Flag (includes Special I/O, PC Link, Host Link, Remote I/O Master Units)
0.1-second clock pulse bit
255
00
01
0.2-second clock pulse bit
02
1.0-second clock pulse bit
03
Instruction Execution Error (ER) Flag
Carry (CY) Flag
04
05
Greater Than (GR) Flag
06
Equals (EQ) Flag
07
Less Than (LE) Flag
08 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
Reserved by system (used for TR bits)
Reserved by system
256 to 261
262
Longest interrupt subroutine (action) execution time (0.1 ms)
Number of interrupt subroutine (action) with longest execution time.
263
(8000 to 8512) 8000 to 8007, 8099
Bit 15: Interrupt Flag
00 to 03
RS-232C Port Error Code
264
0: No error
1: Parity error
2: Framing error
3: Overrun error
04
RS-232C Port Communications Error
RS-232C Port Send Ready Flag
RS-232C Port Reception Completed Flag
RS-232C Port Reception Overflow Flag
Peripheral Port Error Code in General I/O Mode
0: No error
05
06
07
08 to 11
1: Parity error
2: Framing error
3: Overrun error
F: When in Peripheral Bus Mode
12
Peripheral Port Communications Error in General I/O Mode
Peripheral Port Send Ready Flag in General I/O Mode
Peripheral Port Reception Completed Flag in General I/O Mode
Peripheral Port Reception Overflow Flag in General I/O Mode
RS-232C Port Reception Counter in General I/O Mode
Peripheral Reception Counter in General I/O Mode (BCD)
13
14
15
265
266
00 to 15
00 to 15
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SR Area
Word(s)
Bit(s)
00 to 04
05
Function
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
267
Host Link Level 0 Send Ready Flag
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
Host Link Level 1 Send Ready Flag
06 to 12
13
14 and 15 Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
268
269
00 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 10
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
Memory Cassette Contents 00: Nothing; 01: UM; 02: IOM (03: HIS)
Memory Cassette Capacity
0: 0 KW (no cassette); 3: 16 KW
11 to 13
14
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
EEPROM Memory Cassette Protected or EPROM Memory Cassette Mounted Flag
Memory Cassette Flag
15
00
Save UM to Cassette Bit
Load UM from Cassette Bit
Compare UM to Cassette Bit
Comparison Results
270
Data transferred to Memory Cassette when Bit is turned
ON in PROGRAM mode. Bit will automatically turn OFF.
An error will be produced if turned ON in any other
mode.
01
02
03
0: Contents identical; 1: Contents differ or comparison not possible
04 to 10
11
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
Transfer Error Flag:
Data will not be transferred from UM to the Memory
Cassette if an error occurs (except for Board Checksum
Error). Detailed information on checksum errors
occurring in the Memory Cassette will not be output to
SR 272 because the information is not needed. Repeat
the transmission if SR 27015 is ON.
Transferring SYSMAC NET
data link table on UM during
active data link.
12
Transfer Error Flag: Not
PROGRAM mode
13
14
Transfer Error Flag: Read Only
Transfer Error Flag: Insufficient
Capacity or No UM
15
Transfer Error Flag: Board
Checksum Error
00 to 07
Ladder program size stored in Memory Cassette
271
272
Ladder-only File: 04: 4 KW; 08: 8 KW; 12: 12 KW; ... (64: 64 KW)
00: No ladder program or no file
Data updated at data transfer from CPU at startup. The file must begin in segment 0.
Ladder program size and type in CPU (Specifications are the same as for bits 00 to 07.)
Data updated when indexes generated. Default value (after clearing memory) is 16.
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
08 to 15
00 to 10
11
Memory Error Flag: PC Setup Checksum Error
12
Memory Error Flag: Ladder Checksum Error
13
Memory Error Flag: Instruction Change Vector Area Checksum Error
Memory Error Flag: Memory Cassette Online Disconnection
Memory Error Flag: Autoboot Error
14
15
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SR Area
Word(s)
Bit(s)
Function
00
01
Save IOM to Cassette Bit
Load IOM from Cassette Bit
273
Data transferred to Memory Cassette when Bit is turned
ON in PROGRAM mode. Bit will automatically turn OFF.
An error will be produced if turned ON in any other
mode.
02 to 11
12
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
Transfer Error Flag: Not
PROGRAM mode
Data will not be transferred from IOM to the Memory
Cassette if an error occurs (except for Read Only Error).
13
14
Transfer Error Flag: Read Only
Transfer Error Flag: Insufficient
Capacity or No IOM
15
Transfer Error Flag: Checksum
Error
274
00
Special I/O Unit #0 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #1 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #2 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #3 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #4 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #5 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #6 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #7 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #8 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #9 Restart Flag
These flags will turn ON during restart processing.
These flags will not turn ON for Units on Slave Racks.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10 to 15
00
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
PC Setup Startup Error (DM 6600 to DM 6614)
PC Setup RUN Error (DM 6615 to DM 6644)
275
276
01
02
PC Setup Communications/Error Setting/Misc. Error (DM 6645 to DM 6655)
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
03 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
Minutes (00 to 59)
Hours (00 to 23)
Used for time increments.
277 to 279
280 to 289
290 to 293
294 to 297
298 to 299
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
Macro Area inputs.
Macro Area outputs.
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
3-4-1 SYSMAC NET/SYSMAC LINK System
Loop Status
SR 236 provides the local node loop status for SYSMAC NET Systems, as
shown below.
–––
Level 0
Level 1
Bit in SR 236
07 06
15 14
05
13
04
12
03
11
02
10
01
09
00
08
Status/
1
1
Central Power Supply
1
Loop Status
Reception Status
1
Meaning
0: Connected
1: Not connected
11: Normal loop
0: Reception enabled
1: Reception disabled
10: Downstream backloop
01: Upstream backloop
00: Loop error
Completion Codes
SR 23700 to SR23707 provide the SEND/RECV completion code for operating
level 0 and SR 23708 to SR 23215 provide the SEND/RECV completion code for
operating level 1. The completion codes are as given in the following tables.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SR Area
SYSMAC LINK
Code
Item
Meaning
Processing ended normally.
00
01
Normal end
Parameter error
Parameters for network communication instruction is
not within acceptable ranges.
02
03
04
Unable to send
Unit reset during command processing or local node
in not in network.
Destination not in
network
Destination node is not in network.
Busy error
The destination node is processing data and cannot
receive the command.
05
06
Response timeout
Response error
The response monitoring time was exceeded.
There was an error in the response received from
the destination node.
07
Communications
controller error
An error occurred in the communications controller.
08
09
Setting error
PC error
There is an error in the node address settings.
An error occurred in the CPU of the destination
node.
SYSMAC NET
Code
Item
Meaning
00
01
Normal end
Processing ended normally.
Parameter error
Parameters for network communication instruction is
not within acceptable ranges.
02
03
04
Routing error
Busy error
There is a mistake in the routing tables for
connection to a remote network.
The destination node is processing data and cannot
receive the command.
Send error (token
lost)
The token was not received from the Line Server.
05
06
Loop error
An error occurred in the communications loop.
No response
The destination node does not exist or the response
monitoring time was exceeded.
07
Response error
There is an error in the response format.
Data Link Status
SR 238 to SR 245 contain the data link status for SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET
Systems. The data structure depends on the system used to create the data link.
SYSMAC LINK
Bit
Operating
level 0
Operating
level 1
12 to 15
Node 4
11 to 08
Node 3
04 to 07
Node 2
00 to 03
Node 1
SR 238
SR 239
SR 240
SR 241
SR 242
SR 243
SR 244
SR 245
Node 8
Node 7
Node 6
Node 5
Node 9
Node 13
Node 12
Node 16
Node 11
Node 15
Node 10
Node 14
Leftmost bit
1: PC RUN status
Rightmost bit
1: PC CPU error
1: Communica-
tions error
1: Data link
operating
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SR Area
SYSMAC NET
Bit (Node numbers below)
10 09 08 07 06 05
Operating Operating
level 0
level 1
15
14
13
12
11
04
03
02
01
00
SR 238
SR 239
SR 240
SR 241
SR 242
SR 243
SR 244
SR 245
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
16
24
32
15
23
31
14
22
30
13
21
29
12
20
28
11
19
27
10
18
26
9
16
24
32
15
23
31
14
22
30
13
21
29
12
20
28
11
19
27
10
18
26
9
17
25
17
25
1: PC CPU error
1: PC RUN status
3-4-2 Remote I/O Systems
SR 25312 turns ON to indicate an error has occurred in Remote I/O Systems.
The ALM/ERR indicator will flash, but PC operation will continue. SR 251, as
well as AR 0014 and AR 0015, contain information on the source and type of
error. The function of each bit is described below. Refer to Optical and Wired Re-
mote I/O System Manuals for details.
Bit 00 – Error Check Bit
If there are errors in more than one Remote I/O Unit, word 251 will contain error
information for only the first one. Data for the remaining Units will be stored in
memory and can be accessed by turning the Error Check bit ON and OFF. Be
sure to record data for the first error, which will be cleared when data for the next
error is displayed.
Bits 01 and 02
Bit 03
Not used.
Remote I/O Error Flag: Bit 03 turns ON when an error has occurred in a Remote
I/O Unit.
0
1
2
Bits 04 to 15
The content of bits 04 to 06 is a 3-digit binary number (04: 2 , 05: 2 , 06: 2 ) and
0
1
the content of bits 08 to 15 is a 2-digit BCD number (08 to 11: 10 , 12 to 15: 10 ).
If the content of bits 12 through 15 is B, an error has occurred in a Remote I/O
Master or Slave Unit, and the content of bits 08 through 11 will indicate the unit
number, either 0 or 1, of the Master involved. In this case, bits 04 to 06 contain
the unit number of the Slave Rack involved.
If the content of bits 12 through 15 is a number from 0 to 31, an error has oc-
curred in an Optical I/O Unit or I/O Terminal. The number is the unit number of the
Optical I/O Unit or I/O Terminal involved, and bit 04 will be ON if the Unit is as-
signed leftmost word bits (08 through 15), and OFF if it is assigned rightmost
word bits (00 through 07).
3-4-3 Link System Flags and Control Bits
Use of the following SR bits depends on the configuration of any Link Systems to
which your PC belongs. These flags and control bits are used when Link Units,
such as PC Link Units, Remote I/O Units, or Host Link Units, are mounted to the
PC Racks or to the CPU. For additional information, consult the System Manual
for the particular Units involved.
The following bits can be employed as work bits when the PC does not belong to
the Link System associated with them.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SR Area
Host Link Systems
Both Error flags and Restart bits are provided for Host Link Systems. Error flags
turn ON to indicate errors in Host Link Units. Restart bits are turned ON and then
OFF to restart a Host Link Unit. SR bits used with Host Link Systems are summa-
rized in the following table. Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Restart bits are
not effective for the Multilevel Rack-mounting Host Link Units. Refer to the
Host Link System Manual for details.
Bit
Flag
25206
25207
25213
25311
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 1 Error Flag
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 1 Restart Bit
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 0 Restart Bit
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 0 Error Flag
PC Link Systems
PC Link Unit Error and Run When the PC belongs to a PC Link System, words 247 through 250 are used to
Flags
monitor the operating status of all PC Link Units connected to the PC Link Sys-
tem. This includes a maximum of 32 PC Link Units. If the PC is in a Multilevel PC
Link System, half of the PC Link Units will be in a PC Link Subsystem in operating
level 0; the other half, in a Subsystem in operating level 1. The actual bit assign-
ments depend on whether the PC is in a Single-level PC Link System or a Multi-
level PC Link System. Refer to the PC Link System Manual for details. Error and
Run Flag bit assignments are described below.
Bits 00 through 07 of each word are the Run flags, which are ON when the PC
Link Unit is in RUN mode. Bits 08 through 15 are the Error flags, which are ON
when an error has occurred in the PC Link Unit. The following table shows bit
assignments for Single-level and Multi-level PC Link Systems.
Single-level PC Link
Systems
Flag type
Bit no.
SR 247
Unit #24
Unit #25
Unit #26
Unit #27
Unit #28
Unit #29
Unit #30
Unit #31
Unit #24
Unit #25
Unit #26
Unit #27
Unit #28
Unit #29
Unit #30
Unit #31
SR 248
Unit #16
Unit #17
Unit #18
Unit #19
Unit #20
Unit #21
Unit #22
Unit #23
Unit #16
Unit #17
Unit #18
Unit #19
Unit #20
Unit #21
Unit #22
Unit #23
SR 249
Unit #8
SR 250
Unit #0
Run flags
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Unit #9
Unit #1
Unit #2
Unit #3
Unit #4
Unit #5
Unit #6
Unit #7
Unit #0
Unit #1
Unit #2
Unit #3
Unit #4
Unit #5
Unit #6
Unit #7
Unit #10
Unit #11
Unit #12
Unit #13
Unit #14
Unit #15
Unit #8
Error flags
Unit #9
Unit #10
Unit #11
Unit #12
Unit #13
Unit #14
Unit #15
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SR Area
Multilevel PC Link Systems
Flag type
Bit no.
SR 247
Unit #8,
level 1
SR 248
Unit #0,
level 1
SR 249
Unit #8,
level 0
SR 250
Run flags
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Unit #0,
level 0
Unit #9,
level 1
Unit #1,
level 1
Unit #9,
level 0
Unit #1,
level 0
Unit #10,
level 1
Unit #2,
level 1
Unit #10,
level 0
Unit #2,
level 0
Unit #11,
level 1
Unit #3,
level 1
Unit #11,
level 0
Unit #3,
level 0
Unit #12,
level 1
Unit #4,
level 1
Unit #12,
level 0
Unit #4,
level 0
Unit #13,
level 1
Unit #5,
level 1
Unit #13,
level 0
Unit #5,
level 0
Unit #14,
level 1
Unit #6,
level 1
Unit #14,
level 0
Unit #6,
level 0
Unit #15,
level 1
Unit #7,
level 1
Unit #15,
level 0
Unit #7,
level 0
Error flags 08
Unit #8,
level 1
Unit #0,
level 1
Unit #8,
level 0
Unit #0,
level 0
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Unit #9,
level 1
Unit #1,
level 1
Unit #9,
level 0
Unit #1,
level 0
Unit #10,
level 1
Unit #2,
level 1
Unit #10,
level 0
Unit #2,
level 0
Unit #11,
level 1
Unit #3,
level 1
Unit #11,
level 0
Unit #3,
level 0
Unit #12,
level 1
Unit #4,
level 1
Unit #12,
level 0
Unit #4,
level 0
Unit #13,
level 1
Unit #5,
level 1
Unit #13,
level 0
Unit #5,
level 0
Unit #14,
level 1
Unit #6,
level 1
Unit #14,
level 0
Unit #6,
level 0
Unit #15,
level 1
Unit #7,
level 1
Unit #15,
level 0
Unit #7,
level 0
Application Example
If the PC is in a Multilevel PC Link System and the content of word 248 is 02FF,
then PC Link Units #0 through #7 of in the PC Link Subsystem assigned operat-
ing level 1 would be in RUN mode, and PC Link Unit #1 in the same Subsystem
would have an error. The hexadecimal digits and corresponding binary bits of
word 248 would be as shown below.
Bit no.
Binary
Hex
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00
0 0 0 0
0
0 0 1 0
2
1 1 1 1
F
1 1 1 1
F
3-4-4 Forced Status Hold Bit
SR 25211 determines whether or not the status of bits that have been force-set
or force-reset is maintained when switching between PROGRAM and MONI-
TOR mode to start or stop operation. If SR 25211 is ON, bit status will be main-
tained; if SR 25211 is OFF, all bits will return to default status when operation is
started or stopped. The Forced Status Hold Bit is only effective when enabled in
the PC Setup.
The status of SR 25211 in not affected by a power interruption unless the I/O
table is registered; in that case, SR 25211 will go OFF.
SR 25211 is not effective when switching to RUN mode.
SR 25211 should be manipulated from a Peripheral Device, e.g., a Program-
ming Console or LSS.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SR Area
Maintaining Status during
Startup
The status of SR 25211 and thus the status of force-set and force-reset bits can
be maintained when power is turned off and on by enabling the Forced Status
Hold Bit in the PC Setup. If the Forced Status Hold Bit is enabled, the status of
SR 25211 will be preserved when power is turned off and on. If this is done and
SR 25211 is ON, then the status of force-set and force-reset bits will also be pre-
served, as shown in the following table.
Status before shutdown
SR 25211
Status at next startup
SR 25211 Force-set/reset bits
ON
OFF
ON
Status maintained
Reset
OFF
3-4-5 I/O Status Hold Bit
SR 25212 determines whether or not the status of IR and LR area bits is main-
tained when operation is started or stopped, when operation begins by switching
from PROGRAM mode to MONITOR or RUN modes. If SR 25212 is ON, bit sta-
tus will be maintained; if SR 25212 is OFF, all IR and LR area bits will be reset.
The I/O Status Hold Bit is effective only if enabled in the PC Setup.
The status of SR 25212 in not affected by a power interruption unless the I/O
table is registered; in that case, SR 25212 will go OFF.
SR 25212 should be manipulated from a Peripheral Device, e.g., a Program-
ming Console or LSS.
Maintaining Status during
Startup
The status of SR 25212 and thus the status of IR and LR area bits can be main-
tained when power is turned off and on by enabling the I/O Status Hold Bit in the
PC Setup. If the I/O Status Hold Bit is enabled, the status of SR 25212 will be
preserved when power is turned off and on. If this is done and SR 25212 is ON,
then the status of IR and LR area bits will also be preserved, as shown in the
following table.
Status before shutdown
SR 25212
Status at next startup
SR 25212 IR and LR bits
ON
OFF
ON
Status maintained
Reset
OFF
3-4-6 Output OFF Bit
SR bit 25215 is turned ON to turn OFF all outputs from the PC. The OUT INHIBIT
indicator on the front panel of the CPU will light. When the Output OFF Bit is OFF,
all output bits will be refreshed in the usual way.
The status of the Output OFF Bit is maintained for power interruptions or when
PC operation is stopped, unless the I/O table has been registered, or the I/O
table has been registered and either the Forced Status Hold Bit or the I/O Status
Hold Bit has not been enabled in the PC Setup.
3-4-7 FAL (Failure Alarm) Area
A 2-digit BCD FAL code is output to bits 25300 to 25307 when the FAL or FALS
instruction is executed. These codes are user defined for use in error diagnosis,
although the PC also outputs FAL codes to these bits, such as one caused by
battery voltage drop.
This area can be reset by executing the FAL instruction with an operand of 00 or
by performing a Failure Read Operation from the Programming Console.
3-4-8 Low Battery Flag
SR bit 25308 turns ON if the voltage of the CPU’s backup battery drops. The
ALM/ERR indicator on the front of the CPU will also flash.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SR Area
This bit can be programmed to activate an external warning for a low battery volt-
age.
The operation of the battery alarm can be disabled in the PC Setup if desired.
3-4-9 Cycle Time Error Flag
SR bit 25309 turns ON if the cycle time exceeds 100 ms. The ALM/ERR indicator
on the front of the CPU will also flash. Program execution will not stop, however,
unless the maximum time limit set for the watchdog timer is exceeded. Timing
may become inaccurate after the cycle time exceeds 100 ms.
3-4-10 I/O Verification Error Flag
SR bit 25310 turns ON when the Units mounted in the system disagree with the
I/O table registered in the CPU. The ALM/ERR indicator on the front of the CPU
will also flash, but PC operation will continue.
To ensure proper operation, PC operation should be stopped, Units checked,
and the I/O table corrected whenever this flag goes ON.
3-4-11 First Cycle Flag
SR bit 25315 turns ON when PC operation begins and then turns OFF after one
cycle of the program. The First Cycle Flag is useful in initializing counter values
Instructions.
3-4-12 Clock Pulse Bits
Five clock pulses are available to control program timing. Each clock pulse bit is
ON for the first half of the rated pulse time, then OFF for the second half. In other
words, each clock pulse has a duty factor of 50%.
These clock pulse bits are often used with counter instructions to create timers.
Pulse width
Bit
1 min
0.02 s
25401
0.1 s
0.2 s
1.0 s
25400
25500
25501
25502
Bit 25400
1-min clock pulse
Bit 25401
0.02-s clock pulse
30 s
.05 s
0.5 s
30 s
.01 s
.01 s
.02 s
1 min.
Bit 25500
0.1-s clock pulse
Bit 25501
0.2-s clock pulse
.05 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.2 s
Bit 25502
1.0-s clock pulse
Caution:
Because the 0.1-second and
0.02-second clock pulse bits have
ON times of 50 and 10 ms, respec-
tively, the CPU may not be able to
accurately read the pulses if pro-
gram execution time is too long.
0.5 s
1.0 s
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SR Area
3-4-13 Step Flag
SR bit 25407 turns ON for one cycle when step execution is started with the
STEP(08) instruction.
3-4-14 Group-2 Error Flag
SR bit 25414 turns ON for any of the following errors for Group-2 High-density
I/O Units and B7A Interface Units: the same I/O number set twice, the same
words allocated to more than one Unit, refresh errors. If one of these errors oc-
curs, the Unit will stop operation and the ALARM indicator will flash, but the over-
all PC will continue operation.
When the Group-2 Error Flag is ON, the number of the Unit with the error will be
provided in AR 0205 to AR 0214. If the Unit cannot be started properly even
though the I/O number is set correctly and the Unit is installed properly, a fuse
may be blown or the Unit may contain a hardware failure. If this should occur,
replace the Unit with a spare and try to start the system again.
There is also an error flag for High-density I/O Units and B7A Interface Units in
the AR area, AR 0215.
3-4-15 Special Unit Error Flag
SR bit 25415 turns ON to indicate errors in the following Units: Special I/O, PC
Link, Host Link, and Remote I/O Master Units. SR bit 25415 will turn ON for any
of the following errors.
• When more than one Special I/O Unit is set to the same unit number.
• When an error occurs in refreshing data between a Special I/O Unit and the
PC’s CPU.
• When an error occurs between a Host Link Unit and the PC’s CPU.
• When an error occurs in a Remote I/O Master Unit.
Although the PC will continue operation if SR 25415 turns ON, the Units causing
the error will stop operation and the ALM indicator will flash. Check the status of
AR 0000 to AR 0015 to obtain the unit numbers of the Units for which the error
occurred and investigate the cause of the error.
Unit operation can be restarted by using the Restart Bits (AR 0100 to AR 0115,
SR 25207, and SR 25213), but will not be effective if the same unit number is set
for more than one Special I/O Unit. Turn off the power supply, correct the unit
number settings, and turn of the power supply again to restart.
SR 25415 will not turn OFF even if AR 0100 to AR 0115 (Restart Bits) are turned
ON. It can be turned OFF by reading errors from a Programming Device or by
executing FAL(06) 00 from the ladder program.
3-4-16 Instruction Execution Error Flag, ER
SR bit 25503 turns ON if an attempt is made to execute an instruction with incor-
rect operand data. Common causes of an instruction error are non-BCD oper-
and data when BCD data is required, or an indirectly addressed DM word that is
non-existent. When the ER Flag is ON, the current instruction will not be
executed.
3-4-17 Arithmetic Flags
The following flags are used in data shifting, arithmetic calculation, and compari-
son instructions. They are generally referred to only by their two-letter abbrevia-
tions.
!
Caution These flags are all reset when the END(01) instruction is executed, and therefore cannot be moni-
tored from a programming device.
5-20 Binary Calculations for details.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SR Area
Overflow Flag, OF
SR bit 25404 turns ON when the result of a binary addition or subtraction ex-
ceeds 7FFF or 7FFFFFFF.
Underflow Flag, UF
Carry Flag, CY
SR bit 25405 turns ON when the result of a signed binary addition or subtraction
exceeds 8000 or 80000000.
SR bit 25504 turns ON when there is a carry in the result of an arithmetic opera-
tion or when a rotate or shift instruction moves a “1” into CY. The content of CY is
also used in some arithmetic operations, e.g., it is added or subtracted along
with other operands. This flag can be set and cleared from the program using the
Set Carry and Clear Carry instructions.
Greater Than Flag, GR
Equal Flag, EQ
SR bit 25505 turns ON when the result of a comparison shows the first of two
operands to be greater than the second.
SR bit 25506 turns ON when the result of a comparison shows two operands to
be equal or when the result of an arithmetic operation is zero.
Less Than Flag, LE
SR bit 25507 turns ON when the result of a comparison shows the first of two
operands to be less than the second.
Note The four arithmetic flags are turned OFF when END(01) is executed.
3-4-18 Interrupt Subroutine Areas
The following areas are used in subroutine interrupt processing.
Interrupt Subroutine
Maximum Processing Time
Area
SR bits 26200 to 26215 are used to set the maximum processing time of the in-
terrupt subroutine. Processing times are determined to within 0.1 ms incre-
ments.
Maximum Processing Time
Interrupt Subroutine
Number Area
SR bits 26300 to 26315 contain the maximum processing time interrupt subrou-
tine number. Bit 15 will be ON if there is an interruption.
3-4-19 RS-232C Port Communications Areas
RS-232C Port Error Code
SR bits 26400 to 26403 set when there is a RS-232C port error.
Setting
Error type
0
1
2
3
No error
Parity error
Framing error
Overrun error
RS-232C Port
SR bit 26404 turns ON when there is a RS-232C port communication error.
SR bit 26405 turns ON when the C200HS is ready to transmit data.
Communication Error Bit
RS-232C Port Send Ready
Flag
RS-232C Port Reception
Completed Flag
SR bit 26406 turns ON when the C200HS has completed reading data from a
RS-232C device.
RS-232C Port Reception
Overflow Flag
SR bit 26407 turns ON when data overflow occurs following the reception of
data.
RS-232C Reception Counter SR areas 26500 to 26515 contains the number of RS-232C port receptions in
General I/O Mode.
Host Link Level 0 Send
Ready Flag
SR bit 26705 turns ON when the C200HS is ready to transmit to the Host Link
Unit.
Host Link Level 1 Send
Ready Flag
SR bit 26713 turns ON when the C200HS is ready to transmit to the Host Link.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SR Area
3-4-20 Peripheral Port Communications Areas
Peripheral Port Error Code
SR bits 26408 to 26411 are set when there is a peripheral port error in the Gener-
al I/O Mode.
Setting
Error type
0
1
2
3
F
No error
Parity error
Framing error
Overrun error
Connected in Peripheral Mode
Peripheral Port
Communication Error Bit
SR bit 26412 turns ON when there is a peripheral port communication error (ef-
fective in General I/O Mode).
Peripheral Port Send Ready SR bit 26413 turns ON when the C200HS is ready to transmit data in General I/O
Flag
Mode.
Peripheral Port Reception
Completed Flag
SR bit 26414 turns ON when the C200HS has completed reading data from a
peripheral device. Effective in General I/O Mode.
Peripheral Port Reception
Overflow Flag
SR bit 26415 turns ON when data overflow occurs following the reception of
data. Effective in General I/O Mode.
Peripheral Reception
Counter
SR areas 26600 to 26615 contains the number of peripheral port receptions in
General I/O Mode (BCD).
Host Link Level 0 Send
Ready Flag
SR bit 26705 turns ON when the C200HS is ready to transmit to the Host Link
Unit.
Host Link Level 1 Receive
Ready Flag
SR bit 26713 turns ON when the C200HS is ready to receive data from the Host
Link.
3-4-21 Memory Cassette Areas
Memory Cassette Contents
SR areas 26900 to 26907 indicate memory type contained on the Memory Cas-
sette.
Memory Type
Code
Nothing
UM
00
01
02
IOM
Memory Cassette Capacity
SR areas 26908 to 26910 indicate memory capacity of the Memory Cassette.
Capacity
0 KW (no board mounted)
16 KW
Code
0
3
EEPROM/EPROM Memory
Cassette Mounted Flag
SR bit 26914 turns ON when EEPROM Memory Cassette is protected or
EPROM Memory Cassette is mounted.
Memory Cassette Flag
SR bit 26915 turns ON when a Memory Cassette is mounted.
Save UM to Cassette Flag
SR bit 27000 turns ON when UM data is read to a Memory Cassette in Program
Mode. Bit will automatically turn OFF. An error will be produced if turned ON in
any other mode.
Load UM from Cassette
Flag
SR bit 27001 turns ON when data is loaded into UM from a Memory Cassette in
Program Mode. Bit will automatically turn OFF. An error will be produced if
turned ON in any other mode.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SR Area
Collation (Between DM and
Memory Cassette)
SR bit 27002 turns ON when data is verified between DM and a Memory Cas-
sette. SR bit 27003 turns OFF when the contents of the verification coincide and
turns ON when the contents of the verification do not coincide.
3-4-22 Data Transfer Error Bits
Data will not be transferred from UM to the Memory Cassette if an error occurs
(except for Board Checksum Error). Detailed information on checksum errors
occurring in the Memory Cassette will not be output to SR 272 because the in-
formation is not needed. Repeat the transmission if SR 27015 is ON
Transfer Error Flag: Not
PROGRAM Mode
SR bit 27012 turns ON when the C200HS is not in Program Mode and data
transfer is attempted.
Transfer Error Flag: Read
Only
SR bit 27013 turns ON when the C200HS is in Read-only Mode and data trans-
fer is attempted.
Transfer Error Flag:
Insufficient Capacity or No
UM
SR bit 27014 turns ON when data transfer is attempted and available UM is in-
sufficient.
Transfer Error Flag: Board
Checksum Error
SR bit 27015 turns ON when data transfer is attempted and a Board Checksum
error occurs.
3-4-23 Ladder Diagram Memory Areas
Memory Cassette Ladder
Diagram Size Area
SR areas 27100 to 27107 indicate the amount of ladder program stored in a
Memory Cassette.
Ladder-only File: 04: 4 KW; 08: 8 KW; 12: 12 KW; ... (64: 64 KW)
(Ladder File (Bit 07 will be ON): 84: 4 KW; 88: 8 KW; 92: 12 KW;
... (E4: 64 KW))
00: No ladder program or no file
Data updated at data transfer from CPU at startup. The file must begin in
segment 0.
CPU Ladder Diagram Size
and Type
SR areas 27108 to 27115 indicate the CPU’s ladder program size and type.
Specifications are the same as for bits 00 to 07.
3-4-24 Memory Error Flags
Memory Error Flag: PC
Setup Error
SR bit 27211 turns ON when a PC Setup Checksum error occurs.
Memory Error Flag: Ladder
Checksum Error
SR bit 27212 turns ON when a Ladder Checksum error occurs.
Memory Error Flag:
Instruction Change Error
SR bit 27213 turns ON when an instruction change vector area error occurs.
Memory Error Flag: Memory SR bit 27214 turns ON when a Memory Cassette is connected or disconnected
Cassette Disconnect Error
during operations.
Memory Error Flag:
Autoboot Error
SR bit 27215 turns ON when an autoboot error occurs.
3-4-25 Data Save Flags
Data transferred to Memory Cassette when Bit is turned ON in PROGRAM
mode. Bit will automatically turn OFF. An error will be produced if turned ON in
any other mode.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AR Area
Save IOM to Cassette Bit
SR bit 27300 turns ON when IOM is saved to a Memory Cassette.
Load IOM from Cassette Bit SR bit 27301 turns ON when loading to IOM from a Memory Cassette.
3-4-26 Transfer Error Flags
Data will not be transferred from IOM to the Memory Cassette if an error occurs
(except for Read Only Error).
Transfer Error Flag: Not
PROGRAM mode
SR bit 27312 turns ON when attempting to transfer data in other than Program
Mode.
Transfer Error Flag
Transfer Error Flag
SR bit 27313 turns ON when attempting to transfer data in Read-only Mode.
SR bit 27314 turns ON when attempting to transfer data and IOM capacity is in-
sufficient.
3-4-27 PC Setup Error Flags
PC Setup Startup Error
SR bit 27500 turns ON when a PC Setup Startup error occurs (DM6600 to
DM6614).
PC Setup RUN Error
SR bit 27501 turns ON when a PC Setup Run error occurs (DM6615 to
DM6644).
PC Setup
Communications/Error
Setting/Misc. Error
SR bit 27501 turns ON when a PC Setup Communications, Error setting or Mis-
cellaneous error occurs (DM6645 to DM6655).
Minutes (00 to 59)
Hours (00 to 23)
Keyboard Map
SR bits 27600 to 27607 set the PC Clock to minutes (00 to 59).
SR bits 27608 to 27615 set the PC Clock to hours (0 to 23).
Used for keyboard mapping.
3-5 AR (Auxiliary Relay) Area
AR word addresses extend from AR 00 to AR 27; AR bit addresses extend from
AR 0000 to AR 2715. Most AR area words and bits are dedicated to specific
uses, such as transmission counters, flags, and control bits, and words AR 00
through AR 07 and AR 23 through AR 27 cannot be used for any other purpose.
Words and bits from AR 08 to AR 22 are available as work words and work bits if
not used for the following assigned purposes.
Word
AR 0713 to AR 0715
AR 07 to 15
Use
Error History Area
SYSMAC LINK Units
AR 16, AR 17
SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC NET Link Units
Calendar/clock Area
AR 18 to AR 21
AR 0708, AR 0709,
and AR 22
TERMINAL Mode Key Bits
The AR area retains status during power interruptions, when switching from
MONITOR or RUN mode to PROGRAM mode, or when PC operation is
stopped. Bit allocations are shown in the following table and described in the fol-
lowing pages in order of bit number.
AR Area Flags and Control Bits
Word(s)
Bit(s)
00 to 09
10
Function
00
Error Flags for Special I/O Units 0 to 9 (also function as Error Flags for PC Link Units)
Error Flag for operating level 1 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET Link System
Error Flag for operating level 0 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET Link System
Host Computer to Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 1 Error Flag
Host Computer to Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 0 Error Flag
Remote I/O Master Unit 1 Error Flag
11
12
13
14
15
Remote I/O Master Unit 0 Error Flag
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AR Area
Word(s)
Bit(s)
00 to 09
10
Function
01
Restart Bits for Special I/O Units 0 to 9 (also function as Restart Bits for PC Link Units)
Restart Bit for operating level 1 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET Link System
Restart Bit for operating level 0 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET Link System
Not used.
11
12, 13
14
Remote I/O Master Unit 1 Restart Flag.
15
Remote I/O Master Unit 0 Restart Flag.
02
00 to 04
05 to 14
15
Slave Rack Error Flags (#0 to #4)
Group-2 Error Flags
Group-2 Error Flag
03
04
05
06
07
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 03
04 to 07
08
Error Flags for Optical I/O Units and I/O Terminals 0 to 7
Error Flags for Optical I/O Units and I/O Terminals 8 to 15
Error Flags for Optical I/O Units and I/O Terminals 16 to 23
Error Flags for Optical I/O Units and I/O Terminals 24 to 31
Data Link setting for operating level 0 of SYSMAC LINK System
Data Link setting for operating level 1 of SYSMAC LINK System
Normal TERMINAL Mode/Expansion TERMINAL Mode Input Cancel Bit
Expansion TERMINAL Mode Changeover Flag
09
10 and 11 Reserved by system.
12
Terminal Mode Flag
ON: Expansion; OFF: Normal (Same as status of pin 6 on CPU’s DIP switch)
13
Error History Overwrite Bit
14
Error History Reset Bit
15
Error History Enable Bit
08 to 11
12 to 15
16
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
Active Node Flags for SYSMAC LINK System nodes of operating level 0
Active Node Flags for SYSMAC LINK System nodes of operating level 1
SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link System operating level 0 service time per cycle
SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link System operating level 1 service time per cycle
Seconds: 00 to 99
17
18
Writeable
19
Minutes: 00 to 59
Hours: 00 to 23 (24-hour system)
Writeable
20
Day of Month: 01 to 31 (adjusted by month and for leap year)
Month: 1 to 12
Writeable
21
Year: 00 to 99 (Rightmost two digits of year)
Day of Week: 00 to 06 (00: Sunday; 01: Monday; 02: Tuesday; 03: Wednesday; 04:
Thursday; 05: Friday; 06: Saturday)
Writeable
08 to 12
13
Not used.
30-second Compensation Bit
Clock Stop Bit
14
15
Clock Set Bit
22
23
00 to 15
00 to 15
Keyboard Mapping
Power Off Counter (BCD)
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AR Area
Word(s)
Bit(s)
00 to 04
05
Function
24
Reserved by system.
Cycle Time Flag
06
SYSMAC LINK System Network Parameter Flag for operating level 1
SYSMAC LINK System Network Parameter Flag for operating level 0
SYSMAC/SYSMAC NET Link Unit Level 1 Mounted Flag
SYSMAC/SYSMAC NET Link Unit Level 0 Mounted Flag
Reserved by system.
07
08
09
10
11 and 12 PC Link Level
13
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 1 Mounted Flag
14
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 0 Mounted Flag
CPU-mounting Device Mounted Flag
Reserved by system.
15
25
00 to 11
12
Trace End Flag
13
Tracing Flag
14
Trace Trigger Bit (writeable)
Trace Start Bit (writeable)
Maximum Cycle Time (0.1 ms)
Present Cycle Time (0.1 ms)
15
26
27
00 to 15
00 to 15
3-5-1 Restarting Special I/O Units
To restart Special I/O Units (including PC Link Units) turn the corresponding bit
ON and OFF (or turn power ON and OFF). Do not access data refreshed for Spe-
cial I/O Units during restart processing (see SR 27400 to SR 27409 on page 37).
3-5-2 Slave Rack Error Flags
AR bits 0200 to AR 0204 correspond to the unit numbers of Remote I/O Slave
Units #0 to #4 and AR bits 0710 to AR 0712 correspond to the unit numbers of
Remote I/O Slave Units #5 to #7. These flags will turn ON if the same number is
allocated to more then one Slave or if a transmission error occurs when starting
the System. Refer to SR 251 for errors that occur after the System has started
normally.
3-5-3 Group-2 Error Flags
AR bits 0205 to AR 0215 correspond to Group-2 High-density I/O Units and B7A
Interface Units 0 to 9 (I/O numbers) and will turn ON when the same number is
set for more than one Unit, when the same word is allocated to more than one
Unit, when I/O number 9 is set for a 64-point Unit, or when the fuse burns out in a
Transistor High-density I/O Unit. AR bit 0215 will turn ON when a Unit is not rec-
ognized as a Group-2 High-density I/O Unit.
3-5-4 Optical I/O Unit and I/O Terminal Error Flags
AR 03 through AR 06 contain the Error Flags for Optical I/O Units and I/O Termi-
nals. An error indicates a duplication of a unit number. Up to 64 Optical I/O Units
and I/O Terminals can be connected to the PC. Units are distinguished by unit
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AR Area
number, 0 through 31, and a letter, L or H. Bits are allocated as shown in the fol-
lowing table.
Optical I/O Unit and I/O
Terminal Error Flags
Bits
AR03
AR04
AR05
AR06
allocation allocation allocation allocation
00
0 L
0 H
1 L
1 H
2 L
2 H
3 L
3 H
4 L
4 H
5 L
5 H
6 L
6 H
7 L
7 H
8 L
16 L
16 H
17 L
17 H
18 L
18 H
19 L
19 H
20 L
20 H
21 L
21 H
22 L
22 H
23 L
23 H
24 L
24 H
25 L
25 H
26 L
26 H
27 L
27 H
28 L
28 H
29 L
29 H
30 L
30 H
31 L
31 H
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
8 H
9 L
9 H
10 L
10 H
11 L
11 H
12 L
12 H
13 L
13 H
14 L
14 H
15 L
15 H
3-5-5 SYSMAC LINK System Data Link Settings
AR 0700 to AR 0703 and AR 0704 to AR 0707 are used to designate word alloca-
tions for operating levels 0 and 1 of the SYSMAC LINK System. Allocation can
be set to occur either according to settings from an FIT or automatically in the LR
and/or DM areas. If automatic allocation is designated, the number of words to
be allocated to each node is also designated. These settings are shown below.
External/Automatic
Allocation
Operating level 0
AR 0700 AR 0701
Operating level 1
AR 0704 AR 0705
Setting
0
0
0
0
Words set externally (FIT)
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
Automatic
allocation
LR area only
DM area only
LR and DM
areas
Words per Node
The following setting is necessary if automatic allocation is designated above.
Operating level 0
Operating level 1
Words per node
LR area DM area
Max. no.
of nodes
AR 0702 AR 0703 AR 0706 AR 0707
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
4
8
16
8
16
32
64
8
4
2
16
32
The above settings are read every cycle while the SYSMAC LINK System is in
operation.
3-5-6 Error History Bits
AR 0713 (Error History Overwrite Bit) is turned ON or OFF by the user to control
overwriting of records in the Error History Area in the DM area. Turn AR 0713 ON
to overwrite the oldest error record each time an error occurs after 10 have been
recorded. Turn OFF AR 0713 to store only the first 10 records that occur each
time after the history area is cleared.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AR Area
AR 0714 (Error History Reset Bit) is turned ON and then OFF by the user to reset
the Error Record Pointer (DM 0969) and thus restart recording error records at
the beginning of the history area.
AR 0715 (Error History Enable Bit) is turned ON by the user to enable error histo-
ry storage and turned OFF to disable error history storage.
Error history bits are refreshed each cycle.
3-5-7 Active Node Flags
AR 08 through AR 11 and AR 12 through AR 15 provide flags that indicate which
nodes are active in the SYSMAC LINK System at the current time. These flags
are refreshed every cycle while the SYSMAC LINK System is operating.
The body of the following table show the node number assigned to each bit. If the
bit is ON, the node is currently active.
Level 0
AR 08
Level 1
AR 12
Bit (body of table shows node numbers)
00
01
02
03
04
05
06 07
08
09
10
10
11
11
12
12 13
14 15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
13
14
30
46
62
15
16
32
48
**
AR 09
AR 10
AR 11
AR 13
AR 14
AR 15
17
33
49
18
34
50
19
35
51
20
36
52
21
37
53
22
38
54
23
39
55
24
40
56
25
41
57
26
42
58
27
43
59
28
44
60
29
45
61
31
47
*
*Communication Controller Error Flag
**EEPROM Error Flag
3-5-8 SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link System Service Time
AR 16 provides the time allocated to servicing operating level 0 of the SYSMAC
LINK System and/or SYSMAC NET Link System during each cycle when a SYS-
MAC LINK Unit and/or SYSMAC NET Link Unit is mounted to a Rack.
AR 17 provides the time allocated to servicing operating level 1 of the SYSMAC
LINK System and/or SYSMAC NET Link System during each cycle when a SYS-
MAC LINK Unit and/or SYSMAC NET Link Unit is mounted to a Rack.
These times are recorded in 4-digit BCD to tenths of a millisecond (000.0 ms to
999.9 ms) and are refreshed every cycle.
Bits
15 to 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
2
1
0
–1
10
10
10
10
3-5-9 Calendar/Clock Area and Bits
Calendar/Clock Area
A clock is built into the C200HS CPUs. If AR 2114 (Clock Stop Bit) is OFF, then
the date, day, and time will be available in BCD in AR 18 to AR 20 and AR 2100 to
AR 2108 as shown below. This area can also be controlled with AR 2113 (30-se-
cond Compensation Bit) and AR 2115 (Clock Set Bit).
Calendar/Clock Bits
Bits
Contents
Possible values
AR 1800 to AR 1807 Seconds
AR 1808 to AR 1815 Minutes
AR 1900 to AR 1907 Hours
AR 1908 to AR 1915 Day of month
AR 2000 to AR 2007 Month
AR 2008 to AR 2015 Year
AR 2100 to AR 2107 Day of week
00 to 59
00 to 59
00 to 23 (24-hour system)
01 to 31 (adjusted by month and for leap year)
1 to 12
00 to 99 (Rightmost two digits of year)
00 to 06 (00: Sunday; 01: Monday; 02: Tuesday; 03: Wednesday; 04:
Thursday; 05: Friday; 06: Saturday)
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AR Area
30-second Compensation Bit AR 2113 is turned ON to round the seconds of the Calendar/clock Area to zero,
i.e., if the seconds is 29 or less, it is merely set to 00; if the seconds is 30 or great-
er, the minutes is incremented by 1 and the seconds is set to 00.
Clock Stop Bit
AR 2114 is turned OFF to enable the operation of the Calendar/clock Area and
ON to stop the operation.
Clock Set Bit
AR 2115 is used to set the Calendar/clock Area as described below. This data
must be in BCD and must be set within the limits for the Calendar/clock Area
given above.
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn ON AR 2114 (Stop Bit).
2. Set the desired date, day, and time, being careful not to turn OFF AR 2114
(Clock Stop Bit) when setting the day of the week (they’re in the same word).
(On the Programming Console, the Bit/Digit Monitor and Force Set/Reset
Operations are the easiest ways to set this data.)
3. Turn ON AR 2115 (Clock Set Bit). The Calendar/clock will automatically start
operating with the designated settings and AR 2114 and AR 2115 will both
be turned OFF.
The Calendar/clock Area and Bits are refreshed each cycle while operational.
Clock Accuracy
Clock accuracy is affected by the ambient temperature as shown in the following
table.
Ambient
temperature
Accuracy (loss or
gain per month)
55°C
25°C
–3 to 0 minutes
±1 minute
0°C
–2 to 0 minutes
3-5-10 TERMINAL Mode Key Bits
If the Programming Console is mounted to the PC and is in TERMINAL mode,
any inputs on keys 0 through 9 (including characters A through F, i.e, keys 0
through 5 with SHIFT) will turn on a corresponding bit in AR 22. TERMINAL
mode is entered by a Programming Console operation.
The bits in AR 22 correspond to Programming Console inputs as follows:
Bit
AR 2200
Programming Console input
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
AR 2201
AR 2202
AR 2203
AR 2204
AR 2205
AR 2206
AR 2207
AR 2208
AR 2209
AR 2210
AR 2211
AR 2212
AR 2213
AR 2214
AR 2215
NAL mode.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AR Area
3-5-11 Power OFF Counter
AR 23 provides in 4-digit BCD the number of times that the PC power has been
turned off. This counter can be reset as necessary using the PV Change 1 op-
Modification for details.) The Power OFF Counter is refreshed every time power
is turned on.
3-5-12 Cycle Time Flag
AR 2405 turns ON when the cycle time set with SCAN(18) is shorter than the
actual cycle time.
AR 2405 is refreshed every cycle while the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode.
3-5-13 Link Unit Mounted Flags
The following flags indicate when the specified Link Units are mounted to the
Host Link Units.) These flags are refreshed every cycle.
Name
PC Link Unit Level 1
Bit
AR 2411
AR 2412
AR 2413
AR 2414
Link Unit
PC Link Unit in operating level 1
PC Link Unit Level 0
PC Link Unit in operating level 0
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 1
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 0
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit in operating level 1
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit in operating level 0
3-5-14 CPU-mounting Device Mounted Flag
AR 2415 turns ON when any device is mounted directly to the CPU. This in-
cludes CPU-mounting Host Link Units, Programming Consoles, and Interface
Units. This flag is refreshed every cycle.
3-5-15 FPD Trigger Bit
AR 2508 is used to adjust the monitoring time of FPD(––) automatically. Refer to
3-5-16 Data Tracing Flags and Control Bits
The following control bits and flags are used during data tracing with TRSM(45).
The Tracing Flag will be ON during tracing operations. The Trace Completed
Flag will turn ON when enough data has been traced to fill Trace Memory.
Bit
AR 2512
Name
Trace Completed Flag
Tracing Flag
AR 2513
AR 2514
AR 2515
Trace Trigger Bit (writeable)
Sampling Start Bit (writeable)
3-5-17 Cycle Time Indicators
AR 26 contains the maximum cycle time that has occurred since program execu-
tion was begun. AR 27 contains the present cycle time.
Both times are to tenths of a millisecond in 4-digit BCD (000.0 ms to 999.9 ms),
and are refreshed every cycle.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DM Area
3-6 DM (Data Memory) Area
The DM area is divided into various parts as described in the following table. A
portion of UM (up to 3,000 words in 1,000-word increments) can be allocated as
Expansion DM.
Addresses
User
read/write
Usage
DM 0000 to DM 0999
DM 1000 to DM 1999
DM 2000 to DM 5999
DM 6000 to DM 6030
DM 6100 to DM 6143
DM 6144 to DM 6599
DM 6600 to DM 6655
DM 7000 to DM 9999
Read/Write Normal DM.
1
Special I/O Unit Area
Normal DM.
History Log
Link test area (reserved)
System Settings
PC Setup
Read only
2
Expansion DM
Note 1. The PC Setup can be set to use DM 7000 through DM 7999 as the Special
tails.
2. The UM ALLOCATION Programming Console operation can be used to al-
locate up to 3000 words of UM as Expansion DM.
Although composed of 16-bit words like any other data area, data in the DM area
cannot be specified by bit for use in instructions with bit operands. DM 0000 to
DM 6143 can be written to by the program, but DM 6144 to DM 6655 can be over-
written only from a Peripheral Device, such as a Programming Console or host
computer with LSS.
The DM area retains status during power interruptions.
Indirect Addressing
Normally, when the content of a data area word is specified for an instruction, the
instruction is performed directly on the content of that word. For example, sup-
pose MOV(21) is performed with DM 0100 as the first operand and LR 20 as the
second operand. When this instruction is executed, the content of DM 0100 is
moved to LR 20.
Note Expansion DM cannot be used for indirect addressing.
It is possible, however, to use indirect DM addresses as the operands for many
instructions. To indicate an indirect DM address, :DM is input with the address
of the operand. With an indirect address, with content of this operand does not
contain the actual data to be used. Instead, it’s contents is assumed to hold the
address of another DM word, the content of which will actually be used in the
instruction. If :DM 0100 was used in our example above and the content of DM
0100 is 0324, then :DM 0100 actually means that the content of DM 0324 is to
be used as the operand in the instruction, and the content of DM 0324 will be
moved to LR 20.
Word
Content
4C59
0324
MOV(21)
:DM 0100
LR 00
DM 0099
DM 0100
DM 0101
Indirect
address
Indicates
DM 0324
F35A
DM 0324
DM 0325
DM 0326
5555
2506
D541
5555 moved
to LR 00.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DM Area
3-6-1 Expansion DM Area
The expansion DM area is designed to provide memory space for storing oper-
ating parameters and other operating data for Link Units and Special I/O Units.
Up to 3,000 words of UM can be allocated as Expansion DM (in 1K-word incre-
ments) using the UM ALLOCATION operation in the Programming Console or
LSS. Expansion DM area addresses run from DM 7000 to DM 9999.
The data in the expansion DM area can be transferred to the Special I/O Unit
Default Area (DM 1000 to DM 1999) when starting the PC or via programming
instruction to easily change operating parameters, enabling rapid switching be-
tween control processes. The expansion DM area can also be used to store pa-
rameters for other devices connected in the PC system, e.g., Programmable
Terminal character string or numeral tables.
The expansion DM area is used to store operating parameters and cannot be
used in programming like the normal DM area. Expansion DM can only be over-
written from a Peripheral Device, retains status during power interruptions, and
cannot be used for indirect addressing.
The UM area can be allocated as expansion DM area in increments of 1K words.
Once expansion DM area has been created, it is saved and transferred as part of
the program, i.e., no special procedures are required when saving or transfer-
ring the program.
UM ALLOCATION Operation The procedure for the Programming Console’s UM ALLOCATION operation is
on the DATA CLEAR and UM ALLOCATION instructions.
1, 2, 3...
1. Clear memory.
CLR
NOT
SET
RESET
EXT
MONTR
Note UM allocation is not possible unless memory is cleared first.
2. The expansion DM area can be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3 K words. The following key
sequence creates a 2-KW expansion DM area (DM 7000 to DM 8999).
CLR
FUN
VER
CHG
2
SET
9
7
1
3
WRITE
Press the 0 Key to eliminate the expansion DM area (0 KW).
or Press the 1 Key to allocate DM 7000 to DM 7999 (1 KW).
or Press the 2 Key to allocate DM 7000 to DM 8999 (2 KW).
or Press the 3 Key to allocate DM 7000 to DM 9999 (3 KW).
3-6-2 Special I/O Unit Data
Special I/O Units are allocated 1000 words in the DM Area as shown in the fol-
lowing table. The value set in the PC Setup (DM 6602 bits 08 to 15) determines
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DM Area
PC Setup for details.
Unit
Addresses
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DM 1000 to DM 1099 or DM 7000 to DM 7099
DM 1100 to DM 1199 or DM 7100 to DM 7199
DM 1200 to DM 1299 or DM 7200 to DM 7299
DM 1300 to DM 1399 or DM 7300 to DM 7399
DM 1400 to DM 1499 or DM 7400 to DM 7499
DM 1500 to DM 1599 or DM 7500 to DM 7599
DM 1600 to DM 1699 or DM 7600 to DM 7699
DM 1700 to DM 1799 or DM 7700 to DM 7799
DM 1800 to DM 1899 or DM 7800 to DM 7899
DM 1900 to DM 1999 or DM 7900 to DM 7999
Note These DM words can be used for other purposes when not allocated to Special
I/O Units.
3-6-3 Error History Area
DM 6000 to DM 6030 are used to store up to 10 records that show the nature,
time, and date of errors that have occurred in the PC.
The Error History Area will store system-generated or FAL(06)/FALS(07)-gener-
ated error codes whenever AR 0715 (Error History Enable Bit) is ON. Refer to
Area Structure
Error records occupy three words each stored between DM 6001 and DM 6030.
The last record that was stored can be obtained via the content of DM 6000 (Er-
ror Record Pointer). The record number, DM words, and pointer value for each of
the ten records are as follows:
Record
None
Addresses
Pointer value
N.A.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
000A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
DM 6001 to DM 6003
DM 6004 to DM 6006
DM 6007 to DM 6009
DM 6010 to DM 6012
DM 6013 to DM 6015
DM 6016 to DM 6018
DM 6019 to DM 6021
DM 6022 to DM 6024
DM 6025 to DM 6027
DM 6028 to DM 6030
Although each of them contains a different record, the structure of each record is
the same: the first word contains the error code; the second and third words, the
day and time. The error code will be either one generated by the system or by
FAL(06)/FALS(07); the time and date will be the date and time from AR 18 and
AR 19 (Calender/date Area). Also recorded with the error code is an indication of
whether the error is fatal (08) or non-fatal (00). This structure is shown below.
Word
Bit
Content
Error code
First
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 (non-fatal) or 80 (fatal)
Seconds
Second
Third
Minutes
Hours
Day of month
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DM Area
The following table lists the possible error codes and corresponding errors.
Error severity
Fatal errors
Error code
00
Error
Power Interruption
01 to 99
9F
System error (FALS)
Cycle time error
C0 to C2
E0
I/O bus error
Input-output I/O table error
Too many Units
E1
F0
No END(01) instruction
Memory error
F1
Non-fatal errors
01 to 99
8A
System error (FAL)
Interrupt Input error
Interrupt program error
Group 2 High-density I/O error
PC Setup error
8B
9A
9B
9D
UM Memory Cassette transfer error
Remote I/O error
B0 to B1
D0
Special I/O error
E7
I/O table verification error
Battery error
F7
F8
Cycle time overrun
Operation
When the first error code is generated with AR 0715 (Error History Enable Bit)
turned ON, the relevant data will be placed in the error record after the one indi-
cated by the History Record Pointer (initially this will be record 1) and the Pointer
will be incremented. Any other error codes generated thereafter will be placed in
consecutive records until the last one is used. Processing of further error records
is based on the status of AR 0713 (Error History Overwrite Bit).
If AR 0713 is ON and the Pointer contains 000A, the next error will be written into
record 10, the contents of record 10 will be moved to record 9, and so on until the
contents of record 1 is moved off the end and lost, i.e., the area functions like a
shift register. The Record Pointer will remain set to 000A.
If AR 0713 is OFF and the Pointer reaches 000A, the contents of the Error Histo-
ry Error will remain as it is and any error codes generate thereafter will not be
recorded until AR 0713 is turned OFF or until the Error History Area is reset.
The Error History Area can be reset by turning ON and then OFF
AR 0714 (Error History Reset Bit). When this is done, the Record Pointer will be
reset to 0000, the Error History Area will be reset (i.e., cleared), and any further
error codes will be recorded from the beginning of the Error History Area.
AR 0715 (Error History Enable Bit) must be ON to reset the Error History Area.
3-6-4 PC Setup
The PC Setup contains settings that determine C200HS operation. Data in the
PC Setup can be changed with a Programming Console or LSS if UM is not
write-protected by pin 1 of the CPU’s DIP switch. Refer to page 23 for details on
changing DIP switch pin settings.
The PC can be operated with the default PC Setup, which requires changing
only when customizing the PC’s operating environment to application needs.
The PC Setup parameters are described in the following table. Refer to Appen-
dix E PC Setup for more details on these parameters.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DM Area
The PC Setup is allocated to DM 6600 through DM 6655.
Parameter
Default
Settings
Remarks
STARTUP MODE
STARTUP
MODE
Programming Programming Console
Console mode selector, previous
mode selector mode (i.e., the mode in
Determines the operating mode the PC will start in
when power is turned ON.
This setting is required for restart continuation.
Setting is effective from next time power is turned on
to the PC.
use last time power was
interrupted), PROGRAM,
MONITOR, or RUN
FORCED
STATUS
Don’t hold
Hold or don’t hold
Determines whether or not the status of the Forced
Status Hold Bit is maintained after power interruptions.
If the status of the Forced Status Hold Bit is not set to
be held, it will be turned OFF the next time the PC is
started and forced status will be cleared.
Setting is effective from next time power is turned on
to the PC.
IOM HOLD BIT Don’t hold
STATUS
Hold or don’t hold
Determines whether or not the status of the IOM Hold
Bit is maintained after power interruptions. If the status
of the IOM Hold Bit is not set to be held, it will be
turned OFF the next time the PC is started and I/O
status will be cleared.
This setting is required for restart continuation.
Setting is effective from next time power is turned on
to the PC.
CYCLE TIME
Variable
Variable or minimum
Minimum setting: 1 to
9,999 ms
Determines whether or not a minimum cycle time is to
be used for user program execution. If a minimum time
is set, the PC will wait until the minimum time has
expired before starting program execution again. The
entire program will be executed even if the minimum
time is exceeded.
This setting can be used to reduce variations in I/O
response times.
An error of approximately 3 to 4 ms, plus the execution
time required for any interrupt programs, can occur.
Setting is effective immediately.
Detect Long
Cycles
120 ms
0 to 99,000 ms
If the set time is exceeded, the Cycle Time Exceeded
Flag will turn ON and a fatal error will occur.
An error of approximately 3 to 4 ms can occur.
Setting is effective immediately.
RS-232C SETUP
METHOD
Determines the settings used when a device, such as
a Programmable Terminal or bar code reader is
connected to the RS-232C port.
Host link
Host Link, RS-232C with
no protocol, 1:1 link
master, or 1:1 link slave
Do not set the node number to a number already used
by another Unit connected in the same
communications system (e.g., Host Link System). All
other settings must match those of the device being
communicated with.
NODE NO
DELAY
0
00 to 31
0
0 to 9,999 ms
00 to FF
START CODE
END CODE
None
None
None
00 to FF or CR, LF
Settings are effective immediately.
DATA LINK
AREAS
LR 00 to LR 63, LR 00 to
LR 31, or LR 00 to LR 15
BAUD RATE
9,600 bps
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
or 19200
STOP BITS
PARITY
2 bits
1 or 2 bits
Even parity
Even, odd, or none
7 or 8 bits
DATA LENGTH 7 bits
PC SETUP, HEX
INPUT
Used to set the above parameters on a binary display.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TC Area
3-7 HR (Holding Relay) Area
The HR area is used to store/manipulate various kinds of data and can be ac-
cessed either by word or by bit. Word addresses range from HR 00 through HR
99; bit addresses, from HR 0000 through HR 9915. HR bits can be used in any
order required and can be programmed as often as required.
The HR area retains status when the system operating mode is changed, when
power is interrupted, or when PC operation is stopped.
HR area bits and words can be used to preserve data whenever PC operation is
stopped. HR bits also have various special applications, such as creating latch-
ing relays with the Keep instruction and forming self-holding outputs. These are
tion Set.
Note The required number of words is allocated between HR 00 and HR 42 for routing
tables and to monitor timers when using SYSMAC NET Systems.
3-8 TC (Timer/Counter) Area
The TC area is used to create and program timers and counters and holds the
Completion flags, set values (SV), and present values (PV) for all timers and
counters. All of these are accessed through TC numbers ranging from TC 000
through TC 511. Each TC number is defined as either a timer or counter using
one of the following instructions: TIM, TIMH, CNT, CNTR(12), and TTIM(87). No
prefix is required when using a TC number in a timer or counter instruction.
Once a TC number has been defined using one of these instructions, it cannot
be redefined elsewhere in the program either using the same or a different in-
struction. If the same TC number is defined in more than one of these instruc-
tions or in the same instruction twice, an error will be generated during the pro-
gram check. There are no restrictions on the order in which TC numbers can be
used.
Once defined, a TC number can be designated as an operand in one or more of
certain set of instructions other than those listed above. When defined as a timer,
a TC number designated as an operand takes a TIM prefix. The TIM prefix is
used regardless of the timer instruction that was used to define the timer. Once
defined as a counter, the TC number designated as an operand takes a CNT
prefix. The CNT is also used regardless of the counter instruction that was used
to define the counter.
TC numbers can be designated for operands that require bit data or for operands
that require word data. When designated as an operand that requires bit data,
the TC number accesses the completion flag of the timer or counter. When des-
ignated as an operand that requires word data, the TC number accesses a mem-
ory location that holds the PV of the timer or counter.
TC numbers are also used to access the SV of timers and counters from a Pro-
gramming Device. The procedures for doing so using the Programming Console
The TC area retains the SVs of both timers and counters during power interrup-
tions. The PVs of timers are reset when PC operation is begun and when reset in
interlocked program sections. Refer to 5-10 INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK
CLEAR – IL(02) and ILC(03) for details on timer and counter operation in inter-
locked program sections. The PVs of counters are not reset at these times.
Note that in programming “TIM 000” is used to designate three things: the Timer
instruction defined with TC number 000, the completion flag for this timer, and
the PV of this timer. The meaning in context should be clear, i.e., the first is al-
ways an instruction, the second is always a bit, and the third is always a word.
The same is true of all other TC numbers prefixed with TIM or CNT.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TR Area
3-9 LR (Link Relay) Area
The LR area is used as a common data area to transfer information between
PCs. This data transfer is achieved through a PC Link System.
Certain words will be allocated as the write words of each PC. These words are
written by the PC and automatically transferred to the same LR words in the
other PCs in the System. The write words of the other PCs are transferred in as
read words so that each PC can access the data written by the other PCs in the
PC Link System. Only the write words allocated to the particular PC will be avail-
able for writing; all other words may be read only. Refer to the PC Link System
Manual for details.
The LR area is accessible either by bit or by word. LR area word addresses
range from LR 00 to LR 63; LR area bit addresses, from LR 0000 to LR 6315. Any
part of the LR area that is not used by the PC Link System can be used as work
words or work bits.
LR area data is not retained when the power is interrupted, when the PC is
changed to PROGRAM mode, or when it is reset in an interlocked program sec-
for details on interlocks.
3-10 UM Area
With the C200HS, the UM area is defined as the part of memory that can be con-
verted and transferred to ROM. The UM area is 16 KW of RAM which is backed
up by the CPU’s battery. Some of the UM area is reserved to system use, so
15,488 words can be used by the operator. The structure of the C200HS DM and
UM areas is shown in the following illustration.
DM 0000
DM 6144
DM 6600 DM 6655
DM 7000
DM 9999
PC Setup Reserved
Expansion
DM Area
I/O Comment
Area
Ladder program
Variable size
Ladder Program Area (15.1 KW)
UM Area (16.0 KW)
Special I/O Unit Default Area
DM 1000 to DM 1999
Fixed DM Area
Normal DM Area
Note Allocating UM area for an expansion DM and/or I/O Comment Area will reduce
program capacity. Check program capacity requirements before allocating the
UM area.
3-11 TR (Temporary Relay) Area
The TR area provides eight bits that are used only with the LD and OUT instruc-
tions to enable certain types of branching ladder diagram programming. The use
TR addresses range from TR 0 though TR 7. Each of these bits can be used as
many times as required and in any order required as long as the same LR bit is
not used twice in the same instruction block.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 4
Writing and Inputting the Program
This section explains the basic steps and concepts involved in writing a basic ladder diagram program, inputting the program
into memory, and executing it. It introduces the instructions that are used to build the basic structure of the ladder diagram and
control its execution. The entire set of instructions used in programming is described in Section 5 Instruction Set.
Basic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Ladder Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work Bits (Internal Relays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10 Programming Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11 Program Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruction Terminology
4-1 Basic Procedure
There are several basic steps involved in writing a program. Sheets that can be
copied to aid in programming are provided in Appendix F Word Assignment Re-
cording Sheets and Appendix G Program Coding Sheet.
1, 2, 3...
1. Obtain a list of all I/O devices and the I/O points that have been assigned to
them and prepare a table that shows the I/O bit allocated to each I/O device.
2. If the PC has any Units that are allocated words in data areas other than the
IR area or are allocated IR words in which the function of each bit is specified
by the Unit, prepare similar tables to show what words are used for which
Units and what function is served by each bit within the words. These Units
include Special I/O Units and Link Units.
3. Determine what words are available for work bits and prepare a table in
which you can allocate these as you use them.
4. Also prepare tables of TC numbers and jump numbers so that you can allo-
cate these as you use them. Remember, the function of a TC number can be
defined only once within the program; jump numbers 01 through 99 can be
Instructions; jump numbers are described later in this section.)
5. Draw the ladder diagram.
6. Input the program into the CPU. When using the Programming Console, this
will involve converting the program to mnemonic form.
7. Check the program for syntax errors and correct these.
8. Execute the program to check for execution errors and correct these.
9. After the entire Control System has been installed and is ready for use, exe-
cute the program and fine tune it if required.
10. Make a backup copy of the program.
The basics of ladder-diagram programming and conversion to mnemonic code
gram via the Programming Console are described in 4-5 The Programming
of Section 4 covers more advanced programming, programming precautions,
and program execution. All special application instructions are covered in Sec-
for debugging.
4-2 Instruction Terminology
There are basically two types of instructions used in ladder-diagram program-
ming: instructions that correspond to the conditions on the ladder diagram and
are used in instruction form only when converting a program to mnemonic code
and instructions that are used on the right side of the ladder diagram and are
executed according to the conditions on the instruction lines leading to them.
Most instructions have at least one or more operands associated with them. Op-
erands indicate or provide the data on which an instruction is to be performed.
These are sometimes input as the actual numeric values, but are usually the ad-
dresses of data area words or bits that contain the data to be used. For instance,
a MOVE instruction that has IR 000 designated as the source operand will move
the contents of IR 000 to some other location. The other location is also desig-
nated as an operand. A bit whose address is designated as an operand is called
an operand bit; a word whose address is designated as an operand is called an
operand word. If the actual value is entered as a constant, it is preceded by # to
indicate that it is not an address.
Other terms used in describing instructions are introduced in Section 5 Instruc-
tion Set.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Ladder Diagrams
4-3 Program Capacity
The maximum user program size varies with the amount of UM allocated to ex-
pansion DM and the I/O Comment Area. Approximately 10.1 KW are available
for the ladder program when 3 KW are allocated to expansion DM and 2 KW are
information on UM allocation.
DM
6144
DM
6600
DM
6655
DM
7000
DM
9999
PC
Setup
Reserved
Expansion
DM Area
I/O Comment
Area
Ladder program
Variable size
Ladder Program Area (15.1 KW)
Fixed DM Area
4-4 Basic Ladder Diagrams
A ladder diagram consists of one line running down the left side with lines
branching off to the right. The line on the left is called the bus bar; the branching
lines, instruction lines or rungs. Along the instruction lines are placed conditions
that lead to other instructions on the right side. The logical combinations of these
conditions determine when and how the instructions at the right are executed. A
ladder diagram is shown below.
00000 06315
25208
HR 0109 LR 2503
24400
24401
Instruction
00001
00501
00502
00503 00504
00100 00002
00010
00003 HR 0050
00007 TIM 001 LR 0515
21001 21002
00403
00405
Instruction
00011
21005 21007
As shown in the diagram above, instruction lines can branch apart and they can
join back together. The vertical pairs of lines are called conditions. Conditions
without diagonal lines through them are called normally open conditions and
correspond to a LOAD, AND, or OR instruction. The conditions with diagonal
lines through them are called normally closed conditions and correspond to a
LOAD NOT, AND NOT, or OR NOT instruction. The number above each condi-
tion indicates the operand bit for the instruction. It is the status of the bit asso-
ciated with each condition that determines the execution condition for following
instructions. The way the operation of each of the instructions corresponds to a
condition is described below. Before we consider these, however, there are
some basic terms that must be explained.
Note When displaying ladder diagrams with LSS, a second bus bar will be shown on
the right side of the ladder diagram and will be connected to all instructions on
the right side. This does not change the ladder-diagram program in any func-
tional sense. No conditions can be placed between the instructions on the right
side and the right bus bar, i.e., all instructions on the right must be connected
directly to the right bus bar. Refer to the LSS Operation Manual for details.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Ladder Diagrams
4-4-1 Basic Terms
Normally Open and
Normally Closed
Conditions
Each condition in a ladder diagram is either ON or OFF depending on the status
of the operand bit that has been assigned to it. A normally open condition is ON if
the operand bit is ON; OFF if the operand bit is OFF. A normally closed condition
is ON if the operand bit is OFF; OFF if the operand bit is ON. Generally speaking,
you use a normally open condition when you want something to happen when a
bit is ON, and a normally closed condition when you want something to happen
when a bit is OFF.
00000
Instruction is executed
Instruction
when IR bit 00000 is ON.
Normally open
condition
00000
Instruction is executed
Instruction
when IR bit 00000 is OFF.
Normally closed
condition
Execution Conditions
Operand Bits
In ladder diagram programming, the logical combination of ON and OFF condi-
tions before an instruction determines the compound condition under which the
instruction is executed. This condition, which is either ON or OFF, is called the
execution condition for the instruction. All instructions other than LOAD instruc-
tions have execution conditions.
The operands designated for any of the ladder instructions can be any bit in the
IR, SR, HR, AR, LR, or TC areas. This means that the conditions in a ladder dia-
gram can be determined by I/O bits, flags, work bits, timers/counters, etc. LOAD
and OUTPUT instructions can also use TR area bits, but they do so only in spe-
Logic Blocks
The way that conditions correspond to what instructions is determined by the
relationship between the conditions within the instruction lines that connect
them. Any group of conditions that go together to create a logic result is called a
logic block. Although ladder diagrams can be written without actually analyzing
individual logic blocks, understanding logic blocks is necessary for efficient pro-
gramming and is essential when programs are to be input in mnemonic code.
4-4-2 Mnemonic Code
The ladder diagram cannot be directly input into the PC via a Programming Con-
sole; LSS is required. To input from a Programming Console, it is necessary to
convert the ladder diagram to mnemonic code. The mnemonic code provides
exactly the same information as the ladder diagram, but in a form that can be
typed directly into the PC. Actually you can program directly in mnemonic code,
although it in not recommended for beginners or for complex programs. Also,
regardless of the Programming Device used, the program is stored in memory in
mnemonic form, making it important to understand mnemonic code.
Because of the importance of the Programming Console as a peripheral device
and because of the importance of mnemonic code in complete understanding of
a program, we will introduce and describe the mnemonic code along with the
ladder diagram. Remember, you will not need to use the mnemonic code if you
are inputting via LSS (although you can use it with LSS too, if you prefer).
Program Memory Structure The program is input into addresses in Program Memory. Addresses in Program
Memory are slightly different to those in other memory areas because each ad-
dress does not necessarily hold the same amount of data. Rather, each address
holds one instruction and all of the definers and operands (described in more
detail later) required for that instruction. Because some instructions require no
operands, while others require up to three operands, Program Memory address-
es can be from one to four words long.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Ladder Diagrams
Program Memory addresses start at 00000 and run until the capacity of Program
Memory has been exhausted. The first word at each address defines the instruc-
tion. Any definers used by the instruction are also contained in the first word.
Also, if an instruction requires only a single bit operand (with no definer), the bit
operand is also programmed on the same line as the instruction. The rest of the
words required by an instruction contain the operands that specify what data is
to be used. When converting to mnemonic code, all but ladder diagram instruc-
tions are written in the same form, one word to a line, just as they appear in the
ladder diagram symbols. An example of mnemonic code is shown below. The
instructions used in it are described later in the manual.
Address Instruction
Operands
HR 0001
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
LD
AND
00001
00002
00100
00101
00102
OR
LD NOT
AND
AND LD
MOV(21)
000
DM
0000
00007
CMP(20)
DM
HR
0000
00
00008
00009
00010
LD
25505
00501
OUT
MOV(21)
DM
DM
0000
0500
00011
00012
00013
DIFU(13)
AND
00502
00005
00503
OUT
The address and instruction columns of the mnemonic code table are filled in for
the instruction word only. For all other lines, the left two columns are left blank. If
the instruction requires no definer or bit operand, the operand column is left
blank for first line. It is a good idea to cross through any blank data column
spaces (for all instruction words that do not require data) so that the data column
can be quickly scanned to see if any addresses have been left out.
When programming, addresses are automatically displayed and do not have to
be input unless for some reason a different location is desired for the instruction.
When converting to mnemonic code, it is best to start at Program Memory ad-
dress 00000 unless there is a specific reason for starting elsewhere.
4-4-3 Ladder Instructions
The ladder instructions are those instructions that correspond to the conditions
on the ladder diagram. Ladder instructions, either independently or in combina-
tion with the logic block instructions described next, form the execution condi-
tions upon which the execution of all other instructions are based.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Ladder Diagrams
LOAD and LOAD NOT
The first condition that starts any logic block within a ladder diagram corre-
sponds to a LOAD or LOAD NOT instruction. Each of these instruction requires
one line of mnemonic code. “Instruction” is used as a dummy instruction in the
following examples and could be any of the right-hand instructions described lat-
er in this manual.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
A LOAD instruction.
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
Instruction
LD NOT
Instruction
00000
00000
A LOAD NOT instruction.
When this is the only condition on the instruction line, the execution condition for
the instruction at the right is ON when the condition is ON. For the LOAD instruc-
tion (i.e., a normally open condition), the execution condition will be ON when IR
00000 is ON; for the LOAD NOT instruction (i.e., a normally closed condition), it
will be ON when 00000 is OFF.
AND and AND NOT
When two or more conditions lie in series on the same instruction line, the first
one corresponds to a LOAD or LOAD NOT instruction; and the rest of the condi-
tions correspond to AND or AND NOT instructions. The following example
shows three conditions which correspond in order from the left to a LOAD, an
AND NOT, and an AND instruction. Again, each of these instructions requires
one line of mnemonic code.
00000
00100
LR 0000
Instruction
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
00000
AND NOT
AND
00100
0000
LR
Instruction
The instruction will have an ON execution condition only when all three condi-
tions are ON, i.e., when IR 00000 is ON, IR 00100 is OFF, and LR 0000 is ON.
AND instructions in series can be considered individually, with each taking the
logical AND of the execution condition (i.e., the total of all conditions up to that
point) and the status of the AND instruction’s operand bit. If both of these are ON,
an ON execution condition will be produced for the next instruction. If either is
OFF, the result will also be OFF. The execution condition for the first AND in-
struction in a series is the first condition on the instruction line.
Each AND NOT instruction in series takes the logical AND of its execution condi-
tion and the inverse of its operand bit.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Ladder Diagrams
OR and OR NOT
When two or more conditions lie on separate instruction lines which run in paral-
lel and then join together, the first condition corresponds to a LOAD or LOAD
NOT instruction; the other conditions correspond to OR or OR NOT instructions.
The following example shows three conditions which correspond (in order from
the top) to a LOAD NOT, an OR NOT, and an OR instruction. Again, each of
these instructions requires one line of mnemonic code.
00000
Instruction
00100
LR 0000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
OR NOT
OR
00100
0000
LR
Instruction
The instruction will have an ON execution condition when any one of the three
conditions is ON, i.e., when IR 00000 is OFF, when IR 00100 is OFF, or when LR
0000 is ON.
OR and OR NOT instructions can be considered individually, each taking the
logical OR between its execution condition and the status of the OR instruction’s
operand bit. If either one of these were ON, an ON execution condition will be
produced for the next instruction.
Combining AND and OR
Instructions
When AND and OR instructions are combined in more complicated diagrams,
they can sometimes be considered individually, with each instruction performing
a logic operation on the execution condition and the status of the operand bit.
The following is one example. Study this example until you are convinced that
the mnemonic code follows the same logic flow as the ladder diagram.
00000
00001
00002
00003
Instruction
00200
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
LD
AND
00001
00200
00002
00003
OR
AND
AND NOT
Instruction
Here, an AND is taken between the status of IR 00000 and that of IR 00001 to
determine the execution condition for an OR with the status of IR 00200. The
result of this operation determines the execution condition for an AND with the
status of IR 00002, which in turn determines the execution condition for an AND
with the inverse (i.e., and AND NOT) of the status of IR 00003.
In more complicated diagrams, however, it is necessary to consider logic blocks
before an execution condition can be determined for the final instruction, and
that’s where AND LOAD and OR LOAD instructions are used. Before we consid-
er more complicated diagrams, however, we’ll look at the instructions required to
complete a simple “input-output” program.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Ladder Diagrams
4-4-4 OUTPUT and OUTPUT NOT
The simplest way to output the results of combining execution conditions is to
output it directly with the OUTPUT and OUTPUT NOT. These instructions are
used to control the status of the designated operand bit according to the execu-
tion condition. With the OUTPUT instruction, the operand bit will be turned ON
as long as the execution condition is ON and will be turned OFF as long as the
execution condition is OFF. With the OUTPUT NOT instruction, the operand bit
will be turned ON as long as the execution condition is OFF and turned OFF as
long as the execution condition is ON. These appear as shown below. In mne-
monic code, each of these instructions requires one line.
00000
00001
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00200
00200
00201
00000
00001
LD
OUT
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00001
LD
00001
00201
OUT NOT
In the above examples, IR 00200 will be ON as long as IR 00000 is ON and IR
00201 will be OFF as long as IR 00001 is ON. Here, IR 00000 and IR 00001 will
be input bits and IR 00200 and IR 00201 output bits assigned to the Units con-
trolled by the PC, i.e., the signals coming in through the input points assigned IR
00000 and IR 00001 are controlling the output points assigned IR 00200 and IR
00201, respectively.
The length of time that a bit is ON or OFF can be controlled by combining the
OUTPUT or OUTPUT NOT instruction with TIMER instructions. Refer to Exam-
4-4-5 The END Instruction
The last instruction required to complete a simple program is the END instruc-
tion. When the CPU cycles the program, it executes all instruction up to the first
END instruction before returning to the beginning of the program and beginning
execution again. Although an END instruction can be placed at any point in a
program, which is sometimes done when debugging, no instructions past the
first END instruction will be executed until it is removed. The number following
the END instruction in the mnemonic code is its function code, which is used
when inputted most instruction into the PC. These are described later. The END
instruction requires no operands and no conditions can be placed on the same
instruction line with it.
00000
00001
Instruction
END(01)
Program execution
ends here.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
AND NOT
Instruction
END(01)
00001
---
If there is no END instruction anywhere in the program, the program will not be
executed at all.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Ladder Diagrams
Now you have all of the instructions required to write simple input-output pro-
grams. Before we finish with ladder diagram basic and go onto inputting the pro-
gram into the PC, let’s look at logic block instruction (AND LOAD and OR LOAD),
which are sometimes necessary even with simple diagrams.
4-4-6 Logic Block Instructions
Logic block instructions do not correspond to specific conditions on the ladder
diagram; rather, they describe relationships between logic blocks. The AND
LOAD instruction logically ANDs the execution conditions produced by two logic
blocks. The OR LOAD instruction logically ORs the execution conditions pro-
duced by two logic blocks.
AND LOAD
Although simple in appearance, the diagram below requires an AND LOAD in-
struction.
00000
00001
00002
00003
Instruction
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
LD
OR
00001
00002
00003
---
LD
OR NOT
AND LD
The two logic blocks are indicated by dotted lines. Studying this example shows
that an ON execution condition will be produced when: either of the conditions in
the left logic block is ON (i.e., when either IR 00000 or IR 00001 is ON), and
when either of the conditions in the right logic block is ON (i.e., when either IR
00002 is ON or IR 00003 is OFF).
The above ladder diagram cannot, however, be converted to mnemonic code
using AND and OR instructions alone. If an AND between IR 00002 and the re-
sults of an OR between IR 00000 and IR 00001 is attempted, the OR NOT be-
tween IR 00002 and IR 00003 is lost and the OR NOT ends up being an OR NOT
between just IR 00003 and the result of an AND between IR 00002 and the first
OR. What we need is a way to do the OR (NOT)’s independently and then com-
bine the results.
To do this, we can use the LOAD or LOAD NOT instruction in the middle of an
instruction line. When LOAD or LOAD NOT is executed in this way, the current
execution condition is saved in a special buffer and the logic process is re-
started. To combine the results of the current execution condition with that of a
previous “unused” execution condition, an AND LOAD or an OR LOAD instruc-
tion is used. Here “LOAD” refers to loading the last unused execution condition.
An unused execution condition is produced by using the LOAD or LOAD NOT
instruction for any but the first condition on an instruction line.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Ladder Diagrams
Analyzing the above ladder diagram in terms of mnemonic instructions, the con-
dition for IR 00000 is a LOAD instruction and the condition below it is an OR in-
struction between the status of IR 00000 and that of IR 00001. The condition at
IR 00002 is another LOAD instruction and the condition below is an OR NOT
instruction, i.e., an OR between the status of IR 00002 and the inverse of the
status of IR 00003. To arrive at the execution condition for the instruction at the
right, the logical AND of the execution conditions resulting from these two blocks
will have to be taken. AND LOAD does this. The mnemonic code for the ladder
diagram is shown below. The AND LOAD instruction requires no operands of its
own, because it operates on previously determined execution conditions. Here
too, dashes are used to indicate that no operands needs designated or input.
OR LOAD
The following diagram requires an OR LOAD instruction between the top logic
block and the bottom logic block. An ON execution condition will be produced for
the instruction at the right either when IR 00000 is ON and IR 00001 is OFF, or
when IR 00002 and IR 00003 are both ON. The operation of the OR LOAD in-
struction and its mnemonic code is exactly the same as that for an AND LOAD
instruction, except that the current execution condition is ORed with the last un-
used execution condition.
00000
00002
00001
00003
Instruction
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
LD
AND NOT
LD
00001
00002
00003
---
AND
OR LD
Naturally, some diagrams will require both AND LOAD and OR LOAD instruc-
tions.
Logic Block Instructions in
Series
To code diagrams with logic block instructions in series, the diagram must be
divided into logic blocks. Each block is coded using a LOAD instruction to code
the first condition, and then AND LOAD or OR LOAD is used to logically combine
the blocks. With both AND LOAD and OR LOAD there are two ways to achieve
this. One is to code the logic block instruction after the first two blocks and then
after each additional block. The other is to code all of the blocks to be combined,
starting each block with LOAD or LOAD NOT, and then to code the logic block
instructions which combine them. In this case, the instructions for the last pair of
blocks should be combined first, and then each preceding block should be com-
bined, working progressively back to the first block. Although either of these
methods will produce exactly the same result, the second method, that of coding
all logic block instructions together, can be used only if eight or fewer blocks are
being combined, i.e., if seven or fewer logic block instructions are required.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Ladder Diagrams
The following diagram requires AND LOAD to be converted to mnemonic code
because three pairs of parallel conditions lie in series. The two options for coding
the programs are also shown.
00000
00002
00004
00500
00001
00003
00005
Address Instruction
Operands
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
LD
00000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
LD
00000
OR NOT
LD NOT
OR
00001
00002
00003
—
OR NOT
LD NOT
OR
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
—
AND LD
LD
LD
00004
00005
—
OR
OR
AND LD
AND LD
OUT
AND LD
OUT
—
00500
00500
Again, with the method on the right, a maximum of eight blocks can be com-
bined. There is no limit to the number of blocks that can be combined with the
first method.
The following diagram requires OR LOAD instructions to be converted to mne-
monic code because three pairs of series conditions lie in parallel to each other.
00000 00001
00501
00002 00003
00040 00005
The first of each pair of conditions is converted to LOAD with the assigned bit
operand and then ANDed with the other condition. The first two blocks can be
coded first, followed by OR LOAD, the last block, and another OR LOAD; or the
three blocks can be coded first followed by two OR LOADs. The mnemonic
codes for both methods are shown below.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
LD
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
LD
AND NOT
LD NOT
AND NOT
OR LD
LD
00001
00002
00003
—
AND NOT
LD NOT
AND NOT
LD
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
—
00004
00005
—
AND
AND
OR LD
OR LD
OUT
OR LD
OUT
—
00501
00501
Again, with the method on the right, a maximum of eight blocks can be com-
bined. There is no limit to the number of blocks that can be combined with the
first method.
Combining AND LOAD and
OR LOAD
Both of the coding methods described above can also be used when using AND
LOAD and OR LOAD, as long as the number of blocks being combined does not
exceed eight.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Ladder Diagrams
The following diagram contains only two logic blocks as shown. It is not neces-
sary to further separate block b components, because it can be coded directly
using only AND and OR.
00000 00001
00002 00003
00501
00201
00004
Block
a
Block
b
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
LD
AND NOT
LD
00001
00002
00003
00201
00004
—
AND
OR
OR
AND LD
OUT
00501
Although the following diagram is similar to the one above, block b in the diagram
below cannot be coded without separating it into two blocks combined with OR
LOAD. In this example, the three blocks have been coded first and then OR
LOAD has been used to combine the last two blocks, followed by AND LOAD to
combine the execution condition produced by the OR LOAD with the execution
condition of block a.
When coding the logic block instructions together at the end of the logic blocks
they are combining, they must, as shown below, be coded in reverse order, i.e.,
the logic block instruction for the last two blocks is coded first, followed by the
one to combine the execution condition resulting from the first logic block in-
struction and the execution condition of the logic block third from the end, and on
back to the first logic block that is being combined.
Block
b1
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000 00001
00002 00003
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
LD NOT
AND
00502
00001
00002
00003
00004
00202
—
LD
00004 00202
AND NOT
LD NOT
AND
Block
b2
OR LD
AND LD
OUT
—
Block
a
Block
b
00502
Complicated Diagrams
When determining what logic block instructions will be required to code a dia-
gram, it is sometimes necessary to break the diagram into large blocks and then
continue breaking the large blocks down until logic blocks that can be coded
without logic block instructions have been formed. These blocks are then coded,
combining the small blocks first, and then combining the larger blocks. Either
AND LOAD or OR LOAD is used to combine the blocks, i.e., AND LOAD or OR
LOAD always combines the last two execution conditions that existed, regard-
less of whether the execution conditions resulted from a single condition, from
logic blocks, or from previous logic block instructions.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Ladder Diagrams
When working with complicated diagrams, blocks will ultimately be coded start-
ing at the top left and moving down before moving across. This will generally
mean that, when there might be a choice, OR LOAD will be coded before AND
LOAD.
The following diagram must be broken down into two blocks and each of these
then broken into two blocks before it can be coded. As shown below, blocks a
and b require an AND LOAD. Before AND LOAD can be used, however, OR
LOAD must be used to combine the top and bottom blocks on both sides, i.e., to
combine a1 and a2; b1 and b2.
Block
a1
Block
b1
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
LD
00000 00001
00004 00005
00503
AND NOT
LD NOT
AND
00001
00002
00003
—
00002 00003
00006 00007
OR LD
LD
Blocks a1 and a2
Block
a2
Block
b2
00004
00005
00006
00007
—
AND
LD
Block
a
Block
b
AND
Blocks b1 and b2
Blocks a and b
OR LD
AND LD
OUT
—
00503
The following type of diagram can be coded easily if each block is coded in order:
first top to bottom and then left to right. In the following diagram, blocks a and b
would be combined using AND LOAD as shown above, and then block c would be
coded and a second AND LOAD would be used to combined it with the execution
condition from the first AND LOAD. Then block d would be coded, a third AND
LOAD would be used to combine the execution condition from block d with the
execution condition from the second AND LOAD, and so on through to block n.
00500
Block
a
Block
b
Block
c
Block
n
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Ladder Diagrams
The following diagram requires an OR LOAD followed by an AND LOAD to code
the top of the three blocks, and then two more OR LOADs to complete the mne-
monic code.
00000
00001
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
LR 0000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
00012
LD
00002
00003
LD
00001
00002
00003
––
LD
00004
00005
00007
AND NOT
OR LD
AND LD
LD NOT
AND
00006
––
00004
00005
––
OR LD
LD NOT
AND
00006
00007
––
OR LD
OUT
LR
0000
Although the program will execute as written, this diagram could be drawn as
shown below to eliminate the need for the first OR LOAD and the AND LOAD,
simplifying the program and saving memory space.
Address Instruction
Operands
00002
00002
00001
00003
00000
LR 0000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
LD
AND NOT
OR
00003
00001
00000
00004
00005
––
00004
00006
00005
00007
AND
LD NOT
AND
OR LD
LD NOT
AND
00006
00007
––
OR LD
OUT
LR
0000
The following diagram requires five blocks, which here are coded in order before
using OR LOAD and AND LOAD to combine them starting from the last two
blocks and working backward. The OR LOAD at program address 00008 com-
bines blocks blocks d and e, the following AND LOAD combines the resulting
execution condition with that of block c, etc.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00001
00002
LR 0000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
00012
LD
Block b
LD
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
––
Block a
AND
LD
Block c
00003
00004
Block d
00005
AND
LD
LD
AND
OR LD
AND LD
OR LD
AND LD
OUT
00006
00007
Blocks d and e
––
Block c with result of above
Block e
––
Block b with result of above
Block a with result of above
––
LR
0000
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Ladder Diagrams
Again, this diagram can be redrawn as follows to simplify program structure and
coding and to save memory space.
Address Instruction
Operands
00006
00006
00005
00007
00001
00003
00004
00000
LR 0000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
LD
AND
OR
00007
00005
00003
00004
00001
00002
––
00002
AND
AND
LD
AND
OR LD
AND
OUT
00000
0000
LR
The next and final example may at first appear very complicated but can be
coded using only two logic block instructions. The diagram appears as follows:
Block a
00000
01000
00500
00001
01001
00002
00003
00004
00006
00005
00500
Block b
Block c
The first logic block instruction is used to combine the execution conditions re-
sulting from blocks a and b, and the second one is to combine the execution con-
dition of block c with the execution condition resulting from the normally closed
condition assigned IR 00003. The rest of the diagram can be coded with OR,
AND, and AND NOT instructions. The logical flow for this and the resulting code
are shown below.
Block a
Block b
00000
00001
01000
01001
LD
AND
00000
00001
LD
AND
01000
01001
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
00012
LD
OR LD
AND
LD
00001
01000
01001
––
Block c
00004
00005
00500
AND
OR LD
OR
LD
00004
00005
OR
00500
00003
00500
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
––
AND
AND
AND NOT
LD
00002
00006
LD
AND
AND NOT 00003
00002
00006
AND
OR
AND LD
OUT
AND LD
00500
00500
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Programming Console
4-4-7 Coding Multiple Right-hand Instructions
If there is more than one right-hand instruction executed with the same execu-
tion condition, they are coded consecutively following the last condition on the
instruction line. In the following example, the last instruction line contains one
more condition that corresponds to an AND with IR 00004.
00000
00001
00003
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
HR
0001
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
LD
OR
00001
00002
0000
00500
00506
OR
OR
HR
HR
00002
00004
AND
OUT
OUT
AND
OUT
00003
0001
HR 0000
00500
00004
00506
4-5 The Programming Console
This and the next section describe the Programming Console and the opera-
tions necessary to prepare for program input. 4-7 Inputting, Modifying, and
Checking the Program describes actual procedures for inputting the program
into memory.
Although the Programming Console can be used to write ladder programs, it is
primarily used to support LSS operations and is very useful for on-site editing
and maintenance. The main Programming Console functions are listed below.
1, 2, 3...
1. Displaying operating messages and the results of diagnostic checks.
2. Writing and reading ladder programs, inserting and deleting instructions,
searching for data or instructions, and monitoring I/O bit status.
3. Monitoring I/O status, force-setting/resetting bits.
4. The Programming Console can be connected to or disconnected from the
PC with the power on.
5. The Programming Console can be used with C-series PCs.
6. Supports TERMINAL mode, which allows the display of a 32-character
message, as well as operation of the keyboard mapping function. Refer to
5-25-6 TERMINAL MODE – TERM(––) for details.
Note The Programming Console does not support all of the LSS operations, only
those required for on-site editing and maintenance.
4-5-1 The Keyboard
The keyboard of the Programming Console is functionally divided by key color
into the following four areas:
White: Numeric Keys
Red: CLR Key
The ten white keys are used to input numeric program data such as program
addresses, data area addresses, and operand values. The numeric keys are
also used in combination with the function key (FUN) to enter instructions with
function codes.
The CLR key clears the display and cancels current Programming Console op-
erations. It is also used when you key in the password at the beginning of pro-
gramming operations. Any Programming Console operation can be cancelled
by pressing the CLR key, although the CLR key may have to be pressed two or
three times to cancel the operation and clear the display.
Yellow: Operation Keys
The yellow keys are used for writing and correcting programs. Detailed explana-
tions of their functions are given later in this section.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Programming Console
Gray: Instruction and Data
Area Keys
Except for the SHIFT key on the upper right, the gray keys are used to input in-
structions and designate data area prefixes when inputting or changing a pro-
gram. The SHIFT key is similar to the shift key of a typewriter, and is used to alter
the function of the next key pressed. (It is not necessary to hold the SHIFT key
down; just press it once and then press the key to be used with it.)
The gray keys other than the SHIFT key have either the mnemonic name of the
instruction or the abbreviation of the data area written on them. The functions of
these keys are described below.
Pressed before the function code when inputting an instruction
via its function code.
Pressed to enter SFT (the Shift Register instruction).
Input either after a function code to designate the differentiated
form of an instruction or after a ladder instruction to designate
an inverse condition.
Pressed to enter AND (the AND instruction) or used with NOT
to enter AND NOT.
Pressed to enter OR (the OR instruction) or used with NOT to
enter OR NOT.
Pressed to enter CNT (the Counter instruction) or to designate
a TC number that has already been defined as a counter.
Pressed to enter LD (the Load instruction) or used with NOT to
enter LD NOT. Also pressed to indicate an input bit.
Pressed to enter OUT (the Output instruction) or used with
NOT to enter OUT NOT. Also pressed to indicate an output bit.
Pressed to enter TIM (the Timer instruction) or to designate a
TC number that has already been defined as a timer.
Pressed before designating an address in the TR area.
Pressed before designating an address in the LR area.
Pressed before designating an address in the HR area.
Pressed before designating an address in the AR area.
Pressed before designating an address in the DM area.
Pressed before designating an indirect DM address.
Pressed before designating a word address.
Pressed before designating an operand as a constant.
Pressed before designating a bit address.
Pressed before function codes for block programming instruc-
tions, i.e., those placed between pointed parentheses <>.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Operation
4-5-2 PC Modes
The Programming Console is equipped with a switch to control the PC mode. To
select one of the three operating modes—RUN, MONITOR, or PROGRAM—
use the mode switch. The mode that you select will determine PC operation as
well as the procedures that are possible from the Programming Console.
RUN mode is the mode used for normal program execution. When the switch is
set to RUN and the START input on the CPU Power Supply Unit is ON, the CPU
will begin executing the program according to the program written in its Program
Memory. Although monitoring PC operation from the Programming Console is
possible in RUN mode, no data in any of the memory areas can be input or
changed.
MONITOR mode allows you to visually monitor in-progress program execution
while controlling I/O status, changing PV (present values) or SV (set values),
etc. In MONITOR mode, I/O processing is handled in the same way as in RUN
mode. MONITOR mode is generally used for trial system operation and final pro-
gram adjustments.
In PROGRAM mode, the PC does not execute the program. PROGRAM mode
is for creating and changing programs, clearing memory areas, and registering
and changing the I/O table. A special Debug operation is also available within
PROGRAM mode that enables checking a program for correct execution before
trial operation of the system.
DANGER
Do not leave the Programming Console connected to the PC by an extension cable when in
RUN mode. Noise picked up by the extension cable can enter the PC, affecting the program
and thus the controlled system.
!
4-5-3 The Display Message Switch
Pin 3 of the CPU’s DIP switch determines whether Japanese or English lan-
guage messages will be displayed on the Programming Console. It is factory set
to ON, which causes English language messages to be displayed.
4-6 Preparation for Operation
This section describes the procedures required to begin Programming Console
operation. These include password entry, clearing memory, error message
clearing, and I/O table operations. I/O table operations are also necessary at
other times, e.g., when changes are to be made in Units used in the PC configu-
ration.
DANGER
Always confirm that the Programming Console is in PROGRAM mode when turning on the
PC with a Programming Console connected unless another mode is desired for a specific
purpose. If the Programming Console is in RUN mode when PC power is turned on, any
program in Program Memory will be executed, possibly causing a PC-controlled system to
begin operation.
!
The following sequence of operations must be performed before beginning in-
itial program input.
1, 2, 3...
1. Insert the mode key into the Programming Console.
2. Set the mode switch to PROGRAM mode. (The mode key cannot be re-
moved while set to PROGRAM mode.)
3. Turn on PC power.
Note When I/O Units are installed, turn on those Units also. The Program-
ming Console will not operate if these Units are not turned on.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Operation
4. Confirm that the CPU’s POWER LED is lit and the following display appears
on the Programming Console screen. (If the ALM/ERR LED is lit or flashing
or an error message is displayed, clear the error that has occurred.)
<PROGRAM>
PASSWORD!
6. Clear memory. Skip this step if the program does not need to be cleared.
4-6-1 Entering the Password
To gain access to the PC’s programming functions, you must first enter the pass-
word. The password prevents unauthorized access to the program.
The PC prompts you for a password when PC power is turned on or, if PC power
is already on, after the Programming Console has been connected to the PC. To
gain access to the system when the “Password!” message appears, press CLR
and then MONTR. Then press CLR to clear the display.
If the Programming Console is connected to the PC when PC power is already
on, the first display below will indicate the mode the PC was in before the Pro-
gramming Console was connected. Ensure that the PC is in PROGRAM mode
before you enter the password. When the password is entered, the PC will
shift to the mode set on the mode switch, causing PC operation to begin if the
mode is set to RUN or MONITOR. The mode can be changed to RUN or MONI-
TOR with the mode switch after entering the password.
<PROGRAM>
PASSWORD!
<PROGRAM> BZ
Indicates the mode set by the mode selector switch.
4-6-2 Buzzer
Immediately after the password is input or anytime immediately after the mode
has been changed, SHIFT and then the 1 key can be pressed to turn on and off
the buzzer that sounds when Programming Console keys are pressed. If BZ is
displayed in the upper right corner, the buzzer is operative. If BZ is not displayed,
the buzzer is not operative.
This buzzer also will also sound whenever an error occurs during PC operation.
Buzzer operation for errors is not affected by the above setting.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Operation
4-6-3 Clearing Memory
Using the Memory Clear operation it is possible to clear all or part of the UM area
(RAM or EEPROM), and the IR, HR, AR, DM and TC areas. Unless otherwise
specified, the clear operation will clear all of the above memory areas. The UM
area will not be cleared if the write-protect switch (pin 1 of the CPU’s DIP switch)
is set to ON.
Before beginning to programming for the first time or when installing a new pro-
gram, all areas should normally be cleared. Before clearing memory, check to
see if a program is already loaded that you need. If you need the program, clear
only the memory areas that you do not need, and be sure to check the existing
program with the program check key sequence before using it. The check se-
quence is provided later in this section. Further debugging methods are pro-
press CLR until all zeros are displayed, and then input the keystrokes given in
the top line of the following key sequence. The branch lines shown in the se-
quence are used only when performing a partial memory clear, which is de-
scribed below.
Memory can be cleared in PROGRAM mode only. The following table shows
which memory areas will be cleared for the 3 memory clearing operations (all
clear, partial clear, memory clear).
Memory Area
I/O words
All clear
Cleared
Partial clear
Memory clear
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
---
Cleared
---
Work words
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
HR, AR, TC, DM, fixed DM
Expansion DM
Cleared
---
I/O comments
---
Ladder program
Cleared
---
Cleared
---
UM Allocation information
Note 1. The error history area (DM 6000 to DM 6030) will not be cleared when the
DM area is cleared.
2. When the PC Setup area (DM 6600 to DM 6655 in fixed DM) is cleared, the
settings will be returned to their factory-set defaults.
3. When the All Clear operation is executed, the ladder program area will be
allocated entirely to the ladder program. (The expansion DM and I/O com-
ment areas will be set to 0 KW.)
All Clear
The key sequence for all clear is shown below.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Operation
The following procedure is used to clear memory completely.
MEMORY ERR
Continue pressing
I/O VER ERR
the CLR key once for
each error message
until “00000” appears
on the display
00000
00000
00000MEMORY CLR?
HR CNT DM
All clear
00000MEM ALLCLR?
00000MEM ALLCLR
END
Partial Clear
It is possible to retain the data in specified areas or part of the ladder program. To
retain the data in the HR and AR, TC, and/or DM areas, press the appropriate
key after entering REC/RESET. HR is pressed to designate both the HR and AR
areas. In other words, specifying that HR is to be retained will ensure that AR is
retained also. If not specified for retention, both areas will be cleared. CNT is
used for the entire TC area. The display will show those areas that will be
cleared.
It is also possible to retain a portion of the ladder program from the beginning to a
specified address. After designating the data areas to be retained, specify the
first program address to be cleared. For example, to leave addresses 00000 to
00122 untouched, but to clear addresses from 00123 to the end of Program
Memory, input 00123.
The key sequence for a partial memory clear is shown below.
Program Memory cleared
from designated address.
Both AR and HR areas
TC area
DM area
Retained if pressed
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Operation
To leave the TC area uncleared and retain Program Memory addresses 00000
through 00122, input as follows:
00000
00000
00000
00000MEMORY CLR?
HR CNT DM
00000MEMORY CLR?
HR DM
00123MEMORY CLR?
HR DM
00000MEMORY CLR
END HR DM
Memory Clear
The memory clear operation clears all memory areas except the I/O comments
and UM Allocation information.
The key sequence for a partial memory clear is shown below.
The Programming Console will display the following screens:
00000
00000
00000
00000MEMORY CLR?
HR CNT DM
00000MEMORY CLR
END HR CNT DM
Note When the write-protect switch (pin 1 of the CPU’s DIP switch) is set to ON the UM
area (from DM 6144 through the ladder program) will not be cleared. Other data
areas, such as HR, AR, CNT, and DM from DM 0000 to DM 6143 will be cleared.
4-6-4 Registering the I/O Table
The I/O Table Registration operation records the types of I/O Units controlled by
the PC and the Rack locations of the I/O Units. It also clears all I/O bits.
It is not absolutely necessary to register the I/O table with the C200HS. When the
I/O table has not been registered, the PC will operate according to the I/O Units
mounted when power is applied. The I/O verification/setting error will not occur.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Operation
It is necessary to register the I/O table if I/O Units are changed, otherwise an I/O
verification error message, “I/O VER ERR” or “I/O SET ERROR”, will appear
when starting programming operations.
I/O Table Registration can be performed only in PROGRAM mode with the write-
protection switch (pin 1 of the CPU’s DIP switch) set to OFF (OFF=“WRITE”).
Group-2 HIgh-density I/O Units will not be displayed in the I/O table when it is
displayed using a host computer. Four asterisks (∗∗∗∗), indicating no Unit, will be
displayed instead.
Key Sequence
Initial I/O Table Registration
00000
00000
FUN (??)
00000IOTBL ?
?-?U=
Register I/O table
00000IOTBL WRIT
????
00000IOTBL WRIT
9713
00000IOTBL WRIT
OK
4-6-5 Clearing Error Messages
After the I/O table has been registered, any error messages recorded in memory
should be cleared. It is assumed here that the causes of any of the errors for
which error messages appear have already been taken care of. If the beeper
sounds when an attempt is made to clear an error message, eliminate the cause
ing).
To display any recorded error messages, press CLR, FUN, and then MONTR.
The first message will appear. Pressing MONTR again will clear the present
message and display the next error message. Continue pressing MONTR until
all messages have been cleared.
Although error messages can be accessed in any mode, they can be cleared
only in PROGRAM mode.
Key Sequence
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Operation
4-6-6 Verifying the I/O Table
The I/O Table Verification operation is used to check the I/O table registered in
memory to see if it matches the actual sequence of I/O Units mounted. The first
inconsistency discovered will be displayed as shown below. Every subsequent
pressing of VER displays the next inconsistency.
Note This operation can be executed only when the I/O table has been registered.
Key Sequence
Example
00000
00000
FUN (??)
00000IOTBL ?
?-?U=
(No errors)
00000IOTBL CHK
OK
00000IOTBL CHK
0-1U=O*** I***
(An error occurred)
Actual I/O words
Registered I/O table words
I/O slot number
Rack number
Meaning of Displays
The following display indicates a C500, C1000H, or C2000H and C200H or
C200HS have the same unit number on a Remote I/O Slave Rack.
00000I/OTBL CHK
*-*U=----
The following display indicates a duplication in Optical I/O Unit unit numbers.
00000I/OTBL CHK
2**HU=R*-I R*-W
Indicates duplication
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Operation
4-6-7 Reading the I/O Table
The I/O Table Read operation is used to access the I/O table that is currently
registered in the CPU memory. This operation can be performed in any PC
mode.
Key Sequence
[0 to 2]
[0 to 9]
Rack
number
Unit
number
Press the EXT key to select Remote
I/O Slave Racks or Optical I/O Units.
Example
00000
00000
FUN (??)
00000IOTBL ?
?-?U=
(Main Rack)
(Slave Rack Units)
00000IOTBL ?
R??-?U=
(Optical I/O Unit)
00000IOTBL ?
2??LU=
00000IOTBL ?
?-?U=
(Main Rack)
00000IOTBL ?
0-?U=
00000IOTBL ?
0-5U=
00000IOTBL READ
0-5U=i*** 005
00000IOTBL READ
0-4U=o*** 004
00000IOTBL READ
0-5U=i*** 005
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Operation
Meaning of Displays
I/O Unit Designations for Displays
C500, 1000H/C2000H I/O Units
No. of points
Input Unit
I * * *
Output Unit
0 * * *
16
32
64
I I * *
0 0 * *
I I I I
0 0 0 0
C200H I/O Units
No. of points
Input Unit
Output Unit
o * * *
8
i(*)* *
i i * *
16
o o * *
Note: (∗) is i for non-fatal errors or F_
I/O Units
00000IOTBL READ
*-*U=**** ***
I/O word number
I/O type: i: (input), o: (output)
Unit number (0 to 9)
Rack number (0 to 2)
Interrupt Input Units
00000IOTBL READ
*-*U=****
INT0: Mounted to CPU Rack.
IN**: Mounted to Expansion I/O Rack.
(Treated as an 8-point Input Unit.)
Special I/O Units
00000IOTBL READ
*-*U=$***
Blank:
W:
Unit 1 exclusively
Unit 2 exclusively
C: High-speed Counter
N: Position Control Unit
A: Other
Special I/O
Unit type:
Unit number (0 to 9)
Indicates Special I/O Unit
Remote I/O Master Units
00000IOTBL READ
*-*U=RMT*
Remote I/O
Master no. (0 or 1)
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Operation
Remote I/O Slave Racks
00000IOTBL READ
R**-*U=**** ***
I/O word number
I/O type: I, O
i, o (see tables on previous page)
Unit number (0 to 9)
Remote I/O Slave Unit number (0 to 4)
Remote I/O Master Unit number (0 or 1)
Indicates a Remote I/O Rack
Group-2 HIgh-density I/O
Units
00000IOTBL READ
*-*U=#***
2:
4:
2 words (32 pts)
4 words (64 pts)
I:
O:
Input Unit
Output Unit
Unit number (0 to 9)
Indicates Group-2 HIgh-density I/O Unit
Note Group-2 HIgh-density I/O Units will not be displayed in the I/O table when it is
displayed using LSS (host computer). Four asterisks (∗∗∗∗), indicating no Unit,
will be displayed instead.
Optical I/O Units and
Remote Terminals
00000IOTBL READ
2**HU=R*-*
I/O type: I (input), O (output), or
W (input/output)
Remote I/O Master Unit number (0 to 1)
Word (H: leftmost 8 bits; L: rightmost 8 bits)
I/O word number (200 to 231)
4-6-8 Clearing the I/O Table
The I/O Table Clear operation is used to delete the contents of the I/O table that
is currently registered in the CPU memory. The PC will be set for operation
based on the I/O Units mounted when the I/O Table Clear operation is per-
formed.
The I/O Table Clear operation will reset all Special I/O Units and Link Units
mounted at the time. Do not perform the I/O Table Clear operation when a Host
or PC Link Unit, Remote I/O Master Unit, High-speed Counter Unit, Position
Control Unit, or other Special I/O Unit is in operation.
Note This operation can be performed only in PROGRAM mode with the write-protec-
tion switch (pin 1 of the CPU’s DIP switch) set to OFF (OFF=“WRITE”).
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Operation
Key Sequence
Example
00000
00000
FUN (??)
00000IOTBL
?-?U=
00000IOTBL WRIT
????
00000IOTBL CANC
????
00000IOTBL CANC
9713
00000IOTBL CANC
OK
4-6-9 SYSMAC NET Link Table Transfer (CPU31/33-E Only)
The SYSMAC NET Link Table Transfer operation transfers a copy of the SYS-
MAC NET Link Data Link table to RAM or EEPROM program memory.This al-
lows the user program and SYSMAC NET Link table to be written into EPROM
together. This operation is applicable to the CPU31-E and CPU33-E only.
Note When power is applied to a PC which has a copy of a SYSMAC NET Link table
stored in its program memory, the SYSMAC NET Link table of the CPU will be
overwritten. Changes made in the SYSMAC NET Link table do not affect the
copy of the SYSMAC NET Link table in program memory; SYSMAC NET Link
Table Transfer must be repeated to change the copy in program memory.
The SYSMAC NET Link Table Transfer operation will not work if:
• The Memory Unit is not RAM or EEPROM, or the write protect switch is not set
to write.
• There isn’t an END(01) instruction.
• The contents of program memory exceeds 14.7K words. (To find the size of the
contents of program memory, do an instruction search for END(01).)
SYSMAC NET Link table transfer can only be done in PROGRAM mode.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Operation
Key Sequence
Example
00000
00000
FUN(??)
00000LINK TBL~UM
(SYSMAC-NET)????
00000LINK TBL~UM
(SYSMAC-NET)9713
00000LINK TBL~UM
OK
The following indicates that the
I/O table cannot be transferred.
00000LINK TBL~UM
DISABLED
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program
4-7 Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program
Once a program is written in mnemonic code, it can be input directly into the PC
from a Programming Console. Mnemonic code is keyed into Program Memory
addresses from the Programming Console. Checking the program involves a
syntax check to see that the program has been written according to syntax rules.
Once syntax errors are corrected, a trial execution can begin and, finally, correc-
tion under actual operating conditions can be made.
The operations required to input a program are explained below. Operations to
modify programs that already exist in memory are also provided in this section,
as well as the procedure to obtain the current cycle time.
Before starting to input a program, check to see whether there is a program al-
ready loaded. If there is a program loaded that you do not need, clear it first using
the program memory clear key sequence, then input the new program. If you
need the previous program, be sure to check it with the program check key se-
quence and correct it as required. Further debugging methods are provided in
4-7-1 Setting and Reading from Program Memory Address
When inputting a program for the first time, it is generally written to Program
Memory starting from address 00000. Because this address appears when the
display is cleared, it is not necessary to specify it.
When inputting a program starting from other than 00000 or to read or modify a
program that already exists in memory, the desired address must be designated.
To designate an address, press CLR and then input the desired address. Lead-
ing zeros of the address need not be input, i.e., when specifying an address such
as 00053 you need to enter only 53. The contents of the designated address will
not be displayed until the down key is pressed.
Once the down key has been pressed to display the contents of the designated
address, the up and down keys can be used to scroll through Program Memory.
Each time one of these keys is pressed, the next or previous word in Program
Memory will be displayed.
If Program Memory is read in RUN or MONITOR mode, the ON/OFF status of
any displayed bit will also be shown.
Key Sequence
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program
Example
If the following mnemonic code has already been input into Program Memory,
the key inputs below would produce the displays shown.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00200
00201
00202
LD
AND
TIM
00001
000
00200
#
0123
00100
00203
LD
00200READ OFF
LD
00000
00201READ ON
AND 00001
00202READ OFF
TIM
000
00202
TIM
#0123
00203READ ON
LD 00100
4-7-2 Entering and Editing Programs
Programs can be entered and edited only in PROGRAM mode with the write-
protect switch (pin 1 of the CPU’s DIP switch) set to OFF (OFF=“WRITE”).
The same procedure is used to either input a program for the first time or to edit a
program that already exists. In either case, the current contents of Program
Memory is overwritten, i.e., if there is no previous program, the NOP(00) instruc-
tion, which will be written at every address, will be overwritten.
To enter a program, input the mnemonic code that was produced from the ladder
diagram step-by-step, ensuring that the correct address is set before starting.
Once the correct address is displayed, enter the first instruction word and press
WRITE. Next, enter the required operands, pressing WRITE after each, i.e.,
WRITE is pressed at the end of each line of the mnemonic code. When WRITE is
pressed at the end of each line, the designated instruction or operand is entered
and the next display will appear. If the instruction requires two or more words, the
next display will indicate the next operand required and provide a default value
for it. If the instruction requires only one word, the next address will be displayed.
Continue inputting each line of the mnemonic code until the entire program has
been entered.
When inputting numeric values for operands, it is not necessary to input leading
zeros. Leading zeros are required only when inputting function codes (see be-
low). When designating operands, be sure to designate the data area for all but
IR and SR addresses by pressing the corresponding data area key, and to desig-
nate each constant by pressing CONT/#. CONT/# is not required for counter or
timer SVs (see below). The AR area is designated by pressing SHIFT and then
HR. TC numbers as bit operands (i.e., completion flags) are designated by
pressing either TIM or CNT before the address, depending on whether the TC
number has been used to define a timer or a counter. To designate an indirect
DM address, press CH/∗ before the address (pressing DM is not necessary for
an indirect DM address).
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program
Inputting SV for Counters
and Timers
The SV (set value) for a timer or counter is generally entered as a constant, al-
though inputting the address of a word that holds the SV is also possible. When
inputting an SV as a constant, CONT/# is not required; just input the numeric
value and press WRITE. To designate a word, press CLR and then input the
word address as described above.
Designating Instructions
The most basic instructions are input using the Programming Console keys pro-
vided for them. All other instructions are entered using function codes. These
function codes are always written after the instruction’s mnemonic. If no function
code is given, there should be a Programming Console key for that instruction.
To designate the differentiated form of an instruction, press NOT after the func-
tion code.
To input an instruction using a function code, set the address, press FUN, input
the function code including any leading zeros, press NOT if the differentiated
form of the instruction is desired, input any bit operands or definers required for
the instruction, and then press WRITE.
Caution Enter function codes with care and be sure to press SHIFT when required.
!
Key Sequence
[Address displayed]
[Instruction word]
[Operand]
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program
Example
The following program can be entered using the key inputs shown below. Dis-
plays will appear as indicated.
Address Instruction
Operands
00002
00000
00200
00200
00201
LD
TIM
000
0123
001
#
#
00202
TIMH(15)
0500
00200
LD
00002
00201READ
NOP (00)
00201
TIM
000
00201 TIM DATA
#0000
00201 TIM
#0123
00202READ
NOP (00)
00202
FUN (??)
00202
TIMH (15) 001
00202 TIMH DATA
#0000
00202 TIMH
#0500
00203READ
NOP (00)
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program
Error Messages
The following error messages may appear when inputting a program. Correct
the error as indicated and continue with the input operation. The asterisks in the
displays shown below will be replaced with numeric data, normally an address,
in the actual display.
Message
Cause and correction
****REPL ROM
An attempt was made to write to write-protected RAM or EEPROM. Ensure that the
write-protect switch is set to OFF.
****PROG OVER
****ADDR OVER
****SETDATA ERR
The instruction at the last address in memory is not NOP(00). Erase all unnecessary
instructions at the end of the program.
An address was set that is larger than the highest memory address in the UM area.
Input a smaller address
Data has been input in the wrong format or beyond defined limits, e.g., a hexadecimal
value has been input for BCD. Re-enter the data. This error will generate a FALS 00
error.
****I/O NO. ERR
A data area address has been designated that exceeds the limit of the data area, e.g.,
an address is too large. Confirm the requirements for the instruction and re-enter the
address.
4-7-3 Checking the Program
Once a program has been entered, the syntax should be checked to verify that
no programming rules have been violated. This check should also be performed
if the program has been changed in any way that might create a syntax error.
To check the program, input the key sequence shown below. The numbers indi-
cate the desired check level (see below). When the check level is entered, the
program check will start. If an error is discovered, the check will stop and a dis-
play indicating the error will appear. Press SRCH to continue the check. If an er-
ror is not found, the program will be checked through to the first END(01), with a
display indicating when each 64 instructions have been checked (e.g., display
#1 of the example after the following table).
CLR can be pressed to cancel the check after it has been started, and a display
like display #2, in the example, will appear. When the check has reached the first
END, a display like display #3 will appear.
A syntax check can be performed on a program only in PROGRAM mode.
Key Sequence
To check
up to END(01)
To abort
(0, 1, 2, Check levels)
Check Levels and Error
Messages
Three levels of program checking are available. The desired level must be des-
ignated to indicate the type of errors that are to be detected. The following table
provides the error types, displays, and explanations of all syntax errors. Check
level 0 checks for type A, B, and C errors; check level 1, for type A and B errors;
and check level 2, for type A errors only.
The address where the error was generated will also be displayed.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program
Many of the following errors are for instructions that have not yet been described
on these.
Type
Message
Meaning and appropriate response
Type A ?????
The program has been lost. Re-enter the program.
NO END INSTR
There is no END(01) in the program. Write END(01) at the final address in the
program.
CIRCUIT ERR
The number of logic blocks and logic block instructions does not agree, i.e., either
LD or LD NOT has been used to start a logic block whose execution condition has
not been used by another instruction, or a logic block instruction has been used
that does not have the required number of logic blocks. Check your program.
LOCN ERR
DUPL
An instruction is in the wrong place in the program. Check instruction requirements
and correct the program.
The same jump number or subroutine number has been used twice. Correct the
program so that the same number is only used once for each. (Jump number 00
may be used as often as required.)
SBN UNDEFD
JME UNDEFD
OPERAND ERR
STEP ERR
SBS(91) has been programmed for a subroutine number that does not exist.
Correct the subroutine number or program the required subroutine.
A JME(04) is missing for a JMP(05). Correct the jump number or insert the proper
JME(04).
A constant entered for the instruction is not within defined values. Change the
constant so that it lies within the proper range.
STEP(08) with a section number and STEP(08) without a section number have
been used correctly. Check STEP(08) programming requirements and correct the
program.
Type B IL-ILC ERR
IL(02) and ILC(03) are not used in pairs. Correct the program so that each IL(02)
has a unique ILC(03). Although this error message will appear if more than one
IL(02) is used with the same ILC(03), the program will executed as written. Make
sure your program is written as desired before proceeding.
JMP-JME ERR
SBN-RET ERR
JMP(04) 00 and JME(05) 00 are not used in pairs. Although this error message will
appear if more than one JMP(04) 00 is used with the same JME(05) 00, the
program will be executed as written. Make sure your program is written as desired
before proceeding.
If the displayed address is that of SBN(92), two different subroutines have been
defined with the same subroutine number. Change one of the subroutine numbers
or delete one of the subroutines. If the displayed address is that of RET(93),
RET(93) has not been used properly. Check requirements for RET(93) and correct
the program.
Type C JMP UNDEFD
SBS UNDEFD
JME(05) has been used with no JMP(04) with the same jump number. Add a
JMP(04) with the same number or delete the JME(05) that is not being used.
A subroutine exists that is not called by SBS(91). Program a subroutine call in the
proper place, or delete the subroutine if it is not required.
COIL DUPL
The same bit is being controlled (i.e., turned ON and/or OFF) by more than one
instruction (e.g., OUT, OUT NOT, DIFU(13), DIFD(14), KEEP(11), SFT(10)).
Although this is allowed for certain instructions, check instruction requirements to
confirm that the program is correct or rewrite the program so that each bit is
controlled by only one instruction.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program
Example
The following example shows some of the displays that can appear as a result of
a program check.
00000
00000PROG CHK
CHKLVL (0-2)?
00064PROG CHK
Display #1
Halts program check
00699CHK ABORTD
Display #2
Check continues until END(01)
02000PROG CHK
END (01)(02.7KW)
Display #3
When errors are found
00178CIRCUIT ERR
OUT
00200
00200IL-ILC ERR
ILC (03)
02000NO END INST
END
4-7-4 Displaying the Cycle Time
Once the program has been cleared of syntax errors, the cycle time should be
checked. This is possible only in RUN or MONITOR mode while the program is
cycle time.
To display the current average cycle time, press CLR then MONTR. The time
displayed by this operation is a typical cycle time. The differences in displayed
values depend on the execution conditions that exist when MONTR is pressed.
Example
00000
00000SCAN TIME
054.1MS
00000SCAN TIME
053.9MS
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program
4-7-5 Program Searches
The program can be searched for occurrences of any designated instruction or
data area address used in an instruction. Searches can be performed from any
currently displayed address or from a cleared display.
To designate a bit address, press SHIFT, press CONT/#, then input the address,
including any data area designation required, and press SRCH. To designate an
instruction, input the instruction just as when inputting the program and press
SRCH. Once an occurrence of an instruction or bit address has been found, any
additional occurrences of the same instruction or bit can be found by pressing
SRCH again. SRCH’G will be displayed while a search is in progress.
When the first word of a multiword instruction is displayed for a search operation,
the other words of the instruction can be displayed by pressing the down key be-
fore continuing the search.
If Program Memory is read in RUN or MONITOR mode, the ON/OFF status of
any bit displayed will also be shown.
Key Sequence
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program
Example:
Instruction Search
00000
00000
LD
00000
00200SRCH
LD
00000
00202
LD
00000
02000SRCH
END (01)(02.7KW)
00000
00100
00100
TIM
001
00203SRCH
TIM
001
00203 TIM DATA
#0123
Example:
Bit Search
00000
00000CONT SRCH
CONT
00005
00200CONT SRCH
LD 00005
00203CONT SRCH
AND
00005
02000
END (01)(02.7K)
4-7-6 Inserting and Deleting Instructions
In PROGRAM mode, any instruction that is currently displayed can be deleted or
another instruction can be inserted before it. These operations are possible only
in PROGRAM mode with the write-protect switch (pin 1 of the CPU’s DIP switch)
set to OFF (OFF=“WRITE”).
To insert an instruction, display the instruction before which you want the new
instruction to be placed, input the instruction word in the same way as when in-
putting a program initially, and then press INS and the down key. If other words
are required for the instruction, input these in the same way as when inputting
the program initially.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program
To delete an instruction, display the instruction word of the instruction to be de-
leted and then press DEL and the up key. All the words for the designated in-
struction will be deleted.
Caution Be careful not to inadvertently delete instructions; there is no way to recover them without reinput-
!
ting them completely.
Key Sequences
When an instruction is inserted or deleted, all addresses in Program Memory
following the operation are adjusted automatically so that there are no blank ad-
dresses or no unaddressed instructions.
Example
The following mnemonic code shows the changes that are achieved in a pro-
gram through the key sequences and displays shown below.
Original Program
Address Instruction
Operands
00100
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
LD
AND
00101
00201
00102
––
LD
AND NOT
OR LD
AND
00103
00104
00201
––
AND NOT
OUT
END(01)
Before Deletion:
Before Insertion:
00104
00100
00101
00103
00105
00100
00201
00101
00102
00103
00104
Delete
00201
00201
00201
00102
00105
END(01)
END(01)
The following key inputs and displays show the procedure for achieving the pro-
gram changes shown above.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program
Inserting an Instruction
00000
Find the address
prior to the inser-
tion point
00000
OUT
00000
00201
00000
OUT
Program After Insertion
Address Instruction
Operands
00207SRCH
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
LD
00100
00101
00201
00102
––
OUT
00201
AND
LD
00206READ
AND NOT 00104
AND NOT
OR LD
AND
00103
00105
00104
00201
––
00206
AND
AND
00000
00105
AND NOT
OUT
00206
AND
END(01)
00206INSERT?
AND 00105
Insert the
instruction
00207INSERT END
AND NOT 00104
00206READ
AND
00105
Deleting an Instruction
00000
Find the instruction
that requires deletion.
00000
OUT
00000
00201
Program After Deletion
Address Instruction
00000
OUT
Operands
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
LD
00100
00101
00201
00102
––
AND NOT
LD
00208SRCH
OUT
00201
AND NOT
OR LD
AND
00207READ
AND NOT 00104
00103
00105
00104
00201
AND
AND NOT
OUT
00207 DELETE?
AND NOT 00104
00207DELETE END
OUT
00201
Confirm that this is the
instruction to be deleted.
00206READ
AND 00105
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program
4-7-7 Branching Instruction Lines
When an instruction line branches into two or more lines, it is sometimes neces-
sary to use either interlocks or TR bits to maintain the execution condition that
existed at a branching point. This is because instruction lines are executed
across to a right-hand instruction before returning to the branching point to ex-
ecute instructions on a branch line. If a condition exists on any of the instruction
lines after the branching point, the execution condition could change during this
time making proper execution impossible. The following diagrams illustrate this.
In both diagrams, instruction 1 is executed before returning to the branching
point and moving on to the branch line leading to instruction 2.
Branching
point
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
00002
Instruction 1
AND
00002
Instruction 2
Diagram A: Correct Operation
Branching
point
00000
00001
00002
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
LD
00000
00001
AND
Instruction 1
AND
Diagram B: Incorrect Operation
00002
Instruction 2
If, as shown in diagram A, the execution condition that existed at the branching
point cannot be changed before returning to the branch line (instructions at the
far right do not change the execution condition), then the branch line will be ex-
ecuted correctly and no special programming measure is required.
If, as shown in diagram B, a condition exists between the branching point and the
last instruction on the top instruction line, the execution condition at the branch-
ing point and the execution condition after completing the top instruction line will
sometimes be different, making it impossible to ensure correct execution of the
branch line.
There are two means of programming branching programs to preserve the ex-
ecution condition. One is to use TR bits; the other, to use interlocks
(IL(02)/IL(03)).
TR Bits
The TR area provides eight bits, TR 0 through TR 7, that can be used to tempo-
rarily preserve execution conditions. If a TR bit is placed at a branching point, the
current execution condition will be stored at the designated TR bit. When return-
ing to the branching point, the TR bit restores the execution status that was
saved when the branching point was first reached in program execution.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program
The previous diagram B can be written as shown below to ensure correct execu-
tion. In mnemonic code, the execution condition is stored at the branching point
using the TR bit as the operand of the OUTPUT instruction. This execution con-
dition is then restored after executing the right-hand instruction by using the
same TR bit as the operand of a LOAD instruction
TR 0
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00001
00002
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
LD
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
OUT
TR
0
AND
00001
Instruction 1
LD
Diagram B: Corrected Using a TR bit
TR
0
AND
00002
Instruction 2
In terms of actual instructions the above diagram would be as follows: The status
of IR 00000 is loaded (a LOAD instruction) to establish the initial execution con-
dition. This execution condition is then output using an OUTPUT instruction to
TR 0 to store the execution condition at the branching point. The execution con-
dition is then ANDed with the status of IR 00001 and instruction 1 is executed
accordingly. The execution condition that was stored at the branching point is
then re-loaded (a LOAD instruction with TR 0 as the operand), this is ANDed with
the status of IR 00002, and instruction 2 is executed accordingly.
The following example shows an application using two TR bits.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
TR 0
TR 1
00000
00001
00002
00003
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
00012
00013
00014
LD
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
Instruction 3
Instruction 4
OUT
AND
OUT
AND
OUT
LD
TR
0
00001
1
TR
00004
00005
00002
00500
1
TR
TR
TR
AND
OUT
LD
00003
00501
0
AND
OUT
LD
00004
00502
0
AND NOT
OUT
00005
00503
In this example, TR 0 and TR 1 are used to store the execution conditions at the
branching points. After executing instruction 1, the execution condition stored in
TR 1 is loaded for an AND with the status IR 00003. The execution condition
stored in TR 0 is loaded twice, the first time for an AND with the status of IR
00004 and the second time for an AND with the inverse of the status of IR 00005.
TR bits can be used as many times as required as long as the same TR bit is not
used more than once in the same instruction block. Here, a new instruction block
is begun each time execution returns to the bus bar. If, in a single instruction
block, it is necessary to have more than eight branching points that require the
execution condition be saved, interlocks (which are described next) must be
used.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program
When drawing a ladder diagram, be careful not to use TR bits unless necessary.
Often the number of instructions required for a program can be reduced and
ease of understanding a program increased by redrawing a diagram that would
otherwise required TR bits. In both of the following pairs of diagrams, the bottom
versions require fewer instructions and do not require TR bits. In the first exam-
ple, this is achieved by reorganizing the parts of the instruction block: the bottom
one, by separating the second OUTPUT instruction and using another LOAD in-
struction to create the proper execution condition for it.
Note Although simplifying programs is always a concern, the order of execution of in-
structions is sometimes important. For example, a MOVE instruction may be re-
quired before the execution of a BINARY ADD instruction to place the proper
data in the required operand word. Be sure that you have considered execution
order before reorganizing a program to simplify it.
TR 0
00000
00001
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
00000
Instruction 2
Instruction 1
00001
00000
00001
00003
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
TR 0
00002
00004
00001
00000
00002
00003
00001
00004
Note TR bits are only used when programming using mnemonic code. They are not
necessary when inputting ladder diagrams directly. The above limitations on the
number of branching points requiring TR bits, and considerations on methods to
reduce the number of programming instructions, still hold.
Interlocks
The problem of storing execution conditions at branching points can also be
handled by using the INTERLOCK (IL(02)) and INTERLOCK CLEAR (ILC(03))
instructions to eliminate the branching point completely while allowing a specific
execution condition to control a group of instructions. The INTERLOCK and IN-
TERLOCK CLEAR instructions are always used together.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program
When an INTERLOCK instruction is placed before a section of a ladder pro-
gram, the execution condition for the INTERLOCK instruction will control the ex-
ecution of all instruction up to the next INTERLOCK CLEAR instruction. If the
execution condition for the INTERLOCK instruction is OFF, all right-hand in-
structions through the next INTERLOCK CLEAR instruction will be executed
with OFF execution conditions to reset the entire section of the ladder diagram.
LOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR – IL(02) and ILC(03).
Diagram B can also be corrected with an interlock. Here, the conditions leading
up to the branching point are placed on an instruction line for the INTERLOCK
instruction, all of lines leading from the branching point are written as separate
instruction lines, and another instruction line is added for the INTERLOCK
CLEAR instruction. No conditions are allowed on the instruction line for INTER-
LOCK CLEAR. Note that neither INTERLOCK nor INTERLOCK CLEAR re-
quires an operand.
00000
IL(02)
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
LD
00001
00002
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
IL(02)
---
LD
00001
Instruction 1
LD
00002
---
ILC(03)
Instruction 2
ILC(03)
If IR 00000 is ON in the revised version of diagram B, above, the status of IR
00001 and that of IR 00002 would determine the execution conditions for in-
structions 1 and 2, respectively. Because IR 00000 is ON, this would produce the
same results as ANDing the status of each of these bits. If IR 00000 is OFF, the
INTERLOCK instruction would produce an OFF execution condition for instruc-
tions 1 and 2 and then execution would continue with the instruction line follow-
ing the INTERLOCK CLEAR instruction.
As shown in the following diagram, more than one INTERLOCK instruction can
be used within one instruction block; each is effective through the next INTER-
LOCK CLEAR instruction.
00000
00001
00002
IL(02)
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
00012
00013
LD
Instruction 1
IL(02)
IL(02)
---
LD
00001
Instruction 1
LD
00002
---
00003
00005
00006
00004
IL(02)
Instruction 2
Instruction 3
Instruction 4
LD
00003
00004
AND NOT
Instruction 2
LD
00005
00006
---
Instruction 3
LD
ILC(03)
Instruction 4
ILC(03)
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program
If IR 00000 in the above diagram is OFF (i.e., if the execution condition for the
first INTERLOCK instruction is OFF), instructions 1 through 4 would be ex-
ecuted with OFF execution conditions and execution would move to the instruc-
tion following the INTERLOCK CLEAR instruction. If IR 00000 is ON, the status
of IR 00001 would be loaded as the execution condition for instruction 1 and then
the status of IR 00002 would be loaded to form the execution condition for the
second INTERLOCK instruction. If IR 00002 is OFF, instructions 2 through 4 will
be executed with OFF execution conditions. If IR 00002 is ON, IR 00003, IR
00005, and IR 00006 will determine the first execution condition in new instruc-
tion lines.
4-7-8 Jumps
A specific section of a program can be skipped according to a designated execu-
tion condition. Although this is similar to what happens when the execution con-
dition for an INTERLOCK instruction is OFF, with jumps, the operands for all in-
structions maintain status. Jumps can therefore be used to control devices that
require a sustained output, e.g., pneumatics and hydraulics, whereas interlocks
can be used to control devices that do not required a sustained output, e.g., elec-
tronic instruments.
Jumps are created using the JUMP (JMP(04)) and JUMP END (JME(05)) in-
structions. If the execution condition for a JUMP instruction is ON, the program is
executed normally as if the jump did not exist. If the execution condition for the
JUMP instruction is OFF, program execution moves immediately to a JUMP
END instruction without changing the status of anything between the JUMP and
JUMP END instruction.
All JUMP and JUMP END instructions are assigned jump numbers ranging be-
tween 00 and 99. There are two types of jumps. The jump number used deter-
mines the type of jump.
A jump can be defined using jump numbers 01 through 99 only once, i.e., each of
these numbers can be used once in a JUMP instruction and once in a JUMP
END instruction. When a JUMP instruction assigned one of these numbers is
executed, execution moves immediately to the JUMP END instruction that has
the same number as if all of the instruction between them did not exist. Diagram
B from the TR bit and interlock example could be redrawn as shown below using
a jump. Although 01 has been used as the jump number, any number between
01 and 99 could be used as long as it has not already been used in a different part
of the program. JUMP and JUMP END require no other operand and JUMP END
never has conditions on the instruction line leading to it.
00000
00001
00002
JMP(04) 01
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
LD
JMP(04)
LD
01
00001
Instruction 1
LD
00002
015
JME(05) 01
Instruction 2
JME(05)
Diagram B: Corrected with a Jump
This version of diagram B would have a shorter execution time when 00000 was
OFF than any of the other versions.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Bit Status
The other type of jump is created with a jump number of 00. As many jumps as
desired can be created using jump number 00 and JUMP instructions using 00
can be used consecutively without a JUMP END using 00 between them. It is
even possible for all JUMP 00 instructions to move program execution to the
same JUMP END 00, i.e., only one JUMP END 00 instruction is required for all
JUMP 00 instruction in the program. When 00 is used as the jump number for a
JUMP instruction, program execution moves to the instruction following the next
JUMP END instruction with a jump number of 00. Although, as in all jumps, no
status is changed and no instructions are executed between the JUMP 00 and
JUMP END 00 instructions, the program must search for the next JUMP END 00
instruction, producing a slightly longer execution time.
Execution of programs containing multiple JUMP 00 instructions for one JUMP
END 00 instruction is similar to that of interlocked sections. The following dia-
gram is the same as that used for the interlock example above, except redrawn
with jumps. The execution of this diagram would differ from that of the diagram
described above (e.g., in the previous diagram interlocks would reset certain
parts of the interlocked section, however, jumps do not affect the status of any bit
between the JUMP and JUMP END instructions).
00000
00001
00002
JMP(04) 00
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
00012
00013
LD
JMP(04)
LD
00
Instruction 1
JMP(04) 00
00001
Instruction 1
LD
00002
00
00003
00005
00006
00004
JMP(04)
LD
Instruction 2
Instruction 3
Instruction 4
00003
00004
AND NOT
Instruction 2
LD
00005
00006
00
Instruction 3
LD
JME(05) 00
Instruction 4
JME(05)
4-8 Controlling Bit Status
There are five instructions that can be used generally to control individual bit sta-
tus. These are the OUTPUT, OUTPUT NOT, DIFFERENTIATE UP,
DIFFERENTIATE DOWN, and KEEP instructions. All of these instructions ap-
pear as the last instruction in an instruction line and take a bit address for an op-
structions (except for OUTPUT and OUTPUT NOT, which have already been in-
troduced) are described here because of their importance in most programs. Al-
though these instructions are used to turn ON and OFF output bits in the IR area
(i.e., to send or stop output signals to external devices), they are also used to
control the status of other bits in the IR area or in other data areas.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Bit Status
4-8-1 DIFFERENTIATE UP and DIFFERENTIATE DOWN
DIFFERENTIATE UP and DIFFERENTIATE DOWN instructions are used to
turn the operand bit ON for one cycle at a time. The DIFFERENTIATE UP in-
struction turns ON the operand bit for one cycle after the execution condition for
it goes from OFF to ON; the DIFFERENTIATE DOWN instruction turns ON the
operand bit for one cycle after the execution condition for it goes from ON to OFF.
Both of these instructions require only one line of mnemonic code.
00000
00001
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00200
DIFU(13) 00200
DIFD(14) 00201
00000
00001
LD
DIFU(13)
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00001
LD
00001
00201
DIFD(14)
Here, IR 00200 will be turned ON for one cycle after IR 00000 goes ON. The next
time DIFU(13) 00200 is executed, IR 00200 will be turned OFF, regardless of the
status of IR 00000. With the DIFFERENTIATE DOWN instruction, IR 00201 will
be turned ON for one cycle after IR 00001 goes OFF (IR 00201 will be kept OFF
until then), and will be turned OFF the next time DIFD(14) 00201 is executed.
4-8-2 KEEP
The KEEP instruction is used to maintain the status of the operand bit based on
two execution conditions. To do this, the KEEP instruction is connected to two
instruction lines. When the execution condition at the end of the first instruction
line is ON, the operand bit of the KEEP instruction is turned ON. When the exe-
cution condition at the end of the second instruction line is ON, the operand bit of
the KEEP instruction is turned OFF. The operand bit for the KEEP instruction will
maintain its ON or OFF status even if it is located in an interlocked section of the
diagram.
In the following example, HR 0000 will be turned ON when IR 00002 is ON and IR
00003 is OFF. HR 0000 will then remain ON until either IR 00004 or IR 00005
turns ON. With KEEP, as with all instructions requiring more than one instruction
line, the instruction lines are coded first before the instruction that they control.
00002
00003
Address Instruction
Operands
00002
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
LD
S: set input
KEEP(11)
HR 0000
AND NOT
LD
00003
00004
00005
0000
00004
00005
OR
R: reset input
KEEP(11)
HR
4-8-3 Self-maintaining Bits (Seal)
Although the KEEP instruction can be used to create self-maintaining bits, it is
sometimes necessary to create self-maintaining bits in another way so that they
can be turned OFF when in an interlocked section of a program.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Work Bits
To create a self-maintaining bit, the operand bit of an OUTPUT instruction is
used as a condition for the same OUTPUT instruction in an OR setup so that the
operand bit of the OUTPUT instruction will remain ON or OFF until changes oc-
cur in other bits. At least one other condition is used just before the OUTPUT
instruction to function as a reset. Without this reset, there would be no way to
control the operand bit of the OUTPUT instruction.
The above diagram for the KEEP instruction can be rewritten as shown below.
The only difference in these diagrams would be their operation in an interlocked
program section when the execution condition for the INTERLOCK instruction
was ON. Here, just as in the same diagram using the KEEP instruction, two reset
bits are used, i.e., HR 0000 can be turned OFF by turning ON either IR 00004 or
IR 00005.
00002
00003
00004
00005
Address Instruction
Operands
00002
HR 0000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
LD
AND NOT
OR
00003
0000
HR
HR
HR 0000
AND NOT
AND NOT
OUT
00004
00005
0000
4-9 Work Bits (Internal Relays)
In programming, combining conditions to directly produce execution conditions
is often extremely difficult. These difficulties are easily overcome, however, by
using certain bits to trigger other instructions indirectly. Such programming is
achieved by using work bits. Sometimes entire words are required for these pur-
poses. These words are referred to as work words.
Work bits are not transferred to or from the PC. They are bits selected by the
programmer to facilitate programming as described above. I/O bits and other
dedicated bits cannot be used as works bits. All bits in the IR area that are not
allocated as I/O bits, and certain unused bits in the AR area, are available for use
as work bits. Be careful to keep an accurate record of how and where you use
work bits. This helps in program planning and writing, and also aids in debugging
operations.
Work Bit Applications
Examples given later in this subsection show two of the most common ways to
employ work bits. These should act as a guide to the almost limitless number of
ways in which the work bits can be used. Whenever difficulties arise in program-
ming a control action, consideration should be given to work bits and how they
might be used to simplify programming.
Work bits are often used with the OUTPUT, OUTPUT NOT, DIFFERENTIATE
UP, DIFFERENTIATE DOWN, and KEEP instructions. The work bit is used first
as the operand for one of these instructions so that later it can be used as a con-
dition that will determine how other instructions will be executed. Work bits can
also be used with other instructions, e.g., with the SHIFT REGISTER instruction
(SFT(10)). An example of the use of work words and bits with the SHIFT REGIS-
Although they are not always specifically referred to as work bits, many of the
ing the use of these bits is essential to effective programming.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Work Bits
Reducing Complex
Conditions
Work bits can be used to simplify programming when a certain combination of
conditions is repeatedly used in combination with other conditions. In the follow-
ing example, IR 00000, IR 00001, IR 00002, and IR 00003 are combined in a
logic block that stores the resulting execution condition as the status of IR
24600. IR 24600 is then combined with various other conditions to determine
output conditions for IR 00100, IR 00101, and IR 00102, i.e., to turn the outputs
allocated to these bits ON or OFF.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00002
00003
00001
24600
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
00012
00013
00014
00015
00016
LD
AND NOT
OR
00001
00002
00003
24600
24600
00004
00005
00100
24600
00004
00005
00101
24600
00006
00007
00102
OR NOT
OUT
LD
AND
AND NOT
OUT
24600
24600
00004
00005
00005
00100
00101
LD
OR NOT
AND
OUT
LD NOT
OR
00004
24600
OR
OUT
00102
00006
00007
Differentiated Conditions
Work bits can also be used if differential treatment is necessary for some, but not
all, of the conditions required for execution of an instruction. In this example, IR
00100 must be left ON continuously as long as IR 00001 is ON and both IR
00002 and IR 00003 are OFF, or as long as IR 00004 is ON and IR 00005 is OFF.
It must be turned ON for only one cycle each time IR 00000 turns ON (unless one
of the preceding conditions is keeping it ON continuously).
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Precautions
This action is easily programmed by using IR 22500 as a work bit as the operand
of the DIFFERENTIATE UP instruction (DIFU(13)). When IR 00000 turns ON, IR
22500 will be turned ON for one cycle and then be turned OFF the next cycle by
DIFU(13). Assuming the other conditions controlling IR 00100 are not keeping it
ON, the work bit IR 22500 will turn IR 00100 ON for one cycle only.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
DIFU(13) 22500
00100
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
LD
DIFU(13)
LD
22500
22500
00001
00002
00003
---
22500
00001
00002
00003
LD
AND NOT
AND NOT
OR LD
LD
00004
00005
00004
00005
---
AND NOT
OR LD
OUT
00100
4-10 Programming Precautions
The number of conditions that can be used in series or parallel is unlimited as
long as the memory capacity of the PC is not exceeded. Therefore, use as many
conditions as required to draw a clear diagram. Although very complicated dia-
grams can be drawn with instruction lines, there must not be any conditions on
lines running vertically between two other instruction lines. Diagram A shown
below, for example, is not possible, and should be drawn as diagram B. Mne-
monic code is provided for diagram B only; coding diagram A would be impossi-
ble.
00000
00002
00003
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
00004
00001
Diagram A
00001
00004
00004
00002
00003
Address Instruction
Operands
00001
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
LD
00000
00000
AND
00004
00000
00002
OR
AND
Instruction 1
LD
00001
00000
00004
00001
00003
AND
Diagram B
OR
AND NOT
Instruction 2
The number of times any particular bit can be assigned to conditions is not lim-
ited, so use them as many times as required to simplify your program. Often,
complicated programs are the result of attempts to reduce the number of times a
bit is used.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Precautions
Except for instructions for which conditions are not allowed (e.g., INTERLOCK
CLEAR and JUMP END, see below), every instruction line must also have at
least one condition on it to determine the execution condition for the instruction
at the right. Again, diagram A , below, must be drawn as diagram B. If an instruc-
tion must be continuously executed (e.g., if an output must always be kept ON
while the program is being executed), the Always ON Flag (SR 25313) in the SR
area can be used.
Instruction
Diagram A: Incorrect
25313
Address Instruction
Operands
25313
Instruction
00000
00001
LD
Instruction
Diagram B
There are a few exceptions to this rule, including the INTERLOCK CLEAR,
JUMP END, and step instructions. Each of these instructions is used as the sec-
ond of a pair of instructions and is controlled by the execution condition of the
first of the pair. Conditions should not be placed on the instruction lines leading to
When drawing ladder diagrams, it is important to keep in mind the number of
instructions that will be required to input it. In diagram A, below, an OR LOAD
instruction will be required to combine the top and bottom instruction lines. This
can be avoided by redrawing as shown in diagram B so that no AND LOAD or OR
ples.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
00207
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
LD
LD
00001
00207
---
00001 00207
AND
OR LD
OUT
00207
Diagram A
Address Instruction
Operands
00001 00207
00000
00207
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
00001
00207
00000
002
AND
OR
OUT
Diagram B
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Program Execution
4-11 Program Execution
When program execution is started, the CPU cycles the program from top to bot-
tom, checking all conditions and executing all instructions accordingly as it
moves down the bus bar. It is important that instructions be placed in the proper
order so that, for example, the desired data is moved to a word before that word
is used as the operand for an instruction. Remember that an instruction line is
completed to the terminal instruction at the right before executing an instruction
lines branching from the first instruction line to other terminal instructions at the
right.
Program execution is only one of the tasks carried out by the CPU as part of the
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 5
Instruction Set
The C200HS PC has a large programming instruction set that allows for easy programming of complicated control processes.
This section explains instructions individually and provides the ladder diagram symbol, data areas, and flags used with each.
The C200HS can process more than 100 instructions that require function codes, but only 100 function codes (00 to 99) are
available. Some instructions, called expansion instructions, do not have fixed function codes and must be assigned function
codes from the 18 function codes set aside for expansion instructions before they can be used.
The many instructions provided by the C200HS are organized in the following subsections by instruction group. These groups
include Ladder Diagram Instructions, Bit Control Instructions, Timer and Counter Instructions, Data Shifting Instructions,
Data Movement Instructions, Data Comparison Instructions, Data Conversion Instructions, BCD Calculation Instructions,
Binary Calculation Instructions, Logic Instructions, Subroutines, Special Instructions, and Network Instructions.
Some instructions, such as Timer and Counter instructions, are used to control execution of other instructions, e.g., a TIM
Completion Flag might be used to turn ON a bit when the time period set for the timer has expired. Although these other
instructions are often used to control output bits through the Output instruction, they can be used to control execution of other
instructions as well. The Output instructions used in examples in this manual can therefore generally be replaced by other
instructions to modify the program for specific applications other than controlling output bits directly.
Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruction Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Areas, Definer Values, and Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Differentiated Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expansion Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coding Right-hand Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruction Set Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ladder Diagram Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bit Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12 END – END(01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13 NO OPERATION – NOP(00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14 Timer and Counter Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15 Data Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16 Data Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-17 Data Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18 Data Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18-12 SCALING – SCL(––) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19 BCD Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20 Binary Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-21 Special Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22 Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23 Subroutines and Interrupt Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24 Step Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25 Special Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26 Network Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27 Serial Communications Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-28 Advanced I/O Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Areas, Definer Values, and Flags
5-1 Notation
In the remainder of this manual, all instructions will be referred to by their mne-
monics. For example, the Output instruction will be called OUT; the AND Load
instruction, AND LD. If you’re not sure of the instruction a mnemonic is used for,
refer to Appendix B Programming Instructions.
If an instruction is assigned a function code, it will be given in parentheses after
the mnemonic. These function codes, which are 2-digit decimal numbers, are
used to input most instructions into the CPU and are described briefly below and
instructions listed in order of function codes, is also provided in Appendix B.
An @ before a mnemonic indicates the differentiated version of that instruction.
5-2 Instruction Format
Most instructions have at least one or more operands associated with them. Op-
erands indicate or provide the data on which an instruction is to be performed.
These are sometimes input as the actual numeric values (i.e., as constants), but
are usually the addresses of data area words or bits that contain the data to be
used. A bit whose address is designated as an operand is called an operand bit;
a word whose address is designated as an operand is called an operand word. In
some instructions, the word address designated in an instruction indicates the
first of multiple words containing the desired data.
Each instruction requires one or more words in Program Memory. The first word
is the instruction word, which specifies the instruction and contains any definers
(described below) or operand bits required by the instruction. Other operands
required by the instruction are contained in following words, one operand per
word. Some instructions require up to four words.
A definer is an operand associated with an instruction and contained in the same
word as the instruction itself. These operands define the instruction rather than
telling what data it is to use. Examples of definers are TC numbers, which are
used in timer and counter instructions to create timers and counters, as well as
jump numbers (which define which Jump instruction is paired with which Jump
End instruction). Bit operands are also contained in the same word as the in-
struction itself, although these are not considered definers.
5-3 Data Areas, Definer Values, and Flags
In this section, each instruction description includes its ladder diagram symbol,
the data areas that can be used by its operands, and the values that can be used
as definers. Details for the data areas are also specified by the operand names
and the type of data required for each operand (i.e., word or bit and, for words,
hexadecimal or BCD).
Not all addresses in the specified data areas are necessarily allowed for an oper-
and, e.g., if an operand requires two words, the last word in a data area cannot
be designated as the first word of the operand because all words for a single op-
erand must be within the same data area. Also, not all words in the SR and DM
Memory Areas for addressing conventions and the addresses of flags and con-
trol bits.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Differentiated Instructions
Caution The IR and SR areas are considered as separate data areas. If an operand has access to one
area, it doesn’t necessarily mean that the same operand will have access to the other area. The
border between the IR and SR areas can, however, be crossed for a single operand, i.e., the last
bit in the IR area may be specified for an operand that requires more than one word as long as the
SR area is also allowed for that operand.
!
The Flags subsection lists flags that are affected by execution of an instruction.
These flags include the following SR area flags.
Abbreviation
ER
Name
Instruction Execution Error Flag
Carry Flag
Bit
25503
25504
25505
25506
25507
25404
25405
CY
GR
EQ
LE
Greater Than Flag
Equals Flag
Less Than Flag
OF
UF
Overflow Flag
Underflow Flag
ER is the flag most commonly used for monitoring an instruction’s execution.
When ER goes ON, it indicates that an error has occurred in attempting to exe-
cute the current instruction. The Flags subsection of each instruction lists possi-
ble reasons for ER being ON. ER will turn ON if operands are not entered cor-
rectly. Instructions are not executed when ER is ON. A table of instructions and
the flags they affect is provided in Appendix C Error and Arithmetic Flag Opera-
tion.
Indirect Addressing
When the DM area is specified for an operand, an indirect address can be used.
Indirect DM addressing is specified by placing an asterisk before the DM: ∗DM.
When an indirect DM address is specified, the designated DM word will contain
the address of the DM word that contains the data that will be used as the operand
of the instruction. If, for example, ∗DM 0001 was designated as the first operand
and LR 00 as the second operand of MOV(21), the contents of DM 0001 was
1111, and DM 1111 contained 5555, the value 5555 would be moved to LR 00.
Word
Content
4C59
1111
MOV(21)
∗DM 0001
LR 00
DM 0000
DM 0001
DM 0002
Indirect
address
Indicates
DM 1111.
F35A
DM 1111
DM 1113
DM 1114
5555
2506
D541
5555 moved
to LR 00.
When using indirect addressing, the address of the desired word must be in BCD
and it must specify a word within the DM area. In the above example, the content
of ∗DM 0000 would have to be in BCD between 0000 and 1999.
Designating Constants
Although data area addresses are most often given as operands, many oper-
ands and all definers are input as constants. The available value range for a
given definer or operand depends on the particular instruction that uses it. Con-
stants must also be entered in the form required by the instruction, i.e., in BCD or
in hexadecimal.
5-4 Differentiated Instructions
Most instructions are provided in both differentiated and non-differentiated
forms. Differentiated instructions are distinguished by an @ in front of the in-
struction mnemonic.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Expansion Instructions
A non-differentiated instruction is executed each time it is cycled as long as its
execution condition is ON. A differentiated instruction is executed only once af-
ter its execution condition goes from OFF to ON. If the execution condition has
not changed or has changed from ON to OFF since the last time the instruction
was cycled, the instruction will not be executed. The following two examples
show how this works with MOV(21) and @MOV(21), which are used to move the
data in the address designated by the first operand to the address designated by
the second operand.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
MOV(21)
HR 10
00000
00001
LD
MOV(21)
DM 0000
Diagram A
HR
DM
10
0000
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
@MOV(21)
HR 10
00000
00001
LD
00000
@MOV(21)
DM 0000
Diagram B
HR
DM
10
0000
In diagram A, the non-differentiated MOV(21) will move the content of HR 10 to
DM 0000 whenever it is cycled with 00000. If the cycle time is 80 ms and 00000
remains ON for 2.0 seconds, this move operation will be performed 25 times and
only the last value moved to DM 0000 will be preserved there.
In diagram B, the differentiated @MOV(21) will move the content of HR 10 to DM
0000 only once after 00000 goes ON. Even if 00000 remains ON for 2.0 seconds
with the same 80 ms cycle time, the move operation will be executed only once
during the first cycle in which 00000 has changed from OFF to ON. Because the
content of HR 10 could very well change during the 2 seconds while 00000 is
ON, the final content of DM 0000 after the 2 seconds could be different depend-
ing on whether MOV(21) or @MOV(21) was used.
All operands, ladder diagram symbols, and other specifications for instructions
are the same regardless of whether the differentiated or non-differentiated form
of an instruction is used. When inputting, the same function codes are also used,
but NOT is input after the function code to designate the differentiated form of an
instruction. Most, but not all, instructions have differentiated forms.
effects of interlocks on differentiated instructions.
The C200HS also provides differentiation instructions: DIFU(13) and DIFD(14).
DIFU(13) operates the same as a differentiated instruction, but is used to turn
ON a bit for one cycle. DIFD(14) also turns ON a bit for one cycle, but does it
FERENTIATE UP and DOWN - DIFU(13) and DIFD(14) for details.
Caution Do not use SR 25313 and SR25315 for differentiated instructions. These bits
!
never change status and will not trigger differentiated instructions
5-5 Expansion Instructions
The C200HS has more instructions that require function codes (121) than func-
tion codes (100), so some instructions do not have fixed function codes. These
instructions, called expansion instructions, are listed in the following table. De-
fault function codes are given for the instructions that have them.
An expansion instruction can be assigned one of 18 function codes using the
Programming Console’s Expansion Instruction Function Code Assignments op-
eration. The 18 function codes are: 17, 18, 19, 47, 48, 60 to 69, 87, 88, and 89.
assigning function codes.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Expansion Instructions
Code
Mnemonic
(@)ASFT
(@)SCAN
Name
ASYNCHRONOUS SHIFT REGISTER
CYCLE TIME
Page
311
17
18
19
47
48
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
87
88
89
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
(@)MCMP MULTI-WORD COMPARE
(@)LMSG 32-CHARACTER MESSAGE
(@)TERM TERMINAL MODE
CMPL
DOUBLE COMPARE
(@)MPRF GROUP-2 HIGH-DENSITY I/O REFRESH
(@)XFRB
(@)LINE
TRANSFER BITS
COLUMN TO LINE
(@)COLM LINE TO COLUMN
(@)SEC
(@)HMS
(@)BCNT
HOURS TO SECONDS
SECONDS TO HOURS
BIT COUNTER
(@)BCMP BLOCK COMPARE
(@)APR
TTIM
ARITHMETIC PROCESS
TOTALIZING TIMER
ZCP
AREA RANGE COMPARE
INTERRUPT CONTROL
7-SEGMENT DISPLAY OUTPUT
DOUBLE BINARY ADD
AVERAGE VALUE
(@)INT
7SEG
(@)ADBL
AVG
CPS
SIGNED BINARY COMPARE
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY COMPARE
SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
DIGITAL SWITCH INPUT
FCS CALCULATE
CPSL
(@)DBS
(@)DBSL
DSW
(@)FCS
FPD
FAILURE POINT DETECT
ASCII-TO-HEXADECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL KEY INPUT
FIND MAXIMUM
(@)HEX
HKY
(@)MAX
(@)MBS
(@)MBSL
(@)MIN
MTR
SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
FIND MINIMUM
MATRIX INPUT
(@)NEG
(@)NEGL
PID
2’S COMPLEMENT
DOUBLE 2’S COMPLEMENT
PID CONTROL
(@)RXD
(@)SBBL
(@)SCL
RECEIVE
DOUBLE BINARY SUBTRACT
SCALING
(@)SRCH DATA SEARCH
(@)SUM
(@)TKY
(@)TXD
SUM CALCULATE
TEN KEY INPUT
TRANSMIT
(@)XDMR EXPANSION DM READ
ZCPL DOUBLE AREA RANGE COMPARE
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Coding Right-hand Instructions
5-6 Coding Right-hand Instructions
Writing mnemonic code for ladder instructions is described in Section 4 Writing
and Inputting the Program. Converting the information in the ladder diagram
symbol for all other instructions follows the same pattern, as described below,
and is not specified for each instruction individually.
The first word of any instruction defines the instruction and provides any defin-
ers. If the instruction requires only a signal bit operand with no definer, the bit
operand is also placed on the same line as the mnemonic. All other operands are
placed on lines after the instruction line, one operand per line and in the same
order as they appear in the ladder symbol for the instruction.
The address and instruction columns of the mnemonic code table are filled in for
the instruction word only. For all other lines, the left two columns are left blank. If
the instruction requires no definer or bit operand, the data column is left blank for
first line. It is a good idea to cross through any blank data column spaces (for all
instruction words that do not require data) so that the data column can be quickly
scanned to see if any addresses have been left out.
If an IR or SR address is used in the data column, the left side of the column is left
blank. If any other data area is used, the data area abbreviation is placed on the
left side and the address is place on the right side. If a constant to be input, the
number symbol (#) is placed on the left side of the data column and the number
to be input is placed on the right side. Any numbers input as definers in the in-
struction word do not require the number symbol on the right side. TC bits, once
defined as a timer or counter, take a TIM (timer) or CNT (counter) prefix.
When coding an instruction that has a function code, be sure to write in the func-
tion code, which will be necessary when inputting the instruction via the Pro-
gramming Console. Also be sure to designate the differentiated instruction with
the @ symbol.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Coding Right-hand Instructions
The following diagram and corresponding mnemonic code illustrates the points
described above.
Address Instruction
Data
00000
00001
DIFU(13) 22500
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
LD
00000
00001
00002
22500
00100
00200
01001
01002
6300
––
00002
AND
OR
00100
00200
22500
DIFU(13)
LD
BCNT(67)
#0001
01001 01002 LR 6300
AND NOT
LD
004
HR 00
AND NOT
AND NOT
OR LD
AND
LR
00005
TIM 000
#0150
22500
––
BCNT(67)
TIM 000
#
0001
004
MOV(21)
HR 00
HR
00
LR 00
00012
00013
LD
00005
000
TIM
HR 0015
00500
#
0150
000
00014
00015
LD
TIM
MOV(21)
––
HR
LR
HR
00
00
00016
00017
LD
0015
00500
OUT NOT
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Coding Right-hand Instructions
Multiple Instruction Lines
If a right-hand instruction requires multiple instruction lines (such as KEEP(11)),
all of the lines for the instruction are entered before the right-hand instruction.
Each of the lines for the instruction is coded, starting with LD or LD NOT, to form
‘logic blocks’ that are combined by the right-hand instruction. An example of this
for SFT(10) is shown below.
Address Instruction
Data
00000
00100
00001
00200
I
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
LD
00000
00001
00002
00100
00200
01001
01002
6300
––
SFT(10)
HR 00
HR 00
00002
P
R
AND
22500
LD
LD
01001 01002 LR 6300
HR 0015
AND NOT
LD
00500
AND NOT
AND NOT
OR LD
AND
LR
22500
––
SFT(10)
HR
HR
HR
00
00
00011
00012
LD
0015
00500
OUT NOT
END(01)
When you have finished coding the program, make sure you have placed
END(01) at the last address.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruction Set Lists
5-7 Instruction Set Lists
This section provides tables of the instructions available in the C200HS. The first
table can be used to find instructions by function code. The second table can be
used to find instruction by mnemonic. In both tables, the @ symbol indicates in-
structions with differentiated variations.
5-7-1 Function Codes
The following table lists the instructions that have fixed function codes. Each in-
struction is listed by mnemonic and by instruction name. Use the numbers in the
leftmost column as the left digit and the number in the column heading as the
right digit of the function code.
Right digit
Left
digit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NOP
NO
OPERATION
END
END
IL
ILC
INTERLOCK
CLEAR
JMP
JUMP
JME
JUMP END
(@) FAL
FALS
STEP
STEP
DEFINE
SNXT
STEP START
0
1
INTERLOCK
FAILURE
ALARM AND
RESET
SEVERE
FAILURE
ALARM
SFT
SHIFT
REGISTER
KEEP
KEEP
CNTR
REVERS-
IBLE
DIFU
DIFFEREN-
TIATE UP
DIFD
DIFFEREN-
TIATE DOWN SPEED
TIMER
TIMH
HIGH-
(@) WSFT
WORD
SHIFT
(@) ASFT
(@) SCAN
CYCLE TIME
(@) MCMP
MULTI-
WORD
ASYNCHRO-
NOUS SHIFT
REGISTER
COUNTER
COMPARE
CMP
COMPARE
(@) MOV
MOVE
(@) MVN
MOVE NOT
(@) BIN
BCD TO
BINARY
(@) BCD
BINARY TO
BCD
(@) ASL
SHIFT LEFT
(@) ASR
SHIFT
RIGHT
(@) ROL
ROTATE
LEFT
(@) ROR
ROTATE
RIGHT
(@) COM
COMPLE-
MENT
2
3
4
(@) ADD
BCD ADD
(@) SUB
BCD
SUBTRACT
(@) MUL
BCD
MULTIPLY
(@) DIV
BCD
DIVIDE
(@) ANDW
LOGICAL
AND
(@) ORW
LOGICAL OR EXCLUSIVE
OR
(@) XORW
(@) XNRW
EXCLUSIVE
NOR
(@) INC
INCREMENT
(@) DEC
DECRE-
MENT
(@) STC
SET CARRY
(@) CLC
CLEAR
CARRY
---
---
---
TRSM
(@) MSG
MESSAGE
DISPLAY
(@) LMSG
LONG MES-
SAGE
(@) TERM
TERMINAL
MODE
---
TRACE
MEMORY
SAMPLE
(@) ADB
BINARY ADD
(@) SBB
BINARY
SUBTRACT
(@) MLB
BINARY
MULTIPLY
(@) DVB
BINARY
DIVIDE
(@) ADDL
DOUBLE
BCD ADD
(@) SUBL
DOUBLE
BCD
(@) MULL
DOUBLE
BCD
(@) DIVL
DOUBLE
BCD
(@) BINL
DOUBLE
BCD-TO-
DOUBLE
BINARY
(@) BCDL
DOUBLE
BINARY-TO-
DOUBLE
BCD
5
SUBTRACT
MULTIPLY
DIVIDE
CMPL
DOUBLE
COMPARE
(@) MPRF
TRANSFER
BITS
(@) XFRB
TRANSFER
BITS
(@) LINE
COLUMN TO
LINE
(@) COLM
LINE TO
COLUMN
(@) SEC
HOURS-TO-
SECONDS
(@) HMS
SECONDS-
TO-HOURS
(@) BCNT
BIT
COUNTER
(@) BCMP
BLOCK
COMPARE
(@) APR
ARITHMETIC
PROCESS
6
7
(@) XFER
BLOCK
TRANSFER
(@) BSET
BLOCK SET
(@) ROOT
SQUARE
ROOT
(@) XCHG
DATA
EXCHANGE
(@) SLD
ONE DIGIT
SHIFT LEFT
(@) SRD
ONE DIGIT
SHIFT
(@) MLPX
4-TO-16
DECODER
(@) DMPX
16-TO-4
ENCODER
(@) SDEC
7-SEGMENT
DECODER
(@) FDIV
FLOATING
POINT
RIGHT
DIVIDE
(@) DIST
SINGLE
WORD
(@) COLL
DATA
COLLECT
(@) MOVB
MOVE BIT
(@) MOVD
MOVE DIGIT
(@) SFTR
REVERS-
IBLE SHIFT
REGISTER
(@) TCMP
TABLE
COMPARE
(@) ASC
ASCII
CONVERT
TTIM
TOTALIZING
COUNTER
ZCP
AREA
RANGE
COMPARE
(@) INT
INTERRUPT
CONTROL
8
9
DISTRIBUTE
(@) SEND
NETWORK
SEND
(@) SBS
SUBROU-
TINE
SBN
SUBROU-
TINE
RET
SUBROU-
TINE
(@) WDT
WATCHDOG
TIMER
---
---
(@) IORF
I/O
REFRESH
(@) RECV
NETWORK
RECEIVE
(@) MCRO
MACRO
ENTRY
DEFINE
RETURN
REFRESH
5-7-2 Alphabetic List by Mnemonic
Mnemonic
7SEG
Code
––
Words
Name
Page
4
7-SEGMENT DISPLAY OUTPUT
BINARY ADD
ADB (@)
ADBL (@)
ADD (@)
ADDL (@)
AND
50
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
––
DOUBLE BINARY ADD
BCD ADD
30
54
DOUBLE BCD ADD
AND
None
None
None
34
AND LD
AND LOAD
AND NOT
ANDW (@)
APR (@)
ASC (@)
ASFT(@)
AND NOT
LOGICAL AND
69
ARITHMETIC PROCESS
ASCII CONVERT
86
17
ASYNCHRONOUS SHIFT REGISTER
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruction Set Lists
Mnemonic
ASL (@)
Code
25
Words
Name
Page
2
ARITHMETIC SHIFT LEFT
ARITHMETIC SHIFT RIGHT
AVERAGE VALUE
ASR (@)
AVG (@)
BCD (@)
BCDL (@)
BCMP (@)
BCNT (@)
BIN (@)
BINL (@)
BSET (@)
CLC (@)
CMP
26
––
24
59
68
67
23
58
71
41
20
60
None
12
81
64
29
––
––
––
––
39
14
13
80
33
57
77
––
53
01
06
07
––
79
––
––
––
66
02
03
38
89
97
05
04
11
2
4
3
3
4
4
3
3
4
1
3
4
2
3
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
2
4
3
2
2
2
1
BINARY TO BCD
DOUBLE BINARY-TO-DOUBLE BCD
BLOCK COMPARE
BIT COUNTER
BCD-TO-BINARY
DOUBLE BCD-TO-DOUBLE BINARY
BLOCK SET
CLEAR CARRY
COMPARE
CMPL
DOUBLE COMPARE
COUNTER
CNT
CNTR
REVERSIBLE COUNTER
DATA COLLECT
COLL (@)
COLM(@)
COM (@)
CPS
LINE TO COLUMN
COMPLEMENT
SIGNED BINARY COMPARE
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY COMPARE
SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE
BCD DECREMENT
DIFFERENTIATE DOWN
DIFFERENTIATE UP
SINGLE WORD DISTRIBUTE
BCD DIVIDE
CPSL
DBS (@)
DBSL (@)
DEC (@)
DIFD
DIFU
DIST (@)
DIV (@)
DIVL (@)
DMPX (@)
DSW
DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE
16-TO-4 ENCODER
DIGITAL SWITCH
DVB (@)
END
BINARY DIVIDE
END
FAL (@)
FALS
FAILURE ALARM AND RESET
SEVERE FAILURE ALARM
FCS CALCULATE
FCS (@)
FDIV (@)
FPD
FLOATING POINT DIVIDE
FAILURE POINT DETECT
ASCII-TO-HEXADECIMAL
HEXADECIMAL KEY INPUT
SECONDS TO HOURS
INTERLOCK
HEX (@)
HKY
HMS (@)
IL
ILC
INTERLOCK CLEAR
INCREMENT
INC (@)
INT (@)
IORF (@)
JME
INTERRUPT CONTROL
I/O REFRESH
JUMP END
JMP
JUMP
KEEP
KEEP
LD
None
LOAD
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruction Set Lists
Mnemonic
LD NOT
Code
None
Words
Name
Page
211
1
LOAD NOT
LINE (@)
LMSG (@)
MAX (@)
MBS (@)
MBSL (@)
MCMP (@)
MCRO (@)
MIN (@)
MLB (@)
MLPX (@)
MOV (@)
MOVB (@)
MOVD (@)
MPRF (@)
MSG (@)
MTR
63
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
3
4
4
1
1
1
1
4
2
2
4
4
1
2
3
2
2
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
2
3
4
COLUMN TO LINE
47
32-CHARACTER MESSAGE
FIND MAXIMUM
––
––
SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
––
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY
MULTI-WORD COMPARE
MACRO
19
99
––
FIND MINIMUM
52
BINARY MULTIPLY
4-TO-16 DECODER
MOVE
76
21
82
MOVE BIT
83
MOVE DIGIT
61
GROUP-2 HIGH-DENSITY I/O REFRESH
MESSAGE
46
––
MATRIX INPUT
MUL (@)
MULL (@)
MVN (@)
NEG (@)
NEGL (@)
NOP
32
BCD MULTIPLY
56
DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY
MOVE NOT
22
––
2’S COMPLEMENT
DOUBLE 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO OPERATION
OR
––
00
OR
None
None
None
35
OR LD
OR LOAD
OR NOT
ORW (@)
OUT
OR NOT
LOGICAL OR
None
None
––
OUTPUT
OUT NOT
PID (@)
RECV (@)
RET
OUTPUT NOT
PID CONTROL
98
NETWORK RECEIVE (CPU31-E/33-E only)
SUBROUTINE RETURN
ROTATE LEFT
93
ROL (@)
ROOT (@)
ROR (@)
RSET
27
72
SQUARE ROOT
28
ROTATE RIGHT
None
––
RESET
RXD(@)
SBB (@)
SBBL (@)
SBN
RECEIVE
51
BINARY SUBTRACT
DOUBLE BINARY SUBTRACT
SUBROUTINE DEFINE
SUBROUTINE ENTRY
CYCLE TIME
––
92
SBS (@)
SCAN (@)
SCL (@)
SDEC (@)
SEC (@)
SEND (@)
SET
91
18
––
SCALING
78
7-SEGMENT DECODER
HOURS TO SECONDS
NETWORK SEND (CPU31-E/33-E only)
SET
65
90
None
10
SFT
SHIFT REGISTER
REVERSIBLE SHIFT REGISTER
SFTR (@)
84
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruction Set Lists
Mnemonic
SLD (@)
Code
74
Words
Name
Page
311
3
ONE DIGIT SHIFT LEFT
STEP START
SNXT
09
––
75
40
08
31
55
––
85
48
None
15
––
45
87
––
94
16
73
––
70
62
37
36
88
––
2
4
3
1
2
4
4
4
4
4
2
3
4
1
4
4
2
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
SRCH (@)
SRD (@)
STC (@)
STEP
DATA SEARCH
ONE DIGIT SHIFT RIGHT
SET CARRY
STEP DEFINE
SUB (@)
SUBL (@)
SUM (@)
TCMP (@)
TERM (@)
TIM
BCD SUBTRACT
DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT
SUM CALCULATION
TABLE COMPARE
TERMINAL MODE
TIMER
TIMH
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
TEN KEY INPUT
TRACE MEMORY SAMPLE
TOTALIZING TIMER
TRANSMIT
TKY (@)
TRSM
TTIM
TXD (@)
WDT (@)
WSFT (@)
XCHG (@)
XDMR (@)
XFER (@)
XFRB (@)
XNRW (@)
XORW (@)
ZCP
WATCHDOG TIMER REFRESH
WORD SHIFT
DATA EXCHANGE
EXPANSION DM READ
BLOCK TRANSFER
TRANSFER BITS
EXCLUSIVE NOR
EXCLUSIVE OR
AREA RANGE COMPARE
DOUBLE AREA RANGE COMPARE
ZCPL
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ladder Diagram Instructions
5-8 Ladder Diagram Instructions
Ladder Diagram instructions include Ladder instructions and Logic Block
instructions and correspond to the conditions on the ladder diagram. Logic block
instructions are used to relate more complex parts.
5-8-1 LOAD, LOAD NOT, AND, AND NOT, OR, and OR NOT
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
B: Bit
B
LOAD – LD
IR, SR, AR, HR, TC, LR, TR
B: Bit
B
B
B
LOAD NOT – LD NOT
IR, SR, AR, HR, TC, LR
B: Bit
AND – AND
IR, SR, AR, HR, TC, LR
B: Bit
AND NOT – AND NOT
OR – OR
IR, SR, AR, HR, TC, LR
B: Bit
B
B
IR, SR, AR, HR, TC, LR
B: Bit
OR NOT – OR NOT
Limitations
IR, SR, AR, HR, TC, LR
There is no limit to the number of any of these instructions, or restrictions in the
order in which they must be used, as long as the memory capacity of the PC is
not exceeded.
Description
These six basic instructions correspond to the conditions on a ladder diagram.
bits assigned to each instruction determines the execution conditions for all
other instructions. Each of these instructions and each bit address can be used
as many times as required. Each can be used in as many of these instructions as
required.
The status of the bit operand (B) assigned to LD or LD NOT determines the first
execution condition. AND takes the logical AND between the execution condi-
tion and the status of its bit operand; AND NOT, the logical AND between the
execution condition and the inverse of the status of its bit operand. OR takes the
logical OR between the execution condition and the status of its bit operand; OR
NOT, the logical OR between the execution condition and the inverse of the
status of its bit operand. The ladder symbol for loading TR bits is different from
Flags
There are no flags affected by these instructions.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bit Control Instructions
5-8-2 AND LOAD and OR LOAD
AND LOAD – AND LD
00000
00001
00002
00003
Ladder Symbol
OR LOAD – OR LD
00000
00002
00001
Ladder Symbol
00003
Description
When instructions are combined into blocks that cannot be logically combined
using only OR and AND operations, AND LD and OR LD are used. Whereas
AND and OR operations logically combine a bit status and an execution condi-
tion, AND LD and OR LD logically combine two execution conditions, the current
one and the last unused one.
In order to draw ladder diagrams, it is not necessary to use AND LD and OR LD
instructions, nor are they necessary when inputting ladder diagrams directly, as
is possible from LSS. They are required, however, to convert the program to and
input it in mnemonic form. The procedures for these, limitations for different pro-
the Program.
In order to reduce the number of programming instructions required, a basic un-
derstanding of logic block instructions is required. For an introduction to logic
Flags
There are no flags affected by these instructions.
5-9 Bit Control Instructions
There are five instructions that can be used generally to control individual bit
status. These are OUT, OUT NOT, DIFU(13), DIFD(14), and KEEP(11). These
instructions are used to turn bits ON and OFF in different ways.
5-9-1 OUTPUT and OUTPUT NOT – OUT and OUT NOT
OUTPUT – OUT
Ladder Symbol
Ladder Symbol
Operand Data Areas
B: Bit
B
B
IR, SR, AR, HR, TC, LR, TR
OUTPUT NOT – OUT NOT
Operand Data Areas
B: Bit
IR, SR, AR, HR, TC, LR
Limitations
Description
Any output bit can generally be used in only one instruction that controls its sta-
OUT and OUT NOT are used to control the status of the designated bit according
to the execution condition.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bit Control Instructions
OUT turns ON the designated bit for an ON execution condition, and turns OFF
the designated bit for an OFF execution condition. With a TR bit, OUT appears at
a branching point rather than at the end of an instruction line. Refer to 4-7-7
Branching Instruction Lines for details.
OUT NOT turns ON the designated bit for a OFF execution condition, and turns
OFF the designated bit for an ON execution condition.
OUT and OUT NOT can be used to control execution by turning ON and OFF bits
that are assigned to conditions on the ladder diagram, thus determining execu-
tion conditions for other instructions. This is particularly helpful and allows a
complex set of conditions to be used to control the status of a single work bit, and
then that work bit can be used to control other instructions.
The length of time that a bit is ON or OFF can be controlled by combining the
details.
Flags
There are no flags affected by these instructions.
5-9-2 DIFFERENTIATE UP and DOWN – DIFU(13) and DIFD(14)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
B: Bit
DIFU(13) B
IR, AR, HR, LR
B: Bit
DIFD(14) B
IR, AR, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
Any output bit can generally be used in only one instruction that controls its sta-
DIFU(13) and DIFD(14) are used to turn the designated bit ON for one cycle
only.
Whenever executed, DIFU(13) compares its current execution with the previous
execution condition. If the previous execution condition was OFF and the cur-
rent one is ON, DIFU(13) will turn ON the designated bit. If the previous execu-
tion condition was ON and the current execution condition is either ON or OFF,
DIFU(13) will either turn the designated bit OFF or leave it OFF (i.e., if the desig-
nated bit is already OFF). The designated bit will thus never be ON for longer
than one cycle, assuming it is executed each cycle (see Precautions, below).
Whenever executed, DIFD(14) compares its current execution with the previous
execution condition. If the previous execution condition was ON and the current
one is OFF, DIFD(14) will turn ON the designated bit. If the previous execution
condition was OFF and the current execution condition is either ON or OFF,
DIFD(14) will either turn the designated bit OFF or leave it OFF. The designated
bit will thus never be ON for longer than one cycle, assuming it is executed each
cycle (see Precautions, below).
These instructions are used when differentiated instructions (i.e., those prefixed
with an @) are not available and single-cycle execution of a particular instruction
is desired. They can also be used with non-differentiated forms of instructions
that have differentiated forms when their use will simplify programming. Exam-
ples of these are shown below.
Flags
There are no flags affected by these instructions.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bit Control Instructions
Precautions
DIFU(13) and DIFD(14) operation can be uncertain when the instructions are
programmed between IL and ILC, between JMP and JME, or in subroutines. Re-
rupt Control for details.
Example 1:
When There is No
Differentiated Instruction
In diagram A, below, whenever CMP(20) is executed with an ON execution con-
dition it will compare the contents of the two operand words (HR 10 and DM
0000) and set the arithmetic flags (GR, EQ, and LE) accordingly. If the execution
condition remains ON, flag status may be changed each cycle if the content of
one or both operands change. Diagram B, however, is an example of how
DIFU(13) can be used to ensure that CMP(20) is executed only once each time
the desired execution condition goes ON.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
CMP(20)
HR 10
00000
00001
LD
CMP(20)
DM 0000
Diagram A
HR
DM
10
0000
00000
22500
DIFU(13) 22500
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
00000
22500
22500
CMP(20)
HR 10
DIFU(13)
LD
DM 0000
Diagram B
CMP(20)
HR
DM
10
0000
Example 2:
Simplifying Programming
Although a differentiated form of MOV(21) is available, the following diagram
would be very complicated to draw using it because only one of the conditions
determining the execution condition for MOV(21) requires differentiated treat-
ment.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
DIFU(13) 22500
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
LD
DIFU(13)
LD
22500
22500
00001
00002
00003
---
22500
MOV(21)
HR 10
00001
00002
00003
LD
AND NOT
AND NOT
OR LD
LD
DM 0000
00004
00005
00004
00005
---
AND NOT
OR LD
MOV(21)
HR
DM
10
0000
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bit Control Instructions
5-9-3 SET and RESET – SET and RSET
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
B: Bit
SET B
IR, SR, AR, HR, LR
B: Bit
RSET B
IR, SR, AR, HR, LR
Description
SET turns the operand bit ON when the execution condition is ON, and does not
affect the status of the operand bit when the execution condition is OFF. RSET
turns the operand bit OFF when the execution condition is ON, and does not af-
fect the status of the operand bit when the execution condition is OFF.
The operation of SET differs from that of OUT because the OUT instruction turns
the operand bit OFF when its execution condition is OFF. Likewise, RSET differs
from OUT NOT because OUT NOT turns the operand bit ON when its execution
condition is OFF.
Precautions
The status of operand bits for SET and RSET programmed between IL(02) and
ILC(03) or JMP(04) and JME(05) will not change when the interlock or jump con-
dition is met (i.e., when IL(02) or JMP(04) is executed with an OFF execution
condition).
Flags
There are no flags affected by these instructions.
Examples
The following examples demonstrate the difference between OUT and SET/
RSET. In the first example (Diagram A), IR 10000 will be turned ON or OFF
whenever IR 00000 goes ON or OFF.
In the second example (Diagram B), IR 10000 will be turned ON when IR 00001
goes ON and will remain ON (even if IR 00001 goes OFF) until IR 00002 goes
ON.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
10000
10000
00000
00001
LD
OUT
Diagram A
00001
00002
SET 10000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
00001
10000
00002
10000
RSET 10000
SET
LD
Diagram B
RSET
5-9-4 KEEP – KEEP(11)
Ladder Symbol
Operand Data Areas
S
R
KEEP(11)
B
B: Bit
IR, AR, HR, LR
Limitations
Any output bit can generally be used in only one instruction that controls its sta-
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bit Control Instructions
Description
KEEP(11) is used to maintain the status of the designated bit based on two exe-
cution conditions. These execution conditions are labeled S and R. S is the set
input; R, the reset input. KEEP(11) operates like a latching relay that is set by S
and reset by R.
When S turns ON, the designated bit will go ON and stay ON until reset, regard-
less of whether S stays ON or goes OFF. When R turns ON, the designated bit
will go OFF and stay OFF until reset, regardless of whether R stays ON or goes
OFF. The relationship between execution conditions and KEEP(11) bit status is
shown below.
S execution condition
R execution condition
Status of B
ing Bits. The following two diagrams would function identically, though the one
using KEEP(11) requires one less instruction to program and would maintain
status even in an interlocked program section.
00002
00500
00003
Address Instruction
Operands
00002
00500
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
OR
00500
00003
00500
AND NOT
OUT
00002
00003
Address Instruction
Operands
S
R
00000
00001
00002
LD
00002
00003
00500
KEEP(11)
LD
B
KEEP(11)
Flags
There are no flags affected by this instruction.
Precautions
Exercise caution when using a KEEP reset line that is controlled by an external
normally closed device. Never use an input bit in an inverse condition on the re-
set (R) for KEEP(11) when the input device uses an AC power supply. The delay
in shutting down the PC’s DC power supply (relative to the AC power supply to
the input device) can cause the designated bit of KEEP(11) to be reset. This situ-
ation is shown below.
Input Unit
A
S
KEEP(11)
NEVER
B
A
R
and INTERLOCK CLEAR IL(02) and ILC(03) for details.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR – IL(02) and ILC(03)
Example
If a HR bit or an AR bit is used, bit status will be retained even during a power
interruption. KEEP(11) can thus be used to program bits that will maintain status
after restarting the PC following a power interruption. An example of this that can
be used to produce a warning display following a system shutdown for an emer-
gency situation is shown below. Bits 00002, 00003, and 00004 would be turned
ON to indicate some type of error. Bit 00005 would be turned ON to reset the
warning display. HR 0000, which is turned ON when any one of the three bits
indicates an emergency situation, is used to turn ON the warning indicator
through 00500.
00002
00003
00004
S
Address Instruction
Operands
00002
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
LD
KEEP(11)
OR
00003
00004
00005
0000
Indicates
emergency
situation
B
OR
LD
R
KEEP(11)
LD
HR
HR
0000
Reset input
00005
OUT
00500
HR 0000
Activates
warning
display
00500
KEEP(11) can also be combined with TIM to produce delays in turning bits ON
5-10 INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR – IL(02) and ILC(03)
Ladder Symbol
IL(02)
Ladder Symbol
ILC(03)
Description
IL(02) is always used in conjunction with ILC(03) to create interlocks. Interlocks
are used to enable branching in the same way as can be achieved with TR bits,
but treatment of instructions between IL(02) and ILC(03) differs from that with
TR bits when the execution condition for IL(02) is OFF. If the execution condition
of IL(02) is ON, the program will be executed as written, with an ON execution
condition used to start each instruction line from the point where IL(02) is located
descriptions of both methods.
If the execution condition for IL(02) is OFF, the interlocked section between
IL(02) and ILC(03) will be treated as shown in the following table:
Instruction
OUT and OUT NOT
Treatment
Designated bit turned OFF.
Bit status maintained.
Reset.
SET and RSET
TIM and TIMH(15)
TTIM(87)
PV maintained.
CNT, CNTR(12)
KEEP(11)
PV maintained.
Bit status maintained.
Not executed (see below).
Not executed.
DIFU(13) and DIFD(14)
All others
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERLOCK and INTERLOCK CLEAR – IL(02) and ILC(03)
IL(02) and ILC(03) do not necessarily have to be used in pairs. IL(02) can be
used several times in a row, with each IL(02) creating an interlocked section
through the next ILC(03). ILC(03) cannot be used unless there is at least one
IL(02) between it and any previous ILC(03).
DIFU(13) and DIFD(14) in
Interlocks
Changes in the execution condition for a DIFU(13) or DIFD(14) are not recorded
if the DIFU(13) or DIFD(14) is in an interlocked section and the execution condi-
tion for the IL(02) is OFF. When DIFU(13) or DIFD(14) is execution in an inter-
locked section immediately after the execution condition for the IL(02) has gone
ON, the execution condition for the DIFU(13) or DIFD(14) will be compared to
the execution condition that existed before the interlock became effective (i.e.,
before the interlock condition for IL(02) went OFF). The ladder diagram and bit
status changes for this are shown below. The interlock is in effect while 00000 is
OFF. Notice that 01000 is not turned ON at the point labeled A even though
00001 has turned OFF and then back ON.
00000
00001
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
IL(02)
DIFU(13) 01000
ILC(03)
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
LD
IL(02)
LD
00001
01000
DIFU(13)
ILC(03)
A
ON
OFF
00000
ON
00001
01000
OFF
ON
OFF
Precautions
There must be an ILC(03) following any one or more IL(02).
Although as many IL(02) instructions as are necessary can be used with one
ILC(03), ILC(03) instructions cannot be used consecutively without at least one
IL(02) in between, i.e., nesting is not possible. Whenever a ILC(03) is executed,
all interlocks between the active ILC(03) and the preceding ILC(03) are cleared.
When more than one IL(02) is used with a single ILC(03), an error message will
appear when the program check is performed, but execution will proceed nor-
mally.
Flags
There are no flags affected by these instructions.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JUMP and JUMP END – JMP(04) and JME(05)
Example
The following diagram shows IL(02) being used twice with one ILC(03).
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00001
IL(02)
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
00000
IL(02)
LD
TIM 511
00001
511
#0015
001.5 s
TIM
00002
#
0015
IL(02)
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
LD
00002
00003
00100
00004
IL(02)
LD
CP
R
CNT
001
IR 010
00003
00004
001
AND NOT
CNT
010
00005
00009
00010
00011
LD
00005
00502
00502
OUT
ILC(03)
ILC(03)
When the execution condition for the first IL(02) is OFF, TIM 511 will be reset to
1.5 s, CNT 001 will not be changed, and 00502 will be turned OFF. When the
execution condition for the first IL(02) is ON and the execution condition for the
second IL(02) is OFF, TIM 511 will be executed according to the status of 00001,
CNT 001 will not be changed, and 00502 will be turned OFF. When the execution
conditions for both the IL(02) are ON, the program will execute as written.
5-11 JUMP and JUMP END – JMP(04) and JME(05)
Ladder Symbols
Definer Values
N: Jump number
JMP(04) N
# (00 to 99)
N: Jump number
JME(05) N
# (00 to 99)
Limitations
Description
Jump numbers 01 through 99 may be used only once in JMP(04) and once in
JME(05), i.e., each can be used to define one jump only. Jump number 00 can be
used as many times as desired.
JMP(04) is always used in conjunction with JME(05) to create jumps, i.e., to skip
from one point in a ladder diagram to another point. JMP(04) defines the point
from which the jump will be made; JME(05) defines the destination of the jump.
When the execution condition for JMP(04) in ON, no jump is made and the pro-
gram is executed consecutively as written. When the execution condition for
JMP(04) is OFF, a jump is made to the JME(05) with the same jump number and
the instruction following JME(05) is executed next.
If the jump number for JMP(04) is between 01 and 99, jumps, when made, will go
immediately to JME(05) with the same jump number without executing any in-
structions in between. The status of timers, counters, bits used in OUT, bits used
in OUT NOT, and all other status bits controlled by the instructions between
JMP(04) and JMP(05) will not be changed. Each of these jump numbers can be
used to define only one jump. Because all of instructions between JMP(04) and
JME(05) are skipped, jump numbers 01 through 99 can be used to reduce cycle
time.
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer and Counter Instructions
If the jump number for JMP(04) is 00, the CPU will look for the next JME(05) with
a jump number of 00. To do so, it must search through the program, causing a
longer cycle time (when the execution condition is OFF) than for other jumps.
The status of timers, counters, bits used in OUT, bits used in OUT NOT, and all
other status controlled by the instructions between JMP(04) 00 and JMP(05) 00
will not be changed. jump number 00 can be used as many times as desired. A
jump from JMP(04) 00 will always go to the next JME(05) 00 in the program. It is
thus possible to use JMP(04) 00 consecutively and match them all with the same
JME(05) 00. It makes no sense, however, to use JME(05) 00 consecutively, be-
cause all jumps made to them will end at the first JME(05) 00.
DIFU(13) and DIFD(14) in
Jumps
Although DIFU(13) and DIFD(14) are designed to turn ON the designated bit for
one cycle, they will not necessarily do so when written between JMP(04) and
JMP (05). Once either DIFU(13) or DIFD(14) has turned ON a bit, it will remain
ON until the next time DIFU(13) or DIFD(14) is executed again. In normal pro-
gramming, this means the next cycle. In a jump, this means the next time the
jump from JMP(04) to JME(05) is not made, i.e., if a bit is turned ON by DIFU(13)
or DIFD(14) and then a jump is made in the next cycle so that DIFU(13) or
DIFD(14) are skipped, the designated bit will remain ON until the next time the
execution condition for the JMP(04) controlling the jump is ON.
Precautions
When JMP(04) and JME(05) are not used in pairs, an error message will appear
when the program check is performed. Although this message also appears if
JMP(04) 00 and JME(05) 00 are not used in pairs, the program will execute prop-
erly as written.
Flags
There are no flags affected by these instructions.
Examples
5-12 END – END(01)
Ladder Symbol
END(01)
Description
END(01) is required as the last instruction in any program. If there are subrou-
tines, END(01) is placed after the last subroutine. No instruction written after
END(01) will be executed. END(01) can be placed anywhere in the program to
execute all instructions up to that point, as is sometimes done to debug a pro-
gram, but it must be removed to execute the remainder of the program.
If there is no END(01) in the program, no instructions will be executed and the
error message “NO END INST” will appear.
Flags
END(01) turns OFF the ER, CY, GR, EQ, and LE Flags.
5-13 NO OPERATION – NOP(00)
Description
NOP(00) is not generally required in programming and there is no ladder symbol
for it. When NOP(00) is found in a program, nothing is executed and the program
execution moves to the next instruction. When memory is cleared prior to pro-
gramming, NOP(00) is written at all addresses. NOP(00) can be input through
the 00 function code.
Flags
There are no flags affected by NOP(00).
5-14 Timer and Counter Instructions
TIM and TIMH are decrementing ON-delay timer instructions which require a TC
number and a set value (SV).
CNT is a decrementing counter instruction and CNTR is a reversible counter in-
struction. Both require a TC number and a SV. Both are also connected to multi-
ple instruction lines which serve as an input signal(s) and a reset.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer and Counter Instructions
Any one TC number cannot be defined twice, i.e., once it has been used as the
definer in any of the timer or counter instructions, it cannot be used again. Once
defined, TC numbers can be used as many times as required as operands in
instructions other than timer and counter instructions.
TC numbers run from 000 through 511. No prefix is required when using a TC
number as a definer in a timer or counter instruction. Once defined as a timer, a
TC number can be prefixed with TIM for use as an operand in certain instruc-
tions. The TIM prefix is used regardless of the timer instruction that was used to
define the timer. Once defined as a counter, a TC number can be prefixed with
CNT for use as an operand in certain instructions. The CNT is also used regard-
less of the counter instruction that was used to define the counter.
TC numbers can be designated as operands that require either bit or word data.
When designated as an operand that requires bit data, the TC number accesses
a bit that functions as a ‘Completion Flag’ that indicates when the time/count has
expired, i.e., the bit, which is normally OFF, will turn ON when the designated SV
has expired. When designated as an operand that requires word data, the TC
number accesses a memory location that holds the present value (PV) of the
timer or counter. The PV of a timer or counter can thus be used as an operand in
CMP(20), or any other instruction for which the TC area is allowed. This is done
by designating the TC number used to define that timer or counter to access the
memory location that holds the PV.
Note that “TIM 000” is used to designate the TIMER instruction defined with TC
number 000, to designate the Completion Flag for this timer, and to designate
the PV of this timer. The meaning of the term in context should be clear, i.e., the
first is always an instruction, the second is always a bit operand, and the third is
always a word operand. The same is true of all other TC numbers prefixed with
TIM or CNT.
An SV can be input as a constant or as a word address in a data area. If an IR
area word assigned to an Input Unit is designated as the word address, the Input
Unit can be wired so that the SV can be set externally through thumbwheel
switches or similar devices. Timers and counters wired in this way can only be
set externally during RUN or MONITOR mode. All SVs, including those set ex-
ternally, must be in BCD.
5-14-1 TIMER – TIM
Definer Values
N: TC number
Ladder Symbol
# (000 through 511)
TIM N
SV
Operand Data Areas
SV: Set value (word, BCD)
IR, AR, DM, HR, LR, #
Limitations
Description
SV is between 000.0 and 999.9. The decimal point is not entered.
Each TC number can be used as the definer in only one TIMER or COUNTER
instruction.
TC 000 through TC 015 should not be used in TIM if they are required for
A timer is activated when its execution condition goes ON and is reset (to SV)
when the execution condition goes OFF. Once activated, TIM measures in units
of 0.1 second from the SV.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer and Counter Instructions
If the execution condition remains ON long enough for TIM to time down to zero,
the Completion Flag for the TC number used will turn ON and will remain ON
until TIM is reset (i.e., until its execution condition is goes OFF).
The following figure illustrates the relationship between the execution condition
for TIM and the Completion Flag assigned to it.
ON
Execution condition
OFF
ON
Completion Flag
OFF
SV
SV
Precautions
Timers in interlocked program sections are reset when the execution condition
for IL(02) is OFF. Power interruptions also reset timers. If a timer that is not reset
under these conditions is desired, SR area clock pulse bits can be counted to
Program execution will continue even if a non-BCD SV is used, but timing will not
be accurate.
The SV of the timers can be set in the range #0000 to #9999 (BCD). If the SV for a
timer is set to #0000 or #0001, it will operate in the following way. If the SV is set
to #0000, when the timer input goes from OFF to ON, the Completion Flag will
turn ON. If the SV is set to #0001, because the timer accuracy is 0 to –0.1 s, the
actual time will be a value between 0 and 0.1 s, and the Completion Flag may
turn ON as soon as the timer input goes from OFF to ON. With other values also,
allow for a timer accuracy of 0 to –0.1 s when setting the SV.
Flags
ER:
SV is not in BCD.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
Examples
All of the following examples use OUT in diagrams that would generally be used
to control output bits in the IR area. There is no reason, however, why these dia-
grams cannot be modified to control execution of other instructions.
Example 1:
Basic Application
The following example shows two timers, one set with a constant and one set via
input word 005. Here, 00200 will be turned ON after 00000 goes ON and stays
ON for at least 15 seconds. When 00000 goes OFF, the timer will be reset and
00200 will be turned OFF. When 00001 goes ON, TIM 001 is started from the SV
provided through IR word 005. Bit 00201 is also turned ON when 00001 goes
ON. When the SV in 005 has expired, 00201 is turned OFF. This bit will also be
turned OFF when TIM 001 is reset, regardless of whether or not SV has expired.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
TIM 000
#0150
00000
00001
LD
015.0 s
TIM
000
0150
000
TIM 000
00001
#
00200
00002
00003
00004
00005
LD
TIM
OUT
LD
00200
00001
001
TIM 001
IR 005
IR 005
TIM
005
TIM 001
00006
00007
AND NOT
OUT
TIM
001
00201
00200
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer and Counter Instructions
Example 2:
Extended Timers
There are two ways to achieve timers that operate for longer than 999.9 sec-
onds. One method is to program consecutive timers, with the Completion Flag of
each timer used to activate the next timer. A simple example with two 900.0-sec-
ond (15-minute) timers combined to functionally form a 30-minute timer.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
TIM 001
#9000
00000
00001
LD
900.0 s
TIM
001
9000
001
TIM 001
#
TIM 002
00002
00003
LD
TIM
#9000 900.0 s
TIM
002
TIM 002
#
9000
002
00200
00004
00005
LD
TIM
OUT
00200
In this example, 00200 will be turned ON 30 minutes after 00000 goes ON.
TIM can also be combined with CNT or CNT can be used to count SR area clock
– CNT.
Example 3:
ON/OFF Delays
TIM can be combined with KEEP(11) to delay turning a bit ON and OFF in refer-
KEEP(11).
To create delays, the Completion Flags for two TIM are used to determine the
execution conditions for setting and reset the bit designated for KEEP(11). The
bit whose manipulation is to be delayed is used in KEEP(11). Turning ON and
OFF the bit designated for KEEP(11) is thus delayed by the SV for the two TIM.
The two SV could naturally be the same if desired.
In the following example, 00500 would be turned ON 5.0 seconds after 00000
goes ON and then turned OFF 3.0 seconds after 00000 goes OFF. It is neces-
sary to use both 00500 and 00000 to determine the execution condition for TIM
002; 00000 in an inverse condition is necessary to reset TIM 002 when 00000
goes ON and 00500 is necessary to activate TIM 002 (when 00000 is OFF).
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
TIM 001
#0050 005.0 s
00000
00001
LD
TIM
001
0050
00500
00000
002
00500 00000
TIM 001
#
TIM 002
#0030
00002
00003
00004
LD
003.0 s
AND NOT
TIM
S
R
KEEP(11)
00500
#
0030
001
00005
00006
00007
LD
TIM
TIM
00500
TIM 002
LD
002
KEEP(11)
00000
00500
5.0 s
3.0 s
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer and Counter Instructions
Example 4:
One-Shot Bits
The length of time that a bit is kept ON or OFF can be controlled by combining
TIM with OUT or OUT NO. The following diagram demonstrates how this is pos-
sible. In this example, 00204 would remain ON for 1.5 seconds after 00000 goes
ON regardless of the time 00000 stays ON. This is achieved by using 01000 as a
self-maintaining bit activated by 00000 and turning ON 00204 through it. When
TIM 001 comes ON (i.e., when the SV of TIM 001 has expired), 00204 will be
turned OFF through TIM 001 (i.e., TIM 001 will turn ON which, as an inverse con-
dition, creates an OFF execution condition for OUT 00204).
01000
00000
01000
TIM 001
Address Instruction
Operands
01000
01000
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
LD
AND NOT
OR
TIM
001
00000
01000
01000
001
OUT
LD
TIM 001
TIM
#0015
001.5 s
#
0015
00006
00007
00008
LD
01000
001
01000 TIM 001
AND NOT
OUT
TIM
00204
00204
00000
00204
1.5 s
1.5 s
The following one-shot timer may be used to save memory.
00000
00100
Address Instruction
Operands
TIM 001
00000
00001
00002
LD
00000
00100
001
#0015
00100
001.5 s
OR
TIM
TIM 001
#
0015
001
00003
00004
AND NOT
OUT
TIM
00100
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer and Counter Instructions
Example 5:
Flicker Bits
Bits can be programmed to turn ON and OFF at regular intervals while a desig-
nated execution condition is ON by using TIM twice. One TIM functions to turn
ON and OFF a specified bit, i.e., the Completion Flag of this TIM turns the speci-
fied bit ON and OFF. The other TIM functions to control the operation of the first
TIM, i.e., when the first TIM’s Completion Flag goes ON, the second TIM is
started and when the second TIM’s Completion Flag goes ON, the first TIM is
started.
TIM 002
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
TIM 001
#0010
00000
00001
00002
LD
1.0 s
1.5 s
AND
TIM
TIM
002
001
TIM 001
TIM 002
#0015
#
0010
001
00003
00004
LD
TIM
TIM
002
TIM 001
00205
#
0015
001
00005
00006
LD
TIM
OUT
00205
00000
00205
1.0 s
1.5 s 1.0 s 1.5 s
A simpler but less flexible method of creating a flicker bit is to AND one of the SR
area clock pulse bits with the execution condition that is to be ON when the
flicker bit is operating. Although this method does not use TIM, it is included here
for comparison. This method is more limited because the ON and OFF times
must be the same and they depend on the clock pulse bits available in the SR
area.
In the following example the 1-second clock pulse is used (25502) so that 00206
would be turned ON and OFF every second, i.e., it would be ON for 0.5 seconds
and OFF for 0.5 seconds. Precise timing and the initial status of 00206 would
depend on the status of the clock pulse when 00000 goes ON.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000 25502
00000
00001
00002
LD
00206
LD
25502
00206
OUT
5-14-2 HIGH-SPEED TIMER – TIMH(15)
Definer Values
N: TC number
Ladder Symbol
# (000 through 015 preferred)
TIMH(15) N
SV
Operand Data Areas
SV: Set value (word, BCD)
IR, AR, DM, HR, LR, #
Limitations
SV is between 00.00 and 99.99. (Although 00.00 and 00.01 may be set, 00.00
will disable the timer, i.e., turn ON the Completion Flag immediately, and 00.01 is
not reliably cycled.) The decimal point is not entered.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer and Counter Instructions
Each TC number can be used as the definer in only one TIMER or COUNTER
instruction.
If the cycle time is greater than 10 ms, use TC 000 through TC 015.
Description
Precautions
TIMH(15) operates in the same way as TIM except that TIMH measures in units
of 0.01 second.
The cycle time affects TIMH(15) accuracy if TC 016 through TC 511 are used. If
the cycle time is greater than 10 ms, use TC 000 through TC 015.
the above, and all aspects of operation are the same.
Timers in interlocked program sections are reset when the execution condition
for IL(02) is OFF. Power interruptions also reset timers. If a timer that is not reset
under these conditions is desired, SR area clock pulse bits can be counted to
Program execution will continue even if a non-BCD SV is used, but timing will not
be accurate.
The SV of the timers can be set in the range #0000 to #9999 (BCD). If the SV for a
timer is set to #0000 or #0001, it will operate in the following way. If the SV is set
to #0000, when the timer input goes from OFF to ON, the Completion Flag will
turn ON. There may be a time delay if TC 000 to TC 003 are used. If the SV is set
to #0001, because the timer accuracy is 0 to –0.1 s, the actual time will be a value
between 0 and 0.1 s, and the Completion Flag may turn ON as soon as the timer
input goes from OFF to ON. With other values also, allow for a timer accuracy of
0 to –0.1 s when setting the SV.
Flags
ER:
SV is not in BCD.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
5-14-3 TOTALIZING TIMER – TTIM(87)
Definer Values
N: TC number
Ladder Symbol
# (000 through 511)
TTIM(87)
Operand Data Areas
SV: Set value (word, BCD)
IR, AR, DM, HR, LR
RB: Reset bit
N
SV
RB
IR, SR, AR, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
SV is between 0000 and 9999 (000.0 and 999.9 s) and must be in BCD. The dec-
imal point is not entered.
Each TC number can be used as the definer in only one TIMER or COUNTER
instruction.
TTIM(87) is used to create a timer that increments the PV every 0.1 s to time
between 0.1 and 999.9 s. TTIM(87) increments in units of 0.1 second from zero.
TTIM(87) accuracy is +0.0/–0.1 second. A TTIM(87) timer will time as long as its
execute condition is ON until it reaches the SV or until RB turns ON to reset the
timer. TIMM(87) timers will time only as long as they are executed every cycle,
i.e., they do not time, but maintain the current PV, in interlocked program sec-
tions or when they are jumped in the program.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer and Counter Instructions
Precautions
The PVs of totalizing timers in interlocked program sections are maintained
when the execution condition for IL(02) is OFF. Unlike timers and high-speed
timers, totalizing timers in jumped program sections do not continue timing, but
maintain the PV.
Power interruptions will reset timers.
Totalizing timers will not restart after timing out unless the PV is changed to a
value below the SV or the reset input is turned ON.
A delay of one cycle is sometimes required for a Completion Flag to be turned
ON after the timer times out.
The SV of the timers can be set in the range #0000 to #9999 (BCD). If the SV for a
timer is set to #0000 or #0001, it will operate in the following way. If the SV is set
to #0000, when the timer input goes from OFF to ON, the Completion Flag will
turn ON. If the SV is set to #0001, because the timer accuracy is 0 to –0.1 s, the
actual time will be a value between 0 and 0.1 s, and the Completion Flag may
turn ON as soon as the timer input goes from OFF to ON. With other values also,
allow for a timer accuracy of 0 to –0.1 s when setting the SV.
Flags
ER (SR 25503):Content of ∗DM word is not BCD when set for BCD.
SV is not BCD.
Example
The following figure illustrates the relationship between the execution conditions
for a totalizing timer with a set value of 2 s, its PV, and the Completion Flag.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
TTIM(87)
TIM 000
#0020
00000
00001
LD
TTIM(87)
TIM
#
000
0020
2100
LR 2100
LR
Timer input
(I: IR 00000)
Reset bit
(RB: LR 2100)
Completion Flag
(TIM 000)
Present value: 0020
0000
5-14-4 COUNTER – CNT
Definer Values
N: TC number
Ladder Symbol
# (000 through 511)
CP
R
CNT N
SV
Operand Data Areas
SV: Set value (word, BCD)
IR, AR, DM, HR, LR, #
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer and Counter Instructions
Limitations
Description
Each TC number can be used as the definer in only one TIMER or COUNTER
instruction.
CNT is used to count down from SV when the execution condition on the count
pulse, CP, goes from OFF to ON, i.e., the present value (PV) will be decre-
mented by one whenever CNT is executed with an ON execution condition for
CP and the execution condition was OFF for the last execution. If the execution
condition has not changed or has changed from ON to OFF, the PV of CNT will
not be changed. The Completion Flag for a counter is turned ON when the PV
reaches zero and will remain ON until the counter is reset.
CNT is reset with a reset input, R. When R goes from OFF to ON, the PV is reset
to SV. The PV will not be decremented while R is ON. Counting down from SV will
begin again when R goes OFF. The PV for CNT will not be reset in interlocked
program sections or by power interruptions.
Changes in execution conditions, the Completion Flag, and the PV are illus-
trated below. PV line height is meant only to indicate changes in the PV.
ON
Execution condition
on count pulse (CP)
OFF
ON
Execution condition
on reset (R)
OFF
ON
Completion Flag
OFF
SV
SV
PV
0002
SV – 1
0001
SV – 2
0000
Precautions
Flags
Program execution will continue even if a non-BCD SV is used, but the SV will
not be correct.
ER:
SV is not in BCD.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
Example 1:
Basic Application
In the following example, the PV will be decremented whenever both 00000 and
00001 are ON provided that 00002 is OFF and either 00000 or 00001 was OFF
the last time CNT 004 was executed. When 150 pulses have been counted down
(i.e., when PV reaches zero), 00205 will be turned ON.
00000
00002
00001
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
CP
R
CNT 004
#0150
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
AND
LD
00001
00002
0004
0150
004
CNT 004
CNT
00205
#
00004
00005
LD
CNT
OUT
00205
Here, 00000 can be used to control when CNT is operative and 00001 can be
used as the bit whose OFF to ON changes are being counted.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer and Counter Instructions
The above CNT can be modified to restart from SV each time power is turned ON
to the PC. This is done by using the First Cycle Flag in the SR area (25315) to
reset CNT as shown below.
00000
00001
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
CP
R
CNT 004
#0150
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
LD
00002
25315
AND
LD
00001
00002
25315
004
OR
CNT
CNT 004
#
0150
004
00205
00005
00006
LD
CNT
OUT
00205
Example 2:
Extended Counter
Counters that can count past 9,999 can be programmed by using one CNT to
count the number of times another CNT has counted to zero from SV.
In the following example, 00000 is used to control when CNT 001 operates. CNT
001, when 00000 is ON, counts down the number of OFF to ON changes in
00001. CNT 001 is reset by its Completion Flag, i.e., it starts counting again as
soon as its PV reaches zero. CNT 002 counts the number of times the Comple-
tion Flag for CNT 001 goes ON. Bit 00002 serves as a reset for the entire ex-
tended counter, resetting both CNT 001 and CNT 002 when it is OFF. The Com-
pletion Flag for CNT 002 is also used to reset CNT 001 to inhibit CNT 001 opera-
tion, once SV for CNT 002 has been reached, until the entire extended counter is
reset via 00002.
Because in this example the SV for CNT 001 is 100 and the SV for CNT 002 is
200, the Completion Flag for CNT 002 turns ON when 100 x 200 or 20,000 OFF
to ON changes have been counted in 00001. This would result in 00203 being
turned ON.
00000 00001
00002
CP
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
CNT 001
#0100
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
LD
AND
LD NOT
OR
00001
00002
001
R
CNT
CNT
CNT 001
CNT 002
CNT 001
00002
OR
002
CNT
001
#
0100
001
00006
00007
00008
LD
CNT
LD NOT
CNT
00002
002
CP
R
CNT 002
#0200
#
0200
002
00009
00010
LD
CNT
OUT
00203
CNT 002
00203
CNT can be used in sequence as many times as required to produce counters
capable of counting any desired values.
Example 3:
Extended Timers
CNT can be used to create extended timers in two ways: by combining TIM with
CNT and by counting SR area clock pulse bits.
In the following example, CNT 002 counts the number of times TIM 001 reaches
zero from its SV. The Completion Flag for TIM 001 is used to reset TIM 001 so
that it runs continuously and CNT 002 counts the number of times the Comple-
tion Flag for TIM 001 goes ON (CNT 002 would be executed once each time be-
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer and Counter Instructions
tween when the Completion Flag for TIM 001 goes ON and TIM 001 is reset by
its Completion Flag). TIM 001 is also reset by the Completion Flag for CNT 002
so that the extended timer would not start again until CNT 002 was reset by
00001, which serves as the reset for the entire extended timer.
Because in this example the SV for TIM 001 is 5.0 seconds and the SV for CNT
002 is 100, the Completion Flag for CNT 002 turns ON when 5 seconds x 100
times, i.e., 500 seconds (or 8 minutes and 20 seconds) have expired. This would
result in 00201 being turned ON.
00000 TIM 001 CNT 002
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
TIM 001
#0050
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
005.0 s
AND NOT
AND NOT
TIM
TIM
001
002
TIM 001
00001
CP
R
CNT
CNT
002
001
#
0050
001
#0100
00004
00005
00006
LD
TIM
LD
00001
002
CNT 002
00201
CNT
#
0100
002
00007
00008
LD
CNT
OUT
00201
In the following example, CNT 001 counts the number of times the 1-second
clock pulse bit (25502) goes from OFF to ON. Here again, 00000 is used to con-
trol the times when CNT is operating.
Because in this example the SV for CNT 001 is 700, the Completion Flag for
CNT 002 turns ON when 1 second x 700 times, or 11 minutes and 40 seconds
have expired. This would result in 00202 being turned ON.
00000 25502
00001
CP
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
CNT
001
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
AND
LD NOT
CNT
25502
00001
001
R
#0700
CNT 001
0202
#
0700
001
00004
00005
LD
CNT
OUT
00202
Caution The shorter clock pulses will not necessarily produce accurate timers because their short ON
times might not be read accurately during longer cycles. In particular, the 0.02-second and
0.1-second clock pulses should not be used to create timers with CNT instructions.
!
5-14-5 REVERSIBLE COUNTER – CNTR(12)
Definer Values
N: TC number
Ladder Symbol
# (000 through 511)
II
CNTR(12)
N
DI
R
Operand Data Areas
SV
SV: Set value (word, BCD)
IR, AR, DM, HR, LR, #
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer and Counter Instructions
Limitations
Description
Each TC number can be used as the definer in only one TIMER or COUNTER
instruction.
The CNTR(12) is a reversible, up/down circular counter, i.e., it is used to count
between zero and SV according to changes in two execution conditions, those in
the increment input (II) and those in the decrement input (DI).
The present value (PV) will be incremented by one whenever CNTR(12) is exe-
cuted with an ON execution condition for II and the last execution condition for II
was OFF. The present value (PV) will be decremented by one whenever
CNTR(12) is executed with an ON execution condition for DI and the last execu-
tion condition for DI was OFF. If OFF to ON changes have occurred in both II and
DI since the last execution, the PV will not be changed.
If the execution conditions have not changed or have changed from ON to OFF
for both II and DI, the PV of CNT will not be changed.
When decremented from 0000, the present value is set to SV and the Comple-
tion Flag is turned ON until the PV is decremented again. When incremented
past the SV, the PV is set to 0000 and the Completion Flag is turned ON until the
PV is incremented again.
CNTR(12) is reset with a reset input, R. When R goes from OFF to ON, the PV is
reset to zero. The PV will not be incremented or decremented while R is ON.
Counting will begin again when R goes OFF. The PV for CNTR(12) will not be
reset in interlocked program sections or by the effects of power interruptions.
Changes in II and DI execution conditions, the Completion Flag, and the PV are
illustrated below starting from part way through CNTR(12) operation (i.e., when
reset, counting begins from zero). PV line height is meant to indicate changes in
the PV only.
ON
Execution condition
on increment (II)
OFF
ON
Execution condition
on decrement (DI)
OFF
ON
Completion Flag
OFF
SV
SV
PV
SV – 1
SV – 1
0001
SV – 2
SV – 2
0000
0000
Precautions
Flags
Program execution will continue even if a non-BCD SV is used, but the SV will
not be correct.
ER:
SV is not in BCD.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Shifting
5-15 Data Shifting
All of the instructions described in this section are used to shift data, but in differ-
ing amounts and directions. The first shift instruction, SFT(10), shifts an execu-
tion condition into a shift register; the rest of the instructions shift data that is al-
ready in memory.
5-15-1 SHIFT REGISTER – SFT(10)
Ladder Symbol
Operand Data Areas
I
St: Starting word
IR, SR, AR, HR, LR
E: End word
SFT(10)
P
R
St
E
IR, SR, AR, HR, LR
Limitations
St must be less than or equal to E, and St and E must be in the same data area.
If a bit address in one of the words used in a shift register is also used in an in-
struction that controls individual bit status (e.g., OUT, KEEP(11)), an error
(“COIL DUPL”) will be generated when program syntax is checked on the Pro-
gramming Console or another Programming Device. The program, however,
will be executed as written. See Example 2: Controlling Bits in Shift Registers for
a programming example that does this.
Description
SFT(10) is controlled by three execution conditions, I, P, and R. If SFT(10) is
executed and 1) execution condition P is ON and was OFF the last execution,
and 2) R is OFF, then execution condition I is shifted into the rightmost bit of a
shift register defined between St and E, i.e., if I is ON, a 1 is shifted into the regis-
ter; if I is OFF, a 0 is shifted in. When I is shifted into the register, all bits previously
in the register are shifted to the left and the leftmost bit of the register is lost.
E
St+1, St+2, ...
St
Lost
data
Execution
condition I
The execution condition on P functions like a differentiated instruction, i.e., I will
be shifted into the register only when P is ON and was OFF the last time SFT(10)
was executed. If execution condition P has not changed or has gone from ON to
OFF, the shift register will remain unaffected.
St designates the rightmost word of the shift register; E designates the leftmost.
The shift register includes both of these words and all words between them. The
same word may be designated for St and E to create a 16-bit (i.e., 1-word) shift
register.
When execution condition R goes ON, all bits in the shift register will be turned
OFF (i.e., set to 0) and the shift register will not operate until R goes OFF again.
Flags
There are no flags affected by SFT(10).
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Shifting
Example 1:
Basic Application
The following example uses the 1-second clock pulse bit (25502) so that the
execution condition produced by 00005 is shifted into a 3-word register between
IR 010 and IR 012 every second.
00005
25502
00006
Address Instruction
Operands
00005
I
SFT(10)
010
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
P
R
LD
25502
00006
LD
012
SFT(10)
010
012
Example 2:
Controlling Bits in Shift
Registers
The following program is used to control the status of the 17th bit of a shift regis-
ter running from AR 00 through AR 01. When the 17th bit is to be set, 00004 is
turned ON. This causes the jump for JMP(04) 00 not to be made for that one
cycle, and AR 0100 (the 17th bit) will be turned ON. When 12800 is OFF (i.e., at
all times except during the first cycle after 00004 has changed from OFF to ON),
the jump is executed and the status of AR 0100 will not be changed.
00200 00201
00202
I
Address Instruction
Operands
00200
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
LD
SFT(10)
AR 00
AND
LD
00201
00202
00203
P
R
LD
AR 01
00203
SFT(10)
AR
AR
00
01
00004
DIFU(13) 12800
JMP(04) 00
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
LD
00004
12800
12800
00
DIFU(13)
LD
12800
JMP(04)
LD
12800
12800
0100
00
AR 0100
OUT
AR
JME(05)
JME(05) 00
When a bit that is part of a shift register is used in OUT (or any other instruction
that controls bit status), a syntax error will be generated during the program
check, but the program will executed properly (i.e., as written).
Example 3:
Control Action
The following program controls the conveyor line shown below so that faulty
products detected at the sensor are pushed down a shoot. To do this, the execu-
tion condition determined by inputs from the first sensor (00001) are stored in a
shift register: ON for good products; OFF for faulty ones. Conveyor speed has
been adjusted so that HR 0003 of the shift register can be used to activate a
pusher (00500) when a faulty product reaches it, i.e., when HR 0003 turns ON,
00500 is turned ON to activate the pusher.
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Shifting
The program is set up so that a rotary encoder (00000) controls execution of
SFT(10) through a DIFU(13), the rotary encoder is set up to turn ON and OFF
each time a product passes the first sensor. Another sensor (00002) is used to
detect faulty products in the shoot so that the pusher output and HR 0003 of the
shift register can be reset as required.
Sensor
(00001)
Pusher
(00500)
Sensor
(00002)
Rotary Encoder
(00000)
Chute
00001
00000
00003
Address Instruction
Operands
00001
I
SFT(10)
HR 00
HR 01
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
P
R
LD
00000
00003
LD
SFT(10)
HR
HR
HR
00
01
HR 0003
00002
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
LD
0003
00500
00002
00500
0003
00500
00500
OUT
LD
OUT NOT
OUT NOT
HR
HR 0003
5-15-2 REVERSIBLE SHIFT REGISTER – SFTR(84)
Operand Data Areas
C: Control word
IR, AR, DM, HR, LR
St: Starting word
Ladder Symbols
SFTR(84)
@SFTR(84)
C
St
E
C
St
E
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
E: End word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR LR
Limitations
St and E must be in the same data area and St must be less than or equal to E.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Shifting
Description
SFTR(84) is used to create a single- or multiple-word shift register that can shift
data to either the right or the left. To create a single-word register, designate the
same word for St and E. The control word provides the shift direction, the status
to be put into the register, the shift pulse, and the reset input. The control word is
allocated as follows:
15 14 13 12
Not used.
Shift direction
1 (ON): Left (LSB to MSB)
0 (OFF): Right (MSB to LSB)
Status to input into register
Shift pulse bit
Reset
The data in the shift register will be shifted one bit in the direction indicated by bit
12, shifting one bit out to CY and the status of bit 13 into the other end whenever
SFTR(84) is executed with an ON execution condition as long as the reset bit is
OFF and as long as bit 14 is ON. If SFTR(84) is executed with an OFF execution
condition or if SFTR(84) is executed with bit 14 OFF, the shift register will remain
unchanged. If SFTR(84) is executed with an ON execution condition and the re-
set bit (bit 15) is OFF, the entire shift register and CY will be set to zero.
Flags
ER:
CY:
St and E are not in the same data area or ST is greater than E.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
Receives the status of bit 00 of St or bit 15 of E, depending on the shift
direction.
Example
In the following example, IR 00005, IR 00006, IR 00007, and IR 00008 are used
to control the bits of C used in @SHIFT(84). The shift register is between LR 20
and LR 21, and it is controlled through IR 00009.
Address Instruction
Operands
00005
00005
05012
05013
Direction
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
LD
OUT
LD
05012
00006
05013
00007
00514
00008
05015
00009
00006
00007
Status to input
Shift pulse
OUT
LD
OUT
LD
05014
05015
OUT
LD
@SFT(10)
00008
00009
050
20
Reset
LR
LR
21
@SFTR(84)
050
LR 20
LR 21
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Shifting
5-15-3 ARITHMETIC SHIFT LEFT – ASL(25)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
Wd: Shift word
ASL(25)
Wd
@ASL(25)
Wd
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, ASL(25) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, ASL(25) shifts a 0 into bit 00 of Wd, shifts the bits of Wd one
bit to the left, and shifts the status of bit 15 into CY.
Bit
15
Bit
00
CY
1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
0
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
CY:
EQ:
Receives the status of bit 15.
ON when the content of Wd is zero; otherwise OFF.
5-15-4 ARITHMETIC SHIFT RIGHT – ASR(26)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
Wd: Shift word
ASR(26)
Wd
@ASR(26)
Wd
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, ASR(25) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, ASR(25) shifts a 0 into bit 15 of Wd, shifts the bits of Wd
one bit to the right, and shifts the status of bit 00 into CY.
Bit
15
Bit
00
CY
1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
0
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
CY:
EQ:
Receives the data of bit 00.
ON when the content of Wd is zero; otherwise OFF.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Shifting
5-15-5 ROTATE LEFT – ROL(27)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
Wd: Rotate word
ROL(27)
Wd
@ROL(27)
Wd
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, ROL(27) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, ROL(27) shifts all Wd bits one bit to the left, shifting CY
into bit 00 of Wd and shifting bit 15 of Wd into CY.
Bit
15
Bit
00
CY
0
1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
Precautions
Flags
Use STC(41) to set the status of CY or CLC(41) to clear the status of CY before
doing a rotate operation to ensure that CY contains the proper status before ex-
ecution ROL(27).
The status of CY is cleared at the end of each cycle (when END(01) is executed).
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
CY:
Receives the data of bit 15.
EQ:
ON when the content of Wd is zero; otherwise OFF.
5-15-6 ROTATE RIGHT – ROR(28)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
Wd: Rotate word
ROR(28)
Wd
@ROR(28)
Wd
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, ROR(28) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, ROR(28) shifts all Wd bits one bit to the right, shifting CY
into bit 15 of Wd and shifting bit 00 of Wd into CY.
Bit
15
Bit
00
CY
0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
Precautions
Flags
Use STC(41) to set the status of CY or CLC(41) to clear the status of CY before
doing a rotate operation to ensure that CY contains the proper status before ex-
ecution ROR(28).
The status of CY is cleared at the end of each cycle (when END(01) is executed).
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
CY:
EQ:
Receives the data of bit 15.
ON when the content of Wd is zero; otherwise OFF.
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Shifting
5-15-7 ONE DIGIT SHIFT LEFT – SLD(74)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
St: Starting word
SLD(74)
@SLD(74)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
St
E
St
E
E: End word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
St and E must be in the same data area, and St must be less than or equal to E.
When the execution condition is OFF, SLD(74) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, SLD(74) shifts data between St and E (inclusive) by one
digit (four bits) to the left. 0 is written into the rightmost digit of the St, and the
content of the leftmost digit of E is lost.
E
St
...
8 F C 5
D 7 9 1
Lost data
0
Precautions
Flags
If a power failure occurs during a shift operation across more than 50 words, the
shift operation might not be completed.
ER:
The St and E words are in different areas, or St is greater than E.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
5-15-8 ONE DIGIT SHIFT RIGHT – SRD(75)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
E: End word
SRD(75)
@SRD(75)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
E
E
St: Starting word
St
St
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
St and E must be in the same data area, and St must be less than or equal to E.
When the execution condition is OFF, SRD(75) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, SRD(75) shifts data between St and E (inclusive) by one
digit (four bits) to the right. 0 is written into the leftmost digit of St and the right-
most digit of E is lost.
St
E
...
3 4 5 2
F 8 C 1
Lost data
0
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Shifting
Precautions
If a power failure occurs during a shift operation across more than 50 words, the
shift operation might not be completed. Set the range between E and St to a
maximum of 50 words.
Flags
ER:
The St and E words are in different areas, or St is less than E.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
5-15-9 WORD SHIFT – WSFT(16)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
St: Starting word
WSFT(16)
@WSFT(16)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
St
E
St
E
E: End word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
St and E must be in the same data area, and St must be less than or equal to E.
When the execution condition is OFF, WSFT(16) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, WSFT(16) shifts data between St and E in word units.
Zeros are written into St and the content of E is lost.
E
St + 1
St
F
0
4
C
2
2
3
1
4
5
2
9
1
0
0
0
2
0
9
0
Lost
0000
E
St + 1
St
3
5
0
2
Flags
ER:
The St and E words are in different areas, or St is greater than E.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
5-15-10 ASYNCHRONOUS SHIFT REGISTER – ASFT(17)
Operand Data Areas
C: Control word
Ladder Symbols
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
ASFT(17)
ASFT(17)
St: Starting word
C
St
E
C
St
E
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
E: End word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
St and E must be in the same data area, and St must be less than or equal to E.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Movement
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, ASFT(17) does nothing and the program
moves to the next instruction. When the execution condition is ON, ASFT(17) is
used to create and control a reversible asynchronous word shift register be-
tween St and E. This register only shifts words when the next word in the register
is zero, e.g., if no words in the register contain zero, nothing is shifted. Also, only
one word is shifted for each word in the register that contains zero. When the
contents of a word are shifted to the next word, the original word’s contents are
set to zero. In essence, when the register is shifted, each zero word in the regis-
ter trades places with the next word. (See Example below.)
The shift direction (i.e. whether the “next word” is the next higher or the next low-
er word) is designated in C. C is also used to reset the register. All of any portion
of the register can be reset by designating the desired portion with St and E.
Control Word
Bits 00 through 12 of C are not used. Bit 13 is the shift direction: turn bit 13 ON to
shift down (toward lower addressed words) and OFF to shift up (toward higher
addressed words). Bit 14 is the Shift Enable Bit: turn bit 14 ON to enable shift
register operation according to bit 13 and OFF to disable the register. Bit 15 is the
Reset bit: the register will be reset (set to zero) between St and E when
ASFT(17) is executed with bit 15 ON. Turn bit 15 OFF for normal operation.
Flags
ER:
The St and E words are in different areas, or St is greater than E.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
Example
The following example shows instruction ASFT(17) used to shift words in an
11-word shift register created between DM 0100 and DM 0110 with a control
word value of #6000 (bits 13 and 14 ON). The data changes that would occur for
the given register and control word contents are also shown.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
ASFT(17)
#6000
00100
00101
LD
ASFT(17)
DM 0100
DM 0110
#
6000
0100
0110
DM
DM
Before
execution
After 1
execution
After 7
executions
DM 0100
DM 0101
DM 0102
DM 0103
DM 0104
DM 0105
DM 0106
DM 0107
DM 0108
DM 0109
DM 0110
1234
0000
0000
2345
3456
0000
4567
5678
6789
0000
789A
1234
0000
2345
0000
3456
4567
0000
5678
6789
789A
0000
1234
2345
3456
4567
5678
6789
789A
0000
0000
0000
0000
5-16 Data Movement
This section describes the instructions used for moving data between different
addresses in data areas. These movements can be programmed to be within
the same data area or between different data areas. Data movement is essential
for utilizing all of the data areas of the PC. Effective communications in Link Sys-
tems also requires data movement. All of these instructions change only the
content of the words to which data is being moved, i.e., the content of source
words is the same before and after execution of any of the data movement in-
structions.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Movement
5-16-1 MOVE – MOV(21)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
S: Source word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
D: Destination word
MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
S
D
S
D
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, MOV(21) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, MOV(21) copies the content of S to D.
Source word
Destination word
Bit status
not changed.
Precautions
Flags
TC numbers cannot be designated as D to change the PV of the timer or counter.
You can, however, easily change the PV of a timer or a counter by using
BSET(71).
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when all zeros are transferred to D.
5-16-2 MOVE NOT – MVN(22)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
S: Source word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
D: Destination word
MVN(22)
@MVN(22)
S
D
S
D
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, MVN(22) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, MVN(22) transfers the inverted content of S (specified
word or four-digit hexadecimal constant) to D, i.e., for each ON bit in S, the corre-
sponding bit in D is turned OFF, and for each OFF bit in S, the corresponding bit
in D is turned ON.
Source word
Destination word
Bit status
inverted.
Precautions
Flags
TC numbers cannot be designated as D to change the PV of the timer or counter.
However, these can be easily changed using BSET(71).
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when all zeros are transferred to D.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Movement
5-16-3 BLOCK SET – BSET(71)
Operand Data Areas
S: Source data
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
St: Starting word
Ladder Symbols
BSET(71)
@BSET(71)
S
St
E
S
St
E
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
E: End Word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Limitations
Description
St must be less than or equal to E, and St and E must be in the same data area.
When the execution condition is OFF, BSET(71) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, BSET(71) copies the content of S to all words from St
through E.
S
St
3 4 5 2
3 4 5 2
St+1
3 4 5 2
St+2
3 4 5 2
E
3 4 5 2
BSET(71) can be used to change timer/counter PV. (This cannot be done with
MOV(21) or MVN(22).) BSET(71) can also be used to clear sections of a data
area, i.e., the DM area, to prepare for executing other instructions.
Flags
ER:
St and E are not in the same data area or St is greater than E.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Movement
Example
The following example shows how to use BSET(71) to change the PV of a timer
depending on the status of IR 00003 and IR 00004. When IR 00003 is ON, TIM
010 will operate as a 50-second timer; when IR 00004 is ON, TIM 010 will oper-
ate as a 30-second timer.
00003
00004
Address Instruction
Operands
00003
@BSET(71)
#0500
00000
00001
00002
LD
AND NOT
@BSET(71)
00004
TIM 010
TIM 010
#
0500
010
00004
00003
TIM
TIM
@BSET(71)
#0300
010
00003
00004
00005
LD
00004
00003
TIM 010
TIM 010
AND NOT
@BSET(71)
#
0300
010
00003
00004
TIM
TIM
TIM 010
010
#9999
00006
00007
00008
LD
00003
00004
010
OR
TIM
#
9999
5-16-4 BLOCK TRANSFER – XFER(70)
Operand Data Areas
N: Number of words (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
S: Starting source word
Ladder Symbols
XFER(70)
@XFER(70)
N
S
D
N
S
D
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
D: Starting destination word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Limitations
Description
Both S and D may be in the same data area, but their respective block areas
must not overlap. S and S+N must be in the same data area, as must D and D+N.
N must be BCD between 0000 and 6144.
When the execution condition is OFF, XFER(70) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, XFER(70) copies the contents of S, S+1, ..., S+N to D,
D+1, ..., D+N.
S
D
3 4 5 2
3 4 5 2
S+1
D+1
3 4 5 1
3 4 5 1
S+2
D+2
3 4 2 2
3 4 2 2
S+N
D+N
6 4 5 2
6 4 5 2
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Movement
Flags
ER:
N is not BCD between 0000 and 2000.
S and S+N or D and D+N are not in the same data area.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
5-16-5 DATA EXCHANGE – XCHG(73)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
E1: Exchange word 1
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
E2: Exchange word 2
XCHG(73)
@XCHG(73)
E1
E2
E1
E2
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, XCHG(73) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, XCHG(73) exchanges the content of E1 and E2.
E1
E2
If you want to exchange content of blocks whose size is greater than 1 word, use
work words as an intermediate buffer to hold one of the blocks using XFER(70)
three times.
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
5-16-6 SINGLE WORD DISTRIBUTE – DIST(80)
Operand Data Areas
S: Source data
Ladder Symbols
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
DBs: Destination base word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
C: Control word (BCD)
DIST(80)
@DIST(80)
S
DBs
C
S
DBs
C
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Limitations
Description
C must be a BCD. If C≤6655, DBs must be in the same data area as DBs+C. If
C≥9000, DBs must be in the same data area as DBs+C–9000.
Depending on the value of C, DIST(80) will operate as a data distribution instruc-
tion or stack instruction. If C is between 0000 and 6655, DIST(80) will operate as
a data distribution instruction and copy the content of S to DBs+C. If the leftmost
digit of C is 9, DIST(80) will operate as a stack instruction and create a stack with
the number of words specified in the rightmost 3 digits of C.
Precautions
Stack operation will be unreliable if the specified stack length is different from the
length specified in the last execution of DIST(80) or COLL(81).
Data Distribution Operation When the execution condition is OFF, DIST(80) is not executed. When the exe-
(C=0000 to 6655)
cution condition is ON, DIST(80) copies the content of S to DBs+C, i.e.,C is
added to DBs to determine the destination word.
S
DBs + C
3 4 5 2
3 4 5 2
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Movement
Stack Operation
(C=9000 to 9999)
When the execution condition is OFF, DIST(80) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, DIST(80) operates a stack from DBs to DBs+C–9000.
DBs is the stack pointer, so S is copied to the word indicated by DBs and DBs is
incremented by 1.
Digits of C:
3 2 1 0
Specifies the stack length (000 to 999).
A value of 9 indicates stack operation.
Data can be added to the stack until it is full. DIST(80) is normally used together
with COLL(81), which can be set to read from the stack on a FIFO or LIFO basis.
Example of Stack Operation In the following example, the content of C (LR 10) is 9010, and DIST(80) is used
to write the numerical data #00FF to the 10-word stack from HR 20 to HR 29.
During the first cycle when IR 00001 is ON, the data is written to DBs+1 (HR 21)
and the stack pointer is incremented by 1. In the second cycle the data is written
to DBs+2 (HR 22) and the stack pointer is incremented, and so on.
00001
Address Instruction
Operands
00001
DIST(80)
# 00FF
HR 20
00000
00001
LD
DIST(80)
#
00FF
20
LR 10
HR
LR
10
After one
execution
After two
executions
HR 20
HR 20
Stack pointer
0 0 0 1
0 0 0 2
HR 21
HR 21
Stack pointer
incremented
0 0 F F
0 0 F F
HR 22
HR 22
0 0 F F
Stack area
HR 29
HR 29
Flags
ER:
EQ:
The content of C is not BCD or 6655<C<9000.
When C≤6655, DBs and DBs+C are not in the same data area.
When C≥9000, DBs and DBs+C–9000 are not in the same data area.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
ON when the content of S is zero; otherwise OFF.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Movement
5-16-7 DATA COLLECT – COLL(81)
Operand Data Areas
SBs: Source base word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
C: Offset data (BCD)
Ladder Symbols
COLL(81)
@COLL(81)
SBs
C
SBs
C
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
D: Destination word
D
D
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Limitations
Description
C must be a BCD. If C≤6655, SBs must be in the same data area as SBs+C. If the
leftmost digit of C is 8 or 9, DBs must be in the same data area as SBs+N (N=the
3 rightmost digits of C).
Depending on the value of C, COLL(81) will operate as a data collection instruc-
tion, FIFO stack instruction, or LIFO stack instruction. If C is between 0000 and
6655, COLL(81) will operate as a data collection instruction and copy the con-
tent of SBs+C to D.
If the leftmost digit of C is 9 , COLL(81) will operate as a FIFO stack instruction. If
the leftmost digit of C is 8, COLL(81) will operate as a LIFO stack instruction.
Both stack operations use a stack beginning at SBs with a length specified in the
rightmost 3 digits of C.
Precautions
Stack operation will be unreliable if the specified stack length is different from the
length specified in the last execution of DIST(80) or COLL(81).
Data Collection Operation
(C=0000 to 6655)
When the execution condition is OFF, COLL(81) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, COLL(81) copies the content of SBs + C to D, i.e., C is
added to SBs to determine the source word.
SBs + C
D
3 4 5 2
3 4 5 2
FIFO Stack Operation
(C=9000 to 9999)
When the execution condition is OFF, COLL(81) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, COLL(81) copies the data from the oldest word recorded
in the stack to D. The stack pointer, SBs, is then decremented by 1.
Digits of C:
3 2 1 0
Specifies the stack length (000 to 999).
A value of 9 indicates FIFO stack operation.
DISTRIBUTE – DIST(80) for details.
Note FIFO stands for First-In-First-Out.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Movement
Example
In the following example, the content of C (HR 00) is 9010, and COLL(81) is used
to copy the oldest entries from a10-word stack (IR 001 to IR 010) to LR 20.
00001
Address Instruction
Operands
00001
DIST(80)
001
00000
00001
LD
COLL(81)
HR 00
LR 20
001
00
HR
LR
20
Before
execution
After one
execution
After two
executions
Stack pointer
decremented
Stack pointer
decremented
IR 001
IR 001
IR 001
Stack pointer
0
1
A
0
0
2
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
IR 002
IR 002
C D
IR 002
2
3
4
A
B
IR 003
C D
IR 003
IR 010
IR 003
B
Stack area
IR 010
IR 010
Output
LR 20
Output
LR 20
1
2
3
4
A
B
C D
LIFO Stack Operation
(C=8000 to 8999)
When the execution condition is OFF, COLL(81) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, COLL(81) copies the data most recently recorded in the
stack to D. The stack pointer, SBs, is then decremented by 1.
Digits of C:
3 2 1 0
Specifies the stack length (000 to 999).
A value of 8 indicates LIFO stack operation.
Data can be added to the stack until it is full. DIST(80)’s stack operation can be
used together with COLL(81)’s read stack operation. COLL(81) can be set to
(80) for details.
Note LIFO stands for Last-In-First-Out.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Movement
Example
In the following example, the content of C (HR 00) is 8010, and COLL(81) is used
to copy the most recent entries from a 10-word stack (IR 001 to IR 010) to LR 20.
00001
Address Instruction
Operands
00001
COLL(81)
001
00000
00001
LD
COLL(81)
HR 00
LR 20
001
00
HR
LR
20
Before
execution
After one
execution
After two
executions
Stack pointer
decremented
Stack pointer
decremented
IR 001
IR 001
IR 001
Stack pointer
0
1
A
0
0
2
0
1
0
0
1
4
0
0
0
0
IR 002
IR 002
IR 002
IR 003
2
3
4
2
3
IR 003
C D
IR 003
B
Stack area
IR 010
IR 010
IR 010
Output
LR 20
Output
LR 20
A
B
C D
1
2
3
4
Flags
ER:
The content of C is not BCD or 6655<C<8000.
When C≤6655, DBs and DBs+C are not in the same data area.
When C≥8000, the beginning and end of the stack are not in the same
data area or the value of the stack pointer exceeds the length of the
stack.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the transferred data is zero; otherwise OFF.
5-16-8 MOVE BIT – MOVB(82)
Operand Data Areas
S: Source word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR, #
Bi: Bit designator (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
D: Destination word
Ladder Symbols
MOVB(82)
@MOVB(82)
S
Bi
D
S
Bi
D
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
The rightmost two digits and the leftmost two digits of Bi must each be between
00 and 15.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Movement
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, MOVB(82) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, MOVB(82) copies the specified bit of S to the specified bit
in D. The bits in S and D are specified by Bi. The rightmost two digits of Bi desig-
nate the source bit; the leftmost two bits designate the destination bit.
Bit
15
Bit
00
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Bi
S
Bi
1
1
2
0
1
Bit
15
Bit
00
2
0
1
MSB
LSB
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
Source bit (00 to 15)
Bit
15
Bit
00
Destination bit (00 to 15)
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
D
Flags
ER:
C is not BCD, or it is specifying a non-existent bit (i.e., bit specification
must be between 00 and 15).
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
5-16-9 MOVE DIGIT – MOVD(83)
Operand Data Areas
S: Source word
Ladder Symbols
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Di: Digit designator (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
D: Destination word
MOVD(83)
@MOVD(83)
S
Di
D
S
Di
D
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Limitations
Description
The rightmost three digits of Di must each be between 0 and 3.
When the execution condition is OFF, MOVD(83) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, MOVD(83) copies the content of the specified digit(s) in S
to the specified digit(s) in D. Up to four digits can be transferred at one time. The
first digit to be copied, the number of digits to be copied, and the first digit to re-
ceive the copy are designated in Di as shown below. Digits from S will be copied
to consecutive digits in D starting from the designated first digit and continued for
the designated number of digits. If the last digit is reached in either S or D, further
digits are used starting back at digit 0.
Digit number: 3 2 1 0
First digit in S (0 to 3)
Number of digits (0 to 3)
0: 1 digit
1: 2 digits
2: 3 digits
3: 4 digits
First digit in D (0 to 3)
Not used.
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Movement
Digit Designator
The following show examples of the data movements for various values of Di.
Di: 0010
Di: 0030
S
D
S
D
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
Di: 0031
Di: 0023
S
D
D
S
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
Flags
ER:
At least one of the rightmost three digits of Di is not between 0 and 3.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
5-16-10 TRANSFER BITS – XFRB(62)
Operand Data Areas
C: Control word
IR, SR, AR, DM, TC, HR, LR, #
S: First source word
Ladder Symbols
XFRB(62)
@XFRB(62)
C
S
D
C
S
D
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
D: First destination word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
The specified source bits must be in the same data area.
The specified destination bits must be in the same data area.
When the execution condition is OFF, XFRB(62) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, XFRB(62) copies the specified source bits to the speci-
fied destination bits. The two rightmost digits of C specify the starting bits in S
and D and the leftmost two digits indicate the number of bits that will be copied.
C
MSB
LSB
First bit of S (0 to F)
First bit of D (0 to F)
Number of bits (01 to FF)
Note 255 (FF) bits or more can not be copied at one time.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Comparison
Example
In the following example, XFRB(62) is used to transfer 5 bits from IR 020 to
LR 21 when IR 00001 is ON. The starting bit in IR 020 is 0, and the starting bit in
LR 21 is 4, so IR 02000 to IR 02004 are copied to LR 2104 to LR 2108.
00001
Address Instruction
Operands
00001
XFRB(62)
#0540
00000
00001
LD
XFRB(62)
IR 020
LR 21
#
0540
020
21
LR
Bit
15
Bit
00
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1
S (IR 020)
D (LR 21)
Bit
15
Bit
00
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
Flags
ER:
The specified source bits are not all in the same data area.
The specified destination bits are not all in the same data area.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
5-17 Data Comparison
5-17-1 MULTI-WORD COMPARE – MCMP(19)
Operand Data Areas
TB1: First word of table 1
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
TB2: First word of table 2
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: Result word
Ladder Symbols
MCMP(19)
@MCMP(19)
TB1
TB2
R
TB1
TB2
R
IR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Limitations
Description
TB1 and TB1+15 must be in the same data area, as must TB2 and TB2+15.
When the execution condition is OFF, MCMP(19) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, MCMP(19) compares the content of TB1 to TB2,
TB1+1 to TB2+1, TB1+2 to TB2+2, ..., and TB1+15 to TB2+15. If the first pair is
equal, the first bit in R is turned OFF, etc., i.e., if the content of TB1 equals the
content of TB2, bit 00 is turned OFF, if the content of TB1+1 equals the content of
TB2+1, bit 01 is turned OFF, etc. The rest of the bits in R will be turned ON.
Flags
ER:
One of the tables (i.e., TB1 through TB1+15, or TB2 through TB2+15)
exceeds the data area.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Comparison
Example
The following example shows the comparisons made and the results provided
for MCMP(19). Here, the comparison is made during each cycle when 00000 is
ON.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
MCMP(19)
100
00000
00001
LD
MCMP(19)
DM 0200
DM 0300
100
0200
0300
DM
DM
TB1: IR 100
TB2: DM 0200
R: DM 0300
IR 100
0100
DM 0200
0100
0200
0210
0400
0500
0600
0210
0800
0900
1000
0210
1200
1300
1400
0210
1600
DM 030000
DM 030001
DM 030002
DM 030003
DM 030004
DM 030005
DM 030006
DM 030007
DM 030008
DM 030009
DM 030010
DM 030011
DM 030012
DM 030013
DM 030014
DM 030015
0
IR 101
IR 102
IR 103
IR 104
IR 105
IR 106
IR 107
IR 108
IR 109
IR 110
IR 111
IR 112
IR 113
IR 114
IR 115
0200
DM 0201
DM 0202
DM 0203
DM 0204
DM 0205
DM 0206
DM 0207
DM 0208
DM 0209
DM 0210
DM 0211
DM 0212
DM 0213
DM 0214
DM 0215
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0210
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
0800
0900
1000
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
1400
0210
1212
5-17-2 COMPARE – CMP(20)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
Cp1: First compare word
CMP(20)
Cp1
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Cp2: Second compare word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Cp2
Limitations
Description
When comparing a value to the PV of a timer or counter, the value must be in
BCD.
When the execution condition is OFF, CMP(20) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, CMP(20) compares Cp1 and Cp2 and outputs the result
to the GR, EQ, and LE flags in the SR area.
Precautions
Placing other instructions between CMP(20) and the operation which accesses
the EQ, LE, and GR flags may change the status of these flags. Be sure to ac-
cess them before the desired status is changed.
CMP(20) cannot be used to compare signed binary data. Use CPS(––) instead.
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Comparison
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
LE:
GR:
ON if Cp1 equals Cp2.
ON if Cp1 is less than Cp2.
ON if Cp1 is greater than Cp2.
Flag
Address
25505
C1 < C2
OFF
C1 = C2
OFF
C1 > C2
ON
GR
EQ
LE
25506
25507
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Example 1:
Saving CMP(20) Results
The following example shows how to save the comparison result immediately. If
the content of HR 09 is greater than that of 010, 00200 is turned ON; if the two
contents are equal, 00201 is turned ON; if content of HR 09 is less than that of
010, 00202 is turned ON. In some applications, only one of the three OUTs would
be necessary, making the use of TR 0 unnecessary. With this type of program-
ming, 00200, 00201, and 00202 are changed only when CMP(20) is executed.
TR
0
00000
CMP(20)
HR 09
010
25505
00200
Greater Than
25506
25507
00201
00202
Equal
Less Than
Operands
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
Address Instruction
00000
00001
00002
LD
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
OUT
LD
00200
OUT
TR
0
TR
TR
0
25506
00201
0
CMP(20)
AND
OUT
LD
010
09
HR
TR
00003
00004
LD
0
AND
OUT
25507
00202
AND
25505
Example 2:
Obtaining Indications
during Timer Operation
The following example uses TIM, CMP(20), and the LE flag (25507) to produce
outputs at particular times in the timer’s countdown. The timer is started by turn-
ing ON 00000. When 00000 is OFF, TIM 010 is reset and the second two
CMP(20)s are not executed (i.e., executed with OFF execution conditions). Out-
put 00200 is produced after 100 seconds; output 00201, after 200 seconds; out-
put 00202, after 300 seconds; and output 00204, after 500 seconds.
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Comparison
The branching structure of this diagram is important in order to ensure that
00200, 00201, and 00202 are controlled properly as the timer counts down. Be-
cause all of the comparisons here use to the timer’s PV as reference, the other
operand for each CMP(20) must be in 4-digit BCD.
00000
TIM 010
#5000
500.0 s
CMP(20)
TIM 010
#4000
25507
Output at
100 s.
00200
00200
CMP(20)
TIM 010
#3000
25507
Output at
200 s.
00201
00201
CMP(20)
TIM 010
#2000
25507
Output at
300 s.
00202
TIM 010
Output at
500 s.
00204
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
25507
00000
00001
LD
00007
00008
00009
00010
AND
TIM
010
OUT
00201
00201
#
5000
LD
00002
CMP(20)
CMP(20)
TIM
#
010
4000
TIM
#
010
2000
00003
00004
00005
00006
AND
25507
00200
00200
00011
00012
00013
00014
AND
OUT
LD
25507
00202
010
OUT
LD
TIM
CMP(20)
OUT
00204
TIM
#
010
3000
5-17-3 DOUBLE COMPARE – CMPL(60)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
Cp1: First word of first compare word pair
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, TR
CMPL(60)
Cp1
Cp2: First word of second compare word pair
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Cp2
___
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Comparison
Limitations
Description
Cp1 and Cp1+1 must be in the same data area, as must Cp2 and Cp2+1.
When the execution condition is OFF, CMPL(60) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, CMPL(60) joins the 4-digit hexadecimal content of
Cp1+1 with that of Cp1, and that of Cp2+1 with that of Cp2 to create two 8-digit
hexadecimal numbers, Cp+1,Cp1 and Cp2+1,Cp2. The two 8-digit numbers are
then compared and the result is output to the GR, EQ, and LE flags in the SR
area.
Precautions
Placing other instructions between CMPL(60) and the operation which ac-
cesses the EQ, LE, and GR flags may change the status of these flags. Be sure
to access them before the desired status is changed.
CMPL(60) cannot be used to compare signed binary data. Use CPSL(––)
details.
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
GR:
EQ:
LE:
ON if Cp1+1,Cp1 is greater than Cp2+1,Cp2.
ON if Cp1+1,Cp1 equals Cp2+1,Cp2.
ON if Cp1+1,Cp1 is less than Cp2+1,Cp2.
Example:
Saving CMPL(60) Results
The following example shows how to save the comparison result immediately. If
the content of HR 10, HR 09 is greater than that of 011, 010, then 00200 is turned
ON; if the two contents are equal, 00201 is turned ON; if content of HR 10, HR 09
is less than that of 011, 010, then 00202 is turned ON. In some applications, only
one of the three OUTs would be necessary, making the use of TR 0 unnecessary.
With this type of programming, 00200, 00201, and 00202 are changed only
when CMPL(60) is executed.
TR
0
00000
CMPL(60)
HR 09
010
–––
25505
25506
00200
00201
Greater Than
Equal
25507
00202
Less Than
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00001
00002
LD
00004
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
OUT
LD
00200
0
OUT
TR
0
TR
TR
CMPL(60)
AND
OUT
LD
25506
00201
0
HR
09
010
AND
OUT
25507
00202
00003
AND
25505
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Comparison
5-17-4 BLOCK COMPARE – BCMP(68)
Operand Data Areas
CD: Compare data
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
CB: First comparison block word
IR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Ladder Symbols
BCMP(68)
@BCMP(68)
CD
CB
R
CD
CB
R
R: Result word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Limitations
Description
Each lower limit word in the comparison block must be less than or equal to the
upper limit.
When the execution condition is OFF, BCMP(68) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, BCMP(68) compares CD to the ranges defined by a block
consisting of of CB, CB+1, CB+2, ..., CB+31. Each range is defined by two
words, the first one providing the lower limit and the second word providing the
upper limit. If CD is found to be within any of these ranges (inclusive of the upper
and lower limits), the corresponding bit in R is set. The comparisons that are
made and the corresponding bit in R that is set for each true comparison are
shown below. The rest of the bits in R will be turned OFF.
CB ≤ CD ≤ CB+1
Bit 00
Bit 01
Bit 02
Bit 03
Bit 04
Bit 05
Bit 06
Bit 07
Bit 08
Bit 09
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
CB+2 ≤ CD ≤ CB+3
CB+4 ≤ CD ≤ CB+5
CB+6 ≤ CD ≤ CB+7
CB+8 ≤ CD ≤ CB+9
CB+10 ≤ CD ≤ CB+11
CB+12 ≤ CD ≤ CB+13
CB+14 ≤ CD ≤ CB+15
CB+16 ≤ CD ≤ CB+17
CB+18 ≤ CD ≤ CB+19
CB+20 ≤ CD ≤ CB+21
CB+22 ≤ CD ≤ CB+23
CB+24 ≤ CD ≤ CB+25
CB+26 ≤ CD ≤ CB+27
CB+28 ≤ CD ≤ CB+29
CB+30 ≤ CD ≤ CB+31
Flags
ER:
The comparison block (i.e., CB through CB+31) exceeds the data area.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Comparison
Example
The following example shows the comparisons made and the results provided
for BCMP(68). Here, the comparison is made during each cycle when 00000 is
ON.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
BCMP(68)
001
00000
00001
LD
BCMP(68)
HR 10
HR 05
001
10
HR
HR
05
CD 001
Lower limits
Upper limits
R: HR 05
001
0210
HR 10
0000
HR 11
0100
0200
0300
0400
0500
0600
0700
0800
0900
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
HR 0500
HR 0501
HR 0502
HR 0503
HR 0504
HR 0505
HR 0506
HR 0507
HR 0508
HR 0509
HR 0510
HR 0511
HR 0512
HR 0513
HR 0514
HR 0515
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
HR 12
HR 14
HR 16
HR 18
HR 20
HR 22
HR 24
HR 26
HR 28
HR 30
HR 32
HR 34
HR 36
HR 38
HR 40
0101
0201
0301
0401
0501
0601
0701
0801
0901
1001
1101
1201
1301
1401
1501
HR 13
HR 15
HR 17
HR 19
HR 21
HR 23
HR 25
HR 27
HR 29
HR 31
HR 33
HR 35
HR 37
HR 39
HR 41
Compare data in IR 001
(which contains 0210)
with the given ranges.
5-17-5 TABLE COMPARE – TCMP(85)
Operand Data Areas
CD: Compare data
Ladder Symbols
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
TB: First comparison table word
IR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: Result word
TCMP(85)
@TCMP(85)
CD
TB
R
CD
TB
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Limitations
Description
TB and TB+15 must be in the same data area.
When the execution condition is OFF, TCMP(85) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, TCMP(85) compares CD to the content of TB, TB+1,
TB+2, ..., and TB+15. If CD is equal to the content of any of these words, the
corresponding bit in R is set, e.g., if the CD equals the content of TB, bit 00 is
turned ON, if it equals that of TB+1, bit 01 is turned ON, etc. The rest of the bits in
R will be turned OFF.
Flags
ER:
The comparison table (i.e., TB through TB+15) exceeds the data area.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Comparison
Example
The following example shows the comparisons made and the results provided
for TCMP(85). Here, the comparison is made during each cycle when 00000 is
ON.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
TCMP(85)
001
00000
00001
LD
TCMP(85)
HR 10
HR 05
001
10
HR
HR
05
CD: 001
Upper limits
R: HR 05
001 0210
HR 10
HR 11
HR 12
HR 13
HR 14
HR 15
HR 16
HR 17
HR 18
HR 19
HR 20
HR 21
HR 22
HR 23
HR 24
HR 25
0100
HR 0500
HR 0501
HR 0502
HR 0503
HR 0504
HR 0505
HR 0506
HR 0507
HR 0508
HR 0509
HR 0510
HR 0511
HR 0512
HR 0513
HR 0514
HR 0515
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0200
0210
0400
0500
0600
0210
0800
0900
1000
0210
1200
1300
1400
0210
1600
Compare the data in IR 001
with the given ranges.
5-17-6 AREA RANGE COMPARE – ZCP(88)
Operand Data Areas
CD: Compare data
Ladder Symbols
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
LL: Lower limit of range
ZCP(88)
CD
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
UL: Upper limit of range
LL
UL
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Limitations
Description
LL must be less than or equal to UL.
When the execution condition is OFF, ZCP(88) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, ZCP(88) compares CD to the range defined by lower limit
LL and upper limit UL and outputs the result to the GR, EQ, and LE flags in the
SR area. The resulting flag status is shown in the following table.
Flag status
Comparison result
GR (SR 25505) EQ (SR 25506) LE (SR 25507)
CD < LL
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
LL ≤ CD ≤ UL
UL < CD
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Comparison
Precautions
Placing other instructions between ZCP(88) and the operation which accesses
the EQ, LE, and GR flags may change the status of these flags. Be sure to ac-
cess them before the desired status is changed.
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
LL is greater than UL.
ON if LL ≤ CD ≤ UL
ON if CD < LL.
EQ:
LE:
GR:
ON if CD > UL.
Example:
Saving ZCP(88) Results
The following example shows how to save the comparison result immediately. If
IR 100 > AB1F, IR 00200 is turned ON; if #0010 ≤ IR 100 ≤ AB1F, IR 00201 is
turned ON; if IR 100 < 0010, IR 00202 is turned ON.
TR
0
00000
ZCP(88)
IR 100
#0010
#AB1F
25505
25506
Greater Than
00200
(above range)
Equal
00201
(within range)
25507
Less Than
00202
(below range)
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00200
00000
00001
00002
LD
00005
00006
00007
00008
00009
00010
00011
OUT
LD
OUT
TR
0
TR
0
25506
00201
0
ZCP(88)
AND
OUT
LD
IR
#
100
0010
TR
00003
00004
LD
#
AB1F
25505
AND
OUT
25507
00202
AND
5-17-7 DOUBLE AREA RANGE COMPARE – ZCPL(––)
Operand Data Areas
CD: Compare data
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
LL: Lower limit of range
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
UL: Upper limit of range
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Ladder Symbols
ZCPL(––)
CD
LL
UL
Limitations
The 8-digit value in LL+1,LL must be less than or equal to UL+1,UL.
CD and CD+1 must be in the same data area, as must LL and LL+1, and UL and
UL+1.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Comparison
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, ZCPL(––) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, ZCPL(––) compares the 8-digit value in CD, CD+1 to the
range defined by lower limit LL+1,LL and upper limit UL+1,UL and outputs the
result to the GR, EQ, and LE flags in the SR area. The resulting flag status is
shown in the following table.
Flag status
Comparison result
GR
(SR 25505)
EQ
(SR 25506)
LE
(SR 25507)
CD , CD+1< LL+1,LL
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
LL+1,LL ≤ CD, CD+1 ≤ UL+1,UL
UL+1,UL < CD, CD+1
Precautions
Flags
Placing other instructions between ZCPL(––) and the operation which accesses
the EQ, LE, and GR flags may change the status of these flags. Be sure to ac-
cess them before the desired status is changed.
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
LL+1,LL is greater than UL+1,UL.
ON if LL+1,LL ≤ CD, CD+1 ≤ UL+1,UL
ON if CD, CD+1 < LL+1,LL.
EQ:
LE:
GR:
ON if CD, CD+1 > UL+1,UL.
Example
difference between ZCP(88) and ZCPL(––) is the number of digits in the com-
parison data.
5-17-8 SIGNED BINARY COMPARE – CPS(––)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
Cp1: First compare word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Cp2: Second compare word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
CPS(––)
Cp1
Cp2
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, CPS(––) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, CPS(––) compares the 16-bit (4-digit) signed binary con-
tents in Cp1 and Cp2 and outputs the result to the GR, EQ, and LE flags in the SR
area.
sults.
Precautions
Placing other instructions between CPS(––) and the operation which accesses
the EQ, LE, and GR flags may change the status of these flags. Be sure to ac-
cess them before the desired status is changed.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Comparison
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
LE:
GR:
ON if Cp1 equals Cp2.
ON if Cp1 is less than Cp2.
ON if Cp1 is greater than Cp2.
Flag status
Comparison result
GR (SR 25505) EQ (SR 25506) LE (SR 25505)
Cp1 < Cp2
Cp1 = Cp2
Cp1 > Cp2
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
5-17-9 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY COMPARE – CPSL(––)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
Cp1: First compare word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Cp2: Second compare word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
CPSL(––)
Cp1
Cp2
Limitations
Description
Cp1 and Cp1+1 must be in the same data area, as must Cp2 and Cp2+1.
When the execution condition is OFF, CPSL(––) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, CPSL(––) compares the 32-bit (8-digit) signed binary
contents in Cp1+1, Cp1 and Cp2+1, Cp2 and outputs the result to the GR, EQ,
and LE flags in the SR area.
sults.
Precautions
Flags
Placing other instructions between CPSL(––) and the operation which accesses
the EQ, LE, and GR flags may change the status of these flags. Be sure to ac-
cess them before the desired status is changed.
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
LE:
GR:
ON if Cp1+1, Cp1 equals Cp2+1, Cp2.
ON if Cp1+1, Cp1 is less than Cp2+1, Cp2.
ON if Cp1+1, Cp1 is greater than Cp2+1, Cp2.
Flag status
Comparison result
GR (SR 25505) EQ (SR 25506) LE (SR 25507)
Cp1+1, Cp1 < Cp2+1, Cp2
Cp1+1, Cp1 = Cp2+1, Cp2
Cp1+1, Cp1 > Cp2+1, Cp2
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
5-18 Data Conversion
The conversion instructions convert word data that is in one format into another
format and output the converted data to specified result word(s). Conversions
are available to convert between binary (hexadecimal) and BCD, to 7-segment
display data, to ASCII, and between multiplexed and non-multiplexed data. All of
these instructions change only the content of the words to which converted data
is being moved, i.e., the content of source words is the same before and after
execution of any of the conversion instructions.
5-18-1 BCD-TO-BINARY – BIN(23)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
S: Source word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: Result word
BIN(23)
@BIN(23)
S
R
S
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, BIN(23) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, BIN(23) converts the BCD content of S into the numerically
equivalent binary bits, and outputs the binary value to R. Only the content of R is
changed; the content of S is left unchanged.
S
BCD
R
Binary
BIN(23) can be used to convert BCD to binary so that displays on the Program-
ming Console or any other programming device will appear in hexadecimal
rather than decimal. It can also be used to convert to binary to perform binary
arithmetic operations rather than BCD arithmetic operations, e.g., when BCD
and binary values must be added.
Flags
ER:
The content of S is not BCD.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the result is zero.
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
5-18-2 DOUBLE BCD-TO-DOUBLE BINARY – BINL(58)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word (BCD)
BINL(58)
@BINL(58)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: First result word
S
R
S
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, BINL(58) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, BINL(58) converts an eight-digit number in S and S+1
into 32-bit binary data, and outputs the converted data to R and R+1.
S + 1
S
BCD
R + 1
R
Binary
Flags
ER:
The contents of S and/or S+1 words are not BCD.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the result is zero.
5-18-3 BINARY-TO-BCD – BCD(24)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
S: Source word (binary)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: Result word
BCD(24)
@BCD(24)
S
R
S
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
BCD(24) converts the binary (hexadecimal) content of S into the numerically
equivalent BCD bits, and outputs the BCD bits to R. Only the content of R is
changed; the content of S is left unchanged.
Binary
S
R
BCD
BCD(24) can be used to convert binary to BCD so that displays on the Program-
ming Console or any other programming device will appear in decimal rather
than hexadecimal. It can also be used to convert to BCD to perform BCD arith-
metic operations rather than binary arithmetic operations, e.g., when BCD and
binary values must be added.
Note If the content of S exceeds 270F, the converted result would exceed 9999 and
BCD(24) will not be executed. When the instruction is not executed, the content
of R remains unchanged.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
Signed Binary Data
BCD(24) cannot be used to convert signed binary data directly to BCD. To con-
vert signed binary data, first determine whether the data is positive or negative. If
it is positive, BCD(24) can be used to convert the data to BCD. If it is negative,
use the 2’s COMPLEMENT – NEG(––) instruction to convert the data to un-
signed binary before executing BCD(24). Refer to page 29 for details on signed
binary data.
Flags
ER:
S is greater than 270F.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the result is zero.
5-18-4 DOUBLE BINARY-TO-DOUBLE BCD – BCDL(59)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word (binary)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: First result word
BCDL(59)
@BCDL(59)
S
R
S
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
If the content of S exceeds 05F5E0FF, the converted result would exceed
99999999 and BCDL(59) will not be executed. When the instruction is not exe-
cuted, the content of R and R+1 remain unchanged.
S and S+1 must be in the same data area as must R and R+1.
BCDL(59) converts the 32-bit binary content of S and S+1 into eight digits of
BCD data, and outputs the converted data to R and R+1.
S + 1
R + 1
S
R
Binary
BCD
Signed Binary Data
BCD(24) cannot be used to convert signed binary data directly to BCD. To con-
vert signed binary data, first determine whether the data is positive or negative. If
it is positive, BCD(24) can be used to convert the data to BCD. If it is negative,
use the DOUBLE 2’s COMPLEMENT – NEGL(––) instruction to convert the data
signed binary data.
Flags
ER:
Content of R and R+1 exceeds 99999999.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the result is zero.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
5-18-5 HOURS-TO-SECONDS – SEC(65)
Operand Data Areas
S: Beginning source word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: Beginning result word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
---: Not used.
Ladder Symbols
SEC(65)
@SEC(65)
S
R
S
R
---
---
Limitations
Description
S and S+1 must be within the same data area. R and R+1 must be within the
same data area. S and S+1 must be BCD and must be in the proper hours/minu-
tes/seconds format.
SEC(65) is used to convert time notation in hours/minutes/seconds to an equiv-
alent in just seconds.
For the source data, the seconds is designated in bits 00 through 07 and the min-
utes is designated in bits 08 through 15 of S. The hours is designated in S+1. The
maximum is thus 9,999 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
The result is output to R and R+1. The maximum obtainable value is 35,999,999
seconds.
Flags
ER:
S and S+1 or R and R+1 are not in the same data area.
S and/or S+1 do not contain BCD.
Number of seconds and/or minutes exceeds 59.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
Turns ON when the result is zero.
Example
When 00000 is OFF (i.e., when the execution condition is ON), the following in-
struction would convert the hours, minutes, and seconds given in HR 12 and HR
13 to seconds and store the results in DM 0100 and DM 0101 as shown.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
SEC(65)
00000
00001
LD NOT
SEC(65)
HR 12
DM 0100
000
HR
DM
12
0100
000
HR 12
3
2
2
8
0
1
7
5
2,815 hrs, 32 min, 07 s
HR 13
DM 0100
DM 0101
5
1
9
0
2
1
7
3
10,135,927 s
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
5-18-6 SECONDS-TO-HOURS – HMS(66)
Operand Data Areas
S: Beginning source word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: Beginning result word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
---: Not used.
Ladder Symbols
HMS(66)
@HMS(66)
S
R
S
R
---
---
Limitations
Description
S and S+1 must be within the same data area. R and R+1 must be within the
same data area. S and S+1 must be BCD and must be between 0 and
35,999,999 seconds.
HMS(66) is used to convert time notation in seconds to an equivalent in hours/
minutes/seconds.
The number of seconds designated in S and S+1 is converted to hours/minutes/
seconds and placed in R and R+1.
For the results, the seconds is placed in bits 00 through 07 and the minutes is
placed in bits 08 through 15 of R. The hours is placed in R+1. The maximum will
be 9,999 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds.
Flags
ER:
S and S+1 or R and R+1 are not in the same data area.
S and/or S+1 do not contain BCD or exceed 36,000,000 seconds.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
Turns ON when the result is zero.
Example
When 00000 is OFF (i.e., when the execution condition is ON), the following in-
struction would convert the seconds given in HR 12 and HR 13 to hours, min-
utes, and seconds and store the results in DM 0100 and DM 0101 as shown.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
HMS(66)
00000
00001
LD NOT
HMS(66)
HR 12
DM 0100
000
HR
DM
12
0100
000
HR 12
5
1
9
0
2
1
7
3
10,135,927 s
HR 13
DM 0100
DM 0101
3
2
2
8
0
1
7
5
2,815 hrs, 32 min, 07 s
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
5-18-7 4-TO-16 DECODER – MLPX(76)
Operand Data Areas
S: Source word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
C: Control word
Ladder Symbols
MLPX(76)
@MLPX(76)
S
C
R
S
C
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R: First result word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
When the leftmost digit of C is 0, the rightmost two digits of C must each be be-
tween 0 and 3.
When the leftmost digit of C is 1, the rightmost two digits of C must each be be-
tween 0 and 1.
All result words must be in the same data area.
Description
Depending on the value of C, MLPX(76) operates as a 4-bit to 16-bit decoder or
an 8-bit to 256-bit decoder.
4-bit to 16-bit Decoder
MLPX(76) operates as a 4-bit to 16-bit decoder when the leftmost digit of C is 0.
The hexadecimal value of the digits in S are used to specify bits in up to 4 result
words. The specified bit in each result word is turned on, and the other 15 bits in
each word are turned off.
When the execution condition is OFF, MLPX(76) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, MLPX(76) converts up to four, four-bit hexadecimal digits
from S into decimal values from 0 to 15, each of which is used to indicate a bit
position. The bit whose number corresponds to each converted value is then
turned ON in a result word. If more than one digit is specified, then one bit will be
turned ON in each of consecutive words beginning with R. (See examples, be-
low.)
Control Word
The digits of C are set as shown below. Set the leftmost digit of C to 0 to specify
4-bit to 16-bit decoding.
Digit number: 3 2 1 0
Specifies the first digit to be converted (0 to 3)
Number of digits to be converted (0 to 3)
0: 1 digit
1: 2 digits
2: 3 digits
3: 4 digits
Not used. Set to 0.
A value of 0 specifies 4-bit to 16-bit decoding.
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
Some example C values and the digit-to-word conversions that they produce
are shown below.
C: 0010
C: 0030
S
S
R
R
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
R + 1
R + 1
R + 2
R + 3
C: 0031
C: 0023
S
S
R
R
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
R + 1
R + 2
R + 1
R + 2
R + 3
The following is an example of a one-digit decode operation from digit number 1
of S, i.e., here C would be 0001.
Source word
C
Bit C (i.e., bit number 12) turned ON.
First result word
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The first digit and the number of digits to be converted are designated in C. If
more digits are designated than remain in S (counting from the designated first
digit), the remaining digits will be taken starting back at the beginning of S. The
final word required to store the converted result (R plus the number of digits to be
converted) must be in the same data area as R, e.g., if two digits are converted,
the last word address in a data area cannot be designated; if three digits are con-
verted, the last two words in a data area cannot be designated.
8-bit to 256-bit Decoder
Control Word
MLPX(76) operates as an 8-bit to 256-bit decoder when the leftmost digit of C is
set to 1. The hexadecimal value of the two bytes in S are used to specify a bit in
one or two groups of 16 consecutive result words (256 bits). The specified bit in
each group is turned on, and the other 255 bits in the group are turned off.
The digits of C are set as shown below. Set the leftmost digit of C to 1 to specify
8-bit to 256-bit decoding.
Digit number: 3 2 1 0
Specifies the first byte to be converted (0 or 1).
0: Rightmost byte
1: Leftmost byte
Number of bytes to be converted (0 or 1).
0: 1 byte
1: 2 bytes
Not used. Set to 0.
A value of 1 specifies 8-bit to 256-bit decoding.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
The 4 possible C values and the conversions that they produce are shown be-
low. (In S, 0 indicates the rightmost byte and 1 indicates the leftmost byte.)
C: 1000
C: 1001
S
S
R to R+15
R+16 to R+31
R to R+15
R+16 to R+31
0
1
0
1
C: 1010
C: 1011
S
S
R to R+15
R to R+15
0
1
0
1
R+16 to R+31
R+16 to R+31
The following is an example of a one-byte decode operation from the rightmost
byte of S (C would be 1000 in this case).
Source word
Bit 2C (i.e., bit number 12 in
the third word) turned ON.
2
C
Bit
15
Bit
00
Bit
15
Bit Bit
00 15
Bit Bit
00 15
Bit
00
. . .
R+15
. . .
. . .
R+1
. . .
R
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0
R+2
Flags
ER:
Undefined control word.
The result words are not all in the same data area.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
Example:
4-bit to 16-bit Decoding
The following program converts three digits of data from LR 20 to bit positions
and turns ON the corresponding bits in three consecutive words starting with
HR 10.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
MLPX(76)
DM 0020
#0021
00000
00001
LD
MLPX(76)
LR
#
20
0021
10
HR 10
HR
S: LR 20
R: HR 10
R+1: HR 11
R+2: HR 12
0
DM 00
DM 01
DM 02
DM 03
DM 04
DM 05
DM 06
DM 07
DM 08
DM 09
DM 10
DM 11
DM 12
DM 13
DM 14
DM 15
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
HR 1000
HR 1001
HR 1002
HR 1003
HR 1004
HR 1005
HR 1006
HR 1007
HR 1008
HR 1009
HR 1010
HR 1011
HR 1012
HR 1013
HR 1014
HR 1015
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
HR 1100
HR 1101
HR 1102
HR 1103
HR 1104
HR 1105
HR 1106
HR 1107
HR 1108
HR 1109
HR 1110
HR 1111
HR 1112
HR 1113
HR 1114
HR 1115
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
HR 1200
HR 1201
HR 1202
HR 1203
HR 1204
HR 1205
HR 1206
HR 1207
HR 1208
HR 1209
HR 1210
HR 1211
HR 1212
HR 1213
HR 1214
HR 1215
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
Not
Converted
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
15
6
1
2
3
0
5-18-8 16-TO-4 ENCODER – DMPX(77)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word
Ladder Symbols
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: Result word
DMPX(77)
@DMPX(77)
S
R
C
S
R
C
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
C: Control Word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Limitations
When the leftmost digit of C is 0, the rightmost two digits of C must each be be-
tween 0 and 3.
When the leftmost digit of C is 1, the rightmost two digits of C must each be be-
tween 0 and 1.
All source words must be in the same data area.
Description
Depending on the value of C, MLPX(76) operates as a 16-bit to 4-bit encoder or
an 256-bit to 8-bit encoder.
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
16-bit to 4-bit encoder
DMPX(77) operates as a 16-bit to 4-bit encoder when the leftmost digit of C is 0.
When the execution condition is OFF, DMPX(77) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, DMPX(77) determines the position of the highest ON bit
in S, encodes it into single-digit hexadecimal value corresponding to the bit num-
ber, then transfers the hexadecimal value to the specified digit in R. The digits to
receive the results are specified in C, which also specifies the number of digits to
be encoded.
Control Word
The digits of C are set as shown below. Set the leftmost digit of C to 0 to specify
16-bit to 4-bit encoding.
Digit number: 3 2 1 0
Specifies the first digit in R to receive converted data (0 to 3).
Number of words to be converted (0 to 3).
0: 1 word
1: 2 words
2: 3 words
3: 4 words
Not used. Set to 0.
A value of 0 specifies 16-bit to 4-bit encoding.
Some example C values and the word-to-digit conversions that they produce
are shown below.
C: 0011
C: 0030
R
R
S
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
S
S + 1
S + 1
S + 2
S + 3
C: 0013
C: 0032
R
R
0
S
S
0
1
2
3
1
2
3
S + 1
S + 2
S + 3
S + 1
The following is an example of a one-digit encode operation to digit number 1 of
R, i.e., here C would be 0001.
First source word
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
C transferred to indicate bit number 12 as
the highest ON bit.
Result word
C
Up to four digits from four consecutive source words starting with S may be en-
coded and the digits written to R in order from the designated first digit. If more
digits are designated than remain in R (counting from the designated first digit),
the remaining digits will be placed at digits starting back at the beginning of R.
The final word to be converted (S plus the number of digits to be converted) must
be in the same data area as SB.
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
256-bit to 8-bit Encoder
DMPX(77) operates as a 256-bit to 8-bit encoder when the leftmost digit of C is
set to 1.
When the execution condition is OFF, DMPX(77) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, DMPX(77) determines the position of the highest (left-
most) ON bit in the group of 16 source words from S to S+15 or S+16 to S+31,
encodes it into a two-digit hexadecimal value corresponding to the location of
the bit among the 256 bits in the group, then transfers the hexadecimal value to
the specified byte in R. The byte to receive the result is specified in C, which also
specifies the number of bytes to be encoded.
Control Word
The digits of C are set as shown below. Set the leftmost digit of C to 1 to specify
256-bit to 8-bit decoding.
Digit number: 3 2 1 0
Specifies the first byte in R to receive converted data (0 or 1).
0: Rightmost byte
1: Leftmost byte
Number of bytes to be encoded (0 or 1).
0: 1 byte
1: 2 bytes
Not used. Set to 0.
A value of 1 specifies 256-bit to 8-bit encoding.
Three possible C values and the conversions that they produce are shown be-
low. (In R, 0 indicates the rightmost byte and 1 indicates the leftmost byte.)
C: 1000
C: 1010
C: 1011
R
R
R
S to S+15
S to S+15
S+16 to S+31
S to S+15
S+16 to S+31
0
1
0
1
0
1
S+16 to S+31
The following is an example of a one-byte encode operation to the rightmost byte
of R (C would be 1000 in this case).
Bit
15
Bit Bit
00 15
Bit
00
Bit
15
Bit
00
. . .
S+14
. . .
. . .
S
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 0
1 1 1
0 0 0
S+15
Result word
Bit FB (bit 251 of 0 to 255) is the highest ON bit of the
16-word group, so FB is written to the rightmost bit of R.
F
B
Flags
ER:
Undefined control word.
The source words are not all in the same data area.
Content of a source word is zero. (There isn’t an ON bit in the source
words.)
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
Example:
16-bit to 4-bit Encoding
When 00000 is ON, the following diagram encodes IR words 010 and 011 to the
first two digits of HR 20 and then encodes LR 10 and 11 to the last two digits of
HR 20. Although the status of each source word bit is not shown, it is assumed
that the bit with status 1 (ON) shown is the highest bit that is ON in the word.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
DMPX(77)
010
00000
00001
LD
DMPX(77)
HR 20
#0010
010
20
HR
#
0010
DMPX(77)
LR 10
00002
DMPX(77)
LR
HR
#
10
20
HR 20
#0012
0012
IR 010
IR 011
01100
:
01000
:
01011
01012
: :
1
0
:
01109
01110
: :
1
0
:
HR 20
Digit 0
Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
01015
0
01115
0
B
9
1
8
LR 10
LR 11
LR 1100
:
LR 1000
LR 1001 1
LR 1002 0
LR 1108
LR 1109
: :
1
: :
: :
:
:
0
:
LR 1015 0
LR 1115
0
5-18-9 7-SEGMENT DECODER – SDEC(78)
Operand Data Areas
S: Source word (binary)
Ladder Symbols
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Di: Digit designator
SDEC(78)
@SDEC(78)
S
Di
D
S
Di
D
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
D: First destination word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
Di must be within the values given below
All destination words must be in the same data area.
When the execution condition is OFF, SDEC(78) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, SDEC(78) converts the designated digit(s) of S into the
equivalent 8-bit, 7-segment display code and places it into the destination
word(s) beginning with D.
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
Any or all of the digits in S may be converted in sequence from the designated
first digit. The first digit, the number of digits to be converted, and the half of D to
receive the first 7-segment display code (rightmost or leftmost 8 bits) are desig-
nated in Di. If multiple digits are designated, they will be placed in order starting
from the designated half of D, each requiring two digits. If more digits are desig-
nated than remain in S (counting from the designated first digit), further digits will
be used starting back at the beginning of S.
Digit Designator
The digits of Di are set as shown below.
Digit number: 3 2 1 0
Specifies the first digit to receive converted data (0 to 3).
Number of digits to be converted (0 to 3)
0: 1 digit
1: 2 digits
2: 3 digits
3: 4 digits
First half of D to be used.
0: Rightmost 8 bits (1st half)
1: Leftmost 8 bits (2nd half)
Not used; set to 0.
Some example Di values and the 4-bit binary to 7-segment display conversions
that they produce are shown below.
Di: 0011
Di: 0030
S digits
S digits
D
D
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
1st half
1st half
2nd half
2nd half
D+1
1st half
2nd half
Di: 0112
Di: 0130
S digits
S digits
0
D
D
0
1
2
3
1st half
1st half
1
2
3
2nd half
2nd half
D+1
D+1
1st half
1st half
2nd half
2nd half
D+2
1st half
2nd half
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
Example
The following example shows the data to produce an 8. The lower case letters
show which bits correspond to which segments of the 7-segment display. The
table underneath shows the original data and converted code for all hexadeci-
mal digits.
a
Di
S
D
Bit 00
or
bit 08
f
b
c
g
d
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
a
b
c
d
e
f
0
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
e
1: Second digit
0
1
2
3
x10
x10
x10
x10
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
8
0: One digit
g
Bit 07
or
bit 15
0 or 1:
bits 00 through 07 or
08 through 15.
Not used.
Original data
Bits
Converted code (segments)
Display
Digit
–
g
f
e
d
c
b
a
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
Flags
ER:
Incorrect digit designator, or data area for destination exceeded
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
5-18-10 ASCII CONVERT – ASC(86)
Operand Data Areas
S: Source word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Di: Digit designator
Ladder Symbols
ASC(86)
@ASC(86)
S
Di
D
S
Di
D
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
D: First destination word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
Di must be within the values given below
All destination words must be in the same data area.
When the execution condition is OFF, ASC(86) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, ASC(86) converts the designated digit(s) of S into the
equivalent 8-bit ASCII code and places it into the destination word(s) beginning
with D.
Any or all of the digits in S may be converted in order from the designated first
digit. The first digit, the number of digits to be converted, and the half of D to re-
ceive the first ASCII code (rightmost or leftmost 8 bits) are designated in Di. If
multiple digits are designated, they will be placed in order starting from the des-
ignated half of D, each requiring two digits. If more digits are designated than
remain in S (counting from the designated first digit), further digits will be used
starting back at the beginning of S.
Refer to Appendix I for a table of extended ASCII characters.
The digits of Di are set as shown below.
Digit number: 3 2 1 0
Digit Designator
Specifies the first digit to be converted (0 to 3).
Number of digits to be converted (0 to 3)
0: 1 digit
1: 2 digits
2: 3 digits
3: 4 digits
First half of D to be used.
0: Rightmost 8 bits (1st half)
1: Leftmost 8 bits (2nd half)
Parity
0: none,
1: even,
2: odd
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
Some examples of Di values and the 4-bit binary to 8-bit ASCII conversions that
they produce are shown below.
Di: 0011
Di: 0030
S
S
D
D
0
0
1
2
3
1st half
1st half
1
2
3
2nd half
2nd half
D+1
1st half
2nd half
Di: 0112
Di: 0130
S
S
0
1
2
3
D
D
0
1
2
3
1st half
1st half
2nd half
2nd half
D+1
D+1
1st half
1st half
2nd half
2nd half
D+2
1st half
2nd half
Parity
The leftmost bit of each ASCII character (2 digits) can be automatically adjusted
for either even or odd parity. If no parity is designated, the leftmost bit will always
be zero.
When even parity is designated, the leftmost bit will be adjusted so that the total
number of ON bits is even, e.g., when adjusted for even parity, ASCII “31”
(00110001) will be “B1” (10110001: parity bit turned ON to create an even num-
ber of ON bits); ASCII “36” (00110110) will be “36” (00110110: parity bit turned
OFF because the number of ON bits is already even). The status of the parity bit
does not affect the meaning of the ASCII code.
When odd parity is designated, the leftmost bit of each ASCII character will be
adjusted so that there is an odd number of ON bits.
Flags
ER:
Incorrect digit designator, or data area for destination exceeded.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
5-18-11 ASCII-TO-HEXADECIMAL – HEX(––)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Di: Digit designator
Ladder Symbols
HEX(––)
@HEX(––)
S
Di
D
S
Di
D
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
D: Destination word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
Limitations
Di must be within the values given below.
All source words must be in the same data area.
Bytes in the source words must contain the ASCII code equivalent of hexadeci-
mal values, i.e., 30 to 39 (0 to 9), 41 to 46 (A to F), or 61 to 66 (a to f).
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, HEX(––) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, HEX(––) converts the designated byte(s) of ASCII code
from the source word(s) into the hexadecimal equivalent and places it into D.
Up to 4 ASCII codes may be converted beginning with the designated first byte
of S. The converted hexadecimal values are then placed in D in order from the
designated digit. The first byte (rightmost or leftmost 8 bits), the number of bytes
to be converted, and the digit of D to receive the first hexadecimal value are
designated in Di. If multiple bytes are designated, they will be converted in order
starting from the designated half of S and continuing to S+1 and S+2, if
necessary.
If more digits are designated than remain in D (counting from the designated first
digit), further digits will be used starting back at the beginning of D. Digits in D
that do not receive converted data will not be changed.
Digit Designator
The digits of Di are set as shown below.
Digit number: 3 2 1 0
Specifies the first digit of D to be used (0 to 3).
Number of bytes to be converted (0 to 3)
0: 1 byte (2-digit ASCII code)
1: 2 bytes
2: 3 bytes
3: 4 bytes
First byte of S to be used.
st
nd
0: Rightmost 8 bits (1 byte)
1: Leftmost 8 bits (2 byte)
Parity
0: none
1: even
2: odd
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
Some examples of Di values and the 8-bit ASCII to 4-bit hexadecimal conver-
sions that they produce are shown below.
Di: 0011
Di: 0030
D
D
S
S
st
st
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
1
2
byte
byte
1
2
byte
nd
nd
byte
S+1
st
1
2
byte
nd
byte
Di: 0023
Di: 0133
S
D
S
st
st
D
0
1
2
3
1
byte
1
2
byte
nd
nd
0
1
2
3
2
byte
S+1
byte
S+1
st
st
1
2
byte
byte
1
2
byte
nd
nd
byte
S+2
st
1
2
byte
nd
byte
ASCII Code Table
The following table shows the ASCII codes before conversion and the hexadeci-
mal values after conversion. Refer to Appendix I for a table of ASCII characters.
Original data
Converted data
Digit Bits
ASCII Code
Bit status (See note.)
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
46
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Note The leftmost bit of each ASCII code is adjusted for parity.
Parity
The leftmost bit of each ASCII character (2 digits) is automatically adjusted for
either even or odd parity.
With no parity, the leftmost bit should always be zero. With odd or even parity, the
leftmost bit of each ASCII character should be adjusted so that there is an odd or
even number of ON bits.
If the parity of the ASCII code in S does not agree with the parity specified in Di,
the ER Flag (SR 25503) will be turned ON and the instruction will not be
executed.
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
Flags
ER:
Incorrect digit designator, or data area for destination exceeded.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
nd
st
Example
In the following example, the 2 byte of LR 10 and the 1 byte of LR 11 are con-
verted to hexadecimal values and those values are written to the first and se-
cond bytes of IR 010.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
@HEX(––)
LR 10
00000
00001
LD
@HEX(––)
HR 10
LR
10
10
010
HR
010
HR 10 0 1 1 0
LR 12 3 5 3 4
LR 11 4 2 3 2
LR 10 3 1 3 0
Conversion to
hexadecimal
010 0 0 2 1
5-18-12 SCALING – SCL(––)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
S: Source word
SCL(––)
@SCL(––)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
P1: First parameter word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: Result word
S
P1
R
S
P1
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
P1 and P1+2 must be BCD.
P1 through P1+3 must be in the same data area.
P1+1 and P1+3 must not be set to the same value.
SCL(––) is used to linearly convert a 4-digit hexadecimal value to a 4-digit BCD
value. Unlike BCD(24), which converts a 4-digit hexadecimal value to its 4-digit
BCD equivalent (S → S
), SCL(––) can convert the hexadecimal value ac-
cording to a specified linear relationship. The conversion line is defined by two
points specified in the parameter words P1 to P1+3.
hex
BCD
When the execution condition is OFF, SCL(––) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, SCL(––) converts the 4-digit hexadecimal value in S to the
4-digit BCD value on the line defined by points (P1, P1+1) and (P1+2, P1+3) and
places the result in R. The result is rounded off to the nearest integer. If the result
is less than 0000, then 0000 is written to R, and if the result is greater than 9999,
then 9999 is written to R.
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
The following table shows the functions and ranges of the parameter words:
Parameter
P1
Function
BCD point #1 (A )
Range
Comments
0000 to 9999
0000 to FFFF
0000 to 9999
0000 to FFFF
---
Y
P1+1
Hex. point #1 (A )
Do not set P1+1=P1+3.
---
X
P1+2
BCD point #2 (B )
Y
P1+3
Hex. point #2 (B )
Do not set P1+3=P1+1.
X
The following diagram shows the source word, S, converted to D according to
the line defined by points (A , A ) and (B , B ).
Y
X
Y
X
Value after conversion
(BCD)
B
Y
R
A
Y
Value before conversion
(Hexadecimal)
A
X
S
B
X
The results can be calculated by first converting all values to BCD and then using
the following formula.
Results = B – [(B – A )/(B – A ) X (B – S)]
Y
Y
Y
X
X
X
Flags
ER:
The value in P1+1 equals that in P1+3.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of *DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
P1 and P1+3 are not in the same data area, or other setting error.
ON when the result, R, is 0000.
EQ:
Example
When 00000 is turned ON in the following example, the BCD source data in DM
0100 (#0100) is converted to hexadecimal according to the parameters in DM
0150 to DM 0153. The result (#0512) is then written to DM 0200.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
@SCL(––)
DM 0100
DM 0150
00000
00001
LD
@SCL(––)
DM
DM
DM
0100
0150
0200
DM 0200
DM 0150 0010
DM 0100 0100
DM 0200 0512
DM 0151 0005
DM 0152 0050
DM 0153 0019
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
5-18-13 COLUMN TO LINE – LINE(63)
Operand Data Areas
S: First word of 16 word source set
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
C: Column bit designator (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
D: Destination word
Ladder Symbols
LINE(63)
@LINE(63)
S
C
D
S
C
D
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Limitations
Description
S and S+15 must be in the same data area.
C must be between #0000 and #0015.
When the execution condition is OFF, LINE(63) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, LINE(63) copies bit column C from the 16-word set (S to
S+15) to the 16 bits of word D (00 to 15).
C
Bit
15
Bit
00
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
S
1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
S+1
S+2
S+3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
Bit
15
Bit
00
S+15
. . .
0
0 1 1 1
D
Flags
ER:
EQ:
The column bit designator C is not BCD, or it is specifying a non-existent
bit (i.e., bit specification must be between 00 and 15).
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
ON when the content of D is zero; otherwise OFF.
Example
The following example shows how to use LINE(63) to move bit column 07 from
the set (IR 100 to IR 115) to DM 0100.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
LINE(63)
100
00000
00001
LD
LINE(63)
#0007
100
0007
0100
DM 0100
#
DM
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
5-18-14 LINE TO COLUMN – COLM(64)
Operand Data Areas
S: Source word
Ladder Symbols
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
D: First word of the destination set
IR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
COLM(64)
@COLM(64)
S
D
C
S
D
C
C: Column bit designator (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Limitations
Description
D and D+15 must be in the same data area.
C must be between #0000 and #0015.
When the execution condition is OFF, COLM(64) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, COLM(64) copies the 16 bits of word S (00 to 15) to the
column of bits, C, of the 16-word set (D to D+15).
Bit
15
Bit
00
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
0 1 1 1
S
C
Bit
15
Bit
00
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
D
D+1
D+2
D+3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
D+15
Flags
ER:
EQ:
The bit designator C is not BCD, or it is specifying a non-existent bit (i.e.,
bit specification must be between 00 and 15).
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
ON when the content of S is zero; otherwise OFF.
Example
The following example shows how to use COLM(64) to move the contents of
word DM 0100 (00 to 15) to bit column 15 of the set (DM 0200 to DM 0215).
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
COLM(64)
DM 0100
DM 0200
#0015
00000
00001
LD
COLM(64)
DM
DM
#
0100
0200
0015
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
5-18-15 2’S COMPLEMENT – NEG(––)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
NEG(––)
@NEG(––)
S: Source word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R: Result word
S
R
S
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
---
---
Description
Converts the four-digit hexadecimal content of the source word (S) to its 2’s
complement and outputs the result to the result word (R). This operation is effec-
tively the same as subtracting S from 0000 and outputting the result to R.
If the content of S is 0000, the content of R will also be 0000 after execution, and
EQ (SR 25506) will be turned on.
If the content of S is 8000, the content of R will also be 8000 after execution, and
UF (SR 25405) will be turned on.
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
UF:
ON when the content of S is 0000; otherwise OFF.
ON when the content of S is 8000; otherwise OFF.
Example
The following example shows how to use NEG(––) to find the 2’s complement of
the hexadecimal value 001F and output the result to DM 0020.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
NEG(––)
#001F
DM 0020
---
00000
00001
LD
NEG(––)
#
001F
0020
DM
#0000
#001F
–
Output to DM 0020.
#FFE1
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion
5-18-16 DOUBLE 2’S COMPLEMENT – NEGL(––)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
NEGL(––)
@NEGL(––)
S: First source word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: First result word
S
R
S
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
---
---
Limitations
Description
S and S+1 must be in the same data area, as must R and R+1.
Converts the eight-digit hexadecimal content of the source words (S and S+1) to
its 2’s complement and outputs the result to the result words (R and R+1). This
operation is effectively the same as subtracting the eight-digit content S and S+1
from $0000 0000 and outputting the result to R and R+1.
If the content of S is 0000 0000, the content of R will also be 0000 0000 after
execution and EQ (SR 25506) will be turned on.
If the content of S is 8000 0000, the content of R will also be 8000 0000 after
execution and UF (SR 25405) will be turned on.
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
UF:
ON when the content of S+1, S is 0000 0000; otherwise OFF.
ON when the content of S+1, S is 8000 0000; otherwise OFF.
Example
The following example shows how to use NEGL(––) to find the 2’s complement
of the hexadecimal value in LR 21, LR 20 (001F FFFF) and output the result to
DM 0021, DM 0020.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
NEG(––)
LR20
00000
00001
LD
NEGL(––)
DM 0020
---
LR
20
DM
0020
0000
0000
S+1: LR 21
001F
S: LR 20
FFFF
–
R+1: DM 0021 R: DM 0020
FFE0 0001
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BCD Calculations
5-19 BCD Calculations
The BCD calculation instructions – INC(38), DEC(39), ADD(30), ADDL(54),
SUB(31), SUBL(55), MUL(32), MULL(56), DIV(33), DIVL(57), FDIV(79), and
ROOT(72) – all perform arithmetic operations on BCD data.
For INC(38) and DEC(39) the source and result words are the same. That is, the
content of the source word is overwritten with the instruction result. All other in-
structions change only the content of the words in which results are placed, i.e.,
the contents of source words are the same before and after execution of any of
the other BCD calculation instructions.
STC(40) and CLC(41), which set and clear the carry flag, are included in this
group because most of the BCD operations make use of the Carry Flag (CY) in
their results. Binary calculations and shift operations also use CY.
The addition and subtraction instructions include CY in the calculation as well as
in the result. Be sure to clear CY if its previous status is not required in the calcu-
lation, and to use the result placed in CY, if required, before it is changed by exe-
cution of any other instruction.
5-19-1 INCREMENT – INC(38)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
Wd: Increment word (BCD)
INC(38)
Wd
@INC(38)
Wd
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
Flags
When the execution condition is OFF, INC(38) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, INC(38) increments Wd, without affecting Carry (CY).
ER:
Wd is not BCD
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the incremented result is 0.
5-19-2 DECREMENT – DEC(39)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
Wd: Decrement word (BCD)
DEC(39)
Wd
@DEC(39)
Wd
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
Flags
When the execution condition is OFF, DEC(39) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, DEC(39) decrements Wd, without affecting CY. DEC(39)
works the same way as INC(38) except that it decrements the value instead of
incrementing it.
ER:
Wd is not BCD
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the decremented result is 0.
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BCD Calculations
5-19-3 SET CARRY – STC(40)
Ladder Symbols
STC(40)
@STC(40)
When the execution condition is OFF, STC(40) is not executed.When the execu-
tion condition is ON, STC(40) turns ON CY (SR 25504).
Note Refer to Appendix C Error and Arithmetic Flag Operation for a table listing the
instructions that affect CY.
5-19-4 CLEAR CARRY – CLC(41)
Ladder Symbols
CLC(41)
@CLC(41)
When the execution condition is OFF, CLC(41) is not executed.When the execu-
tion condition is ON, CLC(41) turns OFF CY (SR 25504).
CLEAR CARRY is used to reset (turn OFF) CY (SR 25504) to “0”.
CY is automatically reset to “0” when END(01) is executed at the end of each
cycle.
Note Refer to Appendix C Error and Arithmetic Flag Operation for a table listing the
instructions that affect CY.
5-19-5 BCD ADD – ADD(30)
Operand Data Areas
Au: Augend word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Ad: Addend word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R: Result word
Ladder Symbols
ADD(30)
@ADD(30)
Au
Ad
R
Au
Ad
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, ADD(30) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, ADD(30) adds the contents of Au, Ad, and CY, and places
the result in R. CY will be set if the result is greater than 9999.
Au + Ad + CY
CY
R
Flags
ER:
Au and/or Ad is not BCD.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
CY:
ON when there is a carry in the result.
ON when the result is 0.
EQ:
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BCD Calculations
Example
If 00002 is ON, the program represented by the following diagram clears CY with
CLC(41), adds the content of LR 25 to a constant (6103), places the result in DM
0100, and then moves either all zeros or 0001 into DM 0101 depending on the
status of CY (25504). This ensures that any carry from the last digit is preserved
in R+1 so that the entire result can be later handled as eight-digit data.
Address Instruction
Operands
00002
TR 0
00000
00001
00002
00003
LR
00002
CLC(41)
OUT
TR
0
CLC(41)
AND(30)
ADD(30)
LR 25
LR
#
25
6103
#6103
DM
0100
DM 0100
00004
00005
AND
25504
25504
25504
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
#0001
#
0001
0101
0
DM
TR
DM 0101
00006
00007
00008
LD
AND NOT
MOV(21)
25504
MOV(21)
#0000
#
0000
0101
DM 0101
DM
Although two ADD(30) can be used together to perform eight-digit BCD addition,
ADDL(54) is designed specifically for this purpose.
5-19-6 DOUBLE BCD ADD – ADDL(54)
Operand Data Areas
Au: First augend word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Ad: First addend word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: First result word
Ladder Symbols
ADDL(54)
@ADDL(54)
Au
Ad
R
Au
Ad
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
Each of the following pairs must be in the same data area: Au and Au+1, Ad and
Ad+1, and R and R+1.
When the execution condition is OFF, ADDL(54) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, ADDL(54) adds the contents of CY to the 8-digit value in
Au and Au+1 to the 8-digit value in Ad and Ad+1, and places the result in R and
R+1. CY will be set if the result is greater than 99999999.
Au + 1
Ad + 1
Au
Ad
CY
R
+
CY
R + 1
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BCD Calculations
Flags
ER:
Au and/or Ad is not BCD.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
CY:
ON when there is a carry in the result.
ON when the result is 0.
EQ:
Example
When 00000 is ON, the following program adds two 12-digit numbers, the first
contained in LR 20 through LR 22 and the second in DM 0012. The result is
placed in LR 10 through HR 13. In the second addition (using ADD(30)), any
carry from the first addition is included. The carry from the second addition is
two all-zero constants to indirectly place the content of CY into HR 13.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
CLC(41)
00000
00001
00002
LD
@ADDL(54)
LR 20
CLC(41)
@ADDL(54)
DM 0010
HR 10
LR
20
0010
10
DM
HR
@ADD(30)
LR 22
00003
00004
@ADD(30)
@ADB(50)
LR
22
0012
12
DM 0012
HR 12
DM
HR
@ADB(50)
#0000
#
0000
0000
13
#
#0000
HR
HR 13
5-19-7 BCD SUBTRACT – SUB(31)
Operand Data Areas
Mi: Minuend word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Su: Subtrahend word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R: Result word
Ladder Symbols
SUB(31)
@SUB(31)
Mi
Su
R
Mi
Su
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, SUB(31) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, SUB(31) subtracts the contents of Su and CY from Mi,
and places the result in R. If the result is negative, CY is set and the 10’s comple-
ment of the actual result is placed in R. To convert the 10’s complement to the
true result, subtract the content of R from zero (see example below).
Mi – Su – CY
CY
R
Note The 2’s COMPLEMENT – NEG(––) instruction can be used to convert binary
data only, it cannot be used with BCD data.
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BCD Calculations
Flags
ER:
Mi and/or Su is not BCD.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
CY:
ON when the result is negative, i.e., when Mi is less than Su plus CY.
ON when the result is 0.
EQ:
Caution Be sure to clear the carry flag with CLC(41) before executing SUB(31) if its previous status is not
required, and check the status of CY after doing a subtraction with SUB(31). If CY is ON as a result
of executing SUB(31) (i.e., if the result is negative), the result is output as the 10’s complement of
the true answer. To convert the output result to the true value, subtract the value in R from 0.
!
Example
When 00002 is ON, the following ladder program clears CY, subtracts the con-
tents of DM 0100 and CY from the content of 010 and places the result in HR 20.
If CY is set by executing SUB(31), the result in HR 20 is subtracted from zero
(note that CLC(41) is again required to obtain an accurate result), the result is
placed back in HR 20, and HR 2100 is turned ON to indicate a negative result.
If CY is not set by executing SUB(31), the result is positive, the second subtrac-
tion is not performed, and HR 2100 is not turned ON. HR 2100 is programmed as
a self-maintaining bit so that a change in the status of CY will not turn it OFF
when the program is recycled.
In this example, differentiated forms of SUB(31) are used so that the subtraction
operation is performed only once each time 00002 is turned ON. When another
subtraction operation is to be performed, 00002 will need to be turned OFF for at
least one cycle (resetting HR 2100) and then turned back ON.
TR 0
00002
Address Instruction
Operands
00002
CLC(41)
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
OUT
TR
0
@SUB(31)
010
First
subtraction
CLC(41)
@SUB(31)
DM 0100
HR 20
010
0100
20
DM
HR
25504
CLC(41)
00004
00005
00006
AND
25504
CLC(41)
@SUB(31)
@SUB(31)
#0000
Second
subtraction
#
0000
20
HR
HR
TR
HR 20
20
HR 21
00007
00008
00009
00010
LD
0
25504
AND
OR
25504
2100
2100
HR 2100
HR
HR
OUT
HR 2100
Turned ON to indicate
negative result.
The first and second subtractions for this diagram are shown below using exam-
ple data for 010 and DM 0100.
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BCD Calculations
Note The actual SUB(31) operation involves subtracting Su and CY from 10,000 plus
Mi. For positive results the leftmost digit is truncated. For negative results the
10s complement is obtained. The procedure for establishing the correct answer
is given below.
First Subtraction
IR 010 1029
DM 0100
CY – 0
HR 20 7577 (1029 + (10000 – 3452))
CY (negative result)
– 3452
1
Second Subtraction
0000
HR 20 –7577
CY
HR 20 2423 (0000 + (10000 – 7577))
CY (negative result)
–0
1
In the above case, the program would turn ON HR 2100 to indicate that the value
held in HR 20 is negative.
5-19-8 DOUBLE BCD SUBTRACT – SUBL(55)
Operand Data Areas
Mi: First minuend word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Su: First subtrahend word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: First result word
Ladder Symbols
SUBL(55)
@SUBL(55)
Mi
Su
R
Mi
Su
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
Each of the following pairs must be in the same data area: Mi and Mi+1, Su and
Su+1, and R and R+1.
When the execution condition is OFF, SUBL(55) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, SUBL(55) subtracts CY and the 8-digit contents of Su
and Su+1 from the 8-digit value in Mi and Mi+1, and places the result in R and
R+1. If the result is negative, CY is set and the 10’s complement of the actual
result is placed in R. To convert the 10’s complement to the true result, subtract
the content of R from zero. Since an 8-digit constant cannot be directly entered,
8-digit constant.
Mi + 1
Su + 1
Mi
Su
CY
R
–
CY
R + 1
Note The DOUBLE 2’s COMPLEMENT – NEGL(––) instruction can be used to con-
vert binary data only, it cannot be used with BCD data.
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BCD Calculations
Flags
ER:
Mi, M+1,Su, or Su+1 are not BCD.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
CY:
ON when the result is negative, i.e., when Mi is less than Su.
ON when the result is 0.
EQ:
The following example works much like that for single-word subtraction. In this
example, however, BSET(71) is required to clear the content of DM 0000 and
DM 0001 so that a negative result can be subtracted from 0 (inputting an 8-digit
constant is not possible).
Example
TR 0
00003
CLC(41)
@SUBL(55)
First
subtraction
HR 20
120
DM 0100
25504
@BSET(71)
#0000
DM 0000
DM 0001
CLC(41)
@SUBL(55)
Second
subtraction
DM 0000
DM 0100
DM 0100
25504
HR 2100
HR 2100
Turned ON to indicate
negative result.
Address Instruction
Operands
00003
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
00006
00007
CLC(41)
OUT
TR
0
@SUBL(55)
CLC(41)
@SUBL(55)
DM
0000
0100
0100
0
DM
DM
TR
HR
DM
20
120
00008
00009
00010
00011
LD
0100
25504
AND
OR
25504
2100
2100
00004
00005
AND
HR
HR
@BSET(71)
OUT
#
0000
0000
0001
DM
DM
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BCD Calculations
5-19-9 BCD MULTIPLY – MUL(32)
Operand Data Areas
Md: Multiplicand (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Mr: Multiplier (BCD)
Ladder Symbols
MUL(32)
@MUL(32)
Md
Mr
R
Md
Mr
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R: First result word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR LR
Limitations
Description
R and R+1 must be in the same data area.
When the execution condition is OFF, MUL(32) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, MUL(32) multiplies Md by the content of Mr, and places
the result In R and R+1.
Md
X
Mr
R +1
R
Example
When IR 00000 is ON with the following program, the contents of IR 013 and DM
0005 are multiplied and the result is placed in HR 07 and HR 08. Example data
and calculations are shown below the program.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
MUL(32)
013
00000
00001
LD
MUL(32)
DM 0005
HR 07
013
00005
07
DM
HR
Md: IR 013
3
0
3
3
5
6
5
0
Mr: DM 0005
X
0
2
R+1: HR 08
R: HR 07
9
0
0
0
8
0
Flags
ER:
Md and/or Mr is not BCD.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
CY:
ON when there is a carry in the result.
ON when the result is 0.
EQ:
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BCD Calculations
5-19-10 DOUBLE BCD MULTIPLY – MULL(56)
Operand Data Areas
Md: First multiplicand word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Mr: First multiplier word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: First result word
Ladder Symbols
MULL(56)
@MULL(56)
Md
Mr
R
Md
Mr
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR LR
Limitations
Description
Md and Md+1 must be in the same data area, as must Mr and Mr+1.
R and R+3 must be in the same data area.
When the execution condition is OFF, MULL(56) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, MULL(56) multiplies the eight-digit content of Md and
Md+1 by the content of Mr and Mr+1, and places the result in R to R+3.
Md + 1
Mr + 1
Md
Mr
x
R + 3
R + 2
R + 1
R
Flags
ER:
Md, Md+1,Mr, or Mr+1 is not BCD.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
CY:
ON when there is a carry in the result.
ON when the result is 0.
EQ:
5-19-11 BCD DIVIDE – DIV(33)
Operand Data Areas
Dd: Dividend word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Dr: Divisor word (BCD)
Ladder Symbol
DIV(33)
Dd
Dr
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R: First result word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
R and R+1 must be in the same data area.
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BCD Calculations
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, DIV(33) is not executed and the program
moves to the next instruction. When the execution condition is ON, Dd is divided
by Dr and the result is placed in R and R + 1: the quotient in R and the remainder
in R + 1.
Remainder
R+1
Quotient
R
Dr
Dd
Flags
ER:
EQ:
Dd or Dr is not in BCD.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
ON when the result is 0.
Example
When IR 00000 is ON with the following program, the content of IR 020 is divided
by the content of HR 09 and the result is placed in DM 0017 and DM 0018. Exam-
ple data and calculations are shown below the program.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
DIV(33)
020
00000
00001
LD
DIV(33)
HR 09
DM 0017
020
09
HR
DM
0017
Quotient
Remainder
R: DM 0017
R + 1: DM 0018
1
1
5
0
0
0
0
2
Dd: IR 020
Dd: HR 09
3
4
5
2
0
0
0
3
5-19-12 DOUBLE BCD DIVIDE – DIVL(57)
Operand Data Areas
Dd: First dividend word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Dr: First divisor word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: First result word
Ladder Symbols
DIVL(57)
@DIVL(57)
Dd
Dr
R
Dd
Dr
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Dd and Dd+1 must be in the same data area, as must Dr and Dr+1.
R and R+3 must be in the same data area.
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BCD Calculations
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, DIVL(57) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, DIVL(57) the eight-digit content of Dd and D+1 is divided
by the content of Dr and Dr+1 and the result is placed in R to R+3: the quotient in
R and R+1, the remainder in R+2 and R+3.
Remainder
R+2
Quotient
R+3
R+1
R
Dr+1
Dr
Dd+1
Dd
Flags
ER:
Dr and Dr+1 contain 0.
Dd, Dd+1, Dr, or Dr+1 is not BCD.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of *DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the result is 0.
5-19-13 FLOATING POINT DIVIDE – FDIV(79)
Operand Data Areas
Dd: First dividend word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Dr: First divisor word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: First result word
Ladder Symbols
FDIV(79)
@FDIV(79)
Dd
Dr
R
Dd
Dr
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
Dr and Dr+1 cannot contain zero. Dr and Dr+1 must be in the same data area, as
must Dd and Dd+1; R and R+1.
–7
The dividend and divisor must be between 0.0000001 x 10
and
7
7
–7
0.9999999 x 10 . The results must be between 0.1 x 10 and 0.9999999 x 10 .
When the execution condition is OFF, FDIV(79) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, FDIV(79) divides the floating-point value in Dd and Dd+1
by that in Dr and Dr+1 and places the result in R and R+1.
Quotient
R+1
R
Dr+1
Dr
Dd+1
Dd
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BCD Calculations
To represent the floating point values, the rightmost seven digits are used for the
mantissa and the leftmost digit is used for the exponent, as shown below. The
mantissa is expressed as a value less than one, i.e., to seven decimal places.
First word
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
exponent (0 to 7)
sign of exponent
mantissa (leftmost 3 digits)
0: +
1: –
Second word
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
mantissa (leftmost 4 digits)
–2
= 0.1111111 x 10
Flags
ER:
Dr and Dr+1 contain 0.
Dd, Dd+1, Dr, or Dr+1 is not BCD.
–7
7
The result is not between 0.1 x 10 and 0.999999 x 10 .
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of *DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the result is 0.
Example
The following example shows how to divide two whole four-digit numbers (i.e.,
numbers without fractions) so that a floating-point value can be obtained.
First the original numbers must be placed in floating-point form. Because the
numbers are originally without decimal points, the exponent will be 4 (e.g., 3452
4
would equal 0.3452 x 10 ). All of the moves are to place the proper data into con-
secutive words for the final division, including the exponent and zeros. Data
movements for Dd and Dd+1 are shown at the right below. Movements for Dr
and Dr+1 are basically the same.The original values to be divided are in DM
0000 and DM 0001. The final division is also shown.
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BCD Calculations
00000
@MOV(21)
#0000
HR 01
HR 00
0
0
0
0
HR 00
@MOV(21)
#0000
0000
HR 02
@MOV(21)
#4000
HR 01
HR 00
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
HR 01
@MOV(21)
#4000
4000
HR 03
DM 0000
@MOVD(83)
DM 0000
#0021
3
4
5
2
HR 01
HR 00
HR 01
4
4
3
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
@MOVD(83)
DM 0000
#0300
DM 0000
4
3
5
2
HR 00
HR 01
3
HR 00
0
4
5
2
0
@MOVD(83)
DM 0001
#0021
HR 03
@MOVD(83)
DM 0001
#0300
HR 01
HR 00
4
4
3
4
5
7
2
9
0
0
0
0
HR 02
HR 03
HR 02
0
0
0
0
÷
@FDIV(79)
HR 00
DM 0003
DM 0002
2
4
3
6
9
6
2
0
HR 02
2
DM 0002
0.4369620 x 10
Address Instruction
Operands
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00001
LD
00000
00006
00007
00008
00009
@MOVD(83)
@MOVD(83)
@MOVD(83)
@FDIV(79)
@MOV(21)
DM
0000
0300
00
#
0000
00
#
HR
HR
00002
00003
00004
00005
@MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
@MOVD(83)
#
0000
02
DM
#
0001
0021
03
HR
HR
#
4000
01
HR
DM
#
0001
0300
02
#
4000
03
HR
HR
HR
HR
DM
00
02
DM
#
0000
0021
01
0002
HR
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BCD Calculations
5-19-14 SQUARE ROOT – ROOT(72)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
Sq: First source word (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: Result word
ROOT(72)
@ROOT(72)
Sq
R
Sq
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR,
Limitations
Description
Sq and Sq+1 must be in the same data area.
When the execution condition is OFF, ROOT(72) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, ROOT(72) computes the square root of the eight-digit
content of Sq and Sq+1 and places the result in R. The fractional portion is trun-
cated.
R
Sq+1
Sq
Flags
ER:
Sq is not BCD.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of ∗DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the result is 0.
Example
The following example shows how to take the square root of a four-digit number
and then round the result.
First the words to be used are cleared to all zeros and then the value whose
square root is to be taken is moved to Sq+1. The result, which has twice the num-
ber of digits required for the answer (because the number of digits in the original
value was doubled), is placed in DM 0102, and the digits are split into two differ-
ent words, the leftmost two digits to IR 011 for the answer and the rightmost two
digits to DM 0103 so that the answer in IR 011 can be rounded up if required. The
last step is to compare the value in DM 0103 so that IR 011 can be incremented
using the Greater Than flag.
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BCD Calculations
In this example, √6017 = 77.56, and 77.56 is rounded off to 78.
00000
@BSET(71)
#0000
DM 0101
DM 0100
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
DM 0100
DM 0101
0000
010
0000
@MOV(21)
010
6
6
0
1
DM 0101
DM 0101
0
DM 0100
@ROOT(72)
DM 0100
1
7
0
0
0
0
0
60170000= 7756.932
DM 0102
@MOV(21)
#0000
DM 0103
0
IR 011
011
0
0
0
0
0
0
@MOV(21)
#0000
0000
0000
DM 0103
@MOVD(83)
DM 0102
#0012
DM 0102
7
7
5
6
011
IR 011
7
DM 0103
@MOVD(83)
DM 0102
#0210
0
0
7
5
6
0
0
DM 0103
@CMP(20)
DM 0103
#4900
5600 > 4900
25505
IR 011
7
@INC(38)
011
0
0
8
Address Instruction
Operands
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00001
LD
00000
00006
00007
00008
@MOVD(83)
@MOVD(83)
@CMP(20)
@BSET(71)
DM
0102
0012
011
#
0000
0100
0101
#
DM
DM
00002
00003
00004
00005
@MOV(21)
@ROOT(72)
@MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
DM
#
0102
0210
0103
010
DM
0101
DM
DM
DM
0100
0102
DM
#
0103
4900
00009
00010
LD
25505
#
0000
011
@INC(38)
011
#
0000
0103
DM
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Binary Calculations
5-20 Binary Calculations
Binary calculation instructions — ADB(50), SBB(51), MLB(52), DVB(53),
ADBL(––), SBBL(––), MBS(––), MBSL(––), DBS(––), and DBSL(––) — perform
arithmetic operations on hexadecimal data.
Four of these instructions (ADB(50), SBB(51), ADBL(––), and SBBL(––)) can
act on both normal and signed data, two (MLB(52) and DVB(53)) act only on nor-
mal data, and four (MBS(––), MBSL(––), DBS(––), and DBSL(––)) act only on
signed binary data.
The addition and subtraction instructions include CY in the calculation as well as
in the result. Be sure to clear CY if its previous status is not required in the calcu-
lation, and to use the result placed in CY, if required, before it is changed by the
execution of any other instruction. STC(40) and CLC(41) can be used to control
Signed binary addition and subtraction instructions use the underflow and over-
flow flags (UF and OF) to indicate whether the result exceeds the acceptable
signed binary data.
5-20-1 BINARY ADD – ADB(50)
Operand Data Areas
Au: Augend word (binary)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Ad: Addend word (binary)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R: Result word
Ladder Symbols
ADB(50)
@ADB(50)
Au
Ad
R
Au
Ad
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, ADB(50) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, ADB(50) adds the contents of Au, Ad, and CY, and
places the result in R. CY will be set if the result is greater than FFFF.
Au + Ad + CY
CY
R
ADB(50) can also be used to add signed binary data. The underflow and over-
flow flags (SR 25404 and SR 25405) indicate whether the result has exceeded
for details on signed binary data.
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
CY:
EQ:
OF:
UF:
ON when the result is greater than FFFF.
ON when the result is 0.
ON when the result exceeds +32,767 (7FFF).
ON when the result is below –32,768 (8000).
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Binary Calculations
Example 1:
Adding Normal Data
The following example shows a four-digit addition with CY used to place either
#0000 or #0001 into R+1 to ensure that any carry is preserved.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
TR 0
00000
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
CLC(41)
OUT
TR
0
CLC(41)
ADB(50)
ADB(50)
010
010
0100
10
DM 0100
HR 10
DM
HR
= R
25504
25504
00004
00005
AND NOT
MOV(21)
25504
MOV(21)
#0000
#
0000
11
HR 11
= R+1
= R+1
HR
TR
MOV(21)
#0001
00006
00007
00008
LD
0
AND
25504
MOV(21)
HR 11
#
00001
11
HR
In the case below, A6E2 + 80C5 = 127A7. The result is a 5-digit number, so CY
(SR 25504) = 1, and the content of R + 1 becomes #0001.
Au: IR 010
A
8
2
6
E
2
5
7
Ad: DM 0100
+
0
C
R+1: HR 11
R: HR 10
7
0
0
0
1
A
Note The UF and OF flags would also be turned ON during this addition, but they can
be ignored since they are relevant only in the addition of signed binary data.
Example 2:
Adding Signed Binary Data
In the following example, ADB(50) is used to add two 16-bit signed binary val-
ues. (The 2’s complement is used to express negative values.)
The effective range for 16-bit signed binary values is –32,767 (8000) to +32,768
(7FFF). The overflow flag (OF: SR 25404) is turned ON if the result exceeds
+32,768 (7FFF) and the underflow flag (UF: SR 25405) is turned ON if the result
falls below –32,767 (8000).
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
CLC(41)
00000
00001
00002
LD
CLC(41)
ADB(50)
ADB(50)
LR 20
LR
20
0010
0020
DM 0010
DM 0020
DM
DM
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Binary Calculations
In the case below, 25,321 +(–13,253) = 12,068 (62E9 + CC3B = 2F24). Neither
OF nor UF are turned ON.
Au: LR 20
6
C
2
2
E
9
B
4
Ad: DM 0010
+
C
3
Ad: DM 0010
F
2
Note The status of the CY flag can be ignored when adding signed binary data since it
is relevant only in the addition of normal hexadecimal values.
5-20-2 BINARY SUBTRACT – SBB(51)
Operand Data Areas
Mi: Minuend word (binary)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Su: Subtrahend word (binary)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R: Result word
Ladder Symbols
SBB(51)
@SBB(51)
Mi
Su
R
Mi
Su
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, SBB(51) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, SBB(51) subtracts the contents of Su and CY from Mi
and places the result in R. If the result is negative, CY is set and the 2’s comple-
ment of the actual result is placed in R.
Mi – Su – CY
CY
R
SBB(51) can also be used to subtract signed binary data. The overflow and un-
derflow flags (SR 25404 and SR 25405) indicate whether the result has exceed-
ed the lower or upper limits of the 16-bit signed binary data range. Refer to page
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
CY:
EQ:
OF:
UF:
ON when the result is negative, i.e., when Mi is less than Su plus CY.
ON when the result is 0.
ON when the result exceeds +32,767 (7FFF).
ON when the result is below –32,768 (8000).
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Binary Calculations
Example 1: Normal Data
The following example shows a four-digit subtraction with CY used to place ei-
ther #0000 or #0001 into R+1 to ensure that any carry is preserved.
Address Instruction
Operands
00001
TR 1
00001
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
CLC(41)
OUT
TR
1
CLC(41)
SBB(51)
SBB(51)
001
001
20
LR20
LR
HR 21
= R
HR
21
25504
25504
00004
00005
AND NOT
MOV(21)
25504
MOV(21)
#0000
#
0000
22
HR 22
= R+1
= R+1
HR
TR
MOV(21)
#0001
00006
00007
00008
LD
1
AND
25504
MOV(21)
HR 22
#
0001
22
NEG(––)
HR21
HR
00009
NEG(––)
HR 21
HR
HR
21
21
In the case below, the content of LR 20 (#7A03) and CY are subtracted from
IR 001 (#F8C5). The result is stored in HR 21 and the content of HR 22 (#0000)
indicates that the result is positive.
If the result had been negative, CY would have been set, #0001 would have
been placed in HR 22, and the result would have been converted to its 2’s com-
pliment.
Mi: IR 001
F
8
C
5
Su: LR 20
–
–
CY = 0
(from CLC(41))
7
0
A
0
3
0
0
0
R+1: HR 22
R: HR 21
0
0
0
0
7
E
C
2
Note The status of the UF and OF flags can be ignored since they are relevant only in
the subtraction of signed binary data.
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Binary Calculations
Example 2:
Signed Binary Data
In the following example, SBB(51) is used to subtract one 16-bit signed binary
value from another. (The 2’s complement is used to express negative values).
The effective range for 16-bit signed binary values is –32,768 (8000) to +32,767
(7FFF). The overflow flag (OF: SR 25404) is turned ON if the result exceeds
+32,767 (7FFF) and the underflow flag (UF: SR 25405) is turned ON if the result
falls below –32,768 (8000).
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
CLC(41)
00000
00001
00002
LD
CLC(41)
SBB(51)
SBB(51)
LR 20
LR
20
0010
0020
DM 0010
DM 0020
DM
DM
In the case shown below, 30,020 – (–15,238) = 45,258 (7544 – C47A =
60CA).The OF flag would be turned ON to indicate that this result exceeds the
upper limit of the 16-bit signed binary data range. (In other words, the result is a
positive value that exceeds 32,767 (7FFF), not a negative number expressed as
signed binary data.)
Mi: LR 20
7
5
4
4
Su: DM 0010
C
4
7
A
–
R: DM 0020
B
0
C
A
In the case shown below, –30,000 – 3,000 = –33,000 (8AD0 – 0BB8 = 7F18).The
UF flag would be turned ON to indicate that this result is below the lower limit of
16-bit signed binary data range. (In other words, the result is a negative number
below –32,768 (8000), not a positive number expressed as signed binary data.)
Mi: LR 20
8
0
A
D
0
8
Su: DM 0010
B
B
–
R: DM 0020
7
F
1
8
The absolute value of the true result (80E8=33,000) can be obtained by taking
the 2’s complement of 7F18 using NEG(––).
Note The status of the CY flag can be ignored when adding signed binary data since it
is relevant only in the addition of normal hexadecimal values.
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Binary Calculations
5-20-3 BINARY MULTIPLY – MLB(52)
Operand Data Areas
Md: Multiplicand word (binary)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Mr: Multiplier word (binary)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R: First result word
Ladder Symbols
MLB(52)
@MLB(52)
Md
Mr
R
Md
Mr
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR LR
Limitations
Description
R and R+1 must be in the same data area.
When the execution condition is OFF, MLB(52) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, MLB(52) multiplies the content of Md by the contents of
Mr, places the rightmost four digits of the result in R, and places the leftmost four
digits in R+1.
Md
X
Mr
R +1
R
Precautions
Flags
MLB(52) cannot be used to multiply signed binary data. Use MBS(––) instead.
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the result is 0.
5-20-4 BINARY DIVIDE – DVB(53)
Operand Data Areas
Dd: Dividend word (binary)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Dr: Divisor word (binary)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R: First result word
Ladder Symbols
DVB(53)
@DVB(53)
Dd
Dr
R
Dd
Dr
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR LR
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, DVB(53) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, DVB(53) divides the content of Dd by the content of Dr
and the result is placed in R and R+1: the quotient in R, the remainder in R+1.
Quotient
R
Remainder
R + 1
Dr
Dd
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Binary Calculations
Precautions
DVB(53) cannot be used to divide signed binary data. Use DBS(––) instead. Re-
Flags
ER:
Dr contains 0.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the result is 0.
Example
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
DVB(53)
001
00000
00001
LD
DVB(53)
LR 20
HR 05
001
0020
05
LR
HR
Dd: IR 001
1
0
0
F
7
3
Dr: LR 20
0
ꢀ
0
R+1: HR 06
R: HR 05
0
0
0
2
0
5
A
7
Remainder (2)
Quotient (1447)
5-20-5 DOUBLE BINARY ADD – ADBL(––)
Operand Data Areas
Au: First augend word (binary)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Ad: First addend word (binary)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
R: First result word
Ladder Symbols
ADBL(––)
@ADBL(––)
Au
Ad
R
Au
Ad
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
Au and Au+1 must be in the same data area, as must Ad and Ad+1, and R and
R+1.
When the execution condition is OFF, ADBL(––) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, ADBL(––)) adds the eight-digit contents of Au+1 and
Au, the eight-digit contents of Ad+1 and Ad, and CY, and places the result in R.
CY will be set if the result is greater than FFFF FFFF.
Au + 1
Ad + 1
Au
Ad
CY
R
+
CY
R + 1
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Binary Calculations
ADBL(––) can also be used to add signed binary data. The underflow and over-
flow flags (SR 25404 and SR 25405) indicate whether the result has exceeded
for details on signed binary data.
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
CY:
EQ:
OF:
UF:
ON when the result is greater than FFFF FFFF.
ON when the result is 0.
ON when the result exceeds +2,147,483,647 (7FFF FFFF).
ON when the result is below –2,147,483,648 (8000 0000).
Example 1: Normal Data
The following example shows an eight-digit addition with CY (SR 25504) used to
represent the status of the 9 digit.
th
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
CLC(41)
00000
00001
00002
LD
CLC(41)
ADBL(––)
ADBL(––)
000
000
0020
21
DM 0020
LR 21
DM
LR
14020187 + 00A3F8C5 = 14A5FA4C
Au : 000
Au + 1 : 001
1
4
0
2
0
1
8
7
Ad + 1 : DM 0021
Ad : DM 0020
F
8
C
5
0
0
A
3
0
CY (Cleared with CLC(41))
CY (No carry)
+
R + 1 : LR 22
R : LR 21
1
4
A
5
F
A
4
C
0
Note The status of the UF and OF flags can be ignored since they are relevant only in
the addition of signed binary data.
Example 2:
Signed Binary Data
In the following example, ADBL(––) is used to add two 32-bit signed binary val-
ues and output the 32-bit signed binary result to R and R+1. (The 2’s comple-
ment is used to express negative values).
The effective range for 32-bit signed binary values is –2,147,483,648
(8000 0000) to +2,147,483,647 (7FFF FFFF). The overflow flag (OF: SR 25404)
is turned ON if the result exceeds +2,147,483,647 (7FFF FFFF) and the under-
flow flag (UF: SR 25405) is turned ON if the result falls below –2,147,483,648
(8000 0000).
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
CLC(41)
00000
00001
00002
LD
CLC(41)
ADBL(––)
ADBL(––)
LR 20
LR
20
0010
0020
DM 0010
DM 0020
DM
DM
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Binary Calculations
In the case below, 1,799,100,099 + (–282,751,929) = 1,516,348,100
(6B3C167D + EF258C47 = 5A61A2C4). Neither OF nor UF are turned ON.
Au : LR 20
Au + 1 : LR 21
6
B
3
C
1
6
7
D
Ad + 1 : DM 0011
Ad : DM 0010
8
C
4
7
E
F
2
5
0
CY (Cleared with CLC(41))
+
R + 1 : DM 0021
R : DM 0020
5
A
6
1
A
2
C
4
0
0
UF (SR 25405)
OF (SR 25404)
Note The status of the CY flag can be ignored when adding signed binary data since it
is relevant only in the addition of normal hexadecimal values.
5-20-6 DOUBLE BINARY SUBTRACT – SBBL(––)
Operand Data Areas
Mi: First minuend word (binary)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Su: First subtrahend word (binary)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: First result word
Ladder Symbols
SBBL(––)
@SBBL(––)
Mi
Su
R
Mi
Su
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
Mi and Mi+1 must be in the same data area, as must Su and Su+1, and R and
R+1.
When the execution condition is OFF, SBBL(––) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, SBBL(––) subtracts CY and the eight-digit value in Su
and Su+1 from the eight-digit value in Mi and Mi+1, and places the result in R and
R+1. If the result is negative, CY is set and the 2’s complement of the actual re-
sult is placed in R+1 and R. Use the DOUBLE 2’s COMPLEMENT instructions to
convert the 2’s complement to the true result.
Mi + 1
Su + 1
Mi
Su
CY
R
–
CY
R + 1
SBBL(––) can also be used to subtract signed binary data. The underflow and
overflow flags (SR 25404 and SR 25405) indicate whether the result has ex-
ceeded the lower or upper limits of the 32-bit signed binary data range. Refer to
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Binary Calculations
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
CY:
EQ:
OF:
UF:
ON when the result is negative, i.e., when Mi is less than Su plus CY.
ON when the result is 0.
ON when the result exceeds +2,147,483,647 (7FFF FFFF).
ON when the result is below –2,147,483,648 (8000 0000).
Example 1: Normal Data
In this example, the eight-digit number in IR 002 and IR 001 is subtracted from
the eight-digit number in DM 0021 and DM 0020, and the result is output to LR 22
and LR 21. If the result is negative, CY (SR 25504) is turned ON.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
CLC(41)
00000
00001
00002
LD
CLC(41)
SBBL(––)
SBBL(––)
001
001
0020
21
DM 0020
LR 21
DM
LR
14020187 + 00A3F8C5 = 14A5FA4C
Au : 001
Au + 1 : 002
1
4
0
2
0
1
8
7
Ad + 1 : DM 0021
Ad : DM 0020
F
8
C
5
0
0
A
3
0
CY (Cleared with CLC(41))
CY (No carry)
–
R + 1 : LR 22
R : LR 21
1
3
5
E
0
8
C
2
0
Note The status of the UF and OF flags can be ignored since they are relevant only in
the subtraction of signed binary data.
Example 2:
Signed Binary Data
In the following example, SBBL(––) is used to subtract one 32-bit signed binary
value from another and output the 32-bit signed binary result to R and R+1.
The effective range for 32-bit signed binary values is –2,147,483,648
(8000 0000) to +2,147,483,647 (7FFF FFFF). The overflow flag (OF: SR 25404)
is turned ON if the result exceeds +2,147,483,647 (7FFF FFFF) and the under-
flow flag (UF: SR 25405) is turned ON is the result falls below –2,147,483,648
(8000 0000).
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
CLC(41)
00000
00001
00002
LD
CLC(41)
SBBL(––)
SBBL(––)
001
001
0020
21
DM 0020
LR 21
DM
LR
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Binary Calculations
In the case below, 1,799,100,099 – (–282,751,929) = 2,081,851,958
(6B3C 167D – {EF25 8C47 – 1 0000 0000} = 7C16 8A36). Neither OF nor UF
are turned ON.
Au : 000
Au + 1 : 001
6
B
3
C
1
6
7
D
Ad + 1 : DM 0021
Ad : DM 0020
8
C
4
7
E
F
2
5
–
–
0
CY (Cleared with CLC(41))
R + 1 : LR 22
R : LR 21
7
C
1
6
8
A
3
6
0
0
UF (SR 25405)
OF (SR 25404)
Note The status of the CY flag can be ignored when adding signed binary data since it
is relevant only in the addition of normal hexadecimal values.
5-20-7 SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY – MBS(––)
Operand Data Areas
Md: Multiplicand word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Mr: Multiplier word
Ladder Symbols
MBS(––)
@MBS(––)
Md
Mr
R
Md
Mr
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R: First result word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR LR
Limitations
Description
R and R+1 must be in the same data area.
MBS(––) multiplies the signed binary content of two words and outputs the
8-digit signed binary result to R+1 and R. The rightmost four digits of the result
for details on signed binary data.
Md
X
Mr
R +1
R
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the result is 0000 0000, otherwise OFF.
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Binary Calculations
Example
In the following example, MBS(––) is used to multiply the signed binary contents
of IR 001 with the signed binary contents of DM 0020 and output the result to
LR 21 and LR 22.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
MBS(––)
001
00000
00001
LD
MBS(––)
DM 0020
LR 21
001
0020
21
DM
LR
Md: IR 100
1
F
5
B
1
3
(5,553)
Mr: DM 0020
X
C
1
(–1,005)
R+1: LR 22
R: LR 21
F
F
A
A
D
8
2
3
(–5,580,765)
5-20-8 DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY MULTIPLY – MBSL(––)
Operand Data Areas
Md: First multiplicand word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Mr: First multiplier word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R: First result word
Ladder Symbols
MBSL(––)
@MBSL(––)
Md
Mr
R
Md
Mr
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR LR
Limitations
Description
Md and Md+1 must be in the same data area, as must Mr and Mr+1, and R and
R+3.
MBSL(––) multiplies the 32-bit (8-digit) signed binary data in Md+1 and Md with
the 32-bit signed binary data in Mr+1 and Mr, and outputs the 16-digit signed
data.
Md + 1
Mr + 1
Md
Mr
x
R + 3
R + 2
R + 1
R
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the result is zero (content of R+3 through R all zeroes), other-
wise OFF.
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Binary Calculations
Example
In the following example, MBSL(––) is used to multiply the signed binary con-
tents of IR 101 and IR 100 with the signed binary contents of DM 0021 and
DM 0020 and output the result to LR 24 through LR 21.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
MBSL(––)
100
00000
00001
LD
MBSL(––)
DM 0020
LR 21
100
0020
21
DM
LR
Md+1: IR 101
Md: IR 100
0
0
0
8
7
9
3
8
2
(555,320)
Mr+1: DM 0021
F
Mr: DM 0020
F
F
0
A
8
1
X
(–1,005,550)
R+3: LR 24
R+2: LR 23
R+1: LR 22
R: LR 21
(–558,402,026,000)
F
F
F
F
F
F
7
D
F
C
A
5
4
5
F
0
5-20-9 SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE – DBS(––)
Operand Data Areas
Dd: Dividend word
Ladder Symbols
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Dr: Divisor word
DBS(––)
@DBS(––)
Dd
Dr
R
Dd
Dr
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R: First result word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR LR
Limitations
Description
R and R+1 must be in the same data area.
DBS(––) divides the signed binary content of Dd by the signed binary content of
Dr, and outputs the 8-digit signed binary result to R+1 and R. The quotient is
signed binary data.
Quotient
R
Remainder
R + 1
Dr
Dd
Flags
ER:
Dr contains 0.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the content of R (the quotient) is 0000, otherwise OFF.
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Binary Calculations
Example
In the following example, DBS(––) is used to divide the signed binary contents of
IR 001 with the signed binary contents of DM 0020 and output the result to LR 21
and LR 22.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
DBS(––)
001
00000
00001
LD
DBS(––)
DM 0020
LR 21
001
0020
21
DM
LR
Dd: IR 001
D
0
D
D
A
A
(–8,742)
Dr: DM 0020
0
1
÷
(26)
R+1: LR 22
R: LR 21
F
F
F
A
F
E
B
0
(–336 and –6)
Remainder (–6)
Quotient (–336)
5-20-10DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY DIVIDE – DBSL(––)
Operand Data Areas
Dd: Dividend word (binary)
Ladder Symbols
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Dr: Divisor word (binary)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R: First result word
DBSL(––)
@DBSL(––)
Dd
Dr
R
Dd
Dr
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR LR
Limitations
Description
Dd and Dd+1 must be in the same data area, as must Dr and Dr+1, and R and
R+3.
DBS(––) divides the 32-bit (8-digit) signed binary data in Dd+1 and Dd by the
32-bit signed binary data in Dr+1 and Dr, and outputs the 16-digit signed binary
result to R+3 through R. The quotient is placed in R+1 and R, and the remainder
Remainder
R+2
Quotient
R+3
R+1
R
Dr+1
Dr
Dd+1
Dd
Flags
ER:
Dr+1 and Dr contain 0.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the content of R+1 and R (the quotient) is 0, otherwise OFF.
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Math Instructions
Example
In the following example, DBSL(––) is used to divide the signed binary contents
of IR 002 and IR 001 with the signed binary contents of DM 0021 and DM 0020
and output the result to LR 24 through LR 21.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
DBSL(––)
001
00000
00001
LD
DBSL(––)
DM 0020
LR 21
001
0020
21
DM
LR
Dd+1: IR 002
Dd: IR 001
F
F
7
A
B
0
1
5
C
A
(–8,736,420)
Dr+1: DM 0021
0
Dr: DM 0020
ꢀ
0
0
0
0
1
(26)
R+3: LR 24
R+2: LR 23
R+1: LR 22
R: LR 21
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
C
F
F
F
A
D
F
7
0
(–336,016 and –4/26)
Remainder (–4)
Quotient (–336,016)
5-21 Special Math Instructions
5-21-1 FIND MAXIMUM – MAX(––)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
C: Control data
MAX(––)
C
@MAX(––)
C
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
R : First word in range
1
R
R
1
1
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
D: Destination word
D
D
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
N in C must be BCD between 001 to 999.
R and R +N–1 must be in the same data area.
1
1
When the execution condition is OFF, MAX(––) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, MAX(––) searches the range of memory from R to
1
R +N–1 for the address that contains the maximum value and outputs the maxi-
1
mum value to the destination word (D).
If bit 14 of C is ON, MAX(––) identifies the address of the word containing the
maximum value in D+1. The address is identified differently for the DM area:
1, 2, 3...
1. For an address in the DM area, the word address is written to D+1. For ex-
ample, if the address containing the maximum value is DM 0114, then #0114
is written in D+1.
2. For an address in another data area, the number of addresses from the be-
ginning of the search is written to D+1. For example, if the address contain-
ing the maximum value is IR 114 and the first word in the search range is
IR 014, then #0100 is written in D+1.
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Math Instructions
If bit 15 of C is ON and more than one address contains the same maximum val-
ue, the position of the lowest of the addresses will be output to D+1.
The number of words within the range (N) is contained in the 3 rightmost digits of
C, which must be BCD between 001 and 999.
When bit 15 of C is OFF, data within the range is treated as normal binary and
when it is ON the data is treated as signed binary.
C:
15 14 13 12 11
00
Number of words
in range (N)
Not used – set to zero.
Output address to D+1?
1 (ON): Yes.
0 (OFF): No.
Data type
1 (ON): Signed binary
0 (OFF): Normal binary
Caution If bit 14 of C is ON, values above #8000 are treated as negative numbers, so the
results will differ depending on the specified data type. Be sure that the correct
data type is specified.
!
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
The number of words specified in C is not BCD (000 to 999).
R and R +N–1 are not in the same data area.
1
1
EQ:
ON when the maximum value is #0000.
5-21-2 FIND MINIMUM – MIN(––)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
C: Control data
MIN(––)
C
@MIN(––)
C
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
R : First word in range
1
R
R
1
1
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
D: Destination word
D
D
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
N in C must be BCD between 001 to 999.
R and R +N–1 must be in the same data area.
1
1
When the execution condition is OFF, MIN(––) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, MIN(––) searches the range of memory from R to R +N–1
1
1
for the address that contains the minimum value and outputs the minimum value
to the destination word (D).
If bit 14 of C is ON, MIN(––) identifies the address of the word containing the
minimum value in D+1. The address is identified differently for the DM area:
1, 2, 3...
1. For an address in the DM area, the word address is written to D+1. For ex-
ample, if the address containing the minimum value is DM 0114, then #0114
is written in D+1.
2. For an address in another data area, the number of addresses from the be-
ginning of the search is written to D+1. For example, if the address contain-
ing the minimum value is IR 114 and the first word in the search range is
IR 014, then #0100 is written in D+1.
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Math Instructions
If bit 14 of C is ON and more than one address contains the same minimum val-
ue, the position of the lowest of the addresses will be output to D+1.
The number of words within the range (N) is contained in the 3 rightmost digits of
C, which must be BCD between 001 and 999.
When bit 15 of C is OFF, data within the range is treated as unsigned binary and
when it is ON the data is treated as signed binary. Refer to page 29 for details on
signed binary data.
C:
15 14 13 12 11
00
Number of words
in range (N)
Not used – set to zero.
Output address to D+1?
1 (ON): Yes.
0 (OFF): No.
Data type
1 (ON): Signed binary
0 (OFF): Unsigned binary
Caution If bit 14 of C is ON, values above #8000 are treated as negative numbers, so the
results will differ depending on the specified data type. Be sure that the correct
data type is specified.
!
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
The number of words specified in C is not BCD (000 to 999).
R and R +N–1 are not in the same data area.
1
1
EQ:
ON when the minimum value is #0000.
5-21-3 AVERAGE VALUE – AVG(––)
Operand Data Areas
Ladder Symbols
S: Source word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
N: Number of cycles
AVG(––)
@AVG(––)
S
N
D
S
N
D
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
D: First destination word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
Data of S must be hexadecimal.
N must be BCD from #0001 to #0064.
D and D+N+1 must be in the same data area.
AVG(––) is used to calculate the average value of S over N cycles.
When the execution condition is OFF, AVG(––) is not executed.
For the first N–1 cycles when the execution condition is ON, AVG(––) writes the
value of S to D. Each time that AVG(––) is executed, the previous value of S is
stored in words D+2 to D+N+1. The first 2 digits of D+1 are incremented with
each execution and act as a pointer to indicate where the previous value is
stored. Bit 15 of D+1 remains OFF for the first N–1 cycles.
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Math Instructions
th
On the N cycle, the previous value of S is written to last word in the range D+2 to
D+N+1. The average value of the previous values stored in D+2 to D+N+1 is cal-
culated and written to D, bit 15 of D+1 is turned ON, and the previous value point-
er (the first 2 digits of D+1) is reset to zero. Each time that AVG(––) is executed,
the previous value of S overwrites the content of the word indicated by the point-
er and the new average value is calculated and written to D. The pointer will be
reset again after reaching N–1.
The following diagram shows the function of words D to D+N+1.
D
Average value (after N or more cycles)
Previous value pointer and cycle indicator
Previous value #1
D+1
D+2
D+3
Previous value #2
D+N+1
Previous value #N
The function of bits in D+1 are shown in the following diagram and explained in
more detail below.
D+1: 15 14
08 07
00
Not used. Set to zero.
Previous value pointer
(2-digit hexadecimal from 0 to N–1.)
Cycle indicator
0 (OFF): cycles since execution of AVG(––) < N.
1 (ON): cycles since execution of AVG(––) ≥ N.
Previous Value Pointer
Cycle Indicator
The previous value pointer indicates the location where the most recent value of
S was stored relative to D+2, i.e., a pointer value of 0 indicates D+2, a value of 1
indicates D+3, etc.
The cycle indicator is turned ON after AVG(––) has been executed N times. At
this point, D will contain the average value of the contents of words D+2 through
D+N+1. The average value is 4-digit hexadecimal and is rounded off to the near-
est integer value.
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
One or more operands have been set incorrectly.
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Math Instructions
Example
In the following example, the content of IR 040 is set to #0000 and then increm-
ented by 1 each cycle. For the first two cycles, AVG(––) moves the content of
IR 040 to DM 1002 and DM 1003. The contents of DM 1001 will also change
(which can be used to confirm that the results of AVG(––) has changed). On the
third and later cycles AVG(––) calculates the average value of the contents of
DM 1002 to DM 1004 and writes that average value to DM 1000.
00001
@MOV(21)
Address Instruction
Operands
00001
#0000
040
00000
00001
LD
@MOV(21)
#
0000
040
AVG(––)
040
00002
AVG(––)
#0003
040
0003
1000
DM 1000
#
DM
00003
00004
CLC(41)
ADB(50)
CLC(41)
040
0001
040
ADB(50)
040
#
#0001
040
st
nd
rd
th
1
cycle
2
cycle
3
cycle
4
cycle
IR 40
0000
0001
0002
0003
st
nd
rd
th
1
cycle
2
cycle
3
cycle
4
cycle
DM 1000 0000
DM 1001 0001
DM 1002 0000
DM 1003 ---
0001
0002
0000
0001
---
0001
8000
0000
0001
0002
0002
8000
0003
0001
0002
Average
Pointer
Previous
values of
IR 40
DM 1004 ---
5-21-4 SUM – SUM(––)
Operand Data Areas
C: Control data
Ladder Symbols
SUM(––)
@SUM(––)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
C
C
R : First word in range
1
R
R
1
1
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
D: First destination word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
D
D
Limitations
The 3 rightmost digits of C must be BCD between 001 and 999.
If bit 14 of C is OFF (setting for BCD data), all data within the range R to R +N–1
1
1
must be BCD.
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Math Instructions
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, SUM(––) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, SUM(––) adds either the contents of words R to
1
R +N–1 or the bytes in words R to R +N/2–1 and outputs that value to the desti-
1
1
1
nation words (D and D+1). The data can be summed as binary or BCD and will
be output in the same form. Binary data can be either signed or unsigned.
The function of bits in C are shown in the following diagram and explained in
more detail below.
C:
15 14 13 12 11
00
Number of items in range (N, BCD)
Number of words or number of bytes
001 to 999
Starting byte in R1 (when bit 13 is ON)
1 (ON): Rightmost
0 (OFF): Leftmost
Addition units
1 (ON): Bytes
0 (OFF): Words
Data type
1 (ON): Binary
0 (OFF): BCD
Data type (when bit 14 is ON)
1 (ON): Signed binary
0 (OFF): Unsigned binary
Number of Items in Range
Addition Units
The number of items within the range (N) is contained in the 3 rightmost digits of
C, which must be BCD between 001 and 999. This number will indicate the num-
ber of words or the number of bytes depending the items being summed.
Words will be added if bit 13 is OFF and bytes will be added if bit 13 is ON.
If bytes are specified, the range can begin with the leftmost or rightmost byte of
R . The leftmost byte of R will not be added if bit 12 is ON.
1
1
MSB LSB
R
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
R +1
1
R +2
1
R +3
1
The bytes will be added in this order when bit 12 is OFF: 1+2+3+4....
The bytes will be added in this order when bit 12 is ON: 2+3+4....
Data Type
Data within the range is treated as unsigned binary when bit 14 of C is ON and bit
15 is OFF, and it is treated as signed binary when both bits 14 and 15 are ON.
Data within the range is treated as BCD when bit 14 of C is OFF, regardless of the
status of bit 15.
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
R and R +N–1 are not in the same data area.
1
1
The number of items in C is not BCD between 001 and 999.
The data being summed is not BCD when BCD was designated.
ON when the result is zero.
EQ:
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Math Instructions
Example
In the following example, the BCD contents of the 8 words from DM 0000 to
DM 0007 are added when IR 00001 is ON and the result is written to DM 0010
and DM 0011.
00001
Address Instruction
Operands
00001
@SUM(––)
#4008
00000
00001
LD
@SUM(––)
DM 0000
#
4008
0000
0010
DM 0010
DM
DM
DM 0000 0001
DM 0001 0002
DM 0002 0003
DM 0003 0004
DM 0004 0005
DM 0005 0006
DM 0006 0007
DM 0007 0008
DM 0010 0036
DM 0011 0000
5-21-5 ARITHMETIC PROCESS – APR(69)
Operand Data Areas
Ladder Symbols
C: Control word
APR(69)
@APR(69)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
S: Input data source word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
D: Result destination word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR,TC, LR
C
S
D
C
S
D
Limitations
Description
For trigonometric functions S must be BCD from 0000 to 0900 (0°≤ q ≤ 90°).
When the execution condition is OFF, APR(69) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, the operation of APR(69) depends on the control word C.
If C is #0000 or #0001, APR(69) computes sin(q ) or cos(q )*. The BCD value of S
specifies q in tenths of degrees.
If C is an address, APR(69) computes f(x) of the function entered in advance be-
ginning at word C. The function is a series of line segments (which can approxi-
mate a curve) determined by the operator. The BCD or hexadecimal value of S
specifies x.
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
For trigonometric functions, x > 0900. (x is the content of S.)
A constant other than #0000 or #0001 was designated for C.
The linear approximation data is not readable.
The result is 0000.
EQ:
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Math Instructions
Examples
Sine Function
The following example demonstrates the use of the APR(69) sine function to cal-
culate the sine of 30°. The sine function is specified when C is #0000.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
APR(69)
#0000
00000
00001
LD
APR(69)
DM 0000
DM 0100
#
0000
0000
0100
DM
DM
Input data, x
S: DM 0000
Result data
D: DM 0100
1
0
–1
–1
–2
–3
–4
0
0
10
3
10
0
10
0
10
5
10
0
10
0
10
0
Enter input data not
exceeding #0900 in BCD.
Result data has four significant
digits, fifth and higher digits are
ignored. The result for sin(90)
will be 0.9999, not 1.
Cosine Function
The following example demonstrates the use of the APR(69) cosine function to
calculate the cosine of 30°. The cosine function is specified when C is #0001.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
APR(69)
#0001
00000
00001
LD
APR(69)
DM 0010
DM 0110
#
0001
0010
0110
DM
DM
Input data, x
S: DM 0010
Result data
D: DM 0110
1
0
–1
–1
–2
–3
–4
0
0
10
3
10
0
10
0
10
8
10
6
10
6
10
0
Enter input data not
exceeding #0900 in BCD.
Result data has four significant
digits, fifth and higher digits are
ignored. The result for cos(0)
will be 0.9999, not 1.
Linear Approximation
APR(69) linear approximation is specified when C is a memory address. Word C
is the first word of the continuous block of memory containing the linear approxi-
mation data.
The content of word C specifies the number of line segments in the approxima-
tion, and whether the input and output are in BCD or BIN form. Bits 00 to 07 con-
tain the number of line segments less 1, m–1, as binary data. Bits 14 and 15 de-
termine, respectively, the output and input forms: 0 specifies BCD and 1 speci-
fies BIN.
15 14 13
Not used.
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
C:
Source data form
1 (ON): f(x)=f(X –S)
0 (OFF): f(x)=f(S)
m
Number of coordinates
minus one (m–1)
Output form
Input form
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Math Instructions
Enter the coordinates of the m+1 end-points, which define the m line segments,
as shown in the following table. Enter all coordinates in BIN form. Always enter
the coordinates from the lowest X value (X ) to the highest (X ). X is 0000, and
1
m
0
does not have to be entered.
Y
Word
C+1
Coordinate
Y
Y
m
X
Y
X
Y
X
Y
(max. X value)
m
0
1
1
2
2
C+2
4
C+3
Y
Y
3
C+4
C+5
1
C+6
Y
Y
2
↓
↓
C+(2m+1)
X
m
0
X
C+(2m+2)
Y
m
X
0
X
1
X
2
X
3
X
4
X
m
If bit 13 of C is set to 1, the graph will be reflected from left to right, as shown in the
following diagram.
Y
Y
X
X
X
0
X
m
X
m
X
0
The following example demonstrates the construction of a linear approximation
with 12 line segments. The block of data is continuous, as it must be, from DM
0000 to DM 0026 (C to C + (2 × 12 + 2)). The input data is taken from IR 010, and
the result is output to IR 011.
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00000
APR(69)
DM 0000
010
00000
00001
LD
APR(69)
DM
0000
010
011
011
Bit
15
Bit
00
Content Coordinate
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
DM 0000 $C00B
DM 0001 $05F0
DM 0002 $0000
DM 0003 $0005
DM 0004 $0F00
DM 0005 $001A
DM 0006 $0402
X
Y
X
Y
X
Y
12
0
(Output and
input both BIN)
(m–1 = 11: 12 line
segments)
1
1
2
2
↓
↓
↓
X
Y
DM 0025 $05F0
12
12
DM 0026 $1F20
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Math Instructions
In this case, the input data word, IR 010, contains #0014, and f(0014) = #0726 is
output to R, IR 011.
Y
$1F20
$0F00
(x,y)
$0726
$0402
(0,0)
X
$0005
$0014
$001A
$05F0
5-21-6 PID CONTROL – PID(––)
Operand Data Areas
Ladder Symbol
S: Input word
PID(––)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR,
C: First parameter word
IR, SR, DM, HR, LR
D: Output word
S
C
D
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
C and C+32 must be within the same data area.
Caution Do not program PID(––) in the following situations. Doing so may produce unex-
pected behavior: In interrupt programs, in subroutines, between IL(02) and
ILC(03), between JMP(04) and JME(05), and in step programming (when using
STEP(08) and SNXT(09)).
!
PID(––) carries out PID control according to the designated parameters. It takes
the specified input range of binary data from the contents of input word S and
carries out the PID operation according to the parameters that are set. The re-
sults are then stored as the operation output amount in output word D.
PID parameter words range from C through C+32. The PID parameters are con-
figured as shown below.
Word
C
15 to 12
11 to 8
7 to 4
3 to 0
Set value (SV)
C+1
C+2
C+3
C+4
C+5
Proportional band (P)
Tik = Integral time T /sampling period γ (See note 1.)
1
Tdk = Derivative time Td/sampling period γ (See note 1.)
Sampling period γ
PID forward/
reverse designation
2-PID parameter (α) (See note 2.)
C+6
0
Input range
0
Output range
C+7 to C+32 Work area (Cannot be accessed directly from program.)
Note 1. What is set in words 2 and 3 is not the actual integral and derivative times,
but rather their values divided by the value of the sampling period γ.
2. Setting the 2-PID parameter (α) to 000 yields 0.65, the normal value.
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Math Instructions
Parameter Settings
Item
Contents
Setting range
Set value (SV)
This is the target value of the process being
controlled.
Binary data (of the same
number of bits as specified for
the input range)
Proportional band
This is the parameter for P control expressing
the proportional control range/total control
range.
0001 to 9999 (4 digits BCD);
(0.1% to 999.9%, in units of
0.1%)
Tik
This is a constant expressing the strength of
the integral operation. As this value increases, (9999 = Integral operation not
0001 to 8191 (4 digits BCD);
the integral strength decreases.
executed)
Tdk
This is a constant expressing the strength of
the derivative operation. As this value
0000 to 8191 (4 digits BCD)
increases, the derivative strength increases.
Sampling period
This sets the period for executing the PID
operation.
0001 to 1023 (4 digits BCD);
(0.1 to 102.3 s, in units of
0.1 s)
PID
This is the parameter that determines the
direction of the proportional operation.
0: Reverse operation
1: Forward operation
forward/reverse
designation
2-PID parameter
(α)
This is the input filter coefficient. Normally use
0.65 (i.e., a setting of 000). The filter efficiency Setting from 100 to 199 means
decreases as the coefficient approaches 0.
000: α = 0.65
that the value of the rightmost
two digits is set from α= 0.00
to α= 0.99.
0: 8 bits
1: 9 bits
2: 10 bits
3: 11 bits
4: 12 bits
5: 13 bits
6: 14 bits
7: 15 bits
8: 16 bits
Input range
This is the number of input data bits.
Output range
This is the number of output data bits. {The
number of output bits is automatically the same
as the number of input bits.)
PID CONTROL Operation
Execution Condition OFF
All data that has been set is retained. Then the execution condition is OFF, the
operation amount can be written to the output word (D) to achieve manual con-
trol.
Rising Edge of the Execution Condition
The work area is initialized based on the PID parameters that have been set and
the PID control operation is begin. Sudden and radical changes in the operation
output amount are not made when starting operation to avoid adverse affect on
the controlled system (bumpless operation).
When PID parameters are changed, they first become valid when the execution
condition changes from OFF to ON.
Execution Condition ON
The PID operation is executed at the intervals based on the sampling period,
according to the PID parameters that have been set.
Sampling Period and PID Execution Timing
The sampling period is the time interval to retrieve the measurement data for
carrying out a PID operation. PID(––), however, is executed according to
C200HS cycle time, so there may be cases where the sampling period is ex-
ceeded. In such cases, the time interval until the next sampling is reduced.
PID Control Method
C200HS PID control operations are executed by means of PID control with feed-
forward control (two degrees of freedom).
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Math Instructions
When overshooting is prevented with simple PID control, stabilization of distur-
bances is slowed (1). If stabilization of disturbances is speeded up, on the other
hand, overshooting occurs and response toward the target value is slowed (2).
With feed-forward PID control, there is no overshooting, and response toward
the target value and stabilization of disturbances can both be speeded up (3).
Simple PID Control
Feed-forward PID control
(1)
(2)
As the target response is slowed,
the disturbance response worsens.
Target response
Disturbance response
As the disturbance response is
slowed, the target response worsens.
Overshoot
Control Operations
Proportional Operation (P)
Proportional operation is an operation in which a proportional band is estab-
lished with respect to the set value (SV), and within that band the operation
amount (the control output amount) is made proportional to the deviation. If the
present value (PV) is smaller than the proportional band, the operation amount
will be 100%. If within the proportional band the operation amount is made pro-
portional to the deviation and gradually decreased until the SV and PV match
(i.e., until the deviation is 0), the operation amount will return to the previous val-
ue (forward operation).
The proportional band is expressed as a percentage with respect to the total in-
put range. With proportional operation an offset (residual deviation) occurs, and
the offset is reduced by making the proportional band smaller. If it is made too
small, however, hunting will occur.
Adjusting the Proportional Band
Proportional Operation
(Forward Operation)
Operation
amount
100%
Proportional band
Proportional band too narrow (hunting occurring)
Offset
0%
SV
Proportional band just right
Proportional band too wide (large offset)
Integral Operation (I)
Combining integral operation with proportional operation reduces the offset ac-
cording to the time that has passed. The strength of the integral operation is indi-
cated by the integral time, which is the time required for the integral operation
amount to reach the same level as the proportional operation amount with re-
spect to the step deviation, as shown in the following illustration. The shorter the
integral time, the stronger the correction by the integral operation will be. If the
244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Math Instructions
integral time is too short, the correction will be too strong and will cause hunting
to occur.
Integral Operation
Step response
Deviation
0
0
Operation
amount
PI Operation and Integral Time
Step response
Deviation
0
0
PI operation
I operation
P operation
Operation
amount
Ti: Integral time
Derivative Operation (D)
Proportional operation and integral operation both make corrections with re-
spect to the control results, so there is inevitably a response delay. Derivative
operation compensates for that drawback. In response to a sudden disturbance
it delivers a large operation amount and rapidly restores the original status. A
correction is executed with the operation amount made proportional to the in-
cline (derivative coefficient) caused by the deviation.
The strength of the derivative operation is indicated by the derivative time, which
is the time required for the derivative operation amount to reach the same level
as the proportional operation amount with respect to the step deviation, as
shown in the following illustration. The longer the derivative time, the stronger
the correction by the derivative operation will be.
Derivative Operation
Step response
Deviation
0
Operation
amount
0
0
PD Operation and Derivative Time
Ramp response
Deviation
PD operation
P operation
D operation
Operation
amount
0
Td: Derivative time
PID Operation
PID operation combines proportional operation (P), integral operation (I), and
derivative operation (D). It produces superior control results even for control ob-
jects with dead time. It employs proportional operation to provide smooth control
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Math Instructions
without hunting, integral operation to automatically correct any offset, and deriv-
ative operation to speed up the response to disturbances.
PID Operation Output Step Response
Ramp response
Deviation
0
PID operation
I operation
P operation
Operation
amount
0
0
D operation
PID Operation Output Lamp Response
Step response
Deviation
PID operation
I operation
P operation
D operation
Operation
amount
0
Direction of Operation
When using PID operation, select either of the following two control directions. In
either direction, the operation amount increases as the difference between the
SV and the PV increases.
• Forward operation: Control amount is increased when the PV is larger than the
SV.
• Reverse operation: Control amount is increased when the PV is smaller than
the SV.
Adjusting PID Parameters
The general relationship between PID parameters and control status is shown
below.
• When it is not a problem if a certain amount of time is required for stabilization
(settlement time), but it is important not to cause overshooting, then enlarge
the proportional band.
Control by measured PID
SV
When P is enlarged
• When overshooting is not a problem but it is desirable to quickly stabilize con-
trol, then narrow the proportional band. If the proportional band is narrowed too
much, however, then hunting may occur.
When P is narrowed
SV
Control by measured PID
• When there is broad hunting, or when operation is tied up by overshooting and
undershooting, it is probably because integral operation is too strong. The
246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Math Instructions
hunting will be reduced if the integral time is increased or the proportional band
is enlarged.
Control by measured PID
(when loose hunting occurs)
SV
Enlarge I or P.
• If the period is short and hunting occurs, it may be that the control system re-
sponse is quick and the derivative operation is too strong. In that case, set the
derivative operation lower.
Control by measured PID
(when hunting occurs in a short period)
SV
Lower D.
Flags
ER:
CY:
Content of :DM word is not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been
exceeded.
A PID parameter SV is out of range.
The PID operation was executed but the cycle time was two times the
sampling period. PID(––) will be executed for this error only even when
ER (SR25503) is ON.
The PID operation is being executed.
Example
This example shows a PID control program using PID(––).
C200HS
CPU
AD001 DA001
#0
#1
Amplifier (See note below.)
Fan (Output word IR 111)
Temperature sensing element
(Output word IR 100)
Amplifier (See note below.)
Heater (Output word IR110)
Note Motors and heaters cannot be directly connected from a Analog Output Unit. An
amplifier (i.e., a current amplification circuit) is required.
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Math Instructions
Creating the Program
1, 2, 3...
Follow the procedure outlined below in creating the program.
1. Set the target value (binary 0000 to 0FFF) in DM 0000.
2. Input the PV of the temperature sensing element (binary 000 to 0FFF) in bits
0 to 11 of word 101.
3. Output the operation amount of the heater to bits 0 to 11 of word 110 by
means of the first PID(––) instruction in the following program.
4. Output the operation amount of the fan to bits 0 to 11 of word 111 by means of
the second PID(––) instruction in the following program.
5. Convert the PV of the temperature sensing element (binary 000 to FFF) to
temperature data (0000°C to 0200°C) by means of SCL(––), and output it to
DM 0200.
Program
00000
25315
@MOV(21)
#0F00
Target value
DM0000
@MOV(21)
Parameter leading word for first
PID(––) instruction
DM0000
HR00
@MOV(21)
Parameter leading word for second
DM0000
PID(––) instruction
HR40
PID(––)
PV of temperature sensing element
101
Heater operation amount
HR00
110
PID(––)
101
Fan operation amount
HR40
111
SCL
PV of temperature sensing element (binary)
101
Leading word of converted parameter
DM0100
Present temperature of temperature sensing
element (°C)
DM0200
END
248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Logic Instructions
Note When using PID(––) or SCL(––), make the data settings in advance with a Pe-
ripheral Device such as the Programming Console or LSS.
Heater
Target value HR
HR 00
HR 01
(DM0000)
Proportional band
0080
0200
0100
0001
0000
Integral time/sampling period
Derivative time/sampling period
Sampling period
HR 02
HR 03
HR 04
HR 05
Forward/reverse designation/
PID parameters
I/O range
0404
HR 06
SCL Parameters
0000
Fan
HR 40
HR 41
(DM0000)
DM 0100
DM 0101
DM 0102
DM 0103
0060
0150
0100
0001
0001
0000
0200
0FFF
HR 42
HR 43
HR 44
HR 45
0404
HR 46
5-22 Logic Instructions
The logic instructions – COM(29), ANDW(34), ORW(35), XORW(36), and
XNRW(37) – perform logic operations on word data.
5-22-1 COMPLEMENT – COM(29)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
Wd: Complement word
COM(29)
Wd
@COM(29)
Wd
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
Example
When the execution condition is OFF, COM(29) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, COM(29) clears all ON bits and sets all OFF bits in Wd.
15
1
00
1
Original
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
15
0
00
0
Complement
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the result is 0.
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Logic Instructions
5-22-2 LOGICAL AND – ANDW(34)
Operand Data Areas
Ladder Symbols
I1: Input 1
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
I2: Input 2
ANDW(34)
@ANDW(34)
I1
I2
R
I1
I2
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R: Result word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
Example
When the execution condition is OFF, ANDW(34) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, ANDW(34) logically AND’s the contents of I1 and I2
bit-by-bit and places the result in R.
15
1
00
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
I1
I2
15
0
00
1
15
0
00
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
R
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the result is 0.
250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Logic Instructions
5-22-3 LOGICAL OR – ORW(35)
Operand Data Areas
I1: Input 1
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
I2: Input 2
Ladder Symbols
ORW(35)
@ORW(35)
I1
I2
R
I1
I2
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R: Result word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
Example
When the execution condition is OFF, ORW(35) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, ORW(35) logically OR’s the contents of I1 and I2
bit-by-bit and places the result in R.
15
1
00
1
I1
I2
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
15
0
00
1
15
1
00
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
R
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the result is 0.
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Logic Instructions
5-22-4 EXCLUSIVE OR – XORW(36)
Operand Data Areas
I1: Input 1
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
I2: Input 2
Ladder Symbols
XORW(36)
@XORW(36)
I1
I2
R
I1
I2
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R: Result word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
Example
When the execution condition is OFF, XORW(36) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, XORW(36) exclusively OR’s the contents of I1 and I2
bit-by-bit and places the result in R.
15
1
00
1
I1
I2
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
15
0
00
1
15
1
00
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
R
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the result is 0.
252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subroutines and Interrupt Control
5-22-5 EXCLUSIVE NOR – XNRW(37)
Operand Data Areas
I1: Input 1
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
I2: Input 2
Ladder Symbols
XNRW(37)
@XNRW(37)
I1
I2
R
I1
I2
R
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R: Result word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, XNRW(37) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, XNRW(37) exclusively NOR’s the contents of I1 and I2
bit-by-bit and places the result in R.
15
1
00
1
I1
I2
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
15
0
00
1
15
0
00
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
R
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the result is 0.
5-23 Subroutines and Interrupt Control
5-23-1 Subroutines
Subroutines break large control tasks into smaller ones and enable you to reuse
a given set of instructions. When the main program calls a subroutine, control is
transferred to the subroutine and the subroutine instructions are executed. The
instructions within a subroutine are written in the same way as main program
code. When all the subroutine instructions have been executed, control returns
to the main program to the point just after the point from which the subroutine
was entered (unless otherwise specified in the subroutine).
Subroutines may also be activated by interrupts or the MCRO(99) instruction.
Interrupts
Like subroutine calls, interrupts cause a break in the flow of the main program
execution such that the flow can be resumed from that point after completion of
the subroutine. An interrupt is caused either by an external source, such as an
input signal from an Interrupt Input Unit, or a scheduled interrupt. In the case of
the scheduled interrupt, the interrupt signal is repeated at regular intervals.
Whereas subroutine calls are controlled from within the main program, subrou-
tines activated by interrupts are triggered when the interrupt signal is received.
In the case of the scheduled interrupt, the time interval between interrupts is set
by the user and is unrelated to the cycle timing of the PC. This capability is useful
for periodic supervisory or executive program execution.
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subroutines and Interrupt Control
INT(89) is used to control the interrupt signals received from the Interrupt Input
Unit, and also to control the scheduling of the scheduled interrupt. INT(89) pro-
vides such functions as masking of interrupts (so that they are recorded but ig-
nored) and clearing of interrupts.
MCRO(99)
The MACRO instruction allows a single subroutine (programming pattern) to re-
place several subroutines that have identical structure but different operands.
Since a number of similar program sections can be managed with just one sub-
MACRO – MCRO(99) for more details on this instruction.
5-23-2 Interrupts
The C200HS supports both input interrupts and scheduled interrupts. The oper-
ating modes for these interrupts are shown in the following illustration.
Interrupts
Input interrupts
Normal mode (C200H compatible)
High-speed mode (C200HS only)
Scheduled interrupts
Normal mode (C200H compatible)
Interrupts at n x 10 ms
Interrupts at n x 1 ms
Interrupts at n x 10 ms
Interrupts at n x 1 ms
High-speed mode (C200HS only)
Input Interrupts
Input interrupts are executed when external inputs are received via a C200HS-
INT01 Interrupt Input Unit. The Interrupt Input Unit provides at total of 8 inputs
numbered IN 0 through IN7 that can be used to generate interrupts #00 to #07.
Generally speaking, subroutines #00 to #07 are executed when interrupts #00 to
#07 are generated.
Only one Interrupt Input Unit can be mounted to each C200HS PC. When any of
the 8 inputs on the Interrupt Input Unit goes ON, an interrupt is generated and the
corresponding bit in the word allocated to the slot to which the Unit is mounted is
turned ON.
Note 1. Subroutines #00 to #07 can be used as normal subroutines when they are
not used for input interrupts.
2. Inputs on the Interrupt Input Unit not used for interrupts can be used for nor-
mal inputs.
Scheduled Interrupts
Scheduled interrupts can be executed at intervals set either in increments of
10 ms or in increments or 1 ms. Interrupt #99 is used and subroutine #99 is
executed.
The unit used to set the scheduled interrupt interval is set in the PC Setup at
DM 6622.
Bit
15
00
DM 6622
Schedule Interrupt Setting Interval Setting Enable
00: Setting disabled (interval fixed at 10 ms)
01: Setting in bits 00 to 07 enabled
Schedule Interrupt Setting Interval Setting
00: 10 ms
01: 1 ms
Note Subroutine #99 can be used as a normal subroutine when it is not used for a
scheduled interrupt.
254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subroutines and Interrupt Control
Normal Interrupt Mode
(C200H Compatible)
The following setting is used for normal interrupt mode.
DM 6620
0
0
0
0
In normal interrupt mode, the following processing will be completed once
started even if an interrupt occurs The interrupt will be processed as soon as the
current process is completed.
• Host Link servicing
• Remote I/O servicing
• Special I/O Unit servicing
• Individual instruction execution
• SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET servicing (CPU31-E/33-E only)
Use this mode whenever using C200H interrupt subroutines without modifica-
tion or whenever possible considering the response time required for interrupts.
Note The C200HS is set to normal interrupt mode by default.
High-speed Interrupt Mode
(C200HS)
The following setting is used for high-speed interrupt mode.
DM 6620
1
–
–
–
Interrupt mode
(1 = high-speed)
In high-speed interrupt mode, the following processing will be interrupted and
the interrupt subroutine executed as soon as an interrupt is generated.
• Host Link servicing
• Remote I/O servicing
• Special I/O Unit servicing
• Individual instruction execution
Use this mode whenever interrupt response time must be accurate to 1.0 ms.
Note 1. With the CPU31-E/33-E, SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET servicing will be
completed before processing interrupts, meaning up to 10 ms may be
required to respond to and interrupt even in the High-speed mode.
2. Data will not necessarily be concurrent if the high-speed interrupt mode is
used because Host Link servicing, remote I/O servicing, Special I/O Unit
servicing, and individual instruction execution will not necessarily be com-
pleted when started. The program must be designed to allow for this when
required by the application. (See the section on data concurrence for further
details.)
Interrupt Priority
The specified subroutine will be executed when an interrupt is generated. If fur-
ther interrupts are generated during execution of an interrupt subroutine, they
will not be processed until execution of the current interrupt subroutine has been
completed. If more than one interrupt is generated or is awaiting execution at the
same time, the corresponding subroutines will be executed in the following order
of priority.
Input interrupt 1 > input interrupt 2 > ... > input interrupt 7 > scheduled interrupt
Special I/O in Interrupt
Subroutines
I/O for Special I/O Units can be refreshed from within interrupt subroutines by
using the I/O REFRESH (IORF) instruction. If the high-speed interrupt mode is
used, refreshing in the normal cycle (END refreshing and IORF refreshing in the
main program) must be disabled for the Special I/O Unit that is to be refreshed in
the interrupt subroutine. An interrupt programming error (system FAL error 8B)
will occur if the same special I/O is refreshed both within an interrupt program
and within the normal cycle, and the special I/O will not be refreshed within the
interrupt subroutine.
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subroutines and Interrupt Control
The PC Setup for the C200HS contains settings in DM 6620 that disable refresh-
ing in the normal cycle for specific Special I/O Units. This settings are as shown
below.
DM6620
Bit 15
12
00
1
0
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Interrupt mode
(1 = high-speed)
Unit #0
Unit #1
.
.
.
Unit #9
Note Disabling special I/O refreshing in the normal cycle to refresh special I/O in an
interrupt subroutine is necessary only in the high-speed mode. Disabling normal
cycle refreshing of special I/O during normal interrupt mode will be ignored and
the special I/O will be refreshed both in the normal cycle and in the interrupt sub-
routine.
The execution time of interrupt subroutines must be kept to less than10 ms if the
high-speed interrupt mode is used and Special I/O Units, Host Link Units, or Re-
mote I/O Units are programmed. An interrupt programming error (system FAL
error 8B) will occur if the execution time is 10 ms or greater.
The execution time of interrupt subroutine with the longest execution time is out-
put to SR 262 and the number of the subroutine with the longest execution time
is output to SR 263.
Example: 12.3 ms for subroutine #80
Maximum interrupt subroutine execution time (in 0.1 ms)
No. of interrupt subroutine with maximum execution time
SR 262
SR 263
0
8
1
0
2
*
3
*
Note The above 10-ms limit does not apply when the normal interrupt mode is used or
when the above Units are not mounted.
Data Concurrence
Although data concurrence is not a problem for execution of normal arithmetic
instructions or comparison instructions, it can be a problem when executing
longer instructions that handle multiple words, such as block transfer instruc-
tions, when the high-speed interrupt mode is used and the same data is handled
both in the main program and in an interrupt subroutine.
Data may not be concurrent in two different situations: 1) if a data write operation
in the main program is interrupted and the same data is read in an interrupt sub-
routine and 2) if a data read operation in the main program is interrupted and the
same data is written in an interrupt subroutine.
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subroutines and Interrupt Control
If you must handle the same data both in the main program and in an interrupt
subroutine, use programming such as that shown below to be sure that data
concurrence is preserved, i.e., mask interrupts while read/writing data that is
also handled in an interrupt subroutine.
Masks all interrupts.
(@)INT(89)
100
000
000
Reading and writing common
data words
Unmasks all interrupts.
(@)INT(89)
200
000
000
Data concurrence can also be a problem if interrupts occur during data transfers
occurring in servicing for Special I/O Units, remote I/O, or Host Link Systems.
For any of these, data can be non-concurrent down to byte units.
Use one of the following methods to preserve data concurrence in the above sit-
uations. The second methods applies to Special I/O Units only.
• Mask interrupts in the main program while moving data transferred to/from
Units to different words and use these alternate words in the interrupt subrou-
tine.
• Use the I/O REFRESH instruction in interrupt subroutines to refresh required
I/O from Special I/O Units and mask interrupts in the main program while read-
ing/writing Special I/O Unit words.
5-23-3 SUBROUTINE ENTER – SBS(91)
Ladder Symbol
Definer Data Areas
N: Subroutine number
SBS(91) N
00 to 99
Limitations
Subroutine numbers 00 through 07 are used with input interrupts and subroutine
number 99 is used for the scheduled interrupt.
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subroutines and Interrupt Control
Description
A subroutine can be executed by placing SBS(91) in the main program at the
point where the subroutine is desired. The subroutine number used in SBS(91)
indicates the desired subroutine. When SBS(91) is executed (i.e., when the ex-
ecution condition for it is ON), the instructions between the SBN(92) with the
same subroutine number and the first RET(93) after it are executed before ex-
ecution returns to the instruction following the SBS(91) that made the call.
Main program
SBS(91)
00
Main program
SBN(92)
00
Subroutine
RET(93)
END(01)
SBS(91) may be used as many times as desired in the program, i.e., the same
subroutine may be called from different places in the program).
SBS(91) may also be placed into a subroutine to shift program execution from
one subroutine to another, i.e., subroutines may be nested. When the second
subroutine has been completed (i.e., RET(93) has been reached), program ex-
ecution returns to the original subroutine which is then completed before return-
ing to the main program. Nesting is possible to up to sixteen levels. A subroutine
cannot call itself (e.g., SBS(91) 00 cannot be programmed within the subroutine
defined with SBN(92) 00). The following diagram illustrates two levels of nesting.
SBN(92) 10
SBS(91) 11
RET(93)
SBN(92) 11
SBS(91) 12
RET(93)
SBN(92) 12
SBS(91) 10
RET(93)
258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subroutines and Interrupt Control
The following diagram illustrates program execution flow for various execution
conditions for two SBS(91).
A
SBS(91)
B
00
01
OFF execution conditions for
subroutines 00 and 01
A
B
C
Main
program
SBS(91)
ON execution condition for
subroutine 00 only
A
D
B
C
C
ON execution condition for
subroutine 01 only
SBN(92)
D
00
01
A
B
E
C
RET(93)
SBN(92)
ON execution conditions for
subroutines 00 and 01
Subroutines
A
D
B
E
C
E
RET(93)
END(01)
Note A non-fatal error (error code 8B) will be generated if a subroutine’s execution
time exceeds 10 ms.
Flags
ER:
A subroutine does not exist for the specified subroutine number.
A subroutine has called itself.
An active subroutine has been called.
Caution SBS(91) will not be executed and the subroutine will not be called when ER is
!
ON.
5-23-4 SUBROUTINE DEFINE and RETURN – SBN(92)/RET(93)
Ladder Symbols
Definer Data Areas
N: Subroutine number
SBN(92) N
00 to 99
RET(93)
Limitations
Description
Each subroutine number can be used in SBN(92) once only.
SBN(92) is used to mark the beginning of a subroutine program; RET(93) is
used to mark the end. Each subroutine is identified with a subroutine number, N,
that is programmed as a definer for SBN(92). This same subroutine number is
TER – SBS(91)). No subroutine number is required with RET(93).
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subroutines and Interrupt Control
All subroutines must be programmed at the end of the main program. When one
or more subroutines have been programmed, the main program will be ex-
ecuted up to the first SBN(92) before returning to address 00000 for the next
cycle. Subroutines will not be executed unless called by SBS(91).
END(01) must be placed at the end of the last subroutine program, i.e., after the
last RET(93). It is not required at any other point in the program.
Precautions
If SBN(92) is mistakenly placed in the main program, it will inhibit program ex-
ecution past that point, i.e., program execution will return to the beginning when
SBN(92) is encountered.
If either DIFU(13) or DIFU(14) is placed within a subroutine, the operand bit will
not be turned OFF until the next time the subroutine is executed, i.e., the oper-
and bit may stay ON longer than one cycle.
Flags
There are no flags directly affected by these instructions.
5-23-5 MACRO – MCRO(99)
Operand Data Areas
N: Subroutine number
00 to 99
Ladder Symbols
MCRO(99)
@MCRO(99)
I1: First input word
N
I1
N
I1
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
O1: First output word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
O1
O1
Limitations
Description
I1 and I1+3 must be in the same data area, as must O1 and O1+3.
The MACRO instruction allows a single subroutine to replace several subrou-
tines that have identical structure but different operands. There are 4 input
words, SR 290 to SR 293, and 4 output words, SR 294 to SR 297, allocated to
MCRO(99). These 8 words are used in the subroutine and take their contents
from I1 to I1+3 and O1 to O1+3 when the subroutine is executed.
When the execution condition is OFF, MCRO(99) is not executed. When the
execution condition is ON, MCRO(99) copies the contents of I1 to I1+3 to SR 290
to SR 293, copies the contents of O1 to O1+3 to SR 294 to SR 297, and then calls
and executes the subroutine specified in N. When the subroutine is completed,
the contents of SR 294 through SR 297 are then transferred back to O1 to O1+3
before MCRO(99) is completed.
260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subroutines and Interrupt Control
In the following example, the contents of DM 0010 through DM 0013 are copied
to SR 290 through SR 293, the contents of DM 0020 through DM 0023 are co-
pied to SR 294 through SR 297, and subroutine 10 is called and executed.
When the subroutine is completed, the contents of SR 294 through SR 297 are
copied back to DM 0020 to DM 0023.
Main program
MCRO(99)
10
DM 0010
DM 0020
Main program
SBN(92)
10
Subroutine
RET(93)
END(01)
Note 1. Subroutines for macros are programmed just like other subroutines, except
that SR 290 to SR 297 contents are transferred in from the designated input
and output words.
2. Not only external I/O words, but internal I/O words can be used for I1 and O1.
3. SR 290 to SR 297 can be used as work bits when not used for macro pro-
grams.
Precautions
MCRO(99) can be used only for program sections that can be written using four
or fewer consecutive input words and/or four or fewer consecutive output words.
It is thus generally necessary to consider system and program design together
to take full advantage of macro programming.
Be careful that the input and output words properly correspond to the macro in-
put and output words.
Flags
ER:
A subroutine does not exist for the specified subroutine number.
An operand has exceeded a data area boundary.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
A subroutine has called itself.
An active subroutine has been called.
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subroutines and Interrupt Control
Example
The following examples shows the use of four MCRO(99) instructions that ac-
cess the same subroutine. The program section on the left shows the same pro-
gram without the use of MCRO(99).
25313
00000
10000
10001
MCRO(99)
10000
090
Always ON Flag
000
100
00001
00002
10001
MCRO(99)
090
002
00200
10500
10501
10500
105
MCRO(99)
MCRO(99)
090
005
120
00201
00202
10501
12000
00500
12000
12001
090
010
150
00501
00502
12001
15000
29000
29400
29401
01000
15000
15001
29400
29401
29001
29002
01001
01002
15001
RET(93)
5-23-6 INTERRUPT CONTROL – INT(89)
Operand Data Areas
C: Control code
Ladder Symbols
# (000, 001, 002, 100, or 200)
N: Interrupt type
INT(89)
@INT(89)
C
N
D
C
N
D
# (000 or 004)
D: Control data
IR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Limitations
D must be between 0000 and 00FF when N=000 and C=000 or 001.
D must be BCD between 0001 and 9999 when N=004 and C=000 or 001.
262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subroutines and Interrupt Control
Description
INT(89) is used to control interrupts and performs one of 8 functions depending
on the values of C and N. As shown in the following tables, three of the functions
act on input interrupts, three act on the scheduled interrupt, and the other two
mask or unmask all interrupts.
Interrupt
Input
(N=000)
Value of C
000
INT(89) Function
Mask/unmask input interrupts
Clear input interrupts
Comments
Bits 00 to 07 of D indi-
cate inputs 00 to 07.
001
002
Read current mask status
Set interrupt interval
Status written to D.
Scheduled
(N=004)
000
001
Set time to first interrupt
Read interrupt interval
002
The following 2 functions depend on the value of C only.
Value of C
100
INT(89) Function
Mask all interrupts
Unmask all interrupts
200
Mask/unmask Input
Interrupts (N=000, C=000)
This function is used to mask and unmask input interrupts 00 to 07. Masked in-
puts are recorded, but ignored. When an input is masked, the interrupt program
for it will be run as soon as the bit is unmasked (unless it is cleared beforehand by
executing INT(89) with C=001 and N=000).
Set the corresponding bit in D to 0 to unmask or to 1 to mask an I/O interrupt
input. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to 00 to 07.
Clear Input Interrupts
(N=000, C=001)
This function is used to clear I/O interrupt inputs 00 to 07. Since interrupt inputs
are recorded, masked interrupts will be serviced after the mask is removed un-
less they are cleared first.
Set the corresponding bit in D to 1 to clear an interrupt input. Bits 00 to 07 corre-
spond to 00 to 07.
Read Current Mask Status
(N=000, C=002)
This function is used to write the current mask status for input interrupts 00 to 07
to word D. The corresponding bit will be ON if the input is masked. (Bits 00 to 07
correspond to 00 to 07.)
Set Interrupt Interval
(N=004, C=000)
This function is used to set the interval between scheduled interrupts. The con-
tent of D (BCD: 0001 to 9999) is multiplied by the scheduled interrupt time unit
(1 ms or 10 ms) to obtain the scheduled interrupt interval.
The scheduled interrupt time unit is set in DM 6622 of the PC Setup. Refer to
3-6-4 PC Setup for details on setting this time unit.
Set Time to First Interrupt
(N=004, C=001)
This function is used to set the time to the first scheduled interrupt. The content
of D (BCD: 0001 to 9999) is multiplied by the scheduled interrupt time unit (1 ms
or 10 ms) to obtain the time to the first scheduled interrupt. The scheduled inter-
details on setting this time unit.
Be sure to set the time to the first interrupt. If this setting is not made, the interval
to the first interrupt (set with N=004, C=000) will be uncertain.
Use the First Cycle Flag (SR 25315) for the execution condition to INT(89) when
setting the time to the first interrupt (C=001). The scheduled interrupt might nev-
er occur if the C=001 setting is made continuously.
Read Interrupt Interval
(N=004, C=002)
This function is used to write the current setting for the scheduled interrupt inter-
val to word D.
Mask/Unmasking All
Interrupts (C=100/200)
This function is used to mask or unmask all interrupt processing. Masked inputs
are recorded, but ignored. The masked inputs will be serviced as soon as they
are unmasked. This function masks or unmask all interrupts at the same time
and is independent of the masks created with other functions.
The control data, D, is not used for this function. Set D to #0000.
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subroutines and Interrupt Control
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
C, and/or N are not within specified values.
Example 1: Input Interrupt
This example shows how to unmask a particular interrupt input. Input interrupt
subroutines will be executed when the CPU receives the corresponding inter-
rupt input, regardless of the location in the CPU’s cycle. These interrupts are
useful when using program sections of uncertain length, such as event pro-
grams.
All input interrupts are masked at the start of operation, and the desired interrupt
input is unmasked using INT(89) with N=000 and C=000. As shown in the follow-
ing diagram, the subroutine would be executed if there were an input from input
interrupt 00 when that interrupt input was unmasked.
Main program
LD
25315
000
INT(89)
First Cycle Flag
000
#00FE
Only interrupt input
00 is unmasked.
Main program
SBN(92)
00
Interrupt from
interrupt input 00
Subroutine
RET(93)
END(01)
Note Depending on the setting of DM 6621 in the PC Setup, Host Link servicing, Re-
mote I/O servicing, Special I/O Unit servicing, and individual instruction execu-
details.
Example 2: Scheduled
Interrupt
This example shows how to set the interval between scheduled interrupts.
Scheduled interrupt subroutines will be executed at fixed intervals, regardless of
the location in the CPU’s cycle. This interrupt is useful for program sections such
as regular monitoring programs.
264
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subroutines and Interrupt Control
The scheduled interrupt is disabled at the start of operation (the scheduled inter-
rupt interval is 0), so the time to the first interrupt and scheduled interrupt interval
must be set using INT(89) with N=004 and C=001/000. In the following diagram,
the subroutine would be executed every 20 ms if the scheduled interrupt time
unit is set to 10 ms in DM 6622 of the PC Setup.
Main program
LD
25315
001
INT(89)
First Cycle Flag
004
#0002
000
Sets the time to first
interrupt to 20 ms.
INT(89)
004
#0002
Sets the scheduled in-
terrupt interval to 20 ms.
Main program
Scheduled interrupt
every 20 ms.
SBN(92)
Subroutine
00
Return to program ad-
dress before interrupt.
RET(93)
END(01)
Note Depending on the setting of DM 6621 in the PC Setup, Host Link servicing, Re-
mote I/O servicing, Special I/O Unit servicing, and individual instruction execu-
details.
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step Instructions
5-24 Step Instructions
The step instructions STEP(08) and SNXT(09) are used in conjunction to set up
breakpoints between sections in a large program so that the sections can be ex-
ecuted as units and reset upon completion. A section of program will usually be
defined to correspond to an actual process in the application. (Refer to the appli-
cation examples later in this section.) A step is like a normal programming code,
except that certain instructions (e.g., IL(02)/ILC(03), JMP(04)/JME(05)) may not
be included.
5-24-1 STEP DEFINE and STEP START–STEP(08)/SNXT(09)
Ladder Symbols
STEP(08) B
Definer Data Areas
B: Control bit
STEP(08)
IR, SR, AR, HR, LR
B: Control bit
SNXT(09) B
IR, SR, AR, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
All control bits must be in the same word and must be consecutive.
IR 29800 to IR 29915 cannot be used for B.
STEP(08) uses a control bit in the IR or HR areas to define the beginning of a
section of the program called a step. STEP(08) does not require an execution
condition, i.e., its execution is controlled through the control bit. To start execu-
tion of the step, SNXT(09) is used with the same control bit as used for
STEP(08). If SNXT(09) is executed with an ON execution condition, the step
with the same control bit is executed. If the execution condition is OFF, the step is
not executed. The SNXT(09) instruction must be written into the program so that
it is executed before the program reaches the step it starts. It can be used at dif-
ferent locations before the step to control the step according to two different exe-
cution conditions (see example 2, below). Any step in the program that has not
been started with SNXT(09) will not be executed.
Once SNXT(09) is used in the program, step execution will continue until
STEP(08) is executed without a control bit. STEP(08) without a control bit must
be preceded by SNXT(09) with a dummy control bit. The dummy control bit may
be any unused IR or HR bit. It cannot be a control bit used in a STEP(08).
266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step Instructions
Execution of a step is completed either by execution of the next SNXT(09) or by
turning OFF the control bit for the step (see example 3 below). When the step is
completed, all of the IR and HR bits in the step are turned OFF. All timers in the
step except TTIM(––) are reset to their SVs. TTIM(––), counters, shift registers,
bits set or reset with SET or RSET, and bits used in KEEP(11) maintain status.
Two simple steps are shown below.
00000
Starts step execution
SNXT(09) LR 2000
STEP(08) LR 2000
Step controlled by LR 2000
1st step
00001
SNXT(09) LR 2001
STEP(08) LR 2001
Step controlled by LR 2001
2nd step
00002
SNXT(09) 2002
STEP(08)
Ends step execution
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00001
00002
LD
00102
STEP(08)
LR
2001
SNXT(09)
STEP(08)
LR
LR
2000
2000
Step controlled by 20201.
Step controlled by 20200.
LD
00200
00201
00202
LD
00002
2002
SNXT(09)
STEP(08)
LR
---
00100
00101
00001
2001
SNXT(09)
LR
Steps can be programmed in consecutively. Each step must start with STEP(08)
and generally ends with SNXT(09) (see example 3, below, for an exception).
When steps are programmed in series, three types of execution are possible:
sequential, branching, or parallel. The execution conditions for, and the position-
ing of, SNXT(09) determine how the steps are executed. The three examples
given below demonstrate these three types of step execution.
Precautions
Interlocks, jumps, SBN(92), and END(01) cannot be used within step programs.
Bits used as control bits must not be used anywhere else in the program unless
they are being used to control the operation of the step (see example 3, below).
All control bits must be in the same word and must be consecutive.
If IR or LR bits are used for control bits, their status will be lost during any power
interruption. If it is necessary to maintain status to resume execution at the same
step, HR bits must be used.
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step Instructions
Flags
25407: Step Start Flag; turns ON for one cycle when STEP(08) is executed and
can be used to reset counters in steps as shown below if necessary.
00000
Start
SNXT(09) 01000
01000
STEP(08) 01000
00100
25407
CP
CNT 01
25407
#0003
R
1 cycle
Address Instruction
Operands
Address Instruction
Operands
25407
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
00000
01000
01000
00100
00004
00005
LD
SNXT(09)
STEP(08)
LD
CNT
01
#
0003
Examples
The following three examples demonstrate the three types of execution control
possible with step programming. Example 1 demonstrates sequential execu-
tion; example 2, branching execution; and example 3, parallel execution.
Example 1:
Sequential Execution
The following process requires that three processes, loading, part installation,
and inspection/discharge, be executed in sequence with each process being re-
set before continuing on the the next process. Various sensors (SW1, SW2,
SW3, and SW4) are positioned to signal when processes are to start and end.
SW 1
SW 4
SW 2
SW 3
Loading
Part installation
Inspection/discharge
268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step Instructions
The following diagram demonstrates the flow of processing and the switches
that are used for execution control.
SW1
Process A
Loading
SW2
Process B
Part Installation
SW3
Process C
Inspection/discharge
SW4
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step Instructions
The program for this process, shown below, utilizes the most basic type of step
programming: each step is completed by a unique SNXT(09) that starts the next
step. Each step starts when the switch that indicates the previous step has been
completed turns ON.
00001 (SW1)
00002 (SW2)
00003 (SW3)
00004 (SW4)
Process A started.
SNXT(09) 12800
STEP(08) 12800
Process A
Process A reset.
SNXT(09) 12801
Process B started.
STEP(08) 12801
Process B
Process B reset.
Process C started.
SNXT(09) 12802
STEP(08) 12802
Process C
Process C reset.
SNXT(09) 12803
STEP(08)
Address Instruction
Operands
00001
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00001
00002
LD
Process B
SNXT(09)
STEP(08)
12800
12800
00100
00101
00102
LD
00003
SNXT(09)
STEP(08)
12802
12802
Process A
00100
00101
00102
LD
00002
12801
12801
Process C
SNXT(09)
STEP(08)
00200
00201
00202
LD
00004
12803
---
SNXT(09)
STEP(08)
270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step Instructions
Example 2:
Branching Execution
The following process requires that a product is processed in one of two ways,
depending on its weight, before it is printed. The printing process is the same
regardless of which of the first processes is used. Various sensors are posi-
tioned to signal when processes are to start and end.
Printer
SW A2
SW A1
SW D
Process A
Process B
SW B1
SW B2
Weight scale
Process C
The following diagram demonstrates the flow of processing and the switches
that are used for execution control. Here, either process A or process B is used
depending on the status of SW A1 and SW B1.
SW B1
SW B2
SW A1
SW A2
Process A
Process B
Process C
SW D
End
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step Instructions
The program for this process, shown below, starts with two SNXT(09) instruc-
tions that start processes A and B. Because of the way 00001 (SW A1) and
00002 (SB B1) are programmed, only one of these will be executed to start either
process A or process B. Both of the steps for these processes end with a
SNXT(09) that starts the step for process C.
00001 (SW A1) 00002 (SW B2)
SNXT(09) HR 0000
SNXT(09) HR 0001
00001 (SW A1) 00002 (SW B2)
Process A started.
STEP(08) HR 0000
Process A
00003 (SW A2)
Process A reset.
Process C started.
SNXT(09) HR 0002
STEP(08) HR 0001
Process B
00004 (SW B2)
Process B reset.
Process C started.
SNXT(09) HR 0002
STEP(08) HR 0002
Process C
00005 (SW D)
Process C reset.
SNXT(09) HR 0003
STEP(08)
Address Instruction
Operands
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
LD
00001
00002
0000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00005
00006
AND NOT
SNXT(09)
LD NOT
AND
Process B
HR
00001
00002
0001
00100
00101
00102
LD
00004
SNXT(09)
STEP(08)
HR
HR
0002
0002
SNXT(09)
STEP(08)
HR
HR
0000
Process C
Process A
00200
00201
00202
LD
00005
0003
00100
00101
00102
LD
00003
0002
0001
SNXT(09)
STEP(08)
HR
---
SNXT(09)
STEP(08)
HR
HR
272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step Instructions
Example 3:
Parallel Execution
The following process requires that two parts of a product pass simultaneously
through two processes each before they are joined together in a fifth process.
Various sensors are positioned to signal when processes are to start and end.
SW1
SW3
SW5
SW7
Process A
Process B
Process E
Process D
Process C
SW4
SW2
SW6
The following diagram demonstrates the flow of processing and the switches
that are used for execution control. Here, process A and process C are started
together. When process A finishes, process B starts; when process C finishes,
process D starts. When both processes B and D have finished, process E starts.
SW 1 and SW2 both ON
Process A
Process B
Process C
Process D
SW4
SW3
SW5 and SW6 both ON
Process E
SW7
End
The program for this operation, shown below, starts with two SNXT(09) instruc-
tions that start processes A and C. These instructions branch from the same in-
struction line and are always executed together, starting steps for both A and C.
When the steps for both A and C have finished, the steps for process B and D
begin immediately.
When both process B and process D have finished (i.e., when the status for both
of them is “ON”, but SW5 and SW6 have turned ON), processes B and D are
reset together by the SNXT(09) at the end of the programming for process B.
Although there is no SNXT(09) at the end of process D, the control bit for it is
turned OFF by executing SNXT(09) LR 0004. This is because the OUT for LR
0003 is in the step reset by SNXT(09) LR 0004, i.e., LR 003 is turned OFF when
SNXT(09) LR 0004 is executed Process B is thus reset directly and process D is
reset indirectly before executing the step for process E.
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step Instructions
00001 (SW1 and SW2))
Process A started.
Process C started.
SNXT(09) LR 0000
SNXT(09) LR 0002
STEP(08) LR 0000
Process A
00002 (SW3)
Process A reset.
Process B started.
SNXT(09) LR 0001
STEP(08) LR 0001
Process B
Used to
turn off
01101
LR 0003
process D.
00004 (SW5 and SW6)
Process E started.
SNXT(09) LR 0004
STEP(08) LR 0002
Process C
00003 (SW4)
Process C reset.
Process D started.
SNXT(09) LR 0003
STEP(08) LR 0003
Process D
STEP(08) LR 0004
Process E
00005 (SW7)
Process E reset.
SNXT(09) LR 0005
STEP(08)
274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Instructions
Address Instruction
Operands
00001
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
00102
STEP(08)
Process C
LR
0002
SNXT(09)
SNXT(09)
STEP(08)
LR
LR
LR
0000
0002
0000
00200
00201
00202
LD
00003
0003
0003
Process A
SNXT(09)
STEP(08)
LR
LR
00100
00101
00102
LD
00002
0001
0001
SNXT(09)
STEP(08)
LR
LR
Process D
STEP(08)
Process E
00300
LR
LR
0004
Process B
00100
00101
LD
01101
LR
OUT
00400
00401
00402
LD
00005
0005
---
0003
SNXT(09)
STEP(08)
00101
00101
AND
00004
0004
SNXT(09)
LR
5-25 Special Instructions
The instructions in this section are used for various operations, including pro-
gramming user error codes and messages, counting ON bits, setting the watch-
dog timer, and refreshing I/O during program execution.
5-25-1 FAILURE ALARM – FAL(06) and
SEVERE FAILURE ALARM – FALS(07)
Ladder Symbols
Definer Data Areas
N: FAL number
FAL(06) N
@FAL(06) N
# (00 to 99)
N: FAL number
FALS(07) N
# (01 to 99)
Limitations
Description
FAL(06) and FALS(07) share the same FAL numbers. Be sure to use a number
in either FAL(06) or FALS(07), not both.
FAL(06) and FALS(07) are provided so that the programmer can output error
numbers for use in operation, maintenance, and debugging. When executed
with an ON execution condition, either of these instructions will output a FAL
number to bits 00 to 07 of SR 253. The FAL number that is output can be be-
tween 01 and 99 and is input as the definer for FAL(06) or FALS(07). FAL(06)
with a definer of 00 is used to reset this area (see below).
FAL Area
25307
25300
1
0
X10
X10
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Instructions
FAL(06) produces a non-fatal error and FAL(07) produces a fatal error. When
FAL(06) is executed with an ON execution condition, the ALARM/ERROR indi-
cator on the front of the CPU will flash, but PC operation will continue. When
FALS(07) is executed with an ON execution condition, the ALARM/ERROR indi-
cator will light and PC operation will stop.
The system also generates error codes to the FAL area.
Resetting Errors
All FAL error codes will be retained in memory, although only one of these is
available in the FAL area. To access the other FAL codes, reset the FAL area by
executing FAL(06) 00. Each time FAL(06) 00 is executed, another FAL error will
be moved to the FAL area, clearing the one that is already there. FAL error codes
are recorded and will be recalled in the following order: First code generated, 9A,
9B, 9D, 8A, 8B, and then 01 to 99.
Clearing Messages
FAL(06) 00 is also used to clear message programmed with the instruction,
MSG(46).
If the FAL area cannot be cleared, as is generally the case when FALS(07) is
executed, first remove the cause of the error and then clear the FAL area through
5-25-2 CYCLE TIME – SCAN(18)
Operand Data Areas
Mi: Multiplier (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
000: Not used.
Ladder Symbols
SCAN(18)
Mi
@SCAN(18)
Mi
000
000
000
000: Not used.
000
Limitations
Description
Mi must be BCD. Only the rightmost three digits of Mi are used.
SCAN(18) is used to set a minimum cycle time. Mi is the minimum cycle time that
will be set in tenths of milliseconds, e.g., if Mi is 1200, the minimum cycle time will
be 120.0 ms. The possible setting range is from 000.0 to 999.9 seconds.
If the actual cycle time is less than the cycle time set with SCAN(18) the CPU will
wait until the designated time has elapsed before starting the next cycle. If the
actual cycle time is greater than the set time, the set time will be ignored and the
program will be executed to completion.
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
Mi is not BCD.
276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Instructions
5-25-3 TRACE MEMORY SAMPLING – TRSM(45)
Data tracing can be used to facilitate debugging programs. To set up and use
data tracing it is necessary to have a host computer running LSS; no data
tracing is possible from a Programming Console. Data tracing is described in
detail in the LSS Operation Manual. This section shows the ladder symbol for
TRSM(45) and gives an example program.
Ladder Symbol
TRSM(45)
Description
TRSM(45) is used in the program to mark locations where specified data is to be
stored in Trace Memory. Up to 12 bits and up to 3 words may be designated for
tracing (refer to the LSS Operation Manual for details).
TRSM(45) is not controlled by an execution condition, but rather by two bits
in the AR area: AR 2515 and AR 2514. AR 2515 is the Sampling Start bit.
This bit is turned ON to start the sampling processes for tracing. The Sam-
pling Start bit must not be turned ON from the program, i.e., it must be turned
ON only from the peripheral device. AR 2514 is the Trace Start bit. When it is
set, the specified data is recorded in Trace Memory. The Trace Start bit can
be set either from the program or from the Programming Device. A positive
or negative delay can also be set to alter the actual point from which tracing
will begin.
Data can be recorded in any of three ways. TRSM(45) can be placed at one
or more locations in the program to indicate where the specified data is to be
traced. If TRSM(45) is not used, the specified data will be traced when
END(01) is executed. The third method involves setting a timer interval from
the peripheral devices so that the specified data will be tracing at a regular
interval independent of the cycle time (refer to the LSS Operation Manual).
TRSM(45) can be incorporated anywhere in a program, any number of times.
The data in the trace memory can then be monitored via a Programming
Console, host computer, etc.
AR Control Bits and Flags
The following control bits and flags are used during data tracing. The Tracing
Flag will be ON during tracing operations. The Trace Completed Flag will turn
ON when enough data has been traced to fill Trace Memory.
Flag
AR 2515
AR 2514
AR 2513
AR 2512
Function
Sampling Start Bit
Trace Start Bit
Tracing Flag
Trace Completed Flag
Precautions
Example
If TRSM(45) occurs TRSM(45) will not be executed within a JMP(08) – JME(09)
block when the jump condition is OFF.
The following example shows the basic program and operation for data tracing.
Force set the Sampling Start Bit (AR 2515) to begin sampling. The Sampling
Start Bit must not be turned ON from the program. The data is read and stored
into trace memory.
When IR 00000 is ON, the Trace Start Bit (AR 2514) is also turned ON, and the
CPU looks at the delay and marks the trace memory accordingly. This can mean
that some of the samples already made will be recorded as the trace memory
(negative delay), or that more samples will be made before they are recorded
(positive delay).
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Instructions
The sampled data is written to trace memory, jumping to the beginning of the
memory area once the end has been reached and continuing up to the start
marker. This might mean that previously recorded data (i.e., data from this sam-
ple that falls before the start marker) is overwritten (this is especially true if the
delay is positive). The negative delay cannot be such that the required data was
executed before sampling was started.
00000
AR
Starts data tracing.
2514
Designates point for
tracing.
TRSM(45)
AR 2513 ON when tracing
Indicates that tracing is in
progress.
00200
AR 2512 ON when trace is complete
Indicates that tracing has
been completed.
00201
Address Instruction
Operands
0000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
00001
00002
00003
LD
00004
00005
00006
OUT
LD
00200
OUT
TRSM(45)
LD
AR
2514
AR
2512
OUT
00201
AR
2513
5-25-4 MESSAGE DISPLAY – MSG(46)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
FM: First message word
MSG(46)
FM
@MSG(46)
FM
IR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Description
FM and FM+7 must be in the same data area.
When executed with an ON execution condition, MSG(46) reads eight words of
extended ASCII code from FM to FM+7 and displays the message on the Pro-
gramming Console. The displayed message can be up to 16 characters long,
i.e., each ASCII character code requires eight bits (two digits). Refer to Appendix
I for the extended ASCII codes. Japanese katakana characters are included in
this code.
If not all eight words are required for the message, it can be stopped at any point
by inputting “OD”. When OD is encountered in a message, no more words will be
read and the words that normally would be used for the message can be used for
other purposes.
Message Buffering and
Priority
Up to three messages can be buffered in memory. Once stored in the buffer, they
are displayed on a first in, first out basis. Since it is possible that more than three
MSG(46)s may be executed within a single cycle, there is a priority scheme,
based on the area where the messages are stored, for the selection of those
messages to be buffered.
The priority of the data areas is as follows for message display:
LR > IR (I/O) > IR (not I/O) > HR > AR > TC > DM
In handling messages from the same area, those with the lowest ad-
dress values have higher priority.
278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Instructions
In handling indirectly addressed messages (i.e. :DM), those with the
lowest DM address values have higher priority.
Clearing Messages
To clear a message, execute FAL(06) 00 or clear it via a Programming Console
If the message data changes while the message is being displayed, the display
will also change.
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
Example
The following example shows the display that would be produced for the instruc-
tion and data given when 00000 was ON. If 00001 goes ON, a message will be
cleared.
00000
00001
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
MSG(46)
DM 0010
00000
00001
LD
MSG(46)
DM
0010
00001
00
FAL(06) 00
00002
00003
LD
FAL(06)
DM contents
ASCII
equivalent
DM 0010
DM 0011
DM 0012
DM 0013
DM 0014
DM 0015
DM 0016
DM 0017
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
3
5
7
9
B
D
F
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
2
4
6
8
A
C
E
0
A
B
D
F
H
J
C
E
G
I
MSG
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
K
M
O
L
N
P
5-25-5 LONG MESSAGE – LMSG(47)
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word (ASCII)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
---: Not used.
Ladder Symbols
LMSG(47)
@LMSG(47)
S
S
Set to 000
---
---
---
---
---: Not used.
Set to 000
Limitations
S through S+15 must be in the same data area and must be in ASCII. The mes-
sage will be truncated if a null character (00) is contained between S and S+15.
IR 298 and IR 299 cannot be used for S.
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Instructions
Description
LMSG(47) is used to output a 32-character message to a Programming Con-
sole. The message to be output must be in ASCII beginning in word S and end-
ing in S+15, unless a shorter message is desired. A shorter message can be pro-
duced by placing a null character (00) into the string; no characters from the null
character on will be output.
To output to the Programming Console, it must be set in TERMINAL mode. Al-
though LMSG(47) will be executed as normal, the message will not appear cor-
rectly on the Programming Console unless TERMINAL mode is set. Refer to
5-25-6 TERMINAL MODE – TERM(48) for details on switching to TERMINAL
mode.
When pin 6 of the CPU’s DIP switch is OFF, the Programming Console can be
switched to TERMINAL mode by pressing the CHG Key or by executing
TERM(48) in the program. When pin 6 of the CPU’s DIP switch is ON, the Pro-
gramming Console can be switched to Expansion TERMINAL mode by turning
on bit AR 0709.
Flags
ER:
S and S+15 are not in the same data area.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
Example
Although the display is longer and there is a choice of output devices, the coding
for LMSG(47) is the same as that for MSG(46). Refer to Example under the pre-
vious section for an example using MSG(46).
5-25-6 TERMINAL MODE – TERM(48)
Ladder Symbols
TERM(48)
000
@TERM(48)
000
000
000
000
000
Description
When the execution condition is OFF, TERM(48) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, TERM(48) switches the Programming Console to TER-
MINAL mode. (Instructions MSG(46), LMSG(47), and the keyboard mapping
function are executed in TERMINAL mode.)
The Programming Console will return to CONSOLE mode when the CHG key is
pressed again. There is no instruction that returns the Programming Console to
CONSOLE mode from the program.
The Programming Console can also be switched to TERMINAL mode by press-
ing the CHG key on the Programming Console before inputting the password or
when the mode is being displayed provided that pin 6 of the CPU’s DIP switch is
OFF. The Programming Console will return to CONSOLE mode when the CHG
key is pressed again.
When pin 6 of the CPU’s DIP switch is ON, the Programming Console can be
switched to Expansion TERMINAL mode by turning on bit AR 0709.
280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Instructions
Example
In the following example, TERM(48) is used to switch the Programming Console
to TERMINAL mode when 00000 is ON. Be sure that pin 6 of the CPU’s DIP
switch is OFF.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
TERM(48)
000
00000
00001
LD
TERM(48)
000
000
000
000
000
5-25-7 WATCHDOG TIMER REFRESH – WDT(94)
Ladder Symbols
Definer Data Areas
T: Watchdog timer value
WDT(94) T
@WDT(94) T
# (00 to 63)
Description
Precautions
When the execution condition is OFF, WDT(94) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, WDT(94) extends the setting of the watchdog timer (nor-
mally set by the system to 130 ms) by 100 ms times T.
Timer extension = 100 ms x T.
If the cycle time is longer than the time set for the watchdog timer, 9F will be out-
put to the FAL area and the CPU will stop.
If the cycle time exceeds 6,500 ms, a FALS 9F will be generated and the system
will stop.
Timers might not function properly when the cycle time exceeds 100 ms. When
using WDT(94), the same timer should be repeated in the program at intervals
that are less than 100 ms apart. TIMH(15) should be used only in a scheduled
interrupt routine executed at intervals of 10 ms or less.
Flags
There are no flags affected by this instruction.
5-25-8 I/O REFRESH – IORF(97)
Ladder Symbol
Operand Data Areas
St: Starting word
IR 000 to IR 049
E: End word
IORF(97)
St
E
IR 000 to IR 049
Limitations
Description
IORF(97) can be used to refresh I/O words allocated to only I/O Units (IR 000 to
IR 039) and Special I/O Units (IR 100 to IR 199) mounted to the CPU or Expan-
sion I/O Racks. It cannot be used for other I/O words, such as I/O Units on Slaves
Racks or Group-2 High-density I/O Units.
St must be less than or equal to E.
To refresh I/O words allocated to CPU or Expansion I/O Racks (IR 000 to
IR 030), simply indicate the first (St) and last (E) I/O words to be refreshed.
When the execution condition for IORF(97) is ON, all words between St and E
will be refreshed. This will be in addition to the normal I/O refresh performed dur-
ing the CPU’s cycle.
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Instructions
To refresh I/O words allocated to Special I/O Units (IR 100 to IR 199), indicate the
unit numbers of the Units by designating IR 040 to IR 049 (see note). IR 040 to
IR 049 correspond to Special I/O Units 0 to 9. For example, set St to IR 043 and E
to IR 045 to refresh the I/O words allocated to Special I/O Units 3, 4, and 5. The
I/O words allocated to those Units (IR 130 to IR 159) will be refreshed when
IORF(97) is executed.This will be in addition to the normal I/O refresh performed
during the CPU’s cycle.
Note I/O will not be refreshed if IORF(97) is executed for any of the following Units:
• Group-2 High-density I/O Units
• I/O Units or Special I/O Units mounted to Slave Racks (in Remote I/O Sys-
tems)
• Optical I/O Units (in Remote I/O Systems)
tails on refreshing words allocated to Group-2 High-density I/O Units.
Execution Time
When Basic I/O Units are specified, the execution time for IORF(97) is computed
as follows:
T
= instruction execution time + Input Unit I/O refresh time
+ Output Unit I/O refresh time
IORF
= 0.13 ms + 0.02 ms × (no. of 8-pt Units + no. of 16-pt Units × 2)
+ 0.02 ms × (no. of 5- and 8-pt Units + no. of 12-/16-pt Units × 2)
When Special I/O Units are specified, the execution time for IORF(97) is com-
puted as follows:
T
=
instruction execution time + ∑(Special I/O Unit I/O refresh
times)
IORF
fresh times for Special I/O Units.
Flags
There are no flags affected by this instruction.
5-25-9 GROUP-2 HIGH-DENSITY I/O REFRESH – MPRF(61)
Ladder Symbol
Operand Data Areas
St: Starting Unit
#0000 to #0009
E: End Unit
MPRF(61)
St
E
#0000 to #0009
---
Limitations
Description
MPRF(61) can be used to refresh I/O words allocated to Group-2 High-density
I/O Units (IR 030 to IR 049) only. It cannot be used for other I/O words.
St and E must be between #0000 and #0009. St must be less than or equal to E.
When the execution condition is OFF, MPRF(61) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, the I/O words allocated to Group-2 High-density I/O
Units with I/O numbers St through E will be refreshed.This will be in addition to
the normal I/O refresh performed during the CPU’s cycle.
It is not possible to specify the I/O words by address, only by the I/O number of
the Unit to which they are allocated.
Execution Time
The execution time for MPRF(61) is computed as follows:
T
=
Instruction execution time
MPRF
+ ∑(Group-2 High-density I/O Unit I/O refresh times)
282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Instructions
High-density I/O Units.
Flags
ER:
St or E is not BCD between #0000 and #0009.
St is greater than E.
5-25-10 BIT COUNTER – BCNT(67)
Operand Data Areas
Ladder Symbols
N: Number of words (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
SB: Source beginning word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
D: Destination word
BCNT(67)
@BCNT(67)
N
SB
D
N
SB
D
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
Limitations
Description
N must be BCD between 0000 and 6656.
When the execution condition is OFF, BCNT(67) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, BCNT(67) counts the total number of bits that are ON in
all words between SB and SB+(N–1) and places the result in D.
Flags
ER:
N is not BCD, or N is 0; SB and SB+(N–1) are not in the same area.
The resulting count value exceeds 9999.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
EQ:
ON when the result is 0.
5-25-11 FRAME CHECKSUM – FCS(––)
Operand Data Areas
C: Control data
Ladder Symbols
FCS(––)
C
@FCS(––)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
C
R : First word in range
1
R
R
1
1
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
D: First destination word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
D
D
Description
FCS(––) can be used to check for errors when transferring data through commu-
nications ports.
When the execution condition is OFF, FCS(––) is not executed. When the ex-
ecution condition is ON, FCS(––) calculates the frame checksum of the speci-
fied range by exclusively ORing either the contents of words R to R +N–1 or the
1
1
bytes in words R to R +N–1. The frame checksum value (hexadecimal) is then
1
1
converted to ASCII and output to the destination words (D and D+1).
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Instructions
The function of bits in C are shown in the following diagram and explained in
more detail below.
C:
15 14 13 12 11
00
Number of items in range (N, BCD)
001 to 999 words or bytes
First byte (when bit 13 is ON)
1 (ON): Rightmost
0 (OFF): Leftmost
Calculation units
1 (ON): Bytes
0 (OFF): Words
Not used. Set to zero.
Number of Items in Range
Calculation Units
The number of items within the range (N) is contained in the 3 rightmost digits of
C, which must be BCD between 001 and 999.
The frame checksum of words will be calculated if bit 13 is OFF and the frame
checksum of bytes will be calculated if bit 13 is ON.
If bytes are specified, the range can begin with the leftmost or rightmost byte of
R . The leftmost byte of R will not be included if bit 12 is ON.
1
1
MSB LSB
R
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
R +1
1
R +2
1
R +3
1
When bit 12 is OFF the bytes will be ORed in this order: 1, 2, 3, 4, ....
When bit 12 is ON the bytes will be ORed in this order: 2, 3, 4, 5, ....
Conversion to ASCII
The byte frame checksum calculation yields a 2-digit hexadecimal value which is
converted to its 4-digit ASCII equivalent. The word frame checksum calculation
yields a 4-digit hexadecimal value which is converted to its 8-digit ASCII equiva-
lent, as shown below.
Byte frame checksum value
4A
Word frame checksum value
F10B
3 4 4 1
4 6 3 1
3 0 4 2
D
D+1
D
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
The number of items is not 001 to 999 BCD.
284
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Instructions
Example
When IR 00000 is ON in the following example, the frame checksum (0008) is
calculated for the 8 words from DM 0000 to DM 0007 and the ASCII equivalent
(30 30 30 38) is written to DM 0011 and DM 0010.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
@FCS(––)
#0008
00000
00001
LD
@FCS(––)
DM 0000
#
0008
0000
0010
DM 0010
DM
DM
FCS
calculation
DM 0000 0001
DM 0001 0002
DM 0002 0003
DM 0003 0004
DM 0004 0005
DM 0005 0006
DM 0006 0007
DM 0007 0008
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
0
0
0
8
ASCII code
conversion
DM 0011 3 0 3 0 DM 0010 3 0 3 8
5-25-12 FAILURE POINT DETECTION – FPD(––)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
C: Control data
#
FPD(––)
C
T
T: Monitoring time (BCD)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC. LR, #
D: First register word
IR, AR, DM, HR, LR
D
Limitations
Description
D and D+8 must be in the same data area when bit 15 of C is ON.
C must be input as a constant.
FPD(––) can be used in the program as many times as desired, but each must
use a different D. It is used to monitor the time between the execution of FPD(––)
and the execution of a diagnostic output. If the time exceeds T, an FAL(06) non-
fatal error will be generated with the FAL number specified in C.
The program sections marked by dashed lines in the following diagram can be
written according to the needs of the particular program application. The proces-
sing programming section triggered by CY is optional and can used any instruc-
tions but LD and LD NOT. The logic diagnostic instructions and execution condi-
tion can consist of any combination of NC or NO conditions desired.
Branch
Execution
condition
FPD(––)
C
T
D
SR 25504
(CY Flag)
Processing after
error detection.
Logic
diagnostic
instructions
Diagnostic
output
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Instructions
When the execution condition is OFF, FPD(––) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, FPD(––) monitors the time until the logic diagnostics
condition goes ON, turning ON the diagnostic output. If this time exceeds T, the
following will occur:
1, 2, 3... 1. An FAL(06) error is generated with the FAL number specified in the first two
digits of C. If 00 is specified, however, an error will not be generated.
2. The logic diagnostic instructions are searched for the first OFF input condi-
tion and this condition’s bit address is output to the destination words begin-
ning at D.
3. The CY Flag (SR 25504) is turned ON. An error processing program section
can be executed using the CY Flag if desired.
4. If bit 15 of C is ON, a preset message with up to 8 ASCII characters will be
displayed on the Peripheral Device along with the bit address mentioned in
step 2.
Control Data
The function of the control data bits in C are shown in the following diagram.
C: 15 14
08 07
00
Not used. Set to zero.
FAL number
(2-digit BCD, 00 to 99)
Diagnostics output
0 (OFF): Bit address output (binary)
1 (ON): Bit address and message output (ASCII)
Logic Diagnostic Instructions If the time until the logic diagnostics condition goes ON exceeds T, the logic diag-
nostic instructions are searched for the OFF input condition. If more than one
input condition is OFF, the input condition on the highest instruction line and
nearest the left bus bar is selected.
00000
00002
Diagnostic
output
00001
00003
When IR 00000 to IR 00003 are ON, the normally closed condition IR 00002
would be found as the cause of the diagnostic output not turning ON.
Diagnostics Output
There are two ways to output the bit address of the OFF condition detected in the
logic diagnostics condition.
1, 2, 3... 1. Bit address output (used when bit 15 of C is OFF).
Bit 15 of D indicates whether or not bit address information is stored in D+1.
If there is, bit 14 of D indicates whether the input condition is normally open
or closed.
D: 15 14 13
00
Not used.
Input condition
0 (OFF): Normally open
1 (ON): Normally closed
Bit address information
0 (OFF): Not recorded in D+1.
1 (ON): Recorded in D+1.
286
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Instructions
D+1 contains the bit address code of the input condition, as shown below.
The word addresses, bit numbers, and TC numbers are in binary.
Data
Area
D+1 bit status
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
IR, SR
(see
note c)
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
Word address
Word address
Bit number
Bit number
HR
LR
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
Word address
Bit number
Bit number
0
1
Word address
* Timer or counter number
TC*
Note a) *For the TC area, bit 09 of D+1 indicates whether the number is a
timer or counter. A 0 indicates a timer, and a 1 indicates a counter.
b) The status of the leftmost bit of the bit number (bit 03) is reversed.
c) Although the same word address designations are used for both
ranges, bit 13 is turned OFF to indicate IR 00000 through SR
25515 and turned ON to indicate SR 25600 through IR 51115
Example: If D + 1 contains 1000 0110 0100 1000, IR 10000 would be indi-
cated as follows:
1000 0110 0100 1000
IR
$64 = 100 Bit 00 (inverting status of bit 03)
2. Bit address and message output (used when bit 15 of C is ON).
Bit 15 of D indicates whether or not there is bit address information stored in
D+1 to D+3. If there is, bit 14 of D indicates whether the input condition is
normally open or closed. Refer to the following table.
Words D+5 to D+8 contain information in ASCII that are displayed on a Pe-
ripheral Device along with the bit address when FPD(––) is executed.
Words D+5 to D+8 contain the message preset by the user as shown in the
following table.
Word
D+1
Bits 15 to 08
Bits 07 to 00
20 = space
First ASCII character of bit address
D+2
D+3
D+4
Second ASCII character of bit address Third ASCII character of bit address
Fourth ASCII character of bit address
2D = “–”
Fifth ASCII character of bit address
“0”=normally open,
“1”=normally closed
D+5
D+6
D+7
D+8
First ASCII character of message
Third ASCII character of message
Fifth ASCII character of message
Seventh ASCII character of message
Second ASCII character of message
Fourth ASCII character of message
Sixth ASCII character of message
Eighth ASCII character of message
Note If 8 characters are not needed in the message, input “0D” after the
last character.
Determining Monitoring Time The procedure below can be used to automatically set the monitoring time, T,
under actual operating conditions when specifying a word operand for T. This
operation cannot be used if a constant is set for T.
1, 2, 3... 1. Switch the C200HS to MONITOR Mode operation.
2. Connect a Peripheral Device, such as a Programming Console.
3. Use the Peripheral Device to turn ON control bit AR 2508.
4. Execute the program with AR 2508 turned ON. If the monitoring time cur-
rently in T is exceeded, 1.5 times the actual monitoring time will be stored in
T. FAL(06) errors will not occur while AR 2508 is ON.
5. Turn OFF AR 2508 when an acceptable value has been stored in T.
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Instructions
Example
In the following example, the FPD(––) is set to display the bit address and mes-
sage (“ABC”) when a monitoring time of 123.4 s is exceeded.
SR 25315
SR 25315
LR 0000
MOV(21)
Address Instruction
Operands
25315
#4142
HR 15
00000
00001
LD
MOV(21)
#
4142
15
MOV(21)
#430D
HR
00002
00003
LD
25315
HR 16
MOV(21)
#
430D
16
FPD(––)
#8010
#1234
HR 10
HR
LR
00004
00005
LD
0000
FPD(––)
#
8010
1234
10
#
SR 25504
(CY Flag)
HR
INC(38)
00006
00007
AND
25504
DM 0100
INC(38)
DM
0100
10000
10001
10002
10003
10000
10001
10002
10003
LR 0015
00008
00009
00010
00011
00012
00013
LD
OR
LD NOT
OR NOT
AND LD
OUT
LR
0015
FPD(––) is executed and begins monitoring when LR 0000 goes ON. If LR 0015
does not turn ON within 123.4 s and IR 10000 through IR 10003 are all ON,
IR 10002 will be selected as the cause of the error, an FAL(06) error will be gen-
erated with an FAL number of 10, and the bit address and preset message
(“10002–1ABC”) will be displayed on the Peripheral Device.
HR 10
HR 11
HR 12
HR 13
HR 14
HR 15
HR 16
HR 17
HR 18
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
4142
430D
0000
0000
HR 10
HR 11
HR 12
HR 13
HR 14
HR 15
HR 16
HR 17
HR 18
C000
2031
3030
3032
2D31
4142
430D
0000
0000
Indicates information, normally closed condition
“1”
“00”
“02”
“–1”
“AB”
“C”, and CR code
The last two words are ignored.
(Displayed as spaces.)
Flags
ER:
CY:
T is not BCD.
C is not a constant or the rightmost two digits of C are not BCD 00 to 99.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
ON when the time between the execution of FPD(––) and the execution
of a diagnostic output exceeds T.
288
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Instructions
5-25-13 DATA SEARCH – SRCH(––)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
N: Number of words
SRCH(––)
N
@SRCH(––)
N
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
R : First word in range
1
R
R
1
1
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
C: Comparison data, result word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
C
C
Limitations
Description
N must be BCD between 0001 to 6656.
R and R +N–1 must be in the same data area.
1
1
When the execution condition is OFF, SRCH(––) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, SRCH(––) searches the range of memory from R to
1
R +N–1 for addresses that contain the comparison data in C. If one or more ad-
1
dresses contain the comparison data, the EQ Flag (SR 25506) is turned ON and
the lowest address containing the comparison data is identified in C+1. The ad-
dress is identified differently for the DM area:
1, 2, 3... 1. For an address in the DM area, the word address is written to C+1. For ex-
ample, if the lowest address containing the comparison data is DM 0114,
then #0114 is written in C+1.
2. For an address in another data area, the number of addresses from the be-
ginning of the search is written to C+1. For example, if the lowest address
containing the comparison data is IR 114 and the first word in the search
range is IR 014, then #0100 is written in C+1.
If none of addresses in the range contain the comparison data, the EQ Flag (SR
25506) is turned OFF and C+1 is left unchanged.
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
N is not BCD between 0001 and 6655.
EQ:
ON when the comparison data has been matched in the search range.
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Instructions
Example
In the following example, the 10 word range from DM 0010 to DM 0019 is
searched for addresses that contain the same data as DM 0000 (#FFFF). Since
DM 0012 contains the same data, the EQ Flag (SR 25506) is turned ON and
#0012 is written to DM 0001.
00001
Address Instruction
Operands
00001
@SRCH(––)
#0010
00000
00001
LD
@SRCH(––)
DM 0010
#
0010
0010
0000
DM 0000
DM
DM
DM 0010 0000
DM 0011 9898
DM 0012 FFFF
DM 0013 9797
DM 0014 AAAA
DM 0015 9595
DM 0016 1414
DM 0017 0000
DM 0018 0000
DM 0019 FFFF
DM 0000 FFFF
DM 0001 0012
5-25-14 EXPANSION DM READ – XDMR(––)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
N: Number of words
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
S: First expansion DM word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
D: First destination word
XDMR(––)
@XDMR(––)
N
S
D
N
S
D
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
N must be BCD between 0001 and 3000.
S must be BCD between 7000 and 9999.
S and S+N–1 must be in the same data area, as must D and D+N–1.
Description
Precautions
When the execution condition is OFF, XDMR(––) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, XDMR(––) copies the contents of expansion DM words S
through S+N–1 to the destination words D through D+N–1.
The Expansion DM area must be set in the PC Setup before it can be used in
programming. Do not exceed the set range of the Expansion DM area.
Execution of XDMR(––) is given priority whenever a power interruption occurs.
Flags
ER:
The specified expansion DM words are non-existent. Make sure that
the specified words have been allocated to expansion DM. Refer to
7-1-15 UM Area Allocation for details.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of *DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
N is not BCD between 0001 and 3000.
S is not BCD between 7000 and 9999.
290
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Instructions
Example
In the following example, the 100 word range from DM 7000 through DM 7099 is
copied to DM 0010 through DM 0109 when IR 00001 is ON.
00001
Address Instruction
Operands
00001
@XDMR(––)
#0100
00000
00001
LD
@XDMR(––)
#7000
#
0100
7000
0010
DM 0010
#
DM
DM 7000 to DM 7099
DM 7000
DM 9999
DM 0010 to DM 0109
DM 0000
DM 6143
5-26 Network Instructions
The SYSMAC NET Link/SYSMAC LINK instructions are used for communicat-
ing with other PCs linked through the SYSMAC NET Link System or SYSMAC
LINK System. These instructions are applicable to the C200H-CPU31-E and
CPU33-E only.
5-26-1 NETWORK SEND – SEND(90)
Operand Data Areas
Ladder Symbols
S: Source beginning word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
D: Destination beginning word
IR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
C: First control data word
IR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
SEND(90)
@SEND(90)
S
D
C
S
D
C
Limitations
Description
Can be performed with the CPU31-E/33-E only. C through C+2 must be within
the same data area and must be within the values specified below. To be able to
use SEND(90), the system must have a SYSMAC NET Link or SYSMAC LINK
Unit mounted.
When the execution condition is OFF, SEND(90) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, SEND(90) transfers data beginning at word S, to ad-
dresses specified by D in the designated node on the SYSMAC NET Link/SYS-
MAC LINK System. The control words, beginning with C, specify the number of
words to be sent, the destination node, and other parameters. The contents of
the control data depends on whether a transmission is being sent in a SYSMAC
NET Link System or a SYSMAC LINK System.
291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Instructions
The status of bit 15 of C+1 determines whether the instruction is for a SYSMAC
NET Link System or a SYSMAC LINK System.
Control Data
SYSMAC NET Link Systems The destination port number is always set to 0. Set the destination node number
to 0 to send the data to all nodes. Set the network number to 0 to send data to a
node on the same Subsystem (i.e., network). Refer to the SYSMAC NET Link
System Manual for details.
Word
Bits 00 to 07
Bits 08 to 15
C
Number of words (0 to 1000 in 4-digit hexadecimal, i.e., 0000
to 03E8
)
hex
hex
C+1
Network number (0 to 127 in 2-digit Bit 14 ON: Operating level 0
hexadecimal, i.e., 00
to 7F
)
OFF: Operating level 1
hex
hex
Bits 08 to 13 and 15: Set to 0.
C+2
Destination node (0 to 126 in 2-digit Destination port
hexadecimal, i.e., 00 to 7E )* NSB: 00
hex
hex
NSU: 01/02
*The node number of the PC executing the send may be set.
SYSMAC LINK Systems
Set the destination node number to 0 to send the data to all nodes. Refer to the
SYSMAC LINK System Manual for details.
Word
Bits 00 to 07
Bits 08 to 15
C
Number of words (0 to 256 in 4-digit hexadecimal, i.e., 0000
to 0100
)
hex
hex
C+1
Response time limit (0.1 and 25.4
seconds in 2-digit hexadecimal
Bits 08 to 11:
No. of retries (0 to 15 in
hexadecimal,
without decimal point, i.e., 00
to
hex
FF
)
i.e., 0
Bit 12: Set to 0.
Bit 13 ON: Response not returned.
OFF: Response returned.
Bit 14 ON: Operating level 0
OFF: Operating level 1
to F
)
hex
hex
hex
Note: The response time will be
2 seconds if the limit is set to 0
There will be no time limit if the
time limit is set to FF
.
hex
.
hex
Bit 15: Set to 1.
C+2
Destination node (0 to 62 in 2-digit Set to 0.
hexadecimal, i.e., 00 to 3E )*
hex
hex
*The node number of the PC executing the send cannot be set.
Examples
This example is for a SYSMAC NET Link System. When 00000 is ON, the follow-
ing program transfers the content of IR 001 through IR 005 to LR 20 through LR
24 on node 10.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
SEND(90)
001
00000
00001
LD
SEND(90)
LR 20
001
20
DM 0010
LR
DM
0010
Node 10
15
0
DM 0010
DM 0011
DM 0012
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
0
IR 001
IR 002
IR 003
IR 004
IR 005
LR 20
LR 21
LR 22
LR 23
LR 24
A
292
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Instructions
Flags
ER:
The specified node number is greater than 126 in a SYSMAC NET Link
System or greater than 62 in a SYSMAC LINK System.
The sent data overruns the data area boundaries.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
There is no SYSMAC NET Link/SYSMAC LINK Unit.
5-26-2 NETWORK RECEIVE – RECV(98)
Operand Data Areas
Ladder Symbols
S: Source beginning word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
D: Destination beginning word
IR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
C: First control data word
IR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
RECV(98)
@RECV(98)
S
D
C
S
D
C
Limitations
Description
Can be performed with the CPU31-E/33-E only. C through C+2 must be within
the same data area and must be within the values specified below. To be able to
use RECV(98), the system must have a SYSMAC NET Link or SYSMAC LINK
Unit mounted.
When the execution condition is OFF, RECV(98) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, RECV(98) transfers data beginning at S from a node on
the SYSMAC NET Link/SYSMAC LINK System to words beginning at D. The
control words, beginning with C, provide the number of words to be received, the
source node, and other transfer parameters.
The status of bit 15 of C+1 determines whether the instruction is for a SYSMAC
NET Link System or a SYSMAC LINK System.
Control Data
SYSMAC NET Link Systems The source port number is always set to 0. Set the network number to 0 to re-
ceive data to a node on the same Subsystem (i.e., network). Refer to the SYS-
MAC NET Link System Manual for details.
Word
Bits 00 to 07
Bits 08 to 15
C
Number of words (0 to 1000 in 4-digit hexadecimal, i.e., 0000
to 03E8
)
hex
hex
C+1
Network number (0 to 127 in 2-digit Bit 14 ON: Operating level 0
hexadecimal, i.e., 00 to 7F OFF: Operating level 1
Bits 08 to 13 and 15:
Set to 0.
Source port
)
hex
hex
C+2
Source node (1 to 126 in 2-digit
hexadecimal, i.e., 01 to 7E
)
NSB: 00
hex
hex
NSU: 01/02
293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Instructions
SYSMAC LINK Systems
Refer to the SYSMAC LINK System Manual for details.
Word
Bits 00 to 07
Bits 08 to 15
C
Number of words (0 to 256 in 4-digit hexadecimal, i.e., 0000
to 0100
)
hex
hex
C+1
Response time limit (0.1 and 25.4
seconds in 2-digit hexadecimal
Bits 08 to 11:
No. of retries (0
hexadecimal,
without decimal point, i.e., 00
to to 15 in
hex
FF
)
hex
i.e., 0
to F
)
hex
hex
Note: The response time will be
2 seconds if the limit is set to 0
Bit 12: Set to 0.
Bit 13: Set to 0.
.
hex
There will be no time limit if the
time limit is set to FF
Bit 14 ON: Operating level 0
OFF: Operating level 1
Bit 15: Set to 1.
.
hex
C+2
Source node (0 to 62 in 2-digit
hexadecimal, i.e., 00 to 3E
Set to 0.
)
hex
hex
Examples
This example is for a SYSMAC NET Link System. When 00000 is ON, the follow-
ing program transfers the content of IR 001 through IR 005 to LR 20 through LR
24 on node 10.
00000
Address Instruction
Operands
00000
RECV(98)
001
00000
00001
LD
RECV(98)
LR 20
001
20
DM 0010
LR
DM
0010
Node 10
15
0
DM 0010
DM 0011
DM 0012
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
0
IR 001
IR 002
IR 003
IR 004
IR 005
LR 20
LR 21
LR 22
LR 23
LR 24
A
Flags
ER:
The specified node number is greater than 126 in a SYSMAC NET Link
System or greater than 62 in a SYSMAC LINK System.
The received data overflows the data area boundaries.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
There is no SYSMAC NET Link/SYSMAC LINK Unit.
294
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Instructions
5-26-3 About Network Communications
SEND(90) and RECV(98) are based on command/response processing. That
is, the transmission is not complete until the sending node receives and ac-
knowledges a response from the destination node. Note that the
SEND(90)/RECV(98) Enable Flag is not turned ON until the first END(01) after
the transmission is completed. Refer to the SYSMAC NET Link System Manual
or SYSMAC LINK System Manual for details about command/response opera-
tions.
If multiple SEND(90)/RECV(98) operations are used, the following flags must be
used to ensure that any previous operation has completed before attempting
further send/receive SEND(90)/RECV(98) operations
SR Flag
Functions
SEND(90)/RECV(98)
Enable Flags
(SR 25201, SR 25204)
OFF during SEND(90)/RECV(98) execution (including
command response processing). Do not start a
SEND(90)/RECV(98) operation unless this flag is ON.
SEND(90)/RECV(98)
Error Flags
OFF following normal completion of SEND/RECV (i.e.,
after reception of response signal)
(SR 25200, SR 25203)
ON after an unsuccessful SEND(90)/RECV(98) attempt.
Error status is maintained until the next
SEND(90)/RECV(98) operation.
Error types:
Time-out error (command/response time greater than 1
second)
Transmission data errors
Timing
Successful
send/receive
execution
Send/receive
error
Instruction
received
Transmission Instruction Transmission Instruction
completes
normally
received error
received
Data Processing for
SEND(90)/RECV(98)
Data is transmitted for SEND(90) and RECV(98) for all PCs when
SEND(90)/RECV(98) is executed. Final processing for transmissions/recep-
tions is performed during servicing of peripheral devices and Link Units.
Programming Example:
Multiple
SEND(90)/RECV(98)
To ensure successful SEND(90)/RECV(98) operations, your program must use
the SEND(90)/RECV(98) Enable Flags and SEND(90)/RECV(98) Error Flags to
confirm that execution is possible. The following program shows one example of
how to do this for a SYSMAC NET Link System.
295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Instructions
SEND(90)/RECV(98) Enable Flag
00000
25204
12802
12800 prevents execution of SEND(90) until
RECV(98) (below) has completed. IR 00000
is turned ON to start transmission.
S
R
KEEP(11)
12800
12801
12800
@MOV(21)
#000A
DM 0000
@MOV(21)
#0000
DM 0001
Data is placed into control data words to
specify the 10 words to be transmitted to
node 3 in operating level 1 of network 00
(NSB).
@MOV(21)
#0003
DM 0002
XFER(70)
#0010
000
DM 0010
@SEND(90)
DM 0010
DM 0020
DM 0000
SEND(90)/RECV(98) Error Flag
12800
25203
Turns ON to indicate transmission error.
Resets 12800, above.
00200
12800
00001
25204
DIFU(13)
S
12801
25204
12800
25203
12802 prevents execution of RECV(98)
when SEND(90) above has not completed.
IR 00001 is turned ON to start transmission.
KEEP(11)
12803
12802
12802
R
25204
XFER(70)
Transmitted data moved into words
beginning at DM 0030 for storage.
#0016
000
DM 0030
12802
@MOV(21)
#0010
DM 0003
Data moved into control data words to
specify the 16 words to be transmitted from
node 126 in operating level 1 of network 00
(NSB).
@MOV(21)
#0000
DM 0004
@MOV(21)
#007E
DM 0005
@RECV(98)
HR 10
LR 10
DM 0003
SEND(90)/RECV(98) Error Flag
12802
12802
25203
Turns ON to indicate reception error.
Resets 12802, above.
00201
25204
DIFU(13)
12803
296
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Serial Communications Instructions
Address Instruction
Operands
Address Instruction
Operands
12800
00000 LD
00000
25204
12802
12801
12800
12800
00019 AND NOT
00020 LD
00001 AND
12803
12802
12802
25204
25203
00002 AND NOT
00003 LD
00021 KEEP(11)
00022 LD
00004 KEEP(11)
00005 LD
00023 AND
00024 AND NOT
00025 XFER(70)
00006 @MOV(21)
#
000A
0000
#
0016
000
DM
00007 @MOV(21)
00008 @MOV(21)
00009 @XFER(70)
DM
0030
12802
#
0000
0001
00026 LD
DM
00027 @MOV(21)
#
0010
0003
#
0003
DM
DM
00002
00028 @MOV(21)
00029 @MOV(21)
00030 @RECV(98)
#
0000
0004
#
0010
000
DM
DM
0002
#
007E
0005
00010 @SEND(90)
DM
DM
DM
DM
0010
0020
HR
LR
10
10
0000
00011
LD
12800
25203
00200
12800
25204
12801
00001
25204
DM
0003
00012 AND
00013 OUT
00014 LD
00031 LD
12802
25203
00201
12802
25204
12803
00032 AND
00033 OUT
00034 LD
00015 AND
00016 DIFU(13)
00017 LD
00035 AND
00036 DIFU(13)
00018 AND
5-27 Serial Communications Instructions
5-27-1 RECEIVE – RXD(––)
Operand Data Areas
Ladder Symbols
D: First destination word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
C: Control word
RXD(––)
@RXD(––)
D
C
N
D
C
N
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
N: Number of bytes
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Limitations
Description
D and D+(N÷2)–1 must be in the same data area.
N must be BCD from #0000 to #0256. (#0000 to #0061 in host link mode)
When the execution condition is OFF, RXD(––) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, RXD(––) reads N bytes of data received at the peripheral
port, and then writes that data in words D to D+(N÷2)–1. Up to 256 bytes of data
can be read at one time.
If fewer than N bytes are received, the amount received will be read.
297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Serial Communications Instructions
Note RXD(––) is required to receive data via the peripheral port or RS-232C port only.
Transmission sent from a host computer to a Host Link Unit are processed auto-
matically and do not need to be programmed.
Caution The PC will be incapable of receiving more data once 256 bytes have been received if received
data is not read using RXD(––). Read data as soon as possible after the Reception Completed
Flag is turned ON (SR 26414 for peripheral port).
!
Control Word
The value of the control word determines the port from which data will be read
and the order in which data will be written to memory.
Digit number: 3 2 1 0
Byte order
0: Most significant bytes first
1: Least significant bytes first
Not used. (Set to 00.)
Port
0: RS-232C port (C200HS-CPU21-E/23-E/31-E/CPU33-E)
1: Peripheral port
The order in which data is written to memory depends on the value of digit 0 of C.
Eight bytes of data 12345678... will be written in the following manner:
Digit 0 = 0
Digit 0 = 1
MSB LSB
MSB LSB
D
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
D
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
D+1
D+2
D+3
D+1
D+2
D+3
Flags
ER:
The CPU is not equipped with an RS-232C port.
Another device is not connected to the specified port.
There is an error in the communications settings (PC Setup) or the oper-
and settings.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of *DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
The destination words (D to D+(N÷2)–1) exceed the data area.
Peripheral Port
26414: SR 26414 will be turned ON when data has been received normally at
the peripheral port and will be reset when the data is read using
RXD(––) is executed.
266:
SR 266 contains the number of bytes received at the peripheral port and
is reset to 0000 when RXD(––) is executed.
RS-232C Port
26406: SR 26406 will be turned ON when data has been received normally at
the peripheral port and will be reset when the data is read using
RXD(––) is executed.
265:
SR 265 contains the number of bytes received at the RS-232C port and
is reset to 0000 when RXD(––) is executed.
Note Communications flags and counters can be cleared either by specifying 0000 for
N or using the Port Reset Bit (SR 25208 for peripheral port and SR 25209 for
RS-232C port).
298
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Serial Communications Instructions
5-27-2 TRANSMIT – TXD(––)
Operand Data Areas
Ladder Symbols
S: First source word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
C: Control word
TXD(––)
@TXD(––)
S
C
N
S
C
N
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
N: Number of bytes
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR, #
Limitations
Description
S and S+(N÷2)–1 must be in the same data area.
N must be BCD from #0000 to #0256. (#0000 to #0061 in host link mode)
When the execution condition is OFF, TXD(––) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, TXD(––) reads N bytes of data from words S to
S+(N÷2)–1, converts it to ASCII, and outputs the data from the specified port.
TXD(––) operates differently in host link mode and RS-232C mode, so these
modes are described separately.
Note The following flags will be ON to indicate that communications are possible
through the various ports. Be sure the corresponding flag is ON before executing
TXD(––).
SR 26405:
SR 26413:
SR 26705:
SR 26713:
RS-232C port
Peripheral port
Host Link Unit #0
Host Link Unit #1
Host Link Mode
N must be BCD from #0000 to #0061 (i.e., up to 122 bytes of ASCII). The value of
the control word determines the port from which data will be output, as shown
below.
Digit number: 3 2 1 0
Byte order
0: Most significant bytes first
1: Least significant bytes first
Not used. (Set to 00.)
Port 0: Specifies RS-232C port
(C200HS-CPU21-E/23-E/31-E/CPU33-E).
1: Specifies peripheral port.
2: Specifies Host Link Unit #0
3: Specifies Host Link Unit #1
The specified number of bytes will be read from S through S+(N/2)–1, converted
to ASCII, and transmitted through the specified port. The bytes of source data
shown below will be transmitted in this order: 12345678...
MSB LSB
S
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
S+1
S+2
S+3
299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Serial Communications Instructions
The following diagram shows the format for host link command (TXD) sent from
the C200HS. The C200HS automatically attaches the prefixes and suffixes,
such as the node number, header, and FCS.
@ X
X
X
X
X
X
.........
X
X
X
∗
CR
Node
Header
Data (122 ASCII characters max.)
FCS Terminator
number code (EX)
RS-232C Mode
Control Word
N must be BCD from #0000 to #0256. The value of the control word determines
the port from which data will be output and the order in which data will be written
to memory.
The value of the control word determines the port from which data will be read
and the order in which data will be written to memory.
Digit number: 3 2 1 0
Byte order
0: Most significant bytes first
1: Least significant bytes first
Not used. (Set to 00.)
Port 0: Specifies RS-232C port
(C200HS-CPU21-E/23-E/31-E/CPU33-E).
1: Specifies peripheral port.
The specified number of bytes will be read from S through S+(NP2)–1 and trans-
mitted through the specified port.
MSB LSB
S
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
S+1
S+2
S+3
When digit 0 of C is 0, the bytes of source data shown above will be transmitted in
this order: 12345678...
When digit 0 of C is 1, the bytes of source data shown above will be transmitted in
this order: 21436587...
Note When start and end codes are specified the total data length should be 256 bytes
max., including the start and end codes.
Flags
ER:
Another device is not connected to the peripheral port.
There is an error in the communications settings (PC Setup) or the oper-
and settings.
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of *DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
The source words (S to S+(N÷2)–1) exceed the data area.
26405: RS-232C Port Communications Enabled Flag
26413: Peripheral Port Communications Enabled Flag
26705: Host Link Unit #0 Communications Enabled Flag
26713: Host Link Unit #1 Communications Enabled Flag
300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced I/O Instructions
5-28 Advanced I/O Instructions
Advanced I/O instructions enable control, with a single instruction, of previously
complex operations involving external I/O devices (digital switches, 7-segment
displays, etc.).
There are five advanced I/O instructions, as shown in the following table. All of
these are expansion instructions and must be assigned to function codes before
they can be used.
Name
Mnemonic
Function
7-SEGMENT DISPLAY OUTPUT
7SEG(––)
BCD output to 7-segment dis-
play
DIGITAL SWITCH INPUT
DSW(––)
HKY(––)
Data input from a digital switch
HEXADECIMAL KEY INPUT
Hexadecimal input from 16-key
keypad
TEN-KEY INPUT
MATRIX INPUT
TKY(––)
MTR(––)
BCD input from 10-key keypad
Data input from an 8 x 8 matrix
Although TKY(––) is used only to simplify programming, the other advanced I/O
instructions can be used to shorten cycle time, reduce the need for Special I/O
Units, and reduce system cost. With the exception of TKY(––), however, the ad-
vanced I/O instructions can only be used once each in the program and cannot
be used for I/O Units mounted to Slave Racks, where Special I/O Units must be
used.
5-28-1 7-SEGMENT DISPLAY OUTPUT – 7SEG(––)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
S: First source word
7SEG(––)
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, TC, LR
O: Output word
S
O
C
IR, SR, AR, HR, LR
C: Control data
000 to 007
Limitations
Overview
S and S+1 must be in the same data area.
Do not set C to values other than 000 to 007.
When the execution condition is OFF, 7SEG(––) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, 7SEG(––) reads the source data (either 4 or 8-digit), con-
verts it to 7-segment display data, and outputs that data to the 7-segment display
connected to the output indicated by O.
The value of C indicates the number of digits of source data and the logic for the
Input and Output Units, as shown in the following table.
Source data Display’s data input logic Display’s latch input logic
C
4 digits (S)
Same as Output Unit
Same as Output Unit
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
Different from Output Unit
Same as Output Unit
Different from Output Unit
Same as Output Unit
Different from Output Unit
Same as Output Unit
8 digits
(S, S+1)
Different from Output Unit
Same as Output Unit
Different from Output Unit
Different from Output Unit
301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced I/O Instructions
If there are 8 digits of source data, they are placed in S and S+1, with the most
significant digits placed in S+1. If there are 4 digits of source data, they are
placed in S.
7SEG(––) displays the 4 or 8-digit data in 12 cycles, and then starts over and
continues displaying the data.
The 7-segment display must provide four data lines and one latch signal line for
each display digit.
Note 1. Consider the cycle time and the characteristics of the 7-segment display
when designing the system.
2. Output bits not used here can be used as ordinary output bits.
Precautions
I/O refreshing must be performed for all I/O points used by 7SEG(––) each time it
is executed to ensure effective operation. The I/O REFRESH instruction must
thus be used with 7SEG(––) whenever 7SEG(––) is used in a subroutine to en-
example of this type of programming.
7SEG(––) will be executed from the first cycle whenever program execution is
started, including restarts made after power interruptions.
Do not use 7SEG(––) more than once in the program.
7SEG(––) cannot be used for I/O Units mounted to Slave Racks.
Hardware
This instruction outputs word data to a 7-segment display. It utilizes either 8 out-
put bits for 4 digits or 12 output bits for 8 digits. The 7-segment display is con-
nected to an Output Unit as shown in the diagram below. For 4-digit display, the
data outputs (D0 to D3) are connected to output points 0 through 3 (allocated
word O), and latch outputs (CS0 to CS3) are connected to output points 4
through 7. Output point 12 (for 8-digit display) or output point 8 (for 4-digit dis-
play) will be turned ON when one round of data is displayed, but there is no need
to connect them unless required by the application.
D
V
(+)
V
(+)
D
D
D
D
0
1
2
3
DD
DD
0
1
2
3
D
D
D
V
SS
V
SS
(0)
(0)
LE3
LE2
LE1
LE0
LE3
LE2
LE1
LE0
OD212
0
1
2
4
3
5
6
8
7
9
10
11
12
14
DC
13
15
COM
The outputs must be connected from an Output Unit with 8 or more output points
for four digits or 16 or more output points for eight digits. Basic Output, Special
I/O, or High-density Output Units can be used.
Note 1. Output Unit outputs normally employ negative logic. (Only the PNP output
type employs positive logic.)
302
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced I/O Instructions
2. The 7-segment display may require either positive or negative logic, de-
pending on the model.
3. The 7-segment display must have 4 data signal lines and 1 latch signal line
for each digit.
Using the Instruction
If the first word holding the data to be displayed is specified at S, and the output
word is specified at O, and the SV taken from the table below is specified at C,
then operation will proceed as shown below when the program is executed. If
only four digits are displayed, then only word S will be used.
Data Storage Format
Leftmost 4 digits
S+1
Rightmost 4 digits
S
Timing
The timing of data output is shown in the following table. “O” is the first word hold-
ing display data and “C” is the output word.
Bit(s) in O
Function
Output status (Data and latch logic depends on C)
(4 digits,
1 block)
(4 digits,
2 blocks)
00 to 03
04 to 07
0
1
2
3
Note 0 to 3: Data output for word S
Data output
00 to 03
10
10
10
10
4 to 7: Data output for word S+1
Latch output 0
Latch output 1
Latch output 2
Latch output 3
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
One Round Flag
08
12
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12
12 cycles required to complete one round
Application Example
This example shows a program for displaying 8-digit BCD numbers at a 7-seg-
ment LED display. Assume that the 7-segment display is connected to output
word IR 100. Also assume that the Output Unit is using negative logic, and that
the 7-segment display logic is also negative for data signals and latch signals.
25313 (Always ON)
7SEG(––)
DM0120
100
004
The 8-digit BCD data in DM 0120 (rightmost 4 digits) and DM 0121 (leftmost 4
digits) are always displayed by means of 7SEG(––). When the contents of
DM 0120 and DM 0121 change, the display will also change.
Flags
ER:
S and S+1 are not in the same data area. (When set to display 8-digit
data.)
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of *DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
There is an error in operand settings.
25409: SR 25409 will be ON while 7SEG(––) is being executed.
303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced I/O Instructions
5-28-2 DIGITAL SWITCH INPUT – DSW(––)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
IW: Input word
IR, SR, AR, HR, LR
OW: Output word
DSW(––)
IW
OW
R
IR, SR, AR, HR, LR
R: First result word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Overview
DSW(––) is used to read the value set on a digital switch connected to I/O Units.
When the execution condition is OFF, DSW(––) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, DSW(––) reads the 8-digit value set on the digital switch
from IW and places the result in R.
The 8-digit value it is placed in R and R+1, with the most significant digits placed
in R+1.
DSW(––) reads the 8-digit value in 20 executions, and then starts over and con-
tinues reading the data.
The digital switch must provide four data lines and one latch signal line and read
signal line for each digit being input.
Precautions
I/O refreshing must be performed for all I/O points used by DSW(––) each time it
is executed to ensure effective operation. The I/O REFRESH instruction must
thus be used with DSW(––) whenever DSW(––) is used in a subroutine to en-
example of this type of programming.
DSW(––) will be executed from the first cycle whenever program execution is
started, including restarts made after power interruptions.
Do not use DSW(––) more than once in the program.
DSW(––) cannot be used for I/O Units mounted to Slave Racks.
Note Input and output bits not used here can be used as ordinary input and output bits.
304
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced I/O Instructions
Hardware
With this instruction, 8-digit BCD set values are read from a digital switch.
DSW(––) utilizes 5 output bits and 8 input bits. Connect the digital switch and the
Input and Output Units as shown in the diagram below. Output point 5 will be
turned ON when one round of data is read, but there is no need to connect output
point 5 unless required for the application.
ID212
Input Unit
0
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
CS
CS
CS
CS
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
CS
CS
CS
CS
1
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
Interface
A7E data line rightmost digits
A7E data line
2
4
6
8
3
5
7
9
A7E
Leftmost digits
leftmost digits
Rightmost digits
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
10
11
12
13
To A7E chip selection
To A7E RD terminal
RD
RD
14
15
COM
COM
OD212
Note An interface to convert signals from 5 V to 24 V is
0
2
4
6
8
required to connect an A7E digital switch.
1
3
5
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Output Unit
COM
COM
305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced I/O Instructions
The following example illustrates connections for an A7B Thumbwheel Switch.
ID212
Input Unit
0
2
1
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
A7B
Thumbwheel
Switch
10
12
11
8 4 2 1
13
14
OD212
15
COM
Switch no. 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
C
COM
0
2
1
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
10
11
12
14
DC
13
15
Output Unit
COM
Note The data read signal is not required in the example.
The inputs must be connected to a DC Input Unit with 8 or more input points and
the outputs must be connected from a Transistor Output Unit with 8 or more out-
put points.
306
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced I/O Instructions
Using the Instruction
If the input word for connecting the digital switch is specified at for word A, and
the output word is specified for word B, then operation will proceed as shown
below when the program is executed.
IW
Four digits: 00 to 03
0
1
2
3
Input data
Leftmost Rightmost
10
10
10
10
Eight digits: 00 to 03, 04 to 07
4 digits
4 digits
Wd 0
00
D+1
D
When only 4 digits are read,
only word D is used.
01
02
03
04
05
CS signal
RD (read) signal
1 Round Flag
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
16 cycles to complete one round of execution
Application Example
This example shows a program for reading 8 digits in BCD from the digital
switch. Assume that the digital switch is connected to IR 000 (input) and IR 100
(output).
00015
05000
10005
05000
05000
DSW
000
100
HR51
10005
@MOV(21)
HR51
DM0000
When IR 00015 turns ON, the IR 05000 will hold itself ON until the One Round
Flag (IR 10005) turns ON upon completion of one round of reading by DSW(––).
The data set from the digital switch by DSW(––) is stored in HR 51.
When the One Round Flag (10005) turns ON after reading has been completed,
the number stored in HR 51 is transferred to DM 0000.
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of *DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
R and R+1 are not in the same data area.
25410: ON while DSW(––) is being executed.
307
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced I/O Instructions
5-28-3 HEXADECIMAL KEY INPUT – HKY(––)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
IW: Input word
IR, SR, AR, HR, LR
HKY(––)
IW
OW: Control signal output word
IR, SR, AR, HR, LR
OW
D
D: First register word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Overview
D and D+2 must be in the same data area.
When the execution condition is OFF, HKY(––) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, HKY(––) inputs data from a hexadecimal keypad con-
nected to the input indicated by IW. The data is input in two ways:
1, 2, 3... 1. An 8-digit shift register is created in D and D+1. When a key is pressed on
the hexadecimal keypad, the corresponding hexadecimal digit is shifted into
the least significant digit of D. The other digits of D, D+1 are shifted left and
the most significant digit of D+1 is lost.
2. The bits of D+2 and bit 4 of OW indicate key input. When one of the keys on
the keypad (0 to F) is being pressed, the corresponding bit in D+2 (00 to 15)
and bit 4 of OW are turned ON.
Note 1. When one of the keypad keys is being pressed, input from the other keys is
disabled.
2. Input and output bits not used here can be used as ordinary input and output
bits.
With this instruction, one key input is read in 4 to 13 cycles. More than one cycle
is required because the ON keys can only be determined as the outputs are
turned ON to test them.
The hexadecimal key input device must be connectable in a 4 x 4 matrix.
Precautions
I/O refreshing must be performed for all I/O points used by HKY(––) each time it
is executed to ensure effective operation. The I/O REFRESH instruction must
thus be used with HKY(––) whenever HKY(––) is used in a subroutine to ensure
ple of this type of programming.
HKY(––) will be executed from the first cycle whenever program execution is
started, including restarts made after power interruptions.
Do not use HKY(––) more than once in the program.
HKY(––) cannot be used for I/O Units mounted to Slave Racks.
308
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced I/O Instructions
Hardware
This instruction inputs 8 digits in hexadecimal from a hexadecimal keyboard. It
utilizes 5 output bits and 4 input bits. Prepare the hexadecimal keyboard, and
connect the 0 to F numeric key switches, as shown below, to input points 0
through 3 and output points 0 through 3. Output point 4 will be turned ON while
any key is being pressed, but there is no need to connect it unless required by
the application.
OD212
C
8
4
0
D
9
5
1
E
A
6
2
F
B
0
1
3
2
7
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
ID212
0
10
1
3
11
2
12
13
4
6
14
5
15
COM
7
9
COM
8
10
11
Output Unit
12
13
14
15
COM
COM
Input Unit
The inputs connected to the input terminals must be on a DC Input Unit with 8 or
more input points and the outputs connected to the output terminals must be
from a Transistor Output Unit with 8 points or more.
309
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced I/O Instructions
Using the Instruction
If the input word for connecting the hexadecimal keyboard is specified at word A,
and the output word is specified at word B, then operation will proceed as shown
below when the program is executed.
IW
00
01
02
03
16-key selection
control signals
16-key
0
to
9
to
F
Status of 16 keys
D+2
00
to
09
to
15
OW
04
Turn ON flags corre-
sponding to input
keys (The flags re-
main ON until the
next input.)
ON for a 12-cycle
period if a key is
pressed.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112
Once per 12 cycles
0000 0000
0000
D+1
000F
D
0000
D+1
00F9
D
D
D+1
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
D and D+2 are not in the same data area.
SR 25408:
ON while HKY(––) is being executed.
Example
This example shows a program for inputting numbers from a hexadecimal key-
board. Assume that the hexadecimal keyboard is connected to IR 000 (input)
and IR 100 (output).
25313 (Always ON)
HKY(––)
000
100
DM1000
00015
@XFER(70)
#0002
DM1000
DM0000
The hexadecimal key information that is input to IR 000 by HKY(––) is converted
to hexadecimal and stored in words DM1000 and DM1001.
IR 00015 is used as an “ENTER key”, and when IR 00015 turns ON, the numbers
stored in DM 1000 and DM 1001 are transferred to DM 0000 and DM 0001.
310
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced I/O Instructions
5-28-4 TEN KEY INPUT – TKY(––)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
IW: Input word
TKY(––)
IW
IR, SR, AR, HR, LR
D : First register word
1
D
D
1
2
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
D : Key input word
2
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
Limitations
Overview
D and D +1 must be in the same data area.
1
1
When the execution condition is OFF, TKY(––) is not executed. When the execu-
tion condition is ON, TKY(––) inputs data from a ten-key keypad connected to
the input indicated by IW. The data is input in two ways:
TKY(––) can be used in several locations in the program by changing the input
word, IW.
1, 2, 3... 1. An 8-digit shift register is created in D and D +1. When a key is pressed on
1
1
the ten-key keypad, the corresponding BCD digit is shifted into the least sig-
nificant digit of D . The other digits of D , D +1 are shifted left and the most
1
1
1
significant digit of D +1 is lost.
1
2. The first ten bits of D indicate key input. When one of the keys on the key-
2
pad (0 to 9) is being pressed, the corresponding bit of D (00 to 09) is turned
2
ON.
Note 1. While one key is being pressed, input from other keys will not be accepted.
2. If more than eight digits are input, digits will be deleted beginning with the
leftmost digit.
3. Input bits not used here can be used as ordinary input bits.
Hardware
This instruction inputs 8 digits in BCD from a 10-key keypad and uses 10 input
points. Prepare a 10-key keypad, and connect it so that the switches for numeric
keys 0 through 9 are input to points 0 through 9 as shown in the following dia-
gram. The inputs on a DC Input Unit with 16 or more input points can be used.
ID212
0
0
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
9
10
9
11
12
13
10-key
14
15
COM
COM
0 V
DC Input Unit
311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced I/O Instructions
Using the Instruction
If the input word for connecting the 10-key keypad is specified for IW, then opera-
tion will proceed as shown below when the program is executed.
IW
D +1
D
1
1
00
01
02
to
Before
execution
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Input from 10-key
(1)
0
0
0
09
“1” key input
D
2
(2)
(3)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
00
01
“0” key input
Turn ON flags corre-
sponding to 10-key
inputs (The flags re-
main ON until the
next input.)
1
0
2
02
to
“2” key input
09
(4)
0
0
0
0
1
0
2
9
ON if a key is pressed.
10
“9” key input
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
D and D +1 are not in the same data area.
1
1
Example
In this example, a program for inputting numbers from the 10-key is shown. As-
sume that the 10-key is connected to IR 000.
25313 (Always ON)
TKY(––)
000
DM1000
DM1002
00015
@XFER(70)
#0002
DM1000
DM 0000
The 10-key information input to IR 000 using TKY(––) is converted to BCD and
stored in DM 1000 and DM 1001. Key information is stored in DM 1002.
IR 00015 is used as an “ENTER key”, and when IR 00015 turns ON, the data
stored in DM 1000 and DM 1001 will be transferred to DM 0000 and DM 0001.
312
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced I/O Instructions
5-28-5 MATRIX INPUT – MTR(––)
Ladder Symbols
Operand Data Areas
IW: Input word
IR, SR, AR, HR, LR
OW: Output word
MTR(––)
IW
OW
IR, SR, AR, HR, LR
D: First destination word
IR, SR, AR, DM, HR, LR
D
Limitations
Overview
D and D+3 must be in the same data area.
When the execution condition is OFF, MTR(––) is not executed. When the exe-
cution condition is ON, MTR(––) inputs data from an 8 × 8 matrix and records
that data in D to D+3. Data for all 64 points in the matrix will be recorded even
when fewer than 64 keys are connected.
0
8
1
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
OW bits 00 to 07
(for Output Unit
outputs 00 to 07)
Bit 08 is turned ON to indi-
cate that the entire matrix
has been read.
Key input data is written
to D through D+3 (see
table below).
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
IW bits 00 to 07
(for Input Unit inputs 00 to 07)
A selection signal is output to OW bits 00 to 07 consecutively for 3 cycles. Only
one output bit will be turned on at a time. Bit 08 of OW is turned ON for 3 cycles
after 07 to indicate when each round of reading the matrix has been completed.
When one of the 64 keys is pressed, an input will be received at one of the input
bits. The key that was pressed is identified by comparing the output bit to which
the signal was output and input bit at which it was received.
When an key input is detected, the corresponding bit in D through D+3 is turned
ON. The following table shows the correspondence between keys and bits in D
through D+3.
Word
Bits
00 to 15
00 to15
00 to 15
00 to 15
Corresponding Keys
0 to 15
D
D+1
D+2
D+3
16 to 31
32 to 47
48 to 63
313
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced I/O Instructions
Hardware
This instruction inputs up to 64 signals from an 8 x 8 matrix using 8 input points
and 8 output points. Any 8 x 8 matrix can be used. The inputs must be connected
through a DC Input Unit with 8 or more points and the outputs must be connected
through a Transistor Output Unit with 8 or more points. The basic wiring and tim-
ing diagrams for MTR(––) are shown below.
Wiring
8th row
7th row
A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
1st row
A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
ID 211 I/O Unit
Timing Diagram
00
01
02
03
Matrix select signal
04
05
06
07
00
Matrix status
32
64
00
32
64
06
Bits indicating
input status
One-round Flag (bit
08 of output word)
Each round completed in 24 executions
Precautions
The 64 keys can be divided into 8 rows (including a row for OW bit 08) which are
scanned consecutively. Since each row is scanned for 3 cycles, a delay of up to
25 cycles can occur before a given row of keys is scanned for inputs.
I/O refreshing must be performed for all I/O points used by MTR(––) each time it
is executed to ensure effective operation. The I/O REFRESH instruction must
thus be used with MTR(––) whenever MTR(––) is used in a subroutine to ensure
that the I/O points are refreshed each execution.
MTR(––) will be executed from the first cycle whenever program execution is
started, including restarts made after power interruptions.
SR 25403, which is turned on while MTR(––) is being executed, is reset in an
interlocked program section and MTR(––) is not executed in an interlocked pro-
gram section.
Do not use MTR(––) more than once in the program.
MTR(––) cannot be used for I/O Units mounted to Slave Racks.
314
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced I/O Instructions
Example
The following examples shows programming MTR(––) in a scheduled subrou-
tine, where IORF(97) is programmed to ensure that the I/O words used by
MTR(––) are refreshed each time MTR(––) is executed.
INT(89)
001
004
# 0002
INT(89)
000
004
# 0002
SBN(92)
MTR(––)
99
S
D1
D2
IORF(97)
D1
D2
RET(93)
END(01)
Flags
ER:
Indirectly addressed DM word is non-existent. (Content of :DM word is
not BCD, or the DM area boundary has been exceeded.)
25403: SR 25403 is ON while MTR(––) is being executed.
315
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 6
Program Execution Timing
The timing of various operations must be considered both when writing and debugging a program. The time required to ex-
ecute the program and perform other CPU operations is important, as is the timing of each signal coming into and leaving the
PC in order to achieve the desired control action at the right time. This section explains the cycle and shows how to calculate
the cycle time and I/O response times.
Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cycle Time
6-1 Cycle Time
To aid in PC operation, the average, maximum, and minimum cycle times can be
displayed on the Programming Console or any other Programming Device and
the maximum cycle time and current cycle time values are held in AR 26 and
AR 27. Understanding the operations that occur during the cycle and the ele-
ments that affect cycle time is, however, essential to effective programming and
PC operations.
The major factors in determining program timing are the cycle time and the I/O
response time. One run through all required CPU operations is called a cycle;
the time required for each cycle is called the cycle time.
The overall flow of the CPU operation is as shown in the following flowchart.
318
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cycle Time
Flowchart of CPU Operation
Power application
Clears IR area and
resets all timers
Initialization
on power-up
Checks I/O Unit connections
Resets watchdog timer
Checks hardware and
Program Memory
Overseeing
processes
NO
Check OK?
YES
Resets watchdog timer and
program address counter
Sets error flags and turns
ON or flashes indicator
Program
execution
Executes user program
ALARM/ERROR
ALARM
(Flashing)
ERROR
(Solid ON)
End of program?
YES
NO
NO
Note A minimum cycle
time can be set
either in DM 6619
of the PC Setup
or by executing
SCAN(18).
Minimum
cycle time?
PC
cycle
time
YES
Cycle time
calculation
Resets watchdog timer and waits
until the set cycle time has elapsed
Calculates cycle time
Resets watchdog timer
I/O
refreshing
Refreshes input bits
and output signals
RS-232C port
servicing
Services RS-232C
port
Host Link Unit
servicing
Services Host Link
Peripheral
device
Services Peripheral Devices
servicing
SYSMAC LINK
and SYSMAC
NET Link Unit
servicing
Services SYSMAC LINK and
SYSMAC NET Link Units
319
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cycle Time
The first three operations immediately after power application are performed
only once each time the PC is turned on. The rest of the operations are per-
formed in cyclic fashion. The cycle time is the time that is required for the CPU to
complete one of these cycles. This cycle includes basically eight types of opera-
tion.
1, 2, 3...
1. Overseeing
2. Program execution
3. Cycle time calculation
4. I/O refreshing
5. Host Link Unit servicing
6. RS-232C port servicing
7. Peripheral Device servicing
8. SYSMAC NET/SYSMAC LINK servicing.
The cycle time is the total time required for the PC to perform all of the above
operations. The time required for operation 3, cycle time calculation, is negligi-
ble and can be ignored in actual calculations
Operation
Time required
Function
1. Overseeing
0.7 ms
Watchdog timer set. I/O Bus, Program
Memory checked. Clock refreshed.
2. Program
execution
Total execution time for all instructions varies Program executed.
with program size, the instructions used, and
Execution Times for details.
3. Cycle time
calculation
Negligible, but a wait can be generated to
bring the cycle time up to the minimum set-
ting if one has been made.
Cycle time calculated. When the CYCLE
TIME instruction (SCAN(18)) is executed,
waits until the set time has elapsed and
then resets the watchdog timer.
4. I/O refreshing
Total of following times:
Input bits set according to status of input
signals. Output signals sent according to
status of output bits in memory.
20 µs per input byte (8 points). 20 µs per
output byte. (12-point Output Units calcu-
lated as 16 points.)
Inputs and Outputs in Remote I/O Systems
refreshed.
PC Link Unit I/O refresh time.
Special I/O Unit refresh time.
Special I/O Units serviced.
Group-2 High-density I/O Units serviced.
1.1 ms per Remote I/O Master Unit +
0.17 ms per I/O word used on Slave Racks.
Group-2 (High-density) I/O Unit refresh time.
Refer to the tables below for details on PC
Link, Special I/O Unit, and Group-2 High-
density I/O Unit refresh times.
5. Host Link Unit
servicing
6 ms per Unit max.
Commands from computers connected
through Rack-mounting Host Link Units
processed.
6. RS-232C port
servicing
0 ms when no device is connected.
Communications with devices connected
to RS-232C port processed.
T x 0.05, where T is the cycle time calculated
in operation 3
(except CPU01-E/03-E)
7. Peripheral device
servicing
0 ms when no device is connected.
Commands from Programming Devices
(computers, Programming Consoles, etc.)
processed.
0.26 ms minimum or T x 0.05, where T is the
cycle time calculated in operation 3
8. SYSMAC NET/
SYSMAC LINK
servicing
0 ms when no Communications Unit is
mounted.
Commands from computers and other de-
vices connected to SYSMAC NET/SYS-
MAC LINK Units processed.
0.8 ms + 10 ms max. per Unit.
(CPU31-E/33-E only)
320
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cycle Time
PC Link Unit I/O Refresh
I/O pts to refresh
512
Time required
(ms)
7.4
256
128
64
4.1
2.7
1.7
Special I/O Unit Refresh
Unit
Time required per Unit
C200H-ID501/215
C200H-OD501/215
C200H-MD501/215
0.6 ms
0.6 ms when set for 32 I/O pts.
1.6 ms when set for dynamic I/O
C200H-CT001-V1/CT002
C200H-NC111/NC112
C200H-NC211
2.6 ms
2.5 ms
5.0 ms
C200H-AD001
1.3 ms
C200H-DA001
1.0 ms
C200H-TS001/TS101
C200H-ASC02
1.2 ms
1.9 ms normally, 5.0 ms for @ format
C200H-IDS01-V1/IDS21
C200H-OV001
2.0 ms normally, 5.5 ms for command transfer
4.1 ms
2.0 ms
3.0 ms
C200H-FZ001
C200H-TC001/002/003/
101/102/103
C200H-CP114
C200H-AD002
C200H-PIDjj
2.5 ms
1.4 ms
3.0 ms
Group-2 High-density I/O
Unit Refresh
Unit
C200H-ID216
C200H-OD218
C200H-ID217
C200H-OD219
Time required per Unit
0.18 ms
0.14 ms
0.31 ms
0.23 ms
NT Links
If the PC is connected to a Programmable Terminal (PT) via a C200H Interface
Unit, the times shown in the following table will be required to refresh I/O for the
PT.
Number of table entries for PT
Minimum setting:
I/O refresh time
2.5 ms
5.4 ms
Character string table: 0
Numeral table: 0
Maximum setting:
Character string table: 32
Numeral table: 128
Watchdog Timer and Long
Cycle Times
Within the PC, the watchdog timer measures the cycle time and compares it to a
set value. If the cycle time exceeds the set value of the watchdog timer, a FALS
9F error is generated and the CPU stops. WDT(94) can be used to extend the set
value for the watchdog timer.
321
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calculating Cycle Time
Even if the cycle time does not exceed the set value of the watchdog timer, a long
cycle time can adversely affect the accuracy of system operations as shown in
the following table.
Cycle time (ms)
Possible adverse affects
10 or greater
TIMH(15) inaccurate when TC 016 through TC 511 are used.
(Accuracy when using TC 000 through TC 0015 not affected.)
20 or greater
100 or greater
0.02-second clock pulse (SR 25401) not accurately readable.
0.1-second clock pulse (SR 25500) not accurately readable and
Cycle Time Error Flag (SR 25309) turns ON.
200 or greater
0.2-second clock pulse (SR 25501) not accurately readable.
6,500 or greater
FALS code 9F generated regardless of watchdog timer setting
and the system stops.
Online Editing
When online editing is executed from a Programming Device, operation will be
interrupted for a maximum of 260 ms and interrupts will be masked to rewrite the
user program. No warnings will be given for long cycle times during this interval.
Check the effects on I/O response time before editing the program online.
Caution Editing the program online can cause delays in I/O responses with no warnings being given from
the system for the long cycle time produced by editing online. Before editing online, make sure that
delays in I/O responses will not create a dangerous situation in the controlled system.
!
6-2 Calculating Cycle Time
The PC configuration, the program, and program execution conditions must be
taken into consideration when calculating the cycle time. This means taking into
account such things as the number of I/O points, the programming instructions
used, and whether or not peripheral devices are employed. This section shows
some basic cycle time calculation examples. To simplify the examples, the in-
structions used in the programs have been assumed to be all either LD or OUT.
The average execution time for the instructions is thus 0.47 µs. (Execution times
6-2-1 PC with I/O Units Only
Here, we’ll compute the cycle time for a simple PC. The CPU controls only I/O
Units, eight on the CPU Rack and five on a 5-slot Expansion I/O Rack. The PC
configuration for this would be as shown below. It is assumed that the program
contains 5,000 instructions requiring an average of 0.47 µs each to execute.
8-point Input Units 8-point Output Units
CPU Rack
/O Rack
16-point Input Units
12-point Output Units
8-point Output Unit
322
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calculating Cycle Time
Calculations
The equation for the cycle time from above is as follows:
Cycle time =
Overseeing time + Program execution time + I/O refresh time +
Peripheral device servicing time
Process
Calculation
Fixed
With Peripheral
Device
Without
Peripheral Device
Overseeing
0.7 ms
0.7 ms
Program execution 0.47 µs/instruction
2.35 ms
2.35 ms
× 5,000
instructions
I/O refresh
See below.
0.34 ms
0.26 ms
0.34 ms
0.0 ms
Peripheral device
servicing
Minimum time
Cycle time
Total of above
3.65 ms
3.39 ms
The I/O refresh time would be as follows for two16-point Input Units, four 8-point
Input Units, two 12-point Output Units (12-point Units are treated as 16-point
Units), and five 8-point Output Units controlled by the PC:
(16 pts x 2) + (8 pts x 4)
(16 pts x 2) + (8 pts x 5)
8 pts
x 20 µs +
x 20 µs = 0.34 ms
8 pts
6-2-2 PC with Link Units
Here, the cycle time is computed for a PC with a CPU21-E or CPU23-E CPU that
has a Memory Unit with a clock function installed. The PC configuration for this
could be as shown below.
The CPU controls three 8-point Input Units, three 8-point Output Units, a Host
Link Unit, and a Remote I/O Master Unit connected to a Remote I/O Slave Rack
containing four 16-point Input Units and four 12-point Output Units.
It is assumed that the program contains 5,000 instructions requiring an average
of 0.47 µs each to execute, and that nothing is connected to the RS-232C port
and no SYSMAC NET/SYSMAC LINK Unit is mounted.
Host Link Unit
8-point
8-point
Remote I/O
Master Unit
Input Units Output Units
CPU Rack
Slave Rack
16-point
Input Units
12-point
Output Units
323
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruction Execution Times
Calculations
The equation for the cycle time is as follows:
Cycle time =
Overseeing time + Program execution time
+ I/O refreshing time + Host Link Unit servicing time
+ Peripheral device servicing time
Process
Calculation
With Peripheral
Without
Peripheral Device
Device
0.7 ms
2.35 ms
Overseeing
Fixed
0.7 ms
Program execution 0.47 µs/instruction
2.35 ms
× 5,000
instructions
I/O refresh
See below.
2.58 ms
6.0 ms
2.58 ms
6.0 ms
0.0 ms
Host Link servicing Fixed
Peripheral device
servicing
0.7 + 2.35 + 2.58 +
6 = 11.63
0.58 ms
11.63 x 0.05 = 0.58
Total of above
Cycle time
12.21 ms
11.63 ms
The I/O refreshing time would be as follows for three 8-point Input Units and
three 8-point Output Units mounted in the CPU Rack, and eight Units mounted in
a Slave Rack.
(8 pts x 3) + (8 pts x 3)
x 20 µs + 1.1 ms + 8 Units x 0.17 ms = 2.58 ms
8 pts
6-3 Instruction Execution Times
The following table lists the execution times for all instructions that are available
for the C200HS. The maximum and minimum execution times and the condi-
tions which cause them are given where relevant. When “word” is referred to in
the Conditions column, it implies the content of any word except for indirectly
addressed DM words. Indirectly addressed DM words, which create longer
execution times when used, are indicated by “:DM”.
Execution times for most instructions depend on whether they are executed with
an ON or an OFF execution condition. Exceptions are the ladder diagram in-
structions OUT and OUT NOT, which require the same time regardless of the
execution condition. The OFF execution time for an instruction can also vary de-
pending on the circumstances, i.e., whether it is in an interlocked program sec-
tion and the execution condition for IL is OFF, whether it is between JMP(04) 00
and JME(05) 00 and the execution condition for JMP(04) 00 is OFF, or whether it
is reset by an OFF execution condition. “R”, “IL”, and “JMP” are used to indicate
these three times.
All execution times are given in microseconds unless otherwise noted.
Instruction
Conditions
ON execution time (µs)
OFF execution time (µs)
LD
For IR and SR 23600 to SR 25515
For SR 25600 to SR 51115
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.375
0.75
LD NOT
AND
For IR and SR 23600 to SR 25515
For SR 25600 to SR 51115
0.375
0.75
For IR and SR 23600 to SR 25515
For SR 25600 to SR 51115
0.375
0.75
AND NOT
OR
For IR and SR 23600 to SR 25515
For SR 25600 to SR 51115
0.375
0.75
For IR and SR 23600 to SR 25515
For SR 25600 to SR 51115
0.375
0.75
OR NOT
For IR and SR 23600 to SR 25515
For SR 25600 to SR 51115
0.375
0.75
324
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruction Execution Times
Instruction
Conditions
ON execution time (µs)
OFF execution time (µs)
AND LD
OR LD
OUT
---
---
0.375
0.375
0.563
0.938
0.563
0.938
1.125
0.375
0.375
0.563
0.563
0.563
0.563
For IR and SR 23600 to SR 25515
For SR 25600 to SR 51115
For IR and SR 23600 to SR 25515
For SR 25600 to SR 51115
Constant for SV
OUT NOT
TIM
R:
1.125
1.125
1.125
39.0875
1.125
1.125
22.2875
1.125
1.125
1.125
1.125
1.125
39.0875
1.125
1.125
22.0875
1.125
1.125
IL:
JMP:
R:
:DM for SV
IL:
JMP:
R:
For designated words 256 to 511
Constant for SV
IL:
JMP:
R:
CNT
1.125
IL:
JMP:
R:
:DM for SV
IL:
JMP:
R:
For designated words 256 to 511
IL:
JMP:
0.563
0.563
0.563
0.563
---
SET
For IR and SR 23600 to SR 25515
0.563
For SR 25600 to SR 51115
0.938
RSET
For IR and SR 23600 to SR 25515
0.563
For SR 25600 to SR 51115
0.938
NOP(00)
END(01)
IL(02)
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
0.375
34.20
---
11.44
14.00
12.64
14.56
12.28
0.375
0.375
0.375
2.25
ILC(03)
12.60
JMP(04)
12.32
JME(05)
12.28
FAL(06) 01 to 99
FAL(06) 00
FALS(07)
STEP(08)
93.76
77.56
4.28 ms
50.60 (with operand)
24.56 (without operand)
13.96
SNXT(09)
---
2.25
325
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruction Execution Times
Instruction
Conditions
ON execution time (µs)
OFF execution time (µs)
SFT(10)
With 1-word shift register
With 100-word shift register
With 250-word shift register
47.06
R:
35.80
15.70
15.60
256.80
15.72
15.68
590.80
15.60
15.66
IL:
JMP:
R:
340.00
800.00
IL:
JMP:
R:
IL:
JMP:
0.563
KEEP(11)
CNTR(12)
For IR and SR 23600 to SR 25515
For SR 25600 to SR 51115
Constant for SV
0.563
0.938
38.20
R:
27.90
20.30
20.30
28.00
20.30
20.30
IL:
JMP:
R:
:DM for SV
53.20
20.60
20.40
32.20
29.40
29.80
27.40
IL:
JMP:
DIFU(13)
DIFD(14)
TIMH(15)
---
Normal: 20.60
IL:
20.40
18.00
JMP:
---
Normal: 20.40
IL:
20.20
17.80
40.40
39.20
24.90
36.30
35.20
20.80
59.80
58.60
24.90
56.00
54.60
20.80
JMP:
R:
Interrupt Constant for SV
Normal cycle
Interrupt :DM for SV
Normal cycle
IL:
JMP:
R:
IL:
JMP:
R:
IL:
JMP:
R:
IL:
JMP:
3
WSFT(16)
CMP(20)
When shifting 1 word
36.90
11.27 ms
24.20
26.40
61.80
19.00
21.20
57.20
20.20
22.40
57.20
When shifting 6,144 words using :DM
When comparing a constant to a word
When comparing two words
1.125
1.125
1.125
When comparing two :DM
MOV(21)
MVN(22)
When transferring a constant to a word
When comparing two words
When transferring :DM to :DM
When transferring a constant to a word
When comparing two words
When transferring :DM to :DM
326
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruction Execution Times
Instruction
Conditions
ON execution time (µs)
40.40
74.80
38.40
72.80
21.20
38.20
21.20
38.20
21.80
39.00
21.80
39.00
21.90
39.30
40.10
42.50
94.10
40.10
42.50
94.10
56.90
59.30
110.90
56.90
59.10
110.70
34.10
37.10
88.70
34.10
36.70
88.30
34.10
36.70
88.30
34.30
36.90
88.50
23.70
41.10
24.30
41.70
12.20
12.30
27.70
23.20
40.80
OFF execution time (µs)
1.125
BIN(23)
When converting a word to a word
When converting :DM to :DM
When converting a word to a word
When converting :DM to :DM
When shifting a word
When shifting :DM
BCD(24)
ASL(25)
ASR(26)
ROL(27)
ROR(28)
COM(29)
ADD(30)
1.125
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
0.75
1.5
When shifting a word
When shifting :DM
When rotating a word
When rotating :DM
When rotating a word
When rotating :DM
When inverting a word
When inverting :DM
Constant + word → word
Word + word→ word
:DM + :DM → :DM
Constant – word → word
Word – word→ word
:DM – :DM → :DM
Constant x word → word
Word x word→ word
SUB(31)
MUL(32)
DIV(33)
1.5
1.5
1.5
:DM x :DM → :DM
Word ÷ constant → word
Word ÷ word→ word
:DM ÷ :DM → :DM
Constant AND word → word
Word AND word→ word
:DM AND :DM → :DM
Constant OR word → word
Word OR word→ word
:DM OR :DM → :DM
Constant XOR word → word
Word XOR word→ word
:DM XOR :DM → :DM
Constant XNOR word → word
Word XNOR word→ word
:DM XNOR :DM → :DM
When incrementing a word
When incrementing :DM
When decrementing a word
When decrementing :DM
---
ANDW(34)
ORW(35)
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
XORW(36)
XNRW(37)
INC(38)
0.75
0.75
DEC(39)
STC(40)
CLC(41)
TRSM(45)
MSG(46)
0.375
0.375
27.70
0.75
---
---
Designated as DM
Designated as :DM
327
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruction Execution Times
Instruction
Conditions
ON execution time (µs)
OFF execution time (µs)
ADB(50)
SBB(51)
MLB(52)
DVB(53)
Constant + word → word
Word + word → word
43.20
45.80
97.40
43.20
45.80
97.40
36.00
38.50
91.10
36.70
1.5
:DM + :DM → :DM
Constant – word → word
Word – word → word
1.5
1.5
1.5
:DM – :DM → :DM
Constant x word → word
Word x word → word
:DM x :DM → :DM
Word ÷ constant → word
Word ÷ word → word
:DM ÷ :DM → :DM
Word + word → word
39.30
90.80
45.50
99.00
45.50
99.00
155.90
209.50
166.10
219.70
58.70
93.50
47.30
82.20
54.80
2.40 ms
ADDL(54)
SUBL(55)
MULL(56)
DIVL(57)
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
:DM + :DM → :DM
Word – word → word
:DM – :DM → :DM
Word x word → word
:DM x :DM → :DM
Word ÷ word → word
:DM ÷ :DM → :DM
When converting words to words
When converting :DM to :DM
When converting words to words
When converting :DM to :DM
When transferring 1 word
BINL(58)
BCDL(59)
XFER(70)
1.125
1.125
1.5
When transferring 1,024 words using
:DM
When transferring 6,143 words using
13.99 ms
:DM
BSET(71)
ROOT(72)
When setting a constant to 1 word
37.70
26.20
1.5
When setting :DM ms to 1,024 words
using :DM
When setting :DM ms to 6,144 words
using :DM
95.80
When taking root of word and placing in a 68.60
word
1.125
When taking root of 99,999,999 in :DM
137.80
and placing in :DM
XCHG(73)
SLD(74)
Between words
33.50
1.125
1.125
Between :DM
68.50
When shifting 1 word
34.00
When shifting 1,024 DM words using :DM
When shifting 6,144 DM words using :DM
4.35 ms
25.93 ms
34.00
SRD(75)
When shifting 1 word
1.125
1.5
When shifting 1,024 DM words using :DM
When shifting 6,144 DM words using :DM
4.35 ms
26.01 ms
86.80
MLPX(76)
When decoding word to word
When decoding :DM to :DM
178.20
328
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruction Execution Times
Instruction
Conditions
ON execution time (µs)
48.90
OFF execution time (µs)
1.5
DMPX(77)
When encoding a word to a word
When encoding :DM to :DM
When decoding a word to a word
When decoding 2 digits :DM to :DM
When decoding 4 digits :DM to :DM
Word ÷ word → word (equals 0)
Word ÷ word → word (doesn’t equal 0)
:DM ÷ :DM → :DM
185.90
53.20
SDEC(78)
1.5
1.5
113.60
126.00
118.20
357.20
409.20
49.00
FDIV(79)
DIST(80)
Constant → (word + (word))
:DM → (:DM + (:DM))
1.5
1.5
1.5
106.70
52.90
COLL(81)
MOVB (82)
(Word + (word)) → word
(:DM + (:DM)) → :DM
113.50
38.60
When transferring a constant to a word
When transferring word to a word
When transferring :DM to :DM
When transferring a constant to a word
When transferring word to a word
When transferring :DM to :DM
When shifting 1 word
45.30
97.60
MOVD(83)
SFTR(84)
TCMP(85)
34.00
1.5
1.5
1.5
41.00
97.60
48.40
When shifting 1,024 :DM using :DM
When shifting 6,144 :DM using :DM
1.92 ms
11.8 ms
Comparing to words in a designated table 69.10
Comparing to words in a designated table 71.50
Comparing :DM → :DM-designated table
Between words
Between :DM
1-word transmit
1000-word transmit
---
123.50
56.90
133.50
563
ASC(86)
1.5
SEND(90)
3.75
752
SBS(91)
SBN(92)
RET(93)
WDT(94)
IORF(97)
37.6
2.25
---
---
---
---
45.6
13.7
0.75
1.125
---
17.60
130.70
2.27 ms
559
1-word refresh
30-word refresh
1-word refresh
RECV(98)
MCRO(99)
ASFT(––)
3.75
1.5
1000-word refresh
Designating a word parameter
Designating a :DM parameter
When resetting 1 word
764
91.00
125.80
43.60
50.30
68.80
31.80
51.20
104.30
159.30
104.30
159.30
1.5
Default code: (17) When shifting 1 word using :DM
When shifting 10 word using :DM
SCAN(––)
Constant for SV
1.5
1.5
1.5
Default code: (18) :DM for SV
MCMP(––)
Comparing 2 words, result word
Default code: (19) Comparing 2 :DM, result :DM
LMSG(––)
Word for SV
Default code: (47) :DM for SV
329
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruction Execution Times
Instruction
Conditions
ON execution time (µs)
OFF execution time (µs)
TERM(––)
---
16.40
1.5
Default code: (48)
CMPL(––)
When comparing words to words
51.40
85.90
33.70
74.20
45.50
241.90
102.90
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Default code: (60) When comparing :DM to :DM
MPRF(––) 1 Unit
Default code: (61) 10 Units
XFRB(––)
Sending 1 bit from word to word
Default code: (62) Sending FF bits from :DM to :DM
LINE(––)
When transferring from words to a
Default code: (63) constant
When transferring from words to a word
106.40
293.80
115.20
When transferring :DM to :DM
COLM(––)
When transferring from a constant to
1.5
Default code: (64) words
When transferring from a word to words
118.70
303.10
78.50
When transferring :DM to :DM
SEC(––)
DM to DM
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Default code: (65) :DM to :DM
HMS(––) DM to DM
Default code: (66) :DM to :DM
BCNT(––) Constant for SV
Default code: (67) :DM for SV
112.90
80.00
114.50
69.56
37.52 ms
105.00
BCMP(––)
Comparing constant to word-designated
Default code: (68) table
To a word after comparing with a word
107.40
166.50
43.90
Comparing :DM → :DM-designated table
APR(––)
SIN designation
1.5
Default code: (69) :DM for SV
740.70
43.50
TTIM(––)
Setting to a constant
Constant input OFF: 36.9
Default code: (87)
R:
38.4
36.8
36.8
IL:
JPM:
Setting to :DM
81.70
35.40
Constant input OFF: 75.1
R:
76.6
75.0
75.1
IL:
JPM:
1.5
ZCP(––)
Default code: (88)
Comparing a constant to a word
Comparing a word to a word
Comparing :DM to a :DM
Word for SV
38.00
89.70
INT(––)
21.70 to 47.40
21.70 to 64.60
63.10
1.5
Default code: (89) :DM for SV
TKY(––)
RXD(––)
TXD(––)
7SEG(––)
Input to DM
1.5
Input to :DM
97.90
When designating a word
When designating :DM
When designating a word
When designating :DM
Word-designated 4 digits
76.50
1.5
128.50
65.30
1.5
125.30
49.10 to 55.40
21.70
330
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruction Execution Times
Instruction
Conditions
ON execution time (µs)
66.60 to 72.80
56.70 to 64.80
74.20 to 82.30
121.00 to 147.50
170.50 to 228.80
78.50
OFF execution time (µs)
:DM-designated 4 digits
Word-designated 8 digits
:DM-designated 8 digits
Word designation, code output
:DM designation, message output
Constant for SV
FPD(––)
17.30
1.5
SRCH(––)
:DM for SV
2.11 ms
12.10 ms
57.20
:DM for SV
MAX(––)
MIN(––)
SUM(––)
FCS(––)
HEX(––)
AVG(––)
PID(––)
DM search
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
19.7
1.5
1.5
:DM search
2.05 ms
57.20
DM search
:DM search
2.05 ms
60.10
DM add
:DM add
1.80 ms
52.90
Add a word → word
Add 999 words → :DM
DM conversion
1.41 ms
66.70
:DM conversion
169.90
Average of an operation
Average of 64 operations
When designating a word
When designating :DM
Constant for SV
61.40
223.70
83.00
138.00
XDMR(––)
74.20
Word for SV
2.32 ms
6.89 ms
54.60 to 63.60
72.00 to 81.20
72.20
:DM for SV
MTR(––)
ADBL(––)
SBBL(––)
MBS(––)
Input to DM
21.7
1.5
1.5
1.5
Input to :DM
DM + DM → DM
:DM + :DM → :DM
DM – DM → DM
123.30
71.70
:DM – :DM → :DM
Constant x word → word
DM x DM → DM
123.30
50.20
52.80
:DM x :DM → :DM
Constant ÷ word → word
DM ÷ DM → DM
104.30
DBS(––)
51.20
1.5
53.70
:DM ÷ :DM → :DM
DM x DM → DM
106.20
MBSL(––)
DBSL(––)
CPS(––)
81.90
1.5
1.5
1.5
:DM x :DM → :DM
DM ÷ DM → DM
133.50
90.70
:DM ÷ :DM → :DM
When comparing two constants
When comparing DM to DM
When comparing DM to :DM
When comparing two DM
When comparing two :DM
143.70
34.20
29.70
64.80
CPSL(––)
50.90
1.5
86.10
331
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruction Execution Times
Instruction
Conditions
ON execution time (µs)
OFF execution time (µs)
NEG(––)
When converting a constant to a word
When converting a word to a word
When converting :DM to :DM
When converting a word to a word
When converting :DM to :DM
When comparing two words
When comparing two :DM
Word for SV
34.90
37.50
72.10
47.00
81.90
71.90
123.10
98.20
150.00
55.7
1.5
NEGL(––)
ZCPL(––)
SCL(––)
1.5
1.5
1.5
:DM for SV
HKY(––)
DSW(––)
When designating a word
When designating :DM
DM CS output
21.7
21.1
72.9
60.20
61.00
78.80
77.70
78.40
94.20
DM RD output
DM data retrieval
:DM CS output
:DM RD output
:DM data retrieval
332
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time
6-4 I/O Response Time
The I/O response time is the time it takes for the PC to output a control signal
after it has received an input signal. The time it takes to respond depends on the
cycle time and when the CPU receives the input signal relative to the input re-
fresh period.
The minimum and maximum I/O response time calculations described below
are for where IR 00000 is the input bit that receives the signal and IR 00200 is the
output bit corresponding to the desired output point.
00000
00200
6-4-1 Basic Systems
Minimum I/O Response
Time
The PC responds most quickly when it receives an input signal just prior to the
I/O refresh period in the cycle. Once the input bit corresponding to the signal has
been turned ON, the program will have to be executed once to turn ON the out-
put bit for the desired output signal and then the I/O refresh operation would
have to be repeated to refresh the output bit. The I/O response time in this case
is thus found by adding the input ON-delay time, the cycle time, and the output
ON-delay time. This situation is illustrated below.
Cycle time
Cycle time
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Cycle
I/O refresh
Input
signal
CPU reads
input signal
Input
ON delay
Output ON delay
Output
signal
I/O response time
Minimum I/O response time =
Input ON delay + Cycle time + I/O refresh time + Output ON delay
333
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time
Maximum I/O Response
Time
The PC takes longest to respond when it receives the input signal just after the
I/O refresh phase of the cycle. In this case the CPU does not recognize the input
signal until the end of the next cycle. The maximum response time is thus one
cycle longer than the minimum I/O response time, except that the I/O refresh
time would not need to be added in because the input comes just after it rather
than before it.
Cycle time
Cycle time
Cycle time
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Cycle
I/O refresh
Input
signal
CPU reads
input signal
Input
ON
delay
Output
ON delay
Output
signal
I/O response time
Maximum I/O response time =
Input ON delay + (Cycle time x 2) + Output ON delay
Calculation Example
The data in the following table would produce the minimum and maximum cycle
times shown calculated below.
Item
Input ON-delay
Output ON-delay
Cycle time
Time
1.5 ms
15 ms
20 ms
Minimum I/O response time = 1.5 + 20 + 15 = 36.5 ms
Maximum I/O response time = 1.5 + (20 x 2) +15 = 56.5 ms
Note In this example the I/O refresh time is negligible has not been included in the
minimum I/O response time.
6-4-2 Remote I/O Systems
With C200HS Remote I/O Systems, only the cycle time of the PC needs to be
considered in computing the I/O response times as long as the remote I/O trans-
mission time is negligible and smaller than the cycle time. The cycle time, how-
ever, is increased by the presence of the Remote I/O System.
The processing that determines and the methods for calculating maximum and
minimum response times from input to output are provided in this section. Calcu-
lations assume that both the input and the output are located on Slave Racks in a
Remote I/O System, but the calculations are the same for I/O points on Optical
I/O Units, I/O Link Units, I/O Terminals, etc.
Output on
Input on
Slave Rack
Slave Rack
X
Although more precise equations are possible if required, equations used for the
following calculations do not consider fractions of a scan.
334
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time
In looking at the following timing charts, it is important to remember the se-
quence in which processing occurs during the PC scan, particular that inputs will
not produce programmed actions until the program has been executed.
When calculating the response times involving inputs and outputs from another
CPU connected by an I/O Link Unit, the cycle time of the controlling CPU and the
cycle time of the PC to which the I/O Link Unit is mounted must both be consid-
ered.
Caution Noise may increase I/O delays.
!
Remote I/O Transmission
Times
The remote I/O transmission time is computed as follows:
TRM = Total Slave transmission time for one Master
=
=
=
ΣTRT + TTT
TRT
Transmission time for each Slave
1.4 ms + (0.2 ms x n)
Where n = number of I/O words on the Slave Rack
Optical I/O Unit/I/O Terminal transmission time
2 ms x m
TTT
=
=
Where m = number of Optical I/O Units/I/O Terminals
Minimum I/O Response
Time
The minimum response time occurs when all signals are processed as soon as
they are received. Here, three scans are required so that the program is
executed, as shown in the following diagram.
Time = Input ON delay + cycle time x 3 + output ON delay
Cycle time
C200HS
CPU
Program execution
Transfer to CPU
Master
Slave
Input
Transfer to Master
Slave I/O refresh
Output
Maximum I/O Response
Time
The maximum response time occurs when the input just misses the program ex-
ecution portion of the scan, meaning that processing must wait for the next trans-
mission and then the next (i.e., the fourth) scan.
Time = Input ON delay + cycle time x 4 + output ON delay
Note Use the maximum cycle time output to AR 26 in computing the maximum I/O re-
sponse time.
Cycle time
C200HS
CPU
Program execution
Transfer to CPU
Master
Slave
Input
Slave I/O refresh
Transfer to Master
Output
335
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time
Example Calculations
Calculations would be as shown below for an input ON delay of 1.5 ms, an out-
put ON delay of 15 ms, and a cycle time of 20 ms.
Minimum I/O Response Time
Time = 1.5 ms + (20 ms x 3) + 15 ms = 76.5 ms
Maximum I/O Response Time
Time = 1.5 ms + (20 ms x 4) + 15 ms = 96.5 ms
Note 1. The cycle time may be less than or equal to the remote I/O transmission time
when there are Special I/O Units on Slave Racks. If this is the case, there
may be cycles when I/O is not refreshed between the Master and the
C200HS CPU.
2. Refreshing is performed for Masters only once per cycle, and then only after
confirming completion of the remote cycle.
3. The short duration of ON/OFF status produced by differentiated instructions
can cause inaccurate signals when dealing with Remote I/O Systems un-
less appropriate programming steps are taken.
6-4-3 Host Link Systems
The following diagram illustrates the processing that takes place when an input
on one PC is transferred through the Host Link System to turn ON an output on
another PC. Refer to Host Link System documentation for further details.
Output on #32
X
Input on #0
Command/response for Unit # 0
Command/response for Unit # 31
Command
Command
Response
Host computer
Response
Host computer
processing time
Buffer for Host
Link Unit # 0
CPU reads
input signal
Cycle time
I/O refresh
PC for Host
Link Unit # 0
CPU writes
output signal
Host link service
Buffer for Host
Link Unit # 31
Cycle time
PC for Host
Link Unit # 31
I/O refresh
Host link service
Input
signal
Input ON delay
Output ON delay
Output
signal
I/O response time
The equations used to calculate the minimum and maximum cycle times are giv-
en below. The number of cycles required for each PC depends on the amount of
data being read/written.
Minimum response time =
Maximum response time =
Input ON delay + Command transmission time + (Cycle time of PC for Unit #0 x 3) + Response transmis-
sion time + Host computer processing time + Command transmission time + (Cycle time of PC for Unit #31
x 3) + Output ON delay
Input ON delay + Command transmission time + (Cycle time of PC for Unit #0 x 10) + Response transmis-
sion time + Host computer processing time + Command transmission time + (Cycle time of PC for Unit #31
x 10) + Output ON delay
336
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time
6-4-4 PC Link Systems
The processing that determines and the methods for calculating maximum and
minimum response times from input to output are provided in this subsection.
The following System and I/O program steps will be used in all examples below.
This System contains eight PC Link Units.
In looking at the following timing charts, it is important to remember the se-
quence processing occurs during the PC scan, particular that inputs will not pro-
duce programmed-actions until the program has been execution.
PC Link Unit
PC
PC Link Unit
PC
Unit 0
Unit 7
Output on PC
of Unit 7
Input on PC
of Unit 0
X
LR
bit
Input
Output
X
Input
LR XXXX
LR XXXX
Output
X
Caution Noise may increase I/O delays.
!
PC Link Conditions
The PC Link System used in this example consists of the following:
• No. of PCs linked:
• No. of LR points linked: 128 per PC
8
• Maximum PC:
8
• LR points used:
1,024
Minimum Response Time
The following illustrates the data flow that will produce the minimum response
time, i.e., the time that results when all signals and data transmissions are pro-
cessed as soon as they occur.
Program executed.
I/O refresh
Cycle time
PC with
Unit 0
Minimum transmission time
Buffer in Unit 0
PC Link Unit trans-
missions
I/O refresh
Buffer in Unit 7
Program
executed.
PC with
Unit 7
Cycle time
Input
Output
The equation for minimum I/O response time is thus as follows:
Response time = Input ON delay + Cycle time of PC of Unit 0 + Minimum trans-
mission time + (Cycle time of PC of Unit 7 x 2) + Output ON
delay
337
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time
Inserting the following values into this equation produces a minimum I/O re-
sponse time of 149.3 ms.
Input ON delay:
1.5 ms
15 ms
20 ms
50 ms
Output ON delay:
Cycle time for PC of Unit 0:
Cycle time for PC of Unit 7:
Maximum Response Time
The following diagram illustrates the data flow that will produce the maximum
response time. Delays occur because signals or data is received just after they
would be processed or because data is sent during processing. In either case,
processing must wait until the next scan/polling cycle.
First output to the buffer in the polling unit is delayed by the setting of the number
of LR bits to be refreshed each scan. A similar delay is present when the LR data
reaches Unit 7. The polling delay is the result of the LR data in its PC being up-
dated immediately after the previous was sent to the buffer in the PC Link Unit,
cause a delay until the next polling cycle. One more polling cycle is then required
before the data reaches the buffer in PC Link Unit 7.
I/O refresh
Cycle time
PC with
Unit 0
PC Link
polling time
Buffer in Unit 0
Polling delay
Induction sequence
processing time
PC Link Unit
transmissions
Maximum
transmission
time
Buffer in Unit 7
PC with
Unit 7
Cycle time
Input
Output
The equation for maximum I/O response time is thus as follows:
Response time = Input ON delay + [Cycle time of PC of Unit 0 x (Number of LR
transfer bits ÷ I/O refresh bits)] + α + (PC Link polling time +
Induction sequence processing time) + {Cycle time of PC of
Unit 7 x [(Number of LR transfer bits ÷ I/O refresh bits) x 2 + 1]}
+ β + Output ON delay
If cycle time of PC of Unit 0 > PC Link polling time, α = cycle time of PC of Unit 0. If
cycle time of PC of Unit 0 < PC Link polling time, α = PC Link polling time.
If cycle time of PC of Unit 7 > PC Link polling time, β = cycle time of PC of Unit 7. If
cycle time of PC of Unit 7 < PC Link polling time, β = PC Link polling time.
Inserting the following values into this equation produces a maximum I/O re-
sponse time of 661.3 ms.
Input ON delay:
1.5 ms
Output ON delay:
15 ms
Cycle time for PC of Unit 0:
Cycle time for PC of Unit 7:
PC Link polling time:
20 ms
50 ms
2.8 ms x 8 PCs + 10 ms = 32.4 ms
338
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time
Induction sequence processing: 15 ms x (8 PCs – 8 PCs) = 0 ms
I/O refresh bits for Unit 0
I/O refresh bits for Unit 7
256
256
Reducing Response Time
IORF(97) can be used in programming to shorten the I/O response time greater
than is possible by setting a high number of refresh bits. (Remember, increasing
the number of refresh bits set on the back-panel LED shortens response time,
but increases the cycle time of the PC.)
The following calculations for the maximum cycle time use the same example
System configuration as that used in 5–2 Response Times. In programming the
PCs for PC Link Units #0 and #7, IORF(97) is executed during every PC scan for
the PC Link Units. The basic equation for the maximum I/O response time is as
follows:
Response time = Input ON delay + [Cycle time of PC of Unit 0 x (Number of LR
transfer bits ÷ Number of I/O refresh bits ÷ 2)] + α + PC Link
polling time + Induction sequence processing time + {Cycle
time of PC of Unit 7 x [(Number of LR transfer bits ÷ Number of
I/O refresh bits ÷ 2) x 2 + 1]} + β + Output ON delay
If cycle time of PC of Unit 0 > PC Link polling time, α = cycle time of PC of Unit 0. If
cycle time of PC of Unit 0 < PC Link polling time, α = PC Link polling time.
If cycle time of PC of Unit 7 > PC Link polling time, β = cycle time of PC of Unit 7. If
cycle time of PC of Unit 7 < PC Link polling time, β = PC Link polling time.
The required data from the example System configuration is as follows:
Input ON delay
1.5 ms
15 ms
Output ON delay
Cycle time of PC of Unit 0
20 ms + 5.7 ms = 25.7
(5.7 ms required for IORF execution)
Cycle time of PC of Unit 7
50 ms + 5.7 ms = 55.7
(5.7 ms required for IORF execution)
Number of PC Link Units
Number of LR bits
8
1,024
Number of refresh bits for Unit 0
Number of refresh bits for Unit 7
PC Link polling time
256
256
2.8 ms x 8 PCs + 10 ms = 32.4 ms
Induction sequence processing time
15 ms x (8 PCs – 8 PCs) = 0 ms
Placing these values into the equation produces a maximum I/O response time
of 466.9 ms, approximately 200 ms shorter than when IORF is not used.
6-4-5 One-to-one Link I/O Response Time
When two C200HSs are linked one-to-one, the I/O response time is the time re-
quired for an input executed at one of the C200HSs to be output to the other
C200HS by means of one-to-one link communications.
One-to-one link communications are carried out reciprocally between the mas-
ter and the slave. The respective transmission times are as shown below, de-
pending on the number of LR words used.
Number of words used
64 words (LR 00 to LR 63)
Transmission time
39 ms
20 ms
10 ms
32 words (LR 00 to LR 31)
16 words (LR 00 to LR 15)
339
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time
The minimum and maximum I/O response times are shown here, using as an
example the following instructions executed at the master and the slave. In this
example, communications proceed from the master to the slave.
Output (LR)
Input
(LR)
Output
Input
The following conditions are taken as examples for calculating the I/O response
times.
Input ON delay:
Master cycle time:
Slave cycle time:
Output ON delay:
8 ms
10 ms
14 ms
10 ms
Number of LR words: 64 words
Minimum I/O Response Time The C200HS responds most quickly under the following circumstances:
1, 2, 3...
1. The C200HS receives an input signal just prior to the input refresh phase of
the cycle.
2. The master to slave transmission begins immediately.
3. The slave executes communications servicing immediately after comple-
tion of communications.
Input
point
I/O refresh
Overseeing, communica-
tions, etc.
Input ON delay
Input
bit
Master
Cycle time
Instruction
CPU
processing
Instruction
execution
execution
One-to-one link
communications
Master to
Slave
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
CPU
processing
Slave
Output ON
delay
Output point
The minimum I/O response time is as follows:
Input ON delay:
8 ms
Master cycle time:
Transmission time:
Slave cycle time:
Output ON delay:
10 ms
39 ms
15 ms
10 ms
+
Minimum I/O response time:
82 ms
Maximum I/O Response Time The C200HS takes the longest to respond under the following circumstances:
1, 2, 3...
1. The C200HS receives an input signal just after the input refresh phase of the
cycle.
2. The master to slave transmission does not begin immediately.
340
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time
3. Communications are completed just after the slave executes communica-
tions servicing.
I/O refresh
Input
point
Input ON delay
Overseeing, communica-
tions, etc.
Input
bit
Master
Cycle time
CPU
processing
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Master to
Slave
Slave to
Master
Master to
Slave
One-to-one link
communications
CPU
processing
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Slave
Output ON
delay
Output point
The maximum I/O response time is as follows:
Input ON delay:
8 ms
Master cycle time:
Transmission time:
Slave cycle time:
Output ON delay:
10 ms ꢁ 2
39 ms ꢁ 3
15 ms ꢁ 2
10 ms
+
Maximum I/O response time:
185 ms
6-4-6 Interrupt Response Times
The response time from the time an interrupt input is received until the interrupt
subroutine execution has been completed is described next.
Input Interrupts
External interrupt input signal
t1
Internal interrupt signal
t2
Interrupt subroutine execution
t1 = ON delay of Interrupt Input Unit
t2 = Software interrupt response time
Total interrupt response time = t1 + t2
The ON delay of Interrupt Input Unit is 0.2 ms or less.
The software interrupt response time depends on the interrupt response param-
eter setting in DM 6620 of the PC Setup. If the DM 6620 is set for the C200H-
compatible mode (0000), the software interrupt response time is less than
10 ms. If the DM 6620 is set for the C200HS mode (1xxx), the software interrupt
response time is less than 1 ms. The total interrupt response time is thus as
shown in the following table.
Interrupt response setting
Total interrupt response time
C200H-compatible mode
0.2 ms + (Total of following: Special I/O
processing time, Remote I/O processing time,
Host Link servicing time, instruction execution)
C200HS mode
1.2 ms or less
341
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time
Scheduled Interrupts
Scheduled in-
terrupt interval
Hardware time clock
Scheduled interrupt
subroutine execution
t3
t3
t3
t3
t3 = Software interrupt response time
Total interrupt response time = t3 (software interrupt response time)
The software interrupt response time depends on the interrupt response param-
eter setting in DM 6620 of the PC Setup. If the DM 6620 is set for the C200H-
compatible mode (0000), the software interrupt response time is less than
10 ms. If the DM 6620 is set for the C200HS mode (1xxx), the software interrupt
response time is less than 1 ms. The total interrupt response time is thus as
shown in the following table.
Interrupt response setting
Total interrupt response time
C200H-compatible mode
Total of following: Special I/O processing time,
Remote I/O processing time, Host Link
servicing time, instruction execution
C200HS mode
1.0 ms or less
Note 1. If there is any instruction in the program that requires longer than 10 ms to
execute when using the C200H-compatible mode, the total interrupt re-
sponse time will be equal to the execution time of the instruction requiring
longer than 10 ms.
2. The above calculations assume that only one interrupt requires executed at
any one time. If multiple interrupts are generated at the same time, execu-
tion of all but the first interrupt will go on standby, increasing the response
times given above.
3. If SYSMAC NET/SYSMAC LINK Units are being serviced when an interrupt
occurs, the interrupt will not be processed until SYSMAC NET/SYSMAC
LINK Unit servicing has been completed. The response times in this case
will be as shown in the following table and will not be affected by the interrupt
response setting.
Interrupt
Total interrupt response time
Input interrupt
10.2 ms max.
Scheduled interrupt 10 ms max.
Interrupt Processing Time
The processing time from receiving an interrupt input, through program execu-
tion, and until a return is made to the original program location is described next.
The limit of the count frequency resulting from using the scheduled interrupt pe-
riod or input interrupts as the count input is determined by the interrupt proces-
sing time.
Interrupt processing time =
Total interrupt response time + Interrupt program execution time +
Interrupt return time
The interrupt program execution time is determined by the content of the inter-
rupt subroutine. This time is negligible f only SBN(92) and RET(93) are
executed.
The interrupt return time is 0.04 ms.
342
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time
Note 1. If there are several elements that can cause interrupts or if the interrupt peri-
od is shorted than the average interrupt processing time, the interrupt sub-
routine will be executed and the main program will not be executed. This will
cause the cycle monitoring time to be exceeded and an FALS 9F error will be
generated, stopping PC operation.
2. The maximum interrupt program execution time is contained in SR 262 and
SR 263.
Interrupt Input Pulse Width
The pulse width input to Interrupt Input Units must be set to within the conditions
shown in the following diagram.
0.5 ms min.
0.2 ms min.
ON time:
OFF time:
0.2 ms min.
0.5 ms min.
343
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 7
Program Monitoring and Execution
This section provides the procedures for monitoring and controlling the PC through a Programming Console. Refer to the LSS
Operation Manual for LSS procedures if you are using a computer running LSS.
Forced Set/Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-word Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Binary Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
345
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
7-1 Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
The simplest form of operation monitoring is to display the address whose oper-
and bit status is to be monitored using the Program Read or one of the search
operations. As long as the operation is performed in RUN or MONITOR mode,
the status of any bit displayed will be indicated.
This section provides other procedures for monitoring data as well as proce-
dures for modifying data that already exists in a data area. Data that can be
modified includes the PV (present value) and SV (set value) for any timer or
counter.
All monitor operations in this section can be performed in RUN, MONITOR, or
PROGRAM mode and can be cancelled by pressing CLR.
All data modification operations except for timer/counter SV changes are per-
formed after first performing one of the monitor operations. Data modification is
possible in either MONITOR or PROGRAM mode, but cannot be performed in
RUN mode.
7-1-1
Bit/Word Monitor
The status of any bit or word in any data area can be monitored using the follow-
ing operation. Although the operation is possible in any mode, ON/OFF status
displays will be provided for bits in MONITOR or RUN mode only.
The Bit/Digit Monitor operation can be entered either from a cleared display by
designating the first bit or word to be monitored or it can be entered from any
address in the program by displaying the bit or word address whose status is to
be monitored and pressing MONTR.
When a bit is monitored, it’s ON/OFF status will be displayed (in MONITOR or
RUN mode); when a word address is designated other than a timer or counter,
the digit contents of the word will be displayed; and when a timer or counter num-
ber is designated, the PV of the timer will be displayed and a small box will ap-
pear if the completion flag of a timer or counter is ON. When multiple words are
monitored, a caret will appear under the leftmost digit of the address designation
to help distinguish between different addresses. The status of TR bits and SR
flags (e.g., the arithmetic flags), cleared when END(01) is executed, cannot be
monitored.
Up to six memory addresses, either bits, words, or a combination of both, can be
monitored at once, although only three of these are displayed at any one time. To
monitor more than one address, return to the start of the procedure and continue
designating addresses. Monitoring of all designated addresses will be main-
tained unless more than six addresses are designated. If more than six ad-
dresses are designated, the leftmost address of those being monitored will be
cancelled.
To display addresses that are being monitored but are not presently on the Pro-
gramming Console display, press MONTR without designating another ad-
dress. The addresses being monitored will be shifted to the right. As MONTR is
pressed, the addresses being monitored will continue shifting to the right until
the rightmost address is shifted back onto the display from the left.
During a monitor operation the up and down keys can be pressed to increment
and decrement the leftmost address on the display and CLR can be pressed to
cancel monitoring the leftmost address on the display. If the last address is can-
celled, the monitor operation will be cancelled. The monitor operation can also
be cancelled regardless of the number of addresses being monitored by press-
ing SHIFT and then CLR.
LD and OUT can be used only to designate the first address to be displayed; they
cannot be used when an address is already being monitored.
346
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
Key Sequence
Clears leftmost
address
Cancels monitor
operation
Examples
The following examples show various applications of this monitor operation.
Program Read then Monitor
00100
00100READ
TIM
000
T000
1234
T001
o0000
Indicates Completion flag is ON
Monitor operation
is cancelled
00100
TIM
001
347
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
Bit Monitor
00000
00000
LD
00001
00001
^ ON
00000
CONT
00001
Note The status of TR bits SR flags SR 25503 to 25507 (e.g., the arithmetic flags),
cleared when END(01) is executed, cannot be monitored.
Word Monitor
00000
00000
CHANNEL 000
00000
CHANNEL LR 01
cL01
FFFF
cL00
0000
348
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
+Multiple Address Monitoring
00000
00000
TIM
000
T000
0100
00000 T000
0100
00001 T000
0100
00001 T000
OFF 0100
D000000001 T000
^OFF 0100
D000000001 T000
10FF^ OFF 0100
T000D000000001
0100 10FF^ OFF
D000000001
10FF^ OFF
Cancels monitoring
of leftmost address
00001
^ OFF
00000
CONT
00001
00000
CHANNEL DM 0000
Monitor operation
is cancelled
0000000001
S ONR OFF
Indicates Force Reset
in operation.
Indicates Force Set
in operation.
7-1-2
Forced Set/Reset
When the Bit/Digit Monitor operation is being performed and a bit, timer, or
counter address is leftmost on the display, PLAY/SET can be pressed to turn ON
the bit, start the timer, or increment the counter and REC/RESET can be pressed
to turn OFF the bit or reset the timer or counter. Timers will not operate in PRO-
GRAM mode. SR bits cannot be turned ON and OFF with this operation.
349
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
Bit status will remain ON or OFF only as long as the key is held down; the original
status will return as soon as the key is released. If a timer is started, the comple-
tion flag for it will be turned ON when SV has been reached.
SHIFT and PLAY/SET or SHIFT and REC/RESET can be pressed to maintain
the status of the bit after the key is released. The bit will not return to its original
status until the NOT key is pressed, or one of the following conditions is met.
1, 2, 3...
1. The Force Status Clear operation is performed.
2. The PC mode is changed. (See note.)
3. Operation stops due to a fatal error or power interruption.
4. The I/O Table Registration operation is performed.
This operation can be used in MONITOR mode to check wiring of outputs from
the PC prior to actual program execution. This operation cannot be used in RUN
mode.
Note The forced set/reset bit status will be maintained when switching from PRO-
GRAM to MONITOR mode if the Force Status Hold Bit is ON and DM 6601 of the
tails.
Key Sequence
Example
The following example shows how either bits or timers can be controlled with the
Force Set/Reset operation. The displays shown below are for the following pro-
gram section.
00100
TIM 000
#0123
012.3 s
TIM 000
00500
Address Instruction
Data
00200
00201
LD
00100
000
TIM
#
0123
000
00202
00203
LD
TIM
OUT
00500
350
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
The following displays show what happens when TIM 000 is set with 00100 OFF
(i.e., 00500 is turned ON) and what happens when TIM 000 is reset with 00100
ON (i.e., timer starts operation, turning OFF 00500, which is turned back ON
when the timer has finished counting down the SV).
(This example is performed in MONITOR mode.)
0010000500
^ OFF^ OFF
Monitoring 00100 and 00500.
0010000500
= ON^ OFF
Force set bit status.
Indicates that force set/reset is in progress.
0010000500
Reset the force-set bit.
= OFF^ OFF
T0000010000500
^ OFF^ OFF
T0000010000500
Monitoring TIM 000.
0123^ OFF^ OFF
Force setting TIM 000
turns ON 00500.
T0000010000500
=0000^ OFF^ ON
T0000010000500
0123^ OFF^ OFF
TIM 000 returns to its original status
when PLAY/SET is released.
T0000010000500
o0000^ ON^ ON
Display with 0010 originally ON.
T0000010000500
=0123^ ON^ OFF
Timer starts timing, turning
00500 OFF.*
T0000010000500
0122^ ON^ OFF
When the time is up, 00500
goes ON again.
T0000010000500
o0000^ ON^ ON
Indicates that the time is up.
*Timing not done in PROGRAM mode.
7-1-3
Forced Set/Reset Cancel
This operation restores the status of all bits in the I/O, IR, TIM, CNT, HR, AR, or
LR areas which have been force set or reset. It can be performed in PROGRAM
or MONITOR mode.
Key Sequence
When the PLAY/SET and REC/RESET keys are pressed, a beeper will sound. If
you mistakenly press the wrong key, then press CLR and start again from the
beginning.
351
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
Example
The following example shows the displays that appear when Restore Status is
carried out normally.
00000
00000
00000FORCE RELE?
00000FORCE RELE
END
7-1-4
Hexadecimal/BCD Data Modification
When the Bit/Digit Monitor operation is being performed and a BCD or hexadeci-
mal value is leftmost on the display, CHG can be input to change the value. SR
words cannot be changed.
If a timer or counter is leftmost on the display, the PV will be displayed and will be
change SV. PV can be changed in MONITOR mode only when the timer or
counter is operating.
To change contents of the leftmost word address, press CHG, input the desired
value, and press WRITE
Key Sequence
Word currently
monitored on
left of display.
[ Data ]
352
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
Example
The following example shows the effects of changing the PV of a timer.
This example is in MONITOR mode
00000
00000
TIM
Monitor status of timer PV
that will be changed.
000
T000
0122
Timing
PRES VAL?
T000 0119 ????
PV decrementing
Timing
Timing
PRES VAL?
T000 0100 0200
PV changed. Timer/counter PVs
can be changed even when the
timer/counter is operating.
T000
0199
Timing
353
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
7-1-5
Hex/ASCII Display Change
This operation converts DM data displays from 4-digit hexadecimal data to AS-
CII and vice versa.
Key Sequence
Word currently
displayed.
Example
00000
00000
Monitor the desired DM word.
CH DM 0000
D0000
4412
D0000
”AB”
Press TR to change the display
to ASCII code.
D0000
4142
Press TR again to return the
display to hexadecimal.
354
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
7-1-6
4-digit Hex/Decimal Display Change
This operation converts data displays from normal or signed 4-digit hexadecimal
data to decimal and vice versa.
Decimal values from 0 to 65,535 are valid when inputting normal 4-digit hexade-
cimal data, and decimal values from –32,768 to +32,767 are valid when inputting
signed 4-digit hexadecimal data.
Key Sequence
Single word or
3-word monitor
currently displayed.
TR
[New data]
TR
Clear new input data.
Specifies positive
signed data.
(NOT switches between
normal and signed data.)
Specifies negative
signed data.
Example
cL01D000000001
CFC7 1234R OFF
Monitor the desired word.
(Leftmost word in 3-word monitor.)
cL01
-12345
Press SHIFT and TR to change the
display to signed decimal.
TR
cL01
53191
Press NOT to switch back and forth
between signed and normal data.
cL01
-12345
PRES VAL?
cL01-12345
Press CHG to change the content of the
displayed word.
PRES VAL?
cL01+12345
Press PLAY/SET to specify positive
signed data.
PRES VAL?
cL01+32767
Input the new value.
cL01
+32767
Press WRITE to enter the new data to
memory.
cL01D000000001
7FFF 1234R OFF
Press SHIFT and TR to change the
display back to hexadecimal.
TR
355
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
7-1-7
8-digit Hex/Decimal Display Change
This operation converts data displays from normal or signed, 4 or 8-digit hexa-
decimal data to decimal and vice versa.
Decimal values from 0 to 4,294,967,295 are valid when inputting normal 8-digit
hexadecimal data, and decimal values from –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
are valid when inputting signed 8-digit hexadecimal data.
Key Sequence
3-word monitor
TR
TR
[New data]
currently displayed.
Clear new input data.
Specifies positive
signed data.
(NOT switches between
normal and signed data.)
Specifies negative
signed data.
Example
cL01D000000001
8000 1234R OFF
Monitor the first of the desired words.
(Leftmost word in 3-word monitor.)
cL01
-32768
Press SHIFT and TR to change the
display to signed decimal.
TR
Press EXT to change the display to
8-digit signed decimal.
(In this case, LR 02 contains FFFE.)
cL02 cL01
-0000098304
cL02 cL01
4294868992
Press NOT to switch back and forth
between signed and normal data.
cL02 cL01
-0000098304
PRES VAL?
cL02-0000098304
Press CHG to change the contents of
the displayed words.
PRES VAL?
cL02+0000098304
Press PLAY/SET to specify positive
signed data.
PRES VAL?
cL02+1234567890
Input the new value.
(1234567890 in this case.)
[New data]
cL02 cL01
+1234567890
Press WRITE to enter the new data to
memory.
cL01D000000001
02D2 1234R OFF
Press SHIFT and TR to change the
display back to hexadecimal.
TR
Rightmost four digits
356
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
7-1-8
Differentiation Monitor
This operation can be used to monitor the up or down differentiation status of bits
in the IR, SR, AR, LR, HR, and TC areas. To monitor up or down differentiation
status, display the desired bit leftmost on the bit monitor display, and then press
SHIFT and the Up or Down Arrow Key.
A CLR entry changes the Differentiation Monitor operation back to a normal bit
monitor display.
Key Sequence
Bit monitor in progress
Example
L000000108H2315
OFF OFF ON
Monitor the desired bit so that it is
leftmost on the screen.
L000000108H2315
U@OFF OFF ON
Press SHIFT and Up Arrow to
specify up differentiation (U@).
(Press SHIFT and Down Arrow to
specify down differentiation (D@).
The buzzer will sound when up
(U@) or down (D@) differentiation is
detected.
The original bit monitor display will
return when differentiation
monitoring is completed.
L000000108H2315
OFF OFF ON
Press CLR to cancel differentiation
monitoring and return to the original
bit monitor display.
D0002
0123
357
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
7-1-9
3-word Monitor
To monitor three consecutive words together, specify the lowest numbered
word, press MONTR, and then press EXT to display the data contents of the
specified word and the two words that follow it.
A CLRentry changes the Three-word Monitor operation to a single-word display.
Key Sequence
Single-word monitor in progress
Example
00000
00000
CHANNEL DM 0000
Specify the first of the 3 words
you want to monitor.
D0000
89AB
D0002D0001D0000
0123 4567 89AB
Press the Up and Down Arrow
keys to change word addresses.
D0003D0002D0001
ABCD 0123 4567
D0004D0003D0002
EF00 ABCD 0123
D0005D0004D0003
1111 EF00 ABCD
D0004D0003D0002
EF00 ABCD 0123
D0002
0123
7-1-10 3-word Data Modification
This operation changes the contents of a word during the 3-Word Monitor opera-
tion. The blinking square indicates where the data can be changed. After the
new data value is keyed in, pressing WRITE causes the original data to be over-
written with the new data. If CLR is pressed before WRITE, the change operation
will be cancelled and the previous 3-word Monitor operation will resume.
This operation cannot be used to change SR 253 through SR 255. Only those
words displayed on the 3-word Monitor display can be changed.
Key Sequence
3 words currently
displayed
[ Data ]
358
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
Example
D0002D0001D0000
0123 4567 89AB
3-word Monitor
in progress.
D0002 3CH CHG?
=0123 4567 89AB
Stops in the middle
of monitoring.
D0002 3CH CHG?
0001 4567 89AB
Input new data.
D0002 3CH CHG?
0001=4567 89AB
D0002 3CH CHG?
0001=2345 89AB
D0002D0001D0000
0001 2345 89AB
D0002D0001D0000
0001 4567 89AB
Resumes previous
monitoring.
7-1-11 Binary Monitor
You can specify that the contents of a monitored word be displayed in binary by
pressing SHIFT and MONTR after the word address has been input. Words can
be successively monitored by using the up and down keys to increment and dec-
rement the displayed word address. To clear the binary display, press CLR.
Key Sequence
[Word]
Binary
monitor clear
All monitor
clear
359
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
Example
00000
00000
CHANNEL 000
c000 MONTR
0000000000001111
c001 MONTR
0000010101010100
00000
CHANNEL 001
00000
00000
CHANNEL DM 0000
D0000
FFFF
D0000 MONTR
1111111111111111
D0000
FFFF
00000
CHANNEL DM 0000
0000S0100R0110SR
Indicates Force Reset
in effect
Indicates Force Set
in effect
360
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
7-1-12 Binary Data Modification
This operation assigns a new 16-digit binary value to an IR, HR, AR, LR, or DM
word.
The cursor, which can be shifted to the left with the up key and to the right with the
down key, indicates the position of the bit that can be changed. After positioning
to the desired bit, a 0 or a 1 can then be entered as the new bit value. The bit can
also be Force Set or Force Reset by pressing SHIFT and either PLAY/SET or
REC/RESET. An S or R will then appear at that bit position. Pressing the NOT
key will clear the force status, S will change to 1, and R to o. After a bit value has
been changed, the blinking square will appear at the next position to the right of
the changed bit.
Key Sequence
Word currently
displayed in binary.
(Force Status Clear)
361
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
Example
00000
00000
CHANNEL 000
00000
CHANNEL 001
c001 MONTR
0000010101010101
c001 CHG?
=000010101010101
c001 CHG?
1=00010101010101
c001 CHG?
10=0010101010101
c001 CHG?
100=010101010101
c001 CHG?
100S=10101010101
c001 CHG?
100=010101010101
c001 CHG?
10=S010101010101
c001 CHG?
1=RS010101010101
c001 MONTR
10RS010101010101
IR bit 00115
IR bit 00100
7-1-13 Changing Timer/Counter SV
There are two ways to change the SV of a timer or counter. It can be done either
by inputting a new value; or by incrementing or decrementing the current SV.
Either method can be used only in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode. In MONI-
TOR mode, the SV can be changed while the program is being executed. Incre-
menting and decrementing the SV is possible only when the SV has been en-
tered as a constant.
To use either method, first display the address of the timer or counter whose SV
is to be changed, presses the down key, and then press CHG. The new value
can then be input numerically and WRITE pressed to change the SV or EXT can
be pressed followed by the up and down keys to increment and decrement the
current SV. When the SV is incremented and/or decremented, CLR can be
pressed once to change the SV to the incremented or decremented value but
remaining in the display that appeared when EXT was pressed or CLR can be
pressed twice to return to the original display with the new SV.
This operation can be used to change a SV from designation as a constant to a
word address designation and visa verse.
362
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
Key Sequence
Example
The following examples show inputting a new constant, changing from a con-
stant to an address, and incrementing to a new constant.
Inputting New SV and
Changing to Word
Designation
00000
00000
TIM
000
00201SRCH
TIM
000
00201 TIM DATA
#0123
00201 TIM DATA
T000 #0123 #????
00201 TIM DATA
T000 #0123 #0124
00201 TIM DATA
#0124
00201 DATA?
T000 #0123 c???
00201 DATA?
T000 #0123 c010
00201 TIM DATA
010
363
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
Incrementing and
Decrementing
00000
00000
TIM
000
00201SRCH
TIM
000
00201 TIM DATA
#0123
00201 TIM DATA
T000 #0123 #????
00201DATA ? U/D
T000 #0123 #0123
Current SV (during
change operation)
SV before the change
00201DATA ?
T000 #0123 #0122
00201DATA ?
T000 #0123 #0123
00201DATA ?
T000 #0123 #0124
00201DATA ?
T000 #0124 #????
00201 TIM DATA
#0124
Returns to original display
with new SV
364
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
7-1-14 Expansion Instruction Function Code Assignments
This operation is used to read or change the function codes assigned to expan-
sion instructions. There are 18 function codes that can be assigned to expansion
instructions: 17, 18, 19, 47, 48, 60 to 69, and 87 to 89. More than one function
code can be assigned to an expansion instruction.
Note Function Code Assignments can be read in any mode, but can be changed in
PROGRAM mode only.
Key Sequence
Example
00000
Press CLR to bring up the initial
display.
INST TBL READ
FUN17:ASFT
Press EXT to begin displaying function
code assignments.
INST TBL READ
FUN18:SRCH
Press the Up and Down Arrow keys to
scroll through the function code
assignments.
INST TBL READ
FUN17:ASFT
The Up Arrow key displays function
codes in ascending order:
17, 18, ... , 89, 17, 18, ...
The Down Arrow key displays function
codes in descending order:
17, 89, 88, ... 17, 89, ...
INST TBL READ
FUN18:SRCH
INST TBL CHG?
FUN18:SRCH→????
Press CHG to change the displayed
function code assignment.
INST TBL CHG?
FUN18:SRCH→MCMP
Press the Up and Down Arrow keys to
scroll through the instructions.
INST TBL CHG?
FUN18:SRCH→PID
INST TBL READ
FUN18:PID
Press WRITE to enter the change into
memory.
D0002
0123
Press CLR to return to the initial
display.
365
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
7-1-15 UM Area Allocation
This operation is used to allocate part of the UM Area for use as expansion DM. It
can be performed in PROGRAM mode only. Memory allocated to expansion DM
is deducted from the ladder program area.
The amount of memory available for the ladder program depends on the amount
of RAM in the CPU. About 15.2 KW of memory is available with the16-KW RAM
and about 31.2 KW is available with the 32-KW RAM.
This operation cannot be used to allocate UM to the I/O comment area. UM can
be allocated to the I/O comment area only with a host computer equipped with
LSS (V6 or higher).
Key Sequence
B 1
D 3
PLAY
Clear memory when
changing allocation
FUN
VER
CHG
CLR
[New data]
WRITE
9
7
SET
Example
00000
Clear memory completely if the UM Area
allocation will be changed.
The current UM Area allocation will be displayed.
“??” will be displayed if the allocation information
has been lost.
DM CM LAD
00 00 15.2
VER
UMAREA CHG?
INI DM SIZ:00KW
Press CHG to change the UM Area allocation.
Expansion DM can be set to 00, 01, 02, or 03 KW.
UMAREA CHG?
INI DM SIZ:02KW
UMAREA SET: CHG
????
Enter the password by pressing PLAY/SET and
9713.
UMAREA SET: CHG
9713
The new UM Area allocation will be displayed. UM
allocated to expansion DM is deducted from the
ladder program.
DM CM LAD
02 00 13.2
00000
Press CLR to return to the initial display.
366
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
7-1-16 Reading and Setting the Clock
This operation is used to read or set the CPU’s clock. The clock can be read in
any mode, but it can be set in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only.
The CPU will reject entries outside of the acceptable range, i.e., 01 to 12 for the
month, 01 to 31 for the day of the month, 00 to 06 for the day of the week, or 00 to
60 for the seconds, but it will not recognize non-existent dates, such as 2/31.
Example
00000
Press CLR to bring up the initial display.
TIM 93-01-06
14:25:57 FRI(5)
FUN
The display will monitor the current date and time.
TIM CHG?93-01-06
14:25:58 FRI(5)
Press CHG to change the date and/or time. The “9”
in “93” will blink, indicating that it can be changed.
TIM CHG?93-01-06
14:25:59 FRI(5)
Press the Up and Down Arrow keys to move the
cursor through the data and time settings. Input
new values to change settings if necessary.
TIM CHG?93-01-06
14:26:00 FRI(5)
TIM CHG?93-01-06
14:26:01 FRI(5)
In this case, a “0” was input to replace the “8”.
Press CLR to return to the initial display.
00000
7-1-17 Expansion Keyboard Mapping
This operation is used to control the ON/OFF status of bits SR 27700 through
SR 27909 by pressing keys on the Programming Console’s keyboard. The
C200HS also supports the C200H’s Keyboard Mapping operation, which con-
trols the status of bits in AR 22. These operations can be performed in any PC
mode, but the Programming Console must be in TERMINAL or expansion TER-
MINAL mode.
To enable expansion keyboard mapping, pin 6 of the CPU’s DIP switch and
AR 0709 must be ON and AR 0708 must be OFF.
Bits turned ON with this operation can be turned OFF by toggling AR 0708. Turn
AR 0709 OFF to stop expansion keyboard mapping and switch the Program-
ming Console from Expansion TERMINAL mode to CONSOLE mode.
TERMINAL Mode
The Programming Console can be put into TERMINAL mode by pressing CHG
or executing TERM(48) in the program. Pin 6 of the CPU’s DIP switch must be
OFF.
PROGRAM BZ
CONSOLE mode
<MESSAGE>
NO MESSAGE
Switch the Programming Console to TERMINAL
mode by pressing CHG or executing TERM(48).
PROGRAM BZ
Press CHG again to return to CONSOLE mode.
367
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
Expansion TERMINAL Mode The Programming Console can be put into Expansion TERMINAL mode by turn-
ing ON AR 0709. Pin 6 of the CPU’s DIP switch must be ON.
PROGRAM BZ
CONSOLE mode
<MESSAGE>
NO MESSAGE
Switch the Programming Console to Expansion
TERMINAL mode by turning AR 0709 ON.
PROGRAM BZ
Turn AR 0709 OFF to return to CONSOLE mode.
7-1-18 Keyboard Mapping
The C200HS supports the expansion keyboard mapping as well as normal key-
board mapping. Expansion keyboard mapping controls the status of the 41 bits
SR 27700 through SR 27909, while normal keyboard mapping controls only the
16 bits in AR 22. The status of these bits can be controlled by pressing the corre-
sponding Programming Console keys when the Programming Console is in
TERMINAL mode or expansion TERMINAL mode.
The following diagram shows how to switch the Programming Console between
CONSOLE mode (normal operating mode) and TERMINAL or expansion TER-
MINAL mode.
Press the CHG Key or
execute TERM(48).
Turn ON AR 0709.
TERMINAL mode
(DIP switch pin 6 OFF)
Expansion TERMINAL mode
(DIP switch pin 6 ON)
CONSOLE mode
Press the CHG key.
Turn OFF AR 0709
or turn OFF DIF switch pin 6.
TERMINAL Mode
The Programming Console can be put into TERMINAL mode by pressing CHG
or executing TERM(48) in the program. Pin 6 of the CPU’s DIP switch must be
OFF.
Press the CHG key again to return to CONSOLE mode.
When the Programming Console is in TERMINAL mode it can perform normal
keyboard mapping and display messages output by MSG(46) or LMSG(47).
With keyboard mapping, bits 00 to 15 of AR 22 will be turned ON when keys 0 to
F are pressed on the Programming Console’s keyboard. A bit will remain ON
after the Programming Console’s key is released.
All bits in AR 22 will be turned OFF when AR 0708 is turned ON. Keyboard map-
ping inputs are disabled when AR 0708 is ON.
In addition to the keyboard mapping function, TERMINAL mode allows mes-
sages output by MSG(46) and LMSG(47) to be displayed on the Programming
Console. These messages will be erased if the Programming Console is switch
back to CONSOLE mode.
Expansion TERMINAL Mode The Programming Console can be put into Expansion TERMINAL mode by turn-
ing ON AR 0709. Pin 6 of the CPU’s DIP switch must be ON.
Turn off AR 0709 or pin 6 of the CPU’s DIP switch to return to CONSOLE mode.
When the Programming Console is in TERMINAL mode it can perform expan-
sion keyboard mapping and display messages output by MSG(46) or
LMSG(47). With expansion keyboard mapping, bits SR 27700 through
SR 27909 will be turned ON when the corresponding key is pressed on the Pro-
gramming Console’s keyboard. A bit will remain ON after the Programming Con-
sole’s key is released.
368
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
All bits from SR 27700 through SR 27909 will be turned OFF when AR 0708 is
turned ON. Expansion keyboard mapping inputs are disabled when AR 0708 is
ON.
In addition to the keyboard mapping function, expansion TERMINAL mode al-
lows messages output by MSG(46) and LMSG(47) to be displayed on the Pro-
gramming Console. These messages will be erased if the Programming Con-
sole is switch back to CONSOLE mode.
The following diagram shows the correspondence between the position of Pro-
gramming Console keys and bits in the SR Area. Each key corresponds 1 to 1
with a bit. Shifted inputs are not recognized. Keys 0 to 15 correspond to bits
SR 27700 to SR 27715, keys 16 to 31 correspond to bits SR 27800 to SR 27815,
and keys 32 to 41 correspond to bits SR 27900 to SR 27909.
FUN key
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
16
22
28
34
40
11
17
23
29
35
41
12
18
24
30
36
13
19
25
31
37
14
20
26
32
38
15
21
27
33
39
The following table shows the correspondence between the actual Program-
ming Console keys and bits SR 27700 to SR 27909.
SR word
277
Bit
Corresponding key(s)
00
01
02
FUN
03
04
05
*1
*2
06
07
08
09
10
11
369
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
SR word
Bit
Corresponding key(s)
277
12
13
14
15
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
00
01
02
278
279
370
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Operation and Modifying Data
SR word
Bit
Corresponding key(s)
279
03
04
05
06
*3
07
08
09
VER
371
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 8
Communications
This section provides an overview of the communications features provided by the C200HS.
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NT Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
373
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameters for Host Link and RS-232C Communications
8-1 Introduction
The C200HS supports the following types of communications.
• Communications with Programming Devices (e.g., Programming Console,
LSS, or SSS.)
• Host Link communications with personal computers and other external de-
vices.
• RS-232C (no-protocol) communications with personal computers and other
external devices.
• One-to-one link communications with another C200HS CPU or a CQM1 CPU.
• NT link communications with Programmable Terminals (PTs) equipped with an
NT link interface.
This section describes the connection methods and application of all of these
different types of communications except for communications with Program-
ming Devices, which is described elsewhere in this manual.
Note 1. One-to-one link communications are possible only with CPUs that have an
RS-232C port. They are not possible with the C200HS-CPU01-E/03-E
2. Refer to documentation on the NT-series Interface Units for details on NT
link communications.
3. One-to-one link communications and NT link communications are not pos-
sible through the peripheral port.
8-2 Parameters for Host Link and RS-232C Communications
The parameters in the PC Setup described in this section are used both by Host
Link communications and RS-232C (no-protocol) communications. These pa-
rameters must be set in advance to enable communications.
Note 1. PC Setup parameters in DM 6645 to DM 6654 can be set under the PC Set-
up item on the Utility Menu.
2. The parameters set in the PC Setup will be ignored and the following com-
munications settings will be used if pin 5 on the C200HS CPU’s DIP switch is
turned ON.
Item
Communications mode
Unit no.
Setting
Host Link
00
Start bits
1
Data length
Stop bits
7
2
Parity
Even
9,600 bps
None
Baud rate
Transmission delay
Note The above settings apply to CPUs manufactured from July 1995 (lot number
**75 for July 1995). For CPUs manufactured before July 1995 (lot number **65
for June 1995), only 1 stop bit will be set and the baud rate will be 2,400 bps.
374
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameters for Host Link and RS-232C Communications
8-2-1 Standard Communications Parameters
The settings in DM 6645 and DM 6650 determine the main communications pa-
rameters, as shown in the following diagram.
The settings in bits 00 through 07 and bits 12 through 15 are valid only when pin
5 on the CPU’s DIP switch is OFF. Bits 08 though 11 are valid only in a PC set as
the master for a 1:1 link.
Bit
15
0
DM 6645: RS-232C port
DM 6650: Peripheral port
Communications mode
0: Host link
1: RS-232C
2: One-to-one link slave
3: One-to-one link master
4: NT link
Link words for one-to-one link
0: LR 00 to LR 63
1: LR 00 to LR 31
2: LR 00 to LR 16
Port settings
00: Standard communication parameters
01: According to setting in DM 6646 and DM 6651 (
(defaults: standard communications parameter and
Host Link mode)
The standard communications parameters are as shown in the following table.
Item
Setting
Start bits
1
Data length
Stop bits
Parity
7
2
Even
Baud rate
9,600 bps
Be sure to set the proper communications mode.
If the above parameters are acceptable, set the rightmost two digits (port set-
tings) to 00. To change the parameters, use the setting described next.
375
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameters for Host Link and RS-232C Communications
8-2-2 Specific Communications Parameters
The following settings are valid only when pin 5 on the CPU’s DIP switch is
turned OFF and DM 6645 and DM 6655 are set to specify using the settings in
words DM 6646 and DM 6656.
Be sure to set the communications parameters to the same settings for both
ends of the communications.
Bit
15
0
DM 6646: RS-232C port
DM 6651: Peripheral port
Transmission Frame Format (See table below.)
Baud rate (See table below.)
Transmission Frame
Format
Setting
Stop bits
Data length
Stop bits
Parity
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
None
Baud Rate
Setting
Baud rate
1,200 bps
00
01
02
03
04
2,400 bps
4,800 bps
9,600 bps
19,200 bps
Transmission Delay Time
Depending on the devices connected to the RS-232C port, it may be necessary
to allow time for transmission. When that is the case, set the transmission delay
to regulate the amount of time allowed.
Bit
15
0
DM 6647: RS-232C port
DM 6652: Peripheral port
Transmission delay (4 digits BCD; unit: 10 ms)
Set to 0000 to 9999 (i.e., 0 to 99.9 s)
Default: No delay
376
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameters for Host Link and RS-232C Communications
8-2-3 Wiring Ports
Use the wiring diagram shown below as a guide in wiring the port to the external
device. Refer to documentation provided with the computer or other external de-
vice for wire details for it.
The connections between the C200HS and a personal computer are illustrated
below as an example.
C200HS
Signal
Personal computer
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Signal
–
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
–
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RD
SD
DTR
SG
DSR
RS
–
CS
–
SG
–
Shielded cable
Applicable Connectors
The following connectors are applicable. One plug and one hood are included
with the CPU.
Plug: XM2A-0901 (OMRON) or equivalent
Hood: XM2S-0901 (OMRON) or equivalent
Note Ground the FG terminal on the C200HS and at the computer to 100 Ω or less.
Refer to the C200HS Installation Manual and to the documentation for your com-
puter for details.
8-2-4 Host Link Communications
This section describes the PC Setup parameters and communications proce-
dure for the Host Link communications mode.
Host link communications were developed by OMRON to connect PCs and one
or more host computers by RS-232C cable, and to control PCs through commu-
nications from the host computer. Normally the host computer issues a com-
mand to a PC, and the PC automatically sends back a response. Thus the com-
munications are carried out without the PCs being actively involved. The PCs
also have the ability to initiate data transmissions when direct involvement is
necessary.
In general, there are two means for implementing host link communications.
One is based on C-mode commands, and the other on FINS (CV-mode) com-
mands. The C200HS supports C-mode commands only. For details on host link
The C200HS supports Host Link communications either through the peripheral
or RS-232C port, or though Host Link Units (#0 and #1) mounted to the PC. The
Host Link Units include the C200H-LD201-V1, C200H-LD202-V1, and C200H-
LK101-PV1.
Note The leftmost two digits of DM 6645 and/or DM 6650 must be set to 00 to enable
the Host Link Mode. Also, set the rightmost two digits of DM 6645 and DM 6655
and all digits of DM 6646 and DM 6656 to the required communications parame-
ters before attempting to use Host Link communications.
377
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameters for Host Link and RS-232C Communications
PC Setup
The following parameter in the PC Setup is used only when the Host Link com-
munications mode is being used.
Host Link Node Number
A node number must be set for host link communications to differentiate be-
tween nodes when multiple nodes are participating in communications.
Set the node number to 00 unless multiple nodes are connected in a network.
Bit
15
0
DM 6648: RS-232C port
DM 6653: Peripheral port
0
0
Node number
(2 digits BCD): 00 to 31
Default: 00
Communications Procedure This section explains how to use the host link to execute data transmissions from
the C200HS. Using this method enables automatic data transmission from the
C200HS when data is changed, and thus simplifies the communications pro-
cess by eliminating the need for constant monitoring by the computer.
1, 2, 3...
1. Check to see that SR 26405 (RS-232C Port Transmit Ready Flag) or
SR 26413 (Peripheral Port Transmit Ready Flag) is ON. If using Host Link
Units, check SR 26705 for Unit #0 and SR 26713 for Unit #1.
2. Use the TXD(––) instruction to transmit the data.
(@)TXD
S: Address of first word of transmission data
S
C: Control data
0000:
1000:
2000:
3000:
RS-232C port
C
N
Peripheral port
Host Link Unit #0
Host Link Unit #1
N: Number of bytes of data to be sent (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0061
3. From the time this instruction is executed until the data transmission is com-
plete, SR 26405, SR 26413, SR 26705, or SR 26713 will remain OFF. The
bits for the RS-232C or peripheral port will turn ON again upon completion of
the data transmission. The bits for the Host Link Units will turn ON again
when the data transmission has been passed to the Host Link Unit.
4. The TXD(––) instruction does not provide for a response, so in order to re-
ceive confirmation that the computer has received the data, the computer’s
program must be written so that it gives notification when data is written from
the C200HS.
Note 1. The transmission data frame is as shown below for data transmitted in the
Host Link mode by means of the TXD(––) instruction.
:
↵
@
E
X
1
0
x 10 x 10
Node
No.
Header code
(Must be “EX”)
Data (up to 122 characters)
FCS
Terminator
2. To reset the RS-232C port (i.e., to restore the initial status), turn ON
SR 25209. To reset the peripheral port, turn ON SR 25208. These bits will
turn OFF automatically after the reset. Host Link Unit #0 is reset using
SR 25213 and Host Link Unit #1 is reset using SR 25207.
3. If the TXD(––) instruction is executed while the C200HS is in the middle of
responding to a command from the computer, the response transmission
will first be completed before the transmission is executed according to the
378
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameters for Host Link and RS-232C Communications
TXD(––) instruction. In all other cases, data transmission based on a
TXD(––) instruction will be given first priority.
Application Example
This example shows a program for using the RS-232C port in the Host Link
mode to transmit 10 bytes of data (DM 0000 to DM 0004) to a computer. From
DM 0000 to DM 0004, “1234” is stored in every word.
The default values are assumed for all of the PC Setup (i.e., the RS-232C port is
used in Host Link mode, the node number is 00, and the standard communica-
tions parameters are used.)
00100 SR 26405
@TXD
If SR 26405 (the Transmit Ready Flag) is ON
when IR 00100 turns ON, the ten bytes of
data (DM 0000 to DM 0004) will be trans-
DM 0000
#0000
#0010
mitted.
The following type of program must be prepared in the host computer to receive
the data. This program allows the computer to read and display the data re-
ceived from the PC while a host link read command is being executed to read
data from the PC.
10 ’C200HS SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR EXCEPTION
20 CLOSE 1
30 CLS
40 OPEN “COM:E73” AS #1
50 :KEYIN
60 INPUT “DATA ––––––––”,S$
70 IF S$=” ” THEN GOTO 190
80 PRINT “SEND DATA = ”;S$
90 ST$=S$
100 INPUT “SEND OK? Y or N?=”,B$
110 IF B$=”Y” THEN GOTO 130 ELSE GOTO :KEYIN
120 S$=ST$
130 PRINT #1,S$
’Sends command to PC
140 INPUT #1,R$
’Receives response from PC
150 PRINT “RECV DATA = ”;R$
160 IF MID$(R$,4,2)=”EX” THEN GOTO 210 ’Identifies command from PC
170 IF RIGHT$(R$,1)<>”:” THEN S$=” ”:GOTO 130
180 GOTO :KEYIN
190 CLOSE 1
200 END
210 PRINT “EXCEPTION!! DATA”
220 GOTO 140
The data received by the computer will be as shown below. The FCS is “59.”
“@00EX1234123412341234123459:CR”
8-2-5 RS-232C Communications
This section explains RS-232C communications. By using RS-232C commu-
nications, the data can be printed out by a printer or read by a bar code reader.
Handshaking is not supported for RS-232C communications.
Note The leftmost two digits of DM 6645 and/or DM 6650 must be set to 10 to enable
the RS-232C communications. Also, set the rightmost two digits of DM 6645 and
DM 6655 and all digits of DM 6646 and DM 6656 to the required communications
parameters before attempting to use Host Link communications.
379
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameters for Host Link and RS-232C Communications
PC Setup
Start and end codes or the amount of data to be received can be set as shown in
the following diagrams if required for RS-232C communications. This setting is
required only for RS-232C communications.
The following settings are valid only with pin 5 on the CPU’s DIP switch is turned
OFF.
Enabling Start and End Codes
Bit
15
0
DM 6648: RS-232C port
DM 6653: Peripheral port
0
0
End code usage
0: Not set (Amount of reception data specified.)
1: Set (End code specified.)
2: CR/LF
Start code usage
0: Not set
1: Set (Start code specified.)
Defaults: No start code; data reception complete at 256 bytes.
Specify whether or not a start code is to be set at the beginning of the data, and
whether or not an end code is to be set at the end. Instead of setting the end
code, it is possible to specify the number of bytes to be received before the re-
ception operation is completed. Both the codes and the number of bytes of data
to be received are set in DM 6649 or DM 6654.
Setting the Start Code, End Code, and Amount of Reception Data
Bit
15
0
DM 6649: RS-232C port
DM 6654: Peripheral port
End code or number of bytes to be received
For end code: (00 to FF)
For amount of reception data: 2 digits hexadecimal, 00 to FF (00: 256 bytes)
Start code 00 to FF
Defaults: No start code; data reception complete at 256 bytes.
Communications Procedure
1, 2, 3...
Transmissions
1. Check to see that SR 26413 (Peripheral Port Transmit Ready Flag) or
SR 26405 (RS-232C Port Transmit Ready Flag) is ON.
2. Use the TXD(––) instruction to transmit the data.
(@)TXD
S: Address of first word of data to be transmitted
S
C: Control data
Bits 00 to 03
C
0: Leftmost bytes first
1: Rightmost bytes first
Bits 12 to 15
N
0: RS-232C port
1: Peripheral port
N: Number of bytes to be transmitted (4 digits BCD),
0000 to 0256
3. From the time this instruction is executed until the data transmission is com-
plete, SR 26405 (or SR 25413 for the peripheral port) will remain OFF. It will
turn ON again upon completion of the data transmission.
380
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameters for Host Link and RS-232C Communications
Start and end codes are not included when the number of bytes to be transmitted
is specified. The largest transmission that can be sent with or without start and
end codes in 256 bytes, i.e., N will be between 254 and 256 depending on the
designations for start and end codes. If the number of bytes to be sent is set to
0000, only the start and end codes will be sent.
256 bytes max.
Start code
Data
End code
To reset the RS-232C port (i.e., to restore the initial status), turn on SR 25209. To
reset the peripheral port, turn on SR 25208. These bits will turn OFF automati-
cally after the reset.
Receptions
1, 2, 3...
1. Check to see that SR 26414 (Peripheral Port Reception Ready Flag) or
SR 26406 (RS-232C Port Reception Ready Flag) is ON.
2. Use the RXD(––) instruction to receive the data.
(@)RXD
D: Leading word no. for storing reception data
D
C: Control data
C
Bits 00 to 03
0: Leftmost bytes first
N
1: Rightmost bytes first
Bits 12 to 15
0: RS-232C port
1: Peripheral port
N: Number of bytes stored (4 digits BCD), 0000 to 0256
(including start and end bits)
3. The status resulting from reading the data received will be stored in the SR
Area. Check to see that the operation was successfully completed. The con-
tents of these bits will be reset each time RXD(––) is executed.
RS-232C
Peripheral
Error
SR 26400 to SR 26408 to Communications port error code (1 digit BCD)
SR 26403
SR 2641
0: Normal completion
1: Parity error
2: Framing error
3: Overrun error
SR 26404
SR 26407
SR 26412
SR 26415
Communications error
Reception Overrun Flag (After reception was com-
pleted, the subsequent data was received before the
data was read by means of the RXD instruction.)
SR 265
SR 266
Number of bytes received (not including start and
end bits)
Note The contents of SR 265 and SR 266 may not be zero when power is turned on or
when the communications cable is attached. Execute a dummy RXD(––) or re-
set the communications port to reset these words to zero.
To reset the RS-232C port (i.e., to restore the initial status), turn ON SR 25209.
To reset the peripheral port, turn ON SR 25208. These bits will turn OFF auto-
matically after the reset.
Note Always program the Transmit Ready Flag in a NO condition on the instruction
line to TXD(––) to ensure that this Flag is ON before the transmission can be
executed.
381
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameters for Host Link and RS-232C Communications
Application Example
This example shows a program for using the RS-232C port in the RS-232C
mode to transmit 10 bytes of data (DM 0100 to DM 0104) to the computer, and to
store the data received from the computer in the DM area beginning with
DM 0200. Before executing the program, the following PC Setup setting must be
made.
DM 6645: 1000 (RS-232C port in RS-232C mode; standard communications
conditions)
DM 6648: 2000 (No start code; end code CR/LF)
The default values are assumed for all other PC Setup settings. From DM 0100
to DM 0104, 3132 is stored in every word. From the computer, execute a pro-
gram to receive C200HS data with the standard communications conditions.
00100
DIFU(13)
@TXD
00101
00101 SR 26405
If SR 26405 (the Transmit Ready Flag) is ON
when IR 00100 turns ON, the ten bytes of data
(DM 0100 to DM 0104) will be transmitted, left-
most bytes first.
DM 0100
#0000
#0010
SR 26406
@RXD
When SR 26406 (Reception Completed Flag)
goes ON, the number of bytes of data specified in
SR 265 will be read from the C200HS’s reception
buffer and stored in memory starting at DM 0200,
leftmost bytes first.
DM 0200
#0000
265
The data will be as follows:
“31323132313231323132CR LF”
8-2-6 One-to-one Link Communications
If two C200HSs or one C200HS and one CQM1 are linked one-to-one by con-
necting them together through their RS-232C ports, they can share common LR
areas. When two PCs are linked one-to-one, one of them will serve as the mas-
ter and the other as the slave.
Note The peripheral port cannot be used for 1:1 links.
One-to-one Links
A one-to-one link allows two C200HSs (or a CQM1) to share common data in
their LR areas. As shown in the diagram below, when data is written into a word
the LR area of one of the linked Units, it will automatically be written identically
into the same word of the other Unit. Each PC has specified words to which it can
write and specified words that are written to by the other PC. Each can read, but
cannot write, the words written by the other PC.
Master
Slave
1
Master area
Slave area
Write “1”
Master area
Written automatically.
1
1
Write Slave area
The word used by each PC will be as shown in the following table, according to
the settings for the master, slave, and link words.
DM 6645 setting
Master words
Slave words
LR 00 to LR 63
LR00 to LR31
LR32 to LR63
LR 00 to LR 31
LR00 to LR15
LR16 to LR31
LR 00 to LR 15
LR00 to LR07
LR08 to LR15
Wiring
Wire the cable as shown in the diagram below using the connector listed.
Applicable Connectors
The following connectors are applicable. One plug and one hood are included
with the CPU.
382
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameters for Host Link and RS-232C Communications
Plug: XM2A-0901 (OMRON) or equivalent
Hood: XM2S-0901 (OMRON) or equivalent
C200HS
C200HS
Signal
Abb.
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Signal
Abb.
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
–
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
–
–
–
–
–
SG
SG
Note Ground the FG terminals the C200HS to a resistance of 100 Ω or less.
PC Setup
To use a 1:1 link, the only settings necessary are the communications mode and
the link words. Set the communications mode for one of the PCs to the 1:1 mas-
ter and the other to the 1:1 slave, and then set the link words in the PC desig-
nated as the master. Bits 08 to 11 are valid only for the master for link one-to-one.
Bit
15
0
DM 6645: RS-232C port
Communications mode
2: One-to-one link slave
3: One-to-one link master
Link words for one-to-one link
0: LR 00 to LR 63
1: LR 00 to LR 31
2: LR 00 to LR 16
Port settings
00: Standard communication parameters
Communications Procedure If the settings for the master and the slave are made correctly, then the one-to-
one link will be automatically started up simply by turning on the power supply to
both the C200HSs and operation will be independent of the C200HS operating
modes.
Application Example
This example shows a program for verifying the conditions for executing a one-
to-one link using the RS-232C ports. Before executing the program, set the fol-
lowing PC Setup parameters.
Master: DM 6645: 3200 (one-to-one link master; Area used: LR 00 to LR 15)
Slave: DM 6645: 2000 (one-to-one link slave)
The defaults are assumed for all other PC Setup parameters. The words used
for the one-to-one link are as shown below.
Master
Slave
LR00
LR00
Area for writing
Area for reading
LR07
LR08
LR07
LR08
Area for reading
Area for writing
LR15
LR15
383
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameters for Host Link and RS-232C Communications
When the program is executed at both the master and the slave, the status of
IR 001 of each Unit will be reflected in IR 100 of the other Unit. IR 001 is an input
word and IR 100 is an output word.
In the Master
25313 (Always ON)
MOV(21)
001
LR00
MOV(21)
LR08
100
In the Slave
25313 (Always ON)
MOV(21)
001
LR08
MOV(21)
LR00
100
8-2-7 NT Links
NT links can be established by connecting the RS-232C port of the C200HS to
the NT Link Interface Unit of a Programmable Terminal.
Note The peripheral port cannot be used for NT links.
NT Links
PC Setup
NT link allow high-speed communications with a Programmable Terminal
through direct access of PC memory.
Only the following setting is necessary.
Bit
15
0
DM 6645: RS-232C port
4
0
0
0
Communications mode
4: NT link
Application
Refer to documentation provided for the NT Link Interface Unit for details on ac-
tual application of an NT link.
384
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 9
Memory Cassette Operations
This section describes how to manage both UM Area and IOM data via Memory Cassettes. mounted in the CPU.
Memory Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Cassette Settings and Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UM Area Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
385
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Cassette Settings and Flags
9-1 Memory Cassettes
The C200HS comes equipped with a built-in RAM for the user’s program so pro-
grams can be created even without installing a Memory Cassette. An optional
Memory Cassette, however, can provide flexibility in handling program data, PC
Setup data, DM data, I/O comment data, and other IOM Area data. Memory Cas-
settes can be used for the following purposes.
• Saving, retrieving, and comparing data in the UM Area. This UM Area data can
include the user program, fixed DM data such as the PC Setup, expansion DM
data, I/O comment data, I/O table data, and UM Area allocation data.
• Automatically loading Memory Cassette data on PC startup.
• Saving and retrieving IOM Area data. IOM data includes IR 000 to IR 231, the
two work areas, the two SR Areas, the LR Area, the HR Area, the AR Area, the
TC Area, and DM 0000 to DM 6143.
There are two types of Memory Cassette available, each with a capacity of 16K
words. For instructions on installing Memory Cassettes, refer to the C200HS
Installation Guide.
The following table shows the Memory Cassettes used with C200HS PCs.
Memory
Capacity
Model number
Features
EEPROM
16K words C200HS-ME16K Can be written to while mounted in
the C200HS.
Can be used for both UM Area data
and IOM Area data.
A memory backup battery is not re-
quired.
EPROM
16K words C200HS-MP16K Can be written with a commercially
available PROM writer.
Can be used for only UM Area data.
Note 1. Memory Cassettes for the C200HS cannot be used with the C200H, and
Memory Units for the C200H cannot be used with the C200HS.
2. EEPROM can be written up to 50,000 times. Data may be corrupted if this
limit is exceeded.
3. EPROM chips are sold separately.
Caution The C200HS will not operate properly unless the data for it is created on LSS version 3 or later. The
!
!
C200HS is not supported by earlier versions of the LSS.
Caution Do not mount or remove a Memory Cassette without turning off the power supply to the C200HS
CPU.
9-2 Memory Cassette Settings and Flags
The following settings and flags are available for Memory Cassettes in the SR
Area. Bits/words used in the procedures to manipulate Memory Cassettes are
SR Area operation.
Word
SR 269
Bit(s)
00 to 07
08 to 10
11 to 13
14
Function
Memory Cassette Contents 00: Nothing; 01: UM; 02: IOM (03: HIS)
Memory Cassette Capacity
0: 0 KW (no board); 3: 16 KW
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
EEPROM Memory Cassette Protected or EPROM Memory Cassette Mounted Flag
Memory Cassette Flag
15
386
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UM Area Data
Word
Bit(s)
Function
00
Save UM to Cassette Bit
SR 270
Data transferred to Memory Cassette when Bit is turned
ON in PROGRAM mode. Bit will automatically turn OFF.
An error will be produced if turned ON in any other
mode.
01
Load UM from Cassette Bit
02
03
Collation Execution Flag
Collation NG Flag
04 to 11
12
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
Transfer Error Flag: Not
PROGRAM mode
Data will not be transferred from UM to the Memory
Cassette if an error occurs (except for Board Checksum
Error). Detailed information on checksum errors
occurring in the Memory Cassette will not be output to
SR 272 because the information is not needed. Repeat
the transmission if SR 27015 is ON.
13
14
Transfer Error Flag: Read Only
Transfer Error Flag: Insufficient
Capacity or No UM
15
Transfer Error Flag: Board
Checksum Error
00 to 07
Ladder program size stored in Memory Cassette
SR 271
SR 272
Ladder-only File: 04: 4 KW; 08: 8 KW; 12: 12 KW; ... (64: 64 KW)
00: No Ladder program or no file
Data updated at data transfer from CPU at startup. The file must begin in segment 0.
Ladder program size and type in CPU (Specifications are the same as for bits 00 to 07.)
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
08 to 15
00 to 10
11
Memory Error Flag: PC Setup Checksum Error
12
Memory Error Flag: Ladder Checksum Error
13
Memory Error Flag: Instruction Change Vector Area Checksum Error
Memory Error Flag: Memory Cassette Online Disconnection
Memory Error Flag: Autoboot Error
14
15
00
Save IOM to Cassette Bit
SR273
Data transferred to Memory Cassette when Bit is turned
ON in PROGRAM mode. Bit will automatically turn OFF.
An error will be produced if turned ON in any other
mode.
01
Load IOM from Cassette Bit
02 to 11
12
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
Transfer Error Flag: Not
PROGRAM mode
Data will not be transferred from IOM to the Memory
Cassette if an error occurs (except for Read Only Error).
13
14
Transfer Error Flag: Read Only
Transfer Error Flag: Insufficient
Capacity or No IOM
9-3 UM Area Data
The following procedures can be used to read UM Area data from, write UM Area
data to, and compare UM Area data on an EEPROM Memory Cassette mounted
to a C200HS CPU. This UM Area data can include the user program, fixed DM
data such as the PC Setup, expansion DM data, I/O comment data, I/O table
data, and UM Area allocation data. The procedures cannot be used to write to
EPROM Memory Cassettes, which require a PROM writer. Refer to the LSS op-
eration manuals for PROM writer procedures.
Note The data inside the Memory Cassette should be protected by turning on the
write-protect switch whenever you are not planning to write to the Cassette.
Writing Data
The following procedure is used to write UM Area data from the C200HS CPU to
a Memory Cassette mounted in the CPU.
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn off the write-protect switch on the Memory Cassette to write-enable it.
2. Make sure that power to the C200HS CPU is turned OFF.
3. Mount the Memory Cassette to the CPU.
387
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IOM Area Data
4. Turn on the CPU.
5. If the desired program or UM Area data is not already in the CPU, write the
data or transfer it to the CPU.
6. Switch the C200HS to PROGRAM mode.
7. Turn ON SR 27000 from the LSS or a Programming Console. The UM Area
data will be written to the Memory Card and SR 27000 will be turned OFF
automatically.
Reading Data
The following procedures are used to read UM Area data from a Memory Cas-
sette mounted in the C200HS CPU to the CPU. This can be achieved either au-
tomatically when the C200HS is turned on or manually from a Programming De-
vice.
Automatic Reading at Startup
1, 2, 3...
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn ON pin 2 on the CPU’s DIP switch to enable reading at startup.
2. Make sure that power to the C200HS CPU is turned OFF.
3. Mount the Memory Cassette containing the data to be read to the CPU.
4. Turn on the CPU. The data in the Memory Cassette will be read to the CPU.
Manual Reading
1. Make sure that power to the C200HS CPU is turned OFF.
2. Mount the Memory Cassette containing the data to be read to the CPU.
3. Turn on the CPU.
4. Switch the C200HS to PROGRAM mode.
5. Turn ON SR 27001 from the LSS or a Programming Console. The data in the
Memory Cassette will be read to the CPU and SR 27001 will be turned OFF
automatically.
Comparing Data
The following procedure is used to compare the UM Area data in a Memory Cas-
sette to the UM Area data in the CPU.
1, 2, 3...
1. Make sure that power to the C200HS CPU is turned OFF.
2. Mount the Memory Cassette containing the data to be compared.
3. Turn on the CPU.
4. Switch the C200HS to PROGRAM mode.
5. Turn ON SR 27002 from the LSS or a Programming Console. The data in the
Memory Cassette will be compared to the data in CPU and SR 27002 will be
turned OFF automatically.
6. Read the status of SR 27003 to determine the results of the comparison. If
SR 27003 is OFF, the data in the Memory Cassette is the same as that in the
CPU. If SR 27003 is ON, either the data is different or the C200HS was not in
PROGRAM mode when the operation was performed.
Note 1. SR 27003 is used only to show the results of comparisons and cannot be
manipulated by the user.
2. If the comparison operation is executed in any but PROGRAM mode, SR
27002 will turn ON, as will SR 27003. In this case, the status of SR 27003 will
be meaningless.
3. SR 273003 will turn ON if the comparison operation is used without a
Memory Cassette mounted to the CPU.
9-4 IOM Area Data
The following procedures can be used to read IOM data from and write IOM data
to an EEPROM Memory Cassette mounted to a C200HS CPU. IOM data in-
cludes IR 000 to IR 231, the two work areas, the two SR Areas, the LR Area, the
HR Area, the AR Area, the TC Area, and DM 0000 to DM 6143. This procedure
cannot be used to write to EPROM Memory Cassettes, which require a PROM
writer. Refer to the LSS operation manuals for PROM writer procedures.
388
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IOM Area Data
Note The data inside the Memory Cassette should be protected by turning on the
write-protect switch whenever you are not planning to write to the Cassette.
Writing Data
The following procedure is used to write IOM data from the C200HS CPU to a
Memory Cassette mounted in the CPU.
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn off the write-protect switch on the Memory Cassette to write-enable it.
2. Make sure that power to the C200HS CPU is turned OFF.
3. Mount the Memory Cassette to the CPU.
4. Turn on the CPU.
5. Switch the C200HS to PROGRAM mode.
6. Turn ON SR 27300 from the LSS or a Programming Console. The IOM data
will be written to the Memory Card and SR 27300 will be turned OFF auto-
matically.
Reading Data
The following procedures are used to read IOM data from a Memory Cassette
mounted in the C200HS CPU to the CPU. This data cannot be read out automat-
ically at startup and must be read manually. Also, the error log in DM 6000 to DM
6030 cannot be read with this procedure.
1, 2, 3...
1. Make sure that power to the C200HS CPU is turned OFF.
2. Mount a Memory Cassette to the CPU.
3. Turn on the CPU.
4. Switch the C200HS to PROGRAM mode.
5. Turn ON SR 27301 from the LSS or a Programming Console. The IOM data
in the Memory Cassette will be read to the CPU and SR 27301 will be turned
OFF automatically.
389
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 10
Troubleshooting
The C200HS provides self-diagnostic functions to identify many types of abnormal system conditions. These functions mini-
mize downtime and enable quick, smooth error correction.
This section provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PC operation. Program input errors are
described in 4-7 Inputting, Modifying, and Checking the Program. Although described in Section 3 Memory Areas, flags and
10-1 Alarm Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2 Programmed Alarms and Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3 Reading and Clearing Errors and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5 Error Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-6 Host Link Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
391
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages
10-1 Alarm Indicators
The ALM/ERR indicator on the front of the CPU provides visual indication of an
abnormality in the PC. When the indicator is ON (ERROR), a fatal error (i.e.,
ones that will stop PC operation) has occurred; when the indicator is flashing
Indicators.
Caution The PC will turn ON the ALM/ERR indicator, stop program execution, and turn OFF all outputs
from the PC for most hardware errors, for certain fatal software errors, or when FALS(07) is exe-
cuted in the program (see tables on following pages). PC operation will continue for all other er-
rors. It is the user’s responsibility to take adequate measures to ensure that a hazardous situation
will not result from automatic system shutdown for fatal errors and to ensure that proper actions
are taken for errors for which the system is not automatically shut down. System flags and other
system and/or user-programmed error indications can be used to program proper actions.
!
10-2 Programmed Alarms and Error Messages
FAL(06), FALS(07), and MSG(46) can be used in the program to provide
user-programmed information on error conditions. With these three instructions,
the user can tailor error diagnosis to aid in troubleshooting.
FAL(06) is used with a FAL number other than 00, which is output to the SR area
when FAL(06) is executed. Executing FAL(06) will not stop PC operation or di-
rectly affect any outputs from the PC.
FALS(07) is also used with a FAL number, which is output to the same location in
the SR area when FALS(07) is executed. Executing FALS(07) will stop PC op-
eration and will cause all outputs from the PC to be turned OFF.
When FAL(06) is executed with a function number of 00, the current FAL number
contained in the SR area is cleared and replaced by another, if more have been
stored in memory by the system.
When MSG(46) is used a message containing specified data area words is dis-
played onto the Programming Console or another Programming Device.
10-3 Reading and Clearing Errors and Messages
System error messages can be displayed onto the Programming Console or
other Programming Device.
On the Programming Console, press the CLR, FUN, and MONTR keys. If there
are multiple error messages stored by the system, the MONTR key can be
pressed again to access the next message. If the system is in PROGRAM mode,
pressing the MONTR key will clear the error message, so be sure to write down
all message errors as you read them. (It is not possible to clear an error or a mes-
sage while in RUN or MONITOR mode; the PC must be in PROGRAM mode.)
When all messages have been cleared, “ERR CHK OK” will be displayed.
Details on accessing error messages from the Programming Console are pro-
are provided in the LSS Operation Manual.
10-4 Error Messages
There are basically three types of errors for which messages are displayed: in-
itialization errors, non-fatal operating errors, and fatal operating errors. Most of
these are also indicated by FAL number being transferred to the FAL area of the
SR area.
392
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages
The type of error can be quickly determined from the indicators on the CPU, as
described below for the three types of errors. If the status of an indicator is not
mentioned in the description, it makes no difference whether it is lit or not.
After eliminating the cause of an error, clear the error message from memory
before resuming operation.
Asterisks in the error messages in the following tables indicate variable numeric
data. An actual number would appear on the display.
Initialization Errors
The following error messages appear before program execution has been
started. The POWER indicator will be lit and the RUN indicator will not be lit for
either of these. The RUN output will be OFF for each of these errors.
Error and message
Waiting for Special I/O
or Interrupt Input Units
FAL no.
Probable cause
Possible correction
None
A Special I/O Unit or
Interrupt Input Unit has not
initialized.
Perform the I/O Table Read
operation to check unit
numbers. Replace Unit if it
is indicated by “$” only in
the I/O table.
CPU WAIT G
(High-density I/O Units will
not appear on I/O Table
Read display for all
peripheral devices.)
Waiting for Remote I/O
None
Power to Remote I/O Unit is Check power supply to
off or terminator cannot be
found.
Remote I/O Units,
CPU WAIT G
connections between
Remote I/O Units, and
terminator setting.
Non-fatal Operating Errors
The following error messages appear for errors that occur after program execu-
tion has been started. PC operation and program execution will continue after
one or more of these errors have occurred. For each of these errors, the
POWER and RUN indicators will be lit and the ALM/ERR indicator will be flash-
ing. The RUN output will be ON.
Error and message
FAL no.
Probable cause
Possible correction
01 to 99
FAL(06) has been executed Correct according to cause
FAL error
in program. Check the FAL
number to determine
indicated by FAL number
(set by user).
SYS FAIL FAL**
conditions that would cause
execution (set by user).
8A
8B
An error occurred in data
transfer between the
Interrupt Input Unit and the
CPU.
Replace the Interrupt Input
Unit.
Interrupt Input Unit error
SYS FAIL FAL8A
Interrupt subroutine
containing Special I/O Unit
refresh was too long.
Check the interrupt
subroutine and PC Setup.
Interrupt subroutine error
SYS FAIL FAL8B
Cyclic Special I/O Unit
refreshing was not disabled
for interrupt subroutine
refresh.
393
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages
Error and message
FAL no.
9A
Probable cause
Possible correction
An error occurred in data
transfer between a
High-density I/O Unit and
the CPU.
Check AR 0205 to AR 0214
to identify the Unit with a
problem, replace the Unit,
and restart the PC.
High-density I/O Unit error
SYS FAIL FAL9A
9B
9D
An error has been detected Check an correct PC Setup
PC Setup error
in the PC Setup. This error
will be generated when the
setting is read or used for
the first time.
settings.
SYS FAIL FAL9B
An error has occurred
during data transmission
between UM and a Memory
Cassette because:
Make sure that the PC is in
PROGRAM mode.
Memory Cassette Transfer error
SYS FAIL FAL9D
Make sure that the Memory
Cassette is not
Not in PROGRAM Mode.
write-protected.
UM or Memory Cassette is
read-only.
Make sure that the UM and
Memory Cassette capacity
is sufficient.
Insufficient capacity in UM
or Memory Cassette.
Make sure that SYSMAC
NET data links are not
active during the transfer.
A checksum error occurred
in the Memory Cassette
Transfer the data again.
Cycle time overrun
F8
E7
Watchdog timer has
exceeded 100 ms.
Program cycle time is
longer than recommended.
Reduce cycle time if
possible.
CYCLE TIME OVER
I/O table verification error
Unit has been removed or
replaced by a different kind
of Unit, making I/O table
incorrect.
Use I/O Table Verify
Operation to check I/O table
and either connect dummy
Units or register the I/O
table again.
I/O VER ERR
Remote I/O error
B0 or B1
Error occurred in
transmissions between
Remote I/O Units.
Check transmission line
between PC and Master
and between Remote I/O
Units.
REMOTE ERR
*
Remote I/O
Master Unit number
D0
Error has occurred in PC
Link Unit, Remote I/O
Master Unit, between a
Host Link, SYSMAC LINK,
or SYSMAC NET Link Unit
and the CPU, or in refresh
between Special I/O Unit
and the CPU.
Determine the unit number
of the Unit which caused the
error (AR 00), correct the
error, and toggle the
appropriate Restart Bit in
AR 01, SR 250, or SR 252.
If the Unit does not restart,
replace it.
Special I/O Unit error
SIOU ERR
9A
F7
An error has occurred
during data transmission
between the CPU and a
Group-2 High-density I/O
Unit.
Determine the unit number
of the Unit which caused the
error (AR 02), replace the
Unit, and try to power-up
again.
Group-2 High-density I/O error
SYS FAIL FAL 9A
Battery error
Backup battery is missing or Check battery, and replace
its voltage has dropped. if necessary.
BATT LOW
394
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages
Fatal Operating Errors
The following error messages appear for errors that occur after program execu-
tion has been started. PC operation and program execution will stop and all out-
puts from the PC will be turned OFF when any of the following errors occur. No
CPU indicators will be lit for the power interruption error. For all other fatal oper-
ating errors, the POWER and ALM/ERR indicators will be lit. The RUN output will
be OFF.
Error and message
FAL no.
Probable cause
Possible correction
Power interruption
No message.
None
Power has been
interrupted for at least
10 ms.
Check power supply voltage
and power lines. Try to
power-up again.
CPU error
None
Watchdog timer has
exceeded maximum
setting (default setting:
130 ms).
Restart system in PROGRAM
mode and check program.
Reduce cycle time or reset
watchdog timer if longer time
required. (Consider effects of
longer cycle time before
resetting.)
No message.
F1
Memory error
SR 27211 ON:
Check the PC Setup.
MEMORY ERR
A checksum error has
occurred in the PC
Setup (DM 6600 to
DM 6655).
SR 27212 ON:
Check the program.
A checksum error has
occurred in the program,
indicating an incorrect
instruction.
SR 27213 ON
A checksum error has
occurred in an
expansion instruction
change.
SR 27214 ON:
Install the Memory Cassette
correctly.
Memory Cassette was
installed or removed
with the power on.
SR 27215 ON:
Autoboot error.
Check whether the CPU
memory is protected or a
checksum error occurred in the
Memory Cassette.
F0
END(01) is not written
anywhere in program.
Write END(01) at the final
address of the program.
No END(01) instruction
NO END INST
C0 to C2 Error has occurred in
The rightmost digit of the FAL
I/O bus error
the bus line between the number will indicate the number
I/O BUS ERR
*
CPU and I/O Units.
of the Rack where the error was
detected. Check cable
connections between the
Racks.
Rack no.
395
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages
Error and message
FAL no.
Probable cause
Possible correction
Too many Units
E1
Two or more Special I/O Perform the I/O Table Read
Units are set to the
same unit number
operation to check unit
I/O UNIT OVER
numbers, and eliminate
duplications. (High-density I/O
Units other than Group-2 are
Special I/O Units, too.)
Two or more Group-2
High-density I/O Units
are set to the same I/O
number or I/O word.
Set unit numbers of 64-pt
Group-2 High-density I/O Units
to numbers other than 9.
The I/O number of a
64-pt Group-2
High-density I/O Unit is
set to 9.
Check the SYSMAC NET Link
and SYSMAC LINK Unit
operating levels and eliminate
duplications.
Two SYSMAC NET Link
or SYSMAC LINK Units
share the same
Mount only one Interrupt Input
Unit.
operating level.
Two or more Interrupt
Input Units are mounted.
E0
Input and output word
designations registered
in I/O table do no agree check all Units to see that they
Check the I/O table with I/O
Table Verification operation and
Input-output I/O table error
I/O SET ERROR
with input/output words
required by Units
actually mounted.
are in correct configuration.
When the system has been
confirmed, register the I/O table
again.
01 to 99 FALS has been
or 9F executed by the
Correct according to cause
indicated by FAL number. If FAL
FALS error
SYS FAIL FAL**
program. Check the FAL number is 9F, check watchdog
number to determine
conditions that would
timer and cycle time, which may
be to long. 9F will be output
cause execution (Set by when FALS(07) is executed and
user or by system).
the cycle time is between 120
and 130 ms.
Communications Errors
Other Error Messages
If errors occur in communications, the indicator for the peripheral port (COMM/
COMM1 when using RS-232C Programming Console cable) or the RS-232C
port (COMM2) will not light. Check the connection, programming on both ends
(C200HS and peripheral), and then reset the port using the reset bits (peripheral
port: SR 25208; RS-232C port: SR 25209).
A number of other error messages are detailed within this manual. Errors in pro-
gram input and debugging can be examined in Section 4 Writing and Inputting
the Program.
396
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Flags
10-5 Error Flags
The following table lists the flags and other information provided in the SR and
SR Area
Address(es)
Function
23600 to 23615 Node loop status for SYSMAC NET Link system
23700 to 23715 Completion/error code output area for SEND(90)/RECV(98) in SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link
System
24700 to 25015 PC Link Unit Run and Error Flags
25100 to 25115 Remote I/O Error Flags
25200
25203
25206
SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link Level 0 SEND(90)/RECV(98) Error Flag
SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link Level 1 SEND(90)/RECV(98) Error Flag
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 1 Error Flag
25300 to 25307 FAL number output area.
25308
25309
25310
25311
25312
25411
25413
25414
25415
Low Battery Flag
Cycle Time Error Flag
I/O Verification Error Flag
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 0 Error Flag
Remote I/O Error Flag
Interrupt Input Unit Error Flag
Interrupt Programming Error Flag
Group-2 High-density I/O Unit Error Flag
Special Unit Error Flag (Special I/O, PC Link, Host Link, Remote I/O Master, SYSMAC NET Link, or
SYSMAC Link Unit Error Flag)
25503
Instruction Execution Error (ER) Flag
26400 to 26403 RS-232C Port Error Code
26404
RS-232C Port Communications Error
26408 to 26411 Peripheral Port Error Code (except Peripheral Mode)
26412
27011
27012
27013
27014
27015
27211
27212
27213
27214
27215
27312
27313
27314
27315
27500
27501
27502
Peripheral Port Communications Error Flag (except Peripheral Mode)
UM Transfer Error Flag: SYSMAC NET data link active during data link table transfer.
UM Transfer Error Flag: Not PROGRAM mode
UM Transfer Error Flag: Read Only
UM Transfer Error Flag: Insufficient capacity or no UM
UM Transfer Error Flag: Board Checksum Error
Memory Error Flag: PC Setup Checksum Error
Memory Error Flag: UM or Ladder Checksum Error
Memory Error Flag: Expansion Instruction Code Change Area Checksum Error
Memory Error Flag: Memory Cassette Online Disconnection
Memory Error Flag: Autoboot Error
IOM Transfer Error Flag: Not PROGRAM mode
IOM Transfer Error Flag: Read Only
IOM Transfer Error Flag: Insufficient capacity
IOM Transfer Error Flag: Checksum Error
PC Setup Error (DM 6600 to DM 6614)
PC Setup Error (DM 6615 to DM 6644)
PC Setup Error (DM 6645 to DM 6655)
397
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Flags
AR Area
Address(es)
0000 to 0009
0010
Function
Special I/O or PC Link Unit Error Flags
SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link Level 1 System Error Flags
SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link Level 0 System Error Flags
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 1 Error Flag
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 0 Error Flag
Remote I/O Master Unit 1 Error Flag
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
Remote I/O Master Unit 0 Error Flag
0200 to 0204
0205 to 0215
0215
Error Flags for Slave Racks 0 to 4
Group-2 High-density I/O Unit Error Flags (AR 0205 to AR 0214 correspond to I/O numbers 0 to 9.)
Group-2 High-density I/O Unit was not recognized.
Optical I/O Units (0 to 7) Error Flags
0300 to 0315
0400 to 0415
0500 to 0515
0600 to 0615
0710 to 0712
0713 to 0715
1114
Optical I/O Units (8 to 15) Error Flags
Optical I/O Units (16 to 23) Error Flags
Optical I/O Units (24 to 31) Error Flags
Error Flags for Slave Racks 5 to 7
Error History Bits
Communications Controller Error Flag Level 0
EEPROM Error Flag for operating level 0
Communications Controller Error Flag Level 1
EEPROM Error Flag for operating level 1
1115
1514
1515
398
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Errors
10-6 Host Link Errors
These error codes are received as the response code (end code) when a com-
mand received by the C200HS from a host computer cannot be processed. The
error code format is as shown below.
:
↵
@
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Node
no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
The header code will vary according to the command and can contain a subcode
(for composite commands).
End
Contents
Probable cause
Corrective measures
code
00
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
---
---
Check the relation between the
command and the PC mode.
01
02
0B
13
The command that was sent can-
not be executed when the PC is in
RUN mode.
Not executable in MONITOR mode The command that was sent can-
not be executed when the PC is in
MONITOR mode.
Not executable in PROGRAM
mode
The command that was sent can-
not be executed when the PC is in
PROGRAM mode.
This code is not presently being
used.
FCS error
The FCS is wrong. Either the FCS
calculation is mistaken or there is
adverse influence from noise.
Check the FCS calculation method.
If there was influence from noise,
transfer the command again.
14
15
16
18
19
Format error
The command format is wrong.
Check the format and transfer the
command again.
Entry number data error
Command not supported
Frame length error
The areas for reading and writing
are wrong.
Correct the areas and transfer the
command again.
The specified command does not
exist.
Check the command code.
The maximum frame length was
exceeded.
Divide the command into multiple
frames.
Not executable
Items to read not registered for
composite command (QQ).
Execute QQ to register items to
read before attempting batch read.
23
A3
User memory write-protected
Pin 1 on C200HS DIP switch is ON. Turn OFF pin 1 to execute.
The error was generated while a
command extending over more
than one frame was being execu-
ted.
Check the command data and try
the transfer again.
Aborted due to FCS error in trans-
mit data
A4
A5
A8
Aborted due to format error in
transmit data
Note: The data up to that point has
already been written to the ap-
propriate area of the CPU.
Aborted due to entry number data
error in transmit data
Aborted due to frame length error
in transmit data
Other ---
Influence from noise was received. Transfer the command again.
Power Interruptions
The following responses may be received from the C200HS if a power interrup-
tion occurs, including momentary interruptions. If any of these responses are re-
ceived during or after a power interruption, repeat the command.
Undefined Command Response
@00IC4A*↵
No Response
If no response is received, abort the last command and resend.
399
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 11
Host Link Commands
This section explains the methods and procedures for using host link commands, which can be used for host link communica-
tions via the C200HS ports.
11-1 Communications Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2 Command and Response Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3 Host Link Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-11 PV WRITE –– WC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-15 SV READ 1 –– R# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-16 SV READ 2 –– R$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-17 SV READ 3 –– R% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-24 FORCED SET –– KS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-29 TEST–– TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-34 ABORT –– XZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-35 INITIALIZE –– :: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4 Host Link Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
401
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications Procedure
Section 11-1
11-1 Communications Procedure
Command Chart
The commands listed in the chart below can be used for host link communica-
tions with the C200HS. These commands are all sent from the host computer to
the PC.
PC mode
MON
Valid
Header code
Name
Page
RUN
Valid
Valid
PRG
Valid
RR
RL
IR/SR AREA READ
LR AREA READ
HR AREA READ
PV READ
411
411
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
RH
RC
RG
RD
RJ
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
TC STATUS READ
DM AREA READ
AR AREA READ
IR/SR AREA WRITE
LR AREA WRITE
HR AREA WRITE
PV WRITE
Valid
Valid
WR
WL
WH
WC
WG
WD
WJ
R#
Not valid Valid
Not valid Valid
Not valid Valid
Not valid Valid
Not valid Valid
Not valid Valid
Not valid Valid
TC STATUS WRITE
DM AREA WRITE
AR AREA WRITE
SV READ 1
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
R$
SV READ 2
R%
W#
W$
W%
MS
SC
MF
KS
KR
FK
SV READ 3
Not valid Valid
Not valid Valid
Not valid Valid
SV CHANGE 1
SV CHANGE 2
SV CHANGE 3
STATUS READ
STATUS WRITE
ERROR READ
FORCED SET
FORCED RESET
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid Valid
Not valid Valid
Not valid Valid
Not valid Valid
MULTIPLE FORCED SET/RESET
FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL
PC MODEL READ
KC
MM
TS
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
TEST
RP
WP
MI
PROGRAM READ
Not valid Not valid Valid
Not valid Not valid Valid
PROGRAM WRITE
I/O TABLE GENERATE
COMPOUND COMMAND
ABORT (command only)
INITIALIZE (command only)
Undefined command (response only)
QQ
XZ
Valid
Valid
Valid
---
Valid
Valid
Valid
---
Valid
Valid
Valid
---
::
IC
402
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications Procedure
Section 11-1
Host link communications are executed by means an exchange of commands
and responses between the host computer and the PC. With the C200HS, there
are two communications methods that can be used. One is the normal method,
in which commands are issued from the host computer to the PC. The other
method allows commands to be issued from the PC to the host computer.
Frame Transmission and Reception
Commands and responses are exchanged in the order shown in the illustration
below. The block of data transferred in a single transmission is called a “frame”.
A single frame is configured of a maximum of 131 characters of data.
The right to send a frame is called the “transmission right”. The Unit that has the
transmission right is the one that can send a frame at any given time. The trans-
mission right is traded back and forth between the host computer and the PC
each time a frame is transmitted. The transmission right is passed from the
transmitting Unit to the receiving Unit when either a terminator (the code that
marks the end of a command or response) or a delimiter (the code that sets
frames apart) is received.
Commands from Host
In host link communications, the host computer ordinarily has the transmission
right first and initiates the communications. The PC then automatically sends a
response.
Frame (command)
Unit no.
Frame (command)
Unit no.
Header code
Header code
Host
computer
Text
Text
FCS
Terminator
FCS
Terminator
Next frame transmission
enabled (i.e., transmission
right transferred)
Unit no.
Header code
End code
Unit no.
Header code
End code
PC
Text
Text
FCS
FCS
Terminator
Terminator
Frame (response)
Frame (response)
Commands from PC
It is also possible in host link communications for the PC to send commands to
the host computer. In this case it is the PC that has the transmission right and
initiates the communications.
Host
computer
No response
Unit no.
Header code
PC
Text
FCS
Terminator
403
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command and Response Formats
Section 11-2
When commands are issued to the host computer, the data is transmitted in one
direction from the PC to the host computer. If a response to a command is re-
quired use a host link communications command to write the response from the
host computer to the PC.
11-2 Command and Response Formats
This section explains the formats for the commands and responses that are ex-
changed in host link communications.
11-2-1 Commands from the Host Computer
When a command is issued from the host computer, the command and re-
sponse formats are as shown below.
Command Format
When transmitting a command from the host computer, prepare the command
data in the format shown below.
1
0
x 10 x 10
@
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
Text
FCS
Terminator
@
An “@” symbol must be placed at the beginning.
Node No.
Identifies the PC communicating with the host computer.
Specify the node number set for the PC in the PC Setup (DM 6648, DM 6653).
Header Code
Set the 2-character command code.
Text
Set the command parameters.
FCS
Terminator
Set two characters, “:” and the carriage return (CHR$(13)) to indicate the end
of the command.
Response Format
The response from the PC is returned in the format shown below. Prepare a pro-
gram so that the response data can be interpreted and processed.
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
@
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
End code
Text
FCS
Terminator
@, Node No., Header Code
Contents identical to those of the command are returned.
End Code
The completion status of the command (e.g., whether or not an error has oc-
curred) is returned.
Text
Text is returned only when there is data such as read data.
FCS, Terminator
Refer to the corresponding explanations under “Command Format”.
404
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command and Response Formats
Section 11-2
Long Transmissions
The largest block of data that can be transmitted as a single frame is 131 charac-
ters. A command or response of 132 characters or more must therefore be di-
vided into more than one frame before transmission. When a transmission is
split, the ends of the first and intermediate frames are marked by a delimiter
instead of a terminator.
As each frame is transmitted, the receiving node waits for the delimiter to be
transmitted. After the delimiter has been transmitted, the next frame will then be
sent. This procedure is repeated until the entire command or response has been
transmitted. The following diagram shows an example of host link communica-
tions addressed to a PC.
Frame2 (command)
Frame3 (command)
Frame1 (command)
Unit no.
Header code
Host
Text
Text
Text
computer
FCS
FCS
FCS
Delimiter
Delimiter
Terminator
Delimiter
Delimiter
Unit no.
Header code
End code
PC
Text
FCS
Terminator
Frame (response)
Precautions for Long Transmissions
When dividing commands such as WR, WL, WC, or WD that execute write op-
erations, be careful not to divide into separate frames data that is to be written
into a single word. As shown in the illustration below, be sure to divide frames so
that they coincide with the divisions between words.
Frame 1
Data
@
0
0
W
D
↵
Node
no.
Header
code
One word of data
FCS
Delimiter
Data from the same word is not divided.
Frame 3
Data
:
↵
One word of data
Data from the same word is not divided.
FCS
Terminator
FCS (Frame Check Sequence) When a frame is transmitted, an FCS is placed just before the delimiter or termi-
nator in order to check whether any data error has been generated. The FCS is
8-bit data converted into two ASCII characters. The 8-bit data is the result of an
EXCLUSIVE OR performed on the data from the beginning of the frame until the
end of the text in that frame (i.e., just before the FCS). Calculating the FCS each
405
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command and Response Formats
Section 11-2
time a frame is received and checking the result against the FCS that is included
in the frame makes it possible to check for data errors in the frame.
@
1
0
R
R
0
0
0
1
4
2
:
↵
Header code
FCS calculation range
Text
FCS
Terminator
Node no.
ASCII code
@
1
40
31
30
52
0100
EOR
0011
EOR
0011
EOR
0000
0001
0000
0010
0
R
0101
1
31
0011
0100
↓
0001
0010
↓
Calculation
result
Converted to hexadecimal.
Handled as ASCII characters.
4
2
Example Program for FCS
This example shows a BASIC subroutine program for executing an FCS check
on a frame received by the host computer.
400 *FCSCHECK
410 L=LEN(RESPONSE$) ’...........Data transmitted and received
420 Q=0:FCSCK$=“ ”
430 A$=RIGHT$(RESPONSE$,1)
440 PRINT RESPONSE$,AS,L
450 IF A$=”*” THEN LENGS=LEN(RESPONSE$)-3
ELSE LENGS=LEN(RESPONSE$)-2
460 FCSP$=MID$(RESPONSE$,LENGS+1,2) ’.... FCS data received
470 FOR I=1 TO LENGS ’...........Number of characters in FCS
480 Q=ASC(MID$(RESPONSE$,I,1)) XOR Q
490 NEXT I
500 FCSD$=HEX$(Q)
510 IF LEN(FCSD$)=1 THEN FCSD$=”0”+FCSD$ ’FCS result
520 IF FCSD$<>FCSP$ THEN FCSCK$=”ERR”
530 PRINT“FCSD$=”;FCSD$,“FCSP$=”;FCSP$,“FCSCK$=”;FCSCK$
540 RETURN
Note 1. Normal reception data includes the FCS, delimiter or terminator, and so on.
When an error occurs in transmission, however the FCS or some other data
may not be included. Be sure to program the system to cover this possibility.
2. In this program example, the CR code (CHR$(13)) is not entered for RE-
SPONSE$. When including the CR code, make the changes in lines 430
and 450.
11-2-2 Commands from the PC
In host link communications, commands are ordinarily sent from the host com-
puter to the PC, but it is also possible for commands to be sent from the PC to the
host computer. In Host Link Mode, any data can be transmitted from the PC to
the host computer. To send a command to the host computer, use the TRANS-
MIT instruction (TXD(--)) in the PC program in Host Link Mode.
TXD(––) outputs data from the specified port (the RS-232C port or the peripher-
406
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
Reception Format
When TXD(––) is executed, the data stored in the words beginning with the first
send word is converted to ASCII and output to the host computer as a host link
command in the format shown below. The “@” symbol, node number, header
code, FCS, and delimiter are all added automatically when the transmission is
sent. At the host computer, it is necessary to prepare in advance a program for
interpreting and processing this format.
122 characters max.
Text
@
E
X
:
↵
Node no. Header code
(Must be “EX”)
FCS
Terminator
One byte of data (2 digits hexadecimal) is converted to two characters in ASCII
for transmission, the amount of data in the transmission is twice the amount of
words specified for TXD(––). The maximum number of characters for transmis-
sion is 122 and the maximum number of bytes that can be designated for
TXD(––) is one half of that, or 61.
11-3 Host Link Commands
This section explains the commands that can be issued from the host computer
to the PC.
11-3-1 IR/SR AREA READ –– RR
Reads the contents of the specified number of IR and SR words, starting from
the specified word.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
@
R
R
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
Beginning word
(0000 to 0511)
No. of words
(0000 to 0512)
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
1
0
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16
@
R
R
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
End code
Read data (1 word)
Read data (for number of words read)
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Read Data (Response)
The contents of the number of words specified by the command are returned in
hexadecimal as a response. The words are returned in order, starting with the
specified beginning word.
11-3-2 LR AREA READ –– RL
Reads the contents of the specified number of LR words, starting from the speci-
fied word.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
@
R
L
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
Beginning word
(0000 to 0063)
No. of words
(0001 to 0064)
FCS
Terminator
407
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
Response Format
1
0
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16
@
R
L
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
End code
Read data (1 word)
Read data (for number of words read)
Terminator
FCS
Parameters
Read Data (Response)
The contents of the number of words specified by the command are returned in
hexadecimal as a response. The words are returned in order, starting with the
specified beginning word.
11-3-3 HR AREA READ –– RH
Reads the contents of the specified number of HR words, starting from the speci-
fied word.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
@
R
H
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
Beginning word
(0000 to 0099)
No. of words
(0001 to 0100)
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
1
0
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16
@
R
H
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
End code
Read data (1 word)
Read data (for number of words read)
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Read Data (Response)
The contents of the number of words specified by the command are returned in
hexadecimal as a response. The words are returned in order, starting with the
specified beginning word.
11-3-4 PV READ –– RC
Reads the contents of the specified number of timer/counter PVs (present val-
ues), starting from the specified timer/counter.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
@
R
C
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
Beginning timer/counter No. of timers/counters
(0000 to 0511) (0001 to 0512)
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
1
0
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
@
R
C
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
End code
Read data (1 word)
Read data (for number of words read)
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Read Data (Response)
The number of present values specified by the command is returned in hexade-
408
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
cimal as a response. The PVs are returned in order, starting with the specified
beginning timer/counter.
11-3-5 TC STATUS READ –– RG
Reads the status of the Completion Flags of the specified number of timers/
counters, starting from the specified timer/counter.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
@
R
G
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
Beginning timer/counter No. of timers/counters
(0000 to 0511) (0001 to 0512)
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
ON/
OFF
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
@
R
G
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
Read data
(1 timer/counter)
Read data
(for number of TC read)
Parameters
Read Data (Response)
The status of the number of Completion Flags specified by the command is re-
turned as a response. “1” indicates that the Completion Flag is ON.
11-3-6 DM AREA READ –– RD
Reads the contents of the specified number of DM words, starting from the spe-
cified word.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
@
R
D
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
Beginning word
(0000 to 9999)
No. of words
(0001 to 10000)
(see note)
FCS
Terminator
Note 1. If 10,000 words have to be read, specify the number of words to be read as
0000.
2. DM 6656 to DM 6999 do not exist. An error will not, however, result if you try
to read these words. Instead, “0000” will be returned as a response.
Response Format
1
0
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16
@
R
D
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
End code
Read data (1 word)
Read data (for number of words read)
Terminator
FCS
Parameters
Read Data (Response)
The contents of the number of words specified by the command are returned in
hexadecimal as a response. The words are returned in order, starting with the
specified beginning word.
409
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
11-3-7 AR AREA READ –– RJ
Reads the contents of the specified number of AR words, starting from the speci-
fied word.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
@
R
J
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
Beginning word
(0000 to 0027)
No. of words
(0001 to 0028)
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
1
0
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16
@
R
J
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
End code
Read data (1 word )
FCS
Terminator
Read data
(for number of words read)
Parameters
Read Data (Response)
The contents of the number of words specified by the command are returned in
hexadecimal as a response. The words are returned in order, starting with the
specified beginning word.
11-3-8 IR/SR AREA WRITE –– WR
Writes data to the IR and SR areas, starting from the specified word. Writing is
done word by word.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16
@
W
R
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
Beginning word
(0000 to 0511)
Write data (1 word)
Write data
Terminator
FCS
(for number of words to write)
Note Data cannot be written to words 253 to 255. If there is an attempt to write to these
words, no error will result, but nothing will be written to these words.
Response Format
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
@
W
R
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Write Data (Command)
Specify in order the contents of the number of words to be written to the IR or SR
area in hexadecimal, starting with the specified beginning word.
Note If data is specified for writing which exceeds the allowable range, an error will be
generated and the writing operation will not be executed. If, for example, 511 is
specified as the beginning word for writing,and two words of data are specified,
then 0512 will become the last word for writing data, and the command will not be
executed because SR 512 is beyond the writeable range.
410
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
11-3-9 LR AREA WRITE –– WL
Writes data to the LR area, starting from the specified word. Writing is done word
by word.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16
@
W
L
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
Beginning word
(0000 to 0063)
Write data (1 word)
Write data
FCS
Terminator
(for number of words to write )
Response Format
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
@
W
L
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Write Data (Command)
Specify in order the contents of the number of words to be written to the LR area
in hexadecimal, starting with the specified beginning word.
Note If data is specified for writing which exceeds the allowable range, an error will be
generated and the writing operation will not be executed. If, for example, 60 is
specified as the beginning word for writing and five words of data are specified,
then 64 will become the last word for writing data, and the command will not be
executed because LR 64 is beyond area boundary.
11-3-10 HR AREA WRITE –– WH
Writes data to the HR area, starting from the specified word. Writing is done word
by word.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16
@
W
H
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
Beginning word
(0000 to 0099)
Write data (1 word)
Write data
FCS
Terminator
(for no. of words to write)
Response Format
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
@
W
H
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Write Data (Command)
Specify in order the contents of the number of words to be written to the HR area
in hexadecimal, starting with the specified beginning word.
Note If data is specified for writing which exceeds the allowable range, an error will be
generated and the writing operation will not be executed. If, for example, 98 is
specified as the beginning word for writing, and three words of data are speci-
fied, then 100 will become the last word for writing data, and the command will
not be executed because HR 100 is beyond area boundary.
411
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
11-3-11 PV WRITE –– WC
Writes the PVs (present values) of timers/counters starting from the specified
timer/counter.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16
@
W
C
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
Beginning timer/counter Write data (1 timer/counter)
FCS
Terminator
(0000 to 0511)
Write data
(for no. of PV to write)
Response Format
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
@
W
C
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Write Data (Command)
Specify in decimal numbers (BCD) the present values for the number of timers/
counters that are to be written, starting from the beginning timer/counter.
Note 1. When this command is used to write data to the PV area, the Completion
Flags for the timers/counters that are written will be turned OFF.
2. If data is specified for writing which exceeds the allowable range, an error
will be generated and the writing operation will not be executed. If, for exam-
ple, 510 is specified as the beginning word for writing, and three words of
data are specified, then 512 will become the last word for writing data, and
the command will not be executed because TC 512 is beyond area bound-
ary.
11-3-12 TC STATUS WRITE –– WG
Writes the status of the Completion Flags for timers and counters in the TC area,
starting from the specified timer/counter (number). Writing is done number by
number.
Command Format
ON/
OFF
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
@
W
G
:
↵
Node no.
Header Beginning timer/counter
code (0000 to 0511)
FCS
Terminator
Write data
(1 timer/counter)
Write data
(for number of TC to write)
Response Format
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
@
W
G
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Write Data (Command)
Specify the status of the Completion Flags, for the number of timers/counters to
be written, in order (from the beginning word) as ON (i.e., “1”) or OFF (i.e., “0”).
When a Completion Flag is ON, it indicates that the time or count is up.
412
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
Note If data is specified for writing which exceeds the allowable range, an error will be
generated and the writing operation will not be executed. If, for example, 510 is
specified as the beginning word for writing, and three words of data are speci-
fied, then 512 will become the last word for writing data, and the command will
not be executed because TC 512 is beyond area boundary.
11-3-13 DM AREA WRITE –– WD
Writes data to the DM area, starting from the specified word. Writing is done
word by word.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16
@
W
D
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
Beginning word
(0000 to 9999)
Write data (1 word)
Write data
Terminator
FCS
(for number of words to write)
Note DM 6656 to DM 6999 do not exist. An error will not, however, result if you try to
write to these words.
Response Format
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
@
W
D
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Write Data (Command)
Specify in order the contents of the number of words to be written to the DM area
in hexadecimal, starting with the specified beginning word.
Note 1. If data is specified for writing which exceeds the allowable range, an error
will be generated and the writing operation will not be executed. If, for exam-
ple, 9998 is specified as the beginning word for writing, and three words of
data are specified, then 10000 will become the last word for writing data, and
the command will not be executed because DM 10000 is beyond the write-
able range.
2. Be careful about the configuration of the DM area, as it varies depending on
the CPU model.
11-3-14 AR AREA WRITE –– WJ
Writes data to the AR area, starting from the specified word. Writing is done word
by word.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16
@
W
J
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
Beginning word
(0000 to 0027)
Write data (1 word)
Write data
(for the number of words to write)
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
@
W
J
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
End code
Terminator
FCS
413
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
Parameters
Write Data (Command)
Specify in order the contents of the number of words to be written to the AR area
in hexadecimal, starting with the specified beginning word.
Note If data is specified for writing which exceeds the allowable range, an error will be
generated and the writing operation will not be executed. If, for example, 26 is
specified as the beginning word for writing, and three words of data are speci-
fied, then 28 will become the last word for writing data, and the command will not
be executed because AR 28 is beyond the writeable range.
11-3-15 SV READ 1 –– R#
Searches for the first instance of a TIM, TIMH(15), CNT, CNTR(12), or TTIM(87)
instruction with the specified TC number in the user’s program and reads the PV,
which assumed to be set as a constant. The SV that is read is a 4-digit decimal
number (BCD). The program is searched from the beginning, and it may there-
fore take approximately 10 seconds to produce a response.
Command Format
1
0
1
2
3
4
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
OP OP OP OP x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
@
R
#
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
Name
TC number
(0000 to 0511)
Terminator
FCS
Response Format
1
0
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
@
R
#
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
End code
SV
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Name, TC Number (Command)
Specify the instruction for reading the SV in “Name”. Make this setting in 4 char-
acters. In “TC number”, specify the timer/counter number used for the instruc-
tion.
Instruction name
OP2 OP3
Classification
TC number
range
OP1
OP4
(S)
0000 to 0511
T
T
C
C
T
I
M
TIMER
I
M
T
T
I
H
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
COUNTER
N
N
T
(S)
R
REVERSIBLE COUNTER
TOTALIZING TIMER
M
(S): Space
SV (Response)
The constant SV is returned.
Note 1. The instruction specified under “Name” must be in four characters. Fill any
gaps with spaces to make a total of four characters.
2. If the same instruction is used more than once in a program, only the first one
will be read.
3. Use this command only when it is definite that a constant SV has been set.
414
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
11-3-16 SV READ 2 –– R$
Reads the constant SV or the word address where the SV is stored. The SV that
is read is a 4-digit decimal number (BCD) written as the second operand for the
TIM, TIMH(15), CNT, CNTR(12), or TTIM(87) instruction at the specified pro-
gram address in the user’s program. This can only be done with a program of
less than 10K.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
:
↵
@
R
$
Node no.
Header
code
Program
address
Name
Timer/counter
(0000 to 0511)
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
1
0
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
:
↵
@
R
$
Node no.
Header
code
End code
Operand
SV
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Name, TC Number (Command)
Specify the name of the instruction for reading the SV in “Name”. Make this set-
ting in 4 characters. In “TC number”, specify the timer/counter number used by
the instruction.
Instruction name
OP2 OP3
Classification
TC number
range
OP1
OP4
(S)
0000 to 0511
T
T
C
C
T
I
M
TIMER
I
M
T
T
I
H
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
COUNTER
N
N
T
(S)
R
REVERSIBLE COUNTER
TOTALIZING TIMER
M
(S): Space
Operand, SV (Response)
The name that indicates the SV classification is returned to “Operand”, and ei-
ther the word address where the SV is stored or the constant SV is returned to
“SV”.
Operand
OP2 OP3
Classification
Constant or
word address
OP1
OP4
(S)
C
I
O
IR or SR
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0063
0000 to 0099
0000 to 0027
0000 to 6655
0000 to 6655
0000 to 9999
L
R
R
R
M
M
O
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
:
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
LR
H
A
D
D
C
HR
AR
DM
DM (indirect)
Constant
N
Note The instruction name specified under “Name” must be in four characters. Fill any
gaps with spaces to make a total of four characters.
415
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
11-3-17 SV READ 3 –– R%
Reads the constant SV or the word address where the SV is stored. The SV that
is read is a 4-digit decimal number (BCD) written in the second word of the TIM,
TIMH(15), CNT, CNTR(12), or TTIM(87) instruction at the specified program ad-
dress in the user’s program. With this command, program addresses can be
specified for a program of 10K or more.
Command Format
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
@
R
%
Node no.
Header
code
Program
address
Name
Timer/counter
(0000 to 0511)
Must be “0”
:
↵
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
1
0
1
0
3
2
1
0
:
↵
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
@
R
%
Node no.
Header
code
End code
Operand
SV
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Name, TC Number (Command)
Specify the name of the instruction for reading the SV in “Name”. Make this set-
ting in 4 characters. In “TC number”, specify the timer/counter number used by
the instruction.
Instruction name
OP2 OP3
Classification
TC number
range
OP1
OP4
(S)
0000 to 0511
T
T
C
C
T
I
M
TIMER
I
M
T
T
I
H
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
COUNTER
N
N
T
(S)
R
REVERSIBLE COUNTER
TOTALIZING TIMER
M
(S): Space
Operand, SV (Response)
The name that indicates the SV classification is returned to “Operand”, and ei-
ther the word address where the SV is stored or the constant SV is returned to
“SV”.
Operand
OP2 OP3
Classification
Constant or
word address
OP1
OP4
(S)
C
I
O
IR or SR
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0063
0000 to 0099
0000 to 0027
0000 to 6655
0000 to 6655
0000 to 9999
L
R
R
R
M
M
O
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
:
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
LR
H
A
D
D
C
HR
AR
DM
DM (indirect)
Constant
N
Note The instruction name specified under “Name” must be in four characters. Fill any
gaps with spaces to make a total of four characters.
416
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
11-3-18 SV CHANGE 1 –– W#
Searches for the first instance of the specified TIM, TIMH(15), CNT, CNTR(12),
or TTIM(87) instruction in the user’s program and changes the SV to new
constant SV specified in the second word of the instruction. The program is
searched from the beginning, and it may therefore take approximately 10 se-
conds to produce a response.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
↵
x 10 x 10
OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
:
@
W
#
Node no.
Header
code
Name
Timer/counter
(0000 to 0511)
SV (0000 to 9999)
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
:
↵
@
W
#
Node no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Name, TC Number (Command)
In “Name”, specify the name of the instruction, in four characters, for changing
the SV. In “TC number”, specify the timer/counter number used for the instruc-
tion.
Instruction name
OP2 OP3
Classification
TC number
range
OP1
OP4
(S)
0000 to 0511
T
T
C
C
T
I
M
TIMER
I
M
T
T
I
H
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
COUNTER
N
N
T
(S)
R
REVERSIBLE COUNTER
TOTALIZING TIMER
M
(S): Space
11-3-19 SV CHANGE 2 –– W$
Changes the contents of the second word of the TIM, TIMH(15), CNT,
CNTR(12), or TTIM(87) at the specified program address in the user’s program.
This can only be done with a program of less than 10K.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
@
W
$
Node no.
Header
code
Program
address
Name
Timer/counter
(0000 to 0511)
3
2
1
0
OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
:
↵
Operand
SV
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
1
0
1
0
:
↵
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
@
W
$
Node no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
417
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
Parameters
Name, TC Number (Command)
In “Name”, specify the name of the instruction, in four characters, for changing
the SV. In “TC number”, specify the timer/counter number used for the instruc-
tion.
Instruction name
OP2 OP3
Classification
TC number
range
OP1
OP4
(S)
0000 to 0511
T
T
C
C
T
I
M
TIMER
I
M
T
T
I
H
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
COUNTER
N
N
T
(S)
R
REVERSIBLE COUNTER
TOTALIZING TIMER
M
(S): Space
Operand, SV (Response)
In “Operand”, specify the name that indicates the SV classification. Specify the
name in four characters. In “SV”, specify either the word address where the SV is
stored or the constant SV.
Operand
OP2 OP3
Classification
Constant or
word address
OP1
OP4
(S)
C
I
O
IR or SR
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0063
0000 to 0099
0000 to 0027
0000 to 6655
0000 to 6655
0000 to 9999
L
R
R
R
M
M
O
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
:
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
LR
H
A
D
D
C
HR
AR
DM
DM (indirect)
Constant
N
(S): Space
11-3-20 SV CHANGE 3 –– W%
Changes the contents of the second word of the TIM, TIMH(15), CNT,
CNTR(12), or TTIM(87) at the specified program address in the user’s program.
With this command, program address can be specified for a program of more
than 10K.
Command Format
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
@
W
%
Node no.
Header
code
Program
address
Name
Timer/counter
(0000 to 0511)
Must be “0”
3
2
1
0
:
↵
OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
Operand
SV
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
@
W
%
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
418
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
Parameters
Name, TC Number (Command)
In “Name”, specify the name of the instruction, in four characters, for changing
the SV. In “TC number”, specify the timer/counter number used for the instruc-
tion.
Instruction name
OP2 OP3
Classification
TC number
range
OP1
OP4
(S)
0000 to 0511
T
T
C
C
T
I
M
TIMER
I
M
T
T
I
H
HIGH-SPEED TIMER
COUNTER
N
N
T
(S)
R
REVERSIBLE COUNTER
TOTALIZING TIMER
M
(S): Space
Operand, New SV (Response)
In “Operand”, specify the name that indicates the SV classification. Specify the
name in four characters. In “SV”, specify either the word address where the SV is
stored or the constant SV.
Operand
OP2 OP3
Classification
Constant or
word address
OP1
OP4
(S)
C
I
O
IR or SR
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0063
0000 to 0099
0000 to 0027
0000 to 6655
0000 to 6655
0000 to 9999
L
R
R
R
M
M
O
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
:
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
LR
H
A
D
D
C
HR
AR
DM
DM (indirect)
Constant
N
(S): Space
11-3-21 STATUS READ –– MS
Reads the PC operating conditions.
Command Format
1
0
x 10 x 10
@
M
S
:
↵
Node no.
Header
code
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
1
0
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 16 characters
:
↵
@
M
S
Node no.
Header
code
End code
Status data
Message
FCS
Terminator
419
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
Parameters
Status Data, Message (Response)
“Status data” consists of four digits (two bytes) hexadecimal. The leftmost byte
indicates CPU operation mode, and the rightmost byte indicates the size of the
program area.
3
2
x 16
x 16
Bit
14 13 12 11 10
9
8
15
0
0
0
Bit
Operation mode
9
0
1
1
8
0
0
1
1: Remote I/O
waiting for power
application
PROGRAM mode
RUN mode
1: Fatal error generated
This area is different
from that of
1: FALS generated
MONITOR mode
STATUS WRITE.
1
0
x 16
x 16
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
0
0
0
Program area write enable
0: Disabled (DIP switch pin 1 is ON)
1: Enabled (DIP switch pin 1 is OFF)
Bit
5
Program area
32 Kbytes
6
4
1
0
0
“Message” indicates the FAL/FALS number generated at the point when the
command is executed. When there is no message, this is omitted.
11-3-22 STATUS WRITE –– SC
Changes the PC operating mode.
Command Format
1
0
1
0
:
↵
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
@
S
C
Node no.
Header
code
Mode data
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
1
0
1
0
:
↵
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
@
S
C
Node no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
420
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
Parameters
Mode Data (Command)
“Mode data” consists of two digits (one byte) hexadecimal. With the leftmost two
bits, specify the PC operating mode. Set all of the remaining bits to “0”.
1
0
x 16
x 16
Bit
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit
Operation mode
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
PROGRAM mode
MONITOR mode
RUN mode
This area is different
from that of STATUS
READ.
11-3-23 ERROR READ –– MF
Reads and clears errors in the PC. Also checks whether previous errors have
been cleared.
Command Format
1
0
1
0
:
↵
x 10 x 10
x 10 x 10
@
M
F
Node no.
Header
code
Error clear
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
1
0
1
0
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
:
↵
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16
@
M
F
Node no.
Header
code
End code
Error information
(1st word)
Error information
(2nd word)
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Error Clear (Command)
Specify 01 to clear errors and 00 to not clear errors (BCD). Fatal errors can be
cleared only when the PC is in PROGRAM mode.
421
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
Error Information (Response)
The error information comes in two words.
1st word
3
2
1
0
x 16
x 16
x 16
x 16
Bit
14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
0
0
(Data from I/O bus)
1: Group 2 (data bus failure)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0: CPU Rack
0
1
1
1: Expansion I/O Rack 1
0: Expansion I/O Rack 2
1: Expansion I/O Rack 3
ON: Battery error (Error code F7)
ON: Special I/O Unit error
ON: System error (FAL)
ON: Memory error (Error code F1)
ON: I/O bus error (Error code C0)
ON: PC link error
ON: Host Link Unit transmission error
ON: No end instruction error (FALS)
ON: System error (FALS)
2nd word
3
2
1
0
x 16
x 16
x 16
x 16
Bit
14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
0
0
0
FAL, FALS No. (B CD00 to 99)
ON: I/O verify error (Error code F7)
ON: Cycle time overrun (Error code F8)
ON: I/O Unit overflow (Error code E1)
ON: I/O setting error (Error code E0)
ON: Remote I/O error (Error codes B0 to B3)
11-3-24 FORCED SET –– KS
Force sets a bit in the IR, SR, LR, HR, AR, or TC area. Once a bit has been forced
set or reset, that status will be retained until FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL
(KC) is transmitted.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
:
↵
@
K
S
Node no.
Header
code
Name
Word
address
Bit
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
1
0
1
0
:
↵
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
@
K
S
Node no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
422
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
Parameters
Name, Word address, Bit (Command)
In “Name”, specify the area (i.e., IR, SR, LR, HR, AR, or TC) that is to be forced
set. Specify the name in four characters. In “Word address”, specify the address
of the word, and in “Bit” the number of the bit that is to be forced set.
Name
Classification
Word address setting
range
Bit
OP1
OP2
OP3
OP4
(S)
00 to 15 (decimal)
C
I
O
IR or SR
LR
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0063
0000 to 0099
0000 to 0027
0000 to 0511
L
R
R
R
I
(S)
(S)
(S)
M
M
T
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
H
H
A
T
T
C
C
T
HR
AR
Always 00.
Completion Flag (timer)
I
Completion Flag (high-speed timer)
Completion Flag (counter)
N
N
T
(S)
R
T
Completion Flag (reversible counter)
Completion Flag (totalizing timer)
I
M
(S): Space
Note 1. The area specified under “Name” must be in four characters. Fill any gaps
with spaces to make a total of four characters.
2. Words 253 to 255 cannot be set when the CIO Area is specified.
11-3-25 FORCED RESET –– KR
Force resets a bit in an IR, SR, LR, HR, AR, or TC area. Once a bit has been
forced set or reset, that status will be retained until FORCED SET/RESET CAN-
CEL (KC) is transmitted.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
:
↵
@
K
R
Node no.
Header
code
Name
Word
address
Bit
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
:
↵
@
K
R
Node no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Name, Word address, Bit (Command)
In “Name”, specify the area (i.e., IR, SR, LR, HR, AR, or TC) that is to be forced
reset. Specify the name in four characters. In “Word address”, specify the ad-
dress of the word, and in “Bit” the number of the bit that is to be forced reset.
Name
OP2 OP3
Classification
Word address setting
range
Bit
OP1
OP4
00 to 15 (decimal)
C
I
O
(S)
IR or SR
LR
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0063
0000 to 0099
0000 to 0027
0000 to 0511
L
R
R
R
I
(S)
(S)
(S)
M
M
T
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
H
H
A
T
T
C
C
T
HR
AR
Always 00.
Completion Flag (timer)
I
Completion Flag (high-speed timer)
Completion Flag (counter)
N
N
T
(S)
R
T
Completion Flag (reversible counter)
Completion Flag (totalizing timer)
I
M
(S): Space
423
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
Note 1. The area specified under “Name” must be in four characters. Fill any gaps
with spaces to make a total of four characters.
2. Words 253 to 255 cannot be set when the CIO Area is specified.
11-3-26 MULTIPLE FORCED SET/RESET –– FK
Force sets, force resets, or cancels the status of the bits in one word in the IR,
SR, LR, HR, AR, or TC area.
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
@
F
K
Node no.
Header
code
Name
Word
address
Forced set/reset/cancel data
x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16
:
↵
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
x 16 x 16
FCS
Terminator
15
14
13
12
11
10
1
0
Bit
Response Format
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
:
↵
@
F
K
Node no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Name, Word address (Command)
In “Name”, specify the area (i.e., IR, SR, LR, HR, AR, or TC) that is to be forced
set or reset. Specify the name in four characters. In “Word address”, specify the
address of the word that is to be forced set or reset.
Name
OP2 OP3
Classification
Word address setting
range
Bit
OP1
OP4
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
(S)
H
00 to 15 (decimal)
C
I
O
IR or SR
LR
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0063
0000 to 0099
0000 to 0027
0000 to 0511
L
R
R
R
I
(S)
(S)
(S)
M
M
T
H
A
T
T
C
C
T
HR
AR
Always 00.
Completion Flag (timer)
I
Completion Flag (high-speed timer)
Completion Flag (counter)
N
N
T
(S)
R
T
Completion Flag (reversible counter)
Completion Flag (totalizing timer)
I
M
(S): Space
Note Words 253 to 255 cannot be set when the CIO Area is specified.
424
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
Forced set/reset/cancel Data (Command)
A separate hexadecimal digit is used to specify the desired process for each bit
in the specified word, bits 00 to bit 5. The bits that are merely set or reset may
change status the next time the program is executed, but bits that are force-set
or force-reset will maintain the forced status until it is cleared. If the item speci-
fied under “Name” is a timer or counter, the status of the Completion Flag can be
force-set or force-reset using bit 15, and all other bits will be ignored. Only force-
setting and force-resetting are possible for timers/counters.
Bits 00 to 15
Setting
00
02
03
04
05
08
Bit status not changed
Reset
Set
Forced-reset
Forced-set
Forced set/reset status cancel
Note The item specified under “Name” must be in four characters. Fill any gaps with
spaces to make a total of four characters.
11-3-27 FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL –– KC
Cancels all forced set and forced reset bits (including those set by FORCED
SET, FORCED RESET, and MULTIPLE FORCED SET/RESET). If multiple bits
are set, the forced status will be cancelled for all of them. It is not possible to can-
cel bits one by one using KC.
Command Format
Response Format
1
0
x 10 x 10
:
↵
@
K
C
Node no.
Header
code
FCS
Terminator
1
0
1
0
:
↵
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
@
K
C
Node no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
11-3-28 PC MODEL READ –– MM
Reads the model type of the PC.
Command Format
1
0
x 10 x 10
:
↵
@
M
M
Node no.
Header
code
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
1
0
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16
:
↵
@
M
M
Node no.
Header
code
End code
Model
code
FCS
Terminator
425
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
Parameters
Model Code
“Model code” indicates the PC model in two digits hexadecimal.
Model code
Model
01
02
03
0E
10
11
12
20
21
22
40
41
C250
C500
C120
C2000
C1000H
C2000H/CQM1
C20H/C28H/C40H/C200H/C200HS
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1-CPU01-E
CVM1-CPU11-E
11-3-29 TEST–– TS
Returns, unaltered, one block of data transmitted from the host computer.
Command Format
1
0
:
↵
x 10 x 10
122 characters max.
Characters
@
T
S
FCS
Terminator
Node no.
Header
code
Response Format
1
0
x 10 x 10
122 characters max.
Characters
:
↵
@
T
S
FCS
Terminator
Node no.
Header
code
Parameters
Characters (Command, Response)
For the command, this setting specifies any characters other than the carriage
return (CHR$(13)). For the response, the same characters as specified by the
command will be returned unaltered if the test is successful.
11-3-30 PROGRAM READ –– RP
Reads the contents of the PC user’s program area in machine language (object
code). The contents are read as a block, from the beginning to the end.
Command Format
1
0
x 10 x 10
:
↵
@
R
P
Node no.
Header
code
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
1
0
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16
:
↵
@
R
P
Node no.
Header
code
End code
1 byte
Program (for entire UM area)
FCS
Terminator
426
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
Parameters
Program (Response)
The program is read from the entire program area.
Note To stop this operation in progress, execute the ABORT (XZ) command.
11-3-31 PROGRAM WRITE –– WP
Writes to the PC user’s program area the machine language (object code) pro-
gram transmitted from the host computer. The contents are written as a block,
from the beginning.
Command Format
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
:
↵
@
W
P
Node no.
Header
code
1 byte
FCS
Terminator
Program (Up to maximum memory size)
Response Format
1
0
1
0
:
↵
@
x 10 x 10
W
P
x 16 x 16
Node no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Program ((Command)
Program data up to the maximum memory size.
11-3-32 I/O TABLE GENERATE –– MI
Corrects the registered I/O table to match the actual I/O table.
Command Format
Response Format
1
0
:
↵
@
x 10 x 10
M
I
Node no.
Header
code
FCS
Terminator
1
0
1
0
:
↵
@
x 10 x 10
M
I
x 16 x 16
Node no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
11-3-33 COMPOUND COMMAND –– QQ
Registers at the PC all of the bits, words, and timers/counters that are to be read,
and reads the status of all of them as a batch.
Registering Read Information
Register the information on all of the bits, words, and timers/counters that are to
be read.
427
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
Command Format
1
0
3
2
1
0
@
x 10 x 10
Q
Q
M
R
OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 OP1 OP2
,
Node no.
Header Sub-header
code code
Read area
Read word address
Data
format
Data break
Single read information
Total read information (128 max.)
3
2
1
0
:
↵
OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10 OP1 OP2
,
Data break
Read area
Read word address
Data
format
FCS
Terminator
Single read information
Total read information (128 max.)
Response Format
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
:
↵
@
Q
Q
M
R
Node no.
Header
code
Sub-header End code
code
FCS
Terminator
Parameters
Read Area (Command)
Specify in four-character code the area that is to be read. The codes that can be
specified are listed in the following table.
Read Word address, Data Format (Command)
Depending on the area and type of data that are to be read, the information to be
read is as shown in the following table. The “read data” is specified in four digits
BCD, and the data format is specified in two digits BCD.
Area classification
Read data
Read area
C I O (S)
Read word
Data format
IR or SR
0000 to 0255
Bit
Word
00 to 15 (decimal)
“CH”
LR
L R (S) (S)
H R (S) (S)
A R (S) (S)
T I M (S)
T I M H
0000 to 0063
0000 to 0099
0000 to 0027
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0511
0000 to 6655
Bit
00 to 15 (decimal)
Word
Bit
“CH”
HR
00 to 15 (decimal)
Word
Bit
“CH”
AR
00 to 15 (decimal)
Bit
“CH”
Timer
Completion Flag
2 characters other than “CH”
PV
“CH”
High-speed timer
Counter
Completion Flag
2 characters other than “CH”
PV
“CH”
C N T (S)
C N T R
Completion Flag
2 characters other than “CH”
PV
“CH”
Reversible counter
Totalizing timer
DM
Completion Flag
2 characters other than “CH”
“CH”
PV
T T I M
Completion Flag
2 characters other than “CH”
“CH”
PV
Word
D M (S) (S)
Any 2 characters
(S): Space
428
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
Data Break (Command)
The read information is specified one item at a time separated by a break code
(,). The maximum number of items that can be specified is 128. (When the PV of
a timer/counter is specified, however, the status of the Completion Flag is also
returned, and must therefore be counted as two items.)
Batch Reading
The bit, word, and timer/counter status is read as a batch according to the read
information that was registered with QQ.
Command Format
1
0
x 10 x 10
:
↵
@
Q
Q
I
R
Node no.
Header
code
Sub-header
code
FCS
Terminator
Response Format
ON/
OFF
1
0
1
0
3
2
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
x 10 x 10 x 10 x 10
@
Q
Q
I
R
,
Data break
Node no.
Header
code
Sub-header End code
code
Timer/Counter
If PV is specified the sta-
tus of the Completion Flag
is also returned.
ON/
OFF
3
2
1
0
,
,
x 16 x 16 x 16 x 16
:
↵
,
Word data
FCS
Terminator
IR, SR, LR, HR,
AR, DM
Bit data
ON/OFF
Parameters
Read Data (Response)
Read data is returned according to the data format and the order in which read
information was registered using QQ. If “Completion Flag” has been specified,
then bit data (ON or OFF) is returned. If “Word” has been specified, then word
data is returned. If “PV” has been specified for timers/counters, however, then
the PV is returned following the Completion Flag.
Data Break (Response)
The break code (, ) is returned between sections that are read.
11-3-34 ABORT –– XZ
Aborts the Host Link operation that is currently being processed, and then en-
ables reception of the next command. The ABORT command does not receive a
response.
Command Format
1
0
x 10 x 10
:
↵
@
X
Z
Node no.
Header
code
FCS
Terminator
429
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Commands
Section 11-3
11-3-35 INITIALIZE –– ::
Initializes the transmission control procedure of all the PCs connected to the
host computer. The INITIALIZE command does not use node numbers or FCS,
and does not receive a response.
Command Format
:
:
↵
@
11-3-36 Undefined Command –– IC
This response is returned if the header code of a command cannot be decoded.
Check the header code.
Response Format
1
0
x 10 x 10
:
↵
@
I
C
Node no.
Header
code
FCS
Terminator
430
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Link Errors
Section 11-4
11-4 Host Link Errors
These error codes are received as the response code (end code) when a com-
mand received by the C200HS from a host computer cannot be processed. The
error code format is as shown below.
:
↵
@
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Node
no.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
The header code will vary according to the command and can contain a subcode
(for composite commands).
End
Contents
Probable cause
Corrective measures
code
00
Normal completion
Not executable in RUN mode
---
---
Check the relation between the
command and the PC mode.
01
02
0B
13
The command that was sent can-
not be executed when the PC is in
RUN mode.
Not executable in MONITOR mode The command that was sent can-
not be executed when the PC is in
MONITOR mode.
Not executable in PROGRAM
mode
The command that was sent can-
not be executed when the PC is in
PROGRAM mode.
This code is not presently being
used.
FCS error
The FCS is wrong. Either the FCS
calculation is mistaken or there is
adverse influence from noise.
Check the FCS calculation method.
If there was influence from noise,
transfer the command again.
14
15
16
18
19
Format error
The command format is wrong.
Check the format and transfer the
command again.
Entry number data error
Command not supported
Frame length error
The areas for reading and writing
are wrong.
Correct the areas and transfer the
command again.
The specified command does not
exist.
Check the command code.
The maximum frame length was
exceeded.
Divide the command into multiple
frames.
Not executable
Items to read not registered for
composite command (QQ).
Execute QQ to register items to
read before attempting batch read.
23
A3
User memory write-protected
Pin 1 on C200HS DIP switch is ON. Turn OFF pin 1 to execute.
The error was generated while a
command extending over more
than one frame was being execu-
ted.
Check the command data and try
the transfer again.
Aborted due to FCS error in trans-
mit data
A4
A5
A8
Aborted due to format error in
transmit data
Note: The data up to that point has
already been written to the ap-
propriate area of the CPU.
Aborted due to entry number data
error in transmit data
Aborted due to frame length error
in transmit data
Other ---
Influence from noise was received. Transfer the command again.
Power Interruptions
The following responses may be received from the C200HS if a power interrup-
tion occurs, including momentary interruptions. If any of these responses are re-
ceived during or after a power interruption, repeat the command.
Undefined Command Response
@00IC4A*↵
No Response
If no response is received, abort the last command and resend.
431
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
Standard Models
C200HS Racks
Name
Specifications
Model number
C200H-BC101-V2
C200H-BC081-V2
C200H-BC051-V2
C200H-BC031-V2
C200HS-CPU01-E
C200HS-CPU01-EC
Backplane (same for all Racks)
10 slots
8 slots
5 slots
3 slots
CPU Rack
CPU
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC w/built-in
power supply
–––
Conforms to EC
directives (see note)
RS-232C port
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU21-EC
RS-232C port and
conforms to EC
directives
RS-232C port and
SYSMAC NET/
SYSMAC LINK
supported
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU03-E
24 VDC w/built-in power supply
Conforms to EC
directives (see note)
RS-232C port
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
RS-232C port and
SYSMAC NET/
SYSMAC LINK
supported
Memory Cassette
ROM-JD-B
EPROM Chip; 27256; 150 ns
EPROM Chip; 27512; 150 ns
EEPROM; 16K words
ROM-KD-B
C200HS-ME16K
C200HS-MP16K
C200H-PS221
C200H-PS221-C
EPROM; 16K words
Expansion
I/O Racks
I/O Power Supply
Unit
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (switchable)
Conforms to EC
directives
24 VDC
Conforms to EC
directives (see note)
C200H-PS211
I/O Connecting
Cable (max. total
length: 12 m)
30 cm
70 cm
2 m
C200H-CN311
C200H-CN711
C200H-CN221
C200H-CN521
C200H-CN131
C200H-RT001-P
C200H-RT002-P
C200H-RT201
C200H-RT201-C
C200H-RT202
5 m
10 m
Slave
Racks
Remote I/O Slave
Unit
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (switchable)
24 VDC
APF/
PCF
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (switchable)
Wired
Conforms to EC directives
24 VDC
Note: Units with lot numbers jjZ5 (Dec. 1995) or later.
433
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Models
Appendix A
C200H Standard I/O Units
Name
Specifications
100 to 120 VAC
Model number
C200H-IA121
Input Units
AC Input Unit
8 pts
16 pts
8 pts
100 to 120 VAC
C200H-IA122/122V
C200H-IA221
200 to 240 VAC
16 pts
8 pts
200 to 240 VAC
C200H-IA222/222V
C200H-ID001
DC Input Unit
No-voltage contact; NPN
No-voltage contact; PNP
12 to 24 VDC
8 pts
C200H-ID002
8 pts
C200H-ID211
16 pts
8 pts
24 VDC
C200H-ID212
AC/DC Input Unit
Interrupt Input Unit
12 to 24 VAC/DC
C200H-IM211
C200H-IM212
C200HS-INT01
C200H-OC221
C200H-OC222
16 pts
8 pts
24 VAC/DC
1
12 to 24 VDC
Output Units Relay Output Unit
8 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VAC (For resistive loads)
12 pts
16 pts
5 pts
2, 3
C200H-OC225
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
Independent commons
C200H-OC223
8 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
Independent commons
C200H-OC224
12 pts
16 pts
8 pts
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
C200H-OC222V
C200H-OC226
C200H-OC224V
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads)
Independent commons
Triac Output Unit
8 pts
1 A, 120 VAC
C200H-OA121-E
C200H-OA122-E
C200H-OA221
C200H-OA222V
C200H-OA224
C200H-OD411
C200H-OD211
8 pts
1.2 A, 120 VAC
1 A, 200 VAC
8 pts
12 pts
12 pts
8 pts
0.3 A, 250 VAC
0.5 A, 250 VAC
1 A, 12 to 48 VDC
0.3 A, 24 VDC
0.3 A, 24 VDC
2.1 A, 24 VDC
Transistor Output
Unit
12 pts
16 pts
8 pts
2
C200H-OD212
C200H-OD213
C200H-OD214
8 pts
0.8 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with load
short protection
8 pts
5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP)
5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP)
C200H-OD216
C200H-OD217
C200H-OD21A
12 pts
16 pts
1.0 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with load
short protection
Analog Timer Unit
4 timers
0.1 to 1 s/1 to 10 s/10 to 60 s/1 min to 10 min
(switchable)
C200H-TM001
C4K-CN223
Variable Resistor
Connector
Connector w/lead wire (2 m) for 1 external resistor
Standard B7A Interface Units
Connects to B7A Link Terminals.
16 input pts
C200H-B7AI1
C200H-B7AO1
16 output pts
Note 1. If the Interrupt Input Unit is mounted on an Expansion I/O Rack, the interrupt function cannot be used and the Inter-
rupt Input Unit will be treated as an ordinary 8-point Input Unit. Moreover, Interrupt Input Units cannot be used on
Slave Racks. In addition, Interrupt Input Units require that a version 2 (i.e., model numbers with a “-V2” suffix) Back-
plane be used at the CPU Rack. If an earlier version Backplane is mounted, the interrupt function cannot be used.
2. Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD212 and Contact Output Unit C200H-OC225 must be mounted to either a C200H-
BC031-V1/V2, C200H-BC051-V1/V2, C200H-BC081-V1/V2, or C200H-BC101-V1/V2 Backplane.
3. The C200H-OC225 might overheat if more than 8 outputs are turned ON simultaneously.
434
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Models
Appendix A
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units
Name
Specifications
Model number
C200H-ID216
C200H-ID218
C200H-ID217
C200H-ID219
C200H-OD218
C200H-OD21B
C200H-OD219
DC Input Unit
32 pts.
64 pts.
24 VDC
24 VDC
Transistor Output Unit 32 pts.
64 pts.
16 mA 4.5 VDC to 100 mA 26.4 VDC
0.5 A (5A/Unit) 24 VDC
16 mA 4.5 VDC to 100 mA 26.4 VDC
C200H Group-2 B7A Interface Units
Name
Specifications
Model number
C200H-B7A12
C200H-B7A02
C200H-B7A21
C200H-B7A22
Group-2 B7A Interface Units
Connects to B7A Link
Terminals.
32 input pts
32 output pts
16 input pts and 16 output points
32 input pts and 32 output points
C200H Special I/O Units
All of the following are classified as Special I/O Units except for the ASCII Unit, which is an Intelligent I/O Unit.
Name
Specifications
Model number
C200H-ID501
C200H-ID215
High-den-
sity I/O
Units
DC Input Unit 32 pts
5 VDC (TTL inputs); with high-speed input function
24 VDC; with high-speed inputs
32 pts
32 pts
Transistor
0.1 A, 24 VDC (usable as 128-point dynamic output unit) C200H-OD215
Output Unit
32 pts
35 mA, 5 VDC (TTL outputs) (usable as 128-point dy- C200H-OD501
namic output unit)
DC Input/
Transistor
Output Unit
16 input/
12-VDC inputs; with high-speed input function
C200H-MD115
16 output pts 0.1 A , 12-VDC outputs (usable as 128-point dynamic in-
put unit)
16 input/
24-VDC inputs; with high-speed input function
C200H-MD215
16 output pts 0.1 A , 24-VDC outputs (usable as 128-point dynamic in-
put unit)
16 input/
5 VDC (TTL inputs); with high speed input function 35 C200H-MD501
16 output pts mA, 5 VDC Output (TTL outputs) (usable as 128-point
dynamic input unit)
Analog I/O Analog Input
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10 V (switchable); 4 inputs
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10/–10 to 10 V (switchable); 8 inputs
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10 V (switchable); 2 outputs
C200H-AD001
C200H-AD002
C200H-DA001
Units
Unit
Analog
Output Unit
Temperature Sensor Unit
Thermocouple (K(CA) or J(IC)) (switchable); 4 inputs
C200H-TS001
C200H-TS002
Thermocouple (K(CA) or L(Fe-CuNi)) (switchable); 4 inputs
Platinum resistance thermometer (JPt) (switchable), DIN standards; C200H-TS101
4 inputs
Platinum resistance thermometer (Pt) (switchable); 4 inputs
Thermocou- Transistor output
C200H-TS102
C200H-TC001
C200H-TC002
C200H-TC003
C200H-TC101
Temperature Control Unit
ple
Voltage output
Current output
Pt resis-
tance ther-
mometer
Transistor output
Voltage output
Current output
C200H-TC102
C200H-TC103
435
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Models
Appendix A
Name
Specifications
Thermocou- Transistor output
ple
Model number
Heat/Cool Temperature
Control Unit
C200H-TV001
Voltage output
Current output
Transistor output
C200H-TV002
C200H-TV003
C200H-TV101
Pt resis-
tance ther-
mometer
Voltage output
Current output
C200H-TV102
C200H-TV103
C200H-PID01
C200H-PID02
C200H-PID03
C200H-NC111
PID Control Unit
Transistor output
Voltage output
Current output
Position Control Unit
1 axis
1 axis
Pulse output; speeds: 1 to 99,990 pps
Directly connectable to servomotor driver; compatible C200H-NC112
with line driver; speeds: 1 to 250,000 pps
2 axis
1 to 250000. pps. 53 pts per axis
C200H-NC211
Cam Positioner Unit
Detects angles of rotation by means of a resolver and provides ON and C200H-CP114
OFF outputs at specified angles. A maximum of 48 cam outputs (16 ex-
ternal outputs and 32 internal outputs) maximum are available.
High-speed Counter Unit
1 axis
Pulse input; counting speed: 50 kcps;
5 VDC/12 VDC/24 VDC
C200H-CT001-V1
1 axis
Pulse input; counting speed: 75 kcps;
RS-422 line driver
C200H-CT002
ASCII Unit
EEPROM
C200H-ASC02
C200H-IDS01-V1
C200H-IDS21
I/D Sensor Unit
Local application, electromagnetic coupling
Remote application, microwave transmissions
Electromagnetic type
Read/Write
Head
V600-H series
V620-H series
V600-DjjRjj
V600-DjjPjj
C200H-OV001
C200H-CN224
Microwave type
Data Carrier SRAM type for V600-H series.
(see note)
EEPROM type for V600-H series.
60 messages max.; message length: 32, 48, or 64 s (switchable)
RS-232C
Voice Unit
Connecting
Cable
Fuzzy Logic Unit
Fuzzy
Up to 8 inputs and 4 outputs. (I/O to and from specified data area words) C200H-FZ001
C500-SU981-E
Available on either 3.5” or 5.25” floppy disks.
Support
Software
Note For Read/Write Head and Data Carrier combinations, refer to the V600 FA ID System R/W Heads and EE-
PROM Data Carriers Operation Manual and Supplement or V600 FA ID System R/W Heads and SRAM
Data Carriers Operation Manual and Supplement.
C200H Link Units
Name
Host Link Unit
Specifications
Model number
C200H-LK101-PV1
C200H-LK202-V1
C200H-LK201-V1
C200H-LK401
Rack-mounting
C200H only
APF/PCF
RS-422
RS-232C
RS-485
PC Link Unit
Multilevel
Remote I/O Master Unit
Up to two per PC; connectable to up to 5
Slaves per PC total
APF/PCF
C200H-RM001-PV1
Wired
C200H-RM201
436
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Models
Appendix A
SYSMAC LINK Unit/SYSMAC NET Link Unit
The SYSMAC LINK Units and SYSMAC NET Link Unit can only be used with the C200HS-CPU31-E and C200HS-
CPU33-E CPUs.
Name
Specifications
Wired via coaxial cable.
Model number
C200HS-SLK22
SYSMAC LINK Unit
Bus Connection Unit required separately. One
C1000H-CE001 F Adapter included.
Wired via optical fiber cable.
C200HS-SLK12
Bus Connection Unit required separately. An Optical Fiber
Cable Bracket must be used to support an optical cable con-
nected to the SYSMAC LINK Unit.
Terminator
One required for each node at ends of System
C1000H-TER01
C200H-TL001
C1000H-CE001
C1000H-COV01
ECXF5C-2V
Attachment Stirrup
Provided with SYSMAC LINK Unit
F Adapter
---
---
F Adapter Cover
Communications
Cable
Coaxial cables
Manufactured by Hitachi
Manufactured by Fujigura
5C-2V
Auxiliary Power Sup- Supplies backup power to either one or two SYSMAC LINK
C200H-APS03
ply Unit
Units. One C200H-CN111 Power Connecting Cable included.
SYSMAC NET Link Unit
Bus Connection Unit required separately. An Optical Fiber
Cable Bracket must be used to support an optical cable con-
nected to the SYSMAC NET Link Unit.
C200HS-SNT32
Power Supply Adapt- Required when supplying power from Central
For 1 Unit
For 2 Units
For 1 Unit
For 2 Units
For 1 Unit
For 2 Units
C200H-APS01
C200H-APS02
C200H-CN111
C200H-CN211
C200H-CE001
C200H-CE002
er
Power Supply
Connects Power Supply Adapter and SYS-
MAC NET Link Unit
Power Cable
Connects SYSMAC LINK Unit or SYSMAC
NET Link Unit to C200HS-CPU31-E/CPU33-E
Bus Connection Unit
Optional Products
Name
Specifications
Model number
I/O Unit Cover
Cover for 10-pin terminal block
C200H-COV11
C200H-COV02
C200H-COV03
Terminal Block Cover
Short protection for 10-pin terminal block
Short protection for 19-pin terminal block
Connector Cover
Space Unit
Protective cover for unused I/O Connecting Cable connectors C500-COV02
Used for vacant slots
For C200H RAM Memory Unit only
24 VDC
C200H-SP001
C200H-BAT09
G6B-1174P-FD-US DC24
C200H-ATTA1
C200H-ATT81
C200H-ATT51
C200H-ATT31
C200H-ATTA3
C200H-ATT83
C200H-ATT53
C200H-ATT33
Battery Set
Relay
Backplane Insulation Plate
For 10-slot Backplane
For 8-slot Backplane
For 5-slot Backplane
For 3-slot Backplane
For 10-slot Backplane
For 8-slot Backplane
For 5-slot Backplane
For 3-slot Backplane
I/O Bracket
Note 1. When ordering, specify the model name (any component of which is not sold separately).
2. Order the press-fit tool from the manufacturer.
437
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Models
Appendix A
Mounting Rails and Accessories
Name
Specifications
Model number
C200H-DIN01
DIN Track Mounting Bracket 1 set (2 included)
DIN Track
Length: 50 cm; height: 7.3 mm
PFP-50N
PFP-100N
PFP-100N2
PFP-M
Length: 1 m; height: 7.3 mm
Length: 1 m; height: 16 mm
End Plate
Spacer
---
---
PFP-S
Link Adapters
Name
Specifications
Model number
Link Adapter
3 RS-422 connectors
3G2A9-AL001
3 optical connectors (APF/PCF)
3G2A9-AL002-PE
3G2A9-AL002-E
3G2A9-AL004-PE
3G2A9-AL004-E
3G2A9-AL005-PE
3G2A9-AL005-E
3G2A9-AL006-PE
3G2A9-AL006-E
B500-AL007-PE
3 optical connectors (PCF)
1 connector each for APF/PCF, RS-422, and RS-232C
1 connector each for PCF, RS-422, and RS-232C
1 connector each for APF/PCF and APF
1 connector each for PCF and AGF
1 connector for APF/PCF; 2 for AGF
1 connector for PCF; 2 for AGF
O/E converter; 1 connector for RS-485, 1 connector each for APF/PCF
Used for on-line removal of SYSMAC NET Link Units from the SYSMAC B700-AL001
NET Link System, SYSMAC NET Optical Link Adapter 3 connectors for
APF/PCF.
SYSMAC BUS/SYSMAC WAY Optical Fiber Products
Plastic Clad Optical Fiber Cable/All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable
Name
Specifications
Model number
3G5A2-OF011
3G5A2-OF101
3G5A2-OF201
3G5A2-OF301
3G5A2-OF501
3G5A2-OF111
3G5A2-OF211
3G5A2-OF311
3G5A2-OF411
3G5A2-OF511
B500-OF002
Plastic Clad Optical Fiber Cable
(indoor)
Ambient temp:
–10° to 70°C
0.1 m, w/connectors
1 m, w/connectors
2 m, w/connectors
3 m, w/connectors
5 m, w/connectors
10 m, w/connectors
20 m, w/connectors
30 m, w/connectors
40 m, w/connectors
50 m, w/connectors
Cable only; order desired length between 1
and 200 m in increments of 1 m.
All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable
Cable only; order desired length in 5 m increments between
5 and 100 m, or in increments of 200 m or 500 m.
B500-PF002
Optical Connectors A
Optical Connectors B
Two optical connectors (brown) for APF (10 m max.)
Two optical connectors (black) for APF (8 to 20 m)
3G5A2-CO001
3G5A2-CO002
438
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Models
Appendix A
Name
Specifications
Model number
All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable Set 1-m cable with an Optical Connector A connected to each
end
3G5A2-PF101
Optical Fiber Processing Kit
Accessory: 125-mm nipper (Muromoto Tekko’s 550M) for
APF
3G2A9-TL101
H-PCF
Name
Specifications
Model number
S3200-HCCB101
S3200-HCCB501
S3200-HCCB102
S3200-HCCB502
S3200-HCCB103
S3200-HCCO101
S3200-HCCO501
S3200-HCCO102
S3200-HCCO502
S3200-HCCO103
S3200-HBCB101
S3200-HBCB501
S3200-HBCB102
S3200-HBCB502
S3200-HBCB103
Optical Fiber Cable
SYSMAC BUS, SYSMAC WAY
10 m, black
Two-core cable
50 m, black
100 m, black
500 m, black
1000 m, black
10 m, orange
50 m, orange
100 m, orange
500 m, orange
1000 m, orange
10 m, black
Two-core cable
50 m, black
100 m, black
500 m, black
1000 m, black
SYSMAC BUS:
Optical Fiber Cable Connector
Half-lock connector S3200-COCH82
for Remote I/O Mas-
ter, Remote I/O
C200H-RM001-PV1
C200H-RT001/RT002-P
C500-RM001-(P)V1
C500-RT001/RT002-(P)V1
B500-jjj(-P)
Slave, Host Link
Unit, and Link
Adapter
Note 1. Optical fiber cables must be prepared and connected by specialists.
2. If the user prepares and connects optical fiber cables, the user must take a seminar held under the aus-
pices of Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd. and obtain a proper certificate.
3. The Optical Power Tester, Head Unit, Master Fiber Set, and Optical Fiber Assembling Tool are required
to connect optical fiber cables.
Optical Fiber Assembling Tool
Name
Specifications
Model number
Optical Fiber Assembling Tool
Used to connect H-PCF and crimp-cut connectors for opti- S3200-CAK1062
cal transmission systems such as the SYSMAC C- and
CV-series SYSMAC BUS, SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC
NET.
Note 1. Optical fiber cables must be prepared and connected by specialists.
2. The Optical Power Tester, Head Unit, Master Fiber set, and Optical Fiber Assembling Tool are required
to connect optical fiber cables.
439
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Models
Appendix A
Optical Power Tester
Name
Specifications
SYSMAC BUS:
Head Unit
Model number
Optical Power Tester (see note)
(provided with a connector adapter,
light source unit, small single-head
plug, hard case, and AC adapter)
S3200-CAT2822
(provided with the
Tester)
S3200-CAT2820
C200H-RM001-PV1
C200H-RT001/RT002-P
C500-RM001-(P)V1
C500-RT001/RT002-(P)V1
Note: There is no difference between the light source unit and connector adapter for the Head Unit and those for
the Optical Power Tester.
Head Unit
Name
Specifications
Model number
Head Unit (a set consisting of light
source unit and connector adapter)
(see note)
SYSMAC BUS:
C200H-RM001-PV1
C200H-RT001/RT002-P
S3200-CAT2822
SYSMAC NET:
S3200-CAT3202
S3200-LSU03-V1/LSU03-01E
C500-SNT31-V4
3G8FX-TM111
3G8SX-TM111
Note: Use a proper Head Unit model for the optical module to be used. If two types of optical modules (unit type
and board type) are used, order an Optical Power Tester plus a proper Head Unit model.
Master Fiber Set
Name
Specifications
Model number
S3200-CAT3201
S3200-CAT2001H
Master Fiber Set (1 m)
S3200-CAT3202 (SYSMAC NET, NSB, NSU, Bridge)
S3200-CAT2002/CAT2702 (SYSMAC NET, SYSMAC
LINK)
S3200-CAT2822 (SYSMAC BUS)
S3200-CAT2821
Note 1. The Master Fiber Set is used in combination with the Optical Power Tester to check the optical levels of
optical fiber cables connected to optical fiber cable connectors.
2. Optical fiber cables must be prepared and connected by specialists.
3. The Optical Power Tester, Head Unit, Master Fiber set, and Optical Fiber Assembling Tool are required
to connect optical fiber cables.
SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link Optical Fiber Products
Optical Fiber Cables for SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC NET Link Systems
Use hard-plastic-clad quartz optical fiber (H-PCF) cables for SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC NET Link Systems.
H-PCF cables are available with connectors already attached, or cables and connectors can be purchased sepa-
rately and assembled by the user. Refer to the System Manual for the SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET Link Sys-
tems for assembly procedures. Models numbers for H-PCF cables with connecters attached are provided in the
following illustration.
Model Numbers for H-PCF Cables with Connectors
S3200-CNjjj-jj-jj
Cable length
Connectors
201:
501:
102:
152:
202:
Blank:
2 m
5 m
10 m
15 m
20 m
Over 20 m
(Specify.)
20-25:
25-25:
Full-lock connector on
one end, half-lock con-
nector on other end.
Half-lock connectors
on both ends.
440
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Models
Appendix A
An Optical Fiber Cable Bracket must be used to support an optical fiber cable connected to the C200HS-SNT32
SYSMAC NET Link Unit or C200HS-SLK12 SYSMAC LINK Unit.
User optical fiber cables with both tension members and power supply lines.
The following half-lock connector is used and connects to the C200HS SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC NET Link
Units: S3200-COCF2511.
The following full-lock connector is used and connects to the CV500 SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC NET Link Units
and the C1000H SYSMAC LINK Unit: S3200-COCF2011. This full-lock connector cannot be connected to the
C200HS SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC NET Link Units.
The above connectors cannot be used for the C500 SYSMAC NET Link Unit, cable relays, and the SYSMAC NET
Link Network Service Board. Refer to the SYSMAC NET Link System Manual for further information.
Programming Devices
Name
Specifications
Model number
Programming Console
Hand-held, w/backlight; requires the C200H-CN222 or
C200H-CN422, see below
C200H-PR027-E
2-m Connecting Cable attached.
CQM1-PRO01-E
Programming Console
Mounting Bracket
Used to attach Hand-held Programming Console to a panel. C200H-ATT01
For Hand-held Programming Console
2 m
4 m
C200H-CN222
C200H-CN422
C200H-DSC01
Programming Console Con-
necting Cables
Data Setting Console
Used for data input and process value display for the
C200H-TCjjj, C200H-TVjjj, C200H-CP114, and
C200H-PID0j.
For C200H-DSC01
2 m
C200H-CN225
C200H-CN425
CQM1-CIF02
Data Setting Console
Connecting Cables
4 m
Connecting Cable
Used to connect an IBM PC/AT or com-
patible to the C200HS.
3.3 m
Ladder Support Software (LSS)
Name
Specifications
Model number
Ladder Support Software (for
C20, CjjP, CjjK, C120,
CjjH, C200H, C200HS, C500,
C1000H, C2000H, and CQM1)
5.25”, 2D for IBM PC/AT compatible
C500-SF711-EV3
3.5”, 2HD for IBM PC/AT compatible
C500-SF312-EV3
SYSMAC Support Software (SSS)
Product
Description
Model no.
SYSMAC Support Software
3.5”, 2HD for IBM PC/AT compatible
C500-ZL3AT1-E
Training Materials
Name
Specifications
Model number
SYSMAC Training System
Includes text book, cassette tape, and input switch
board.
C200H-ETL01-E
Fuzzy Training System
Includes a Fuzzy Training System Manual, a Main Unit, C200H-ETL13-E
a C200H-MR831 Memory Unit, a C200H-PRO27-E
Programming Console, a C200H-CN222 Cable for the
Programming Console, C500-SU381-E Fuzzy Training
Software, an RS-232C Cable, and a carrying belt.
441
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Programming Instructions
A PC instruction is input either by pressing the corresponding Programming Console key(s) (e.g., LD, AND, OR,
NOT) or by using function codes. To input an instruction with its function code, press FUN, the function code, and
then WRITE. Refer to the pages listed programming and instruction details.
Code
Mnemonic
Name
Function
Page
—
AND
AND
Logically ANDs status of designated bit with execution
condition.
—
—
AND LD
AND LOAD
Logically ANDs results of preceding blocks.
AND NOT AND NOT
Logically ANDs inverse of designated bit with execution
condition.
—
—
CNT
LD
COUNTER
LOAD
A decrementing counter.
Used to start instruction line with the status of the desig-
nated bit or to define a logic block for use with AND LD
and OR LD.
—
—
LD NOT
OR
LOAD NOT
OR
dition.
—
—
OR LD
OR LOAD
OR NOT
Logically ORs results of preceding blocks.
OR NOT
dition.
—
—
OUT
OUTPUT
Turns ON operand bit for ON execution condition; turns
OFF operand bit for OFF execution condition.
OUT NOT OUTPUT NOT
Turns operand bit OFF for ON execution condition; turns
operand bit ON for OFF execution condition (i.e., inverts
operation).
—
—
RSET
SET
RESET
SET
ON, and does not affect the status of the operand bit when
the execution condition is OFF.
Turns the operand bit ON when the execution condition is
ON, and does not affect the status of the operand bit when
the execution condition is OFF.
—
TIM
TIMER
ON-delay (decrementing) timer operation.
00
NOP
NO OPERATION
Nothing is executed and program moves to next instruc-
tion.
01
02
END
IL
END
Required at the end of the program.
If interlock condition is OFF, all outputs are turned OFF
and all timer PVs reset between this IL(02) and the next
ILC(03). Other instructions are treated as NOP; counter
PVs are maintained.
INTERLOCK
03
ILC
INTERLOCK CLEAR
If jump condition is OFF, all instructions between JMP(04)
and the corresponding JME(05) are ignored.
04
JMP
JME
FAL
JUMP
05
JUMP END
(@)06
FAILURE ALARM
AND RESET
Generates a non-fatal error and outputs the designated
FAL number to the Programming Console.
07
08
FALS
STEP
SEVERE FAILURE
ALARM
Generates a fatal error and outputs the designated FALS
number to the Programming Console.
STEP DEFINE
When used with a control bit, defines the start of a new
step and resets the previous step. When used without N,
defines the end of step execution.
09
SNXT
STEP START
the step, and start the next step.
10
11
12
SFT
SHIFT REGISTER
KEEP
Creates a bit shift register.
KEEP
CNTR
Defines a bit as a latch controlled by set and reset inputs.
REVERSIBLE
COUNTER
Increases or decreases PV by one whenever the incre-
ment input or decrement input signals, respectively, go
from OFF to ON.
443
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Instructions
Appendix B
Code
13
Mnemonic
Name
Function
Page
DIFU
DIFFERENTIATE UP
Turns ON the designated bit for one cycle on the rising
edge of the input signal.
14
DIFD
DIFFERENTIATE
DOWN
Turns ON the bit for one cycle on the trailing edge.
15
TIMH
HIGH-SPEED TIMER A high-speed, ON-delay (decrementing) timer.
(@)16
WSFT
WORD SHIFT
Shifts data between starting and ending words in word
units, writing zeros into starting word.
17 to 19 For expansion instructions.
20
CMP
COMPARE
GR, EQ, and LE Flags.
(@)21
(@)22
MOV
MVN
MOVE
MOVE NOT
destination word.
(@)23
(@)24
(@)25
(@)26
BIN
BCD TO BINARY
BINARY TO BCD
Converts four-digit, BCD data in source word into 16-bit
binary data, and outputs converted data to result word.
BCD
ASL
ASR
converted data to result word.
ARITHMETIC SHIFT
LEFT
ARITHMETIC SHIFT
RIGHT
Shifts each bit in single word of data one bit to right, with
CY.
(@)27
(@)28
(@)29
(@)30
ROL
ROR
COM
ADD
ROTATE LEFT
ROTATE RIGHT
COMPLEMENT
BCD ADD
Rotates bits in single word of data one bit to left, with CY.
Inverts bit status of one word of data.
Adds two four-digit BCD values and content of CY, and
outputs result to specified result word.
(@)31
(@)32
(@)33
(@)34
SUB
MUL
DIV
BCD SUBTRACT
BCD MULTIPLY
BCD DIVIDE
Subtracts a four-digit BCD value and CY from another
four-digit BCD value and outputs result to the result word.
211
Multiplies two four-digit BCD values and outputs result to
specified result words.
Divides four-digit BCD dividend by four-digit BCD divisor
and outputs result to specified result words.
ANDW
LOGICAL AND
Logically ANDs two 16-bit input words and sets corre-
sponding bit in result word if corresponding bits in input
words are both ON.
(@)35
(@)36
(@)37
ORW
LOGICAL OR
ing bit in result word if one or both of corresponding bits in
input data are ON.
XORW
XNRW
EXCLUSIVE OR
EXCLUSIVE NOR
Exclusively ORs two 16-bit input words and sets bit in re-
sult word when corresponding bits in input words differ in
status.
Exclusively NORs two 16-bit input words and sets bit in
result word when corresponding bits in input words are
same in status.
(@)38
(@)39
(@)40
(@)41
45
INC
BCD INCREMENT
BCD DECREMENT
SET CARRY
Increments four-digit BCD word by one.
Decrements four-digit BCD word by one.
Sets carry flag (i.e., turns CY ON).
Clears carry flag (i.e, turns CY OFF).
Initiates data tracing.
DEC
STC
CLC
TRSM
CLEAR CARRY
TRACE MEMORY
SAMPLE
(@)46
MSG
MESSAGE
Displays a 16-character message on the Programming
Console display.
47 & 48
(@)50
For expansion instructions.
ADB
BINARY ADD
and outputs result to specified result word.
(@)51
SBB
BINARY SUBTRACT
Subtracts a four-digit hexadecimal value and CY from
another four-digit hexadecimal value and outputs result to
the result word.
444
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Instructions
Appendix B
Code
Mnemonic
Name
Function
Page
(@)52
MLB
BINARY MULTIPLY
Multiplies two four-digit hexadecimal values and outputs
result to specified result words.
(@)53
(@)54
(@)55
DVB
BINARY DIVIDE
decimal divisor and outputs result to specified result words.
ADDL
SUBL
DOUBLE BCD ADD
Adds two eight-digit values (2 words each) and content of
CY, and outputs result to specified result words.
DOUBLE BCD
SUBTRACT
Subtracts an eight-digit BCD value and CY from another
eight-digit BCD value and outputs result to the result
words.
(@)56
(@)57
(@)58
MULL
DIVL
BINL
DOUBLE BCD
MULTIPLY
Multiplies two eight-digit BCD values and outputs result to
specified result words.
DOUBLE BCD
DIVIDE
and outputs result to specified result words.
DOUBLE BCD TO
DOUBLE BINARY
binary and outputs converted data to two consecutive re-
sult words.
(@)59
BCDL
DOUBLE BINARY TO Converts binary value in two consecutive source words
DOUBLE BCD
into BCD and outputs converted data to two consecutive
result words.
60 to 69 For expansion instructions.
(@)70
(@)71
(@)72
XFER
BSET
ROOT
BLOCK TRANSFER
Moves content of several consecutive source words to
consecutive destination words.
BLOCK SET
utive words.
SQUARE ROOT
Computes square root of eight-digit BCD value and out-
puts truncated four-digit integer result to specified result
word.
(@)73
(@)74
XCHG
SLD
DATA EXCHANGE
Exchanges contents of two different words.
ONE DIGIT SHIFT
LEFT
Left shifts data between starting and ending words by one
digit (four bits).
(@)75
(@)76
SRD
ONE DIGIT SHIFT
RIGHT
Right shifts data between starting and ending words by
one digit (four bits).
MLPX
decimal values from 0 to 15 and turns ON, in result
word(s), bit(s) whose position corresponds to converted
value.
Can also convert up to eight hexadecimal digits and turn
ON corresponding bits in result words R to R+15.
(@)77
DMPX
256-TO-8 ENCODER Determines position of highest ON bit in source word(s)
and writes the ON bit’s position (0 to F) to digit(s) in R.
Can also determine the position of the highest ON bit in
one or two groups of 16 words (S to S+15, S+16 to S+31)
and writes the ON bit’s position (00 to FF) to byte(s) in R.
(@)78
(@)79
(@)80
(@)81
(@)82
(@)83
(@)84
(@)85
SDEC
FDIV
7-SEGMENT
DECODER
seven-segment display.
FLOATING POINT
DIVIDE
Divides one floating point value (Dd+1, Dd) by another
(Dr+1, Dr) and outputs the result to R+1 and R.
DIST
SINGLE WORD
DISTRIBUTE
address is given by destination base word plus offset.
COLL
MOVB
MOVD
SFTR
TCMP
DATA COLLECT
word.
MOVE BIT
ignated bit of destination word.
MOVE DIGIT
Moves hexadecimal content of specified four-bit source
digit(s) to specified destination digit(s) for up to four digits.
REVERSIBLE SHIFT
REGISTER
or right.
TABLE COMPARE
consisting of 16 words.
445
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Instructions
Appendix B
Code
Mnemonic
Name
Function
Page
(@)86
ASC
ASCII CONVERT
Converts hexadecimal values from the source word to
eight-bit ASCII code starting at leftmost or rightmost half of
starting destination word.
87 to 89 For expansion instructions.
(@)90
SEND
NETWORK SEND
Used for communications with other PCs linked through
the SYSMAC NET Link System or SYSMAC LINK System.
(CPU31-E/33-E only)
(@)91
92
SBS
SBN
RET
WDT
SUBROUTINE
ENTRY
Calls and executes subroutine N.
SUBROUTINE
DEFINE
Marks start of subroutine N.
93
RETURN
Marks the end of a subroutine and returns control to main
program.
(@)94
WATCHDOG TIMER
REFRESH
Increases the watchdog timer PV by 0 to 6300 ms.
(@)97
(@)98
IORF
I/O REFRESH
Refreshes all I/O words between the start and end words.
RECV
NETWORK RECEIVE Used for communications with other PCs linked through
the SYSMAC NET Link System or SYSMAC LINK System.
(CPU31-E/33-E only)
(@)99
MCRO
MACRO
Calls and executes a subroutine replacing I/O words.
Expansion Instructions
The following table shows the instructions that can be treated as expansion instructions. The default function
codes are given for instructions that have codes assigned by default.
Code
17
Mnemonic
Name
Function
Page
(@)ASFT
REGISTER
adjacent words when one of the words is zero and the
other is not.
18
19
(@)SCAN CYCLE TIME
Sets the minimum cycle time (0 to 999.0 s).
block of 16 consecutive words.
47
48
(@)LMSG 32-CHARACTER MES-
SAGE
Outputs a 32-character message to the Programming
Console.
(@)TERM TERMINAL MODE
Switches the Programming Console to TERMINAL
mode for the normal keyboard mapping operation.
60
61
CMPL
DOUBLE COMPARE
Compares two eight-digit hexadecimal values.
(@)MPRF GROUP-2 HIGH-DEN-
SITY I/O REFRESH
I/O Units.
62
63
64
(@)XFRB
TRANSFER BITS
the specified destination bits.
(@)LINE
COLUMN TO LINE
specified word.
(@)COLM LINE TO COLUMN
umn of 16 consecutive words.
65
66
67
(@)SEC
(@)HMS
(@)BCNT
HOURS TO SECONDS
SECONDS TO HOURS
BIT COUNTER
Converts hour and minute data to second data.
Converts second data to hour and minute data.
cified block of words.
68
69
(@)BCMP BLOCK COMPARE
(defined by lower and upper limits).
(@)APR
ARITHMETIC PROCESS
Performs sine, cosine, or linear approximation
calculations.
87
88
TTIM
ZCP
TOTALIZING TIMER
Creates a totalizing timer.
AREA RANGE COMPARE Compares a word to a range defined by lower and
upper limits and outputs the result to the GR, EQ, and
LE flags.
446
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Instructions
Appendix B
Code
89
Mnemonic
Name
Function
Page
(@)INT
INTERRUPT CONTROL
Performs interrupt control, such as masking and un-
masking the interrupt bits for I/O interrupts.
---
---
---
7SEG
7-SEGMENT DISPLAY
OUTPUT
Converts 4- or 8-digit BCD data to 7-segment display
format and then outputs the converted data.
(@)ADBL
AVG
DOUBLE BINARY ADD
and outputs the result to R and R+1.
AVERAGE VALUE
Adds the specified number of hexadecimal words and
computes the mean value. Rounds off to 4 digits past
the decimal point.
---
---
---
---
CPS
SIGNED BINARY
COMPARE
outputs the result to the GR, EQ, and LE flags.
CPSL
DOUBLE SIGNED
BINARY COMPARE
outputs the result to the GR, EQ, and LE flags.
(@)DBS
(@)DBSL
outputs the 32-bit signed binary result to R+1 and R.
DOUBLE SIGNED
BINARY DIVIDE
outputs the 64-bit signed binary result to R+3 to R.
---
---
DSW
DIGITAL SWITCH INPUT Inputs 4- or 8-digit BCD data from a digital switch.
(@)FCS
FCS CALCULATE
Checks for errors in data transmitted by a Host Link
command.
---
---
---
FPD
FAILURE POINT DETECT Finds errors within an instruction block.
ASCII-TO-HEXADECIMAL Converts ASCII data to hexadecimal data.
(@)HEX
(@)MAX
FIND MAXIMUM
Finds the maximum value in specified data area and
outputs that value to another word.
---
---
(@)MBS
SIGNED BINARY
MULTIPLY
Multiplies the signed binary content of two words and
outputs the 8-digit signed binary result to R+1 and R.
(@)MBSL
DOUBLE SIGNED
BINARY MULTIPLY
outputs the 16-digit signed binary result to R+3
through R.
---
---
---
(@)MIN
MTR
FIND MINIMUM
MATRIX INPUT
2’S COMPLEMENT
Finds the minimum value in specified data area and
outputs that value to another word.
Inputs data from an 8 input point × 8 output point ma-
trix and records that data in D to D+3.
(@)NEG
Converts the four-digit hexadecimal content of the
source word to its 2’s complement and outputs the
result to R.
---
---
(@)NEGL
(@)PID
DOUBLE 2’S
COMPLEMENT
Converts the eight-digit hexadecimal content of the
source words to its 2’s complement and outputs the
result to R and R+1.
PID CONTROL
PID parameters that are preset.
---
---
(@)RXD
RECEIVE
Receives data via a communications port.
(@)SBBL
DOUBLE BINARY
SUBTRACT
Subtracts an 8-digit binary value (normal or signed
data) from another and outputs the result to R and
R+1.
---
---
(@)SCL
SCALING
(@)SRCH DATA SEARCH
fied data. Outputs the word address(es) of words in
the range that contain the data.
---
(@)SUM
SUM CALCULATE
Computes the sum of the contents of the words in the
specified range of memory.
---
---
(@)TKY
(@)TXD
TEN KEY INPUT
TRANSMIT
Inputs 8 digits of BCD data from a 10-key keypad.
Sends data via a communications port.
311
447
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Instructions
Appendix B
Code
---
Mnemonic
Name
Function
Page
(@)XDMR EXPANSION DM READ
fixed expansion DM data are read and output to the
destination word on the PC side.
---
ZCPL
DOUBLE AREA RANGE
COMPARE
and upper limits and outputs the result to the GR, EQ,
and LE flags.
448
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C
Error and Arithmetic Flag Operation
The following table shows the instructions that affect the ER, CY, GR, LE and EQ flags. In general, ER indicates
that operand data is not within requirements. CY indicates arithmetic or data shift results. GT indicates that a com-
pared value is larger than some standard, LT that it is smaller, and EQ, that it is the same. EQ also indicates a result
Vertical arrows in the table indicate the flags that are turned ON and OFF according to the result of the instruction.
Although ladder diagram instructions,TIM, and CNT are executed when ER is ON, other instructions with a vertical
arrow under the ER column are not executed if ER is ON. All of the other flags in the following table will also not
operate when ER is ON.
Instructions not shown do not affect any of the flags in the table. Although only the non-differentiated form of each
instruction is shown, differentiated instructions affect flags in exactly the same way.
The ER, CY, GR, LE and EQ Flags are turned OFF when END(01) is executed, so their status cannot be monitored
with a Programming Console.
Instructions
TIM
25503 (ER)
25504 (CY)
Unaffected
25505 (GR)
Unaffected
25506 (EQ)
Unaffected
25507 (LE)
Unaffected
Page
211
CNT
1
END(01)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
STEP(08)
SNXT(09)
CNTR(12)
TIMH(15)
WSFT(16)
CMP(20)
MOV(21)
MVN(22)
BIN(23)
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
BCD(24)
ASL(25)
ASR(26)
ROL(27)
ROR(28)
COM(29)
ADD(30)
SUB(31)
MUL(32)
DIV(33)
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
ANDW(34)
ORW(35)
XORW(36)
XNRW(37)
INC(38)
DEC(39)
STC(40)
CLC(41)
MSG(46)
Unaffected
Unaffected
ON
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
OFF
Unaffected
1
ADB(50)
1
SBB(51)
449
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error and Arithmetic Flag Operation
Appendix C
Instructions
MLB(52)
25503 (ER)
Unaffected
25504 (CY)
25505 (GR)
Unaffected
25506 (EQ)
Unaffected
25507 (LE)
Page
DVB(53)
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
ADDL(54)
SUBL(55)
MULL(56)
DIVL(57)
BINL(58)
BCDL(59)
XFER(70)
BSET(71)
ROOT(72)
XCHG(73)
SLD(74)
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
SRD(75)
MLPX(76)
DMPX(77)
SDEC(78)
FDIV(79)
DIST(80)
COLL(81)
MOVB(82)
MOVD(83)
SFTR(84)
TCMP(85)
ASC(86)
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
SEND(90)
SBS(91)
RECV(98)
MCRO(99)
Note END(01), ADB(50), and SBB(51) also affect the signed binary arithmetic flags. Refer to page 451 for de-
tails.
Expansion Instructions
Instructions
25503 (ER)
25504 (CY)
25505 (GR)
Unaffected
25506 (EQ)
Unaffected
25507 (LE)
Unaffected
Page
2
Unaffected
7SEG(––)
2
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
ADBL(––)
APR(69)
ASFT(17)
AVG(––)
Unaffected
Unaffected
BCMP(68)
BCNT(67)
CMPL(60)
COLM(64)
CPS(––)
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
CPSL(––)
DBS(––)
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
DBSL(––)
3
Unaffected
DSW(––)
FCS(––)
450
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error and Arithmetic Flag Operation
Appendix C
Instructions
FPD(––)
25503 (ER)
25504 (CY)
25505 (GR)
Unaffected
25506 (EQ)
Unaffected
25507 (LE)
Page
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
HEX(––)
HMS(66)
INT(89)
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
311
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
LINE(63)
LMSG(47)
MAX(––)
MBS(––)
MBSL(––)
MCMP(19)
MIN(––)
4
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
MTR(––)
2
NEG(––)
2
NEGL(––)
PID(––)
RXD(––)
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
2
SBBL(––)
SCAN(18)
SCL(––)
Unaffected
Unaffected
SEC(65)
SRCH(––)
SUM(––)
TKY(––)
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
Unaffected
TTIM(87)
TXD(––)
XFRB(62)
XDMR(––)
ZCP(88)
ZCPL(––)
Note 1. SR 25409 will be ON when 7SEG(––) is being executed.
2. ADBL(––), NEG(––), NEGL(––), and SBBL(––) also affect the signed binary arithmetic flags. Refer to
3. SR 25410 will be ON when DSW(––) is being executed.
4. SR 25408 will be ON when MTR(––) is being executed.
Signed Binary Arithmetic Flags
The following table shows the instructions that affect the OF and UF flags. In general, OF indicates that the result of
a 16-bit calculation is greater than 32,767 (7FFF) or the result of a 32-bit calculation is greater than 2,147,483,647
(7FFF FFFF). UF indicates that the result of a 16-bit calculation is less than –32,768 (8000) or the result of a 32-bit
calculation is less than –2,147,483,648 (8000 0000). Refer to Section 5 Instruction Set for details.
Vertical arrows in the table indicate the flags that are turned ON and OFF according to the result of the instruction.
Instructions not shown do not affect any of the flags in the table.
The OF and UF Flags are turned OFF when END(01) is executed, so their status cannot be monitored with a Pro-
gramming Console.
451
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error and Arithmetic Flag Operation
Appendix C
Instructions
END(01)
SR 25404 (OF )
OFF
SR 25405 (UF)
Page
OFF
ADB(50)
SBB(51)
ADBL(––)
SBBL(––)
NEG(––)
NEGL(––)
Unaffected
These instructions also affect the ER, CY, and EQ Flags. Refer to the previous tables in this appendix for details.
452
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
Memory Areas
Overview
The following table shows the data areas in PC memory.
Area
Size
480 bits
Range
IR 000 to IR 029
IR 030 to IR 049
Comments
I/O Area
Group-2 High-density
I/O Unit Area
320 bits
Can be used as ordinary I/O or, if not used for
real I/O, can be used as work bits.
SYSMAC BUS Area
Special I/O Unit Area
Optical I/O Unit Area
Work Area 1
800 bits
1,600 bits
512 bits
64 bits
IR 050 to IR 099
IR 100 to IR 199
IR 200 to IR 231
IR 232 to IR 235
SR 236 to SR 255
SR 256 to SR 299
SR 290 to SR 293
SR 294 to SR 297
IR 298 to IR 511
TR 00 to TR 07
HR 00 to HR 99
AR 00 to AR 27
LR 00 to LR 63
Can be used as work bits if not used for real I/O.
”
”
Special Relay Area 1
Special Relay Area 2
Macro Area
320 bits
704 bits
64 bits
Inputs
64 bits
Outputs
Work Area 2
3,424 bits
Temporary Relay Area 8 bits
Holding Relay Area
Auxiliary Relay Area
Link Relay Area
1,600 bits
448 buts
1,024 bits
Timer/Counter Area
512 counters/
timers
TC 000 to TC 511
TIM 000 through TIM 015 can be refreshed via
interrupt processing as high-speed timers.
Data Memory Area
6,144 words
DM 0000 to DM 6143 Read/Write
1,000 words
DM 0000 to DM 1999 Special I/O Unit Area (see note)
DM 6000 to DM 6030 History Log
31 words
(44 words)
DM 6100 to DM 6143 Link test area (reserved)
DM 6144 to DM 6655 Fixed DM Area (read only)
DM 6144 to DM 6599 (SYSMAC NET Area)
DM 6600 to DM 6655 PC Setup
512 words
456 words
56 words
Expansion DM Area
I/O Comment Area
3,000 words max.
All UM Area max.
DM 7000 to DM 9999 Read only
---
Stores I/O comments in the user program. Must
be set using LSS.
Ladder Program Area
All UM Area max.
---
Stores the user program executed by the CPU.
The program is retained even after the power
supply is turned off.
Note The PC Setup can be set to use DM 7000 through DM 7999 as the Special I/O Area.
453
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
SR Area
Word(s)
Appendix D
Bit(s)
Function
236
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
Node loop status output area for operating level 0 of SYSMAC NET Link System
Node loop status output area for operating level 1 of SYSMAC NET Link System
237
Completion code output area for operating level 0 following execution of
SEND(90)/RECV(98) SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link System
08 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
Completion code output area for operating level 1 following execution of
SEND(90)/RECV(98) SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link System
238 and 241
242 and 245
Data link status output area for operating level 0 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET Link
System
Data link status output area for operating level 1 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET Link
System
246
00 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00
Reserved by system
247 and 248
PC Link Unit Run Flags for Units 16 through 31 or data link status for operating level 1
PC Link Unit Error Flags for Units 16 through 31 or data link status for operating level 1
PC Link Unit Run Flags for Units 00 through 15 or data link status for operating level 0
PC Link Unit Error Flags for Units 00 through 15 or data link status for operating level 0
Remote I/O Error Read Bit
249 and 250
251
01 and 02 Not used
Writeable
03
Remote I/O Error Flag
04 to 06
07
Unit number of Remote I/O Unit or Optical I/O Unit with error
Not used
08 to 15
00
Word allocated to Remote I/O Unit or Optical I/O Unit with error
252
SEND(90)/RECV(98) Error Flag for operating level 0 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET
Link System
01
SEND(90)/RECV(98) Enable Flag for operating level 0 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET
Link System
02
03
Operating Level 0 Data Link Operating Flag
SEND(90)/RECV(98) Error Flag for operating level 1 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET
Link System
04
SEND(90)/RECV(98) Enable Flag for operating level 1 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET
Link System
05
Operating Level 1 Data Link Operating Flag
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 1 Communications Error Flag
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 1 Restart Bit
Peripheral Port Restart Bit
06
07
08
09
RS-232C Port Restart Bit
10
PC Setup Clear Bit
11
Forced Status Hold Bit
12
Data Retention Control Bit
13
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 0 Restart Bit
Not used.
14
15
Output OFF Bit
253
00 to 07
08
FAL number output area (see error information provided elsewhere)
Low Battery Flag
09
Cycle Time Error Flag
10
I/O Verification Error Flag
11
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 0 Communications Error Flag
Remote I/O Error Flag
12
13
Always ON Flag
14
Always OFF Flag
15
First Cycle Flag
454
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix D
Word(s)
Bit(s)
Function
254
00
01
1-minute clock pulse bit
0.02-second clock pulse bit
02 and 03 Reserved for function expansion. Do not use.
04
Overflow Flag (for signed binary calculations)
Underflow Flag (for signed binary calculations)
Differential Monitor End Flag
Step Flag
05
06
07
08
MTR Execution Flag
09
7SEG Execution Flag
10
DSW Execution Flag
11
Interrupt Input Unit Error Flag
Reserved by system
12
13
Interrupt Programming Error Flag
Group-2 High-density I/O Unit Error Flag
14
15
Special Unit Error Flag (Special I/O, PC Link, Host Link, Remote I/O Master)
0.1-second clock pulse bit
255
00
01
0.2-second clock pulse bit
02
1.0-second clock pulse bit
03
Instruction Execution Error (ER) Flag
Carry (CY) Flag
04
05
Greater Than (GR) Flag
06
Equals (EQ) Flag
07
Less Than (LE) Flag
08 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
Reserved by system (used for TR bits)
Reserved by system
256 to 261
262
Longest interrupt subroutine (action) execution time (0.1 ms)
Number of interrupt subroutine (action) with longest execution time.
263
(8000 to 8512) 8000 to 8007, 8099
Bit 15: Interrupt Flag
00 to 03
RS-232C Port Error Code
264
0: No error
1: Parity error
2: Framing error
3: Overrun error
04
RS-232C Port Communications Error
RS-232C Port Send Ready Flag
RS-232C Port Reception Completed Flag
RS-232C Port Reception Overflow Flag
Peripheral Port Error Code in General I/O Mode
0: No error
05
06
07
08 to 11
1: Parity error
2: Framing error
3: Overrun error
F: When in Peripheral Bus Mode
12
Peripheral Port Communications Error in General I/O Mode
Peripheral Port Send Ready Flag in General I/O Mode
Peripheral Port Reception Completed Flag in General I/O Mode
Peripheral Port Reception Overflow Flag in General I/O Mode
RS-232C Port Reception Counter in General I/O Mode
Peripheral Reception Counter in General I/O Mode (BCD)
13
14
15
265
266
00 to 15
00 to 15
455
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix D
Word(s)
Bit(s)
Function
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
00 to 04
05
267
Host Link Level 0 Send Ready Flag
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
Host Link Level 1 Send Ready Flag
06 to 12
13
14 and 15 Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
268
269
00 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 10
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
Memory Cassette Contents 00: Nothing; 01: UM; 02: IOM (03: HIS)
Memory Cassette Capacity
0: 0 KW (no cassette); 3: 16 KW
11 to 13
14
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
EEPROM Memory Cassette Protected or EPROM Memory Cassette Mounted Flag
Memory Cassette Flag
15
00
Save UM to Cassette Bit
Load UM from Cassette Bit
Compare UM to Cassette Bit
Comparison Results
270
Data transferred to Memory Cassette when Bit is turned
ON in PROGRAM mode. Bit will automatically turn OFF.
An error will be produced if turned ON in any other
mode.
01
02
03
0: Contents identical; 1: Contents differ or comparison not possible
04 to 10
11
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
Transfer Error Flag:
Data will not be transferred from UM to the Memory
Cassette if an error occurs (except for Board Checksum
Error). Detailed information on checksum errors
occurring in the Memory Cassette will not be output to
SR 272 because the information is not needed. Repeat
the transmission if SR 27015 is ON.
Transferring SYSMAC NET
data link table on UM during
active data link.
12
Transfer Error Flag: Not
PROGRAM mode
13
14
Transfer Error Flag: Read Only
Transfer Error Flag: Insufficient
Capacity or No UM
15
Transfer Error Flag: Board
Checksum Error
00 to 07
Ladder program size stored in Memory Cassette
271
272
Ladder-only File: 04: 4 KW; 08: 8 KW; 12: 12 KW; ... (64: 64 KW)
00: No ladder program or no file
Data updated at data transfer from CPU at startup. The file must begin in segment 0.
Ladder program size and type in CPU (Specifications are the same as for bits 00 to 07.)
Data updated when indexes generated. Default value (after clearing memory) is 16.
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
08 to 15
00 to 10
11
Memory Error Flag: PC Setup Checksum Error
12
Memory Error Flag: Ladder Checksum Error
13
Memory Error Flag: Instruction Change Vector Area Checksum Error
Memory Error Flag: Memory Cassette Online Disconnection
Memory Error Flag: Autoboot Error
14
15
456
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix D
Word(s)
Bit(s)
Function
00
01
Save IOM to Cassette Bit
Load IOM from Cassette Bit
273
Data transferred to Memory Cassette when Bit is turned
ON in PROGRAM mode. Bit will automatically turn OFF.
An error will be produced if turned ON in any other
mode.
02 to 11
12
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
Transfer Error Flag: Not
PROGRAM mode
Data will not be transferred from IOM to the Memory
Cassette if an error occurs (except for Read Only Error).
13
14
Transfer Error Flag: Read Only
Transfer Error Flag: Insufficient
Capacity or No IOM
15
Transfer Error Flag: Checksum
Error
274
00
Special I/O Unit #0 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #1 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #2 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #3 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #4 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #5 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #6 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #7 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #8 Restart Flag
Special I/O Unit #9 Restart Flag
These flags will turn ON during restart processing.
These flags will not turn ON for Units on Slave Racks.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10 to 15
00
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
PC Setup Startup Error (DM 6600 to DM 6614)
PC Setup RUN Error (DM 6615 to DM 6644)
275
276
01
02
PC Setup Communications/Error Setting/Misc. Error (DM 6645 to DM 6655)
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
03 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
Minutes (00 to 59)
Hours (00 to 23)
Used for time increments.
277 to 279
280 to 289
290 to 293
294 to 297
298 to 299
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
Macro Area inputs.
Macro Area outputs.
Reserved by system (not accessible by user)
457
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix D
AR Area
Word(s)
Bit(s)
Function
00
00 to 09
10
Error Flags for Special I/O Units 0 to 9 (also function as Error Flags for PC Link Units)
Error Flag for operating level 1 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET Link System
Error Flag for operating level 0 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET Link System
Host Computer to Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 1 Error Flag
Host Computer to Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 0 Error Flag
Remote I/O Master Unit 1 Error Flag
11
12
13
14
15
Remote I/O Master Unit 0 Error Flag
01
02
00 to 09
10
Restart Bits for Special I/O Units 0 to 9 (also function as Restart Bits for PC Link Units)
Restart Bit for operating level 1 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET Link System
Restart Bit for operating level 0 of SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET Link System
Not used.
11
12, 13
14
Remote I/O Master Unit 1 Restart Flag.
15
Remote I/O Master Unit 0 Restart Flag.
00 to 04
05 to 14
15
Slave Rack Error Flags (#0 to #4)
Group-2 High-density I/O Unit Error Flags
Group-2 High-density I/O Unit Error Flag
03
04
05
06
07
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 03
04 to 07
08
Error Flags for Optical I/O Units 0 to 7
Error Flags for Optical I/O Units 8 to 15
Error Flags for Optical I/O Units 16 to 23
Error Flags for Optical I/O Units 24 to 31
Data Link setting for operating level 0 of SYSMAC LINK System
Data Link setting for operating level 1 of SYSMAC LINK System
Normal TERMINAL Mode/Expansion TERMINAL Mode Input Cancel Bit
Expansion TERMINAL Mode Changeover Flag
09
10 and 11 Reserved by system.
12
Terminal Mode Flag
ON: Expansion; OFF: Normal (Same as status of pin 6 on CPU’s DIP switch)
13
Error History Overwrite Bit
14
Error History Reset Bit
15
Error History Enable Bit
08 to 11
12 to 15
16
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
Active Node Flags for SYSMAC LINK System nodes of operating level 0
Active Node Flags for SYSMAC LINK System nodes of operating level 1
SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link System operating level 0 service time per cycle
SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link System operating level 1 service time per cycle
Seconds: 00 to 99
17
18
Writeable
19
Minutes: 00 to 59
Hours: 00 to 23 (24-hour system)
Writeable
20
Day of Month: 01 to 31 (adjusted by month and for leap year)
Month: 1 to 12
Writeable
21
Year: 00 to 99 (Rightmost two digits of year)
Day of Week: 00 to 06 (00: Sunday; 01: Monday; 02: Tuesday; 03: Wednesday; 04:
Thursday; 05: Friday; 06: Saturday)
Writeable
08 to 12
13
Not used.
30-second Compensation Bit
Clock Stop Bit
14
15
Clock Set Bit
22
00 to 15
Keyboard Mapping
458
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Areas
Appendix D
Word(s)
Bit(s)
Function
23
24
00 to 15
00 to 04
05
Power Off Counter (BCD)
Reserved by system.
Cycle Time Flag
06
SYSMAC LINK System Network Parameter Flag for operating level 1
SYSMAC LINK System Network Parameter Flag for operating level 0
SYSMAC/SYSMAC NET Link Unit Level 1 Mounted Flag
SYSMAC/SYSMAC NET Link Unit Level 0 Mounted Flag
Reserved by system.
07
08
09
10
11 and 12 PC Link Level
13
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 1 Mounted Flag
14
Rack-mounting Host Link Unit Level 0 Mounted Flag
CPU-mounting Device Mounted Flag
Reserved by system.
15
25
00 to 11
12
Trace End Flag
13
Tracing Flag
14
Trace Trigger Bit (writeable)
Trace Start Bit (writeable)
Maximum Cycle Time (0.1 ms)
Present Cycle Time (0.1 ms)
15
26
27
00 to 15
00 to 15
DM Area (Error Log)
Word
DM 6000
Function
Error Pointer (Incremented by 1 for each error (0000 to 000A)
DM 6001 to Error Records (3 words per error for 10 errors, 30 words total)
DM 6030
See following table for structure of individual records.
Word
Bit
Content
First
00 to 07 Error code (see error information provided elsewhere)
08 to 15 00 (non-fatal) or 80 (fatal)
Second
Third
00 to 07 Seconds
08 to 15 Minutes
00 to 07 Hours
Clock data read from AR
18 and AR 19.
08 to 15 Day of month
459
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E
PC Setup
Word(s)
Startup Processing (DM 6600 to DM 6614)
The following settings are effective after transfer to the PC only after the PC is restarted.
Bit(s)
Function
Default
DM 6600
00 to 07 Startup mode (effective when bits 08 to 15 are set to 02).
00: PROGRAM; 01: MONITOR 02: RUN
PROGRAM
08 to 15 Startup mode designation
00: Programming Console switch
Programming
Console switch
01: Continue operating mode last used before power was turned off
02: Setting in 00 to 07
DM 6601
DM 6602
00 to 07 Reserved
---
08 to 11 IOM Hold Bit (SR 25212) Status
0: Reset; 1: Maintain
Reset
12 to 15 Forced Status Hold Bit (SR 25211) Status
0: Reset; 1: Maintain
00 to 07 Reserved
---
08 to 15 Special I/O Unit Area
00: Use DM 1000 to DM 1999
DM 1000 to
DM 1999
01: Transfer DM 7000 through DM 7999 to DM 1000 through DM 1999 at
startup and use DM 1000 to DM 1999.
02: Use DM 7000 to DM 7999
DM 6603 to 00 to 15 Reserved
DM 6614
---
---
Cycle Time Settings (DM 6615 to DM 6619)
The following settings are effective after transfer to the PC the next time operation is started.
DM 6615
DM 6616
00 to 15 Reserved
00 to 07 (Servicing time for RS-232C port (effective when bits 08 to 15 are set to 01)) No setting (00)
00 to 99 (BCD): Percentage of cycle time used to service RS-232C port.
Minimum: 0.256 ms; maximum 65.536 ms
08 to 15 (RS-232C port servicing setting enable)
00: Do not set service time
01: Use time in 00 to 07.
Service time is 10 ms when operation is stopped.
DM 6617
00 to 07 Servicing time for peripheral port (effective when bits 08 to 15 are set to 01)
00 to 99 (BCD): Percentage of cycle time used to service peripheral.
No setting (00)
Minimum: 0.256 ms; maximum 65.536 ms
08 to 15 Peripheral port servicing setting enable
00: Do not set service time
01: Use time in 00 to 07.
Service time is 10 ms when operation is stopped.
DM 6618
DM 6619
00 to 07 Cycle monitor time (effective when bits 08 to 15 are set to 01, 02, or 03)
00 to 99 (BCD): Setting (see 08 to 15)
00
08 to 15 Cycle monitor enable (Setting in 00 to 07 x unit; 99 s max.)
00: 120 ms (setting in bits 00 to 07 disabled)
01: Setting unit: 10 ms
00: 120 ms
02: Setting unit: 100 ms
03: Setting unit: 1 s
00 to 15 Cycle time
Variable
0000: Variable (no minimum)
0001 to 9999 (BCD): Minimum time in ms
461
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PC Setup
Appendix E
Word(s)
Bit(s)
Function
Default
Interrupt/Refresh Processing (DM 6620 to DM 6622)
The following settings are effective after transfer to the PC the next time operation is started.
DM 6620
00 to 09 Special I/O Unit cyclic refresh (Bit number corresponds to unit number, PC
Link Units included)
Enable
0: Enable cyclic refresh and I/O REFRESH (IORF(97)) from main program
1: Disable (refresh only for I/O REFRESH from interrupt programs)
Disable not valid for normal (C200H) interrupt response or on Slave Racks.
10 to 11 Reserved
---
12 to 15 Interrupt response
0: Normal (C200H compatible)
1: High-speed (C200HS)
Normal
DM 6621
DM 6622
00 to 07 Reserved
---
08 to 15 Special I/O Unit refresh (PC Link Units included)
00: Enable refresh for all Special I/O Units
Enable
01: Disable refresh for all Special I/O Units (but, not valid on Slave Racks)
00 to 07 Scheduled interrupt time unit
10 ms
00: 10 ms
01: 1 ms
08 to 15 Scheduled interrupt time unit enable
00: Disable (10 ms)
01: Enable
DM 6623 to 00 to 15 Reserved
DM 6644
---
RS-232C Port Settings (DM 6645 to DM 6649)
The following settings are effective after transfer to the PC.
DM 6645
00 to 07 Port settings
00: Standard (1 start bit, 7-bit data, even parity, 2 stop bits, 9,600 bps)
Standard
01: Settings in DM 6646
08 to 11 Words linked for 1:1 link
LR 00 to LR 63
Host Link
0: LR 00 to LR 63; 1: LR 00 to LR 31; 2: LR 00 to LR 15
12 to 15 Communications mode
0: Host link; 1: RS-232C; 2: 1-to-1 link slave; 3: 1-to-1 link master;
4: NT (PT) link
00 to 07 Baud rate
00: 1.2K, 01: 2.4K, 02: 4.8K, 03: 9.6K, 04: 19.2K
08 to 15 Frame format
Start
1 bit
DM 6646
1.2 K
1 start bit, 7-bit
data, 1 stop bit,
even parity
Length
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
Stop
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
2 bit
2 bit
2 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
2 bit
2 bit
2 bit
Parity
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
00:
01:
02:
03:
04:
05:
06:
07:
08:
09:
10:
11:
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
None
DM 6647
00 to 15 Transmission delay
0000 to 9999: BCD in ms.
0 ms
462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PC Setup
Appendix E
Word(s)
Bit(s)
Function
Default
DM 6648
00 to 07 Node number (Host link)
00 to 31 (BCD)
0
08 to 11 Start code enable (RS-232C)
0: Disable; 1: Set
Disabled
Disabled
12 to 15 End code enable (RS-232C)
0: Disable (number of bytes received)
1: Set (specified end code)
2: CR, LF
DM 6649
00 to 07 Start code (RS-232C)
Not used
00 to FF (binary)
08 to 15 12 to 15 of DM 6648 set to 0:
Number of bytes received
00: Default setting (256 bytes)
01 to FF: 1 to 255 bytes
12 to 15 of DM 6648 set to 1:
End code (RS-232C)
00 to FF (binary)
Peripheral Port Settings (DM 6650 to DM 6654)
The following settings are effective after transfer to the PC.
DM 6650
00 to 07 Port settings
00: Standard (1 start bit, 7-bit data, even parity, 2 stop bits, 9,600 bps)
01: Settings in DM 6651
Standard
08 to 11 Reserved
---
12 to 15 Communications mode
0: Host link; 1: RS-232C
Host Link
DM 6651
00 to 07 Baud rate
1.2 K
00: 1.2K, 01: 2.4K, 02: 4.8K, 03: 9.6K, 04: 19.2K
08 to 15 Frame format
Start
1 start bit, 7-bit
data, 1 stop bit,
even parity
Length
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
Stop
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
2 bit
2 bit
2 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
2 bit
2 bit
2 bit
Parity
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
00:
01:
02:
03:
04:
05:
06:
07:
08:
09:
10:
11:
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
None
DM 6652
DM 6653
00 to 15 Transmission delay (Host Link)
0000 to 9999: In ms.
0 ms
0
00 to 07 Node number (Host link)
00 to 31 (BCD)
08 to 11 Start code enable (RS-232C)
0: Disable; 1: Set
Disable
Disable
12 to 15 End code enable (RS-232C)
0: Disable (number of bytes received)
1: Set (specified end code)
2: CR, LF
463
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PC Setup
Appendix E
Word(s)
Bit(s)
Function
Default
DM 6654
00 to 07 Start code (RS-232C)
00 to FF (binary)
0000
08 to 15 12 to 15 of DM 6653 set to 0:
Number of bytes received
00: Default setting (256 bytes)
01 to FF: 1 to 255 bytes
12 to 15 of DM 6653 set to 1:
End code (RS-232C)
00 to FF (binary)
Error Settings (DM 6655)
The following settings are effective after transfer to the PC.
DM 6655
00 to 03 Interrupt programming error enable
Detect
Detect
Detect
Detect
0: Detect interrupt programming errors
1: Do not detect
04 to 07 (Multiple action execution error enable
0: Detect multiple action execution
1: Do not detect )
08 to 11 Cycle time monitor enable
0: Detect long cycles as non-fatal errors
1: Do not detect long cycles
12 to 15 Low battery error enable
0: Detect low battery voltage as non-fatal error
1: Do not detect low batter voltage
464
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F
Word Assignment Recording Sheets
This appendix contains sheets that can be copied by the programmer to record I/O bit allocations and terminal
assignments, as well as details of work bits, data storage areas, timers, and counters.
465
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Bits
Programmer:
Program:
Notes
Date:
Page:
Word:
Bit
Unit:
Word:
Unit:
Field device
Bit
Field device
Notes
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Word:
Bit
Unit:
Word:
Bit
Unit:
Field device
Notes
Field device
Notes
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
466
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Work Bits
Programmer:
Program:
Notes
Date:
Page:
Area:
Bit
Word:
Area:
Word:
Usage
Bit
Usage
Notes
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Area:
Bit
Word:
Area:
Bit
Word:
Usage
Notes
Usage
Notes
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
467
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Storage
Programmer:
Word
Program:
Date:
Page:
Contents
Notes
Word
Contents
Notes
468
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timers and Counters
Programmer:
TC address
Program:
Date:
Page:
T or C
T or C
Set value
Notes
TC address
Set value
Notes
469
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G
Program Coding Sheet
The following page can be copied for use in coding ladder diagram programs. It is designed for flexibility, allowing
the user to input all required addresses and instructions.
When coding programs, be sure to specify all function codes for instructions and data areas (or # for constant) for
operands. These will be necessary when inputting programs though a Programming Console or other Peripheral
Device.
471
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Program Coding Sheet
Programmer:
Program:
Date:
Page:
Address
Instruction
Operand(s)
Address
Instruction
Operand(s)
Address
Instruction
Operand(s)
472
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix H
Data Conversion Tables
Normal Data
Decimal
BCD
00000000
00000001
00000010
00000011
00000100
00000101
00000110
00000111
00001000
00001001
00010000
00010001
00010010
00010011
00010100
00010101
00010110
00010111
00011000
00011001
00100000
00100001
00100010
00100011
00100100
00100101
00100110
00100111
00101000
00101001
00110000
00110001
00110010
Hex
Binary
00000000
00000001
00000010
00000011
00000100
00000101
00000110
00000111
00001000
00001001
00001010
00001011
00001100
00001101
00001110
00001111
00010000
00010001
00010010
00010011
00010100
00010101
00010110
00010111
00011000
00011001
00011010
00011011
00011100
00011101
00011110
00011111
00100000
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
473
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Conversion Tables
Appendix H
Signed Binary Data
Decimal
16-bit Hex
–––
32-bit Hex
2147483647
2147483646
.
7FFFFFFF
7FFFFFFE
–––
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
32768
–––
00008000
32767
32766
7FFF
7FFE
00007FFF
00007FFE
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5
4
3
2
1
0005
0004
0003
0002
0001
0000
FFFF
FFFE
FFFD
FFFC
FFFB
00000005
00000004
00000003
00000002
00000001
00000000
FFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFE
FFFFFFFD
FFFFFFFC
FFFFFFFB
0
–1
–2
–3
–4
–5
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
–32767
–32768
–32769
8001
8000
–––
FFFF8001
FFFF8000
FFFF7FFF
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
–2147483647
–2147483648
–––
–––
80000001
80000000
474
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix I
Extended ASCII
Programming Console Displays
Bits 0 to 3
BIN
Bits 4 to 7
0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111
HEX
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A
B
C
D
E
F
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE
Space
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
‘
p
q
r
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
P
‘
p
q
r
SOH DC
STX DC
ETX DC
EOT DC
!
a
b
c
d
e
f
!
A
B
C
D
E
F
Q
R
S
a
b
c
d
e
f
1
2
3
4
”
#
$
%
&
’
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
s
t
T
U
V
t
ENQ NAK
ACK SYN
BEL ETB
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
G
H
I
g
h
i
G
H
I
W
X
Y
Z
[
g
h
i
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
S0
S1
CAN
EM
(
(
)
)
SUB
ESC
FS
*
+
,
J
j
*
+
,
J
j
;
K
L
M
N
O
k
l
;
K
L
M
N
O
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
<
=
>
?
\
GS
-
]
m
n
o
}
«
~
-
]
m
n
o
}
RS
.
^
.
^
US
/
_
/
_
~
475
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
address
The location in memory where data is stored. For data areas, an address con-
sists of a two-letter data area designation and a number that designates the
word and/or bit location. For the UM area, an address designates the instruction
location (UM area). In the FM area, the address designates the block location,
etc.
allocation
AND
The process by which the PC assigns certain bits or words in memory for various
functions. This includes pairing I/O bits to I/O points on Units.
A logic operation whereby the result is true if and only if both premises are true.
In ladder-diagram programming the premises are usually ON/OFF states of bits
or the logical combination of such states called execution conditions.
APF
Acronym for all plastic fiber-optic cable.
AR area
arithmetic shift
ASCII
A PC data area allocated to flags, control bits, and work bits.
A shift operation wherein the carry flag is included in the shift.
Short for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is used to
code characters for output to printers and other external devices.
ASCII Unit
Backplane
An Intelligent I/O Unit used to program in BASIC. When connected to an NSU on
a Net Link System, commands can be sent to other nodes.
A base onto which Units are mounted to form a Rack. Backplanes provide a se-
ries of connectors for these Units along with wiring to connect them to the CPU.
Backplanes also provide connectors used to connect them to other Backplanes.
In some Systems, different Backplanes are used for different Racks; in other
Systems, Racks differ only according to the Units mounted to them.
BCD
Short for binary-coded decimal.
BCD calculation
An arithmetic calculation that uses numbers expressed in binary-coded deci-
mal.
binary
A number system where all numbers are expressed to the base 2, i.e., any num-
ber can be written using only 1’s or 2’s. Each group of four binary bits is equiva-
lent to one hexadecimal digit.
binary calculation
An arithmetic calculation that uses numbers expressed in binary.
binary-coded decimal
A system used to represent numbers so that each group of four binary bits is
numerically equivalent to one decimal digit.
bit
A binary digit; hence a unit of data in binary notation. The smallest unit of infor-
mation that can be electronically stored in a PC. The status of a bit is either ON or
OFF. Different bits at particular addresses are allocated to special purposes,
such as holding the status input from external devices, while other bits are avail-
able for general use in programming.
bit address
The location in memory where a bit of data is stored. A bit address must specify
(sometimes by default) the data area and word that is being addressed, as well
as the number of the bit.
477
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
bit designator
bit number
An operand that is used to designate the bit or bits of a word to be used by an
instruction.
A number that indicates the location of a bit within a word. Bit 00 is the rightmost
(least-significant) bit; bit 15 is the leftmost (most-significant) bit.
buffer
A temporary storage space for data in a computerized device.
building-block PC
A PC that is constructed from individual components, or “building blocks”. With
building-block PCs, there is no one Unit that is independently identifiable as a
PC. The PC is rather a functional assembly of components.
bus bar
The line leading down the left and sometimes right side of a ladder diagram. In-
struction execution proceeds down the bus bar, which is the starting point for all
instruction lines.
call
A process by which instruction execution shifts from the main program to a sub-
routine. The subroutine may be called by an instruction or by an interrupt.
carry flag
A flag that is used with arithmetic operations to hold a carry from an addition or
multiplication operation, or to indicate that the result is negative in a subtraction
operation. The carry flag is also used with certain types of shift operations.
clock pulse
A pulse available at a certain bit in memory for use in timing operations. Various
clock pulses are available with different pulse widths.
clock pulse bit
A bit in memory that supplies a pulse that can be used to time operations. Vari-
ous clock pulse bits are available with different pulse widths, and therefore differ-
ent frequencies.
common data
condition
Data that is stored in the LR Area of a PC and which is shared by other PCs in the
same the same system. Each PC has a specified section of the LR Area allo-
cated to it. This allocation is the same in each LR Area of each PC.
An message placed in an instruction line to direct the way in which the terminal
instructions, on the right side, are to be executed. Each condition is assigned to a
bit in memory that determines its status. The status of the bit assigned to each
condition determines, in turn, the execution condition for each instruction up to a
terminal instruction on the right side of the ladder diagram.
constant
An operand for which the actual numeric value is specified by the user, and
which is then stored in a particular address in the data memory.
control bit
A bit in a memory area that is set either through the program or via a Program-
ming Device to achieve a specific purpose, e.g., a Restart bit is turned ON and
OFF to restart a Unit.
Control System
All of the hardware and software components used to control other devices. A
Control System includes the PC System, the PC programs, and all I/O devices
that are used to control or obtain feedback from the controlled system.
controlled system
control signal
counter
The devices that are being controlled by a PC System.
A signal sent from the PC to effect the operation of the controlled system.
A dedicated group of digits or words in memory used to count the number of
times a specific process has occurred, or a location in memory accessed
478
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
through a TC bit and used to count the number of times the status of a bit or an
execution condition has changed from OFF to ON.
CPU
An acronym for central processing unit. In a PC System, the CPU executes the
program, processes I/O signals, communicates with external devices, etc.
CPU Backplane
CPU Rack
A Backplane which is used to create a CPU Rack.
Part of a building-block PC, the CPU Rack contains the CPU, a power supply,
and other Units. With most PCs, the CPU Rack is the only Rack that provides
linkable slots.
CTS
An acronym for clear-to-send, a signal used in communications between elec-
tronic devices to indicate that the receiver is ready to accept incoming data.
cycle
The process used to execute a ladder-diagram program. The program is ex-
amined sequentially from start to finish and each instruction is executed in turn
based on execution conditions.
cycle time
data area
The time required for a single cycle of the ladder-diagram program.
An area in the PC’s memory that is designed to hold a specific type of data, e.g.,
the LR area is designed to hold common data in a PC Link System. Memory
areas that hold programs are not considered data areas.
data area boundary
data sharing
debug
The highest address available within a data area. When designating an operand
that requires multiple words, it is necessary to ensure that the highest address in
the data area is not exceeded.
An aspect of PC Link Systems and of Data Links in Net Link Systems in which
common data areas or common data words are created between two or more
PCs.
A process by which a draft program is corrected until it operates as intended.
Debugging includes both the removal of syntax errors, as well as the fine-tuning
of timing and coordination of control operations.
decimal
A number system where all numbers are expressed to the base 10. In a PC all
data is ultimately stored in binary form, four binary bits are often used to repre-
sent one decimal digit, via a system called binary-coded decimal.
decrement
default
Decreasing a numeric value.
A value automatically set by the PC when the user omits to set a specific value.
Many devices will assume such default conditions upon the application of power.
definer
A number used as an operand for an instruction but that serves to define the in-
struction itself, rather that the data on which the instruction is to operate. Defin-
ers include jump numbers, subroutine numbers, etc.
delay
In tracing, a value that specifies where tracing is to begin in relationship to the
trigger. A delay can be either positive or negative, i.e., can designate an offset on
either side of the trigger.
destination
The location where an instruction is to place the data on which it is operating, as
opposed to the location from which data is taken for use in the instruction. The
location from which data is taken is called the source.
479
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
differentiated instruction
differentiation instruction
An instruction that is executed only once each time its execution condition goes
from OFF to ON. Nondifferentiated instructions are executed each cycle as long
as the execution condition stays ON.
An instruction used to ensure that the operand bit is never turned ON for more
than one cycle after the execution condition goes either from OFF to ON for a
Differentiate Up instruction or from ON to OFF for a Differentiate Down instruc-
tion.
digit
A unit of storage in memory that consists of four bits.
digit designator
An operand that is used to designate the digit or digits of a word to be used by an
instruction.
distributed control
An automation concept in which control of each portion of an automated system
is located near the devices actually being controlled, i.e., control is decentralized
and ‘distributed’ over the system. Distributed control is one of the fundamental
concepts of PC Systems.
DM area
A data area used to hold only word data. Words in the DM area cannot be ac-
cessed bit by bit.
download
The process of transferring a program or data from a higher-level computer to a
lower-level computer or PC.
electrical noise
error code
Random variations of one or more electrical characteristics such as voltage, cur-
rent, and data, which might interfere with the normal operation of a device.
A numeric code generated to indicate that an error exists, and something about
the nature of the error. Some error codes are generated by the system; others
are defined in the program by the operator.
exclusive OR
A logic operation whereby the result is true if one, and only one, of the premises
is true. In ladder-diagram programming the premises are usually the ON/OFF
states of bits, or the logical combination of such states, called execution condi-
tions.
exclusive NOR
A logic operation whereby the result is true if both of the premises are true or both
of the premises are false. In ladder-diagram programming the premises are usu-
ally the ON/OFF states of bits, or the logical combination of such states, called
execution conditions.
exection condition
execution time
The ON or OFF status under which an instruction is executed. The execution
condition is determined by the logical combination of conditions on the same in-
struction line and up to the instruction currently being executed.
The time required for the CPU to execute either an individual instruction or an
entire program.
Expansion I/O Backplane
Expansion I/O Rack
A Backplane which is used to create an Expansion I/O Rack.
Part of a building-block PC, an Expansion I/O Rack is connected to either a CPU
Rack or another Expansion I/O Rack to increase the number of slots available
for mounting Units.
extended counter
A counter created in a program by using two or more count instructions in suc-
cession. Such a counter is capable of counting higher than any of the standard
counters provided by the individual instructions.
480
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
extended timer
A timer created in a program by using two or more timers in succession. Such a
timer is capable of timing longer than any of the standard timers provided by the
individual instructions.
Factory Intelligent Terminal A programming device provided with advanced programming and debugging
capabilities to facilitate PC operation. The Factory Intelligent Terminal also pro-
vides various interfaces for external devices, such as floppy disk drives.
fatal error
An error that stops PC operation and requires correction before operation can
continue.
FIT
Abbreviation for Factory Intelligent Terminal.
flag
A dedicated bit in memory that is set by the system to indicate some type of oper-
ating status. Some flags, such as the carry flag, can also be set by the operator
or via the program.
flicker bit
A bit that is programmed to turn ON and OFF at a specific frequency.
floating point decimal
A decimal number expressed as a number between 0 and 1 (the mantissa) multi-
plied by a power of 10, e.g., 0.538 x 10 .
-5
Floppy Disk Interface Unit
force reset
A Unit used to interface a floppy disk drive to a PC so that programs and/or data
can be stored on floppy disks.
The process of forcibly turning OFF a bit via a programming device. Bits are usu-
ally turned OFF as a result of program execution.
force set
The process of forcibly turning ON a bit via a programming device. Bits are usu-
ally turned ON as a result of program execution.
function code
hardware error
A two-digit number used to input an instruction into the PC.
An error originating in the hardware structure (electronic components) of the PC,
as opposed to a software error, which originates in software (i.e., programs).
hexadecimal
A number system where all numbers are expressed to the base 16. In a PC all
data is ultimately stored in binary form, however, displays and inputs on Pro-
gramming Devices are often expressed in hexadecimal to simplify operation.
Each group of four binary bits is numerically equivalent to one hexadecimal digit.
Host Link System
A system with one or more host computers connected to one or more PCs via
Host Link Units so that the host computer can be used to transfer data to and
from the PC(s). Host Link Systems enable centralized management and control
of PC Systems.
Host Link Unit
host computer
An interface used to connect a PC to a host computer in a Host Link System.
A computer that is used to transfer data or programs to from a PC in a Host Link
System. The host computer is used for data management and overall system
control. Host computers are generally personal or business computers.
HR area
A data area used to store and manipulate data, and to preserve data when pow-
er to the PC is turned OFF.
increment
Increasing a numeric value.
indirect address
An address whose contents indicates another address. The contents of the sec-
ond address will be used as the operand. Indirect addressing is possible in the
DM area only.
481
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
initialization error
initialize
An error that occurs either in hardware or software during the PC System star-
tup, i.e., during initialization.
Part of the startup process whereby some memory areas are cleared, system
setup is checked, and default values are set.
input
The signal coming from an external device into the PC. The term input is often
used abstractly or collectively to refer to incoming signals.
input bit
A bit in the IR area that is allocated to hold the status of an input.
An external device that sends signals into the PC System.
input device
input point
The point at which an input enters the PC System. Input points correspond phys-
ically to terminals or connector pins.
input signal
instruction
A change in the status of a connection entering the PC. Generally an input signal
is said to exist when, for example, a connection point goes from low to high volt-
age or from a nonconductive to a conductive state.
A direction given in the program that tells the PC of an action to be carried out,
and which data is to be used in carrying out the action. Instructions can be used
to simply turn a bit ON or OFF, or they can perform much more complex actions,
such as converting and/or transferring large blocks of data.
instruction block
A group of instructions that is logically related in a ladder-diagram program. Al-
though any logically related group of instructions could be called an instruction
block, the term is generally used to refer to blocks of instructions called logic
blocks that require logic block instructions to relate them to other instructions or
logic blocks.
instruction execution time
instruction line
The time required to execute an instruction. The execution time for any one in-
struction can vary with the execution conditions for the instruction and the oper-
ands used within it.
A group of conditions that lie together on the same horizontal line of a ladder dia-
gram. Instruction lines can branch apart or join together to form instruction
blocks.
interface
An interface is the conceptual boundary between systems or devices and usual-
ly involves changes in the way the communicated data is represented. Interface
devices such as NSBs perform operations like changing the coding, format, or
speed of the data.
interlock
A programming method used to treat a number of instructions as a group so that
the entire group can be reset together when individual execution is not required.
An interlocked program section is executed normally for an ON execution condi-
tion and partially reset for an OFF execution condition.
interrupt (signal)
Interrupt Input Unit
inverse condition
A signal that stops normal program execution and causes a subroutine to be run.
A Rack-mounting Unit used to input external interrupts into a PC System.
A condition that produces an ON execution condition when the bit assigned to it
is OFF, and an OFF execution condition when the bit assigned to it is ON.
I/O capacity
The number of inputs and outputs that a PC is able to handle. This number
ranges from around one hundred for smaller PCs to two thousand for the largest
ones.
482
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
I/O Control Unit
I/O devices
A Unit mounted to the CPU Rack in certain PCs to monitor and control I/O points
on Expansion I/O Units.
The devices to which terminals on I/O Units, Special I/O Units, or Intelligent I/O
Units are connected. I/O devices may be either part of the Control System, if they
function to help control other devices, or they may be part of the controlled sys-
tem.
I/O Interface Unit
I/O Link
A Unit mounted to an Expansion I/O Rack in certain PCs to interface the Expan-
sion I/O Rack to the CPU Rack.
Created in an Optical Remote I/O System to enable input/output of one or two IR
words directly between PCs. The words are input/output between the PC con-
trolling the Master and a PC connected to the Remote I/O System through an I/O
Link Unit or an I/O Link Rack.
I/O Link Unit
I/O point
A Unit used with certain PCs to create an I/O Link in an Optical Remote I/O Sys-
tem.
The place at which an input signal enters the PC System, or at which an output
signal leaves the PC System. In physical terms, I/O points correspond to termi-
nals or connector pins on a Unit; in terms of programming, an I/O points corre-
spond to I/O bits in the IR area.
I/O response time
I/O table
The time required for an output signal to be sent from the PC in response to an
input signal received from an external device.
A table created within the memory of the PC that lists the IR area words allocated
to each Unit in the PC System. The I/O table can be created by, or modified from,
a Programming Device.
I/O Unit
The most basic type of Unit mounted to a backplane to create a Rack. I/O Units
include Input Units and Output Units, each of which is available in a range of
specifications. I/O Units do not include Special I/O Units, Link Units, etc.
I/O word
IR area
A word in the IR area that is allocated to a Unit in the PC System.
A data area whose principal function is to hold the status of inputs coming into
the system and that of outputs that are to be set out of the system. Bits and words
in the IR that are used this way are called I/O bits and I/O words. The remaining
bits in the IR area are work bits.
JIS
Acronym for Japanese Industrial Standards.
jump
A type of programming where execution moves directly from one point in a pro-
gram to another, without sequentially executing any instructions inbetween.
Jumps are usually conditional on an execution condition.
jump number
A definer used with a jump that defines the points from and to which a jump is to
be made.
ladder diagram (program)
A form of program arising out of relay-based control systems that uses cir-
cuit-type diagrams to represent the logic flow of programming instructions. The
appearance of the program is similar to a ladder, and thus the name.
ladder diagram symbol
ladder instruction
A symbol used in a ladder-diagram program.
An instruction that represents the ‘rung’ portion of a ladder-diagram program.
The other instructions in a ladder diagram fall along the right side of the diagram
and are called terminal instructions.
483
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Ladder Support Software
A software package that provides most of the functions of the Factory Intelligent
Terminal on an IBM AT, IBM XT, or compatible computer.
LAN
An acronym for local area network.
leftmost (bit/word)
The highest numbered bits of a group of bits, generally of an entire word, or the
highest numbered words of a group of words. These bits/words are often called
most-significant bits/words.
Link Adapter
link
A Unit used to connect communications lines, either to branch the lines or to con-
vert between different types of cable. There are two types of Link Adapter:
Branching Link Adapters and Converting Link Adapters.
A hardware or software connection formed between two Units. “Link” can refer
either to a part of the physical connection between two Units (e.g., optical links in
Wired Remote I/O Systems) or a software connection created to data existing at
another location (Network Data Links).
linkable slot
Link System
Link Unit
load
A slot on either a CPU or Expansion I/O Backplane to which a Link Unit can be
mounted. Backplanes differ in the slots to which Link Units can be mounted.
A system that includes one or more of the following systems: Remote I/O Sys-
tem, PC Link System, Host Link System, or Net Link System.
Any of the Units used to connect a PC to a Link System. These are Remote I/O
Units, I/O Link Units, PC Link Units, Host Link Units, and Net Link Units.
The processes of copying data either from an external device or from a storage
area to an active portion of the system such as a display buffer. Also, an output
device connected to the PC is called a load.
local area network
logic block
A network consisting of nodes or positions in a loop arrangement. Each node
can be any one of a number of devices, which can transfer data to and from each
other.
A group of instructions that is logically related in a ladder-diagram program and
that requires logic block instructions to relate it to other instructions or logic
blocks.
logic block instruction
An instruction used to locally combine the execution condition resulting from a
logic block with a current execution condition. The current execution condition
could be the result of a single condition, or of another logic block. AND Load and
OR Load are the two logic block instructions.
logic instruction
Instructions used to logically combine the content of two words and output the
logical results to a specified result word. The logic instructions combine all the
same-numbered bits in the two words and output the result to the bit of the same
number in the specified result word.
loop
A group of instructions that can be executed more than once in succession (i.e.,
repeated) depending on an execution condition or bit status.
LR area
A data area that is used in a PC Link System so that data can be transferred be-
tween two or more PCs. If a PC Link System is not used, the LR area is available
for use as work bits.
LSS
Abbreviation for Ladder Support Software.
484
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
main program
masking
All of a program except for the subroutines.
‘Covering’ an interrupt signal so that the interrupt is not effective until the mask is
removed.
Master
Short for Remote I/O Master Unit.
memory area
mnemonic code
Any of the areas in the PC used to hold data or programs.
A form of a ladder-diagram program that consists of a sequential list of the in-
structions without using a ladder diagram. Mnemonic code is required to input a
program into a PC when using a Programming Console.
MONITOR mode
A mode of PC operation in which normal program execution is possible, and
which allows modification of data held in memory. Used for monitoring or debug-
ging the PC.
most-significant (bit/word)
NC input
See leftmost (bit/word).
An input that is normally closed, i.e., the input signal is considered to be present
when the circuit connected to the input opens.
nest
Programming one loop within another loop, programming a call to a subroutine
within another subroutine, or programming an IF-ELSE programming section
within another IF-ELSE section.
Net Link System
An optical LAN formed from PCs connected through Net Link Units. A Net Link
System also normally contains nodes interfacing computers and other periph-
eral devices. PCs in the Net Link System can pass data back and forth, receive
commands from any interfaced computer, and share any interfaced peripheral
device.
Net Link Unit
The Unit used to connect PCs to a Net Link System. The full name is “SYSMAC
Net Link Unit”.
Network Service Board
Network Service Unit
node
A device with an interface to connect devices other than PCs to a Net Link Sys-
tem.
A Unit that provides two interfaces to connect peripheral devices to a Net Link
System.
One of the positions in a LAN. Each node incorporates a device that can commu-
nicate with the devices at all of the other nodes. The device at a node is identified
by the node number. One loop of a Net Link System (OMRON’s LAN) can consist
of up to 126 nodes. Each node is occupied by a Net Link Unit mounted to a PC or
a device providing an interface to a computer or other peripheral device.
NO input
An input that is normally open, i.e., the input signal is considered to be present
when the circuit connected to the input closes.
noise interference
nonfatal error
Disturbances in signals caused by electrical noise.
A hardware or software error that produces a warning but does not stop the PC
from operating.
normal condition
A condition that produces an ON execution condition when the bit assigned to it
is ON, and an OFF execution condition when the bit assigned to it is OFF.
485
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
NOT
A logic operation which inverts the status of the operand. For example, AND
NOT indicates an AND operation with the opposite of the actual status of the op-
erand bit.
NSB
NSU
OFF
An acronym for Network Service Board.
An acronym for Network Service Unit.
The status of an input or output when a signal is said not to be present. The OFF
state is generally represented by a low voltage or by non-conductivity, but can be
defined as the opposite of either.
OFF delay
ON
The delay between the time when a signal is switched OFF (e.g., by an input
device or PC) and the time when the signal reaches a state readable as an OFF
signal (i.e., as no signal) by a receiving party (e.g., output device or PC).
The status of an input or output when a signal is said to be present. The ON state
is generally represented by a high voltage or by conductivity, but can be defined
as the opposite of either.
ON delay
The delay between the time when an ON signal is initiated (e.g., by an input de-
vice or PC) and the time when the signal reaches a state readable as an ON sig-
nal by a receiving party (e.g., output device or PC).
one-shot bit
on-line removal
operand
A bit that is turned ON or OFF for a specified interval of time which is longer than
one cycle.
Removing a Rack-mounted Unit for replacement or maintenance during PC op-
eration.
Bit(s) or word(s) designated as the data to be used for an instruction. An operand
can be input as a constant expressing the actual numeric value to be used or as
an address to express the location in memory of the data to be used.
operand bit
A bit designated as an operand for an instruction.
A word designated as an operand for an instruction.
operand word
operating error
An error that occurs during actual PC operation as opposed to an initialization
error, which occurs before actual operations can begin.
Optical I/O Unit
A Unit that is connected in an Optical Remote I/O System to provide 8 I/O points.
Optical I/O Units are not mounted to a Rack.
Optical Slave Rack
OR
A Slave Rack connected through an Optical Remote I/O Slave Unit.
A logic operation whereby the result is true if either of two premises is true, or if
both are true. In ladder-diagram programming the premises are usually ON/OFF
states of bits or the logical combination of such states called execution condi-
tions.
output
The signal sent from the PC to an external device. The term output is often used
abstractly or collectively to refer to outgoing signals.
output bit
A bit in the IR area that is allocated to hold the status to be sent to an output de-
vice.
output device
An external device that receives signals from the PC System.
486
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
output point
output signal
The point at which an output leaves the PC System. Output points correspond
physically to terminals or connector pins.
A signal being sent to an external device. Generally an output signal is said to
exist when, for example, a connection point goes from low to high voltage or from
a nonconductive to a conductive state.
overseeing
Part of the processing performed by the CPU that includes general tasks re-
quired to operate the PC.
overwrite
parity
Changing the content of a memory location so that the previous content is lost.
Adjustment of the number of ON bits in a word or other unit of data so that the
total is always an even number or always an odd number. Parity is generally
used to check the accuracy of data after being transmitted by confirming that the
number of ON bits is still even or still odd.
PC
An acronym for Programmable Controller.
An acronym for printed circuit board.
PCB
PC configuration
The arrangement and interconnections of the Units that are put together to form
a functional PC.
PCF
Acronym for plastic-clad optical fiber cable.
PC Link System
A system in which PCs are connected through PC Link Units to enable them to
share common data areas, i.e., each of the PCs writes to certain words in the LR
area and receives the data of the words written by all other PC Link Units con-
nected in series with it.
PC Link Unit
PC System
The Unit used to connect PCs in a PC Link System.
With building-block PCs, all of the Racks and independent Units connected di-
rectly to them up to, but not including the I/O devices. The boundaries of a PC
System are the PC and the program in its CPU at the upper end; and the I/O
Units, Special I/O Units, Optical I/O Units, Remote Terminals, etc., at the lower
end.
peripheral device
port
Devices connected to a PC System to aid in system operation. Peripheral de-
vices include printers, programming devices, external storage media, etc.
A connector on a PC or computer that serves as a connection to an external de-
vice.
present value
The current value registered in a device at any instant during its operation. Pres-
ent value is abbreviated as PV.
printed circuit board
Printer Interface Unit
program
A board onto which electrical circuits are printed for mounting into a computer or
electrical device.
A Unit used to interface a printer so that ladder diagrams and other data can be
printed out.
The list of instructions that tells the PC the sequence of control actions to be car-
ried out.
Programmable Controller
A computerized device that can accept inputs from external devices and gener-
ate outputs to external devices according to a program held in memory. Pro-
487
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
grammable Controllers are used to automate control of external devices. Al-
though single-component Programmable Controllers are available, build-
ing-block Programmable Controllers are constructed from separate compo-
nents. Such building-block Programmable Controllers are formed only when
enough of these separate components are assembled to form a functional as-
sembly, i.e., no one individual Unit is called a PC.
programmed alarm
programmed error
An alarm given as a result of execution of an instruction designed to generate the
alarm in the program, as opposed to one generated by the system.
An error arising as a result of the execution of an instruction designed to gener-
ate the error in the program, as opposed to one generated by the system.
programmed message
Programming Console
A message generated as a result of execution of an instruction designed to gen-
erate the message in the program, as opposed to one generated by the system.
The simplest form or programming device available for a PC. Programming
Consoles are available both as hand-held models and as CPU-mounting mod-
els.
Programming Device
A peripheral device used to input a program into a PC or to alter or monitor a
program already held in the PC. There are dedicated programming devices,
such as Programming Consoles, and there are non-dedicated devices, such as
a host computer.
PROGRAM mode
PROM Writer
prompt
A mode of operation that allows inputting and debugging of programs to be car-
ried out, but that does not permit normal execution of the program.
A peripheral device used to write programs and other data into a ROM for per-
manent storage and application.
A message or symbol that appears on a display to request input from the opera-
tor.
PV
Acronym for present value.
Rack
An assembly of various Units on a Backplane that forms a functional unit in a
building-block PC System. Racks include CPU Racks, Expansion I/O Racks, I/O
Racks, and Slave Racks.
refresh
The process of updating output status sent to external devices so that it agrees
with the status of output bits held in memory and of updating input bits in memory
so that they agree with the status of inputs from external devices.
relay-based control
Remote I/O Master Unit
The forerunner of PCs. In relay-based control, groups of relays are intercon-
nected to form control circuits. In a PC, these are replaced by programmable cir-
cuits.
The Unit in a Remote I/O System through which signals are sent to all other Re-
mote I/O Units. The Remote I/O Master Unit is mounted either to a CPU Rack or
an Expansion I/O Rack connected to the CPU Rack. Remote I/O Master Unit is
generally abbreviated to Master.
Remote I/O Slave Unit
Remote I/O System
A Unit mounted to a Backplane to form a Slave Rack. Remote I/O Slave Unit is
generally abbreviated to Slave.
A system in which remote I/O points are controlled through a Master mounted to
a CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack connected to the CPU Rack.
488
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Remote I/O Unit
Any of the Units in a Remote I/O System. Remote I/O Units include Masters,
Slaves, Optical I/O Units, I/O Link Units, and Remote Terminals.
remote I/O word
reset
An I/O word allocated to a Unit in a Remote I/O System.
The process of turning a bit or signal OFF or of changing the present value of a
timer or counter to its set value or to zero.
return
The process by which instruction execution shifts from a subroutine back to the
main program (usually the point from which the subroutine was called).
reversible counter
reversible shift register
A counter that can be both incremented and decremented depending on the
specified conditions.
A shift register that can shift data in either direction depending on the specified
conditions.
right-hand instruction
rightmost (bit/word)
Another term for terminal instruction.
The lowest numbered bits of a group of bits, generally of an entire word, or the
lowest numbered words of a group of words. These bits/words are often called
least-significant bits/words.
rotate register
A shift register in which the data moved out from one end is placed back into the
shift register at the other end.
RUN mode
The operating mode used by the PC for normal control operations.
scheduled interrupt
An interrupt that is automatically generated by the system at a specific time or
program location specified by the operator. Scheduled interrupts result in the ex-
ecution of specific subroutines that can be used for instructions that must be ex-
ecuted repeatedly for a specified period of time.
self diagnosis
self-maintaining bit
servicing
A process whereby the system checks its own operation and generates a warn-
ing or error if an abnormality is discovered.
A bit that is programmed to maintain either an OFF or ON status until set or reset
by specified conditions.
The process whereby the PC provides data to or receives data from external de-
vices or remote I/O Units, or otherwise handles data transactions for Link Sys-
tems.
set
The process of turning a bit or signal ON.
set value
The value from which a decrementing counter starts counting down or to which
an incrementing counter counts up (i.e., the maximum count), or the time from
which or for which a timer starts timing. Set value is abbreviated SV.
shift register
One or more words in which data is shifted a specified number of units to the right
or left in bit, digit, or word units. In a rotate register, data shifted out one end is
shifted back into the other end. In other shift registers, new data (either specified
data, zero(s) or one(s)) is shifted into one end and the data shifted out at the oth-
er end is lost.
Slave
Short for Remote I/O Slave Unit.
Slave Rack
A Rack containing a Remote I/O Slave Unit and controlled through a Remote I/O
Master Unit. Slave Racks are generally located away from the CPU Rack.
489
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
slot
A position on a Rack (Backplane) to which a Unit can be mounted.
An error that originates in a software program.
software error
software protect
A means of protecting data from being changed that uses software as opposed
to a physical switch or other hardware setting.
source
The location from which data is taken for use in an instruction, as opposed to the
location to which the result of an instruction is to be written. The latter is called
the destination.
Special I/O Unit
SR area
A dedicated Unit that is designed for a specific purpose. Special I/O Units in-
clude Position Control Units, High-Speed Counter Units, Analog I/O Units, etc.
A data area in a PC used mainly for flags, control bits, and other information pro-
vided about PC operation. The status of only certain SR bits may be controlled
by the operator, i.e., most SR bits can only be read.
SSS
Abbreviation for SYSMAC Support Software.
subroutine
A group of instructions placed after the main program and executed only if called
from the main program or activated by an interrupt.
subroutine number
A definer used to identify the subroutine that a subroutine call or interrupt acti-
vates.
SV
Abbreviation for set value.
switching capacity
syntax error
The maximum voltage/current that a relay can safely switch on and off.
An error in the way in which a program is written. Syntax errors can include
‘spelling’ mistakes (i.e., a function code that does not exist), mistakes in specify-
ing operands within acceptable parameters (e.g., specifying reserved SR bits as
a destination), and mistakes in actual application of instructions (e.g., a call to a
subroutine that does not exist).
SYSMAC Support Software
A software package installed on a IBM PC/AT or compatible computer to func-
tion as a Programming Device.
system configuration
system error
The arrangement in which Units in a system are connected.
An error generated by the system, as opposed to one resulting from execution of
an instruction designed to generate an error.
system error message
TC area
An error message generated by the system, as opposed to one resulting from
execution of an instruction designed to generate a message.
A data area that can be used only for timers and counters. Each bit in the TC area
serves as the access point for the SV, PV, and Completion flag for the timer or
counter defined with that bit.
TC number
A definer that corresponds to a bit in the TC area and used to define the bit as
either a timer or a counter.
terminal instruction
terminator
An instruction placed on the right side of a ladder diagram that uses the final ex-
ecution conditions of an instruction line.
The code comprising an asterisk and a carriage return (* CR) which indicates the
end of a block of data, whether it is a single-frame or multi-frame block. Frames
within a multi-frame block are separated by delimiters.
490
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
timer
A location in memory accessed through a TC bit and used to time down from the
timer’s set value. Timers are turned ON and reset according to their execution
conditions.
TM area
A memory area used to store the results of a trace.
The distance that a signal can be transmitted.
transmission distance
TR area
A data area used to store execution conditions so that they can be reloaded later
for use with other instructions.
trace
An operation whereby the program is executed and the resulting data is stored in
TM memory to enable step-by-step analysis and debugging.
transfer
The process of moving data from one location to another within the PC, or be-
tween the PC and external devices. When data is transferred, generally a copy
of the data is sent to the destination, i.e., the content of the source of the transfer
is not changed.
trigger address
An address in the program that defines the beginning point for tracing. The ac-
tual beginning point can be altered from the trigger by defining either a positive or
negative delay.
UM area
Unit
The memory area used to hold the active program, i.e., the program that is being
currently executed.
In OMRON PC terminology, the word Unit is capitalized to indicate any product
sold for a PC System. Though most of the names of these products end with the
word Unit, not all do, e.g., a Remote Terminal is referred to in a collective sense
as a Unit. Context generally makes any limitations of this word clear.
unit number
A number assigned to some Link Units and Special I/O Units to facilitate identifi-
cation when assigning words or other operating parameters to it.
watchdog timer
A timer within the system that ensures that the cycle time stays within specified
limits. When limits are reached, either warnings are given or PC operation is
stopped depending on the particular limit that is reached.
Wired Slave Rack
word
A Slave Rack connected through a Wired Remote I/O Slave Unit.
A unit of data storage in memory that consists of 16 bits. All data areas consists
of words. Some data areas can be accessed only by words; others, by either
words or bits.
word address
The location in memory where a word of data is stored. A word address must
specify (sometimes by default) the data area and the number of the word that is
being addressed.
word multiplier
A value between 0 and 3 that is assigned to a Master in a Remote I/O System so
that words can be allocated to non-Rack-mounting Units within the System. The
word setting made on the Unit is added to 32 times the word multiplier to arrive at
the actual word to be allocated.
work bit
A bit in a work word.
work word
A word that can be used for data calculation or other manipulation in program-
ming, i.e., a ‘work space’ in memory. A large portion of the IR area is always re-
491
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
served for work words. Parts of other areas not required for special purposes
may also be used as work words, e.g., LR words not used in a PC Link or Net Link
System.
492
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W235-E1-05
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision
code
Date
Revised content
1
2
January 1994
August 1994
Original production
Host Link Commands have been added as Section 10.
Page 5: Available manuals table undated.
Page 16: Paragraph and table added at top of page.
Page 17: New CPU models and indicators graphics added.
Page 19: New C200H CPU capabilities table added.
Page 20: New C200HS CPU capabilities table added.
Pages 31, 381: Functions redefined for SR 264 and SR 265.
Page 34: New information added to SR Area table.
Bits table corrected.
Page 52: 3-5-7 SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link System Service Time (CPU31-E/33-E)
added.
Page 125: Commands SEND(90) and RECV(98) added to tables.
Page 329: SEND(90) and RECV(98) added to tables.
Page 359: New CPU models added.
Page 363: SYSMAC NET Link and SYSMAC LINK models added.
Page 366: SYSMAC NET Link and SYSMAC LINK optical fiber product information added.
Appendix B : Information added to Instructions table.
Appendix C : Information added to Instructions table.
Appendix D : Information added to SR and AR Memory tables.
493
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History
Revision
code
Date
Revised content
2A
April 1995
The following instructions have been corrected: ASFT(––) to ASFT(17), XFRB(––) to XFRB(62),
MCMP(––) to MCMP(19), CMPL(––) to CMPL(60), BCMP(––) to BCMP(68), ZCP(––) to ZCP(88),
SEC(––) to SEC(65), HMS(––) to HMS(66), LINE(––) to LINE(63), COLM(––) to COLM(64),
APR(––) to APR(69), INT(––) to INT(89), SCAN(––) to SCAN(18), LMSG(––) to LMSG(47),
TERM(––) to TERM(48), MPRF(––) to MPRF(61), and BCNT(––) to BCNT(67).
Page 7: Internal auxiliary relays Ι and ΙΙ areas renamed and corrected in Increased SR Area.
Page 17: CPU Indicators descriptions corrected.
Page 21: Note added after the table.
Page 23: Functions for pin 5 corrected.
Page 34: Function of bit 09 of word 252 corrected.
Pages 36, 37: Function of bits 08 to 10 of word 269 corrected. Functions of words , 267, 270,
271, 274, and 277 to 279 corrected. Words 298 to 299 added. SYSMAC NET/SYSMAC LINK
System added.
Page 43: RS-232C Port Communications Areas added.
Page 44: “UM” changed to “Ladder Diagram”.
Page 47: Restarting Special I/O Units added.
Page 57: Note added.
Page 83: “PC Unit” corrected to “Main Rack”.
Page 139: Last sentence in Limitations replaced.
Page 154: Note removed.
Page 170: “CB+32” corrected to “CB+31” in the description. The bits for the last five ranges in
the description corrected.
Page 179: Note removed.
Page 180: Note removed. Example corrected.
Pages 196, 197: Notes removed.
Page 240: The operation amount when the SV and PV match corrected from 50% to 0%.
Page 235: Note removed.
Page 241: Second graph corrected. “Step response” corrected to “Ramp response” for the
bottom graph.
Page 242: “Step response” corrected to “Ramp response” for the top graph. Second graph
corrected.
Page 249: “DM 6618” corrected to “DM 6622” in the diagram for Scheduled Interrupts.
Page 250: SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET servicing added to Normal Interrupt Mode (C200H
Compatible). Interrupt response time and Note 1 added to High-speed Interrupt Mode
(C200HS).
Page 271: Resetting Errors rewritten.
Page 275: Third paragraph in the description for 5-25-6 TERMINAL MODE – TERM(––) cor-
rected.
Page 277: Execution time for 5-25-9 GROUP-2 HIGH-DENSITY I/O REFRESH – MPRF(––)
corrected.
Page 282: Note c) corrected.
Pages 293 to 295: RS-232C port information added. Control word and flag information cor-
rected.
Page 297: Hardware rewritten.
Page 298: Text added to Timing. Timing chart corrected.
Page 301: Example corrected.
Pages 302, 304: Word names corrected in Using the Instruction.
Pages 302, 304, 306: Charts corrected in Using the Instruction.
Pages 312 to 317: 6-1 Cycle Time and 6-2 Calculating Cycle Time have been rewritten.
Pages 326 and 327: 6-4 I/O Response Time rewritten.
Page 353: AR area corrected to SR area. Table of corresponding keys added.
Page 355: Section 8 Communications added.
Page 364: Text added to possible correction for Memory Cassette Transfer Error.
Page 366: Text added to possible cause and correction for Too many Units. Communications
Errors added after the table.
Page 367: Error flags added to the table.
Pages 403 to 411: Standard models updated.
Page 423: Data for Special Relay Areas 1 and 2 corrected.
Pages 424 to 427: SR Area table updated to reflect SR Area table in Section 3 Memory
Areas.
Page 429: “DM 0000” corrected to “DM 6001” in DM Area (Error Log) table.
Page 432: RS-232C Port Settings added.
494
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History
Revision
code
Date
Revised content
2B
July 1995
The following corrections and additions were made.
Page 6: SYSMAC Support Software added and LSS removed.
Pages 23 and 374: Default communications parameters changed.
Page 26: I/O Terminals and B7A Interface Unit added and macro bits corrected.
Page 31: List of Units that don’t use slot words corrected.
Pages 32, 33, 34, 39, 43, 48, 50: Group-2 B7A Interface Units and I/O Terminals
added.
Page 39: Type of data stored in SR 25108 to SR 25115 corrected to BCD.
Page 44: Section added on Special Unit Error Flag
Pages 45, 46: Mode for SR 26408 to SR 26415 changed.
Page 48: Details added to first table.
Page 52: Heading shortened.
Page 120: Caution added.
Pages 215, 216: Limits for operands clarified/corrected.
Page 243: Caution added.
Pages 243, 244: Variable name changed for Y and corrected variable description.
Page 245: Bottom graphic and related description corrected.
Page 274: Explanation in last paragraph clarified.
Page 283: Execution time corrected for IORF(97).
Pages 299 to 301: CPU models specified in control word contents corrected.
Page 314: Graphic corrected.
Page 336: Description of Host Link Systems expanded.
Page 382: Last argument corrected in application example
Page 405: Top graphic corrected and “frame 2” changed to “frame 3” in second
graphic.
Page 461: Default added for DM 6610 and DM 6618.
Page 462: Settings for DM 6620 bits 00 to 09 and DM 6621 bit 08 to 15 corrected.
Page 463: Default for DM 6654 bits 00 to 07 changed.
2C
August 1996
The Precautions section was added after About this Manual.
Page 88: Special I/O Unit type “N” corrected from Host Link Unit to Position Control
Unit.
Page 110: Ladder diagram corrected for the self-maintaining bit example.
Page 158: ASFT(17) example changed.
Page 191: “Content of the source words is zero” corrected to “Content of a source
word is zero” for the ER Flags.
Page 226: DVB(53) example changed.
Page 280: “SR” added to the first source word of LMSG(47).
Page 395: “Possible correction” for “I/O bus error” corrected.
Page 430: “Command Format” corrected to “Response Format” for 11-3-36 Unde-
fined Command –– IC.
3
4
May 1999
April 2001
Page 245: Proportional operation diagram corrected.
Page 283: Note and execution time information in 5-25-8 I/O REFRESH – IORF(97)
corrected.
Page 321: C200H-PIDjj added to Special I/O Unit Refresh.
Page xv: Minor change made to precautionary information on mounting.
Page 23: Information on pin number 5 changed.
Pages 140, 144, 145: Information on SV settings added.
Pages 433, 434, 435: Information added to tables in several places.
05
February 2002
Page 177: Ladder symbol removed.
495
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
A
address tracing. See tracing, data tracing.
advanced I/O instructions
B
BCD
D
data
binary
bits
C
data retention
channel. See word
communications
decimal
converting display between 4-digit hex and decimal: sec7
converting display between 8-digit hex and decimal: sec7
control bit
counters
displays
497
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Programming Console, English/Japanese switch: 4–1 to
4–6 80
Frame Check Sequence. See frames, FCS
frames
dividing
Seealso hostlink
E
ER. See flag, Instruction Execution Error
errors
G
H
High-density I/O Units. See Group 2 High density I/O Units;
Units
host link
communications
Seealso hostlinkcommands
frame
F
host link commands
flag
CY
flags
498
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
I
I/O bit
I/O response time, one-to-one link communications: 6–4 on
I/O table
I/O Units. See Units
I/O word
input bit
499
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
J
K
L
ladder diagram
controlling bit status
5−1to5−14 131ć132
instructions
combining,ANDLDandORLD:
controllingbitstatus
4−1to4−6
Ladder Support Software. See peripheral devices
LEDs. See CPU indicators
Link Units
See also Units
instruction sets
logic block instructions, converting to mnemonic code: 4–1 to
4–6 71–77
logic blocks. See ladder diagram
instructions
LSS. See peripheral devices
M
500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
peripheral port, communications
present value. See PV
Memory Cassettes
Program Memory
programming
monitoring
N
simplification with differentiated instructions: 5–1 to 5–14
See also peripheral devices
PV
O
one-to-one link communications, I/O response timing: 6–4 on
R
output bit
RS-232C
communications
P
S
PC
set value. See SV
settings
PC Link Systems
501
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Special I/O Units. See Units
timers
stack operation
status indicators. See CPU indicators
tracing
SV
See also See data tracing and address tracing.
U
switches, DIP. See DIP switch
UM Area
SYSMAC LINK System
Units
SYSMAC NET Link System
T
W
502
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|